CA08100014E

155736-Catalog 155736-Catalog 155736-Catalog B5 unilog cesco-content

2016-10-06

: Pdf 90288-Attachment 90288-Attachment B5 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 621 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 12: Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions

Eaton is a registered trademark.

All other trademarks are property

of their respective owners.

Eaton

1000 Eaton Boulevard

Cleveland, OH 44122

United States

Eaton.com

Printed in USA

Publication No. CA08100014E / Z14331

October 2013

18741833 1886 1911 19141893 198319621961 1989198419771908190618991897 1963 19671934

The power of fusion.

There’s a certain energy at Eaton. It’s the power of uniting some of the

world’s most respected names to build a brand you can trust to meet

your every power management need.

Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efﬁ cient and safe power

is available when it’s needed most. Building on over 100 years of

experience in electrical power management, the experts at Eaton

deliver customized, integrated solutions to solve your most critical

challenges. To learn more, visit Eaton.com/Electrical

All of the above are trademarks of Eaton or its afliates. Eaton has a license to use the Westinghouse

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Contents

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Motor Control

Switchgear

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loadcenters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meter Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Busway (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IQ Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communication Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

High Resistance Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Medium Voltage Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sales & Service Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions

Appendix 2—Alphabetical Product Index

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used

for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request.

All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs

are representative of production units.

Terms and Conditions

All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur,

they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by

Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications

This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information

is available in the form of technical information publications and in illustrated brochures.

If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor,

call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities

or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes,

under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related

application in any nuclear facility licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

WARNING

The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the

U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent

to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards

could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.

These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for

every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.

Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that are not covered

sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products

Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior

or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire

obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties

is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or

modify the existing warranty.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com i

Introduction

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,

control and automation, and monitoring products.

At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every

successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly

skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.

In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built

on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer

service and support, we know what’s important to you.

Solutions

Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic

approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on

the following three areas in all we do:

●Reliability—maintain the

appropriate level of power

continuity without

disruption or unexpected

downtime

●Efficiency—minimize

energy usage, operating

costs, equipment footprint

and environmental impact

●Safety—identify and

mitigate electrical hazards

to protect what you value

most

Using the Eaton Catalog Library

As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive

catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our

products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work

in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,

for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:

●Volume 1—Residential

and Light Commercial

(CA08100002E)

●Volume 2—Commercial

Distribution (CA08100003E)

●Volume 3—Power

Distribution and Control

Assemblies (CA08100004E)

●Volume 4—Circuit

Protection (CA08100005E)

●Volume 5—Motor Control

and Protection

(CA08100006E)

●Volume 6—Solid-State

Motor Control

(CA08100007E)

●Volume 7—Logic Control,

Operator Interface and

Connectivity Solutions

(CA08100008E)

●Volume 8—Sensing

Solutions (CA08100010E)

●Volume 9—Original

Equipment Manufacturer

(CA08100011E)

●Volume 10—Enclosed

Control (CA08100012E)

●Volume 11—Vehicle and

Commercial Controls

(CA08100013E)

●Volume 12—Aftermarket,

Renewal Parts and Life

Extension Solutions

(CA08105001E)

●Volume 13—Counters,

Timers and Tachometers

(CA08100015E)—Available

in electronic format only

●Volume 14—Fuses

(CA08100016E)—Available

in electronic format only

●Volume 15—Solar Inverters

and Electrical Balance of

System (CA08100018E)

These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview

of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,

consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.

These references include:

●The Consulting Application

Guide (CA08104001E)

●The Eaton Power Quality

Product Guide (COR01FYA)

If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,

not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the

Literature Library.

By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent

version of each volume and tab.

ii Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Introduction

Icons

Green Leaf

Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton

benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our

promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering

exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers

and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are

designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to

protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation

further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.”

Learn Online

When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for

the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses,

podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.

Drawings Online

When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the

products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings

and illustrations.

If you need additional help, you can find contact information

under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T1-1

Introduction

Continuous Support for the

Installed Base

1 Introduction

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-2

Logo History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-2

Eaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-2

The Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

One Source for All Your Aftermarket Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

Using the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

Catalog Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

What Does the Shaded Area Mean?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

Eaton’s Electrical Business on the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

Eaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-3

V12-T1-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Introduction

Welcome

Welcome to the latest edition of Eaton’s Aftermarket, Renewal

Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog (formerly YES catalog).

In this fifth expanded edition, you will find increased solutions to

extend the life, modernize and upgrade your installed base of

electrical distribution and industrial control equipment.

Logo History

The installed base of Westinghouse and Cutler-Hammer®

distribution and control equipment can be found everywhere.

Whether in an industrial facility such as paper, chemical,

pharmaceutical, auto and steel, or commercial installations

including universities, hospitals, airports and just about any

type of government building; you will find equipment that was

manufactured by Eaton or one of its acquired companies.

In some situations due to the age of the equipment, the original

nameplate information may be difficult to obtain. This is why the

logo history is provided. If all else fails, the logo on the front of

the equipment will help you identify when it was manufactured.

Knowing this, and the type of product, you can refer to the

applicable section of the catalog to find the solutions available

to support it.

Eaton

Eaton is backed by more than 100 years of history and experience.

This experience has resulted in many innovations in distribution

and industrial control products each incorporating leading-edge

technology to provide the highest value to our customers.

This same technology and engineering expertise is applied

to solutions to upgrade existing installed older equipment.

Our engineers and scientists are recognized throughout the

industry and around the world as experts in a wide range of

disciplines including: photoelectric optical technology, arc

interruption, vacuum technology, digital and analog electronics,

and communications technology.

2009–Present

2000–2009

1994–2000 1960–1994

1980–1994 1953–1960

1960–1980 1940–1953

1933–1960 1922–1940

1914–1933 1910–1922

1900–1914 1900–1910

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T1-3

Introduction

The Installed Base

The installed base of electrical distribution and control

equipment is a product of the economic changes that have

occurred over the last 15 or 20 years.

They could:

●Be operating beyond capacity

●Have higher fault currents because of additions

●Pose major safety issues

●Cause increased unscheduled outages having a direct

impact on productivity

It has also been a witness to:

●Reductions in budgets and people resources

●Increases in maintenance intervals

●Decreases in support from the original manufacturer

Where do you go for help?

One Source for All Your Aftermarket Needs

The Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions

catalog is a reference tool to help you identify existing electrical

distribution and control equipment and then provide a wide range

of solutions available from Eaton to support it. Regardless of the

vintage or the original manufacturer, we can provide solutions

that will extend the useful life of your existing equipment.

What’s New?

Our catalog has a new name to reflect our membership in the

family of electrical solutions catalogs—the Aftermarket, Renewal

Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog replaces the former

YES (Your Electrical Solutions) catalog. It continues to offer

cutting-edge engineered life extension solutions—it just has

a new look and a new name.

Additionally, as the number of available solutions has grown, so

has the catalog. Incorporated in this latest edition are increased

capabilities that have been introduced since the last printing in

2003. For example, in order to address ongoing safety concerns,

Eaton has engineered the Arcflash Reduction Maintenance

System™ and the universal remote power racking system. Also,

there are new product offerings in the area of trip unit retrofit

kits, low voltage power breakers and medium voltage vacuum

replacement breakers, just to name a few. With changes to the

molded-case circuit breaker product line, this catalog is simpler

to use with an updated replacement breaker cross-reference

section. Additionally, automatic transfer switches and power

factor correction capacitors are included in brand-new tabs in

this edition.

Using the Catalog

You can find information in several ways. The Table of

Contents in the front and the detailed Alphabetical Product

Index in the back will refer you to the correct section. The

capabilities overview in Tab 2 highlights various capabilities,

and provides the tab number where that capability is listed.

Also included in this tab is a pictorial representation of a typical

distribution system illustrating the various products and where

they can be found.

Catalog Format

Each section of the catalog includes the following elements:

●Product Description

●Product History

●Product History Time Line

●Replacement Capabilities

●Technology Upgrades (where applicable)

●Further Information

●Pricing Information

Where relevant, Additional Information, Customer Required

Information, General Information and Support Services

are included.

What Does the Shaded Area Mean?

In some sections of the catalog, you will again see tables and

text that have been shaded. The shaded areas indicate obsolete

or discontinued product, and although the product is no longer

manufactured, it is still shown for historical reference. In the

molded-case circuit breaker section (Ta b 3 ), many of the tables

have shaded areas. Although the product is no longer manufactured,

cross-reference tables have been developed to provide alternative

solutions using current

manufactured molded-case circuit breakers.

The cross-reference

tables begin on Page V12-T3-115 and are in

alphanumeric order, based on style or catalog number of the

obsolete or discontinued product.

Eaton’s Electrical Business on the World Wide Web

Our Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions

catalog is designed to be your everyday, at-your-fingertips, at-a-

glance reference for our wide range of products and services

that support your installed base. But it’s just the paper “tip” of

the electronic “iceberg” of continuously updated information that

you can access, online, anytime.

http://www.eaton.com

Eaton

Eaton’s electrical business is a global leader with expertise

in power distribution and circuit protection; backup power

protection; control and automation; lighting and security;

structural solutions and wiring devices; solutions for harsh and

hazardous environments; and engineering services. Eaton is

positioned through its global solutions to answer today’s

most critical electrical power management challenges.

Eaton is a power management company providing energy-

efficient solutions that help our customers effectively manage

electrical, hydraulic and mechanical power. A global technology

leader, Eaton acquired Cooper Industries plc in November 2012.

The 2012 revenue of the combined companies was $21.8 billion

on a pro forma basis. Eaton has approximately 102,000

employees and sells products to customers in more than

175 countries. For more information, visit www.eaton.com.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T2-1

Distribution System

Technology Upgrades

for the Installed Base

2 Distribution System

A Commitment to the Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T2-2

Replacement Components and Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T2-2

Equipment Modernization and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T2-2

Products and Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T2-4

V12-T2-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Distribution System

Capabilities Overview

Distribution System

A Commitment to the

Installed Base

Our employees are

committed to supporting

all Cutler-Hammer® and

Westinghouse

Distribution

and Control

equipment, no

matter when it was

manufactured by Eaton’s

electrical business, or how

long it has been in service.

Our dedicated Aftermarket

Organization provides

products, services and

expertise through a focused

management team, sales

engineers and technicians

that work to keep customers’

equipment operating.

Eaton also offers multiple

solutions to extend the life

of other manufacturers’

equipment, including

modernization, technology

upgrades, reconditioning

and repair. Support for

other manufactures’

equipment include:

●General Electric®

●Square D®

●Federal Pacific®

●ITE®

●Siemens®

●Siemens-Allis™

●Allen-Bradley®

●Allis-Chalmers

Eaton’s innovative engineering

provides

the highest level of

life extension to support the

industry’s installed base,

regardless of the original

manufacturer.

Replacement Components

and Renewal Parts

A full line of replacement

components and renewal

parts is available for the

existing installed base

of Cutler-Hammer

and

Westinghouse equipment.

These replacement

components and renewal

parts are new, not used or

surplus material. The use

of original production tooling,

assembly fixtures, and

original specifications

and drawings guarantees

compatibility with existing

equipment.

Equipment Modernization

and Upgrades

Cutler-Hammer equipment

modernization and upgrades

can extend the life of your

existing equipment. They can

economically upgrade Cutler-

Hammer and Westing

house

products, as well as those of

other

manufacturers. These

state-of-the-art upgrades are

engineered to provide:

●Solutions for obsolete

electrical equipment

●New technology for

aging equipment

●Retrofit, repair and

remanufacturing processes

●Monitoring, protection

and control capabilities

to your system

●Genuine new replacement

components and renewal

parts

Breaker Reconditioning and Trip

System Upgrades with Arcflash

Reduction Maintenance System™

Digitrip™ RMS trip unit

retrofit kits are available for

Eaton, Westinghouse and

other manufacturers of low

voltage power breakers.

These retrofits will improve

circuit protection while

increasing breaker and

electrical system reliability.

See Ta b 17 .

Motor Control Center Bucket Retrofits

Freedom™ 2100, Advantage™

and IT. replacement starter

units can be used to increase

the capacity of a motor control

center without investing in a

completely new assembly.

Competitive retrofits and

new buckets are also available

for other manufacturers’

units, using current Eaton

technology. See Ta b 1 4 .

Power Breaker Replacement

New DB, DS, DSII,

Magnum™ DS and SPB

power breakers are available

for replacement, to fill existing

cells, or in a cell retrofit

package for upgrading existing

older low voltage switchgear.

These breakers are electrically

and mechanically identical to

the original vintages of DB,

DS, DSII, Magnum DS and

SPB breakers. See Ta b 17 .

Switchgear Fluidized Epoxy Bus

Existing switchgear bus can be

replaced or returned to our

factory, regardless of the

original manufacturer for

reinsulation, using the custom

fluidized epoxy

bed process. It

is available from 600V

to 15 kV

for switchgear, bus runs and

other equipment. See Tab 1 7 .

Medium Voltage Starter Upgrades

Vacuum contactors can be

retrofitted or retrofilled into

existing medium voltage air

magnetic starters, achieving

the benefits of vacuum

technology without the

expense of a completely

new assembly. See Ta b 1 3 .

Replacement Vacuum Breakers

MVVR (Medium Voltage

Vacuum Replacement)

breakers provide a means to

cost-effectively

modernize

existing

air magnetic medium

voltage switchgear while

further increasing its effective

life. See Ta b 17 .

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T2-3

Distribution System

Capabilities Overview

PowerNet

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

PowerNet™ system is

designed to manage the

power distribution system.

This integrated power

management system is the

ideal tool to help manage

energy costs, to troubleshoot

power quality problems,

and to ensure the reliability

and integrity of the

electrical

distribution system. See

Ta b 11

Submetering Retrofits

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ

Energy Sentinel submetering

device can be easily

retrofitted on Series C®

breakers, or those of other

manufacturers, in existing

equipment. When combined

with the PowerNet system,

the IQ Energy Sentinel can

now provide submetering

at numerous levels of

monitoring and energy

management. See Ta b s 4

and 10.

Power Management Products

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

IQ Metering and Protective

Relaying products are

multifunctional communicating

products based on micro-

processor technology. They

are designed to replace

existing electromechanical

devices and can be applied

at low, medium and high

voltage points in the electrical

distribution system. These

devices offer communications

capabilities to link electrical

distribution equipment

to PowerNet Power

Management Software.

See Ta b 10 .

Replacement Molded-Case

Breakers and Accessories

Circuit breaker replacements

and upgrades are designed

for use in panelboards,

switchboards, motor control

centers, control panels,

combination starters,

individual enclosures,

and bus duct plug-in units.

See Ta b s 3 , 4, 9 and 14.

SPD System Retrofits

Protect solid-state devices

from the damaging effects

of transient overvoltages.

The Eaton SPD products can

be installed in low voltage

distribution gear or retrofitted

into existing switchboards,

panelboards and motor

control centers to eliminate

the effects of surges before it

reaches sensitive equipment.

See Ta b s 4 and 17.

Low Voltage High Resistance

Grounding Systems

Type C-HRG provides service

continuity by providing a

ground path for ground

current via resistance that

limits current magnitude and

includes a means to trace the

fault source. See Tab 1 6 .

Installation and Startup Services

Installation and startup

services can be provided for

Eaton equipment, as well as

equipment manufactured

by other organizations.

See Ta b 2 3 .

Genuine LV Control Renewal Parts

Genuine factory-warranted

low voltage control renewal

parts are available to support

the complete line of Cutler-

Hammer and Westinghouse

design starters and

contactors. Renewal parts

include contact kits, coils,

overload relays and heaters,

to name a few. See Ta b 1 3 .

V12-T2-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Distribution System

Typical Distribution System

Product and Services for Life Extension and Equipment Upgrades Overview

Tab

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . . . . . . 17

Motor Control Center Bucket Retrofits . . . . . . 2

DHP-VR Vacuum

Replacement Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Switchgear Fluidized Epoxy Bus . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Retrofit/Replace with

Vacuum Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Cell Retrofit with DSII/SPB

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Low Voltage High Resistance

Grounding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

PowerNet Communication

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Retrofit Front Panel

with IQ Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Retrofit with IQ Energy

Sentinel for Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Retrofit with Surge Protective

Devices (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 9, 14, 15

Replacement Molded-Case

Breakers and Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Rebuilding/

Remanufacturing Service . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 13, 15

Renewal/Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL

Service Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL

Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . 21

Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Remote Power Racking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

SECONDARY SPOT NETWORK

WITH NETWORK PROTECTORS

914

913 14

5 84

ADJUSTABLE

FREQUENCY CONTROL

ENCLOSED

CONTROL

REDUCED

VOLTAGE

STARTER

TRANSFORMER

MEDIUM VOLTAGE

SWITCHGEAR

LOW VOLTAGE

SECONDARY UNIT

SUBSTATION

LOAD

INTERRUPTER

SWITCHGEAR

PROGRAMMABLE

LOGIC

CONTROLLER

MOTOR

CONTROL

CENTER

LOW VOLTAGE

SWITCHBOARD

INDIVIDUAL/

GROUP MOUNTED

POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION

CAPACITORS

UP TO 1500 HP

ARC RESISTANT

SWITCHGEAR

UTILITY SYSTEM

EXCITATION

CONTROL

ON-SITE

GENERATION

GROUNDING

RESISTOR

HIGH CURRENT

LOW VOLTAGE

PROCESS

START STOP

COUNT

CONTROL

PROXIMITY

SENSOR

LIMIT

SWITCH

SELECTOR

SWITCH

PHOTOELECTRIC

SENSOR

SAFETY

SWITCH

LIGHTING

CONTROL

PANELBOARD

OFFICE BUILDING

LIGHTING

PANELBOARD

LIGHTING

PANELBOARD

LIGHTING

PANELBOARD

LIGHTING

CONTROL

PANELBOARD

PROCESS

RECTIFIER

SYSTEM

DRIVE

SAFETY

SWITCH

MEDIUM

VOLTAGE

STARTER

MEDIUM VOLTAGE

NON-SEGREGATED BUS

LOW VOLTAGE BUS

BUS PLUG

UP TO 700 HP

DRY-TYPE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER

LOW VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

PANELBOARD

LOW VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

PANELBOARD

ELECTRICAL

OPERATOR

INTERFACE

BUS PLUG

MAGNETIC SHOEBREAK

MEDIUM VOLTAGE

TRANSFER EQUIPMENT

VACUUM BREAKERS

OR LOAD BREAK

FUSED SWITCHES

34.5 kV

SWITCHGEAR

POWER

TRANSFORMER

15 kV

SWITCHGEAR

RECTIFIER

AND

EXCITER

SYNCHRONOUS

MOTOR FIELD

APPLICATION

PANEL

GENERATOR

LOW

VOLTAGE

TRANSFER

SWITCH

ADDITIONAL

UTILITY

SOURCES

SAFETY

SWITCH

MANUFACTURING FACILITY

SAFETY

SWITCH

SYNCHRONOUS

MOTOR

LOAD

INTERRUPTER

SWITCHGEAR

ENCLOSED

CONTROL

POWERNET

INTEGRATED

MONITORING

PROTECTION

AND CONTROL

COMMUNICATION

SYSTEM

6 7

4 5 8 91

810 12 14

12 148

14141414

12 1410 118

141414

914 88

151515151515

15 15

15 15 15

15 15

POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION

CAPACITORS

UP TO 300 HP UP TO 300 HP

10 19

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Family

3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Product Description, History, Major Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-2

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-3

Nameplate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-3

Identifying Factory Original Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-4

Replacement and Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-5

Replacement Guides

Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-6

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-10

Replacement Devices

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-15

Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-61

Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-63

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-63

Panelboard Replacement Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-80

Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-81

Motor Control Center Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-88

Technology Upgrades for Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-91

Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-95

Replacement and Service Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-112

Cross-Reference

Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant Replacements . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-113

Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-115

Mining Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-162

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-168

V12-T3-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Family

Product Description

Eaton’s molded-case circuit

breakers are designed to

provide circuit protection

for low voltage distribution

systems. They are described

by NEMA® as “...a device

for closing and interrupting

a circuit between separable

contacts under both normal

and abnormal conditions,”

and furthermore as “...a

breaker assembled as an

integral unit in supporting

an enclosed housing of

insulating material.” The

NEC® describes them as

“. . . a device designed to

open and close a circuit by

non-automatic means, and to

open the circuit automatically

on a predetermined overload

of current, without injury to

itself when properly applied

within its rating.”

Circuit breakers protect

against overloads in

conductors and protects

against short circuits in

connected apparatus such as

motors and motor starters.

Circuit breakers are designed

for use in panelboards,

switchboards, motor control

centers, control panels,

combination starters,

individual enclosures and

bus duct plug-in units.

Product History

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

The need for molded-case

circuit breakers came about

in 1918 when numerous

applications for electrical

motors resulted in a demand

for a device that would

ensure safe operation and,

at the same time, protect

electrical circuits.

During this period, individual

motors were used for the

first time in industrial plants

to operate machine tools and

in private homes to operate

appliances. Plant electricians

were constantly changing

fuses blown during motor

startups because of the lack

of properly designed fuses for

motor circuit protection.

Homes experienced similar

problems when electrical

circuits were overloaded.

Inspectors were concerned

about fire hazards because of

plug fuses being bridged with

pennies and the installation

of fuses with too high an

ampere rating.

Inspection authorities

became involved and

attempted to find a solution

to the problem. Meetings

with switch manufacturers

were initiated in an effort

to find a solution. Switch

manufacturers were asked to

develop a switching device

that would interrupt a circuit

under prolonged overload

conditions. The device would

have to be safe, reliable and

tamperproof. It should also

be resettable so as to be

reusable after an interruption

without replacing any parts.

This search for better circuit

protection resulted in many

different but unacceptable

approaches to the problem.

These early meetings and

subsequent efforts prepared

the groundwork for the

eventual development of the

molded-case circuit breaker.

After intensive research and

development,

Westinghouse

produced the DE-ION® arc

extinguisher for use in large

oil circuit breakers. Although

too large in its initial form to

be practical for small circuit

breakers, the arc extinguisher

was eventually modified

into a usable size. The first

compact, workable circuit

breaker was developed in

1923 when the modified arc

extinguisher was coupled

with a thermal tripping

mechanism. It was not until

four years later, however,

that Westinghouse research

engineers found the ideal

combination of materials and

design that permitted circuit

breakers to interrupt fault

currents of 5000A at 120 Vac

or Vdc. One year later,

Westinghouse placed the

first circuit breaker on the

market. Its acceptance

was instantaneous.

Since that initial introduction

in 1927, Westinghouse

continued to be at the forefront

of circuit breaker technology

with an unprecedented series

of circuit protective

enhancements and

introductions as chronicled

below. In 1994, Eaton, another

world-class technology leader,

acquired the Westinghouse

Distribution and Control

Business Unit (DCBU)

and integrated it with their

Cutler-Hammer business

unit forming a powerful, new

combination, poised to meet

the challenges of the next

100 years.

Time Line—Major Product Introductions

1923 First compact, workable circuit breaker developed by Westinghouse

1927 Westinghouse introduced the first complete circuit breaker line,

rated 10– 600A, 600V

1939 Along with ordering information and style numbers, the various

maximum current ratings came to be known by frame designations:

50A E-Frame

100A F-Frame (non-interchangeable trip)

100A G-Frame

225A K-Frame

600A L-Frame

1970 Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) introduced—first sensitive, low

level protection designed specifically for motor circuits

1973 SELTRONIC™ introduced—first molded-case circuit breaker

with an electronic trip unit

1979 Current Limit-R circuit breaker introduced— first true current

limiting trip unit

1982 Series C® Family introduced—new world-class standard, meeting

increasing interrupting requirements without sacrificing compact size

1994 Westinghouse Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU)

acquired by Eaton, integrated with Cutler-Hammer

(the Cutler-Hammer line of molded case circuit breakers was

sold when merged with Westinghouse)

1995 OPTIM™ Family introduced—first truly programmable

molded-case circuit breaker

2002 Next Generation E125, J250

2004 Series G® First Global Breaker Line

Year Product 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 1995

2000 2002 Present

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker Identification

Nameplate Data

A circuit breaker is identified by

data found on the nameplate.

This includes:

●Catalog number

●Shop order number

●Style number

●Amperage

●Number of poles

●Voltage class

●Temperature rating

In most instances, the

catalog number, style number

or shop order number will

supply enough information

to identify the circuit breaker.

However, it is always

advisable to obtain all

data from the nameplate

to facilitate identification.

A Catalog Number begins

with a series of letters

followed by numbers

that identify:

●Circuit breaker type

●Number of poles

●Maximum amperage

●Example: Catalog number

F3020 indicates a Type F

circuit breaker, three poles,

20A

A Shop Order Number

begins with one or two

numbers followed by a

single letter and four

additional numbers.

A shop order number is

listed in place of a catalog

number and indicates that the

circuit breaker was modified

at the factory, i.e., addition

of a shunt trip, special

calibration, etc. Every shop

order number must be

researched with the

factory to properly identify

modifications. Call your

Cutler-Hammer Field Sales

office for this information.

●Example: 70E2121

Note: Eaton does not

recommend replacing a circuit

breaker identified by a Shop

Order Number with a standard

“off-the-shelf” circuit breaker

without first identifying the

modifications. They may

be critical to safe and

reliable operation.

Accessories

Most circuit breaker

accessories are mounted

internally and are not visible

with a quick inspection.

However, because many

accessories rely on or supply

an external signal, there may

be electrical leads exiting the

circuit breaker case. Inspect

for these leads when

obtaining full descriptive

information for circuit breaker

replacement. Examples of

common accessories:

Shunt Trip

Used to remotely trip the

circuit breaker using an

electrical signal. Typically

two wires extend through

the case.

Undervoltage Release (UVR)

Trips the circuit breaker

when voltage drops below

a specified percentage of

coil voltage (typically 70%).

Typically two wires extend

through the case.

Auxiliary Switch

Provides remote indication

of the circuit breaker status

(open/closed). Typically

three wires extend through

the case in a single-pole

1A/1B application.

Alarm Lockout Switch

For remote indication of

an automatic trip operation.

Typically two or three wires

extend through the case.

Pre-Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997)

Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997)

Vintage Label for Typical SELTRONIC Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

V12-T3-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Factory Original

Circuit Breakers

Why Insist on Only Genuine,

New MCCBs Purchased Through

Authorized Distributors?

Eaton defines “New” product

as that which has not yet been

installed in an electrical circuit,

purchased through authorized

channels in factory original

condition and packaged in

unopened Eaton cartons.

●The only way to ensure

safe and reliable operation

of your system is to use

genuine, new, Eaton’s

Cutler-Hammer products

exclusively. Eaton does not

resell the component parts

for molded-case circuit

breakers, the only way

for third-party breaker

refurbishers to get parts

for the breakers that

they are rebuilding is

to cannibalize other

used breakers or to use

counterfeit components.

Neither is a very good

option for the end user

●In some cases,

unauthorized resellers

of molded-case circuit

breakers have been found

to misrepresent used,

rebuilt or surplus products.

Only products purchased as

“new” through authorized

channels are covered under

the Eaton warranty policy

●There have been

instances where third-party

refurbishers have rebuilt

breakers using the wrong

parts, with parts missing

or the factory lubrication

removed in the cleaning

process—any of which may

result in devices that may

not be depended upon to

function properly to protect

equipment and personnel

Identifying Genuine, Factory

Original Westinghouse Circuit

Breakers Manufactured by Eaton

The features on a molded-case

circuit breaker that identify it

as genuine or counterfeit

may or may not be readily

apparent. In fact, there may be

differences not detectable by

an external investigation.

A genuine Eaton brand

molded-case circuit breaker

manufactured by Eaton will

have a serialized bar code

unique to the breaker as well

as an unbroken seal where

the case comes together.

This barcode and seal were

placed at the factory and

ensures the internal integrity

of the breaker. If, for any

reason the barcode is

missing or the seal is

broken, do not accept the

breaker. (Seal does not

appear on interchangeable

trip breakers.)

Unbroken Seal

There is a manufacturing date

code on the back of genuine

molded-case circuit breakers

stamped in silver and white. If

this coding is missing, it may

mean the breaker has been

subjected to tampering.

Frequently, this date code is

wiped off in an attempt to

represent the breaker as new.

Manufacturing Date Code

Another way to tell if a

breaker has been tampered

with is to examine the sealant

used to cover the screws on

the top rear of the breaker. If

the sealant appears sloppy or

is missing, it indicates that the

unit may have been subjected

to tampering.

Sealant Used to Cover Screws

A UL® label on a genuine

Westinghouse breaker is

either exactly as shown in

the photo or is stamped in

white ink onto the frame in

older pre-Series C breakers.

Anything other than this may

indicate fraud.

UL Label

If front cover screw shows

marks from use, someone

has attempted to open the

breaker. The front covers

are either black or gray on

genuine Westinghouse

molded-case circuit breakers.

Front Cover Screws

Westinghouse molded-

case circuit breakers

manufactured by Eaton

are packed individually and

shipped in Eaton labeled

cartons. Anything other than

this is not to be considered

new and should be suspect.

Eaton Labeled Cartons

www.eaton.com xxxxxxxxx

Lorem Ipsum: dolor sit

amet, consectetuer adi

piscing elit, sed diam

nonummy nibh euismod

DOLOR SIT AMET

CONSECT ETUER ADI

Adpiscing

elit sed

diamnon

euismod

Dolor Sit Amet Elit

XX-XXX-XXXX

Product Name

Product Series

Made in U.S.A.

Lorem ipsum: dolor sit amet,

consectetuter adipleiscing,

sed diam nonummy, nibheuis

mod tincidunt.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-5

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Series C and Series G Molded-

Case Circuit Breakers

When and Where to Use

●Generally a first choice

wherever physically and

electrically practical

●Where communications,

arc flash protection,

energy and power quality

monitoring are desired

●As a direct replacement

or add-on to already

installed Series C or

Series G product, including

Westinghouse breakers

(see Page V12-T3-114)

●For special applications

such as DC engine

generator

Advantages

●The most current

molded-case circuit

breaker technology

●Higher interrupting

capacities in each

frame size

●Smaller and lighter for

a given frame size than

other options

●Generally less expensive

than other replacement

breaker options

●Readily available

throughout range, high

levels of stock

●Available from stock

●One-year warranty

Current Production Replacement

Circuit Breakers

When and Where to Use

●As a direct, one-for-one

replacement of current

production pre-Series C

product

●Where you know the

catalog/style number

but not the physical or

electrical specifics about

the application

Advantages

●Ease of selection and

certainty of replacement

●Guaranteed to be both a

physical and electrical

duplicate of original

●Still in production

●Newly manufactured

●UL listed

●Available from stock

●One-year warranty

Replacement of Current

Panelboard Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers

When and Where to Use

●When replacing Series C

circuit breakers in a current

design panelboard

Advantages

●Newly manufactured

and tested to the latest

technology

●UL Listed

●Available from stock in

most frame sizes

●One-year warranty. Refer

to Page V12-T3-91 for

Series C connector kits

Replacement of Out-of-

Production Panelboard

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

(Including Westinghouse)

When and Where to Use

●When replacing out-of-

production circuit breakers

in an existing panelboard

●When replacing

Westinghouse breakers.

Refer to Pages V12-T3-81–

V12-T3-90 and

Page V12-T3-114

Advantages

●Newly manufactured

and tested to the latest

applicable standards

●Both physically and

electrically interchangeable

with the circuit breakers

that they are designed

to replace

●UL Listed

●Available from stock in

most frame sizes

●One-year warranty

Replacement of Out-of-

Production Motor Control Center

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

and Upgrades

When and Where to Use

●When replacing out-of-

production circuit breakers

in an existing motor control

center: 5 Star, Type W and

F10 designs

●When upgrading

Westinghouse breakers

with a Series C technology

upgrade breaker

Advantages

●Newly manufactured

and tested to the latest

technology

●Series C retrofit kits are

physically and electrically

interchangeable with the

circuit breakers that they

are designed to replace

●UL Listed

●Available from stock in

most frame sizes

●One-year warranty.

Refer to Page V12-T3-91

Contact: 1-800-OLD-UNIT.

Service for Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers

When and Where to Use

●Where circuit breaker has

sustained minor physical

damage to a handle, lug,

etc., that otherwise would

be fully functional

●Large frame circuit breaker

(600A and above) that has

experienced some normal

wear, but is in generally

good condition, as an

economically driven

alternative to new

●When replacing

Westinghouse breakers.

Refer to Page V12-T3-114

Advantages

●Prevents loss of circuit

breakers due to minor

damage

●Reduces overall

breaker costs

●Prevents use of potentially

unreliable third-party

refurbishers

●Includes full one-year

Eaton Electrical Inc.

warranty

●Ensures reliability through

dealing with the original

manufacturer with a long

and well-recognized

tradition of product safety,

integrity and quality

●Provides a simple and

convenient solution

Contact Eaton’s

Breaker Service Center:

1-877-BRK-SRVC.

V12-T3-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG and Eaton Miniature Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide

QUICKLAG and Eaton Plug-In Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches

QUICKLAG Bolt-On Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches

QUICKLAG and Eaton Cable-In/Cable-Out Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches

Note: For supplementary protectors, the Eaton WMZS and FAZ Series replace the WMS supplementary protectors that are no longer manufactured.

Description

Maximum Amperes

150A 125A 100A 30A

Current Design

These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production

circuit breakers listed below.

HQP QPHW QHPX QHPW

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are no longer

manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit

breakers listed above.

HQNPL, HQNPAL, HQNP,

HQNPA, QP, QPA, QPAH, QNPL,

QNPA L , QNP, Type P, P L

QPH No previous circuit

breaker existed

QHPL

QHP

Description

Maximum Amperes

150A 125A 100A 30A

Current Design

These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production

circuit breakers listed below.

BAB QBHW HBAX HBAW

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00

Height: 2.94

Depth: 2.38

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are no longer

manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit

breakers listed above.

HQNB, HQNBA, QB, BA,

QNBL, QNBAL

QBH No previous circuit

breaker existed

HBA

Description

Maximum Amperes

60A 100A 100A 100A 30A 40A

Current Design

These circuit breakers replace the

out-of-production circuit breakers

listed below.

QCR QCF QC QCHW QHCX QHCW WMZ/FAZ

Width: 0.50

Height: 3.94

Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00

Height: 3.75

Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00

Height: 3.75

Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00

Height: 3.75

Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00

Height: 3.75

Depth: 2.44

Width: 0.70

Height: 4.10

Depth: 2.60

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are no

longer manufactured. Recommended

QUICKLAG circuit breakers listed above.

No previous circuit

breaker existed

HQCL, HQCAL, HQC,

HQCA, QCA

QCH No previous circuit

breaker existed

QHCL, QHC WMT

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-7

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Miniature

Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG is the largest and

most complete family of

industrial thermal-magnetic

miniature circuit breakers.

They provide the exclusive

features of steel frame

calibration and arc chutes

in every pole.

QUICKLAG circuit breakers

are provided in ranges from

5 to 125A continuous in

single-, two- and three-pole

configurations with

interrupting capacities

from

10,000 AIC to 65,000 AIC.

QUICKLAG

circuit breakers

have been series rated up to

200,000 AIC in conjunction

with larger Westinghouse/

Cutler-Hammer current

limiting circuit breakers.

Each QUICKLAG rating is

available for plug-in (Type P),

bolt-on (Type B) and cable-to-

cable connections (Type C)

for line/load feed applications.

They are also available with

one of the industry’s widest

selection of accessories,

including shunt trip, and

can be custom modified

to meet special application

requirements.

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide

Notes

1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series.

Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Circuit

Breaker

Type Code

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at 40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Federal

Spec.

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

AC Ratings Volts DC 1

AC DC 120 120/240 240 24 48 80

HQP P 5–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 2000

HQP P 10–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000

HQP P 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — —

QPHW P 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QPHW P 15–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QPHW P 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — —

QHPX P 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QHPX P 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QHPX P 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — —

QHPW P 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QHPW P 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QHPW P 15–30 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — —

QPGF P, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — — — —

QPGF P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — —

QPHGF P, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — — — —

QPHGF P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 22,000 — — — —

QPGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — —

QPGFEP P, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — —

QPHGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — —

QPHGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 — — — — —

BAB B 5–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 2000

BAB B 10–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000

BAB B 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — —

QBHW B 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QBHW B 15–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QBHW B 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — —

HBAX B 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 2000

HBAX B 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000

HBAX B 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — —

HBAW B 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 2000

HBAW B 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000

HBAW B 15–30 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — —

QBGF B, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — — — —

QBGF B, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — —

V12-T3-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued

Notes

1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series.

Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Circuit

Breaker

Type Code

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at 40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Federal

Spec.

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

AC Ratings Volts DC 1

AC DC 120 120/240 240 24 48 80

QBHGF B, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — — — —

QBHGF B, GF 15–30 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 22,000 — — — —

QBGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — —

QBGFEP B, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — —

QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — —

QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 — — — — —

QC C 5–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QC C 10–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QC C 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — —

QC C 15–100 4 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — —

QCF C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — —

QCR C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — —

QCHW C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QCHW C 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QCHW C 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — —

QHCX C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QHCX C 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QHCX C 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — —

QHCW C 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 2000

QHCW C 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000

QHCW C 15–30 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — —

QCGF C, GF 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — —

QCGF C, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — —

QCHGF C, GF 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — —

QCHGF C, GF 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 22,000 — — — —

QCGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — —

QCGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — —

QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — —

QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 22,000 — — — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-9

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

CHB Circuit Breaker

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

The CHB breaker continues

to be available as a

replacement breaker for

use in Cutler-Hammer

Type PB panelboards.

When combined with the

mounting base, CHB

breakers were also used for

surface and DIN rail mount

cable-in/

cable-out applications.

(See photo below.)

For “new” cable-in/

cable-out applications,

Eaton recommends the

use of our most current

product offering:

●QUICKLAG Type QC

breakers (1.00-inch

per pole)

●QCR breakers—rear

mount (0.50-inch per pole)

●QCF breakers—front

mount (0.50-inch per pole)

QCR and QCF breakers

provide a 50% space savings

over 1.00-inch per pole

designs of the same rating.

CHB Breaker Mounting Base

CHB Mounting Bases

CHB Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbering System

Replacement Capabilities

Single-Pole

QUICKLAG Type QC Cable-In/

Cable-out Breaker—1.00 Inch per Pole

Single-Pole Two-Pole

Type QCF Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker

—0.50 Inch per Pole (Front-Connected)

Single-Pole Two-Pole

Type QCR Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker

—0.50 Inch per Pole (Rear-Connected)

Description Catalog Number

Low Ampere

15–50A Single-pole CHB9L1

15–50A Two-pole CHB9L250

15–50A Three-pole CHB9L350

High Ampere

25–50A Single-pole CHB9H1

25–125A Two-pole CHB9H2125

25–100A Three-pole CHB9H3100

CHB 3 100

Accessories

ST = Shunt-trip (requires extra pole space)

SW = Switched neutral application

HID = High intensity discharge lighting applications

HM = High magnetic trip

GF = Ground fault personnel protection

EPD = Ground fault equipment protection

H2 = 22,000 AIC (40, 50, 60A obsolete)

Poles

1-, 2- or 3-

Ampere

Rating

Bolt-on

Circuit Breaker

V12-T3-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)

Note

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

Description

Maximum Amperes

100A 100A/125A 225A 100A 100A

Current Design

Series C circuit breakers are the current

offering and, as such, are a logical first

choice when upgrading or retrofitting

equipment. All circuit breakers listed

in a column are ELECTRICALLY

INTERCHANGEABLE.

GHC EG

ED, EDH, EDC EHD FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

Width: 3.00

Height: 4.88

Depth: 2.94

Width: 3.00

Height: 4.88

Depth: 2.81

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Replacement Circuit Breakers

These new UL labeled circuit breakers

continue to be manufactured and are

primarily applied to achieve exact

physical and electrical replacement of

previously installed Cutler-Hammer/

Westinghouse circuit breakers of the

same style number and rating.

EB 1No previous circuit

breaker existed

EHB 1FB 1, HFB

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are no

longer manufactured. *Indicates the

last date of manufacture. As an option,

any of these circuit breakers can be

reconditioned at the original factory.

For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or

contact your local Eaton Field

Sales office.

E, EA

*1974

QCC

* 1968

* 1974

FA, HFA

* 1974

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.50

Height: 7.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.50

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.50

Depth: 3.38

CA, CAH, HCA 1F, H F

1974

1965

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.50

Depth: 2.69

Width: 4.13

Height: 9.38

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 9.38

Depth: 4.06

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994

EC, EHC

FS, FH,

FC, HFC

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.13

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.13

Depth: 3.19

Width: 4.13

Height: 9.31

Depth: 3.19

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-11

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued

Notes

1When upgrading a HLB, LBB to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order

TAD3 spacer kit.

2These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on

Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

Maximum Amperes

150A 225A, 250A 400A 600A

Current Design

FDB, FD, HFD, FDC JG

JD, HJD, JDC

250A

JDB

250A

DK 1KD, HKD, KDC 1KDB LG

LD, HLD, LDB

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 10.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 4.13

Height: 10.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

Replacement Circuit Breakers

FB 2, HFB KB 2, HKB 2JB 2DA 2LB 2, HLB 1LBB 2LC 2, HLC

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.00

Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13

Height: 10.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 4.13

Height: 10.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

KA 2, HKA 2JA 2LA 2, HLA LAB 2LA 2, HLA

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

FA, HFA

*1974

*1967

JKL

*1967

L, LM, HLM

*1967

Width: 8.25

Height: 22.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 4.13

Height: 6.50

Depth: 3.38

*Indicates the last

date of manufacture.

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.13

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

K, HK

*1967

KL, HKL

*1967

Width: 8.25

Height: 15.50

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 5.75

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 4.06

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994

FS, FH, FC, HFC JS, JH, JL JS KS-D, KS KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH LS(E), LH(E), LS(A), LH(A)

Width: 4.25

Height: 6.13

Depth: 3.19

Width: 4.25

Height: 12.00

Depth: 3.81

Width: 4.25

Height: 12.00

Depth: 3.81

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 3.81

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 3.81

Width: 5.50

Height: 10.13

Depth: 3.81

Width: 8.25

Height: 10.75

Depth: 3.81

250A

225A

SPCB 600A,

SCB 600A

*1986 (Consult Eaton)

225A

V12-T3-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued

Notes

1RD breaker replaces PC, PCC and PB breakers for 2000 and 2500A only. 2These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on

Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

Description

Maximum Amperes

800A 1200A 1600A/2000A/2500A 1

Current Design

Series C circuit breakers are the

current offering and, as such,

are a logical first choice when

upgrading or retrofitting equipment.

All circuit breakers listed in

a column are ELECTRICALLY

INTERCHANGEABLE.

MDL, HMDL NG

ND, HND, NDC

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 15.50

Height: 16.00

Depth: 9.75

Replacement Circuit Breakers

These new UL labeled circuit

breakers continue to be

manufactured and are primarily

applied to achieve exact physical

and electrical replacement of

previously installed Cutler-Hammer/

Westinghouse circuit breakers of

the same style number and rating.

PB/PC breakers are not UL Listed.

MA 2, HMA, MD 2, MDS 2

and MC 2

MA 2, HMA and MC 2, MCC 2

SELTRONIC™ 2

NC 2, HNC and NB 2, HNB PC, PCC PB

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.06

Height: 22.06

Depth: 9.06

Width: 12.06

Height: 22.06

Depth: 9.06

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are

no longer manufactured.

*Indicates the last date of

manufacture. As an option, any

of these circuit breakers can be

reconditioned at the original factory.

For details, see Page V12-T3-5,

or contact your local Eaton Field

Sales office.

LM, HLM and M

*1967

LM, HLM and M

*1967

MA, HMA

*1968

MA, HLM

*1967

*1974

Width: 8.25

Height: 22.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25

Height: 22.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25

Height: 22.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.00

Height: 22.00

Depth: 9.06

Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 12.06 Height: 22.06 Depth: 9.06

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994

MS, MH NS, NH No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand

frame size existed

No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame

size existed

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 5.50

1200A

SPCB 1200A,

SCB 1200A

*1986 (Consult Eaton)

SPCB 2000–3000A,

SCB 2000–3000A

*1986 (Consult Eaton)

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-13

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)

Description

Maximum Amperes

100A 250A 400A 100A 225A

Current Design

All circuit breakers listed in a

column are ELECTRICALLY

INTERCHANGEABLE.

FCL

Current Limit-R

(non-fused)

LCL

Current Limit-R

(non-fused)

LCL

Current Limit-R

(non-fused)

TRI-PAC®

(fused)

TRI-PAC

(fused)

Width: 4.13

Height: 8.75

Depth: 3.38

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.06

Width: 4.13

Height: 8.75

Depth: 3.50

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.75

Replacement Circuit Breakers

These new UL labeled circuit breakers

continue to be manufactured and are

primarily applied to achieve exact

physical and electrical replacement of

previously installed Cutler-Hammer/

Westinghouse circuit breakers of the

same style number and rating.

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are no

longer manufactured.

*Indicates the last date of manufacture.

As an option, any of these circuit breakers

can be reconditioned at the original

factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5,

or contact your local Eaton Field

Sales office.

TRI-PAC

*1968

TRI-PAC

*1968

TRI-PAC

*1968

Width: 4.13

Height: 9.38

Depth: 3.19

Width: 4.63

Height: 11.81

Depth: 3.81

Width: 8.25

Height: 19.63

Depth: 4.06

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994

No Equivalent Cutler-Hammer Brand Frame Sizes Existed

V12-T3-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)

Description

Maximum Amperes

400A 800A 1600A

Current Design

All circuit breakers listed in a column are

ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE.

TRI-PAC®

(Fused)

TRI-PAC

(Fused)

TRI-PAC

(Fused)

Width: 8.25

Height: 16.00

Depth: 4.75

Width: 8.25

Height: 22.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.06

Height: 22.13

Depth: 9.06

Replacement Circuit Breakers

These new UL labeled circuit breakers continue to be

manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact

physical and electrical replacement of previously installed

Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same

style number and rating.

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured.

*Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any

of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original

factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local

Eaton Field Sales office.

TRI-PAC

*1968

TRI-PAC

*1968

TRI-PAC

*1968

TRI-PAC

*1968

Width: 8.25

Height: 19.63

Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25

Height: 26.91

Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25

Height: 22.00

Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.00

Height: 22.00

Depth: 9.06

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994

No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame sizes existed

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-15

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type EB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 240 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue®

Type EHB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 480 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue 2

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 7

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Includes load terminals only.

3 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

4 Not UL Listed.

5 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.

6 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only.

7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

Continuous Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole, 120 Vac, 125 Vdc 3Two-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3Three-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3

Standard Standard Standard Saf-T-Vue 4

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

15 EB1015 5EB2015 EB3015 EB3015S

20 EB1020 5EB2020 EB3020 EB3020S

25 EB1025 EB2025 EB3025 EB3025S

30 EB1030 EB2030 EB3030 EB3030S

35 EB1035 EB2035 EB3035 EB3035S

40 EB1040 EB2040 EB3040 EB3040S

45 EB1045 EB2045 EB3045 EB3045S

50 EB1050 EB2050 EB3050 EB3050S

60 EB1060 EB2060 EB3060 EB3060S

70 EB1070 EB2070 EB3070 EB3070S

80 EB1080 EB2080 EB3080 EB3080S

90 EB1090 EB2090 EB3090 EB3090S

100 EB1100 EB2100 EB3100 EB3100S

Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs

Continuous Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole, 277 Vac, 125 Vdc 3Two-Pole, 480 Vac, 250 Vdc 3Three-Pole, 480 Vac

Standard Standard Standard Saf-T-Vue 4

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

15 EHB1015 6EHB2015 EHB3015 EHB3015S

20 EHB1020 6EHB2020 EHB3020 EHB3020S

25 EHB1025 EHB2025 EHB3025 EHB3025S

30 EHB1030 EHB2030 EHB3030 EHB3030S

35 EHB1035 EHB2035 EHB3035 EHB3035S

40 EHB1040 EHB2040 EHB3040 EHB3040S

45 EHB1045 EHB2045 EHB3045 EHB3045S

50 EHB1050 EHB2050 EHB3050 EHB3050S

60 EHB1060 EHB2060 EHB3060 EHB3060S

70 EHB1070 EHB2070 EHB3070 EHB3070S

80 EHB1080 EHB2080 EHB3080 EHB3080S

90 EHB1090 EHB2090 EHB3090 EHB3090S

100 EHB1100 EHB2100 EHB3100 EHB3100S

Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs

Maximum Volts Amperes

EB Breakers

120 and 240 AC 10,000 asymmetrical, symmetrical

125/250 DC 5000 3

EHB, FB Breakers

240 AC 20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical

277 AC (EHB) 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

480 AC 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

600 AC (FB) 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

250 DC 10,000 3

EB: 120, 240 Vac;

125/250 Vdc

EHB: 277, 480 Vac;

250 Vdc

V12-T3-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type FB, HFB Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole; 480V Max.; Thermal-Magnetic MARK 75® Saf-T-Vue

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 9

Special Breakers Type FB, Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

3 Not UL Listed.

4 All four poles have thermal-magnetic trip elements. Can be supplied with three protected poles and one unprotected, non-automatic pole if required.

Order by description with no price or dimensional differences.

5 15–30A rated 75,000 AIC. 40–100A rated 30,000A asymmetrical, 25,000A symmetrical.

6 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

7 Includes line and load terminals. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

8 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only.

9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

jRatings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Single-Pole

277 Vac; 125 Vdc 2

Two-Pole

600 Vac; 250 Vdc 2

Three-Pole

600 Vac

Four-Pole 34

600 Vac

MARK 75 5Standard MARK 75 6Standard Saf-T-Vue 6

MARK 75

7Standard

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

15 HFB1015 8FB2015 HFB2015 FB3015 FB3015S HFB3015L FB4015

20 HFB1020 8FB2020 HFB2020 FB3020 FB3020S HFB3020L FB4020

25 HFB1025 FB2025 HFB2025 FB3025 FB3025S HFB3025L FB4025

30 HFB1030 FB2030 HFB2030 FB3030 FB3030S HFB3030L FB4030

35 HFB1035 FB2035 HFB2035 FB3035 FB3035S HFB3035L FB4035

40 HFB1040 FB2040 HFB2040 FB3040 FB3040S HFB3040L FB4040

45 HFB1045 FB2045 HFB2045 FB3045 FB3045S HFB3045L FB4045

50 HFB1050 FB2050 HFB2050 FB3050 FB3050S HFB3050L FB4050

60 HFB1060 FB2060 HFB2060 FB3060 FB3060S HFB3060L FB4060

70 HFB1070 FB2070 HFB2070 FB3070 FB3070S HFB3070L FB4070

80 HFB1080 FB2080 HFB2080 FB3080 FB3080S HFB3080L FB4080

90 HFB1090 FB2090 HFB2090 FB3090 FB3090S HFB3090L FB4090

100 HFB1100 FB2100 HFB2100 FB3100 FB3100S HFB3100L FB4100

110 — — — FB3110 FB3110S HFB3110 —

125 — — — FB3125 FB3125S HFB3125 —

150 — — — FB3150 FB3150S HFB3150 —

Maximum Volts Amperes

MARK 75 Type HFB

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

277 AC 675,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC (two-pole) 20,000 2j

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Magnetic

Trip Range

Amperes

Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac

Standard MARK 75 Standard Saf-T-Vue MARK 75 7

Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number

37–22 FB2022MRL HFB2022ML FB3022MRL FB3022SMRL HFB3022ML

515–45 FB2045MRL HFB2045ML FB3045MRL FB3045SMRL HFB3045ML

10 35–110 FB2110MRL HFB2110ML FB3110MRL FB3110SMRL HFB3110ML

25 32–80 2610D53G12 4994D96G12 2610D53G30 4998D89G30 2610D57G30

25 66–190 FB2190MRL HFB2190ML FB3190MRL FB3190SMRL HFB3190ML

30 50–150 1268C14G05 —1268C14G06 ——

30 90–270 FB2270MRL HFB2270ML FB3270MRL FB3270SMRL HFB3270ML

50 66–190 1268C14G01 —1268C14G02 ——

50 160–480 FB2480MRL HFB2480ML FB3480MRL FB3480SMRL HFB3480ML

70 100–270 2610D53G13 4994D96G13 2610D53G31 2610D58G31 4994D96G31

100 150–480 1268C14G03 —1268C14G04 81E4647 65E4667

100 450–1550 FB21550MRL HFB21550ML FB31550MRL FB31550SMRL HFB31550ML

FB, HFB: 600 Vac;

250 Vdc

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-17

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and Modifications

Terminals

Breakers include load

terminals only. Terminals are

UL Listed as suitable for wire

type and size. When used with

aluminum conductors, use

joint compound. When line

terminals are required, order

by style number from the table

at no charge with the breaker.

Note: Magnetic only breakers

include both line and

load terminals.

Note: Suffix “L” on catalog number

indicates line and load terminals

included. If factory installation is

required, specify on order.

Terminals

Terminal Style 624B100G02

Insert collar enclosing

conductor as shown. Locate

nut on top of conductor and

tighten securely with screw

and washer. Caution: Collar

must surround conductor.

Terminal Style 624B100G10

Assemble collar on top

of conductor as shown.

Tighten securely with

screw and washer.

Terminal Style 624B100G17

Insert collar enclosing

conductor and center on

extrusion on collar. Install clip

with legs on top of conductor

and snap end around bottom

of collar.

Terminal Style 624B100G14

Assemble wire clamp

to bottom of conductor

as shown.

Maximum

Amperes

Wire

Type

Wire

Range

Package of Three Line Terminals 1

Style Number

Standard Pressure Type Terminals

20 (EB, EHB) Al/Cu #14–#10 624B100G14

100 Al/Cu #14–1/0 624B100G02

150 Al/Cu # 4–4/0 624B100G17

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

50 Al/Cu #14–#4 624B100G10

100 Al/Cu # 4–4/0 624B100G17

Conductor

Collar

Screw

Washer

Nut

Conductor

Collar

Screw

Washer

Clip

Extrusion

Conductor

Collar

Screw

Wire Clamp

Conductor

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

LFB Current Limiter

Attachment 2

Notes

1Style listed is for package of

three terminals.

2These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

3Ratings through 70A can be supplied

with terminals for Cu cable only

(#14–#2). Order by description.

4Superseded by LFD3070R.

5Superseded by LFD3150R.

6Replace with Series C HMCP and ELC

current limiters or replace with MCP

and EL current limiters

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker,

listed above, when ordering

breakers to be used in 50°C

ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Federal Specification

Classifications

EB, EHB, FB and HFB

breakers meet requirements

of Federal Specification

W-C-375b as follows:

●EB: single-pole, Class 11a;

two-, three-pole, Classes

10b, 11b, 12b

●EHB: single-pole,

Class 13a; two-,

three-pole, Class 13b

●FB: two-, three-pole,

Class 18a

●HFB: single-pole,

Class 13a; two-, three-pole,

Class 22a

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC,

Technical Resource Center

at 1-800-356-1243.

LFB Current Limiter Attachment

The LFB current limiter is

an attachment that bolts to

the load end of a standard

FB thermal-magnetic or

magnetic only breaker,

providing 200,000A

interrupting capacity (AIC) at

up to 600 Vac. Limiters for

thermal-magnetic breakers

are UL Listed. Current

limiters must be applied

as indicated in the table

on Page V12-T3-16.

Standard LFB terminals

are suitable for Cu/AI cable.

Ratings through 70A accept

(1) #14–#2, and 100 and

150A accept (1) #1–4/0.

Note: Cannot be used with

plug-in adapters. Ratings

through 70A can be supplied

with terminals for Cu cable only

(#14–#2). Order by description.

Breaker Rating,

Amperes

Limiter

Catalog Number

For Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 3

15–70 LFB3070R 4

80–150 LFB3150R 5

For Magnetic Only Breakers 36

3LFB3003MR

5LFB3005MR

10 LFB3010MR

25 LFB3025MR

30 LFB3030MR

50 LFB3050MR

70 LFB3070MR

100 LFB3100MR

150 LFB3150MR

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions.

Maximum calibration for

400 Hz is 135A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Ambient Compensating

Breakers

To order, add suffix letter

“A” to standard thermal-

magnetic breaker

catalog number.

Available in all standard

ratings of EB, EHB, FB

and HFB breakers up to

ratings of 100A. Factory

adder 20%.

Note: Not UL Listed.

V12-T3-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type CCV 120/240V Tenant Main Circuit Breaker

10,000A and 25,000A Interrupting Capacity, 100–225A

Type CCV Two-Pole

120/240V Tenant

Main Circuit Breaker

Product Description

Ratings

●120/240 Vac, two-pole,

through 225 continuous

amperes, calibrated

at 40ºC

Tripping Characteristics

●Thermal-magnetic trip,

calibrated and sealed

after assembly. Indirectly

heated thermal tripping

bimetal elements

Interrupting Capacity

at 120/240 Vac

●Type CCV—10,000A rms

symmetrical

●Type CCVH—25,000A rms

symmetrical

Handles

●Trip-free with “ON-

TRIPPED-OFF” positions.

Reset past “OFF” is

required to latch breaker

contacts after tripping

Terminals

●Standard lugs (wire

connectors) suitable for

either CU or AL wire

Standards

●Complies with UL Standard

489, breakers are listed

under UL File #E781

Backward Compatibility

●CCV and CCVH retains

same profile and footprint

of the CC and CCH breaker

allowing use in the

same applications

Product Selection

Ampere

Rating

Two-Pole Breaker

Wire Size Range, Al/Cu 10,000 AIC 25,000 AIC

100 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2100 CCVH2100

125 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2125 CCVH2125

150 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2150 CCVH2150

175 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2175 CCVH2175

200 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2200 CCVH2200

225 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2225 CCVH2225

Terminal Options

Terminal configurations available by adding the following

designator on the suffix:

W = No terminals

X = Load side terminals only

Y = Line side terminals only

CCV as tenant main breaker with CC as aftermarket option.

Cross-Reference

CCV Catalog

Number

CC Catalog

Number

CCV Catalog

Number

CC Catalog

Number

CCV2100 CC2100 CCVH2100 CCH2100

CCV2100W CC2100W CCVH2100W CCH2100W

CCV2100X CC2100X CCVH2100X CCH2100X

CCV2100Y CC2100Y CCVH2100Y CCH2100Y

CCV2125 CC2125 CCVH2125 CCH2125

CCV2125W CC2125W CCVH2125W CCH2125W

CCV2125X CC2125X CCVH2125X CCH2125X

CCV2125Y CC2125Y CCVH2125Y CCH2125Y

CCV2150 CC2150 CCVH2150 CCH2150

CCV2150W CC2150W CCVH2150W CCH2150W

CCV2150X CC2150X CCVH2150X CCH2150X

CCV2150Y CC2150Y CCVH2150Y CCH2150Y

CCV2175 CC2175 CCVH2175 CCH2175

CCV2175W CC2175W CCVH2175W CCH2175W

CCV2175X CC2175X CCVH2175X CCH2175X

CCV2175Y CC2175Y CCVH2175Y CCH2175Y

CCV2200 CC2200 CCVH2200 CCH2200

CCV2200W CC2200W CCVH2200W CCH2200W

CCV2200X CC2200X CCVH2200X CCH2200X

CCV2200Y CC2200Y CCVH2200Y CCH2200Y

CCV2225 CC2225 CCVH2225 CCH2225

CCV2225W CC2225W CCVH2225W CCH2225W

CCV2225X CC2225X CCVH2225X CCH2225X

CCV2225Y CC2225Y CCVH2225Y CCH2225Y

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-19

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type JB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type JB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue

(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 3

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.

3 Not UL Listed.

4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item.

Continuous Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting,

Amperes (Set on High Side,

Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Complete Breaker Includes

Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2Breaker Without Terminals

Standard Saf-T-Vue 3Standard Saf-T-Vue 3

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4

70 350 700 JB2070 JB2070S JB2070W JB2070SW

90 450 900 JB2090 JB2090S JB2090W JB2090SW

100 500 1000 JB2100 JB2100S JB2100W JB2100SW

125 625 1250 JB2125 JB2125S JB2125W JB2125SW

150 750 1500 JB2150 JB2150S JB2150W JB2150SW

175 875 1750 JB2175 JB2175S JB2175W JB2175SW

200 1000 2000 JB2200 JB2200S JB2200W JB2200SW

225 1125 2250 JB2225 JB2225S JB2225W JB2225SW

250 1250 2500 JB2250 JB2250S JB2250W JB2250SW

Approx. shipping weight. 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

70 350 700 JB3070 JB3070S JB3070W JB3070SW

90 450 900 JB3090 JB3090S JB3090W JB3090SW

100 500 1000 JB3100 JB3100S JB3100W JB3100SW

125 625 1250 JB3125 JB3125S JB3125W JB3125SW

150 750 1500 JB3150 JB3150S JB3150W JB3150SW

175 875 1750 JB3175 JB3175S JB3175W JB3175SW

200 1000 2000 JB3200 JB3200S JB3200W JB3200SW

225 1125 2250 JB3225 JB3225S JB3225W JB3225SW

250 1250 2500 JB3250 JB3250S JB3250W JB3250SW

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting,

Amperes (Set on High Side,

Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Breaker Only, No Terminals 5

Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

250 350 700 JB2700MW JB2700SMW JB3700MW JB3700SMW

250 625 1250 JB21250MW JB21250SMW JB31250MW JB31250SMW

250 750 1500 JB21500MW JB21500SMW JB31500MW JB31500SMW

250 875 1750 JB21750MW JB21750SMW JB31750MW JB31750SMW

250 1125 2250 JB22250MW JB22250SMW JB32250MW JB32250SMW

250 1250 2500 JB22500MW JB22500SMW JB32500MW JB32500SMW

JB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 1

Te rm i n a l s

Note

1Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

Maximum Volts Amperes

240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

600 AC 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

250 DC 10,000

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

250 (1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu TA250KB

Optional Pressure Terminals

250 (1) #4–350 kcmil Cu T250KB

Accessories and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Type JB breakers meet

requirements of Class 19a

circuit breakers as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

Note: Not UL Listed.

UL Listed Interrupting

Rating (see table)

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals (see table)

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed left.

When used with aluminum

conductors, use joint

compound. To order optional

copper only terminals, add

suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Note: Terminals are shipped

separately from breaker frame.

Magnetic Only Breakers

For description, refer to

Application Data 29-160.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker when ordering

breakers to be used in 50°C

ambients. Same price as

standard 40°C breakers.

For CSA®, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-21

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types KB and HKB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type KB and MARK 75 Type HKB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip

Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue

Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers 4

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame.

3 Not UL Listed.

4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Magnetic Trip

Setting Amperes 3Complete Breaker Includes

Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 2

Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue 3

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue 4

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

MARK 75

Catalog

NumberLow High

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3

70 350 700 KB2070 KB2070S HKB2070 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2070T

90 450 900 KB2090 KB2090S HKB2090 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2090T

100 500 1000 KB2100 KB2100S HKB2100 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2100T

125 625 1250 KB2125 KB2125S HKB2125 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2125T

150 750 1500 KB2150 KB2150S HKB2150 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2150T

175 875 1750 KB2175 KB2175S HKB2175 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2175T

200 1000 2000 KB2200 KB2200S HKB2200 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2200T

225 1125 2250 KB2225 KB2225S HKB2225 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250 HKB2225T

250 1250 2500 KB2250 KB2250S HKB2250 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2250T

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 9 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 2 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

70 350 700 KB3070 KB3070S HKB3070 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3070T

90 450 900 KB3090 KB3090S HKB3090 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3090T

100 500 1000 KB3100 KB3100S HKB3100 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3100T

125 625 1250 KB3125 KB3125S HKB3125 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3125T

150 750 1500 KB3150 KB3150S HKB3150 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3150T

175 875 1750 KB3175 KB3175S HKB3175 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3175T

200 1000 2000 KB3200 KB3200S HKB3200 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3200T

225 1125 2250 KB3225 KB3225S HKB3225 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3225T

250 1250 2500 KB3250 KB3250S HKB3250 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3250T

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 2 lbs

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 5

Trip Units Only

Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

250 350 700 HKB2700TM HKB3700TM

250 500 1000 HKB21000TM HKB31000TM

250 625 1250 HKB21250TM HKB31250TM

250 750 1500 HKB21500TM HKB31500TM

250 875 1750 HKB21750TM HKB31750TM

250 1125 2250 HKB22250TM HKB32250TM

250 1250 2500 HKB22500TM HKB32500TM

KB/MARK 75/HKB:

600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Te r m i n a l s 2

Notes

1Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

2Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame.

Maximum Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

600 AC 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

250 DC 10,000

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical., 65,000 symmetrical.

480 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

600 AC 20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 1

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

250 (1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu TA250KB

Optional Pressure Terminals

250 (1) #4–350 kcmil Cu T250KB

Accessories and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable

Breakers (see table on

Page V12-T3-21)

Type KB breakers meet

requirements for Class 19a,

as defined by Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

Type HKB breakers not

defined in W-C-375b.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

(see table)

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals (see table)

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use

joint compound. To order

optional copper only terminals,

add suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Magnetic Only Breakers

For description, refer to

Application Data 29-160. To

order these breakers, select

frame, trip unit and terminals.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply

to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other than

40°C or 50°C. For frequencies

other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer

to Eaton.

Note: Two-pole breakers are

supplied in three-pole frames

with current carrying parts

omitted from center pole.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker, listed on

Page V12-T3-21, when

ordering breakers to be

used in 50°C ambients.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Note: Two-pole breakers are

supplied in three-pole frames

with current carrying parts

omitted from center pole.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-23

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type JA

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type JA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue

(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

Special Breakers 4

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.

3 Not UL Listed.

4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting,

Amperes (Set on High Side,

Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Complete Breaker Includes

Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2Breaker Without Terminals

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3

70 350 700 JA2070 JA2070S JA2070W JA2070SW

90 450 900 JA2090 JA2090S JA2090W JA2090SW

100 500 1000 JA2100 JA2100S JA2100W JA2100SW

125 625 1250 JA2125 JA2125S JA2125W JA2125SW

150 750 1500 JA2150 JA2150S JA2150W JA2150SW

175 875 1750 JA2175 JA2175S JA2175W JA2175SW

200 1000 2000 JA2200 JA2200S JA2200W JA2200SW

225 1125 2250 JA2225 JA2225S JA2225W JA2225SW

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

70 350 700 JA3070 JA3070S JA3070W JA3070SW

90 450 900 JA3090 JA3090S JA3090W JA3090SW

100 500 1000 JA3100 JA3100S JA3100W JA3100SW

125 625 1250 JA3125 JA3125S JA3125W JA3125SW

150 750 1500 JA3150 JA3150S JA3150W JA3150SW

175 875 1750 JA3175 JA3175S JA3175W JA3175SW

200 1000 2000 JA3200 JA3200S JA3200W JA3200SW

225 1125 2250 JA3225 JA3225S JA3225W JA3225SW

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on

High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5

225 350 700 JA2700MW JA2700SMW JA3700MW JA3700SMW

225 625 1250 JA21250MW JA21250SMW JA31250MW JA31250SMW

225 750 1500 JA21500MW JA21500SMW JA31500MW JA31500SMW

225 875 1750 JA21750MW JA21750SMW JA31750MW JA31750SMW

225 1125 2250 JA22250MW JA22250SMW JA32250MW JA32250SMW

Ambient Compensating Breakers

70 350 700 JA2070A —JA3070A —

100 500 1000 JA2100A —JA3100A —

125 625 1250 JA2125A —JA3125A —

150 750 1500 JA2150A —JA3150A —

175 875 1750 JA2175A —JA3175A —

200 1000 2000 JA2200A —JA3200A —

225 1125 2250 JA2225A —JA3225A —

JA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Te rm i n a l s

Note

1Optional terminal.

Maximum Volts Amperes

240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 10,000

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

70–225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

70–225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA

70–225 1(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF

Accessories and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type JA breakers meet

requirements of Class 19a

and 20a circuit breakers

as defined by Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact Avery

Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals (see table)

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed left.

When used with aluminum

conductors, use joint

compound. To order optional

copper only terminals, add

suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Note: Terminals are shipped

separately from breaker frame.

Note: If upgrading a JA breaker

to a Series C K-Frame in a

panelboard application, order

TAD3 spacer kit.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

(see table)

Special Calibrations (see table

on Page V12-T3-23)

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions.

Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker when ordering

breakers to be used in

50°C ambients. Magnetic Only and Ambient

Compensating Breakers

For description, refer to

Application Data 29-160.

To order, select catalog

number from table on

Page V12-T3-23.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-25

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types KA and HKA

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type KA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip, Thermal-Magnetic,

Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Type HKA

Trip Units Only for Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers 5

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit.

3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.

4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

5 Not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic

Trip Setting

Amperes 2

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard MARK 75

or Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

NumberLow High

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4

70 350 700 KA2070 KA2070S HKA2070 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2070T

90 450 900 KA2090 KA2090S HKA2090 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2090T

100 500 1000 KA2100 KA2100S HKA2100 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2100T

125 625 1250 KA2125 KA2125S HKA2125 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2125T

150 750 1500 KA2150 KA2150S HKA2150 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2150T

175 875 1750 KA2175 KA2175S HKA2175 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2175T

200 1000 2000 KA2200 KA2200S HKA2200 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2200T

225 1125 2250 KA2225 KA2225S HKA2225 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2225T

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 9.5 lbs Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

70 350 700 KA3070 KA3070S HKA3070 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3070T

90 450 900 KA3090 KA3090S HKA3090 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3090T

100 500 1000 KA3100 KA3100S HKA3100 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3100T

125 625 1250 KA3125 KA3125S HKA3125 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3125T

150 750 1500 KA3150 KA3150S HKA3150 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3150T

175 875 1750 KA3175 KA3175S HKA3175 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3175T

200 1000 2000 KA3200 KA3200S HKA3200 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3200T

225 1125 2250 KA3225 KA3225S HKA3225 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3225T

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs Approx. shipping weight 2.5 lb.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers

225 350 700 HKA2700TM HKA3700TM

225 625 1250 HKA21250TM HKA31250TM

225 750 1500 HKA21500TM HKA31500TM

225 875 1750 HKA21750TM HKA31750TM

225 1125 2250 HKA22250TM HKA32250TM

Ambient Compensating Breakers

70 350 700 HKA2070TA HKA3070TA

100 500 1000 HKA2100TA HKA3100TA

125 625 1250 HKA2125TA HKA3125TA

150 750 1500 HKA2150TA HKA3150TA

175 875 1750 HKA2175TA HKA3175TA

200 1000 2000 HKA2200TA HKA3200TA

225 1125 2250 HKA2225TA HKA3225TA

KA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Te rm i n a l s

Notes

1Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

2Optional terminal.

Maximum Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 10,000

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 1

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Numbers

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4–350 kcmil Al

TA225LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA

225 2(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF

Accessories and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

when ordering breakers to be

used in 50°C ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Terminals (see table)

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use

joint compound. To order

optional copper only terminals,

add suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Type KA breakers meet

requirements for Class 19a

and 20a circuit breakers, and

Type HKA meet requirements

for Class 23a as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact Avery

Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Note: Terminals are shipped

separately from breaker frame.

Note: If upgrading a KA, HKA

breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a

panelboard application, also order

TAD3 spacer kit.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

(see table)

Magnetic Only Breakers

For description, refer to

Application Data 29-160. To

order these breakers, select

frame, trip unit and terminals.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-27

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type LBB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type LBB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue

(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.

4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting,

Amperes 2

Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type

Aluminum Terminals 3Breaker Without Terminals

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vdc, 250 Vdc 4

125 625 1250 LBB2125 LBB2125S LBB2125W LBB2125SW

150 750 1500 LBB2150 LBB2150S LBB2150W LBB2150SW

175 875 1750 LBB2175 LBB2175S LBB2175W LBB2175SW

200 1000 2000 LBB2200 LBB2200S LBB2200W LBB2200SW

225 1125 2250 LBB2225 LBB2225S LBB2225W LBB2225SW

250 1250 2500 LBB2250 LBB2250S LBB2250W LBB2250SW

300 1500 3000 LBB2300 LBB2300S LBB2300W LBB2300SW

350 1750 3500 LBB2350 LBB2350S LBB2350W LBB2350SW

400 2000 4000 LBB2400 LBB2400S LBB2400W LBB2400SW

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

125 625 1250 LBB3125 LBB3125S LBB3125W LBB3125SW

150 750 1500 LBB3150 LBB3150S LBB3150W LBB3150SW

175 875 1750 LBB3175 LBB3175S LBB3175W LBB3175SW

200 1000 2000 LBB3200 LBB3200S LBB3200W LBB3200SW

225 1125 2250 LBB3225 LBB3225S LBB3225W LBB3225SW

250 1250 2500 LBB3250 LBB3250S LBB3250W LBB3250SW

300 1500 3000 LBB3300 LBB3300S LBB3300W LBB3300SW

350 1750 3500 LBB3350 LBB3350S LBB3350W LBB3350SW

400 2000 4000 LBB3400 LBB3400S LBB3400W LBB3400SW

Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs

LBB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-28 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Magnetic Only, Ambient Compensating Breakers 2

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Terminals

Two terminals required

per pole.

Select from Page V12-T3-35.

Note: Terminals are shipped

separately from breaker.

Note: If upgrading an LBB

breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a

panelboard application, also order

TAD3 spacer kit.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type LBB breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

(see table)

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact Avery

Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Set on high side, adjustable to

lower limits.

4Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied

in three-pole frames with current

carrying parts omitted from center pole.

5Select desired terminals from

V12-T3-30, and order as separate item.

6Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3

Two-Pole Breakers 4Three-Pole Breakers

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5

400 350 700 LBB2700MW LBB2700SMW LBB3700MW LBB3700SMW

400 625 1250 LBB21250MW LBB21250SMW LBB31250MW LBB31250SMW

400 750 1500 LBB21500MW LBB21500SMW LBB31500MW LBB31500SMW

400 875 1750 LBB21750MW LBB21750SMW LBB31750MW LBB31750SMW

400 1125 2250 LBB22250MW LBB22250SMW LBB32250MW LBB32250SMW

400 1500 3000 LBB23000MW LBB23000SMW LBB33000MW LBB33000SMW

400 2000 4000 LBB24000MW LBB24000SMW LBB34000MW LBB34000SMW

Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals

125 625 1250 LBB2125A LBB2125SA LBB3125A LBB3125SA

150 750 1500 LBB2150A LBB2150SA LBB3150A LBB3150SA

175 875 1750 LBB2175A LBB2175SA LBB3175A LBB3175SA

200 1000 2000 LBB2200A LBB2200SA LBB3200A LBB3200SA

225 1125 2250 LBB2225A LBB2225SA LBB3225A LBB3225SA

250 1250 2500 LBB2250A LBB2250SA LBB3250A LBB3250SA

300 1500 3000 LBB2300A LBB2300SA LBB3300A LBB3300SA

350 1750 3500 LBB2350A LBB2350SA LBB3350A LBB3350SA

400 2000 4000 LBB2400A LBB2400SA LBB3400A LBB3400SA

Maximum

Volts Amperes

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical,

42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical,

30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical,

22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 6

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions.

Maximum calibration for

400 Hz is 300A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker when ordering

breakers to be used in

50°C ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Magnetic Only Breakers

For description, refer to

Application Data 29-160.

To order, select catalog

number from table above.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-29

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types LB and HLB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type LB and MARK 75 Type HLB 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip,

Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167.

2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.

4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting

Amperes 2

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3

Includes Pressure Type

Aluminum Terminals 3Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard Saf-T-Vue,

MARK 75

Catalog NumberLow High

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4

70 350 700 LB2070 LB2070S —LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2070T

90 450 900 LB2090 LB2090S —LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2090T

100 500 1000 LB2100 LB2100S —LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2100T

125 625 1250 LB2125 LB2125S HLB2125 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2125T

150 750 1500 LB2150 LB2150S HLB2150 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2150T

175 875 1750 LB2175 LB2175S HLB2175 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2175T

200 1000 2000 LB2200 LB2200S HLB2200 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2200T

225 1125 2250 LB2225 LB2225S HLB2225 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2225T

250 1250 2500 LB2250 LB2250S HLB2250 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2250T

300 1500 3000 LB2300 LB2300S HLB2300 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2300T

350 1750 3500 LB2350 LB2350S HLB2350 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2350T

400 2000 4000 LB2400 LB2400S HLB2400 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2400T

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 10 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 2 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

70 350 700 LB3070 LB3070S —LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3070T

90 450 900 LB3090 LB3090S —LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3090T

100 500 1000 LB3100 LB3100S —LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3100T

125 625 1250 LB3125 LB3125S HLB3125 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3125T

150 750 1500 LB3150 LB3150S HLB3150 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3150T

175 875 1750 LB3175 LB3175S HLB3175 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3175T

200 1000 2000 LB3200 LB3200S HLB3200 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3200T

225 1125 2250 LB3225 LB3225S HLB3225 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3225T

250 1250 2500 LB3250 LB3250S HLB3250 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3250T

300 1500 3000 LB3300 LB3300S HLB3300 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3300T

350 1750 3500 LB3350 LB3350S HLB3350 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3350T

400 2000 4000 LB3400 LB3400S HLB3400 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3400T

Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 2.5 lbs

LB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-30 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services. 1

Special Breakers—Trip Units Only 2

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

or trip unit only, when

ordering breakers to be

used in 50°C ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Magnetic Only Breakers

For description, refer to

Application Data 29-160.

To order, select trip unit

from table above, frame

and terminals.

Note: Not UL Listed.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type LB breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, and Type HLB

meet requirements for Class

23a, as defined by Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting,

Amperes 3

Trip Unit Only

Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable

400 350 700 HLB2700TM HLB3700TM

400 625 1250 HLB21250TM HLB31250TM

400 750 1500 HLB21500TM HLB31500TM

400 875 1750 HLB21750TM HLB31750TM

400 1125 2250 HLB22250TM HLB32250TM

400 1500 3000 HLB23000TM HLB33000TM

400 2000 4000 HLB24000TM HLB34000TM

Ambient Compensating Breakers

70 350 700 HLB2070TA HLB3070TA

90 450 900 HLB2090TA HLB3090TA

100 500 1000 HLB2100TA HLB3100TA

125 625 1250 HLB2125TA HLB3125TA

150 750 1500 HLB2150TA HLB3150TA

175 875 1750 HLB2175TA HLB3175TA

200 1000 2000 HLB2200TA HLB3200TA

225 1125 2250 HLB2225TA HLB3225TA

250 1250 2500 HLB2250TA HLB3250TA

300 1500 3000 HLB2300TA HLB3300TA

350 1750 3500 HLB2350TA HLB3350TA

400 2000 4000 HLB2400TA HLB3400TA

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C. For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer

to Eaton. See Application

Data 29-160 for information

regarding special conditions.

Maximum calibration for

400 Hz is 300A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact Avery

Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint

compound. To order optional

copper only terminals, add

suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Note: Terminals are shipped

separately from breaker. If

upgrading an LB, HLB breaker

to a Series C K-Frame in a

panelboard application, also

order TAD3 spacer kit.

Terminals

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on

Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

4Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts

omitted from center pole.

5Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

6Optional terminal.

Maximum

Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical,

42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical,

30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical,

22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 5

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical,

65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical,

35,000 symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical,

25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 5

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1

350 (1) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA350DA

400 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil Cu only T400DA2

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA

225 6(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF

350 (1) 250–500 kcmil Cu T350DA

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-31

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type DA

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type DA Breakers 250–400A, 240 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic

(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services

Type DA breakers meet

requirements of Federal

Specification W-C-375b.,

Class 14b.

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals

Terminals are UL Listed for

the wire type and size listed

below. When used with

aluminum conductors,

use joint compound.

Te r m i n a l s

Note: If upgrading a DA breaker

to a Series C K-Frame in a

panelboard application, also

order TAD3 spacer kit.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

2Two-pole breakers are supplied in

three-pole frames.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Breakers With Line Terminals Only Breakers With Line and Load Terminals

Two-Pole 2

Catalog Number

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Two-Pole 2

Catalog Number

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

250 DA2250Y DA3250Y DA2250 DA3250

300 DA2300Y DA3300Y DA2300 DA3300

350 DA2350Y DA3350Y DA2350 DA3350

400 DA2400Y DA3400Y DA2400 DA3400

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

DA: 240 Vac; 250 Vdc

Maximum

Volts Amperes

240 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000

symmetrical

250 DC 10,000

Maximum

Amperes

Number

of Cables,

Wire Range,

Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Pressure Terminals

350 (1) 250–500 kcmil

Al/Cu

TA350DA

400 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil

Cu only

T400DA2

Optional Terminals

(for Copper Cable)

350 (1) 250–500 kcmil

T350DA

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C. For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer

to Eaton. See Application

Data 29-160 for information

regarding special conditions.

Maximum 400 Hz

calibrations: Type DA, 300A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker when ordering

breakers to be used in 50°C

ambients. Same price as

standard 40°C breakers.

Note: Not UL Listed.

V12-T3-32 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type LAB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type LAB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue

(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.

4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2

Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type

Aluminum Terminals 3Breaker Without Terminals

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4

125 625 1250 LAB2125 LAB2125S LAB2125W LAB2125SW

150 750 1500 LAB2150 LAB2150S LAB2150W LAB2150SW

175 875 1750 LAB2175 LAB2175S LAB2175W LAB2175SW

200 1000 2000 LAB2200 LAB2200S LAB2200W LAB2200SW

225 1125 2250 LAB2225 LAB2225S LAB2225W LAB2225SW

250 1250 2500 LAB2250 LAB2250S LAB2250W LAB2250SW

300 1500 3000 LAB2300 LAB2300S LAB2300W LAB2300SW

350 1750 3500 LAB2350 LAB2350S LAB2350W LAB2350SW

400 2000 4000 LAB2400 LAB2400S LAB2400W LAB2400SW

Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

125 625 1250 LAB3125 LAB3125S LAB3125W LAB3125SW

150 750 1500 LAB3150 LAB3150S LAB3150W LAB3150SW

175 875 1750 LAB3175 LAB3175S LAB3175W LAB3175SW

200 1000 2000 LAB3200 LAB3200S LAB3200W LAB3200SW

225 1125 2250 LAB3225 LAB3225S LAB3225W LAB3225SW

250 1250 2500 LAB3250 LAB3250S LAB3250W LAB3250SW

300 1500 3000 LAB3300 LAB3300S LAB3300W LAB3300SW

350 1750 3500 LAB3350 LAB3350S LAB3350W LAB3350SW

400 2000 4000 LAB3400 LAB3400S LAB3400W LAB3400SW

Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs

LAB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-33

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Special Breakers 2

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Type LAB breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings 6

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals

Two terminals required

per pole.

Select from the table on

Page V12-T3-36.

Note: Terminals shipped

separately from breaker.

Magnetic Only and Ambient

Compensating Breakers

To order, select catalog

number from “Special

Breakers” table above.

Additional Accessories and

Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Set on high side, adjustable to

lower limits.

4Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in

three-pole frames with current carrying

parts omitted from center pole.

5Select desired terminals from

Page V12-T3-39 and order as

separate item.

6Interrupting capacities shown do not

apply to molded-case switches.

7Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3

Breaker Catalog Number

Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5

400 350 700 LAB2700MW LAB2700SMW LAB3700MW LAB3700SMW

400 625 1250 LAB21250MW LAB21250SMW LAB31250MW LAB31250SMW

400 750 1500 LAB21500MW LAB21500SMW LAB31500MW LAB31500SMW

400 875 1750 LAB21750MW LAB21750SMW LAB31750MW LAB31750SMW

400 1125 2250 LAB22250MW LAB22250SMW LAB32250MW LAB32250SMW

400 1500 3000 LAB23000MW LAB23000SMW LAB33000MW LAB33000SMW

400 2000 4000 LAB24000MW LAB24000SMW LAB34000MW LAB34000SMW

Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals

125 625 1250 LAB2125A —LAB3125A —

150 750 1500 LAB2150A —LAB3150A —

175 875 1750 LAB2175A —LAB3175A —

200 1000 2000 LAB2200A —LAB3200A —

225 1125 2250 LAB2225A —LAB3225A —

250 1250 2500 LAB2250A —LAB3250A —

300 1500 3000 LAB2300A —LAB3300A —

350 1750 3500 LAB2350A —LAB3350A —

400 2000 4000 LAB2400A —LAB3400A —

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer

to Eaton. See Application

Data 29-160 for information

regarding special conditions.

Maximum

calibration for

400 Hz is 300A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker when ordering

breakers to be used in 50°C

ambients. For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Maximum

Volts Amperes

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical,

42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical,

30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical,

22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 7

V12-T3-34 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types LA and HLA

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.

4 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.

5 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic

Trip Setting

Amperes 2

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard,

MARK 75,

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

NumberLow High

400A Frame Breakers 4—Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5

70 6350 700 LA2070 LA2070S HLA2070 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2070T

90 6450 900 LA2090 LA2090S HLA2090 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2090T

100 6500 1000 LA2100 LA2100S HLA2100 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2100T

125 625 1250 LA2125 LA2125S HLA2125 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2125T

150 750 1500 LA2150 LA2150S HLA2150 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2150T

175 875 1750 LA2175 LA2175S HLA2175 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2175T

200 1000 2000 LA2200 LA2200S HLA2200 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2200T

225 1125 2250 LA2225 LA2225S HLA2225 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2225T

250 1250 2500 LA2250 LA2250S HLA2250 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2250T

300 1500 3000 LA2300 LA2300S HLA2300 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2300T

350 1750 3500 LA2350 LA2350S HLA2350 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2350T

400 2000 4000 LA2400 LA2400S HLA2400 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2400T

Approx. shipping weight 21.75 lbs Approx. shipping weight 17.5 lbs Approx.shipping

weight 2.25 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

70 6350 700 LA3070 LA3070S HLA3070 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3070T

90 6450 900 LA3090 LA3090S HLA3090 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3090T

100 6500 1000 LA3100 LA3100S HLA3100 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3100T

125 625 1250 LA3125 LA3125S HLA3125 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3125T

150 750 1500 LA3150 LA3150S HLA3150 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3150T

175 875 1750 LA3175 LA3175S HLA3175 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3175T

200 1000 2000 LA3200 LA3200S HLA3200 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3200T

225 1125 2250 LA3225 LA3225S HLA3225 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3225T

250 1250 2500 LA3250 LA3250S HLA3250 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3250T

300 1500 3000 LA3300 LA3300S HLA3300 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3300T

350 1750 3500 LA3350 LA3350S HLA3350 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3350T

400 2000 4000 LA3400 LA3400S HLA3400 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3400T

Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs Approx. shipping weight 19 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 3 lbs

LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-35

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Special Breakers 2—Trip Units Only

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

4Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

5Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.

6These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—400A Frame Breakers 5

400 350 700 HLA2700TM HLA3700TM

400 625 1250 HLA21250TM HLA31250TM

400 750 1500 HLA21500TM HLA31500TM

400 875 1750 HLA21750TM HLA31750TM

400 1125 2250 HLA22250TM HLA32250TM

400 1500 3000 HLA23000TM HLA33000TM

400 2000 4000 HLA24000TM HLA34000TM

Ambient Compensating Breakers—400A Frame Breakers Only 5

70 6350 700 HLA2070TA HLA3070TA

90 6450 900 HLA2090TA HLA3090TA

100 6500 1000 HLA2100TA HLA3100TA

125 625 1250 HLA2125TA HLA3125TA

150 750 1500 HLA2150TA HLA3150TA

175 875 1750 HLA2175TA HLA3175TA

200 1000 2000 HLA2200TA HLA3200TA

225 1125 2250 HLA2225TA HLA3225TA

250 1250 2500 HLA2250TA HLA3250TA

300 1500 3000 HLA2300TA HLA3300TA

350 1750 3500 HLA2350TA HLA3350TA

400 2000 4000 HLA2400TA HLA3400TA

V12-T3-36 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

or trip unit only, when

ordering breakers to be

used in 50°C ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Terminals

Two terminals required

per pole.

Select from table at right.

Note: Terminals shipped

separately from breaker.

Magnetic Only Breakers

To order, select trip unit from

the table on Page V12-T3-35,

frame and terminals from

table at right.

Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75

frame color changed from gray

to black in mid-2002.

UL Listed Except as Noted

Type LA breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, and Type

HLA meet requirements

for Class 23a as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings 1

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C. For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions. Maximum

400 Hz calibration: 400A

frame, 300A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Maximum

Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical,

42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical,

30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical,

22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 2

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical,

65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical,

35,000 symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical,

25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 2

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint

compound. To order optional

copper only terminals, add

suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Note: Terminals shipped

separately from breaker.

Terminals, trip units and

accessories are not

interchangeable between

400 and 600A frames.

Terminals

Notes

1Interrupting capacities do not apply to molded-case switches.

2Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

3400A frame only.

4Optional terminal.

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225 3(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1

400 3(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu TA400LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

225 3(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA

225 34 (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF

400 3(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu T401LA

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-37

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types LA and HLA

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 250–600A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two-, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip

Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Breakers

Type Special Breakers 6—Trip Units Only

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

3 Terminals shipped separately from breakers.

4 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.

5 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

6 Not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip

Setting, Amperes 2

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3

Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard Saf-T-Vue,

MARK 75

Catalog

NumberLow High

600A Frame Breakers 4—Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5

250 1250 2500 2603D50G01 2603D50G13 1256C10G02 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G07

300 1500 3000 2603D50G02 2603D50G14 1256C10G03 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G08

350 1750 3500 2603D50G03 2603D50G15 1256C10G04 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G09

400 2000 4000 2603D50G04 2603D50G16 1256C10G05 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G10

500 2500 5000 LA2500 LA2500S HLA2500 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F HLA2500T

600 3000 6000 LA2600 LA2600S HLA2600 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F HLA2600T

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

250 1250 2500 2603D50G07 2603D50G019 1256C10G12 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G26

300 1500 3000 2603D50G08 2603D50G020 1256C10G13 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G27

350 1750 3500 2603D50G09 2603D50G021 1256C10G14 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G28

400 2000 4000 2603D50G10 2603D50G022 1256C10G15 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G29

500 2500 5000 LA3500 LA3500S HLA500 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F HLA3500T

600 3000 6000 LA3600 LA3600S HLA3600 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F HLA3600T

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes Two-Pole 5

Catalog Number

Three-Pole

Catalog NumberLow High

600A Frame Breakers 4—Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable

600 1125 2250 2603D47G07 2603D47G26

600 1500 3000 2603D47G08 2603D47G27

600 2000 4000 2603D47G10 2603D47G29

600 2500 5000 HLA25000TM HLA35000TM

600 3000 6000 HLA26000TM HLA36000TM

600A Frame Breakers—Ambient Compensating Breakers

250 1250 2500 5683D88G07 5683D88G26

300 1500 3000 5683D88G08 5683D88G27

350 1750 3500 5683D88G09 5683D88G28

400 2000 4000 5683D88G10 5683D88G29

500 2500 5000 HLA2500TA HLA3500TA

600 3000 6000 HLA2600TA HLA3600TA

LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-38 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

or trip unit only, when

ordering breakers to be used

in 50°C ambients. Same price

as standard 40°C breakers.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type LA breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, and type

HLA meet requirements

for Class 23a as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75

frame color changed from gray

to black in mid-2002.

UL Listed Interrupting

Ratings 1

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C. For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions.

Maximum 400 Hz calibration:

600A frame, 450A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Maximum

Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical,

42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical,

30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical,

22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 2

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical,

65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical,

35,000 symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical,

25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 20,000 2

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole. Terminals are UL

Listed for wire type and range

listed below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint

compound. To order optional

copper only terminals, add

suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Note: Terminals shipped

separately from breakers.

Terminals, trip units and

accessories are not

interchangeable between

400 and 600A frames.

Magnetic Only Breakers

To order, select frame, trip

unit and terminals from tables

on this page.

Accessories and

Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Terminals

Notes

1Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded case switches.

2Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

3For 600A frame breakers only.

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

600 3(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA600LA

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

600 3(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu T600LA

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-39

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type LAY

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type LAY 250–600A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip Thermal-Magnetic, 600A Frame 2

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

or trip unit only, when

ordering breakers to be used

in 50°C ambients. Same price

as standard 40°C breakers.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type LAY breakers are

not defined by Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

Note: Not UL Listed.

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint

compound.

Note: Terminals shipped

separately from breaker.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Terminals

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Optional terminal.

3Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

4Terminals shipped separately from breaker.

5For 600A frame breakers only.

6Not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5

Includes Pressure Type

Aluminum Terminals 4Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

250 1250 2500 LAY3250 LAY3600F 2603D46G26

300 1500 3000 LAY3300 LAY3600F 2603D46G27

350 1750 3500 LAY3350 LAY3600F 2603D46G28

400 2000 4000 LAY3400 LAY3600F 2603D46G29

500 2500 5000 LAY3500 LAY3600F HLA3500T

600 3000 6000 LAY3600 LAY3600F HLA3600T

LAY: 240 Vac

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C. For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to

Eaton. See Application

Data 29-160 for information

regarding special conditions.

Maximum 400 Hz calibration:

600A frame, 450A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Maximum

Volts Amperes

240 AC 115,000 asymmetrical,

100,000 symmetrical

Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

500 5(2) 3/0–250 kcmil Al/Cu TA602LD

600 5(2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA603LA

600 5(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA600LA

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

600 6(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu T600LA

V12-T3-40 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types MA and HMA

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type MA 125–800A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 2, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers.

3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

4 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.

5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

6 60 Hz AC only.

7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches.

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. Also magnetic only trip units available: HMA8000TM 4000–8000A.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip

Setting Amperes 3

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4

Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 4Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Saf-T-Vue,

MARK 75

Catalog NumberLow High

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 25

125 625 1250 MA2125 MA2125S HMA2125 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2125T

150 750 1500 MA2150 MA2150S HMA2150 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2150T

175 875 1750 MA2175 MA2175S HMA2175 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2175T

200 1000 2000 MA2200 MA2200S HMA2200 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2200T

225 1125 2250 MA2225 MA2225S HMA2225 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2225T

250 1250 2500 MA2250 MA2250S HMA2250 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2250T

300 1500 3000 MA2300 MA2300S HMA2300 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2300T

350 1750 3500 MA2350 MA2350S HMA2350 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2350T

400 2000 4000 MA2400 MA2400S HMA2400 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2400T

500 2500 5000 MA2500 MA2500S HMA2500 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2500T

600 3000 6000 MA2600 MA2600S HMA2600 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2600T

700 3000 6000 MA2700 6MA2700S HMA2700 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2700T 6

800 3000 6000 MA2800 6MA2800S HMA2800 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2800T 6

800 MCS 7—MA2800WK MA2800WSK — — — — Incl. in Frame

Approx. shipping weight 37 lbs Approx. shipping weight 24 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 3.5 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

125 625 1250 MA3125 MA3125S HMA3125 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3125T

150 750 1500 MA3150 MA3150S HMA3150 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3150T

175 875 1750 MA3175 MA3175S HMA3175 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3175T

200 1000 2000 MA3200 MA3200S HMA3200 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3200T

225 1125 72250 MA3225 MA3225S HMA3225 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3225T

250 1250 2500 MA3250 MA3250S HMA3250 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3250T

300 1500 3000 MA3300 MA3300S HMA3300 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3300T

350 1750 3500 MA3350 MA3350S HMA3350 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3350T

400 2000 4000 MA3400 MA3400S HMA3400 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3400T

500 2500 5000 MA3500 MA3500S HMA3500 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3500T

600 3000 6000 MA3600 MA3600S HMA3600 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3600T

700 3000 6000 MA3700 6MA3700S HMA3700 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3700T 6

800 3000 6000 MA3800 6MA3800S HMA3800 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3800T 6

800 MCS 7—MA3800WK MA3800WSK — —— — Incl. in Frame

Approx. shipping weight 44 lbs Approx. shipping weight 28 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 4 lbs

MA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-41

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services. 1

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 2

Ambient Compensating Breakers 2

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Magnetic

Trip Range 4

Trip Unit Only

Two-Pole 4Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

800 625 1250 HMA21250TM HMA31250TM

800 1000 2000 HMA22000TM HMA32000TM

800 1500 3000 HMA23000TM HMA33000TM

800 2000 4000 HMA24000TM HMA34000TM

800 3000 6000 HMA26000TM HMA36000TM

800 4000 8000 HMA28000TM HMA38000TM

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Magnetic

Trip Range 3

Trip Unit Only

Two-Pole Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

125 625 1250 HMA2125TA HMA3125TA

150 750 1500 HMA2150TA HMA3150TA

175 875 1750 HMA2175TA HMA3175TA

200 1000 2000 HMA2200TA HMA3200TA

220 1125 2250 HMA2225TA HMA3225TA

250 1250 2500 HMA2250TA HMA3250TA

300 1500 3000 HMA2300TA HMA3300TA

350 1750 3500 HMA2350TA HMA3350TA

400 2000 4000 HMA2400TA HMA3400TA

500 2500 5000 HMA2500TA HMA3500TA

600 3000 6000 HMA2600TA HMA3600TA

700 3000 6000 HMA2700TA HMA3700TA

800 3000 6000 HMA2800TA HMA3800TA

Type MA Accessories

and Modifications

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker or trip unit only,

when ordering breakers to

be used in 50°C ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type MA breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, and Type

HMA meet requirements

for Class 23a, as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Type MA UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 5

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on

Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

4Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from

center pole.

5Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches.

6Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers.

7Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C. For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC

minimum, 60 Hz AC

maximum, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for additional information

regarding special conditions.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Maximum

Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 620,000 7

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 620,000 7

V12-T3-42 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services.

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use

joint compound.

Note: Terminals are shipped

separately from breaker.

Magnetic Only and Ambient

Compensating Breakers

To order a complete breaker,

select trip unit plus frame

and terminals.

Te r m i n a l s 1

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

600 (2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA700MA1

800 (Std.) (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu TA800MA2

800 2(2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu TA801MA

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

350 (1) #1–600 kcmil Cu T350MA

600 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu T600MA1

800 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu T800MA1

Type MAY Accessories and Modifications

Type MAY 600–800A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole,

Interchangeable Trip 1

Type MAY breakers are

not defined by Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

Note: Not UL listed.

Type MAY UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Set on high side, adjustable to

lower limits.

4Terminals are shipped separately

from breaker.

e60 Hz AC only.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip

Setting, Amperes 3

Complete

Breaker

Shipped as Frame,

Trip Unit and Terminals 4

Includes Pressure

Type Aluminum

Terminals 4

Catalog Number

Frame

Only

Catalog

Number

Trip Unit

Only

Catalog

NumberLow High

Three-Pole, 240 Vac Only

600 3000 6000 MAY3600 MAY3800F HMA3600T

700 e3000 6000 MAY3700 MAY3800F HMA3700T

800 e3000 6000 MAY3800 MAY3800F HMA3800T

Maximum

Volts Amperes

240 Vac 115,000 asymmetrical,

100,000 symmetrical

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-43

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types NB and NHB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type NB 700–1200A, 600V, 60 Hz AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole Interchangeable Trip

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 78

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.

3 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic only type breakers.

4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

5 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.

6 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

7 Frames, terminals, studs, mounting hardware, dimensions and shipping weights are same as standard thermal-magnetic breakers.

8 Not UL Listed.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip

Setting, Amperes 4

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5

Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 5Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard

Catalog

Number

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog

Number

MARK 75

Catalog

Number

Standard Saf-T-Vue,

MARK 75

Catalog NumberLow High

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250V DC 36

700 3000 6000 NB2700 NB2700S HNB2700 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB2700T

800 3000 6000 NB2800 NB2800S HNB2800 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB2800T

900 4000 8000 NB2900 NB2900S HNB2900 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB2900T

1000 4000 8000 NB21000 NB21000S HNB21000 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB21000T

1200 4000 8000 NB21200 NB21200S HNB21200 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB21200T

600 3000 6000 —————HNB31200F HNB3600T

Approx. shipping weight 43 lbs Approx. shipping weight 29 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 3.5 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

700 3000 6000 NB3700 NB3700S HNB3700 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB3700T

800 3000 6000 NB3800 NB3800S HNB3800 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB3800T

900 4000 8000 NB3900 NB3900S HNB3900 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB3900T

1000 4000 8000 NB31000 NB31000S HNB31000 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB31000T

1200 4000 8000 NB31200 NB31200S HNB31200 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB31200T

Approx. shipping weight 51 lbs Approx. shipping weight 32 lbs Approx. shipping

weight 4 lbs

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Range 4

Trip Unit Only

Two-Pole 6Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

1200 3000 6000 HNB26000TM HNB36000TM

1200 4000 8000 HNB28000TM HNB38000TM

1200 5000 10000 HNB210000TM HNB310000TM

1200 6000 12000 HNB212000TM HNB312000TM

NB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

V12-T3-44 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Terminals 4

Maximum Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 12 20,000 3

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 12 20,000 3

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type,

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

1000 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu TA1000NB1

1200 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA1200NB1

Optional Copper or Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

1000 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu T1000NB1

1200 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu T1200NB1

1200 (3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu TA1201NB1

Accessories and

Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

or trip unit only, when

ordering breakers to be used

in 50°C ambients. For CSA,

see Page V12-T3-48.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Type NB breakers meet

requirements for Class 21a

circuit breakers, and Type

HNB meet requirements

for Class 23a, as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use

joint compound. To order

optional copper terminals,

add suffix “C” to complete

breaker catalog number.

Note: Frames, terminals, studs,

mounting hardware, dimensions

and shipping weights are same

as standard thermal magnetic

breakers.

Magnetic Only Breakers

To order a complete breaker,

select trip unit, plus frame

and terminals.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Notes

1250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic

only type breakers.

2Terminals shipped separately from

breaker.

3Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

4MARK 75 frame color changed from gray

to black in mid-2002.

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply

to ampere

ratings not listed as standard

or for ambients other

than 40°C or 50°C.

For

frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC

minimum, 60 Hz AC

maximum for ratings of

700A and above), refer

to Eaton. See Application

Data 29-160 for additional

information regarding

special conditions.

Maximum 400 Hz

calibration for type MA

is 475A.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-45

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type NBY

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type NBY 700–1200A, 240V, 60 Hz AC 2, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip

UL Listed

Interrupting Ratings

For all three-phase

delta, grounded B phase

applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical

Resource Center at

1-800-356-1243.

Terminals

Two terminals are required

per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for

wire type and range listed

below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use

joint compound.

Note: Terminals shipped

separately from breaker.

Te r m i n a l s

Accessories

and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete breaker

or trip unit only, when

ordering for breakers to be

used in 50°C ambients.

Note: Not UL Listed.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

Type NBY breakers are

not defined by Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

2Higher frequency calibration not

available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration

available on special order.

3Set on high side, adjustable to

lower limits.

4Terminals shipped separately

from breaker.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting

Amperes 3

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4

Includes Pressure Type

Aluminum Terminals 4Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

700 3000 6000 NBY3700 NBY31200F HNB3700T

800 3000 6000 NBY3800 NBY31200F HNB3800T

900 4000 8000 NBY3900 NBY31200F HNB3900T

1200 4000 8000 NBY31200 NBY31200F HNB31200T

NBY: 240 Vac

Maximum

Volts Amperes

240 AC 115,000 asymmetrical,

100,000 symmetrical

Max.

Amperes

Number

of Cables,

Wire Range,

Type,

Catalog

Number

Standard Al/Cu

Pressure Terminals

1000 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil

Al/Cu

TA1000NB1

1200 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil

Al/Cu

TA1200NB1

1200 (3) 500–750 kcmil

Al/Cu

TA1201NB1

Alternate Copper

Pressure Terminals

1000 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil

T1000NB1

1200 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil

T1200NB1

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply

to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC

minimum, 60 Hz AC

maximum), refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for additional information

regarding special

conditions.

Note: Not UL Listed.

V12-T3-46 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type PB

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type PB 600–25s00A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.

3 Available only on magnetic only breakers.

4 Higher magnetic trip settings are available as special calibration. Refer to magnetic only breakers for specific trip ranges.

5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

6 Shipped separately from breaker.

7 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting,

Amperes 45

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Rear Connectors

Includes Busbar Connectors 6Frame Only Trip Unit Only

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac Only 7

600 1500 5000 PB2600 PB22500F PB2600T

700 1500 5000 PB2700 PB22500F PB2700T

800 1500 5000 PB2800 PB22500F PB2800T

900 1500 5000 PB2900 PB22500F PB2900T

1000 1500 5000 PB21000 PB22500F PB21000T

1200 2000 6000 PB21200 PB22500F PB21200T

1400 2500 7000 PB21400 PB22500F PB21400T

1600 3000 8000 PB21600 PB22500F PB21600T

1800 3000 8000 PB21800 PB22500F PB21800T

2000 3000 8000 PB22000 PB22500F PB22000T

Approx. shipping weight 132 lbs 98 lbs 18 lbs

2500 3000 8000 PB22500 PB22500F PB22500T

Approx. shipping weight 144 lbs 98 lbs 18 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only—Not UL Listed

600 1500 5000 PB3600 PB32500F PB3600T

700 1500 5000 PB3700 PB32500F PB3700T

800 1500 5000 PB3800 PB32500F PB3800T

900 1500 5000 PB3900 PB32500F PB3900T

1000 1500 5000 PB31000 PB32500F PB31000T

1200 2000 6000 PB31200 PB32500F PB31200T

1400 2500 7000 PB31400 PB32500F PB31400T

1600 3000 8000 PB31600 PB32500F PB31600T

1800 3000 8000 PB31800 PB32500F PB31800T

2000 3000 8000 PB32000 PB32500F PB32000T

Approx. shipping weight 155 lbs 108 lbs 23 lbs

2500 3000 8000 PB32500 PB32500F PB32500T

Approx. shipping weight 173 lbs 108 lbs 23 lbs

Rear Connected PB

Breaker: 600 Vac

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-47

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type PBF

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type PBF Front-Connected 600–2000A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole,

Interchangeable Trip

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.

3 Available only on magnetic only breakers.

4 Included with frame.

5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes

(Set on High Side, Adjustable

to Lower Limits)

Complete Breaker Shipped As:

Includes Busbar

Connectors 4

Frame Only Includes

Busbar Connectors 4

Trip Unit

Only

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac 5

600 1500 5000 PBF2600 PBF22000F PBF2600T

700 1500 5000 PBF2700 PBF22000F PBF2700T

800 1500 5000 PBF2800 PBF22000F PBF2800T

900 1500 5000 PBF2900 PBF22000F PBF2900T

1000 1500 5000 PBF21000 PBF22000F PBF21000T

1200 2000 6000 PBF21200 PBF22000F PBF21200T

1400 2500 7000 PBF21400 PBF22000F PBF21400T

1600 3000 8000 PBF21600 PBF22000F PBF21600T

1800 3000 8000 PBF21800 PBF22000F PBF21800T

2000 3000 8000 PBF22000 PBF22000F PBF22000T

Three-Pole, 600 Vac—Not UL Listed

600 1500 5000 PBF3600 PBF32000F PBF3600T

700 1500 5000 PBF3700 PBF32000F PBF3700T

800 1500 5000 PBF3800 PBF32000F PBF3800T

900 1500 5000 PBF3900 PBF32000F PBF3900T

1000 1500 5000 PBF31000 PBF32000F PBF31000T

1200 2000 6000 PBF31200 PBF32000F PBF31200T

1400 2500 7000 PBF31400 PBF32000F PBF31400T

1600 3000 8000 PBF31600 PBF32000F PBF31600T

1800 3000 8000 PBF31800 PBF32000F PBF31800T

2000 3000 8000 PBF32000 PBF32000F PBF32000T

PBF Front Connected:

600 Vac

V12-T3-48 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types PB and PBF Accessories and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services. 1

PB breakers are not UL Listed.

Special Breakers 2 Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable 3

Trip Unit Only

Accessories

and Modifications

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

50°C Calibration

Add suffix “V” to catalog

number for complete

breaker or trip unit only,

when ordering breakers to

be used in 50°C ambients.

Type PB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 25a

circuit breakers as defined

by Federal Specification

W-C-375b.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Magnetic Trip Range,

Amperes 4Two-Pole 5Three-Pole

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

For Rear-Connected Type PB Breakers

2000 1500 5000 PB25000TM PB35000TM

2000 2000 6000 PB26000TM PB36000TM

2000 2500 7000 PB27000TM PB37000TM

2000 3000 8000 PB28000TM PB38000TM

2000 3500 10,000 PB210000TM PB310000TM

2000 4000 12,000 PB212000TM PB312000TM

2500 4000 12,000 373D488G08 373D488G09

For Front-Connected Type PBF Breakers

2000 1500 5000 PBF25000TM PBF35000TM

2000 2000 6000 PBF26000TM PBF36000TM

2000 2500 7000 PBF27000TM PBF37000TM

2000 3000 8000 PBF28000TM PBF38000TM

2000 3500 10,000 PBF210000TM PBF310000TM

2000 4000 12,000 PBF212000TM PBF312000TM

Special Calibrations

Special calibration price

additions apply to ampere

ratings not listed as

standard, or for ambients

other than 40°C or 50°C.

For frequencies other than

0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.

See Application Data 29-160

for information regarding

special conditions.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Interrupting Ratings

For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243.

Magnetic Only Breakers

To order a complete breaker, select trip unit, plus frame

and connectors.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Busbar Connections

Busbar Connections—“T” Connector

(For Cu/AI Bus)

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers

through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.

Note: Shipped separately from breaker.

“C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus)

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of

2500A breakers.

Cable Connector

Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers.

Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables.

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference

on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Not UL Listed.

3Frames, connectors, dimensions and shipping weights are same as thermal-magnetic

breakers.

4Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

5Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted

from center pole.

6Based on NEMA test procedure.

Maximum Volts Amperes

240 AC 2150,000 asymmetrical, 125,000 symmetrical

480 AC 2115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical

600 AC 2115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical

250 DC 275,000A 6

Catalog Number

BA2000PB

Breaker Amperes Catalog Number

2500 BA2500PB

Catalog Number

505C706G04

“T” Connector

“C” Connector

Cable Connector

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-49

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types LC, LCC, LCA, LCCA, MARK 75 Types HLC, HLCC, HLCA, HLCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included

for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only

Breakers for Applications at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

3 UL Recognized component.

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Number

of Poles 2

Standard

(Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Types LC 150 and LCA 150 (75–150A)

2LC2150F LC2150FM LCA2150F

3LC3150F LC3150FM LCA3150F

MARK 75 Types HLC 150 and HLCA 150 (75–150A)

2HLC2150F HLC2150FM HLCA2150F

3HLC3150F HLC3150FM HLCA3150F

Types LC 300 and LCA 300 (150–300A)

2LC2300F LC2300FM LCA2300F

3LC3300F LC3300FM LCA3300F

MARK 75 Types HLC 300 and HLCA 300 (150–300A)

2HLC2300F HLC2300FM HLCA2300F

3HLC3300F HLC3300FM HLCA3300F

Types LC 400 and LCA 400 (200–400A)

2LC2400F LC2400FM LCA2400F

3LC3400F LC3400FM LCA3400F

MARK 75 Types HLC 400 and HLCA 400 (200–400A)

2HLC2400F HLC2400FM HLCA2400F

3HLC3400F HLC3400FM HLCA3400F

Types LC 600 and LCA 600 (300–600A)

2LC2600F LC2600FM LCA2600F

3LC3600F LC3600FM LCA3600F

MARK 75 Types HLC 600 and HLCA 600 (300–600A)

2HLC2600F HLC2600FM HLCA2600F

3HLC3600F HLC3600FM HLCA3600F

Number of

Poles 2

Standard

(Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Types LCC 600 and LCCA 600 (300–600A)

3LCC3600F —LCCA3600F

MARK 75 Types HLCC 600 and HLCCA 600 (300–600A)

3HLCC3600F — HLCCA3600F

LCA: 600 Vac

V12-T3-50 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA,

LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG,

HLCCG, HLCGA, HLCCGA

SELTRONIC with Built-In

Ground Fault Protection

Complete breaker requires

frame and rating plug. See

the table and terminals on

Page V12-T3-60

. Extra current

transformer

included for

neutral. See accessories on

Page V12-T3-65 for remote

ground fault trip indicator.

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Note: These breakers use

LC terminals. The fourth

CT uses MC breaker terminals,

Page V12-T3-53.

Note: Available without extra

CT for neutral. Order by

description as similar to above

except without neutral CT or

external CT terminal

connections at same price.

Note the standard ground fault

unit can also be used without

the neutral CT.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

3For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Number

of Poles 2

Standard (Long Delay,

Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip

Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable

Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip

Ground Fault Characteristics

Pickup Setting

Amperes

Time

SettingCatalog Number

Types LCG 150 and LCGA 150 (75–150A) 3

3LCG3150F LCGA3150F 50–150 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HLCG 150 and HLCGA 150 (75–150A) 3

3HLCG3150F HLCGA3150F 50–150 3.5–30 Cy

Types LCG 300 and LCGA 300 (150–300A) 3

3LCG3300F LCGA3300F 60–300 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HLCG 300 and HLCGA 300 (150–300A) 3

3HLCG3300F HLCGA3300F 60–300 3.5–30 Cy

Types LCG 400 and LCGA 400 (200–400A) 3

3LCG3400F LCGA3400F 0–400 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HLCG 400 and HLCGA 400 (200–400A) 3

3HLCG3400F HLCGA3400F 80–400 3.5–30 Cy

Types LCG 600 and LCGA 600 (300–600 Amperes) 3

3LCG3600F LCGA3600F 120–600 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HLCG 600 and HLCGA 600 (300–600A) 3

3HLCG3600F HLCGA3600F 120–600 3.5–30 Cy

Number

of Poles 2

Standard (Long Delay,

Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip

Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable

Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip

Ground Fault Characteristics

Pickup Setting

Amperes

Time

SettingCatalog Number

Types LCCG 600 and LCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3

3LCCG3600F LCCGA3600F 120–600 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HLCCG 600 and HLCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3

3HLCCG3600F HLCCGA3600F 120–600 3.5–30 Cy

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-51

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA, LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG, HLCCG, HLCGA,

HLCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection

Accessories and Modifications

Field-Mountable Attachments 12345

For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.

Type LC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit

breakers, and Type HLC meet requirements for Class 23a as

defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 8

For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact

Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243.

Additional Accessories and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.

Terminals

Note: Order separately.

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below.

When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound.

150, 300 and 400A Frames Only

600A Frame Only

Notes

1Only one attachment may be mounted per breaker.

2Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for other combinations.

3Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments, and should be ordered

by description for factory mounting.

4Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.

5Left pole mounting.

6Rated 48 volts minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.

7Not for use on ground fault applications.

8Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Description Style Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6

1371D11G22

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 71371D11G32

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,

plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6

1371D11G15

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 71371D11G25

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from 24 Vdc source 1371D93G01

1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D11G03

24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D94G08

Maximum Volts Amperes

Standard Breakers

240 AC 50,000 Asymmetrical, 42,000 Symmetrical

480 AC 35,000 Asymmetrical, 30,000 Symmetrical

600 AC 25,000 Asymmetrical, 22,000 Symmetrical

MARK 75 Breakers

240 AC 75,000 Asymmetrical, 65,000 Symmetrical

480 AC 40,000 Asymmetrical, 35,000 Symmetrical

600 AC 30,000 Asymmetrical, 25,000 Symmetrical

Maximum

Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1

400 (1)

–

250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus

(1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu TA400LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA

225 (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF

400 (1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu T401LA

Maximum

Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

500 (2) 250–350 kcmil Al/Cu TA602LD

600 (2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA603LA

600

(std.)

(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA600LA

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

600 (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu T600LA

V12-T3-52 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types MC, MCC, MCA, MCCA, MARK 75 Types HMC, HMCC, HMCA, HMCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only 1

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on

Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole.

3 UL Recognized component.

Type MC800 molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Number

of Poles 2

Standard

(Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Types MC and MCA (400–800A)

2MC2800F MC2800FM MCA2800F

3MC3800F MC3800FM MCA3800F

MARK 75 Types HMC and HMCA (400–800A)

2HMC2800F HMC2800FM HMCA2800F

3HMC3800F HMC3800FM HMCA3800F

Number

of Poles 2

Standard

(Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Types MCC and MCCA (400–800A)

3MCC3800F —MCCA3800F

MARK 75 Types HMCC and HMCCA (400–800A)

3HMCC3800F — HMCCA3800F

MCA: 600 Vac

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-53

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types MCG, MCCG, MCGA, MCCGA and MARK 75 Types HMCG,

HMCCG, HMCGA, HMCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground

Fault Protection

Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table

and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer

included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for

remote ground fault trip indicator.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services. 1

Note: Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and

two for the neutral CT. The standard ground fault unit can also be used

without the neutral CT. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black

in mid-2002.

Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Accessories and Modifications

Field-Mountable Attachments 3456

Additional Accessories and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.

Rating Plugs

Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60.

For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.

Type MC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a,

and MARK 75. Type HMC meet Class 23a as defined by

Federal Spec. W-C-375b.

UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 9

Terminals

Terminals—Two Terminals Required Per Pole

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.

3Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.

4Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker.

5For other possible combinations, refer to factory.

6Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered

by description.

7Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.

8Not for ground fault applications.

9Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

jType Al/Cu pressure terminal.

Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral current

transformers. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Note: Available without extra CT for neutral. Order by description as

similar to above except without neutral CT or external CT terminal

connections at same price.

Number

of Poles

Standard

(Long Delay,

Short Time and

Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay,

Short Time, Adjustable

Short Delay Time and

Ground Fault Trip

Ground Fault

Characteristics

Pickup

Setting

Amperes

Time

SettingCatalog Number

Types MCG and MCGA (400–800A) 2

3MCG3800F MCGA3800F 80–800 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HMCG and HMCGA (400–800A) 2

3HMCG3800F HMCGA3800F 80–800 3.5-30 Cy

Number

of Poles

Standard

(Long Delay,

Short Time and

Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay,

Short Time, Adjustable

Short Delay Time and

Ground Fault Trip

Ground Fault

Characteristics

Pickup

Setting

Amperes

Time

SettingCatalog Number Catalog Number

Types MCCG and MCCGA (400–800A) 2

3MCCG3800F MCCGA3800F 80–800 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HMCCG and HMCCGA (400–800A) 2

3HMCCG3800F HMCCGA3800F 80–800 3.5–30 Cy

Description Style Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7

1371D72G22

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 81371D72G32

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,

plus 1a-1b auxiliary switch

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7

1371D72G15

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 81371D72G25

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source 1370D85G01

1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D72G03

Breaker

AC Volts

240 480 600

MC, MCG 42,000 30,000 22,000

HMC, HMCG 65,000 50,000 25,000

Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

600 (2) #1–500 kcmil TA700MA1 j

800 (std.) (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2 j

800 (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA j

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

600 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1

800 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1

V12-T3-54 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac

Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included

for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Type NC, NCA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac—Frame Only 2

Types NCG, NCGA, and MARK 75 Types HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection

Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included

for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.

Note: The standard ground fault unit above can also be used without the neutral CT. Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and

two for the neutral CT.

Types NCG, NCGA and MARK 75 Type HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection—

Frame Only

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on

Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60. For terminals, see the table on Page V12-T3-55.

3 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole.

4 UL Recognized component.

5 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.

Type NC 1200A molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Number

of Poles 3

Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 4

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 Seconds)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Types NC and NCA (800–1200A)

2NC21200F NC21200FM NCA21200F

3NC31200F NC31200FM NCA31200F

Mark 75 Types HNC and HNCA (800–1200A)

2HNC21200F HNC21200FM HNCA21200F

3HNC31200F HNC31200FM HNCA31200F

Number

of Poles

Standard (Long Delay, Short Time

and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable

Short Delay Time, and Ground Fault Trip

Ground Fault Characteristics

Pickup Setting

Amperes Time SettingCatalog Number Catalog Number

Types NCG and NCGA (800–1200A) 5

3NCG31200F NCGA31200F 120–1200 3.5–30 Cy

MARK 75 Types HNCG and HNCGA (800–1200A) 5

3HNCG31200F HNCGA31200F 120–1200 3.5–30 Cy

NC: 600 Vac

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-55

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG,

HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac

Accessories and Modifications

Field-Mountable Attachments—Left Handed 12345

For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.

Type NC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a,

and MARK 75. Type HNC meet Class 23a as defined by Federal

Spec. W-C-375b.

UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 8

Rating Plugs

Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60.

Terminals

Note: Two terminals required per pole.

Terminals 9

Additional Accessories and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.

Note: MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

Notes

1For other possible combinations, refer to factory.

2Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered

by description.

3Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.

4Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker.

5Left pole mounting.

6Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.

7Not for ground fault applications.

8Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

9Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral

current transformers.

jType Al/Cu pressure terminal.

Description Style Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 61372D39G13

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 71372D39G23

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,

plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 61372D39G16

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 71372D39G26

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source 1371D94G05

1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D39G03

24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D94G08

Breaker

AC Volts

240 480 600

NC, NCG 42,000 30,000 22,000

HNC, HNCG 65,000 50,000 25,000

Maximum

Amperes

Number of Cables,

Wire Range, Type

Catalog

Number

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

1000 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA1000NB1 j

1200 (std.) (4) 4/0–500 kcmil TA1200NB1 j

1200 (3) 500–750 kcmil TA1201NB1 j

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

1000 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil T1000NB1

1200 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil T1200NB1

V12-T3-56 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA 2000, 2500 and 3000A SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60 and rear connectors (connectors are included in

3000A and all front-connected frames.) Suitable for reverse-feed applications.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only

Breakers for Standard Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

3 UL Recognized component.

4 UL Listed for standard applications.

5 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure.

Number

of Poles 2

Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Type PC 2000, 1000 to 2000A 4

Rear-Connected Breakers

Type PCA 2000 4

Rear-Connected Breakers

2PC22000F PC22000FM PCA22000F

3PC32000F PC32000FM PCA32000F

Front-Connected Breakers Front-Connected Breakers

2PCF22000F PCF22000FM PCFA22000F

3PCF32000F PCF32000FM PCFA32000F

Type PC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 4

Rear-Connected Breakers

Type PCA 2500 4

Rear-Connected Breakers

2PC22500F PC22500FM PCA22500F

3PC32500F PC32500FM PCA32500F

Front-Connected Breakers Front-Connected Breakers

2PCF22500F PCF22500FM PCFA22500F

3PCF32500F PCF32500FM PCFA32500F

Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 4Type PCA 3000 4

2PC23000F PC23000FM PCA23000F

3PC33000F PC33000FM PCA33000F

Number

of Poles 2

Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable

Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Type PCC 2000, 1000 to 2000A 5—Rear-Connected Breakers

2PCC22000F PCC22000FM PCCA22000F

3PCC32000F PCC32000FM PCCA32000F

Front Connected Breakers

2PCCF22000F PCCF22000FM PCCFA22000F

3PCCF32000F PCCF32000FM PCCFA32000F

Type PCC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 5—Rear-Connected Breakers

2PCC22500F PCC22500FM PCCA22500F

3PCC32500F PCC32500FM PCCA32500F

Front-Connected Breakers

2PCCF22500F PCCF22500FM PCCFA22500F

3PCCF32500F PCCF32500FM PCCFA32500F

Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 5

2PCC23000F PCC23000FM PCCA23000F

3PCC33000F PCC33000FM PCCA33000F

PC: 600 Vac

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-57

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and

Modifications

Drawout Mounting Breakers,

Three-Pole Only

Breaker frame and complete

drawout frame with safety

tripping interlock.

Order by description.

Secondary contacts supplied

as required at no extra

charge. Order required rating

plug separately. Refer to

Page V12-T3-79.

Note: Includes breakers without

adjustable short delay time.

Rating Plugs

Select from the table on

Page V12-T3-60.

Stationary portion of drawout

frame only for future breaker

installations, three-pole only.

Refer to Page V12-T3-79.

Special Type PCC Breakers for

SCR Power Supplies

These drawout mounting

breakers are designed with

a 2 to 4 times magnetic trip

adjustment and special time

delay trip characteristics to

provide maximum protection

and coordination with SCR

power supplies on offshore

drilling rigs. Suitable for

application at 100% of rating.

Order by description.

Secondary contacts supplied

as required. Order standard

rating plugs separately.

Availability: PCC2000,

PCC2500 drawout-mounting

breakers.

Type PC and PCC meet

requirements of Class 25a

as defined in Federal Spec.

W-C-375b.

For CSA, see

Page V12-T3-48.

UL Listed Interrupting Capacity rms Symmetrical Amperes

(Standard and Ground Fault Breakers) 1

Note

1Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

Additional Accessories

and Modifications

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–

V12-T3-79.

Breaker

AC Volts

240 480 600

PC, PCC 125,000 100,000 100,000

V12-T3-58 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG,

PCCGA SELTRONIC with

Built-In Ground Fault

Protection Includes Extra

Current Transformer for

Neutral (Optional Remote

Ground Fault Trip Indicator

Kit, Page V12-T3-65)

Complete breaker requires

frame and rating plug. See the

table on Page V12-T3-60 and

rear connectors (except front-

connected frames and 3000A

frames include connectors).

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Note: The standard ground fault

unit listed can also be used

without the neutral CT.

Note: Available without

extra CT for neutral. Order

by description as similar to

above except without neutral

CT or external CT terminal

connections at same price.

Older catalog numbers:

PCFGX—”X” means without

fourth CT.

Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Notes

1UL Listed for standard applications.

2For application other than standard residual schemes, refer to Application Data 29-160.

3These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure.

Number

of Poles

Standard (Long Delay,

Short Time and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault

Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time

(0.08 –0.30 Seconds)

Ground Fault Characteristics

Pickup

Setting

Time

SettingCatalog Number Catalog Number

Type PCG 2000 12—Rear-Connected Breakers Type PCGA 2000 12 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3PCG32000F PCGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Front-Connected Breakers

3PCFG32000F PCFGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Ty p e P C G 2 5 0 0 12—Rear-Connected Breakers Type PCGA 2500 12 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3PCG32500F PCGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Front-Connected Breakers

3PCFG32500F PCFGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Type PCG 3000 12 Type PCGA 3000 12 1600 to 3000A 2

3PCG33000F PCGA33000F 300–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Number

of Poles

Standard (Long Delay,

Short Time and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault

Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time

(0.08 –0.30 Seconds)

Ground Fault

Characteristics

Pickup

Setting

Time

SettingCatalog Number Catalog Number

Type PCCG 2000 3—Rear-Connected Breakers Type PCCGA 2000 3 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3PCCG32000F PCCGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Front-Connected Breakers

3PCCFG32000F PCCFGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Type PCCG 2500 3—Rear-Connected Breakers Type PCCGA 2500 3 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3PCCG32500F PCCGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Front-Connected Breakers

3PCCFG32500F PCCFGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Type PCCG 3000 3Type PCCGA 3000 3 1600 to 3000A 2

3PCCG33000F PCCGA33000F 300–1200 3.5–30 cycles

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-59

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In

Ground Fault Protection Accessories and Modifications

PC breakers are not UL Listed.

Field-Mountable Attachments 123

Rear Bus Connectors

Two required per pole. Fixed mounting breakers.

Rear Bus Connectors

Racking Crank for

Drawout Frames

To engage or withdraw

the moving portion of

the drawout. A standard

0.50-inch hex socket with

extension can be used for

this purpose.

Racking Crank

Cell Switches Mounted on

Drawout Frames, All Ratings

A maximum of four switches

can be provided. Order by

description. Each switch

provides a NO and NC

contact that transfers before

reaching the test position

when being withdrawn, and

after the test position when

being racked in.

Approximate Shipping Weights, PC and PCC Breakers

(Three-Pole)

Description Style Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 4

1372D35G22

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 51372D35G32

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source

plus 1A-1B auxiliary switch

32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 4

1372D35G15

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 51372D35G25

2A-2B auxiliary switch 1372D35G18

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source 1371D95G01

1A-1B auxiliary switch 1372D35G03

1A-1B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip 1371D95G04

2A-2B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip 1371D95G07

3A-3B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip 1371D95G10

Breaker Frame 6Connector Style/Catalog Number

PC2000 7, PCC2000 7BA2000PB

PC2500 7, PCC2500 7BA2500PB

PC3000, PCC3000 Included in frame

Style Number

765A767G01

Rating

Breaker

PC, PCC PCF, PCCF PCG, PCCG PCFG, PCCFG

2000 136 lbs 163 lbs 160 lbs 185 lbs

2500 145 lbs 175 lbs 170 lbs 200 lbs

3000 220 lbs — 245 lbs —

Busbar Connections

Busbar Connections—“T” Connector

(For Cu/AI Bus)

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers

through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.

Note: Shipped separately from breaker.

“C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus)

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of

2500A breakers.

Cable Connector

Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers.

Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables.

Notes

1For other possible combinations, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

2Only one of these attachments may be mounted per breaker.

3Left pole mounting.

4Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.

5Not for ground fault applications.

6Also apply to equivalent ratings of PCG and PCCG ground fault breakers.

7Not required for front-connected frames.

Catalog Number

BA2000PB

Breaker Amperes Catalog Number

2500 BA2500PB

Catalog Number

505C706G04

“T” Connector

“C” Connector

Cable Connector

V12-T3-60 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

SELTRONIC Rating Plug Selection Data

Rating plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and breakers with built-in ground fault protection.

Rating Plug Selection Data

Notes

1Ampere rating when used in short time only frames:

LC-150: 150A MC-800: 800A PC-3000: 3000A

LC-300: 300A NC-1200: 1200A LCL-250: 250A

LC-400: 400A PC-2000: 2000A LCL-400: 400A

LC-600: 600A PC-2500: 2500A

2Magnetic trip range of adjustable rating plugs:

LC, HLC, MC, HMC: 3 to 10 times ampere setting

NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LCL-400: 2 to 8 times ampere setting

LCL-250: 3 to 9 times ampere setting

3Adjustable 70 to 100% except as noted.

4Adjustable 75 to 100%.

5Adjustable 50 to 100%.

6Adjustable 80 to 100%.

Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for old style (three prong) ground fault

rating plugs.

Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames)

Continuous

Ampere

Rating 1

Magnetic Trip

Setting, Amperes

Fixed

Rating Plugs

Adjustable

Rating Plugs 23

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

For 150A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA

75 225 750 1LC75 —

90 270 900 1LC90 —

100 300 1000 1LC100 A1LC100 4

125 375 1250 1LC125 A1LC125

150 450 1500 1LC150 A1LC150 5

For 300A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA

150 450 1500 3LC150 —

175 525 1750 3LC175 —

200 600 2000 3LC200 —

225 675 2250 3LC225 A3LC225

250 750 2500 3LC250 A3LC250

275 825 2750 3LC275 A3LC275

300 900 3000 3LC300 A3LC300 5

For 400A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA

200 600 2000 4LC200 —

225 675 2250 4LC225 —

250 750 2500 4LC250 —

300 900 3000 4LC300 A4LC300

350 1050 3500 4LC350 A4LC350

400 1200 4000 4LC400 A4LC400 5

For 600A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA, LCC,

LCCA, HLCC, HLCCA, LCCG, LCCGA, HLCCG, HLCCGA

300 900 3000 6LC300 —

350 1050 3500 6LC350 —

400 1200 4000 6LC400 A6LC400 4

450 1350 4500 6LC450 A6LC450

500 1500 5000 6LC500 A6LC500

600 1800 6000 6LC600 A6LC600 5

For 800A Frames: MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA, HMC, HMCA, HMCG, HMCGA,

MCC, MCCA, HMCC, HMCCA, MCCG, MCCGA, HMCCG, HMCCGA, MDS

400 1200 4000 8MC400 —

500 1500 5000 8MC500 A8MC500 6

600 1800 6000 8MC600 A8MC600

700 2100 7000 8MC700 A8MC700

800 2400 8000 8MC800 A8MC800 5

Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames)

Continuous

Ampere

Rating 1

Magnetic Trip

Setting, Amperes

Fixed

Rating Plugs

Adjustable

Rating Plugs 23

Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number

For 1200A Frames: NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA

800 1600 6400 12NC800 A12NC800 4

900 1800 7200 12NC900 A12NC900

1000 2000 8000 12NC1000 A12NC1000

1200 2400 9600 12NC1200 A12NC1200 5

For 2000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA

1000 2000 8000 20PC1000 —

1200 2400 9600 20PC1200 —

1400 2800 11,200 20PC1400 —

1600 3200 12,800 20PC1600 A20PC1600

1800 3600 14,400 20PC1800 A20PC1800

2000 4000 16,000 20PC2000 A20PC2000 5

For 2500A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA

1400 2800 11,200 25PC1400 —

1600 3200 12,800 25PC1600 —

1800 3600 14,400 25PC1800 A25PC1800

2000 4000 16,000 25PC2000 A25PC2000

2500 5000 20,000 25PC2500 A25PC2500 5

For 3000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA

1600 3200 12,800 30PC1600 —

1800 3600 14,400 30PC1800 —

2000 4000 16,000 30PC2000 —

2500 5000 20,000 30PC2500 A30PC2500

3000 6000 24,000 30PC3000 A30PC3000 5

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-61

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Molded-Case Switches

Molded-case switches are UL Listed devices and are available

only as high magnetic trip type with fixed trip setting.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued

products and services. 1

Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip

(Fixed Trip Setting)

Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data

Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip—

Trip Setting and Tolerance

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference

on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Catalog number suffix identification:

K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting)

S = Saf-T-Vue cover

L = With line and load terminals

W = No terminals

3Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker.

Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171.

Number

of Poles

Maximum

Volts

Maximum

Amperes

Switch

Catalog Number 23

2240 400 DA2400WK

3240 400 DA3400WK

1120 100 EB1100LK

2240 100 EB2100LK

3240 100 EB3100LK

3240 100 EB3100SLK

1277 100 EHB1100LK

2480 100 EHB2100LK

3480 100 EHB3100LK

3480 100 EHB3100SLK

2600 100 FB2100LK

2600 150 FB2150LK

3600 100 FB3100LK

3600 150 FB3150LK

3600 150 FB3150SLK

4277/480 100 FB4100LK

4277/480 150 FB4150LK

2600 225 JA2225WK

2600 225 JA2225WSK

3600 225 JA3225WK

3600 225 JA3225WSK

2600 250 JB2250WK

2600 250 JB2250WSK

3600 250 JB3250WK

3600 250 JB3250WSK

2600 225 KA2225WK

2600 225 KA2225WSK

3600 225 KA3225WK

3600 225 KA3225WSK

2600 250 KB2250WK

2600 250 KB2250WSK

3600 250 KB3250WK

3600 250 KB3250WSK

2600 400 LB2400WK

2600 400 LB2400WSK

3600 400 LB3400WK

3600 400 LB3400WSK

2600 400 LBB2400WK

2600 400 LBB2400WSK

3600 400 LBB3400WK

3600 400 LBB3400WSK

MCS

Type

Maximum

Switch

Amperes

Wire

Type

Number

of Wires

Wire

Range

Terminal Type

or Catalog

Number

Standard Terminals

DA, LB, LBB 400 Cu only 2 3/0–250 kcmil T400DA2

EB, EHB, FB 100 Cu 1 #14–1/0 Pressure

FB 150 Cu/Al 1 #4–4/0 Pressure

JA, KA 225 Cu/Al 1 #4–350 kcmil TA225LA1

JB, KB

250

Cu/Al 1 #4–350 kcmil TA250KB

Optional Terminals

DA, LB, LBB 400 — — — —

EB, EHB, FB 100 Cu/Al 1 #4–4/0 Pressure

FB 150 — — — —

JA, KA 225 Cu 1 #6–350 kcmil T225LA

JB, KB 250 Cu 1 #4–350 kcmil T250KB

Frame Rating

Trip Setting

(Amperes)

Tolerance

(%)

EB 100 1000 ±20

EHB/FB 100 1200 ±20

FB 150 1500 ±20

DA/LB/LBB 400 4000 +10

– 0

JA/KA 225 2250 +10

– 0

JB/KB 250 2500 +10

– 0

V12-T3-62 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip

(Fixed Trip Setting)

Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data

Molded-Case Switches With High Magnetic Trip—

Trip Setting and Tolerance

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference

on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

2Catalog number suffix identification:

K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting)

S = Saf-T-Vue cover

W = No terminals

3Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker.

Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171.

4For molded-case switch types LC, LCC—use LA attachments;

MC and MCC—use MA attachments; NC—use NB attachments.

5For molded-case switch types PC, PCC and PCF, rating plug is included and use SELTRONIC

PC attachments.

Number

of Poles

Maximum

Volts

Maximum

Amperes

Switch

Catalog Number 23

2240225CA2225KW

3240225CA3225KW

2600 400 LA2400WK

2600 400 LA2400WSK

2600 600 LA2600WK

2600 600 LA2600WSK

3600 400 LA3400WK

3600 400 LA3400WSK

3600 400 LA3600WK

3600 400 LA3600WSK

2600 400 LAB2400WK

2600 400 LAB2400WSK

3600 400 LAB3400WK

3600 400 LAB3400WSK

2600 600 LC2600WK 4

3600 600 LC3600WK 4

2600 600 LCC2600WK 4

3600 600 LCC3600WK 4

2600 800 MA2800WK

2600 800 MA2800WSK

3600 800 MA3800WK

3600 800 MA3800WSK

2600 800 MC2800WK 4

3600 800 MC3800WK 4

2600 800 MCC2800WK 4

3600 800 MCC3800WK 4

2600 1200 NB21200WK

2600 1200 NB21200WSK

3600 1200 NB31200WK

3600 1200 NB31200WSK

2600 1200 NC21200WK 4

3600 1200 NC31200WK 4

2600 2000 PB22000WK

2600 2500 PB22500WK

3 600 2000 PB32000WK

3 600 2500 PB32500WK

2600 2000 PBF22000K

3 600 2000 PBF32000WK

2 5600 2000 PC22000WK

2 5600 2500 PC22500WK

2 5600 3000 PC23000K

3 5600 2000 PC32000WK

3 5600 2500 PC32500WK

3 5600 3000 PC33000K

2 5600 2000 PCC22000WK

2 5600 2500 PCC22500WK

2 5600 3000 PCC23000K

3 5600 2000 PCC32000WK

3 5600 2500 PCC32500WK

3 5600 3000 PCC33000K

2 5600 2000 PCF22000K

3 5600 2000 PCF32000K

MCS

Type

Maximum

Switch

Amperes

Wire

Range

Wire

Type

Number

of Wires

Terminal

Type or

Catalog

Number

Standard Terminals (Aluminum Body)

CA 225 #1–300 kcmil Cu/Al 1 TA225CA2

LA400, LAB 400 #4–250 kcmil,

plus 3/0–600 kcmil

Cu/Al 1 TA400LA1

LA600, LC600 600 250/500 kcmil Cu/Al 2 TA600LA

MC, MA 800 3/0–400 kcmil Cu/Al 3 TA800MA2

NC, NB 1200 4/0–500 kcmil Cu/Al 4 TA1200NB1

NC, NB 1200 — — — —

PC2000, PCC2000 2000 BA2000PB rear bus connector

PC2500, PCC2500 2500 BA2500PB rear bus connector

PC3000, PCC3000 3000 Rear bus connector included in frame

Optional Terminals

CA 225 — — — —

LA400, LAB 400 #4–250 kcmil,

plus 3/0–600 kcmil

Cu 1 T401LA

LA600, LC600 600 250/500 kcmil Cu 2 T600LA

MC, MA 800 3/0–300 kcmil Cu 3 T800MA1

NC, NB 1200 3/0–400 kcmil Cu 4 T1200NB1

NC, NB 1200 500–750 kcmil Cu/Al 3 TA1201NB1

PC2000, PCC2000 2000 BA2000PB rear bus connector

PC2500, PCC2500 2500 BA2500PB rear bus connector

PC3000, PCC3000 3000 Rear bus connector included in frame

Frame Rating

Trip Setting

(Amperes)

Tolerance

(%)

CA 225 2250 +20

–10

LA (400) 400 4000 +10

– 0

LA/LC 600 6000 +10

– 0

MA/MC 800 8000 +10

– 0

NB/NC 1200 12,000 +10

– 0

PB/PC 2000–3000 12,000 +10

– 0

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-63

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type MCP Motor

Circuit Protector

The motor circuit protector

(MCP) is designed specifically

for the protection of motor

circuits. It operates on the

magnetic principle with a

current sensing coil in each of

the three poles, with the

trip-

point adjustable from the front.

MCPs

are the fastest devices

available for clearing low level

faults and offer circuit breaker

features and convenience

—

reset

table, quick-make

quick-break, deadfront

and protection against

single phasing.

MCPs are rated to correspond

to NEMA starter size.

Current Limiter Attachment

The EL current limiter is an

attachment that bolts to

the load end of the MCP to

provide increased interrupting

capacity. The combination is

UL Listed as a recognized

component for application at

up to 200,000A symmetrical

at 600 Vac. It is coordinated

with the MCP so that normal

short circuits will be cleared

automatically by the MCP,

opening all three poles, and

only the rare high fault will

cause the limiter to function.

Current limiters must be

applied as shown in the

terminal table above.

Note: Sizes 0–4 only.

Terminals

Terminals are included

with both the MCP and the

current limiter. Standard

terminals are aluminum alloy,

with non-aluminum terminals

optional for use with only

the MCP. Both standard

and optional terminals will

accommodate aluminum

or copper conductors.

Note: Except 400A Size 5.

Non-aluminum terminal suitable

for copper only.

When using aluminum

conductors, use of joint

compound is recommended.

Wire ranges are listed in the

terminal table above.

Te r m i n a l s

Motor Circuit Protectors

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services. 1

UL Listed

The MCP is UL Listed

as a

recognized component

and

requires additional listing by

the control manufacturer in

combination with a contactor

and overload relay.

Modifications for MCP

These modifications must be

factory installed. Consult

factory for pricing.

Modifications for MCP 3

Accessories for MCP

For handle mechanisms

refer to Pages V12-T3-95–

V12-T3-112.

Note: On 400A Size 5, an external

resistor is supplied for voltages,

above 240 Vac and 24 Vdc.

Accessories for MCP

Current Limiters

Interrupting Ratings

Maximum application current

shall be determined by testing

the MCP in combination with

a contactor and overload relay.

Additional capacity can be

obtained by using the current

limiter attachment.

Base Mounting Hardware

No charge when ordered

with MCP. Order separately

when required.

Base Mounting Hardware

Notes

1These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167.

2Catalog numbers ending in CR were

previously listed ending in RC. This

is a catalog number change only, not

a material change.

3Not UL Listed.

4Mounts only in right pole; only one

Modification marked can be used in

MCP (Sizes 0–4).

5On 400A Size 5, an external resistor is

supplied for voltages above 240 Vac

and 24 Vdc.

6On Sizes 0–4 and 250A Size 5, an

external resistor is supplied for customer

mounting, except for 120 Vac, 12, 24,

125 Vdc.

7Also applicable to MCPs with

optional terminals.

MCP or Limiter

(Amperes)

Terminals

Standard Aluminum Optional Non-Aluminum

Size 0, 1, 2 #14–#4 #14–1/0

Size 3 #6–3/0 #14–1/0

Size 4 #4–4/0 #4–4/0

Size 5 (250) #4–350 kcmil #4–350 kcmil

Size 5 (400) — (2) 3/0–250 kcmil

Limiters to 50 #14–#2 —

Limiters to 100 #1–4/0 —

Limiters to 150 #1–4/0 —

Starter

Size

Tri p

Range,

Amperes

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

With Standard Aluminum

Alloy Terminals

Catalog Number

With Optional

Non-Aluminum Terminals 2

Catalog Number

07–22 3 MCP0322R MCP0322CR

0 18–58 7 MCP0358R MCP0358CR

0 50–150 15 MCP03150R MCP03150CR

1 100–300 30 MCP13300R MCP13300CR

2 160–480 50 MCP23480R MCP23480CR

3 275–1000 100 MCP331000R MCP331000CR

4 450–1550 150 MCP431550R MCP431550CR

4 575–1800 150 MCP431800R MCP431800CR

5 1250–2500 250 MCP532500 MCP532500C

5 2000–4000 400 —MCP534000C

Sizes 0–4 MCP with

Current Limiter

Size 5 MCP 532500

Description

Auxiliary switches 4—1A and 1B,

2As and 2Bs

Shunt trip 4

Undervoltage release 456

Moisture-fungus treatment

For

MCP Size

Use

Accessories For

Sizes 0–4 FB

5 (250A) KB

5 (400A) LB

Limiter Catalog

Numbers

For MCP Catalog

Numbers 7

EL3003R MCP0322R

EL3007R MCP0358R

EL3015R MCP03150R

EL3030R MCP13300R

EL3050R MCP23480R

EL3100R MCP331000R

EL3150R MCP431550R

EL3150R MCP431800R

Description Style Number

Sizes 0–4 21C6782G18

Size 5 (250A) 673B125G12

Size 5 (400A) 21C6782G22

V12-T3-64 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Series C 30 mA Ground Fault

(Earth Leakage)

The Series C units (prefix only

listed below) that included a

breaker and integral Earth

Leakage module have been

replaced by the Series G

solution that has the flexibility

to add the Earth Leakage

module in the field. The

Series G solution has an

extended range of 15–630A.

Series C 30 mA Ground

Fault (Earth Leakage)

Note: Please contact Eaton

customer service for assistance

with crossing from the obsolete

product to the new Series G.

Ampere Range—15–400A

Catalog Prefix

Three-Pole Four-Pole

ELFD EL4FD

ELFW EL4FW

ELHMCP EL4HFD

ELHFD EL4HFW

ELHFW EL4HJW

ELHJD EL4HKW

ELHJW EL4JW

ELHKD EL4KW

ELHKW —

ELJD —

ELJW —

ELKD —

ELKW —

Earth Leakage

Ampere

Rating

Series C

Four-Pole

Series G

MCCB

Series G

MCCB

Alt

Series G Earth

Leakage Module

15 EL4FD3015L EGS4015FFG EGC4015FFG ELEBN4125G

20 EL4FD3020L EGS4020FFG EGC4020FFG ELEBN4125G

25 EL4FD3025L EGS4025FFG EGC4025FFG ELEBN4125G

30 EL4FD3030L EGS4030FFG EGC4030FFG ELEBN4125G

35 EL4FD3035L EGS4035FFG EGC4035FFG ELEBN4125G

40 EL4FD3040L EGS4040FFG EGC4040FFG ELEBN4125G

45 EL4FD3045L EGS4045FFG EGC4045FFG ELEBN4125G

50 EL4FD3050L EGS4050FFG EGC4050FFG ELEBN4125G

60 EL4FD3060L EGS4060FFG EGC4060FFG ELEBN4125G

70 EL4FD3070L EGS4070FFG EGC4070FFG ELEBN4125G

80 EL4FD3080L EGS4080FFG EGC4080FFG ELEBN4125G

90 EL4FD3090L EGS4090FFG EGC4090FFG ELEBN4125G

100 EL4FD3100L EGS4100FFG EGC4100FFG ELEBN4125G

110 EL4FD3110L EGS4110FFG EGC4110FFG ELEBN4125G

125 EL4FD3125L EGS4125FFG EGC4125FFG ELEBN4125G

150 EL4FD3150L JGE4150FAG JGC4150FAG ELJBN4150W

50 EL4FW3050JL GES4050AFM — ELEBE4125G

50 EL4FWC3050JL GEC4050AFM — ELEBE4125G

15 EL4HFD3015L EGH4015FFG —ELEBN4125G

20 EL4HFD3020L EGH4020FFG —ELEBN4125G

25 EL4HFD3025L EGH4025FFG —ELEBN4125G

30 EL4HFD3030L EGH4030FFG —ELEBN4125G

35 EL4HFD3035L EGH4035FFG —ELEBN4125G

40 EL4HFD3040L EGH4040FFG —ELEBN4125G

45 EL4HFD3045L EGH4045FFG —ELEBN4125G

50 EL4HFD3050L EGH4050FFG —ELEBN4125G

60 EL4HFD3060L EGH4060FFG —ELEBN4125G

70 EL4HFD3070L EGH4070FFG —ELEBN4125G

80 EL4HFD3080L EGH4080FFG —ELEBN4125G

90 EL4HFD3090L EGH4090FFG —ELEBN4125G

100 EL4HFD3100L EGH4100FFG —ELEBN4125G

110 EL4HFD3110L EGH4110FFG —ELEBN4125G

125 EL4HFD3125L EGH4125FFG —ELEBN4125G

150 EL4HFD3150L JGH3150FAG —ELJBN4150W

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-65

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Portable Test Kit and Remote

Ground Fault Trip Indicator

Portable Test Kit

Provides verification of

performance of all frame

sizes of SELTRONIC breakers

while devices are still in

service under varying load

and/or phase unbalance.

The tester operates on

120V, 50/60 Hz, and includes

complete instructions and

test times for testing the long

time, instantaneous operation

and optional ground fault

operation of the breaker.

Portable Test Kit

Remote Ground Fault

Trip Indicator

For use only with SELTRONIC

circuit breakers (LCG, HLCG,

MCG, HMCG, NCG, HNCG,

PCG and PCCG) with built-in

ground fault protection.

Note: UL Listed as a recognized

component.

The SELTRONIC ground fault

indicator is a remotely

mounted device with a

combination indicating light/

reset/test button that will

light when the breaker trips

on a ground fault. Tripping

from overloads or short

circuits will not activate the

device. A separate 120V,

50/60 Hz power source is

required to power the light

and internal relay, which

has 1NO/1NC contacts

for customer connected

alarm, etc. Designed for

panel mounting, it can be

face-mounted by ordering

the optional mounting

bracket below.

Remote Ground

Fault Indicator

Face Mounting Bracket

Face Mounting Bracket for

Ground Fault Indicator

Style Number

STK2

Style Number Catalog Number

1259C14G01 GFAU

Style Number

1264C67G01

V12-T3-66 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Accessories

Rear-Connected Studs

For complete stud assembly,

order a stud and an

appropriate tube based on

thickness of customer’s

mounting panel. A short stud

must be assembled adjacent

to a long stud to maintain

clearances required by

Underwriters Laboratories.

400A LA studs of the

same length have sufficient

clearance; however, customer

connections may make it

necessary to use a short stud

adjacent to a long stud. Two

studs are required per pole.

Refer to DS29171 Dimension

Sheets for stud sizes and

extensions behind breaker.

For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB, LBB, HFB, HKA, HKB and HLB Breakers 1

Notes

1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole.

2 Not UL Listed.

3 Included at no charge when ordered with stud.

Mounting Panel

Thickness, Inches

Stud 2Tube 3

Length Style Number Length Style Number

DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers

3/4–1 Short 656D565G03 27/32 313C909H17

3/4–1 Long 656D565G04 3-25/32 313C909H20

1/2–3/4 Short 656D565G03 1-3/32 313C909H18

1/2–3/4 Long 656D565G04 4-1/32 313C909H21

1/4–1/2 Short 656D565G03 1-11/32 313C909H19

1/4–1/2 Long 656D565G04 4-9/32 313C909H22

EB, EHB, FB and HFB (100A Maximum)

1 Short 451D874G01 1-1/16 32B9446H20

1 Long 451D874G02 3-7/16 32B9446H24

1-1/16–15/16 Short 451D874G01 1-3/8 32B9446H21

1-1/16–15/16 Long 451D874G02 3-3/4 32B9446H25

3/8–5/8 Short 451D874G01 1-11/16 32B9446H22

3/8–5/8 Long 451D874G02 4-1/16 32B9446H26

1/4–5/16 Short 451D874G01 232B9446H23

1/4–5/16 Long 451D874G02 4-3/8 32B9446H27

FB, HFB 150 Ampere Breakers

1 Short 374D883G01 1-1/16 374D883H06

1 Long 374D883G02 4-5/16 374D883H10

11/16–15/16 Short 374D883G01 1-3/8 374D883H07

11/16–15/16 Long 374D883G02 4-5/8 374D883H11

3/8–5/8 Short 374D883G01 1-11/16 374D883H08

3/8–5/8 Long 374D883G02 4-15/16 374D883H12

1/4–5/16 Short 374D883G01 2374D883H09

1/4–5/16 Long 374D883G02 5-1/4 374D883H13

JA, KA and HKA Breakers

3/4–1 Short 656D565G01 27/32 456D983H05

3/4–1 Long 656D565G02 3-25/32 456D983H08

1/2–3/4 Short 656D565G01 1-3/32 456D983H06

1/2–3/4 Long 656D565G02 4-1/32 456D983H09

1/4 –1/2 Short 656D565G01 1-11/32 456D983H07

1/4 –1/2 Long 656D565G02 4-9/32 456D983H10

JB, KB and HKB Breakers

3/4–1 Short 5010D23G01 27/32 456D983H05

3/4–1 Long 5010D23G02 3-7/8 5010D23H05

1/2–3/4 Short 5010D23G01 1-3/32 456D983H06

1/2–3/4 Long 5010D23G02 4-1/8 5010D23H06

1/4 –1/2 Short 5010D23G01 1-11/32 456D983H07

1/4 –1/2 Long 5010D23G02 4-3/8 5010D23H07

Rear Connected Stud

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-67

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

For LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers 1

Notes

1For insulated panels only; two required per pole.

2150, 250, 300 and 400A frames only.

3This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts

must be used.

4600A frames only.

Stud Ampere

Rating

Diameter, Inches

and Thread

Extension Back

of Breaker, Inches

Stud

Style Number

LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC Breakers

225 21/2–13 3-7/32 1241 345

225 21/2–13 6-9/32 1241 346

225 23 1/2–13 4-31/32 1241 392

400 23/4–16 5-15/32 5B7383G15

400 23/4–16 7-31/32 5B7383G16

400 23/4–16 10-15/32 5B7383G17

600 41–12 5-29/32 314C960G07

600 41–12 5-13/32 314C960G08

600 41–12 5-29/32 314C960G09

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers

225 1/2–13 3-21/32 314C960G01

400 3/4–16 5-29/32 314C960G04

400 3/4–16 8-13/32 314C960G05

400 3/4–16 10-29/32 314C960G06

600 1–12 5-29/32 314C960G07

600 1–12 8-13/32 314C960G08

600 1–12 10-29/32 314C960G09

800 1-1/8–12 5-29/32 314C960G10

800 1-1/8–12 8-13/32 314C960G11

800 1-1/8–12 10-29/32 314C960G12

NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers

800 1-1/8–12 5-1/2 623B222G01

800 1-1/8–12 8 623B222G02

800 1-1/8–12 10-1/2 623B222G03

1200 1-1/4–12 5-1/2 373B375G04

1200 1-1/4–12 10-1/2 373B375G03

V12-T3-68 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Panelboard Connecting Straps

For connecting line end of breakers to panelboard bus.

For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB,

LBB, HFB, HKB and HLB Breakers

For CA, LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers

Notes

1Not UL Listed.

2Bus spacing 2.75 inches in box 5.75 inches deep (600V maximum).

3Bus spacing 3.50 inches.

Ampere Rating Connector Type 1Style Number

EB, EHB, FB and HFB Breakers

Narrow Distribution Panelboards 2

50 Center 673B142G02

50 Outside 673B142G09

100 Center 673B142G02

100 Outside 673B142G10

150 Center 673B142G04

150 Outside 673B142G03

Power Panelboards (Convertible) 3

50 Center 1253C72G01

50 Outside 1253C72G03

100 Center 1253C73G03

100 Outside 1253C73G06

150 Center 1253C73G01

150 Outside 1253C73G05

Three-pole mounting bracket 624B600H01

Two-pole mounting bracket 624B600H02

DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers 3

400 Center 314C940G04

400 Outside 505C680G01

Mounting bracket (one required) 208B264H01

JA, KA and HKA Breakers 3

225 Center 314C940G03

225 Outside 180C074G01

Mounting bracket (one required) 208B264H01

JB, KB and HKB Breakers 3

250 Center 2600D26G01

250 Outside 2600D26G02

Mounting bracket (one required) 1576707

Panelboard

Connecting Strap

Ampere Rating Connector Type 1Style Number

CA Breaker Power Panelboards (Convertible) 3

225 Center 1253C74G01

225 Outside 1253C74G02

Three-pole mounting bracket 624B624H01

Two-pole mounting bracket 624B624H02

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 150, 300 and 400A Frames 3

400 Center 32B4570G02

400 Outside 314C541G01

Mounting bracket (two required) 208B297H01

LA, HLA, LC and HLC 600A Frames 3

600 Center 624B609G01

600 Outside 506C052G01

Mounting bracket (two required) 208B297H01

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 3

800 Short 314C996G01

800 Medium 314C996G02

800 Long 314C996G03

Mounting bracket (four required) 315C270H01

NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 3

1200 Short 505C606G04

1200 Medium 505C606G05

1200 Long 505C606G06

Mounting bracket (four required) 315C270H01

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-69

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Plug-In Adapter Kits

For rear-connected applications such as switchboards.

Facilitates ease of installation and front removal of breaker.

Includes conductor for mounting on breaker, plug-in mounting

blocks with matching conductor, rear studs and mounting

hardware. Order two mounting blocks style number when line

and load are required; order one mounting block style number

when either line or load is required.

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products

and services. 1

Flat Bus Type

Threaded Studs Type

Mounting Plates

Notes

1 These accessories are no longer available.

2 These plug-in adapter kits are UL Listed as recognized

components.

3 700–1200A adapter kit is front removable, bolt-on design—

not plug-in type.

4 Not UL Listed.

Description Style Number

EB, EHB, FB Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 2

Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole, 100A 1480D13G05

Two-pole, 150A 1480D13G05

Three-pole, 100A 1480D13G06

Three-pole, 150A 1480D13G06

FB and HFB Magnetic Only, HFB Thermal-Magnetic 2

Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole, 100A 1480D13G05

Two-pole, 150A 1480D13G05

Three-pole, 100A 1480D13G06

Three-pole, 150A 1480D13G06

JB, KB, HKB Breakers 1 Flat Bus Type—

Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

Two-pole 506C144G17

Three-pole 506C144G18

One Mounting Block, Line Only

Two-pole 1260C86G01

Three-pole 1260C86G02

Two-pole 1260C86G03

Three-pole 1260C86G04

LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC (150, 250, 300 and

400A Frame) (Threaded Studs Type)—

Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

Two-pole 313C644G25

Three-pole 313C644G26

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole 450D010G15

Three-pole 450D010G16

DA, LB, LBB, HLB Breakers 2 Flat Bus Type—

Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

Two-pole 313C644G45

Three-pole 313C644G46

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole 314C932G03

Three-pole 314C932G04

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 3

Threaded Studs—Two Mounting Blocks,

Line and Load

Two-pole, 125–600A 313C644G27

Two-pole, 700–800A 176C544G01 3

Three-pole, 125–600A 313C644G28

Three-pole, 700–800A 176C544G02 3

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole, 125–600A 313C370G03

Two-pole, 700–800A 507C049G01 3

Three-pole, 125–600A 313C370G04

Three-pole, 700–800A 507C049G02 3

Flat Bus Type

Description Style Number

JA, KA and HKA Breakers 4 (Threaded Studs

Type)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

Two-pole 313C644G29

Three-pole 313C644G30

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole 314C932G01

Three-pole 314C932G02

LA, HLA, LC and HLC (600A Frames) 2 (Threaded

Studs)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

Two-pole 313C644G50

Three-pole 313C644G51

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

Two-pole 506C059G03

Three-pole 506C059G04

One Mounting Block, Line or Load Flat Bus Type

Two-pole 1288C19G01

Three-pole 1288C19G02

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS, NB, HNB, NC, HNC

and NB TRI-PAC Breakers 4 (Flat Bus Type)—

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS two-pole 2614D53G05

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS three-pole 2614D53G06

NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC two-pole 2614D53G03

NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC three-pole 2614D53G04

Description Style Number

Predrilled panels for:

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 507C047H01

JB, KB 179C207H01

JA, KA 504C823H01

DA, LB, LBB, ALB 178C781H01

LA, LAB, HLA, LC, HLC 504C824H01

MA, HMA, MC, MMC, NB, HNB, NC, HNC 1290C73H01

Threaded Stud Type

V12-T3-70 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Extended Line Terminal Shields

For shielding line side terminal connections. One shield required

per breaker. Order separately when needed. Sold only in lots of

10, including hardware.

Extended Line Terminal Shields 1

Base Mounting Hardware

No charge when ordered with breaker. Order separately

when needed.

Base Mounting Hardware

Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers

For 2000A non-automatic breakers only.

Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers

For use with non-automatic, three-pole circuit breaker. Includes

fuse mounting base and hardware to mount standard Class L

current limiting fuses, 801–2000A (fuses not included).

Note: Interrupters used with fuse mounting base will accept all standard

PB accessories. See Dimension Sheet 29-171 for mounting details.

Breaker Frame Style Number

JB, KB, HKB 1266C07G01

MA, HMA, MC, HMC 208B966G01

NB, HNB, NC, HNC 208B966G02

LAB, LA, (Saf-T-Vue) 314C420G02

JA, KA, LB, LBB (Saf-T-Vue) 314C420G04

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 314C420G05

DA 314C420G06

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB (standard breaker) 314C420G06

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 625B229G08 2

Description Style Number

Single-Pole Breakers

EB, EHB, HFB 3624B375G01

EB, EHB, HFB 4624B375G02

Two- and Three-Pole Breakers

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HMA, HNB, MC 21C6782G05

HMC, NC, HNC 1091716

PB, PC, PCC 624B375G22

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB 21C6782G22

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP 21C6782G18

JB, KB, HKB 673B125G12

CA two-pole 21C6782G28

CA three-pole 21C6782G29

Style Number

6635C78G02 1

Line Terminal Shield

For complete installation, order:

1. Front-connected, non-automatic PB breaker.

(Order similar to standard front connected, except

omit load conductor extensions.)

2. Fuse mounting base.

3. Fuses (from distributor).

Handle Locks

Non-Padlockable

For prevention of unintentional operation of breaker. Fits over

breaker handle and may be removed.

Padlockable

For prevention of unauthorized operation of breaker. Is non-

removable once installed on breaker. Meets Underwriters

Laboratories and California Code requirements.

Handle Locks 15

Notes

1 Not UL Listed.

2 One of style 625B229G08 is one package of 10.

3 Individually mounted.

4 Group mounted.

5 All breakers are trip free and will trip with handle locks attached.

Cannot be used when handle extension is used.

Breaker Frame Style Number

Non-Padlockable

FA, EA, CA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB 29B2721H01

LAB, LA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HLA, HMA, HNB,

MC, HMC, NC, HNC

28B4596G01

GB, GC, GHB, GHC 1294C01H01

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB 29B2721H04

Padlockable

CA 506C438G01

FA, EA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP150 765A754G01

DA, JA, KA, LB, LBB, HKA, HLB, MCP400 673B796G02

JB, KB, HKB, MCP250 673B796G01

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 373B591G02

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS 6591C30G02–OFF

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS 6591C30G05–ON/OFF

NB, HNB, NC, HNC 6591C30G01–OFF

NB, HNB, NC, HNC 6591C30G04–ON/OFF

PA, SPCB, PB, Tri-Pac PB, PC 6591C30G03–OFF

Handle Locks

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-71

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Cable Connectors

The fuse mounting base will accept the following terminals

for front cable connection (omit “T” connectors from rear

connected breakers).

Cable Connectors

Molded Type Handle Extension

For LAB, LA and HLA Breakers 1

For MA, HMA, MC, HMC,

NB, HNB, NC and HNC

Breakers

For PB, PC, PCC and PA/RD Breakers 1

Wire Range, Type Number of Cables Style Number

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu 672B655G01

(4) 400–500 kcmil Cu 180C046G03

Style Number

372B399G01

Style Number

1251C65G01 2

Style Number

6635C78G02 2

Modifications

Only two internally mounted

modifications—shunt trip,

undervoltage release,

auxiliary switch, alarm

switch—may be mounted

in EB through PB. Only one

of these modifications may

be mounted in FB, HFB

magnetic only, two-pole EB,

EHB, FB and SELTRONIC

breakers. None are available

in single-pole breakers except

alarm switch in EB, EHB and

HFB. Contact Avery Creek,

NC, Technical Resource

Center for possible special

combinations of the following

modifications not in

tabulations. Contact factory

for pricing if accessories

are factory installed.

Shunt Trip

For tripping breaker from

a remote point. A solenoid

device mounts within breaker

case. Breaker trips when

coil is energized.

Shunt trips should not be

used as circuit interlocks

using maintained contact

pilot devices.

A cutoff switch breaks the

circuit to the momentary rated

coil when the breaker opens.

Available for control voltages

up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.

Voltage and frequency must

be specified. Standard leads

extend 18.00 inches outside

the breaker. Longer leads may

be specified.

Factory-Mounted Shunt Trips

Factory-mounted shunt trips

only can be supplied for the

following breakers: CA, HCA,

CAH, HFB magnetic only

and

PB/PBF non-automatic

breakers (molded-

case

switches). They are 120 Vac

rated, suitable for 55% pickup

for ground fault application.

Right hand mounting is

standard and they are not

UL Listed.

Notes

1Not UL listed.

2Included with frame at no charge.

V12-T3-72 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 4

Shunt Trip for Field Mounting 123

Notes

1 120 Vac ratings suitable for 55% pickup for ground fault applications.

2 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches).

3 Field mounting voids breakers’ UL listing except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and SELTRONIC breakers.

4 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-168.

5 Available similar to this except “Leads out the load end—(not UL Listed).” Order by description.

Voltage/Hz

Breaker Type Catalog Number

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 5

(Thermal-Magnetic Only) JB, KB, HKB

JA, KA, HKA, DA,

LB, LBB, HLB LA, LAB, HLA MA, HMA NB, HNB

PB TRI-PAC

and PA

Right-Hand Mounting

600/50–60 Hz 2609D39G15 2609D42G15 2605D15G15 2606D56G15 2606D57G15 2606D58G15 2606D59G15

480/50–60 Hz 2609D39G16 2609D42G16 2605D15G16 2606D56G16 2606D57G16 2606D58G16 2606D59G16

240/50–60 Hz 2609D39G17 2609D42G17 2605D15G17 2606D56G17 2606D57G17 2606D58G17 2606D59G17

208/50–60 Hz 2609D39G18 2609D42G18 2605D15G18 2606D56G18 2606D57G18 2606D58G18 2606D59G18

120/50–60 Hz 2609D39G19 2609D42G19 2605D15G19 2606D56G19 2606D57G19 2606D58G19 2606D59G19

60/50–60 Hz 2609D39G20 2609D42G20 2605D15G20 2606D56G20 2606D57G20 2606D58G20 2606D59G20

48/50–60 Hz 2609D39G21 2609D42G21 2605D15G21 2606D56G21 2606D57G21 2606D58G21 2606D59G21

24/50–60 Hz 2609D39G22 2609D42G22 2605D15G22 2606D56G22 2606D57G22 2606D58G22 2606D59G22

250 DC 2609D39G23 2609D42G23 2605D15G23 2606D56G23 2606D57G23 2606D58G23 2606D59G23

125 DC 2609D39G24 2609D42G24 2605D15G24 2606D56G24 2606D57G24 2606D58G24 2606D59G24

60 DC 2609D39G25 2609D42G25 2605D15G25 2606D56G25 2606D57G25 2606D58G25 2606D59G25

48 DC 2609D39G26 2609D42G26 2605D15G26 2606D56G26 2606D57G26 2606D58G26 2606D59G26

24 DC 2609D39G27 2609D42G27 2605D15G27 2606D56G27 2606D57G27 2606D58G27 2606D59G27

12 DC 2609D39G28 2609D42G28 2605D15G28 2606D56G28 2606D57G28 2606D58G28 2606D59G28

Left-Hand Mounting

600/50–60 Hz 2609D39G01 2609D42G01 2605D15G01 2606D56G01 2606D57G01 2606D58G01 2606D59G01

480/50–60 Hz 2609D39G02 2609D42G02 2605D15G02 2606D56G02 2606D57G02 2606D58G02 2606D59G02

240/50–60 Hz 2609D39G03 2609D42G03 2605D15G03 2606D56G03 2606D57G03 2606D58G03 2606D59G03

208/50–60 Hz 2609D39G04 2609D42G04 2605D15G04 2606D56G04 2606D57G04 2606D58G04 2606D59G04

120/50–60 Hz 2609D39G05 2609D42G05 2605D15G05 2606D56G05 2606D57G05 2606D58G05 2606D59G05

60/50–60 Hz 2609D39G06 2609D42G06 2605D15G06 2606D56G06 2606D57G06 2606D58G06 2606D59G06

48/50–60 Hz 2609D39G07 2609D42G07 2605D15G07 2606D56G07 2606D57G07 2606D58G07 2606D59G07

24/50–60 Hz 2609D39G08 2609D42G08 2605D15G08 2606D56G08 2606D57G08 2606D58G08 2606D59G08

250 DC 2609D39G09 2609D42G09 2605D15G09 2606D56G09 2606D57G09 2606D58G09 2606D59G09

125 DC 2609D39G10 2609D42G10 2605D15G10 2606D56G10 2606D57G10 2606D58G10 2606D59G10

60 DC 2609D39G11 2609D42G11 2605D15G11 2606D56G11 2606D57G11 2606D58G11 2606D59G11

48 DC 2609D39G12 2609D42G12 2605D15G12 2606D56G12 2606D57G12 2606D58G12 2606D59G12

24 DC 2609D39G13 2609D42G13 2605D15G13 2606D56G13 2606D57G13 2606D58G13 2606D59G13

12 DC 2609D39G14 2609D42G14 2605D15G14 2606D56G14 2606D57G14 2606D58G14 2606D59G14

Shunt Trip

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-73

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers

Shunt Trip Coil Data

Notes

1Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.

2Also available for 24 Vdc. Order by description.

3Not for ground fault.

Description

Breaker

Type

Style

Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from

external 32 to 120 Vdc and Vac to 60 Hz source 12

MC, HMC 1371D72G22

NC, HNC 1372D39G13

PC, PCC 1372D35G22

LC, HLC 1371D11G22

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from

external 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz source 23

MC, HMC 1371D72G32

NC, HNC 1372D39G23

PC, PCC 1372D35G32

LC, HLC 1371D11G32

Shunt Trip

Voltage

Rating

For All Breakers Listed in Previous

Table and on Previous Page

Except CA and SELTRONIC SELTRONIC

Coil Inrush Coil Inrush

Amperes Volt-Amperes Amperes Volt-Amperes

600 AC 0.105 63.0 — —

480 AC 0.085 40.8 — —

240 AC 1.7 408.0 — —

208 AC 1.4 291.2 — —

120 AC 0.88 105.6 15 18

60 AC 9.10 546.0 — —

48 AC 7.50 360.0 — —

24 AC 3.95 94.8 — —

250 DC 2.5 625.0 — —

125 DC 0.975 121.9 — —

60 DC 0.525 31.5 — —

48 DC 1.3 62.4 — —

24 DC (FB) 6 144.0 — —

24 DC (KB) 3.8 91.2 — —

24 DC (others) 8 192 — —

12 DC 6 72 — —

V12-T3-74 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Standard Undervoltage Release

For undervoltage protection.

A solenoid device mounts

within a breaker case. Coil

must be energized before

closing breaker.

Trips breaker

when voltage drops below 35

to 70% of coil rating. Picks

up and seals in at 85% of coil

rating. For line voltages

up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.

Externally mounted resistors

are supplied for certain

ratings. Standard leads

extend 18.00 inches outside

of breaker. Longer leads may

be specified.

Note: Undervoltage release

attachments are not designed

for, and should not be used as,

circuit interlocks. For further

information, Contact Avery

Creek, NC, Technical Resource

Center at 1-800-356-1243.

Factory-Mounted

Undervoltage Releases

All of the above undervoltage

releases can be specified for

factory mounting. Contact

factory for pricing. These

attachments have the leads

out the side and are UL

Listed when factory mounted

unless other non-UL Listed

modifications are used.

Note: Right-hand mounting

is considered standard unless

specified otherwise except JA,

KA, DA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB

and SELTRONIC available

for left-hand only. JB, KB, HKB

are obsolete.

Factory-mounted

undervoltage releases

only can be supplied for

the following breakers:

●SELTRONIC breakers

(120 Vac, 60 Hz only

standard), MC, HMC, NC,

HNC, PC, PCC, LC, HLC

●SELTRONIC breakers with

remote trip provisions,

MC, HMC 2, NC, HNC 2,

PC, PCC 2, LC, HLC 2

●EB 3, EHB 3, FB 3, HFB 3,

FB 45 and HFB magnetic

only 45

●No UVR available for CA,

CAH and HCA

Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 67

Notes

1 Cannot be used with other attachments except a small 1A-1B auxiliary switch rated 250V can be supplied in

right-hand pole.

2 Provided with two leads (total of four) for use with a remote normally open contact (pushbutton, etc.) to trip the

breaker. No external power required.

3 Not available on ambient compensating breakers.

4 Not UL Listed.

5 Right-hand mounting only.

6 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches).

7 Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KA, HKA, LB and HLB.

Attachment

Voltage, Hz

Breaker Type

JA, KA, DA, HKA,

LB, LBB, HLB LA, LAB, HLA MA, HMA NB, HNB PB, PA 4

For Right-Hand Mounting

24, 60 — 60A9355G17 — — —

48, 60 — 60A9355G08 — — 5674D29G16

120, 60 — 60A9355G01 457D727G01 373D632G01 5674D29G09

208, 60 — 60A9355G02 457D727G19 373D632G19 5674D29G10

240, 60 — 60A9355G03 457D727G02 373D632G02 5674D29G11

480, 60 — 60A9355G05 457D727G03 373D632G03 5674D29G13

600, 60 — 60A9355G06 457D727G04 373D632G04 5674D29G14

12 DC — 458D020G01 457D727G09 372D032G01 4976D85G01

24 DC — 458D020G02 457D727G10 372D032G02 4976D85G02

48 DC — 458D020G03 457D727G11 372D032G03 4976D85G03

60 DC — 458D020G04 457D727G21 — 4976D85G04

125 DC — 458D020G07 457D727G12 372D032G04 4976D85G07

250 DC — 458D020G08 457D727G13 372D032G05 4976D85G08

For Left-Hand Mounting

48, 60 — 60A9355G16 — — 5674D29G08

120, 60 458D070G01 60A9355G09 457D727G05 373D632G05 5674D29G01

208, 60 458D070G05 60A9355G10 457D727G20 373D632G20 5674D29G02

240, 60 458D070G02 60A9355G11 457D727G06 373D632G06 5674D29G03

480, 60 458D070G03 60A9355G13 457D727G07 373D632G07 5674D29G05

600, 60 458D070G04 60A9355G14 457D727G08 373D632G08 5674D29G06

12 DC 458D070G09 458D020G11 457D727G14 372D032G06 4976D85G11

24 DC 458D070G10 458D020G12 457D727G15 372D032G07 4976D85G12

48 DC 458D070G11 458D020G13 457D727G16 372D032G08 4976D85G13

60 DC — 458D020G14 457D727G22 — 4976D85G14

125 DC 458D070G12 458D020G17 457D727G17 372D032G09 4976D85G17

250 DC 458D070G13 458D020G18 457D727G18 372D032G10 4976D85G18

Standard Undervoltage

Release

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-75

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Undervoltage Release Coil Data

Voltage

Rating Hz

Breaker Type

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, JB, KB and HKB JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB LA, LAB, HLA and PB

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance (Ohms)

Total

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance (Ohms)

Total

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance (Ohms)

Total

600 AC 0.020 25,000 12.0 0.012 50,000 7.2 0.029 20,000 17.4

480 AC 0.016 20,000 7.7 0.013 30,000 6.3 0.014 — 6.8

240 AC 0.021 6000 5.1 0.013 — 3.2 0.036 — 8.7

208 AC 0.019 6000 4.0 0.018 — 3.8 0.036 — 7.5

120 AC 0.023 — 2.8 0.023 — 2.8 0.073 — 8.8

60 AC 0.203 250 12.2 — — — — — —

48 AC 0.245 150 11.8 — — — 0.152 — 7.3

24 AC 0.250 50 6.0 — — — — — —

250 DC 0.026 5000 6.5 0.013 16,500 3.3 0.035 5000 8.8

125 DC 0.026 — 3.3 0.013 6500 1.7 0.039 1500 4.9

60 DC 0.248 200 14.9 0.013 1500 0.8 0.034 — 2.1

48 DC 0.260 150 12.5 0.012 600 0.6 0.040 — 2.0

24 DC 0.141 — 3.4 0.023 — 0.6 0.069 — 1.7

12 DC 0.286 — 3.5 0.048 — 0.6 0.136 — 1.7

MA and HMA NB and HNB MC, HMC, NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LC and HLC

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance (Ohms)

Total

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance (Ohms)

Total

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance (Ohms)

Total

600 AC 0.012 50,000 7.2 0.016 35,000 9.6 — — —

480 AC 0.013 30,000 6.3 0.013 30,000 6.3 — — —

240 AC 0.013 — 3.2 0.013 — 3.2 — — —

208 AC 0.018 — 3.8 0.018 — 3.8 — — —

120 AC 0.023 — 2.8 0.023 — 2.8 0.5 — 6

60 AC — — — — — — — — —

48 AC — — — — — — — — —

24 AC — — — — — — — — —

250 DC 0.013 16,500 3.3 0.013 16,500 3.3 — — —

125 DC 0.013 6500 1.7 0.013 6500 1.7 — — —

60 DC 0.013 1500 0.8 — — — — — —

48 DC 0.012 600 0.6 0.012 600 0.6 — — —

24 DC 0.02 — 0.6 0.023 — 0.6 — — —

12 DC 0.048 — 0.6 0.048 — 0.6 — — —

V12-T3-76 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Alarm Switch

Availability: EB through PC.

For light or alarm indication

when breaker trips. Does

not function with manual

operation. Automatically

resets when breaker is

relatched. Standard leads

extend 18.00 inches outside

of breaker. Longer leads

may be specified. Not

field mountable.

Alarm Switch Contact

Rating (Non-Inductive)

●MC, HMC, LA, LAB, HLA,

LC, HLC: 10A, 120 Vac;

5A, 240 Vac

●EB, EHB, FB, HFB:

5A, 120 Vac

●All other breakers:

10A, 120–240 Vac

Auxiliary Switch

For auxiliary control circuits.

Miniature switches mount

within breaker. Commonly

used for remote indication

of open or closed breaker

and electrically interlocking

component control circuits.

“A” contacts are closed

when breaker is closed.

“B” contacts are open when

breaker is closed. Standard

leads extend 18.00 inches

outside of breaker. Longer

leads may be specified.

Note: Right-hand mounting

standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,

JB, KB and HKB. All others are

left-hand mounting as standard

unless otherwise specified.

Factory-Mounted

Auxiliary Switches

All of the above auxiliary

switches can be specified

for factory mounting at the

same price as listed for the

kit. These attachments have

the leads out the side of the

breaker and are UL Listed

when factory mounted

unless other non-UL Listed

modifications are used

(except as noted).

Note: Right-hand mounting

standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,

JB, KB and HKB. All others are

left-hand mounting as standard

unless otherwise specified.

Factory-mounted switches

only can be supplied for the

following breaker:

●JB, LBB, LAB, JA, DA, FB l

magnetic only 2m and HFB

magnetic only 2m

Switch Schematic

Alarm Switch

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 9

Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 678

Notes

1Alarm switches are no longer available

for these frames.

2Not UL Listed.

3Not available for magnetic only,

ambient compensating, or breakers

with undervoltage release.

4When alarm switch is used in

conjunction with auxiliary switch,

the auxiliary switch is rated 250 Vac,

5A maximum.

5Except when other attachments are

used, must be mounted in right pole.

6Not for use on molded-case switches.

7All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with

a common electrical connection (see

diagram above right).

8Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker

except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB,

HNB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and

SELTRONIC breakers.

9These accessories are no

longer available.

jFor DC applications, refer to factory.

kThermal-magnetic only.

lAuxiliary switches are no longer

available for these frames.

mRight-hand mounting only.

Black Lead

Blue Lead

Red Lead

Breaker

Frame

Normal

Pole Mounting

Contact Operation

(Specify Type Desired)

DA 1Left Make or break

EB 1, EHB 1, FB 1, HFB 23 Mechanism Make or break

JA 1, KA 1, LB 1, LBB 1, HKA, HLB Left Make or break

JB 1, KB 1, HKB 1Left Make or break

LAB 1, LA 1, MA 1, NB 1, HLA, HMA, HNB Left Make or break

LC 1, HLC Left 4Make or break

MC 1, HMC Left only 4Make or break

NC 1, HNC Left only 4Make or break

PB Left Make or break

PC, PCC Left 45 Make or break

Breaker

Type

Maximum For Left-Hand Mounting For Right-Hand Mounting

AC Voltage

Rating j

Non-inductive

Amperes 1A-1B 2A-2B 1A-1B 2A-2B

EB, EHB, FB, HFB k240 5 4979D06G03 4979D06G09 4979D06G03 4979D06G08

JA, KA, DA, HKA, LB 480 10 458D067G03 — 458D067G08 —

LBB, HLB 240 5 — 656D527G01 2— 656D527G09 2

JB, KB, HKB 480 10 2600D97G03 —2600D97G08 —

JB, KB, HKB 240 5—2609D45G03 9—2609D45G08 9

LA, LAB, HLA 480 10 655D555G12 655D555G13 655D555G05 655D555G06

MA, HMA 480 10 458D013G12 458D013G13 458D013G05 458D013G06

NB, HNB 480 10 4980D16G12 4980D16G13 4980D16G05 4980D16G06

PB, PA 480 10 2602D32G11 2602D32G12 2602D32G14 2602D32G15

MC, HMC, MCG, HMCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1371D72G03 1371D72G06 — —

NC, HNC, NCG, HNCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1372D39G03 1372D39G06 — —

PC, PCC, PCG, PCCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1372D35G03 1372D35G06 — —

LC, HLC, LCG, HLCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1371D11G03 1371D11G06 — —

Switch with 2A-2B

Contacts

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-77

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Mechanical Interlocks (A-C)

For mechanically interlocking

a pair of breakers so that only

one may be closed at one

time, but both may be open

simultaneously.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion

Treatment

Availability: EB through PC.

Treatment can be provided

to meet customer’s

specific atmospheric

conditions. Moisture-

fungus treating material

used meets JAN-T-152;

treatment meets

MIL-V-173a. Requests

and orders should specify

government specifications

or conditions to be met.

Note: Not UL Listed.

A. Walking Beam Type

Walking Beam

B. Sliding Bar Type

(Field Mountable)

Sliding Bar Type

Availability: HFB through PC.

Mounts on panel (not included)

fitting over front of breakers.

Standard breaker spacing:

HLC, HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB

and HNC 8.50-inch center

to center; HKA and HLB

5.75-inch center to center;

HFB 4.1875-inch center

to center.

C. Kirk Key Interlock

Kirk Key Interlock

Center Studs

Availability: EB through PC.

Mounts on panel (not

included) at rear of breaker.

Standard breaker spacing:

center to center; LAB, LA,

LC, HLC, MA, MC, NB, NC,

HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB and

HNC 8.50-inch center to

center; PB, PC and PCC

12.25-inch center to center;

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB

and HLB 5.75 inch center

to center; EB, EHB, FB,

JB, KB, HFB and HKB

4.375 inch center to center.

Order as a set of two

special factory drilled

breakers and one walking

beam interlock. Specify

breaker type, panel

thickness and center

to center dimension

of breakers.

Note: Not UL Listed. 2000A

maximum for PB breaker. Not

available on drawout breakers.

Availability: EB through PC.

Permits interlocking of two

breakers or one breaker

with other devices. Before

breaker can be closed,

key must be inserted and

turned in breaker interlock.

Breaker must be opened

before key can be

removed. It can then be

inserted in interlock or

other devices to permit

their closure. Requests and

orders should completely

outline interlocking

scheme, ultimate user

and address.

Note: Not available on motor

operated breakers. (No CA,

LCL, FCL breakers.)

Availability: 600A frames

(LA) through (NB) 1200A

frames except SELTRONIC

and current limiting

breakers.

Provides connections for

dual voltage generators, so

that same trip unit can be

used for protection at both

voltages. At higher voltage,

the trip unit carries full load

current. At lower voltage,

half the current bypasses

the trip unit through the

center studs. Trip rating

cannot exceed 50% of

frame rating.

Field Discharge Switch

Availability: 400, 600A

frame (LA).

Breaker is used exclusively

to discharge the field of

a DC motor or generator,

usually through a resistor.

When the two outer

poles open, the center

pole closes.

Note: Not UL Listed.

V12-T3-78 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Motor Operators

Motor operators provide

complete remote control by

means of a pushbutton or a

similar pilot device.

Note: The pilot device must be

maintained contact type for EB,

EHB, FB, HFB, DA, JA, KA, JB,

KB, HKB and LB mechanisms,

momentary contact type for

all others.

Positive switching action is

accomplished by use of an

operating arm engaging the

breaker handle. The unit is

energized momentarily to

actuate the lever arm moving

it to either the ON or OFF

position. The control is broken

by an internal cutoff switch.

Means for emergency manual

operations is provided.

Motor operations are

available with motors

rated 120 Vac, 208 Vac

and 240 Vac.

Note: LA and larger available for

125 Vdc.

The 480V operators use a

120 Vac motor in conjunction

with a 480/240V to 120V

dual voltage transformer.

(On LA and larger operators,

the transformer is supplied

for separate mounting by

the customer.)

Note: The motor operator is

intended only for infrequent

operation in line with Underwriters

Laboratories endurance standards

for molded-case breakers.

Minimum 1 kVA transformer

is required for use with all

motor operations.

Back Mounting Plates

Breaker

Type

120, 208, 240,

480 Vac

Style Number

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 503C707G01

DA, JA, KA, LB, HLB 503C981G01

Motor Operator Selection 12

Motor Data

Notes

1 AC voltage rated operators are UL Listed as recognized components.

2 See Dimension Sheet 29-170.

Breaker

Type

Style Number—AC Voltage Style Number—DC Voltage

120 208 240 480 125 24

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 656D148G11 656D148G04 656D148G02 656D148G13 — —

DA, JA, KA, HKA 657D819G23 657D819G10 657D819G08 657D819G24 — —

LB, LBB, HLB 657D819G25 657D819G16 657D819G14 657D819G26 — —

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 2607D97G37 2607D97G40 2607D97G38 2607D97G39 2607D97G51 2607D97G42

MA, HMA, MC, HMC 5664D54G75 5664D54G78 5664D54G76 5664D54G77 5664D54G96 5664D54G81

NB, HNB, NC, HNC.

SPCB1200

1494D60G31 1494D60G32 1494D60G33 1494D60G34 1494D60G35 1494D60G36

PB, PC, PCC, PA,

SPCB2000

5661D52G01 5661D52G04 5661D52G02 5661D52G03 5661D52G17 —

Breaker

Type

Motor

Inrush Current,

Ampere (Peak)

Continuous

Current (rms) Operating

Time, Open

or CloseType Hp 120V 208V 240V 120V 208V 240V

EB, EHB,

FB, HFB

Split-phase 1/75 10 4 5 2.3 1.17 1.65 1.5 seconds

DA, JA, KA,

JB, KB, LB, LBB,

HKB, HLB

Split-phase 1/50 14 6 7 3.5 1.6 1.75 1.5 seconds

LAB, LA, HLA Reversing — 8 5 4 — — — 12 cycles

MA, HMA, NB,

HNB, SPCB1200

Reversing — 11 7 6 — — — 12 cycles

PB, PA,

SPCB2000

Reversing — 20 12 11 — — — 10 cycles

For LAB, LA, HLA Breakers For MA, HMA, NB, HNB Breakers For PB Breakers

For EB, EHB, FB

and HFB

For DA, JA, KA, JB,

LB, LBB, HKA, HKB

and HLB Breakers

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-79

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Drawout Frame

These drawout frames are

for use with standard three-

pole Cutler-Hammer molded-

case circuit breakers. They

consist of two separate

parts: stationary mounting

frame and movable carrier

frame. Slide rails are

drawer-type, and a screw

mechanism is used to

engage or withdraw the

movable carrier frame.

The drawout frames have three

positions:

connected, test and

disconnected. The frames do

not include a safety tripping

interlock or secondary

contacts. These are optional

items and may be ordered at

additional cost.

Breakers mounted in the

drawout frames can be

equipped with standard

breaker accessories including

shunt trip, undervoltage

release, auxiliary switch,

alarm switch and motor

operator.

Optional Features

Safety Interlock

This feature trips the breaker

as the movable carrier frame

is withdrawn, and must be

factory installed. Order

as follows.

Note: Safety interlock not

available on MC, NC, HMC,

HNC, LC and HLC.

For LA, MA and

NB Breakers

Order standard stationary

mounting frame. Order

breaker and movable carrier

frame assembled with

safety interlock.

Secondary Contacts

These are used to disconnect

auxiliary circuits when

attachments such as shunt

trip or motor operator are

used. Available in multiples

of four contacts with a

maximum of 24 contacts for

the LA 600 or 32 contacts for

the MA and NB. They must

be factory mounted. Order

by description as similar to

stationary or moving frame

and specify number of

contacts required.

Selection Data 12

Ordering Information

Note: SELTRONIC circuit

breakers with built-in ground fault

require a special breaker frame

with leads out the side in place of

standard terminal block. Order by

description the breaker frame and

carrier as one assembly.

Standard Installation

Order one stationary

mounting frame and one

movable carrier frame.

Order breakers without

terminals or rear connectors.

Order any attachments

desired (shunt trip,

undervoltage release, etc.)

Order secondary contacts

as required:

●A shunt trip, an under-

voltage release or an

alarm switch requires

two contacts

●A 1A-1B auxiliary switch

requires three contacts

●A motor operator requires

a maximum of four

contacts

●Others as required

With Safety Interlock

Order stationary mounting

frame and movable carrier

frame as directed under

optional features.

Racking Crank

A special crank to engage or

withdraw the moving portion

of the drawout. A standard

0.50-inch hex socket with

extension can be used for

this purpose.

Racking Crank

Cell Switches Mounted

on Drawout Frames,

All Ratings

Up to four switches can be

provided. Order by description.

Each switch provides

NO and NC contact that

transfers before reaching

the test position when being

withdrawn, and after the test

position when being racked

in. Contact factory for pricing.

Notes

1Safety interlock not available on MC, NC,

HMC, HNC, LC and HLC.

2SELTRONIC circuit breakers with built-in

ground fault require a special breaker

frame with leads out the side in place

of standard terminal block. Order by

description the breaker frame and carrier

as one assembly.

3These units are UL Listed.

4Not UL Listed.

5Factory installed only.

Breaker

Type

Stationary Mounting Frame

Style Number

Movable Carrier Frame

Style Number

HLA600, HLC600, LA600, LD, HLD 32603D84G01 2608D35G06

HMA, HMC, MDL, HMDL 32603D85G01 2608D34G10

HNB, HNC, ND, HND 32603D85G01 2608D34G08

PB, PC, PCC 2000A 42601D18G04 Order by description 5

PB 2500A, PC, PCC 2500A and 3000A 42601D18G05 Order by description 5

Drawout Frame

Style Number

765A767G01

V12-T3-80 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Panelboard “Only”

Replacement Breaker

Selection Guide

Panelboard “Only”

replacement breakers

are generally for use as

replacement for out-of-

production panelboard

branch circuit breakers

where both physical and

electrical interchangeability

is required. Where possible,

consideration should be

given to application of either

current Series C or Series G

circuit breakers.

For additional information,

consult the charts on

Pages V12-T3-84 and

V12-T3-85 or contact your

local Eaton Field Sales

office or the Breaker

Service Centers.

Replacement Chart 1

Current

Panelboard

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Out-of-

Production

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Vac

(50/60 Hz)

240 480 600

REA 1EA 1■

RE E 1■

REH EH 1■

RFA 1FA 1■

RHFA HFA 1■

RF 1F 1■

RHF HF 1■

RJ J 2■

RK 1K 2■

RHK HK 2■

RKL 1KL 2■

RHKL HKL 2■

RLM 1LM 2■

RHLM HLM 2■

HLA JK 2■

HLA 1JKL 2■

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 3

Panelboard “Only” Replacement Breaker Selection Guide

Replacement of all out-of-

production panelboard circuit

breakers are designated by

the easily identifiable addition

of an ”R“ prefix to the

out-of-production circuit

breaker catalog number

that they replace.

An Example:

RHF3100 is a newly

manufactured, three-pole,

100A trip panelboard

replacement breaker for an

out-of-production HF3100.

RDesignates new

panelboard “only”

replacement breaker.

HF Identifies the out-of-

production circuit

breaker frame.

3Number of poles.

100 Trip ampere rating.

Notes:

1. Panelboard “only”

replacement circuit

breakers have non-

interchangeable trip

units and the same

interrupting capacity

as the out-of-production

circuit breakers that

they replace.

2. The RE breaker has

off-center terminals

just like the E breaker

it is replacing.

3. For out-of-production

breakers, the “B” suffix

denotes 277 Vac rating

for the panelboard

replacement breaker.

(Example: RE3020B)

4. Some panelboard “only”

replacement breakers do

not have the same

physical dimensions or

mounting holes as the

breakers that they

replace. For example, the

types REH and RHFA are

6.00 inches in length

and the breakers that

they

replace, EH and HFA,

are 6.50 inches

in length.

Mounting hardware

is provided with each

breaker to resolve these

differences, and must be

installed to ensure a

proper fit.

5. Panelboard “only”

replacement breakers

can be installed in the

following styles of out-of-

production

Westinghouse

panelboards:

6. ABH NEB

A2B NHDP

NHEB NH1B

NA1B NLAB-AB

NA1B-LX NLAB-ABH

NDP

Notes

1Last manufacture date—1974.

2Last manufacture date—1967.

3These frames are obsolete. For

replacement solutions, see the cross-

reference on Pages V12-T3-114–

V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for

other panelboard solutions.

2Packaged individually.

Continuous Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac

Type RHLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic

125 RHLM2125 RHLM3125

150 RHLM2150 RHLM3150

175 RHLM2175 RHLM3175

200 RHLM2200 RHLM3200

225 RHLM2225 RHLM3225

250 RHLM2250 RHLM3250

275 RHLM2275 RHLM3275

300 RHLM2300 RHLM3300

325 RHLM2325 RHLM3325

350 RHLM2350 RHLM3350

400 RHLM2400 RHLM3400

450 RHLM2450 RHLM3450

500 RHLM2500 RHLM3500

550 RHLM2550 RHLM3550

600 RHLM2600 RHLM3600

600 MCS RHLM2600K RHLM3600K

700 RHLM2700 RHLM3700

800 RHLM2800 RHLM3800

Type RHLM

Panelboard

Circuit

Breakers Terminals 2

RJ TA225LA1

RK TA225LA1

RHK TA225LA1

RKL TA400LA1

RHKL TA400LA1

RLM TA700MA1 (for <600A)

RHLM TA800MA1 (for 700–800A)

Special Breakers

Magnetic only (includes

load terminals). Available

for all ampere ratings for

two- and three-pole RJ,

RK, RKL, RLM, RHK, RHKL

and RHLM.

High magnetic molded-

case switches (K suffix) are

available to replace out-of-

production non-automatic

breakers (N suffix).

Note: Not UL Listed.

Breaker

Type

Catalog Number

Single Twin

F-Frame — KPRL4FD

J-Frame KPRL4JDS KPRL4JDT

K-Frame KPRL4KDS KPRL4KDT

L-Frame KPRL4LD —

M-Frame KPRL4MC —

N-Frame KPRL4ND —

V12-T3-88 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

Replacement Capabilities

Cutler-Hammer motor

control center replacement

circuit breakers are newly

manufactured and tested

to the latest applicable

standards at the Eaton

molded-case circuit breaker

plant in Beaver, PA. This

plant has a long and well-

recognized tradition of

product safety, integrity

and quality.

The motor control center

replacement circuit breaker

solution eliminates the

need to consider alternative

approaches. Eaton

customers are ensured

that the high standards

of product quality and

reliability do not have to be

sacrificed when replacing

Westinghouse out-of-

production circuit breakers.

All motor control center

replacement circuit breakers

are easily identified by the

prefix “RMC” added to the

out-of-production type

circuit breaker catalog

number they replace.

Replacement Chart

Current

MCC

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Out-of-

Production

Circuit

Breaker

Type 1

Volts AC

(50/60 Hz)

600

RMCFA FA ■

RMCHFA HFA ■

RMCF F ■

RMCHF HF ■

Replacement Motor Control Center Breakers

Motor Control Center Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Ratings

Breaker Type Amperes 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vac

RMCF 23 15–100 18,000 14,000 14,000 10,000

RMCFA 234 15–150 18,000 14,000 14,000 10,000

RMCHF 23 15–100 65,000 25,000 18,000 20,000

RMCHFA 234 15–150 65,000 25,000 18,000 20,000

Example:

An RMCF3100 is a newly

manufactured, three-pole,

100A trip panelboard

replacement circuit breaker.

It replaces an out-of-

production F circuit breaker.

Example:

RMC Designates new

motor control

center replacement

circuit breaker.

FIdentifies the out-of-

production circuit

breaker frame.

3Number of poles.

100 Trip unit

ampere rating.

Contact 1-800-OLD-UNIT

for replacement or

Page V12-T3-91 for

Series C retrofit kits.

Notes

1Last manufacture date—1974.

2Motor control center replacement

breakers do not have the same

physical dimensions or mounting holes

as the breakers they replace. Types

RMCFA and RMCHFA are 6.00

inches long and the breakers they

replace, FA and HFA, are 6.50 inches

long. Types RMCF and RMCHF

are 6.00 inches long and the breakers

they replace, F and HF, are 9.375

inches long. A mounting plate is

provided with each breaker to resolve

these differences, and must be

installed to ensure a proper fit.

3Motor control center replacement

circuit breakers have non-

interchangeable trip units and the

same interrupting capacity as the

out-of-production circuit breakers

they replace.

4RMCFA and RMCHFA two-pole

breakers are supplied in a three-pole

frame with current carrying parts

omitted from the center pole.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-89

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Types RMCFA, RMCF, RMCHFA and RMCHF—Motor Control Center Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Motor Control Center Replacement Circuit Breakers

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For more information, call 1-800-OLD-UNIT for Cutler-Hammer motor control solutions.

See Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits.

Continuous Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Catalog Number

Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole

Type RMCFA—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic

15 —RMCFA2015 RMCFA3015

20 —RMCFA2020 RMCFA3020

25 —RMCFA2025 RMCFA3025

30 —RMCFA2030 RMCFA3030

35 —RMCFA2035 RMCFA3035

40 —RMCFA2040 RMCFA3040

50 —RMCFA2050 RMCFA3050

60 —RMCFA2060 RMCFA3060

70 —RMCFA2070 RMCFA3070

80 —RMCFA2080 RMCFA3080

90 —RMCFA2090 RMCFA3090

100 —RMCFA2100 RMCFA3100

Type RMCF—15–150A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic

15 —RMCHF2015 RMCHF3015

20 —RMCHF2020 RMCHF3020

25 —RMCHF2025 RMCHF3025

30 —RMCHF2030 RMCHF3030

35 —RMCHF2035 RMCHF3035

40 —RMCHF2040 RMCHF3040

50 —RMCHF2050 RMCHF3050

60 —RMCHF2060 RMCHF3060

70 —RMCHF2070 RMCHF3070

80 —RMCHF2080 RMCHF3080

90 —RMCHF2090 RMCHF3090

100 —RMCHF2100 RMCHF3100

125 —RMCHF2125 RMCHF3125

150 —RMCHF2150 RMCHF3150

Type RMCFA

Type RMCF

V12-T3-90 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1

Motor Control Center Replacement Circuit Breakers

Notes

1 These frames are obsolete. For more information, call 1-800-OLD-UNIT for Cutler-Hammer motor control solutions.

See Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits.

Continuous Ampere

Rating at 40°C

Catalog Number

Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole

Type RMCHFA—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic

15 —RMCHFA2015 RMCHFA3015

20 —RMCHFA2020 RMCHFA3020

25 —RMCHFA2025 RMCHFA3025

30 —RMCHFA2030 RMCHFA3030

35 —RMCHFA2035 RMCHFA3035

40 —RMCHFA2040 RMCHFA3040

50 —RMCHFA2050 RMCHFA3050

60 —RMCHFA2060 RMCHFA3060

70 —RMCHFA2070 RMCHFA3070

80 —RMCHFA2080 RMCHFA3080

90 —RMCHFA2090 RMCHFA3090

100 —RMCHFA2100 RMCHFA3100

125 —RMCHFA2125 RMCHFA3125

150 —RMCHFA2150 RMCHFA3150

Type RMCHF—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic

15 —RMCHF2015 RMCHF3015

20 —RMCHF2020 RMCHF3020

25 —RMCHF2025 RMCHF3025

30 —RMCHF2030 RMCHF3030

35 —RMCHF2035 RMCHF3035

40 —RMCHF2040 RMCHF3040

50 —RMCHF2050 RMCHF3050

60 —RMCHF2060 RMCHF3060

70 —RMCHF2070 RMCHF3070

80 —RMCHF2080 RMCHF3080

90 —RMCHF2090 RMCHF3090

100 —RMCHF2100 RMCHF3100

Type RMCHF

Type RMCHFA

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-91

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Technology Upgrades

Series C Retrofit Kits

Series C Retrofit Kits are to

be used to upgrade existing

Type W and 5 Star motor

control center units by

changing out the old breakers

with new Series C models.

These kits can be applied to

both starter and feeder units.

Some of the breakers that

these kits will upgrade

include:

●MCP, F, FA, FB, HFB, K, KA,

KB, HKB, L, LA, LB and

HLB breakers

5 Star Series C Retrofit Kit

The 5 Star Series C retrofit kit

includes:

●Series C device, 65 kA

(either HMCP or thermal-

magnetic breaker)

●Operating handle, including

tripped indication and

push-to-trip mechanism

●Label stating that the MCC

unit has been retrofitted

with Series C device

suitable for 65 kA (similar

to UL quality label)

●Templates for desired

frame size

●Assembly instructions

Customer benefits:

●Ease of ordering—one

catalog number for all

required parts

●Series C technology—

higher AIC rating

●All new components

associated with the

breaker, including new

stab assembly, operating

mechanism and door,

if required

Type W Series C Retrofit Kit

The Type W Series C retrofit

kit includes:

●Series C device, 65 kA

(either HMCP or thermal-

magnetic breaker)

●Operating handle, including

tripped indication and

push-to-trip mechanism

●Label stating that the MCC

unit has been retrofitted

with Series C device

suitable for 65 kA (similar

to UL quality label)

●Templates for proper hole

placement for desired

frame size

●Series C breaker mounting

hardware

●New door and hardware

●New stab assembly

●Assembly instructions

310+ Electronic Trip Unit

The 310+ electronic trip unit

has advantages and upgraded

features over the Series C

310 electronic trip unit

as follows:

●Adjustable Ir continuous

current setting eliminates

the need for rating plugs

●Cause of trip information

can be extracted from

the breaker

●Zone selective interlocking

option for breaker

coordination

●Ground fault alarm only

option to keep critical

equipment on-line when

a ground fault is present

●Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System™ to

improve worker safety

Note: Available only for the LG,

NG, RG/RD 310+ models.

The 310+ electronic trip unit

is available for the following

MCCB breakers:

●Series C FDE

●Series G JG

●Series G LG

●Series G NG

●Series G RG

●Series C RD (available

as a field retrofit kit)

Series C to Series G

Upgrades

The Series C 250A JD and

600A LD breakers are being

replaced by Series G 250A

JG and 600A LG breakers

respectively. There are

several advantages in

moving from these Series C

to Series G breakers.

Series G 250A JG Molded-Case

Circuit Breaker

●Smaller breaker footprint

than Series C JD

●Breaker is duel rated,

UL and IEC

●Interruption ratings up to

200 kAIC at 480 Vac

●Accessories are field

installable thru-cover

●Now available with an

electronic, 310+ trip unit

●Can accommodate the

ANSI C12.1 Power

Monitoring/Metering

Module (PM3)

Series G 600A LG Molded-Case

Circuit Breaker:

●Smaller breaker footprint

Series C LD

●Breaker is duel rated,

UL and IEC

●Interruption ratings up

to 200 kAIC at 480 Vac

●Accessories are field

installable thru-cover

●Upgraded from 310

electronic trip unit to a

310+ electronic trip unit

●Can accommodate the

ANSI C12.1 Power

Monitoring Metering

Module (PM3)

Advantages of 310+ Electronic

Trip Unit Technology Versus

the 310 Electronic Trip Unit:

●Adjustable Ir continuous

current setting eliminates

the need for rating plugs

●Cause of trip information

can be extracted from

the breaker

●Zone selective interlocking

option for breaker

coordination

●Ground fault alarm only

option to keep critical

equipment on-line when

a ground fault is present

●Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System to

improve worker safety

(not available in the JG

310+ electronic trip unit)

V12-T3-92 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

F10 Series C Retrofit Kit

The F10 Series C retrofit

kit includes:

●Series C device, 65 kA

(either HMCP or thermal-

magnetic breaker)

●Operating handle

mechanism, including

tripped indication

push-to-trip

●Label stating that the MCC

unit has been retrofitted

with Series C device

suitable for 65 kA (similar

to UL quality label)

●Templates for desired

frame size

●Assembly instructions

Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Frame

Type

Interrupting Rating (kAIC) Trip Rating

Amperes

Catalog

Number240V 480V 600V

HFD 100 65 25 15 HFD3015

HFD 100 65 25 20 HFD3020

HFD 100 65 25 25 HFD3025

HFD 100 65 25 30 HFD3030

HFD 100 65 25 40 HFD3040

HFD 100 65 25 50 HFD3050

HFD 100 65 25 60 HFD3060

HFD 100 65 25 70 HFD3070

HFD 100 65 25 80 HFD3080

HFD 100 65 25 90 HFD3090

HFD 100 65 25 100 HFD3100

HFD 100 65 25 125 HFD3125

HFD 100 65 25 150 HFD3150

FDC 200 100 35 15 FDC3015

FDC 200 100 35 20 FDC3020

FDC 200 100 35 25 FDC3025

FDC 200 100 35 30 FDC3030

FDC 200 100 35 40 FDC3040

FDC 200 100 35 50 FDC3050

FDC 200 100 35 60 FDC3060

FDC 200 100 35 70 FDC3070

FDC 200 100 35 80 FDC3080

FDC 200 100 35 90 FDC3090

FDC 200 100 35 100 FDC3100

FDC 200 100 35 125 FDC3125

FDC 200 100 35 150 FDC3150

HJD 100 65 25 175 HJD3175

HJD 100 65 25 200 HJD3200

HJD 100 65 25 225 HJD3225

HJD 100 65 25 250 HJD3250

JDC 200 100 35 175 JDC3175

JDC 200 100 35 200 JDC3200

JDC 200 100 35 225 JDC3225

JDC 200 100 35 250 JDC3250

HKD 100 65 35 300 HKD3300

HKD 100 65 35 350 HKD3350

HKD 100 65 35 400 HKD3400

KDC 200 100 50 300 KDC3300

KDC 200 100 50 350 KDC3350

KDC 200 100 50 400 KDC3400

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-93

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors Series C Retrofit Kit Catalog Numbering System

How to Order

Step 1: Select the correct Series C molded-case circuit breaker

from the table on Page V12-T3-92 or the Series C motor circuit

protector from the table on this page.

Step 2: Create a catalog number based on the MCC type,

device selected, modifications, door size and device panel.

Step 3: Select price from PL04304002E.

Starter

Size

Magnetic Trip

Range Amperes

Continuous

Rating Amperes

Catalog

Number

09–303HMCP003A0

0 21–70 7 HMCP007C0

0 45–150 15 HMCP015E0

0 40–60 25 HMCP025D0

1 90–300 30 HMCP030H1

2 80–120 50 HMCP050G2

2 150–500 50 HMCP050K2

2 115–170 70 HMCP070J2

2 210–700 70 HMCP070M2

3 160–240 100 HMCP100L3

3 300–1000 100 HMCP100R3

4 450–1500 150 HMCP150T4

4 750–2500 150 HMCP150U4

4, 5 350–700 250 HMCP250A5

5 450–900 250 HMCP250C5

5 500–1000 250 HMCP250D5

5 625–1250 250 HMCP250F5

5 750–1500 250 HMCP250G5

5 875–1750 250 HMCP250J5

5 1000–2000 250 HMCP250K5

5 1125–2250 250 HMCP250L5

5 1250–2500 250 HMCP250W5

5 500–1000 400 HMCP400D5

5 625–1250 400 HMCP400F5

5 750–1500 400 HMCP400G5

5 875–1750 400 HMCP400J5

5 1000–2000 400 HMCP400K5

5 1125–2250 400 HMCP400L5

5 1250–2500 400 HMCP400M5

5 1500–3000 400 HMCP400N5

5 1750–3500 400 HMCP400R5

5, 6 2000–4000 400 HMCP400X5

Device Panel

D= With device

panel

N= No device panel

FT HMCP030H1 C 12 N

MCC Type

FT = Type W

FS = 5 Star

FR = F10

Device Catalog

Number

Use tables.

Modifications

C= Copper lugs

for HMCP

L= Lugs for molded-

case breaker Door Size

Height of door in inches,

6.00-inch increments

V12-T3-94 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

OPTIM 550 Trip Units for Upgrading Thermal/Magnetic Trips

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Replacement of the

OPTIM 550 trip units and

the associated accessories

allows a customer to easily

upgrade an existing Series C,

K- or L-Frame molded-case

circuit breaker equipped

with a standard thermal-

magnetic trip unit, without

the need to purchase a new

circuit breaker.

Key features and benefits

of the OPTIM 550 trip

unit include:

●10 set points providing for

premium protection and

coordination

●Cause-of-Trip indication

(LEDs and digital memory)

●Load monitoring to provide

information for energy

management

●Diagnostics to assist in

system troubleshooting

●Communications and zone

interlocking options—field

or factory installed

OPTIM 550 Trip Units for Upgrading Thermal/Magnetic Trips

Maximum

Ampere Rating

(Sensor)

Catalog Number

Type of OPTIM 550 Trip Unit

LSI LSIA LSIG

KD, HKD, KDC, CKD and CHKD Breaker Frames

125 KEP3125T52 KEP3125T57 KEP3125T56

250 KEP3250T52 KEP3250T57 KEP3250T56

400 KEP3400T52 KEP3400T57 KEP3400T56

LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD and CLDC Breaker Frames

125 LEP3125T52 LEP3125T57 LEP3125T56

250 LEP3250T52 LEP3250T57 LEP3250T56

400 LEP3400T52 LEP3400T57 LEP3400T56

600 LEP3600T52 LEP3600T57 LEP3600T56

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet™ and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only)

K-, L- and N-Frames

PowerNet

Communication Kit

The Cutler-Hammer

PowerNet communications

kit can be ordered to add

PowerNet communications

to an existing OPTIM 550

breaker in the field. An

18.00-inch wiring pigtail is

routed to the rear of the

breaker: two wires for

PowerNet and two wires

for 24 Vdc (45 mA load).

It is recommended that the

power supply be an “isolated

high quality” unit.

PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits

Notes

1Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit

(catalog number GFAU).

Instruction leaflet numbers (K) 29C506, (L) 29C897, (N) 29C898.

Circuit

Breaker

PowerNet

Zone Interlocking/

Ground 1

PowerNet and Zone

Interlocking/Ground 1

Factory

Install

Suffix

Catalog

Number

Factory

Install

Suffix

Catalog

Number

Factory

Install

Suffix

Catalog

Number

K-Frame PN ICK550K ZG ZGK550K ZGP ZGPK550K

L-Frame PN ICK550L ZG ZGK550L ZGP ZGPK550L

N-Frame PN ICK550N ZG ZGK550N ZGP ZGPK550N

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-95

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Handle Mechanisms

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

MCCB Handle Mechanism

Introduction

Eaton offers a broad range

of handle mechanisms for

molded-case circuit breakers.

Each of these has been

designed specifically for

safe, dependable operation

and ease of installation.

Handle mechanisms are

used in a wide variety of

applications including

enclosed molded-case circuit

breakers,

control panels and

motor control centers.

Whether replacing a damaged

handle mechanism with a like

unit, switching from fuses

to circuit breakers in order to

limit downtime, or upgrading

to take advantage of the

many benefits associated

with applying communicating,

programmable molded-case

circuit breaker technology,

Eaton has the handle

mechanism solution

that is right for you.

Flex-Shaft Type—Page V12-T3-107

Type SM Safety Handle—

Page V12-T3-101

Type AMT Vari-Depth—

Page V12-T3-104

Slide Plate Type—Page V12-T3-99

Universal Rotary Type—

Page V12-T3-110

G-Frame Vari-Depth

Universal Direct—Page V12-T3-111

Vari-Depth Type—Page V12-T3-105

Type MC Motor Control—

Page V12-T3-103

Series C Rotary Type— Page V12-T3-109

G Direct—Page V12-T3-111

Euro IEC Direct—Page V12-T3-111

V12-T3-96 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Handle Mechanism Selection and Availability Guide

Notes

1For application only with Series C molded-case circuit breakers and HMCPs.

2Series C F-Frame includes EHD, ED, FDB, FD, HFD and FDC designations.

Circuit Breaker and

Switch Type

Door Mounted Flange Mounted

Vari-

Depth

Series C 1

Rotary

Slide

Plate MC

Series C 1

Flex Shaft SM

AMT

Fixed Width

AMT

Vari-Depth

Series C Breakers

F-Frame/F HMCP 2■■■■■■■■

J-Frame/J HMCP ■■■■■■■■

K-Frame/K HMCP ■■■■■■■■

L-Frame/L HMCP ■■■■■■■■

M-Frame ■■■■■■ ■

N-Frame ■■

R-Frame ■■

Other Industrial Breakers

GB/GHB/GC/GHC/GD/GMCP ■

LA/LAB/HLA ■■■■■■

LC/HLC/LCG ■■■■■■

MA/HMA ■■■■■

MC/HMC ■■■■■

NB/HNB ■■■■■

NC/HNC ■■■■■

PB ■

PC/PCC ■

FB TRI-PAC ■■■■■

LA TRI-PAC ■■ ■■

NB TRI-PAC ■■ ■■

PB TRI-PAC ■

FCL ■■■

LCL ■ ■■■

EB/EHB/FB/HFB ■■■■■■

JA/KA/HKA/DA/LB/LBB/HLB ■■■■■■

Disconnect Switches

DE-ION® 30, 60, 100 ■■

DS 30, 60, 100, 200 ■■■■■■

DS 400, 600 ■

Visi-Flex Model “T” 30, 60, 100 ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-97

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Vari-Depth Type

General purpose vari-depth

handle mechanisms are

suitable for use with Type 1

fabricated enclosures. They

are designed for use with

breakers or disconnect

switches when used in deep

enclosures.

Required for a standard

application are a padlockable

operating handle, a shaft and

a mechanism. Two variable

depth shafts are offered

to better cover the wide

range of depths of various

enclosures...these are

referred to in the table as the

standard and the long shaft.

The dimensions for panel

depth given in the following

table are from the mounting

surface of the breaker or the

disconnect to the inside of

the enclosure cover.

Standard mechanisms do

not include an internal lockoff

device. Mechanisms with this

feature are, however, offered

as an optional item. The

internal lockoff provides a

means of padlocking the

breaker or the switch in

the OFF position while the

enclosure door is open.

These mechanisms may

also be used in conjunction

with Type 4, 7 and 9 cast

enclosures. When used

with these enclosures, the

special handle kits shown

as accessory items must be

ordered in place of the

standard handle.

The adapter bushing, a

component of the special

handle kit, may be ordered

separately.

Mechanism

Handle

Standard Shaft

Long Shaft

Vari-Depth Type Catalog Numbers

Notes

1 Includes hardware.

2 When used with plug-in adapter kits or rear-connected studs, special mounting hardware is required. Refer to Eaton.

3 UL File No. E56845 Vol. 1 Section 4.

4 Extra long shaft includes support bracket for Series C F-Frame with no internal lockoff. Order 373D958G24, which includes the mechanism, shaft and bracket. Order

handle separately. Panel depth 16-3/8–24-1/4.

5 Mechanism style includes a handle and a standard shaft. A long shaft may be ordered separately if required.

6.5

10.0

For Complete Applications,

Order Mechanism,

Handle and Shaft

Mechanism 12 Handle 3Shaft

Standard–

(No Internal

Lockoff)

Style

Number

Special–

(With Internal

Lockoff)

Style

Number

Type 1, 3R, 12

(With

Hardware)

Style

Number

Standard

Panel

Depth

Standard

Style

Number

Long

Panel

Depth

Long

Style

Number

Circuit Breakers

Series C F-Frame and HMCP F 4373D958G22 373D958G23 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/2–14 47A4446G37

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP 373D958G05 373D958G06 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/2–14 47A4446G37

CA 458D493G20 458D493G21 504C323G07 4-3/4–9-3/4 47A4446G36 9-3/4–13-1/2 47A4446G37

Series C J-Frame and HMCP J 5092A62G03 5092A62G04 504C323G07 5-7/8–11-1/8 47A4446G36 11-1/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37

Series C K-Frame and HMCP K 5092A62G01 5092A62G02 504C323G07 5-7/8–11-1/8 47A4446G36 11-1/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37

Series C L-Frame and HMCP L 5092A62G05 5092A62G06 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37

JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB, HLB 458D493G03 458D493G11 504C323G07 5-7/8–11-1/8 47A4446G36 11-1/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37

LA, HLA, LC, HLC 458D493G04 458D493G12 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37

TRI-PAC FB 373D958G10 373D958G11 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/4–14 47A4446G37

FCL 373D958G16 373D958G17 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/4–14 47A4446G37

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C

MD, MDS Frame (not MDL)

458D493G05 458D493G13 504C323G07 6-11/16–11-13/16 47A4446G36 11-13/16–15-9/16 47A4446G37

NB, HNB, NC, HNC 373D958G07 373D958G08 504C323G07 7-15/16–13-1/4 47A4446G36 12-15/16–16-15/16 47A4446G37

TRI-PAC LA 374D075G02 374D075G01 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37

TRI-PAC NB 373D958G12 373D958G13 504C323G07 7-15/16–13-1/4 47A4446G36 12-15/16–16-15/16 47A4446G37

LCL 458D493G22 458D493G23 504C323G07 6-11/16–11-13/16 47A4446G36 11-13/16–15-9/16 47A4446G37

Circuit Breakers

30, 60, 100A DE-ION 547A4446G34 — 55-3/4–11 511–14-3/4 47A4446G37

Type DS 30, 60, 100A 4987D14G02 — 504C323G07 5-3/8–10-5/8 47A4446G36 10-3⁄/8–14-5/16 47A4446G37

Type DS 200A 4987D14G01 — 504C323G07 6-11/16–11-3/16 47A4446G36 10-7/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37

200A DE-ION 458D493G04 458D493G12 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37

Vari-Depth Type

V12-T3-98 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Vari-Depth Type

Special Handles

Meet Type 4 sheet steel

requirements. These handles

are similar to standard

handles, except they include

an internal neoprene gasket.

Due to gasketing effect

between handle and housing,

handle will not indicate a

tripped position when used

with circuit breakers.

UL File No. E56845 Vol. 1

Section 4.

Handle Kits

These kits are for use

with Type 4, 7 and 9 cast

enclosures. They include

a special operating handle,

mounting bolts and an adapter

bushing (bushing may be

purchased separately). Kits

may be used with standard

mechanisms and shafts.

Instruction drawing 314C809

applies for assembly.

Handle Kits

Description Style Number

Standard finish 504C323G08

For Type 4, 9 enclosure 314C794G10

For Type 7 enclosure 314C794G09

Adapter bushing only 314C794G04

Handle Kits

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-99

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Slide Plate Type

These compact slide plate

handle mechanisms are

especially designed for use

with AB DE-ION circuit

breakers and disconnect

switches when they are

mounted in a shallow

enclosure. They are

suitable for use on

Type 1 applications.

Because of the mechanisms’

simplified installation—

three mounting holes—and

preassembled construction,

these units are commonly

used where high volume,

standardized enclosures are

being fabricated.

The mechanism styles listed

on this page are for use on

enclosures that have covers

hinged on the right side. If

these mechanisms are used

on enclosures that have

covers hinged on the left

side, the door interlock will

not function.

Standard Slide Plate Mechanism Catalog Numbers

Notes

Does not padlock in OFF position. Type 3R version available as special. Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center.

2 Handle mechanisms cannot be used on Visi-Flex switches with 200A fuse kits.

Enclosure Cover

Hinged on Right

Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting

Padlocks in

OFF Position

Style Number

Padlocks in

ON or OFF Position

Style Number

Padlocks in

OFF Position

Style Number

Circuit Breakers

KL and HKL frame

MA, HMA, MC and HMC breaker

LA, HLA, LC and HLC breaker

JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB breaker

NB, HNB, NC and HNC breaker

JB, KB and HKB breaker

LCL breaker

314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04

EH breaker 2P with long handle

EH breaker 3P with long handle

F-Frame 2P

F- and HF-Frame 3P

Type AQB and NQB 100A frames and

Type PF 15–100A frame

314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05

EH standard 2P

EH standard 3P and FA magnetic only 2 and 3P

FA 2 and 3P thermal-magnetic

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 3P MCP, HMCP (0-4) 2P

FCL breaker

314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06

PB, TRI-PAC PB, PC, PCC, PCF 505C294G03 — —

Series C Circuit Breakers

F-Frame Series C + HMCP-F 314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06

J-Frame Series C + HMCP-J

K-Frame Series C + HMCP-K

314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05

L-Frame Series C + HMCP-L, MDL 314C386G18 314C386G08 314C386G04

M-Frame Series C 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04

R-Frame 1505C294G03 — —

TRI-PAC switches

225A TRI-PAC Type K

400A TRI-PAC Type KL

LA TRI-PAC

NB TRI-PAC

314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04

100A TRI-PAC 314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05

FB TRI-PAC 314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06

Visi-Flex Switches (Model T) 2

60–100A Visi-Flex 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04

30A and Special 60A Visi-Flex 314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05

DE-ION Switches and Disconnect Switches

30–60A (long handle) DE-ION

100A (long handle) DE-ION

200A disconnect switch

200 DS switch

314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04

30–60A disconnect switch

100A disconnect switch

314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05

30, 60, 100A DS switch 314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06

400 and 60A DS switch 314C386G15 — —

Vertical and

Horizontal Mounting

V12-T3-100 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Outdoor or Hazardous Type

This handle mechanism is

designed for use with

fabricated or cast, Type 3, 4

or 5 enclosures. A butterfly

cam type mechanism may

be used on enclosures with

either right- or left-hand

hinged covers or on

enclosures with bolted

covers. The mechanism

has a provision for padlocking.

Will accept up to three locks.

Assembly of this mechanism

is accomplished by welding

it to the enclosure door or

the cover. Refer to IL29C287

for drilling plan. For PB,

PC and RD, refer to

drawing 372D690.

Mechanisms for Outdoor or Hazardous Locations

Accessories

Door Interlock Kits

Note: For use with slide plate mechanisms used in larger panels where regular interlock is not adequate.

Description

Drilling Plan

Reference

Complete Handle Mechanisms Type 3, 4, 5

Padlocks in

OFF Position

Style Number

Padlocks in ON or

OFF Position

Style Number

Circuit Breakers

Series C F-Frame EB, EHB, FB, HFB 48A3656 48A3656G03 48A3656G04

JA, KA, LA, MA, HKA, HLA, HMA, LB, HLB 452D028 452D028G01 —

DE-ION Switches

30, 60, 100A 48A3656 48A3656G03 48A3656G04

Description

Drilling Plan

Reference

Style

Number

3 point—for mechanisms, style numbers: 314C386G01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, 09, 10 208B624 28A2656G08

2 point—for PB mechanism, style number 505C294G03 372D690 1532990

Outdoor or Hazardous

Location Type

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-101

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type SM Safety Handle

Enclosed Breaker with SM Handle

Type SM safety handle

mechanism is designed

to prevent tampering by

unauthorized individuals

and provides the optimum

in personnel safety. When

properly applied, these

mechanisms conform

to Type 12 and J.I.C.

requirements, and are

well-suited for use by the

automotive and machine

tool industries.

Completely preassembled

in a rugged cast housing,

the Type SM safety handle

mechanism includes a

predrilled mounting plate

for simplified customer

installation. Standard handles

are 5.125 inches long and

can be padlocked in the OFF

position with as many as

three padlocks. A shorter

handle 3.875 inches long

can be supplied on SM100,

SM101 or SM150

mechanisms when specified.

All Type SM safety handle

mechanisms

can be used on

any size enclosure. Order

handle mechanism from the

table at right, plus desired

door hardware for complete

application. Dress nameplate

required to meet automotive

specifications is available

from accessories section.

Type SM Safety Handle Mechanism Catalog Numbers

Further Information

Notes

1 Must be ordered with door hardware; if not, door-operated defeater kit is required.

Mechanisms for Type 4 Applications—Mechanisms with stainless steel parts and special gasketing can

be supplied. Order by description. 30% adder.

Handle Mechanism for Use With:

Catalog Number 1

Right-Hand

Mounting

Enclosure

Cover Hinged

On Left

Left-Hand

Mounting

Enclosure

Cover Hinged

On Right

Series C—F-Frame, MCP, HMCP F, EB, EHB, FB, HFB breakers,

and Type DS 30, 60, 100A non-fusible switches

SM150R SM150L

Type DS 30, 60, 100A fusible switches SM100SFR SM100SFL

FB TRI-PAC, FB breaker with current limiter, or Type FCL SM101PR SM101PL

30, 60, 100A DE-ION switches SM100R SM100L

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB breakers SM225R SM225L

Series C—J-Frame, HMCP J SM250JR SM250JL

Series C—K-Frame, HMCP K SM400KR SM400KL

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC breakers (400 and 600A) SM400R SM400L

Series C—L-Frame, HMCP L, MDL SM600R SM600L

Series C—M-Frame, MD, MDS SM800R SM800L

MA, HMA, MC, HMC breakers SM800R SM800L

TRI-PAC LA breaker SM400PR SM400PL

TRI-PAC NB SM800PR SM800PL

NB, HNB, NC, HNC breakers SM1200R SM1200L

Type DS 200A non-fusible switch SM200SR SM200SL

Type DS 200A fusible switch SM200SFR SM200SFL

Type LCL SM400LCLR SM400LCLL

Publication

Number Description

IL 14439 F-Frame, EB, EHB, FB, FCL, HFB, MCP, FB-P, 30–100A DS switch

IL 29C274 J- and K-Frame

IL 29C284 L-Frame

IL 13282 JA, KA, JB, KB, LAB, LA, MA, NB, HLA, NB-P, 200A DS switch

IL 13327 DH1L door hardware

IL 13326 DH1R door hardware

IL 13325 DH2R door hardware

IL 13324 DH3L door hardware

IL 13322 DH3R door hardware

IL 13287 Electrical interlock

V12-T3-102 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type SM Safety Handle

Door Hardware

Three choices of door hardware and an auxiliary handle are

offered to provide the best latching scheme for individual needs.

The door hardware is designed with a provision for padlocking,

and a coin-proof slot that requires the use of a tool to open the

door, for maximum security.

Select desired hardware from the table below. Additional latches

can be ordered from accessories section if desired. Type 1, 12 only.

Door Hardware

Dress Nameplates

Required to meet automotive specifications. Mounts from inside

enclosure and covers operating mechanism mounting bolts,

making mechanism non-removable when enclosure door is closed.

Dress Nameplate

Description

Catalog Number

Right Hand Left Hand

With sliding latches for smaller

panels up to approximately

30.00 inches high

DH1R 1DH1L 2

With 2-roller latches for

intermediate panels up to

approximately 40.00 inches high

DH2R 1DH2L 2

With 3-roller latches for larger

panels, approximately

40.00 inches and higher

DH3R 1DH3L 2

Auxiliary handle for

larger panels

DH4R 1DH4L 2

Description Style Number

For SM100, SM150 mechanisms 373D260G05

For SM200, and larger mechanisms 373D260G05

Dress Nameplate

Auxiliary Latch Kits

Provide an additional latch for use with applications where

2-point latching may not be adequate.

Auxiliary Latch Kits

Electrical Interlock Kit

Provides 1NC and 1NO contacts (SPDT switch) for use with

auxiliary circuits. Mounts to end of mechanism housing as shown.

Electrical Interlock Kit

Door Operated Interlock Defeater Kit

Required when door hardware is not used; operates as door

closes. Additional method of securing door such as screw latch,

also required (to be supplied by box manufacturer).

Door Operated Interlock Defeater Kit

Notes

1Enclosure cover hinged on left.

2Enclosure cover hinged on right.

Description Style Number

Door hardware using sliding latches,

right- or left-hand mounting

656D669G01

Door hardware using roller latches,

right-hand mounting

370D801G04

Left-hand mounting 370D802G04

Style Number

622B747G01

Style Number

623B214G02

Slide and

Roller Latches

Electrical Interlock Kit

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-103

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Type MC Motor Control

225A Mechanism

Type MC handle mechanisms

are linear drive, fixed depth

mechanisms designed for

through-door mounting in

standardized or shallow depth

enclosures such as motor

control centers or enclosed

circuit breakers.

Mounting directly to the

front of the disconnect,

these mechanisms provide

positive operation and handle

indication. Both disconnect

and mechanism mount

simultaneously with

mounting hardware supplied

with the mechanism.

For security, the handle can

be padlocked in the OFF

position with up to three

0.375-inch hasp padlocks.

Also, the mechanism is

interlocked with the enclosure

door so that the disconnect

must be OFF before the

door can be opened. A

defeater is provided to

bypass this interlock.

Catalog numbers listed

include the mechanism,

mounting hardware and

door interlock clip.

Type MC Motor Control Catalog Numbers

Further Information

Notes

1 Mechanisms are shown mounted on breaker for illustration purposes only. Breakers are not included.

2 These mechanisms are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories.

3 Selection data for handle mechanism only; circuit breaker not included.

Handle Mechanism 1

For Use With

Catalog Number 23

Type 1

Enclosure

Type 12

Enclosure

Series C F-Frame HMCP F SMCU150FD CMCU150FD

EB, EHB, FB, HFB breakers and MCP (Size 0–4) SMCU150FD CMCU150FD

FB TRI-PAC SMCU100FBP CMCU100FBP

FCL breakers SMCU100FCL CMCU100FCL

30, 60,100A DS switch fusible, non-fusible SMCU100DS CMCU100DS

200A DS switch fusible, non-fusible SMCU200DS CMCU200DS

Series C J-Frame HMCP J SMCU250JD CMCU250JD

Series C K-Frame HMCP K, DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB SMCU400KD CMCU400KD

Breakers, Size 5 MCP (400A) SMCU225KA CMCU225KA

Series C L-Frame HMCP L, MDL SMCU600LD CMCU600LD

Series C M-Frame not MDL SMCU800MA CMCU800MA

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC breakers (400 and 600A frame) SMCU400LA SMCU400LA

LA TRI-PAC SMCU400LAP SMCU400LAP

MA, HMA, MC, HMC Breakers (800A frame) SMCU800MA SMCU800MA

NB, HNB, NC, HNC Breakers (1200A frame) SMCU1200NB SMCU1200NB

LCL225 and 400 SMCU400LCL SMCU400LCL

Series C L-Frame HMCP L SMCU600LD SMCU600LD

Publication

Number Description

IL 14572 F-Frame, EB, EHB, FB, MCP, HFB

IL 29C273 J- and K-Frame

IL 29C283 L-Frame

IL 14571 FB-P

IL 14938 JB, KB

IL 14573 30, 60, 100A DS switch

IL 14574 200A DS switch

V12-T3-104 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

AMT Vari-Depth

Fixed Width Type—Type AMT for Below Handle Mounting

Standard Door Hardware 78

Door Hardware

Adapter Kit 9

Door Hardware Kit for

Hoffman A-25 Enclosure jk

Further Information

Notes

1AMTR is rod only; AMTRI is rod and

brace assembly.

2Complete assembly not available,

order components parts listed above.

3Also for use with equivalent

HMCP Frame.

4For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V

NEC Class H, R or J fuses.

5For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 250V

NEC Class H or R fuses.

6AMTR and AMTRB1 for use with

enclosure depth of 6.50–14.25 inches.

For 12.25–18.25 inch depth, use optional

AMTRB2. For 18.00–24.00 inch depth,

use optional AMTRB3.

7Requires adapter kit shown in Door

Hardware Adapter Kit table.

8For standard door hardware description,

see Page V12-T3-102.

9Required on standard door hardware

only when used with any AMT handle

mechanisms.

jKit consists of special door hardware and

door interlock pin. Available for right-

hand flange mounting only.

kFor use with AMT fixed width

mechanisms only.

l2-point latch for use with panels up to

approximately 40.00 inches high.

m3-point latch for use with panels

approximately 40.00 inches and higher.

Breaker or

Switch Type

Complete

Assembly 12

Catalog Number

Backplate and

Yoke Assembly

Catalog Number

Rod and Brace

Assembly

Catalog Number

Pivot Mechanism

Assembly

Catalog Number

Operating Handle

Assembly

Catalog Number

Below the Handle—Fixed Width—with Short Brace and/or Rod as Listed (For all enclosures including Hoffman A-25 Enclosures)

Series C F-Frame HMCP F 3AMTFDBSFH AMTFD-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP

Series C J-Frame HMCP J 3AMTJDBSFH AMTKB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP

Series C K-Frame HMCP K 3AMTKDBSFH AMTLB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP

Series C L-Frame HMCP L 3AMTLDBSFH AMTLD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FS AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSBSFH AMTDS100-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 4AMTDSFBSFH AMTDS100F-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 5AMTDSF1BSFH AMTDS100F1-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP

DS-200 unfused AMTDS2BSFH AMTDS200-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP

DS-200 fused AMTDS2FBSFH AMTDS200F-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP

Below the Handle—Fixed Width—with Short Brace and/or Rod as Listed (Not for use with Hoffman A-25 Enclosures)

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0-4) AMTFBBSF AMTFD-B AMTR AMTPM-F AMTOP

JB, KB, MCP (250A) AMTKBBSF AMTKB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FS AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA MCP (400A) AMTLBBSF AMTLB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FS AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBPBSF AMTFBP-B AMTR AMTPM-F AMTOP

Optional rod and brace 6

AMTRB2 long rod and brace

AMTRB3 extended rod and brace

Catalog Number

DH1R

DH2R

DH3R

Catalog Number

AMTDHA

Catalog Number

HDH-2R l

HDH-3R m

Publication

Number Description

IL 29C277 AMT Vari-Depth

Handle Mechanism

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-105

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

AMT Vari-Depth

Vari- Width Typ e—

Type AMT for Above

Handle Mounting

The Type AMT is an

extra heavy-duty handle

mechanism designed for

mounting in flange-type

enclosures, and has

provisions for mounting in

various depth

enclosures

and for varying the width

relationship between the

disconnect device and the

external handle.

A door interlock is provided

to prevent opening the

enclosure door with the

disconnect in the ON position

or to close the disconnect

with the enclosure door

open. The external handle

can be locked in the OFF

position with up to three

padlocks. The AMT

mechanism is supplied

for mounting in right-hand

flange enclosures but can

be easily converted for

left-hand mounting.

AMT mechanisms are

available for above the

handle mounting or below

the handle mounting.

Mechanisms for below the

handle mounting are also

available as fixed width

units. When door hardware

is used with an AMT handle

mechanism, a door hardware

adapter kit is required.

Accessories

Spacer kit to Vari-Width

(not for use

with fixed

mechanisms) catalog

number

AMTSK1 for up

to 1.00-inch variation.

Note: This spacer kit is for up to

1.00-inch variation and consists of

multiples of thin spacers to be

used as required. A maximum of

two kits per installation may be

used. Due to the possible variation

in dimensions, hardware is

not supplied. Use standard

1/4–20 bolts.

Further Information

Pub. Number Description

IL 14946 AMT Vari-Depth handle

mechanism

MD, MSMVari-Width Type—Type AMT for Above Handle Mounting

Notes

1Assembled Type AMT for above handle

mounting (breaker not included).

2Complete assembly not available, order

components parts listed above.

3Width spacer kit not included.

4This spacer kit is for up to 1.00-inch

variation and consists of multiples of

thin spacers to be used as required. A

maximum of two kits per installation may

be used. Due to the possible variation in

dimensions, hardware is not supplied.

Use standard 1/4–20 bolts.

5Also for use with equivalent

HMCP frame.

6For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V

NEC Class H, R or J fuses.

7For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V

NEC Class H or R fuses.

Breaker or

Switch Type

Complete

Assembly 12

Catalog Number

Backplate

and Yoke

Assembly

Catalog

Number

Operating

Rod and

Brace

Assembly

Catalog

Number

Flange

Mounted

Pivot

Mechanism

Assembly 34

Catalog Number

External

Operating

Handle

Catalog Number

Above the Handle Mounting with Short Rod and Brace

Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDASV AMTFB AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

Series C J-Frame 5AMTJDASV AMTJD AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5AMTKDASV AMTKD AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

Series C L-Frame, MDL 5AMTLDASV AMTLD AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBASV AMTLB AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLAASV AMTLA AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C

M-Frame, LCL

AMTMAASV AMTMA AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBASV AMTNB AMTRB1 AMTPMNB AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBASV AMTFB AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPASV AMTLAP AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPASV AMTNBP AMTRB1 AMTPMNB AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSASV AMTDS100 AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6AMTDSFASV AMTDS100F AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7AMTDSF1ASV AMTDS100F1 AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-200 unfused AMTDS2ASV AMTDS200 AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-200 fused AMTDS2FASV AMTDS200F AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP

Above the Handle Mounting with Long Rod and Brace

Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDALV AMTFB AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

Series C J-Frame 5AMTJDALV AMTJD AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5AMTKDALV AMTKD AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

Series C L-Frame, MDL 5AMTLDALV AMTLD AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBALV AMTLB AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLAALV AMTLA AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C

M-Frame, LCL

AMTMAALV AMTMA AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBALV AMTNB AMTRB2 AMTPMNB AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBALV AMTFB AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPALV AMTLAP AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPALV AMTNBP AMTRB2 AMTPMNB AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSALV AMTDS100 AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6AMTDSFALV AMTDS100F AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7AMTDSF1ALV AMTDS100F1 AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-200 unfused AMTDS2ALV AMTDS200 AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

DS-200 fused AMTDS2FALV AMTDS200F AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP

V12-T3-106 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Vari-Width Type—Type AMT for Below Handle Mounting

Notes

1 AMTR is rod only; AMTRI is rod and brace assembly.

2 Complete assembly not available, order components parts listed above.

3 Width spacer kit not included.

4 This spacer kit is for up to 1-inch variation and consists of multiples of thin spacers to be used as required. A maximum of two kits per installation may be used.

Due to the possible variation in dimensions, hardware is not supplied. Use standard 1/4–20 bolts.

5 Also for use with equivalent HMCP Frame.

6 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H, R or J fuses.

7 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H or R fuses.

Breaker or

Switch Type

Complete

Assembly 12

Catalog Number

Backplate and

Yoke Assembly

Catalog Number

Rod and Brace

Assembly

Catalog Number

Flange Mounted Pivot

Mechanism Assembly 34

Catalog Number

External Operating

Handle Assembly

Catalog Number

Below the Handle Mounting with Short Rod and Brace

Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDBSV AMTFD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Series C J-Frame 5AMTJDBSV AMTJD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5AMTKDBSV AMTKD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Series C L-Frame MDL 5AMTLDBSV AMTLD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBBSV AMTLB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLABSV AMTLA-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL AMTMABSV AMTMA-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBBSV AMTNB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBPBSV AMTFBP-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPBSV AMTLAP-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPBSV AMTNBP-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSBSV AMTDS100-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6AMTDSFBSV AMTDS100F-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7AMTDSF1BSV AMTDS100F1-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-200 unfused AMTDS2BSV AMTDS200-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-200 fused AMTDS2FBSV AMTDS200F-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Below the Handle Mounting with Long Rod and Brace

Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDBLV AMTFD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Series C J-Frame 5AMTJDBLV AMTJD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5AMTKDBLV AMTKD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Series C L-Frame MDL 5AMTLDBLV AMTLD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBBLV AMTLB-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLABLV AMTLA-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL AMTMABLV AMTMA-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBBLV AMTNB-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBPBLV AMTFBP-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPBLV AMTLAP-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPBLV AMTNBP-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSBLV AMTDS100-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6AMTDSFBLV AMTDS100F-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7AMTDSF1BLV AMTDS100F1-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-200 unfused AMTDS2BLV AMTDS200-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

DS-200 fused AMTDS2FBLV AMTDS200F-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-107

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Accessories

Spacer kit to Vari-Width

(not for use with fixed

mechanisms) catalog

number AMTSK1 for up

to 1.00-inch variation.

Note: This spacer kit is for up to

1.00-inch variation and consists of

multiples of thin spacers to be

used as required. A maximum

of two kits per installation may

be used. Due to the possible

variation in dimensions, hardware

is not supplied. Use standard

1/4–20 bolts.

Ordering Information

●Complete assembly

not available, order

components parts as listed

on Pages V12-T3-104,

V12-T3-105 and

V12-T3-106

●Order spacer kits or

door hardware adapter

as required

●Individual component

parts may be ordered by

catalog number

Flex Shaft

The Flex Shaft is an extra

heavy-duty mechanism that

includes a flexible shaft in

various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)

through 10 feet (3m) for use

with various size enclosures.

The Flex Shaft handle will

accept up to three padlock

shackles, each with a

maximum diameter of

0.375-inch (9.5 mm). Can be

used with Type 1, 3R and 12

fabricated enclosures. An

optional handle is available

for Flex Shaft that is suitable

for use with Type 4 and 4X

environments. Flex Shaft

comes preset from the

factory, requiring only

minor field adjustments

on installation, which

takes about 10 minutes—

a significant time savings

compared to installation of

other types of flange handle

mechanisms. The Flex Shaft

mechanism also takes up less

interior enclosure space than

competitive designs and the

handle fits standard flange

cutouts. Flex Shaft handle

can be remotely mounted

from breaker, where an

operator can use it by

“funneling” the cable

through conduit.

Flex Shaft is UL Listed under

File E64983 and meets

CSA requirements.

Flex Shaft Ordering Information (Three-Pole Only) 123

Flex Shaft Accessories

(F- through R-Frame)

NEMA 12 Safety Door

Hardware for Flex Shaft 4

Notes

1Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are

available. Add Suffix X to complete

catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete

catalog number for IEC handle. Add

Suffix L (Standard on F, J, K and L) to

complete catalog number for 6.00-inch

(152.4 mm) handle. Original narrow

handle design (no C suffix) is available.

Remove C from catalog number.

2When selecting the length of shaft,

ensure minimum bending radius of

4.00 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to

operate properly. The standard method

of shipment includes the mechanism

preset at the factory; however, minor

field adjustments may be required.

3Dual breakers operator available

on F-Frame only.

4Customer: Consult with box

manufacturer for correct door hardware

and any adapters required for assembly.

5The 0.25 inch x 0.50 inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm)

standard mill rectangular locking bar is

not supplied with these kits.

6Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or

6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle

when 3-point latching is required.

Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-

case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—

Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E,

Tab 2.

Breaker

Frame

Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

3.00 (0.9) 4.00 (1.2) 5.00 (1.5) 6.00 (1.8) 7.00 (2.1) 8.00 (2.4) 9.00 (2.7) 10.00 (3.0)

Catalog Number

E125 EHMFS03 EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06 — — — —

J250 JHMFS03 JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06 JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10

GF0S03C F0S04C F0S05C F0S06C — — — —

FF1S03C F1S04C F1S05C F1S06C F1S07C F1S08C F1S09C F1S10C

F (Dual) F1S03CD F1S04CD F1S05CD F1S06CD F1S07CD F1S08CD F1S09CD F1S10CD

JF2S03C F2S04C F2S05C F2S06C F2S07C F2S08C F2S09C F2S10C

KF3S03C F3S04C F3S05C F3S06C F3S07C F3S08C F3S09C F3S10C

L and MDL — F4S04C F4S05C F4S06C — — — F4S10C

N— F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C — — — F5S10C

R— F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 — — — —

MD — F7S04C F7S05C F7S06C — — — F7S10C

Handle Length

in Inches (mm)

Catalog

Number 5

4.00 (101.6) C361KJ4

6.00 (152.4) C361KJ6

Roller latch 6C361KR

V12-T3-108 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

The Type C371 circuit breaker

operating mechanisms are

designed for installation in

control enclosures where

main or branch circuit

protective devices are

required. All circuit breaker

mechanisms are suitable for

right-hand mounting.

Auxiliary contacts are not

available for mounting on

operating mechanisms.

Where required, have them

installed in circuit breaker.

Type C371 is UL Listed under

File E62635.

Type C371 Ordering Information—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Handle Only—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Channel Support Kit

(Rod Not Supplied) 4

Connecting Rods 5

Flange-Mounted

Instruction Leaflets

Notes

1For increased maximum allowable depth,

see connecting rods table to the left.

2Dimensions shown are from panel

flange surface.

3Does not include handle.

4For use to prevent bending of the

operating handle mounting surface. This

is especially useful when the operating

handle is mounted on a channel in a

multi-door enclosure. Included in

600–1200A.

5Increase maximum allowable depth

by 5.00 inches (127.0 mm).

Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-

case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—

Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E,

Tab 2.

Circuit Breaker

or Motor Circuit

Protector

Frame

Size

Variable Depth

Mounting Range

Min./Max. 12

Operating

Mechanism Only 3

Catalog Number

Operating Mechanism With 4.00-Inch Handle

For Type 1–12

Enclosure

Catalog Number

For Type 4

Enclosure

Catalog Number

HMCP and Series C

EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED

150 6.50–160 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2

HMCP and Series C

HJD, JD, JDB, JDC

250 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6

HMCP and Series C

DK, HKD, KD, KDB

400 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6

Series C

HLD, LD, LDC

600 8.50–22.00 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6

Series C

MD, MDS

800 8.75–22.00 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6

Series C

HND, ND, NDC

1200 9.75–22.00 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6

Circuit Breaker Frame Size

(Amperes)

NEMA

Enclosure Type

Operating

Handle Length

Catalog

Number

150 1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1

4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2

1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H3

4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H4

250–1200 1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H5

4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H6

1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H7

4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H8

Catalog Number

C371CS6

Application

Catalog

Number

Disconnect switches

(30, 60, 100, 200A sizes)

C371CS1

Circuit breakers

(150, 250, 400A sizes)

C371CS1

Circuit breakers

(600, 800, 1200A sizes)

C371CS2

Breaker

Frame

Instruction

Leaflet Number

Flex Shaft

E125 IL0510TE0002

J250 IL0510TE0005

GTBD

F15609

J15605

K15604

L and M 15606

N15606

R15606

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-109

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Series C Rotary and

Universal Rotary

Series C Rotary

Series C rotary and universal

rotary handle mechanisms

are for use with molded-case

circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L,

MDL), molded-case switches

and motor circuit protectors.

Series C rotary is suitable

for use with Type 1, 3R, 12

and 4/4X enclosure types.

Type 4/4X application

requires special handle,

see “Ordering Information.”

The universal rotary is suitable

for use with Type 1 and 12

enclosure types. All rotary

handle mechanisms include a

handle “Lock Off,” to prevent

turning the breaker ON while

in the OFF position. All rotary

handles indicate ON/OFF/

Tripped/Reset positions;

however, Universal Rotary

has the added feature of

international markings for

ON (I) and OFF (O). Series C

rotary handle is metal.

Universal rotary is made of

molded material. Series C

rotary handle is black and

universal rotary is available

in black or yellow/red.

Series C rotary handle was

ergonomically designed with

extra clearance for a “gloved

hand” to operate. Handle

has a 45º rotation. Universal

Rotary has a 90º rotation

(“pipe valve” operation)

where ON is vertical and

OFF is horizontal. Shafts

include a support brace to

ensure proper alignment.

In addition, the 16.00-inch

(406.4 mm) and 24.00-inch

(609.6 mm) extra long

shafts include an adjustable

support bracket.

Series C rotary and universal

rotary, are UL Listed and

meet CSA requirements.

Universal rotary also meets

IEC947-1/2 for international

compliance. Rotary UL File

Number is E64983.

Series C Rotary Ordering Information

Notes

Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.

2Handle is designed suitable for Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to

complete catalog number.

3Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts.

4Longer shafts,16.00-inch (406.4 mm) and 24.00-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.

5IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.

6Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.

Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

Shaft Length

Inches (mm)

Complete

Catalog

Number 1

Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number

Standard

Handle 2

Breaker

Mechanism 3Shaft 4IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56

F-Frame

6.00 (152.4) HM1R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G04 WHM1R06 WHM1R06X

12.00 (304.8) HM1R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G01 WHM1R12 WHM1R12X

16.00 (406.4) HM1R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G02 WHM1R16 WHM1R16X

24.00 (609.6) HM1R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G03 WHM1R24 WHM1R24X

J-Frame

6.00 (152.4) HM2R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G04 WHM2R06 WHM2R06X

12.00 (304.8) HM2R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G01 WHM2R12 WHM2R12X

16.00 (406.4) HM2R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G02 WHM2R16 WHM2R16X

24.00 (609.6) HM2R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G03 WHM2R24 WHM2R24X

K-Frame

6.00 (152.4) HM3R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G04 WHM3R06 WHM3R06X

12.00 (304.8) HM3R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G01 WHM3R12 WHM3R12X

16.00 (406.4) HM3R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G02 WHM3R16 WHM3R16X

24.00 (609.6) HM3R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G03 WHM3R24 WHM3R24X

L- and MDL-Frame

6.00 (152.4) HM4R06 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G04 WHM4R06 WHM4R06X

12.00 (304.8) HM4R12 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G01 WHM4R12 WHM4R12X

16.00 (406.4) HM4R16 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G02 WHM4R16 WHM4R16X

24.00 (609.6) HM4R24 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G03 WHM4R24 WHM4R24X

MD/MDS

6.00 (152.4) HM7R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G04 — —

12.00 (304.8) HM7R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G01 — —

16.00 (406.4) HM7R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G02 — —

24.00 (609.6) HM7R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G03 — —

N-Frame

6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G04 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X

12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G01 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X

16.00 (406.4) HM5R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G02 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X

24.00 (609.6) HM5R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G03 WHM5R24 WHM5R24X

V12-T3-110 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Universal Rotary

Type 4/4X handles are similar

to standard handles except

that they include an internal

neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X

handle style number is

6648C22G03. Due to

gasketing effect between

the handle and the housing,

the handle may not indicate

a tripped position.

Series C Rotary Accessories

As an option, an auxiliary

switch is offered so that the

control panel builder may

electrically indicate the

status of the breaker. This

accessory would be mounted

on the mechanism and

comes with 24.00-inch

(609.6 mm) pigtail leads.

Series C Auxiliary Switch

Catalog Number

5108A61G01

Universal Rotary Ordering Information

Through-the-Door Instruction Leaflets Number

Note: Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

Shaft Length in Inches (mm) Handle Color Complete Catalog Number

E125 Frame

6.00 (152.4) Black EHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black EHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red EHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red EHMVD12R

J250 Frame

6.00 (152.4) Black FJHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black FJHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red FJHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red FJHMVD12R

G-Frame

6.00 (152.4) Black GHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black GHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red GHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red GHMVD12R

F-Frame

6.00 (152.4) Black FHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black FHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red FHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red FHMVD12R

J-Frame

6.00 (152.4) Black JHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black JHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red JHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red JHMVD12R

K-Frame

6.00 (152.4) Black KHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black KHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red KHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red KHMVD12R

L- and MDL-Frames

6.00 (152.4) Black LHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8) Black LHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4) Red LHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8) Red LHMVD12R

Breaker Frame Series C Rotary Universal Rotary

E125 — IL0510TE0001

J250 — IL0510TE0001

G — 29C250

F 15594 29C250

J 15599 29C250

K 15600 29C250

L and MDL 15601 29C250

N 15602 —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-111

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Direct (Close-Coupled)

Handle Mechanisms

Universal Direct

Euro IEC Direct

G Direct

Direct (close-coupled) handle

mechanisms mount directly

to the circuit breaker.

They are used in shallow

enclosures where the

standard variable depth

through-the-door type

mechanism is not practical

or cannot be used. They

are typically for applications

where high volume,

standardized enclosures

are being fabricated.

The Universal Direct handle

mechanism is designed

exclusively for the new

Cutler-Hammer E125 and

J250 circuit breakers. It is

available as standard with

a door interlock to prevent

opening the enclosure

while the circuit breaker

is in the ON position. It

is also available without

a door interlock.

The Euro IEC Direct handle

mechanism can be used on

F- through R-Frames.

The G Direct is available with

a black or a yellow handle,

and with or without a shroud.

It is suitable for use with Type

1 enclosures. It is for use only

with the G-Frame (GD, GC,

GHC, GMCP).

An escutcheon ring and an

interlock clip are provided as

standard. The standard design

includes a lock-off feature.

The Universal Direct handle

mechanism is UL 489 Listed,

IEC947-1/2 and meets CSA

requirements. The Euro IEC

Direct handle mechanism

is IEC-240-1. G Direct is

UL Listed and meets

CSA requirements.

Universal Direct Ordering Information

Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information

G Direct Ordering Information 1

Direct (Close-Coupled) Instruction Leaflets

Notes

1Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.

Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—

Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

Frame

Universal Direct

Domestic International

With Interlock

(White)

Catalog Number

Without Interlock

(White)

Catalog Number

Without Interlock

(Charcoal With Global Label)

Catalog Number

E125 EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCR

J250 JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCR

Frame

Black Handle

Catalog Number

Red Handle

Catalog Number

FHMCC1B HMCC1R

JHMCC2B HMCC2R

KHMCC3B HMCC3R

L and M HMCC4B HMCC4R

NHMCC5B HMCC5R

RHMCC6B HMCC6R

Frame

Black Handle Yellow Handle

With Shroud

Catalog Number

Without Shroud

Catalog Number

With Shroud

Catalog Number

Without Shroud

Catalog Number

GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30

GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30

Frame

Instruction Leaflet Number

Universal Direct Euro IEC Direct G Direct

E125 29C255 — —

J250 29C256 — —

G — — 15567

F — 29C288A —

J — 29C288A —

K — 29C288A —

L and MDL — 29C289 —

N — 29C290 —

R — 29C291 —

V12-T3-112 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Handle Extensions

Handle Extension

Handle extension is not

included with J-, K-, L- and

M-Frame breakers. It must

be purchased separately.

Handle Extension

Handle extension is included

with breaker with N- and

R-Frame breakers.

Handle Extension

Note: Refer to handle

mechanisms in the molded-

case circuit breaker section of

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

Replacement and

Service Capabilities

Breaker Service Center

Factory Service for Mining

and Industrial Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers

Eaton owns and operates

two fully authorized Breaker

Service Centers (BSC)

in Skelton, WV, and

Evansville, IN. They are

available to support all non-

warranty service needs for

Cutler-Hammer industrial

molded-case breakers 600A

and above and all frames of

mining duty breakers.

The Breaker Service

Centers, as extensions of

our manufacturing plants,

are the only facilities

authorized to provide breaker

service solutions for Eaton,

Cutler-Hammer and historic

Westinghouse molded-case

circuit breakers. Staff are

dedicated to providing genuine

factory-supported solutions to

our customers.

This is just another example

of how Eaton supports

a complete offering of

solutions for circuit breakers.

See the following for the

benefits of choosing the BSC

and our service offerings.

Offerings

Basic Tune-Up

Clean, test and re-certify.

Basic Modification

Replace accessories and

attachments including

terminals, trip units,

UVRs, shunt trips and

auxiliary switches.

Basic Service

Replace components

including covers, handles

and stationary contacts.

Frame Style Number

J, K HEX3

L, M HEX4

Frame Style Number

NHEX5

RHEX6

Custom Service

Replace frame or trip unit,

with or without accessories.

Full Service

Replace both frame and

trip unit, with or without

accessories.

Factory Modifications

For new or existing

operational breakers

●Trip unit upgrades

●Addition of accessories

and attachments

●UL modifications to

factory-sealed breakers

Facilities

●Dedicated sites supported

by engineering and

manufacturing

●Staffed by factory trained

technicians with experience

servicing molded-case

circuit breakers

●State-of-the-art cleaning

and testing equipment

The Breaker Service Centers

are open to help you. Give us

a call at 1-877-BRK-SRVC or

contact your local Eaton

authorized distributor or sales

office for more information.

Know What You’re Getting—

Here’s the Reality of

Third-Party Repair

●Breakers are serviced

using least worn,

counterfeit or reverse

engineered components

●You get no technical

support from the original

manufacturer

●There is no option for an

upgrade to new technology

●You could end up with a

breaker that doesn’t

perform as expected

Reasons to Use Eaton’s Breaker

Service Centers

●Eaton is a world leader in

circuit breaker technology

and manufacturing

●The Breaker Service

Centers are staffed by

factory trained technicians

●One year warranty.

●Eaton uses only genuine

replacement parts and

components

●Full engineering

support—original

product specifications

and manufacturing data

●State-of-the-art cleaning

equipment—uses a

non-destructive cleaning

process while maintaining

integrity of the breaker

●Modern test equipment—

the breaker service center

uses the same hi-tech

test equipment used by

engineering, development

and manufacturing

facilities. This allows the

breaker service center

to match original test

conditions at the factory

●Exchange option—

we can upgrade to the

newest technology

●Competitive price—all the

benefits of third-party prices

For more information on

Eaton

products and services,

call 1-877-386-2273. Select

option 1 for technical

support and select option

6 for Eaton’s Electrical

Services & Systems,

or visit our website at

www.eaton.com/electrical.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-113

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Cross-Reference

Westinghouse and Challenger

Cross-Reference for Cutler-Hammer Industrial MCB/MCCBs

Circuit Breaker Brand and Type Circuit Breaker Brand and Type

Westinghouse Challenger Cutler-Hammer Westinghouse Challenger Cutler-Hammer

BAB CBB BAB HMC CSHM HMC

BAB-H CBB-H BAB-H HMCC CSHMC HMCC

CA CD CA HNB — HNB

CAH CDH CAH HNC CSHN HNC

CHKD CKHC CHKD HND CNH HND

CHLD CLHC CHLD JB, KB — JB, KB

CHND CNHC CHND JD CJ JD

CKD CKC CKD JDB CJS JDB

CKDC CKVC CKDC JDC CJV JDC

CLD CLC CLD KD CK KD

CLDC CLVC CLDC KDB CKS KDB

CND CNC CND KDC CKV KDC

CNDC CNVC CNDC LA — LA

CRD CRC CRD LA-P CTL LA-P

CRDC CRVC CRDC LC CSL LC

DK CDK DK LCC CSLC LCC

EB — EB LCL CXL LCL

ED CED ED LCY CSLY LCY

EDC CEV EDC LD CL LD

EDH CEH EDH LDB CK LDB

EHB — EHB LDC CLV LDC

EHD CE EHD MA — MA

FB — FB MC CSM MC

FB-P CTB FB-P MCC CSMC MCC

FCL CXF FCL MCY CSMY MCY

FD CF FD MDS CSMDMDS

FDB CFS FDB MDSC CSMDC MDSC

FDC CFV FDC MDSY CSMDY MDSY

GB CG GB NB — NB

GC CGL GC NB-P CTN NB-P

GDB CGDB GDB NC CSN NC

GHB CH GHB NCY CSNY NCY

GHBS CSCB GHBS ND CN ND

GHC CHL GHC NDC CNV NDC

HCA CDT HCA PB-P CTP PB-P

HFB — HFB PC CSP PC

HFD CFH HFD PCC CSPC PCC

HJD CJH HJD QBGF CBBGF QBGF

HKB — HKB QBGFEP CBBGFEP QBGFEP

HKD CKH HKD QBHGF CBBHGF QBHGF

HLA — HLA QBHGFEP CBBHGFEP QBHGFEP

HLC CSHL HLC QBHW CBBH QBHW

HLCC CSHLC HLCC QBHW-H CBBH-H QBHW-H

HLD CLH HLD RD CR RD

HMA — HMA RDC CRV RDC

V12-T3-114 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant

Cross-Reference for Cutler-Hammer Residential MCBs

Circuit Breaker Brand and Type

Westinghouse Challenger Bryant Cutler-Hammer

BR C BR BR

BRD A BRD BRD

BRH HC BRH BRH

BRHH VC BRHH BRHH

— XC — BRX

BRO C BRO BRO

GFCB HAGF GFCB GFCB

GFCBH HAGFH GFCBH GFCBH

GFEP HAGFEP GFEP GFEP

GFEPH HAGFHEP GFEPH GFEPH

—CM —BW

—CMH—BWH

—CMV—BWHH

—CB—CC

WFL QFL — QFL

WFP QFP — QFP

Notes for Replacement Breaker and Mining Breaker

Replacement Tables (Pages V12-T3-113–V12-T3-167)

1. Many of the suggested

Series C replacements

are electrical

replacements only,

and may have different

dimensions, mountings,

handle forces and throw

(which would require

a handle mechanism

change). The MARK 75

replacement would have

the same dimensions,

mountings, handle forces

and throw. Only three-

pole MARK 75 available.

2. Replacement breaker

frames, trips,

plugs and

some of the terminals and

attachments are not

interchangeable with

the Series C. Obsoleted

frames and trips, etc.,

may require a complete

breaker change.

Replacing with a Higher

IC MARK 75

or Series C

breaker does not increase

the IC rating of the

assembly (panelboard,

switchboard, etc.).

4. Saf-T-Vue is no

longer available on the

replacement breaker line.

Eaton Canada does

make the Series C with

Saf-T-Vue and may be

sourced through our

Canadian Distribution

Center at 905-631-4318.

5. Suggested replacements

also apply to breakers

that had suffixes such

as “L,” line and load

terminals, “V” 50C

calibration and “W”

without terminals.

6. The HFB two-pole

breaker is on a three-pole

frame. The Series C

replacement is a true

two-pole.

7. Continuous amperes

and/or trip range may be

a little different on the

replacement Series C.

8. Replacement breaker

MARK 75 breakers with

interchangeable trip units

are to be supplied as

frame, trip, terminals and

attachment as separate

items (except when

accessories must be

factory installed). No

single-phase, ambient

compensated, Saf-T-Vue,

reverse-feed, or

SELTRONIC magnetic

only are available on

replacement breakers.

9. JA, DA, KA, HKA, LB,

LBB and HLB breakers

when replaced with a

Series C breaker “K”

frame, when bussed on

the line side such as a

panelboard, requires a

TAD3 spacer kit.

10. Contact the local Eaton

Satellite for complete

panelboard replacement

or new interior

replacement. Use

Panelboard Replacement

Breakers where possible.

MARK 75 and three-pole

only replacements are

available. Contact the

Breaker Service Center

at 1-877-275-7782 for

reconditioned breaker

solutions.

Note: If accessories are to be

factory installed, contact the

factory for pricing.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-115

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Cross-Reference

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

1256C10G03 1256C10G03 O — — LD2300 1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G04 1256C10G04 O — — LD2350 1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G05 1256C10G05 O — — LD2400 1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G12 1256C10G12 A — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G13 1256C10G13 A — — LD3300 1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G14 1256C10G14 A — — LD3350 1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G15 1256C10G15 A — — LD3400 1–3, 5, 8

1268C14G01 1268C14G01 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7

1268C14G02 1268C14G02 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7

1268C14G03 1268C14G03 O 65E4667 65E466 HMCP100L3C 1–3, 7

1268C14G04 1268C14G04 O 65E4667 65E4667 HMCP100L3C 1–3, 7

1268C14G05 1268C14G05 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7

1268C14G06 1268C14G06 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7

2603D46G07 2603D46G07 O — — KT2250T 2, 8

2603D46G08 2603D46G08 O — — LT2300T 2, 8

2603D46G09 2603D46G09 O — — LT2350T 2, 8

2603D46G10 2603D46G10 O — — LT2400T 2, 8

2603D46G26 2603D46G26 A — — KT3250T 2, 8

2603D46G27 2603D46G27 A — — LT3300T 2, 8

2603D46G28 2603D46G28 A — — LT3350T 2, 8

2603D46G29 2603D46G29 A — — LT3400T 2, 8

2603D47G07 2603D47G07 O — — — 2, 8

2603D47G08 2603D47G08 O — — — 2, 8

2603D47G10 2603D47G10 O — — — 2, 8

2603D47G26 2603D47G26 A — — — 2, 8

2603D47G27 2603D47G27 A — — — 2, 8

2603D47G29 2603D47G29 A — — — 2, 8

2603D50G01 2603D50G01 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G02 2603D50G02 O — — LD2300 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G03 2603D50G03 O — — LD2350 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G04 2603D50G04 O — — LD2400 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G07 2603D50G07 O — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G08 2603D50G08 O 1256C10G13 1256C10G13 LD3300 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G09 2603D50G09 O 1256C10G14 1256C10G14 LD3350 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G10 2603D50G10 O 1256C10G15 1256C10G15 LD3400 1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G13 2603D50G13 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8

2603D50G14 2603D50G14 O — — LD2300 1–5, 8

2603D50G15 2603D50G15 O — — LD2350 1–5, 8

2603D50G16 2603D50G16 O — — LD2400 1–5, 8

2603D50G19 2603D50G19 O 1256C10G12 1256C10G12 KD3250 1–5, 8

2603D50G20 2603D50G20 O 1256C10G13 1256C10G13 LD3300 1–5, 8

2603D50G21 2603D50G21 O 1256C10G14 1256C10G14 LD3350 1–5, 8

2603D50G22 2603D50G22 O 1256C10G15 1256C10G15 LD3400 1–5, 8

2610D53G12 2610D53G12 O 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7

2610D53G13 2610D53G13 O 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7

V12-T3-116 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

2610D53G30 2610D53G30 O 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7

2610D53G31 2610D53G31 O 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7

2610D58G31 2610D58G31 O — — — 1–4, 7

373D488G08 373D488G08 O 373D488G09 373D488G09 — 2, 8

4994D96G12 4994D96G12 O 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7

4994D96G13 4994D96G13 O 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7

4994D96G30 4994D96G30 A — — HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7

4994D96G31 4994D96G31 A — — HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7

4998D89G30 4998D89G30 O — — — 1–4, 7

5683D88G07 5683D88G07 O — — KT2250T 2, 8

5683D88G08 5683D88G08 O — — LT2300T 2, 8

5683D88G09 5683D88G09 O — — LT2350T 2, 8

5683D88G10 5683D88G10 O — — LT2400T 2, 8

5683D88G26 5683D88G26 O 2603D46G26 2603D46G26 KT3250T 2, 8

5683D88G27 5683D88G27 O 2603D46G27 2603D46G27 LT3300T 2, 8

5683D88G28 5683D88G28 O 2603D46G28 2603D46G28 LT3350T 2, 8

5683D88G29 5683D88G29 O 2603D46G29 2603D46G29 LT3400T 2, 8

65E4667 65E4667 A — — HMCP100L3C 1–3, 7

81E4647 81E4647 O — — — 1–4, 7

DA2250 375D152G11 O — — DK2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2250Y 376D872G11 O — — DK2250Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2300 375D152G12 O — — DK2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2300Y 376D872G12 O — — DK2300Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2350 375D152G13 O — — DK2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2350Y 376D872G13 O — — DK2350Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2400 375D152G14 O — — DK2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2400WK 752B050G01 O — — DK2400KW 1–3, 5, 8

DA2400Y 376D872G14 O — — DK2400Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3250 375D152G26 O — — DK3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3250Y 376D872G26 O — — DK3250Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3300 375D152G27 O — — DK3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3300Y 376D872G27 O — — DK3300Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3350 375D152G28 O — — DK3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3350Y 376D872G28 O — — DK3350Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3400 375D152G29 O — — DK3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3400WK 752B050G06 O — — DK3400KW 1–3, 5, 8

DA3400Y 376D872G29 O — — DK3400Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9

EB1015 4990D03G02 O — — EHD1015 1–3, 5

EB1020 4990D03G03 O — — EHD1020 1–3, 5

EB1025 4990D03G04 O — — EHD1025 1–3, 5

EB1030 4990D03G05 O — — EHD1030 1–3, 5

EB1035 4990D03G06 O — — EHD1035 1–3, 5

EB1040 4990D03G07 O — — EHD1040 1–3, 5

EB1045 4990D03G14 O — — EHD1045 1–3, 5

EB1050 4990D03G08 O — — EHD1050 1–3, 5

EB1060 4990D03G09 O — — EHD1060 1–3, 5

EB1070 4990D03G10 O — — EHD1070 1–3, 5

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-117

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

EB1080 4990D03G65 O — — EHD1080 1–3, 5

EB1090 4990D03G11 O — — EHD1090 1–3, 5

EB1100 4990D03G12 O — — EHD1100 1–3, 5

EB1100LK 1226C25G01 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

EB2015 4990D03G18 O — — EHD2015 1–3, 5

EB2020 4990D03G19 O — — EHD2020 1–3, 5

EB2025 4990D03G20 O — — EHD2025 1–3, 5

EB2030 4990D03G21 O — — EHD2030 1–3, 5

EB2035 4990D03G22 O — — EHD2035 1–3, 5

EB2040 4990D03G23 O — — EHD2040 1–3, 5

EB2050 4990D03G24 O — — EHD2050 1–3, 5

EB2060 4990D03G25 O — — EHD2060 1–3, 5

EB2070 4990D03G26 O — — EHD2070 1–3, 5

EB2080 4990D03G32 O — — EHD2080 1–3, 5

EB2090 4990D03G27 O — — EHD2090 1–3, 5

EB2100 4990D03G28 O — — EHD2100 1–3, 5

EB2100LK 1226C25G02 O — — EHD2100KL 1–3, 5, 8

EB3015 4990D03G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–3, 5

EB3015S 4991D35G02 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–5

EB3020 4990D03G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–3, 5

EB3020S 4991D35G03 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–5

EB3025 4990D03G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–3, 5

EB3025S 4991D35G04 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–5

EB3030 4990D03G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–3, 5

EB3030S 4991D35G05 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–5

EB3035 4990D03G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–3, 5

EB3035S 4991D35G06 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–5

EB3040 4990D03G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–3, 5

EB3040S 4991D35G07 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–5

EB3045 4990D03G46 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–3, 5

EB3045S 4990D03G40 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–5

EB3050 4991D35G08 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–3, 5

EB3050S 4990D03G41 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–5

EB3060 4991D35G09 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–3, 5

EB3060S 4990D03G42 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–5

EB3070 4991D35G10 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–3, 5

EB3070S 4990D03G48 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–5

EB3080 4990D03G43 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–3, 5

EB3080S 4991D35G11 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–5

EB3090 4990D03G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–3, 5

EB3090S 4991D35G11 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–5

EB3100 4990D03G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 EHD3100 1–3, 5

EB3100LK 1226C25G03 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8

EB3100S 4991D35G12 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 EHD3100 1–5

EB3100SLK 1226C25G04 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8

EHB1015 4989D52G02 O — — EHD1015 1–3, 5

EHB1020 4989D52G03 O — — EHD1020 1–3, 5

V12-T3-118 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

EHB1025 4989D52G04 O — — EHD1025 1–3, 5

EHB1030 4989D52G05 O — — EHD1030 1–3, 5

EHB1035 4989D52G06 O — — EHD1035 1–3, 5

EHB1040 4989D52G07 O — — EHD1040 1–3, 5

EHB1050 4989D52G08 O — — EHD1050 1–3, 5

EHB1060 4989D52G09 O — — EHD1060 1–3, 5

EHB1070 4989D52G10 O — — EHD1070 1–3, 5

EHB1080 4989D52G14 O — — EHD1080 1–3, 5

EHB1090 4989D52G11 O — — EHD1090 1–3, 5

EHB1100 4989D52G12 O — — EHD1100 1–3, 5

EHB1100LK 1226C25G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

EHB2015 4989D52G18 O — — EHD2015 1–3, 5

EHB2020 4989D52G19 O — — EHD2020 1–3, 5

EHB2025 4989D52G20 O — — EHD2025 1–3, 5

EHB2030 4989D52G21 O — — EHD2030 1–3, 5

EHB2035 4989D52G22 O — — EHD2035 1–3, 5

EHB2040 4989D52G23 O — — EHD2040 1–3, 5

EHB2045 4989D52G29 O — — EHD2045 1–3, 5

EHB2050 4989D52G24 O — — EHD2050 1–3, 5

EHB2060 4989D52G25 O — — EHD2060 1–3, 5

EHB2070 4989D52G26 O — — EHD2070 1–3, 5

EHB2090 4989D52G27 O — — EHD2090 1–3, 5

EHB2100 4989D52G28 O — — EHD2100 1–3, 5

EHB2100LK 1226C25G12 O — — EHD2100KL 1–3, 5, 8

EHB3015 4989D52G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–3, 5

EHB3015S 4991D35G18 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–5

EHB3020 4989D52G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–3, 5

EHB3020S 4991D35G19 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–5

EHB3025 4989D52G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–3, 5

EHB3025S 4991D35G20 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–5

EHB3030 4989D52G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–3, 5

EHB3030S 4991D35G21 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–5

EHB3035 4989D52G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–3, 5

EHB3035S 4991D35G22 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–5

EHB3040 4989D52G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–3, 5

EHB3040S 4991D35G23 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–5

EHB3045 4989D52G45 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–3, 5

EHB3045S NO STYLE O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–5

EHB3050 4993D67G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–3, 5

EHB3050S 4991D35G24 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–5

EHB3060 4993D67G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–3, 5

EHB3060S 4991D35G25 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–5

EHB3070 4993D67G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–3, 5

EHB3070S 4991D35G26 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–5

EHB3080 4993D67G46 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–3, 5

EHB3080S NO STYLE O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–5

EHB3090 4993D67G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–3, 5

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-119

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

EHB3090S 4991D35G27 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–5

EHB3100 4993D67G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 EHD3100 1–3, 5

EHB3100LK 1226C25G13 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8

EHB3100S 4991D35G28 O — — EHD3100 1–5

EHB3100SLK 1226C25G14 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB2015 4975D71G18 O — — FD2015 1–3, 5

FB2020 4975D71G19 O — — FD2020 1–3, 5

FB2022MRL 2610D53G03 O — — HMCP003A0C 1–3, 7

FB2025 4975D71G20 O — — FD2025 1–3, 5

FB2030 4975D71G21 O — — FD2030 1–3, 5

FB2035 4975D71G22 O — — FD2035 1–3, 5

FB2040 4975D71G23 O — — FD2040 1–3, 5

FB2045MRL 2610D53G04 O — — HMCP007C0C 1–3, 7

FB2050 4975D71G24 O — — FD2050 1–3, 5

FB2060 4975D71G25 O — — FD2060 1–3, 5

FB2070 4975D71G26 O — — FD2070 1–3, 5

FB2080 4975D71G02 O — — FD2080 1–3, 5

FB2090 4975D71G27 O — — FD2090 1–3, 5

FB2100 4975D71G28 O — — FD2100 1–3, 5

FB2100LK 1226C25G21 O — — FD2100KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB2110MRL 2610D53G05 O — — HMCP015E0C 1–3, 7

FB2150LK 1226C25G22 O — — FD2150KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB21550MRL 2610D53G08 O — — HMCP150T4C 1–3, 7

FB21800MRL 2610D53G11 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 7

FB2190MRL 2610D53G06 O — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7

FB2270MRL 2610D53G10 O — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7

FB2480MRL 2610D53G07 O — — HMCP050K2C 1–3, 7

FB3015 4975D71G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 FD3015 1–3, 5

FB3015S 4991D35G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 FD3015 1–5

FB3020 4975D71G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 FD3020 1–3, 5

FB3020S 4991D35G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 FD3020 1–5

FB3022MRL 2606D95G21 O HFB3022ML 4994D96G21 HMCP003A0C 1–3, 7

FB3022SMRL 2610D58G21 O HFB3022ML 4994D96G21 HMCP003A0C 1–4, 7

FB3025 4975D71G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 FD3025 1–3, 5

FB3025S 4991D35G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 FD3025 1–5

FB3030 4975D71G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 FD3030 1–3, 5

FB3030S 4991D35G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 FD3030 1–5

FB3035 4975D71G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 FD3035 1–3, 5

FB3040 4975D71G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 FD3040 1–3, 5

FB3040S 4991D35G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 FD3040 1–5

FB3045L 4975D71G05 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 FD3045 1–3, 5

FB3045MRL 2610D53G22 O HFB3045ML 4994D96G22 HMCP007C0C 1–3, 7

FB3045S NO STYLE O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 FD3045 1–5

FB3045SMRL 2610D58G22 O HFB3045ML 4994D96G22 HMCP007C0C 1–4, 7

FB3050 4975D71G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 FD3050 1–3, 5

FB3050S 4991D35G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 FD3050 1–5

FB3060 4975D71G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 FD3060 1–3, 5

V12-T3-120 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

FB3060S 4991D35G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 FD3060 1–5

FB3070 4975D71G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 FD3070 1–3, 5

FB3070S 4991D35G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 FD3070 1–5

FB3080 4975D71G06 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 FD3080 1–3, 5

FB3080S NO STYLE O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 FD3080 1–5

FB3090 4975D71G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 FD3090 1–3, 5

FB3090S 4991D35G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 FD3090 1–5

FB3100 4975D71G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 FD3100 1–3, 5

FB3100LK 1226C25G23 O — — FD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB3100S 4991D35G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 FD3100 1–5

FB3110 4975D71G07 O — — FD3110 1–3, 5

FB3110MRL 2610D53G23 O HFB3110ML 4994D96G23 HMCP015E0C 1–3, 7

FB3110S NO STYLE O — — FD3110 1–5

FB3110SMRL 2610D58G23 O — — HMCP015E0C 1–4, 7

FB3125 4975D71G45 O — — FD3125 1–3, 5

FB3125S 4991D35G45 O — — FD3125 1–4, 5

FB3150 4975D71G46 O — — FD3150 1–3, 5

FB3150LK 1226C25G24 O — — FD3150KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB3150S 4991D35G46 O — — FD3150 1–5

FB3150SLK 1226C25G25 O — — FD3150KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB31550MRL 2610D53G26 O HFB31550ML 4994D96G26 HMCP150T4C 1–3, 7

FB31550SMRL 2610D58G26 O HFB31550ML 4994D96G26 HMCP150T4C 1–4, 7

FB31800MRL 2610D53G29 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 7

FB31800SMRL 2610D58G29 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–4, 7

FB3190MRL 2610D53G24 O HFB3190ML 4994D96G24 HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7

FB3190SMRL 2610D58G24 O HFB3190ML 4994D96G24 HMCP030H1C 1–4, 7

FB3270MRL 2610D53G28 O HFB3270ML 4994D96G28 HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7

FB3270SMRL 2610D58G28 O HFB3270ML 4994D96G28 HMCP030H1C 1–4, 7

FB3480MRL 2610D53G25 O HFB3480ML 4994D96G25 HMCP050K2C 1–3, 7

FB3480SMRL 2610D58G25 O HFB3480ML 4994D96G25 HMCP050K2C 1–4, 7

FB4015 4975D71G50 O — — FD4015 1–3, 5

FB4020 4975D71G51 O — — FD4020 1–3, 5

FB4025 4975D71G52 O — — FD4025 1–3, 5

FB4030 4975D71G53 O — — FD4030 1–3, 5

FB4035 4975D71G54 O — — FD4035 1–3, 5

FB4040 4975D71G55 O — — FD4040 1–3, 5

FB4045 NO STYLE O — — FD4045 1–3, 5

FB4050 4975D71G56 O — — FD4050 1–3, 5

FB4060 4975D71G57 O — — FD4060 1–3, 5

FB4070 4975D71G58 O — — FD4070 1–3, 5

FB4080 NO STYLE O — — FD4080 1–3, 5

FB4090 4975D71G59 O — — FD4090 1–3, 5

FB4100 4975D71G60 O — — FD4100 1–3, 5

FB4100LK 1226C25G26 O — — FD4100KL 1–3, 5, 8

FB4150LK 1226C25G27 O — — FD4150KL 1–3, 5, 8

HFB1015 4976D04G02 O — — HFD1015 1–3, 5

HFB1020 4976D04G03 O — — HFD1020 1–3, 5

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-121

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HFB1025 4976D04G04 O — — HFD1025 1–3, 5

HFB1030 4976D04G05 O — — HFD1030 1–3, 5

HFB1035 4976D04G06 O — — HFD1035 1–3, 5

HFB1040 4976D04G07 O — — HFD1040 1–3, 5

HFB1045 4976D04G49 O — — HFD1045 1–3, 5

HFB1050 4976D04G08 O — — HFD1050 1–3, 5

HFB1060 4976D04G09 O — — HFD1060 1–3, 5

HFB1070 4976D04G10 O — — HFD1070 1–3, 5

HFB1080 4976D04G50 O — — HFD1080 1–3, 5

HFB1090 4976D04G11 O — — HFD1090 1–3, 5

HFB1100 4976D04G12 O — — HFD1100 1–3, 5

HFB2015 4976D04G18 O — — FD3015 1–3, 5, 6

HFB2020 4976D04G19 O — — FD3020 1–3, 5, 6

HFB2022ML 2610D57G03 O — — HMCP003A0C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2025 4976D04G20 O — — FD3025 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2030 4976D04G21 O — — FD3030 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2035 4976D04G22 O — — FD3035 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2040 4976D04G23 O — — FD3040 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2045 4976D04G51 O — — FD3045 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2045ML 2610D57G04 O — — HMCP007COC 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2050 4976D04G24 O — — FD3050 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2060 4976D04G25 O — — FD3060 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2070 4976D04G26 O — — FD3070 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2080 4976D04G52 O — — FD3080 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2090 4976D04G27 O — — FD3090 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2100 4976D04G28 O — — FD3100 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2125 4976D04G29 O — — FD3125 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2150 4976D04G30 O — — FD3150 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2110ML 2610D57G05 O — — HMCP015E0C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB21550ML 2610D57G08 O — — HMCP150T4C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB21800ML 2610D57G11 O — — HMCP150U4C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2190ML 2610D57G06 O — — HMCP030H1C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2270ML 2610D57G10 O — — HMCP030H1C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2480ML 2610D57G07 O — — HMCP050K2C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB3015 4976D04G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 FD3015 1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3020 4976D04G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 FD3020 1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3022ML 2610D57G21 A — — HMCP003A0C 1, 2, 3, 7

HFB3025 4976D04G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 FD3025 1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3030 4976D04G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 FD3030 1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3035 4976D04G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 FD3035 1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3040 4976D04G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 FD3040 1–3, 5

HFB3045 4976D04G54 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 FD3045 1–3, 5

HFB3045ML 2610D57G22 A — — HMCP007C0C 1–3, 7

HFB3050 4976D04G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 FD3050 1–3, 5

HFB3060 4976D04G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 FD3060 1–3, 5

HFB3070 4976D04G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 FD3070 1–3, 5

HFB3080 4976D04G55 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 FD3080 1–3, 5

V12-T3-122 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HFB3090 4976D04G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 FD3090 1–3, 5

HFB3100 4976D04G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 FD3100 1–3, 5

HFB3110 4976D04G56 O — — FD3110 1–3, 5

HFB3110ML 2610D57G23 A — — HMCP015E0C 1–3, 7

HFB3125 4976D04G45 O — — FD3125 1–3, 5

HFB3150 4976D04G46 O — — FD3150 1–3, 5

HFB31550ML 2610D57G26 O — — HMCP150T4C 1–3, 7

HFB31800ML 2610D57G29 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 7

HFB3190ML 2610D57G24 A — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7

HFB3270ML 2610D57G28 A — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7

HFB3480ML 2610D57G25 A — — HMCP050K2C 1–3, 7

HKA2070 1255C59G02 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2070T 2602D83G02 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2070TA 459D987G02 O — — JT2070T 2, 8

HKA2090 1255C59G03 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2090T 657D789G03 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2090TA 459D987G03 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2100 1255C59G04 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2100T 2602D83G04 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2100TA 459D987G04 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2125 1255C59G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA21250TM 2602D84G05 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2125T 2602D83G05 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2125TA 459D987G05 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2150 1255C59G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA21500TM 2602D84G06 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2150T 2602D83G06 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2150TA 459D987G06 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2175 1255C59G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA21750TM 2602D84G07 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2175T 2602D83G07 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2175TA 459D987G07 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2200 1255C59G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2200T 2602D83G08 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2200TA 459D987G08 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2225 1255C59G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA22250TM 2602D84G09 O — — — 2, 8

HKA2225F 2602D86G05 O — — KD2400F 2, 8

HKA2225T 2602D83G09 O — — KT2225T 2, 8

HKA2225TA 459D987G09 O — — KT2225T 2, 8

HKA2700TM 2602D84G02 O — — — 2, 8

HKA3070 1255C59G17 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3070T 657D788G17 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3070TA 459D987G17 O HKA3070T 657D789G17 — 2, 8

HKA3090 1255C59G18 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3090T 2602D83G18 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3090TA 459D987G18 O HKA3090T 657D789G18 — 2, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-123

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HKA3100 1255C59G19 O — — KD3100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3100T 2602D83G19 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3100TA 459D987G19 O HKA3100T 657D789G19 — 2, 8

HKA3125 1255C59G20 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3125T 2602D83G20 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3125TA 459D987G20 O HKA3125T 657D789G20 — 2, 8

HKA3150 1255C59G21 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3150T 2602D83G21 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3150TA 459D987G21 O HKA3150T 657D789G21 — 2, 8

HKA3175 1255C59G22 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3175T 2602D83G22 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3175TA 459D987G22 O HKA3175T 657D789G22 — 2, 8

HKA3200 1255C59G23 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3200T 2602D83G23 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3200TA 459D987G23 O HKA3200T 657D789G23 — 2, 8

HKA3225 1255C59G24 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3225F 2602D86G06 O — — KD3400F 2, 8

HKA3225T 2602D83G24 A — — — 2, 5

HKA3225TA 459D987G24 O HKA3225T 657D789G24 — 2, 8

HKB2070 1291C44G01 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5

HKB2070T 1293C31G01 O — — — 2, 5

HKB2090 1291C44G02 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5

HKB2090T 1293C31G02 O — — — —

HKB2100 1291C44G03 O — — JD2100 1–3, 5

HKB21000TM 1293C35G03 O — — — —

HKB2100T 1293C31G03 O — — — —

HKB2125 1291C44G04 O — — JD2125 1–3, 5

HKB21250TM 1293C35G04 O — — — —

HKB2125T 1293C31G04 O — — — —

HKB2150 1291C44G05 O — — JD2150 1–3, 5

HKB21500TM 1293C35G05 O — — — —

HKB2150T 1293C31G05 O — — — —

HKB2175 1291C44G06 O — — JD2175 1–3, 5

HKB21750TM 1293C35G06 O — — — —

HKB2175T 1293C31G06 O — — — —

HKB2200 1291C44G07 O — — JD2200 1–3, 5

HKB2200T 1293C31G07 O — — — —

HKB2225 1291C44G08 O — — JD2225 1–3, 5

HKB22250TM 1293C35G07 O — — — —

HKB2225T 1293C31G08 O — — — —

HKB2250 1291C44G09 O — — JD2250 1–3, 5

HKB22500TM 1293C35G09 O — — — —

HKB2250F 2601D44G15 O — — JD2250F —

HKB2250T 4974D52G12 O — — — —

HKB2700TM 1293C35G01 O — — — —

HKB3070 1291C44G16 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5

HKB3070T 1293C32G01 O — — — —

V12-T3-124 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HKB3090 1291C44G17 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5

HKB3090T 1293C32G02 O — — — —

HKB3100 1291C44G18 O — — JD3100 1–3, 5

HKB31000TM 1293C36G03 O — — — —

HKB3100T 1293C32G03 O — — — —

HKB3125 1291C44G19 O — — JD3125 1–3, 5

HKB31250TM 1293C36G04 O — — — —

HKB3125T 1293C32G04 O — — — —

HKB3150 1291C44G20 O — — JD3150 1–3, 5

HKB31500TM 1293C36G05 O — — — —

HKB3150T 1293C32G05 O — — — —

HKB3175 1291C44G21 O — — JD3175 1–3, 5

HKB31750TM 1293C36G06 O — — — —

HKB3175T 1293C32G06 O — — — —

HKB3200 1291C44G22 O — — JD3200 1–3, 5

HKB3200T 1293C32G06 O — — — —

HKB3225 1291C44G23 O — — JD3225 1–3, 5

HKB32250TM 1293C36G08 O — — — —

HKB3225T 1293C32G07 O — — — —

HKB3250 1291C44G24 O — — JD3250 1–3, 5

HKB32500TM 1293C36G09 O — — — 2, 5

HKB3250F 2601D44G16 O — — JD3250F —

HKB3250FS NO STYLE O — — JD3250F —

HKB3250T 1293C32G08 O — — — —

HKB3700TM 1293C36G01 O — — — —

HLA2070T 2602D98G02 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2070TA 457D581G02 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2090T 2602D98G03 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2090TA 457D581G03 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2100T 2602D98G04 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2100TA 457D581G04 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2125 1255C74G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8

HLA21250TM 2602D97G03 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2125T 2602D98G05 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2125TA 457D581G05 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2150 1255C74G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8

HLA21500TM 2602D97G04 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2150T 2602D98G06 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2150TA 457D581G06 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2175 1255C74G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8

HLA21750TM 2602D97G05 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2175T 2602D98G07 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2175TA 457D581G07 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2200 1255C74G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8

HLA2200T 2602D98G08 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2200TA 457D581G08 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2225 1255C74G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-125

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HLA22250TM 2602D97G06 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2225T 2602D98G09 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2225TA 457D581G09 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2250 1255C74G10 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8

HLA2250T 2602D98G10 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2250TA 457D581G10 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2300 1255C74G11 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8

HLA23000TM 2602D97G07 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2300T 2602D98G11 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2300TA 457D581G11 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2350 1255C74G12 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8

HLA2350T 2602D98G12 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2350TA 457D781G12 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2400 1255C74G13 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8

HLA24000TM 2602D97G08 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2400F 673B352G01 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8

HLA2400T 2602D98G13 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2400TA 457D581G13 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2500 1256C10G10 O — — LD2500 1–3, 5, 8

HLA25000TM 2603D47G12 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2500T 2603D46G12 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2500TA 5683D88G12 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2600 1256C10G07 O — — LD2600 1–3, 5, 8

HLA26000TM 2603D47G13 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2600F 375D400G09 O — — LD2600F 1–3, 5, 8

HLA2600T 2603D46G13 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2600TA 5683D88G13 O — — — 2, 8

HLA2700TM 2602D97G02 O — — — 2, 8

HLA3070T 2602D98G21 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3070TA 457D581G21 O HLA3070T 370D749G21 — 2, 8

HLA3090T 2602D98G22 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3090TA 457D581G22 O HLA3090T 370D749G22 — 2, 8

HLA3100T 2602D98G23 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3100TA 457D581G23 O HLA3100T 370D749G23 — 2, 8

HLA3125 504C740G20 A — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8

HLA31250TM 2602D97G25 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3125T 2602D98G24 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3125TA 457D581G24 O HLA3125T 370D749G24 — 2, 8

HLA3150 504C740G21 A — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8

HLA31500TM 2602D97G26 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3150T 2602D98G25 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3150TA 457D581G25 O HLA3150T 370D749G25 — 2, 8

HLA3175 504C740G22 A — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8

HLA31750TM 2602D97G27 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3175T 2602D98G26 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3175TA 457D581G26 O HLA3175T 370D749G26 — 2, 8

HLA3200 504C740G23 A — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8

V12-T3-126 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HLA3200T 2602D98G27 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3200TA 457D581G27 O HLA3200T 370D749G27 — 2, 8

HLA3225 504C740G24 A — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8

HLA32250TM 2602D97G28 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3225T 2602D98G28 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3225TA 457D581G28 O HLA3225T 370D749G28 — 2, 8

HLA3250 504C740G25 A — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8

HLA3250T 2602D98G29 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3250TA 457D581G29 O HLA3250T 370D749G29 — 2, 8

HLA3300 504C740G26 A — — KD3300 1–3, 5, 8

HLA33000TM 2602D97G29 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3300T 2602D98G30 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3300TA 457D581G30 O HLA3300T 370D749G30 — 2, 8

HLA3350T 2602D98G31 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3350TA 457D581G31 O HLA3350T 370D749G31 — 2, 8

HLA3400 504C740G28 A — — KD3400 1–3, 5, 8

HLA34000TM 2602D97G30 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3400F 673B352G02 A — — KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8

HLA3400T 2602D98G32 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3400TA 457D581G32 O HLA3400T 370D749G32 — 2, 8

HLA3500 177C429G16 A — — LD3500 1–3, 5, 8

HLA35000TM 2603D47G31 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3500T 2603D46G31 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3500TA 5683D88G31 O HLA3500T 375D259G31 — 2, 8

HLA3600 177C429G17 A — — LD3600 1–3, 5, 8

HLA36000TM 2603D47G32 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3600F 2603D48G06 A — — LD3600F 1–3, 5, 8

HLA3600T 2603D46G32 A — — — 2, 8

HLA3600TA 5683D88G32 O HLA3600T 375D259G32 — 2, 8

HLA3700TM 455D565G24 A — — — 2, 8

HLB2070T 5680D04G07 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2070TA 5680D04G31 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2090T 5680D04G08 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2090TA 5680D04G32 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2100T 5680D04G09 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2100TA 5680D04G33 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2125 179C848G04 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB21250TM 5680D04G56 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2125T 5680D04G10 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2125TA 5680D04G34 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2150 179C848G05 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB21500TM 5680D04G57 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2150T 5680D04G11 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2150TA 5680D04G35 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2175 179C848G06 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB21750TM 5680D04G58 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2175T 5680D04G12 O — — — 2, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-127

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HLB2175TA 5680D04G36 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2200 179C848G07 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2200T 5680D04G13 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2200TA 5680D04G37 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2225 179C848G08 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB22250TM 5680D04G59 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2225T 5680D04G14 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2225TA 5680D04G38 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2250 179C848G09 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2250T 5680D04G15 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2250TA 5680D04G39 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2300 179C848G10 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB23000TM 5680D04G60 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2300T 5680D04G16 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2300TA 5680D04G40 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2350 179C848G11 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2350TA 5680D04G41 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2400 179C848G12 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB24000TM 5680D04G61 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2400F 5680D03G09 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2400T 5680D04G18 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2400TA 5680D04G42 O — — — 2, 8

HLB2700TM 5680D04G55 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3070T 5680D04G19 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3070TA 5680D04G43 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3090T 5680D04G20 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3090TA 5680D04G44 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3100T 5680D04G21 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3100TA 5680D04G45 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3125 179C848G19 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB31250TM 5680D04G63 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3125T 5680D04G22 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3125TA 5680D04G46 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3150 179C848G20 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB31500TM 5680D04G64 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3150T 5680D04G23 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3150TA 5680D04G47 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3175 179C848G21 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB31750TM 5680D04G65 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3175T 5680D04G24 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3175TA 5680D04G48 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3200 179C848G22 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB3200T 5680D04G25 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3200TA 5680D04G49 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3225 179C848G23 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB32250TM 5680D04G66 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3225T 5680D04G26 O — — — 2, 8

V12-T3-128 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HLB3225TA 5680D04G50 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3250 179C848G24 O — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB3250T 5680D04G27 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3250TA 5680D04G51 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3300 179C848G25 O — — KD3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB33000TM 5680D04G67 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3300T 5680D04G28 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3300TA 5680D04G52 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3350TA 5680D04G53 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3400 179C848G27 O — — KD3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB34000TM 5680D04G68 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3400F 5680D03G10 O — — KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB3400T 5680D04G30 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3400TA 5680D04G54 O — — — 2, 8

HLB3700TM 5680D04G62 O — — — 2, 8

HLC2150F 1242C92G01 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2150FM 1242C92G03 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2300F 1242C92G05 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2300FM 1242C92G07 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2400F 1242C92G09 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2400FM 1242C92G11 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2600F 1242C92G13 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC2600FM 1242C92G15 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3150F 1242C92G02 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3150FM 1242C92G04 O HLC3150F 1284C66G02 KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3300F 1242C92G06 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3300FM 1242C92G08 O HLC3300F 2612D41G46 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3400F 1242C92G10 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3400FM 1242C92G12 O HLC3400F 2613D44G08 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3600F 1242C92G14 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLC3600FM 1242C92G16 O HLC3600F 2612D41G48 LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2150F 1242C92G23 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2300F 1242C92G27 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2400F 1242C92G31 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2600F 1242C92G35 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA3150F 1242C92G24 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA3300F 1242C92G28 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA3400F 1242C92G32 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCA3600F 1284C66G36 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCC3600F 6590C11G14 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

HLCCA3600F 6590C11G36 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HLCCG3600F 1242C94G04 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCCGA3600F 1242C94G12 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3150F 1242C89G01 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LSG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3300F 1242C89G02 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3400F 1242C89G03 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3600F 1371D17G40 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-129

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HLCGA3150F 1242C89G09 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCGA3300F 1242C89G10 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCGA3400F 1242C89G11 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HLCGA3600F 1270C61G12 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2125 1252C22G01 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8

HMA21250TM 457D455G07 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2125T 371D371G05 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2125TA 457D458G05 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2150 1252C22G02 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2150T 371D371G06 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2150TA 457D458G06 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2175 1252C22G03 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2175T 371D371G07 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2175TA 457D458G07 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2200 1252C22G04 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8

HMA22000TM 457D455G08 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2200T 371D371G08 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2200TA 457D458G08 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2225 1252C22G05 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2225T 371D371G09 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2225TA 457D458G09 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2250 1252C22G06 O — — KD2250 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA2250T 371D371G10 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2250TA 457D458G10 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2300 1252C22G07 O — — MDL2300 1–3, 5, 8

HMA23000TM 457D455G09 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2300T 371D371G11 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2300TA 457D458G11 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2350 1252C22G08 O — — MDL2350 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2350T 371D371G12 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2350TA 457D458G12 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2400 1252C22G09 O — — MDL2400 1–3, 5, 8

HMA24000TM 457D455G10 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2400T 371D371G13 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2400TA 457D458G13 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2500 1252C22G10 O — — MDL2500 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2500T 371D372G06 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2500TA 457D459G06 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2600 1252C22G11 O — — MDL2600 1–3, 5, 8

HMA2600T 371D372G08 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2600TA 457D459G08 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2700 1252C22G12 O — — MDL2700 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA2700T 371D373G10 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2700TA 457D460G10 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2800 1252C22G13 O — — MDL2800 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA28000TM 457D455G12 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2800F 373B237G03 O — — MDL2800F —

V12-T3-130 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HMA2800T 371D373G12 O — — — 2, 8

HMA2800TA 457D460G12 O — — — 2, 8

HMA3125 1252C22G16 A — — KD3125 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA31250TM 457D455G23 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3125T 371D371G21 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3125TA 457D458G21 O HMA3125T 371D371G21 — 2, 8

HMA3150 1252C22G17 A — — KD3150 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3150T 371D371G22 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3150TA 457D458G22 O HMA3150T 371D371G22 — 2, 8

HMA3175 1252C22G18 A — — KD3175 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3175T 371D371G23 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3175TA 457D458G23 O HMA3175T 371D371G23 — 2, 8

HMA3200 1252C22G19 A — — KD3200 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA32000TM 457D455G24 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3200T 371D371G24 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3200TA 457D458G24 O HMA3200T 371D371G24 — 2, 8

HMA3225 1252C22G20 A — — KD3225 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3225T 371D371G25 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3225TA 457D458G25 O HMA3225T 371D371G25 — 2, 8

HMA3250 1252C22G21 A — — KD3250 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3250T 371D371G26 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3250TA 457D458G26 O HMA3250T 371D371G26 — 2, 8

HMA3300 1252C22G22 A — — MDL3300 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA33000TM 457D455G25 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3300T 371D371G27 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3300TA 457D458G27 O HMA3300T 371D371G27 — 2, 8

HMA3350 1252C22G23 A — — MDL3350 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3350T 371D371G28 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3350TA 457D458G28 O HMA3350T 371D371G28 — 2, 8

HMA3400 1252C22G24 A — — MDL3400 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA34000TM 457D455G26 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3400T 371D371G29 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3400TA 457D458G29 O HMA3400T 371D371G29 — 2, 8

HMA3500 1252C22G25 A — — MDL3500 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3500T 371D372G22 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3500TA 457D459G22 O HMA3500T 371D372G22 — 2, 8

HMA3600 1252C22G26 A — — MDL3600 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA36000TM 457D455G27 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3600T 371D372G24 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3600TA 457D459G24 O HMA3600T 371D372G24 — 2, 8

HMA3700 1252C22G27 A — — MDL3700 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3700T 371D373G26 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3700TA 457D460G26 O HMA3700T 371D373G26 — 2, 8

HMA3800 1252C22G28 A — — MDL3800 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA38000TM 457D455G28 A — — — 2, 8

HMA3800F 2600D43G10 A — — MDL3800F 2, 8

HMA3800T 371D373G28 A — — — 2, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-131

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HMA3800TA 457D460G28 O HMA3800T 371D373G28 — 2, 8

HMC2800F 6590C16G05 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMC2800FM 6590C16G07 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMC3800F 6590C16G06 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMC3800FM 6590C16G08 O HMC3800F 6590C16G06 MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMCA2800F 6590C16G17 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMCA3800F 6590C16G18 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HMCC3800F 6590C14G06 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8

HMCCA3800F 6590C14G18 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8

HMCCG3800F 1242C62G09 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8

HMCCGA3800F 1242C62G11 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HMCG3800F 1242C60G09 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8

HMCGA3800F 1242C60G11 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

HNB21000 1234C26G15 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB210000TM 371D590G13 O — — — 2, 8

HNB21000T 371D589G13 O — — — 2, 8

HNB21200 1234C26G17 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB212000TM 371D590G14 O — — — 2, 8

HNB21200F 2610D64G19 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8

HNB21200T 371D589G15 O — — — 2, 8

HNB26000TM 371D590G11 O — — — 2, 8

HNB2700 1234C26G12 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB2700T 371D589G10 O — — — 2, 8

HNB2800 1234C26G13 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB28000TM 371D590G12 O — — — 2, 8

HNB2800T 371D589G11 O — — — 2, 8

HNB2900 1234C26G14 O — — ND212T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB2900T 371D589G12 O — — — 2, 8

HNB31000 1234C26G33 A — — ND312T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB310000TM 371D590G29 A — — — 2, 8

HNB31000T 371D589G29 A — — — 2, 8

HNB31200 1234C26G35 A — — ND312T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB312000TM 371D590G30 A — — — 2, 8

HNB31200F 625B494G08 A — — ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8

HNB31200T 371D589G31 A — — — 2, 8

HNB36000TM 371D590G27 A — — — 2, 8

HNB3700 1234C26G30 A — — ND3800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB3700T 371D589G26 A — — — 2, 8

HNB3800 1234C26G31 A — — ND3800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB38000TM 371D590G28 A — — — 2, 8

HNB3800T 371D589G27 A — — — 2, 8

HNB3900 1234C26G32 A — — ND312T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8

HNB3900T 371D589G28 A — — — 2, 8

HNC21200F 2613D29G06 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8

HNC21200FM 2613D29G08 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

HNC31200F 2613D29G05 A — — ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8

HNC31200FM 2613D29G07 O HNC31200F 2613D29G05 — 1–3, 5, 8

V12-T3-132 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

HNCA21200F 2613D29G18 O HNCA31200F 2613D29G17 ND212T32W 1–3, 5, 8

HNCA31200F 2613D29G17 A — — ND312T32W 1–3, 5, 8

HNCG31200F 1242C72G04 A — — ND312T35W 1–3, 5, 8

HNCGA31200F 1242C72G12 A — — ND312T36W 1–3, 5, 8

JA2070 371D957G02 O — — JDB2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2070A 456D988G80 O — — JDB2070 1–3, 8, 9

JA2070S 657D791G46 O — — JDB2070 1–5, 8, 9

JA2070SW 657D791G26 O — — JDB2070W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2070W 657D791G02 O — — JDB2070W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2090 371D957G03 O — — JDB2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2090A 456D988G81 O — — JDB2090 1–3, 8, 9

JA2090S 657D791G47 O — — JDB2090 1–5, 8, 9

JA2090SW 657D791G27 O — — JDB2090W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2090W 657D791G03 O — — JDB2090W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2100 371D957G04 O — — KDB2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2100A 456D988G82 O — — KDB2100 1–3, 8, 9

JA2100S 657D791G48 O — — KDB2100 1–5, 8, 9

JA2100SW 657D791G28 O — — KDB2100W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2100W 657D791G04 O — — KDB2100W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2125 371D957G05 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA21250MW 371D957G67 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA21250SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400F5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA2125A 456D988G83 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 8, 9

JA2125S 657D791G49 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8, 9

JA2125SW 657D791G29 O — — KDB2125W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2125W 657D791G05 O — — KDB2125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2150 371D957G06 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA21500MW 371D957G68 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA21500SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400G5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA2150A 456D988G84 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 8, 9

JA2150S 657D791G50 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8, 9

JA2150SW 657D791G30 O — — KDB2150W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2150W 657D791G06 O — — KDB2150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2175 371D957G07 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA21750MW 371D957G69 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA21750SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400J5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA2175A 456D988G85 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 8, 9

JA2175S 657D791G51 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8, 9

JA2175SW 657D791G31 O — — KDB2175W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2175W 657D791G07 O — — KDB2175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2200 371D957G08 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2200A 456D988G86 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 8, 9

JA2200S 657D791G52 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8, 9

JA2200SW 657D791G32 O — — KDB2200W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2200W 657D791G08 O — — KDB2200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2225 371D957G09 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA22250MW 371D957G70 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–3, 8, 9

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-133

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

JA22250SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400L5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA2225A 456D988G87 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 8, 9

JA2225S 657D791G53 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9

JA2225SW 657D791G33 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8, 9

JA2225W 657D791G09 O — — KDB2225W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2225WK 752B047G01 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2225WSK 752B047G02 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2250W NO STYLE O — — KDB2250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2700MW 371D957G66 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 7, 8, 9

JA2700SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400D5W 1–5, 7–9

JA3070 371D957G12 O — — JDB3070 1–3, 8, 9

JA3070A 456D988G90 O — — JDB3070 1–3, 8, 9

JA3070S 657D791G56 O — — JDB3070 1–5, 8, 9

JA3070SW 657D791G36 O — — JDB3070W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3070W 657D791G12 O — — JDB3070W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3090 371D957G13 O — — JDB3090 1–3, 8, 9

JA3090A 456D988G91 O — — JDB3090 1–3, 8, 9

JA3090S 657D791G57 O — — JDB3090 1–5, 8, 9

JA3090SW 657D791G37 O — — JDB3090W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3090W 657D791G13 O — — JDB3090W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3100 371D957G14 O — — KDB3100 1–3, 8, 9

JA3100A 456D988G92 O — — KDB3100 1–3, 8, 9

JA3100S 657D791G58 O — — KDB3100 1–5, 8, 9

JA3100SW 657D791G38 O — — KDB3100W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3100W 657D791G14 O — — KDB3100W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3125 371D957G15 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 8, 9

JA31250MW 371D957G74 O — — HMCP400F5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA31250SMW NO STYLE O — — HMCP400F5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA3125A 456D988G93 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 8, 9

JA3125S 657D791G59 O — — KDB3125 1–5, 8, 9

JA3125SW 657D791G39 O — — KDB3125W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3125W 657D791G15 O — — KDB3125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3150 371D957G16 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 8, 9

JA31500MW 371D957G75 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA31500SMW 82E2537 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA3150A 456D988G94 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 8, 9

JA3150S 657D791G60 O — — KDB3150 1–5, 8, 9

JA3150SW 657D791G40 O — — KDB3150W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3150W 657D791G16 O — — KDB3150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3175 371D957G17 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 8, 9

JA31750MW 371D957G76 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA31750SMW 82E0668 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA3175A 456D988G95 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 8, 9

JA3175S 657D791G61 O — — KDB3175 1–5, 8, 9

JA3175SW 657D791G41 O — — KDB3175W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3175W 657D791G17 O — — KDB3175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3200 371D957G18 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 8, 9

V12-T3-134 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

JA3200A 456D988G96 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 8, 9

JA3200S 657D791G62 O — — KDB3200 1–5, 8, 9

JA3200SW 657D791G42 O — — KDB3200W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3200W 657D791G18 O — — KDB3200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3225 371D957G19 O — — KDB3225 1–3, 8, 9

JA32250MW 371D957G77 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–3, 8, 9

JA32250SMW 82E8642 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–4, 8, 9

JA3225A 456D988G97 O — — KDB3225 1–3, 8, 9

JA3225S 657D791G63 O — — KDB3225 1–5, 8, 9

JA3225SW 657D791G43 O — — KDB3225W 1–5, 8, 9

JA3225W 657D791G19 O — — KDB3225W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3225WK 752B047G06 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3225WSK 752B047G07 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3250W NO STYLE O — — KDB3250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3700MW NO STYLE O — — HMCP400D5W 1–3, 5, 7–9

JA3700SMW NO STYLE O — — HMCP400D5W 1–5, 7–9

JB2070 NO STYLE O — — JDB2070 1–3, 5

JB2070S NO STYLE O — — JDB2070 1–5

JB2070SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2070W 1–5

JB2070W 752B417G34 O — — JDB2070W 1–3, 5

JB2090 NO STYLE O — — JDB2090 1–3, 5

JB2090S NO STYLE O — — JDB2090 1–5

JB2090SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2090W 1–5

JB2090W 752B417G35 O — — JDB2090W 1–3, 5

JB2100 NO STYLE O — — JDB2100 1–3, 5

JB2100S NO STYLE O — — JDB2100 1–5

JB2100SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2100W 1–5

JB2100W 752B417G01 O — — JDB2100W 1–3, 5

JB2125 NO STYLE O — — JDB2125 1–3, 5

JB21250MW 752B416G02 O — — HM2P250F5W 1–3

JB21250SMW 752B416G14 O — — HM2P250F5W 1–4

JB2125S NO STYLE O — — JDB2125 1–5

JB2125SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2125W 1–5

JB2125W 752B417G02 O — — JDB2125W 1–3, 5

JB2150 NO STYLE O — — JDB2150 1–3, 5

JB21500MW 752B416G03 O — — HM2P250G5W 1–3

JB21500SMW 752B416G15 O — — HM2P250G5W 1–4

JB2150S NO STYLE O — — JDB2150 1–5

JB2150SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2150W 1–5

JB2150W 752B417G03 O — — JDB2150W 1–3, 5

JB2175 NO STYLE O — — JDB2175 1–3, 5

JB21750MW 752B416G04 O — — HM2P250J5W 1–3

JB21750SMW 752B416G16 O — — HM2P250J5W 1–4

JB2175S NO STYLE O — — JDB2175 1–5

JB2175SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2175W 1–5

JB2175W 752B417G04 O — — JDB2175W 1–3, 5

JB2200 NO STYLE O — — JDB2200 1–3, 5

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-135

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

JB2200S 81E6623 O — — JDB2200 1–5

JB2200SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2200W 1–5

JB2200W 752B417G05 O — — JDB2200W 1–3, 5

JB2225 NO STYLE O — — JDB2225 1–3, 5

JB22250MW 752B416G05 O — — HM2P250L5W 1–3

JB22250SMW 752B416G17 O — — HM2P250L5W 1–3, 4

JB2225S NO STYLE O — — JDB2225 1–5

JB2225SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2225W 1–5

JB2225W 752B417G06 O — — JDB2225W 1–3, 5

JB2250 NO STYLE O — — JDB2250 1–3, 5

JB22500MW 752B416G06 O — — HM2P250W5W 1–3

JB22500SMW 752B416G18 O — — HM2P250W5W 1–3, 4

JB2250S NO STYLE O — — JDB2250 1–5

JB2250SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2250W 1–5

JB2250SWK NO STYLE O — — JDB2250KW 1–3, 5, 8

JB2250W 752B417G07 O — — JDB2250W 1–3, 5

JB2250WK 752B046G01 O — — JDB2250KW 1–3, 5, 8

JB2700MW 752B416G01 O — — HM2P250A5W 1–3

JB2700SMW 752B416G13 O — — HM2P250A5W 1–4

JB3070 NO STYLE O — — JDB3070 1–3, 5

JB3070S NO STYLE O — — JDB3070 1–5

JB3070SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3070W 1–5

JB3070W 752B417G08 O — — JDB3070W 1–3, 5

JB3090 NO STYLE O — — JDB3090 1–3, 5

JB3090S NO STYLE O — — JDB3090 1–5

JB3090SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3090W 1–5

JB3090W 752B417G09 O — — JDB3090W 1–3, 5

JB3100 NO STYLE O — — JDB3100 1–3, 5

JB3100S NO STYLE O — — JDB3100 1–5

JB3100SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3100W 1–5

JB3100W 752B417G10 O — — JDB3100W 1–3, 5

JB3125 NO STYLE O — — JDB3125 1–3, 5

JB31250MW 752B416G08 O — — HMCP250F5W 1–3

JB3100W 752B417G10 O — — JDB3100W 1–3, 5

JB3125 NO STYLE O — — JDB3125 1–3, 5

JB31250MW 752B416G08 O — — HMCP250F5W 1–3

JB31250SMW 752B416G20 O — — HMCP250F5W 1–4

JB3125S NO STYLE O — — JDB3125 1–5

JB3125SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3125W 1–5

JB3125W 752B417G11 O — — JDB3125W 1–3, 5

JB3150 NO STYLE O — — JDB3150 1–3, 5

JB31500MW 752B416G09 O — — HMCP250G5W 1–3

JB31500SMW 752B416G21 O — — HMCP250G5W 1–4

JB3150S NO STYLE O — — JDB3150 1–5

JB3150SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3150W 1–5

JB3150W 752B417G12 O — — JDB3150W 1–3, 5

JB3175 69E1870 O — — JDB3175 1–3, 5

V12-T3-136 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

JB31750MW 752B416G10 O — — HMCP250J5W 1–3

JB31750SMW 752B416G22 O — — HMCP250J5W 1–4

JB3175S NO STYLE O — — JDB3175 1–5

JB3175SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3175W 1–5

JB3175W 752B417G13 O — — JDB3175W 1–3, 5

JB3200 69E9992 O — — JDB3200 1–3, 5

JB3200S NO STYLE O — — JDB3200 1–5

JB3200SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3200W 1–5

JB3200W 752B417G14 O — — JDB3200W 1–3, 5

JB3225 80E9836 O — — JDB3225 1–3, 5

JB32250MW 752B416G11 O — — HMCP250L5W 1–3

JB32250SMW 752B416G23 O — — HMCP250L5W 1–4

JB3225S 63E6442 O — — JDB3225 1–5

JB3225SW 752B417G15 O — — JDB3225W 1–5

JB3225W 80E8211 O — — JDB3225W 1–3, 5

JB3250 752B416G12 O — — JDB3250 1–3, 5

JB32500MW 752B416G24 O — — HMCP250W5W 1–3

JB32500SMW NO STYLE O — — HMCP250W5W 1–4

JB3250S NO STYLE O — — JDB3250 1–5

JB3250SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3250W 1–5

JB3250W 752B417G16 O — — JDB3250W 1–3, 5

JB3250WK 752B046G06 O — — JDB3250KW 1–3, 5, 8

JB3250WSK 752B046G07 O — — JDB3250KW 1–3, 5, 8

JB3700MW 752B416G07 O — — HMCP250A5W 1–3

JB3700SMW 752B416G19 O — — HMCP250A5W 1–4

KA2070 1255C53G02 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2070S 1255C54G02 O — — JD2070 1–5, 8, 9

KA2090 1255C53G03 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2090S 1255C54G03 O — — JD2090 1–5, 8, 9

KA2100 1255C53G04 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2100S 1255C54G04 O — — KD2100 1–5, 8, 9

KA2125 1255C53G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2125S 1255C54G05 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8, 9

KA2150 1255C53G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2175 1255C53G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2175S 1255C54G07 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8, 9

KA2200 1255C53G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2200S 1255C54G08 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8, 9

KA2225 1255C53G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2225F 2602D86G01 O — — KD2400F 2, 8

KA2225FS 2602D86G03 O — — KD2400F 2, 4, 8

KA2225S 1255C54G09 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8, 9

KA2225WK 752B047G03 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2225WSK 752B047G04 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2150S 1255C54G06 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8, 9

KA3070 1255C53G17 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3070S 1255C54G17 O — — JD3070 1–5, 8, 9

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-137

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

KA3090 1255C53G18 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3090S 1255C54G18 O — — JD3090 1–5, 8, 9

KA3100 1255C53G19 O — — KD3100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3100S 1255C54G19 O — — KD3100 1–5, 8, 9

KA3125 1255C53G20 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3125S 1255C54G20 O — — KD3125 1–5, 8, 9

KA3150 1255C53G21 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3150S 1255C54G21 O — — KD3150 1–5, 8, 9

KA3175 1255C53G22 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3175S 504C335G22 O — — KD3175 1–5, 8, 9

KA3200 504C335G23 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3200S 504C335G23 O — — KD3200 1–5, 8, 9

KA3225 504C336G24 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3225F 2602D86G02 O — — KD3400F 2, 8

KA3225FS 2602D86G04 O — — KD3400F 2, 4, 8

KA3225S 504C335G24 O — — KD3225 1–5, 8, 9

KA3225WK 752B047G08 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3225WSK 752B047G09 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

KB2070 1291C40G01 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5

KB2090 1291C40G02 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5

KB2100 1291C40G03 O — — JD2100 1–3, 5

KB2125 1291C40G04 O — — JD2125 1–3, 5

KB2150 1291C40G05 O — — JD2150 1–3, 5

KB2175 1291C40G06 O — — JD2175 1–3, 5

KB2200 1291C40G07 O — — JD2200 1–3, 5

KB2225 1291C40G08 O — — JD2225 1–3, 5

KB2250 1291C40G09 O — — JD2250 1–3, 5

KB2250F 2601D44G13 O — — JD2250F —

KB2250FS 2601D44G17 O — — JD2250F —

KB2250WK 752B046G03 O — — JD2250KW 1–3, 5, 8

KB2250WSK 752B046G04 O — — JD2250KW 1–3, 5, 8

KB3070 1291C40G16 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5

KB3090 1291C40G17 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5

KB3100 1291C40G18 O — — JD3100 1–3, 5

KB3125 1291C40G19 O — — JD3125 1–3, 5

KB3150 1291C40G20 O — — JD3150 1–3, 5

KB3175 1291C40G21 O — — JD3175 1–3, 5

KB3200 1291C40G22 O — — JD3200 1–3, 5

KB3225 1291C40G23 O — — JD3225 1–3, 5

KB3250 1291C40G24 O — — JD3250 1–3, 5

KB3250F 2601D44G14 O — — JD3250F —

KB3250WK 752B046G08 O — — JD3250KW 1–3, 5, 8

KB3250WSK 752B046G09 O — — JD3250KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA2070 1255C72G02 O — — KD2070 1–3, 5, 8

LA2070S 1255C73G02 O — — KD2070 1–5, 8

LA2090 1255C72G03 O — — KD2090 1–3, 5, 8

LA2090S 1255C73G03 O — — KD2090 1–5, 8

V12-T3-138 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LA2100 1255C72G04 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8

LA2100S 1255C73G04 O — — KD2100 1–5, 8

LA2125 1255C72G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8

LA2125S 1255C73G05 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8

LA2150 1255C72G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8

LA2150S 1255C73G06 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8

LA2175 1255C72G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8

LA2175S 1255C73G07 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8

LA2200 1255C72G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8

LA2200S 1255C73G08 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8

LA2225 1255C72G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8

LA2225S 1255C73G09 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8

LA2250 1255C72G10 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8

LA2250S 1255C73G10 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8

LA2300 1255C72G11 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8

LA2300S 1255C73G11 O — — KD2300 1–5, 8

LA2350 1255C72G12 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8

LA2350S 1255C73G12 O — — KD2350 1–5, 8

LA2400 1255C72G13 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8

LA2400F 2602D99G01 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8

LA2400FS 2602D99G03 O — — KD2400F 1–5, 8

LA2400S 1255C73G13 O — — KD2400 1–5, 8

LA2400WK 752B042G01 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA2400WSK 752B042G02 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA2500 2603D50G05 O — — LD2500 1–3, 5, 8

LA2500S 2603D50G17 O — — LD2500 1–5, 8

LA2600 2603D50G06 O — — LD2500 1–3, 5, 8

LA2600F 2603D48G01 O — — LD2600F 1–3, 5, 8

LA2600FS 2603D48G03 O — — LD2600F 1–5, 8

LA2600S 2600D50G18 O — — LD2600 1–5, 8

LA2600WK 752B043G01 O — — LD2600KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA2600WSK 752B043G02 O — — LD2600KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA3070 1255C72G17 O HLA3070 504C740G17 KD3070 1–3, 5, 8

LA3070S 504C612G17 O HLA3070 504C740G17 KD3070 1–5, 8

LA3090 1255C72G18 O HLA3090 504C740G18 KD3090 1–3, 5, 8

LA3090S 504C612G18 O HLA3090 504C740G18 KD3090 1–5, 8

LA3100 1255C72G19 O HLA3100 504C740G19 KD3100 1–3, 5, 8

LA3100S 504C612G19 O HLA3100 504C740G19 KD3100 1–5, 8

LA3125 1255C72G20 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KD3125 1–3, 5, 8

LA3125S 504C612G20 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KD3125 1–5, 8

LA3150 1255C72G21 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KD3150 1–3, 5, 8

LA3150S 504C612G21 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KD3150 1–5, 8

LA3175 1255C72G22 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KD3175 1–3, 5, 8

LA3175S 504C612G22 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KD3175 1–5, 8

LA3200 1255C72G23 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KD3200 1–3, 5, 8

LA3200S 504C612G23 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KD3200 1–5, 8

LA3225 1255C72G24 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KD3225 1–3, 5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-139

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LA3225S 504C612G24 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KD3225 1–5, 8

LA3250 1255C72G25 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KD3250 1–3, 5, 8

LA3250S 504C612G25 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KD3250 1–5, 8

LA3300 1255C72G26 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KD3300 1–3, 5, 8

LA3300S 504C612G26 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KD3300 1–5, 8

LA3350 1255C72G27 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KD3350 1–3, 5, 8

LA3350S 504C612G27 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KD3350 1–5, 8

LA3400 1255C72G27 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KD3400 1–3, 5, 8

LA3400F 2602D99G02 O HLA3400F 673B352G02 KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8

LA3400FS 673B352G02 O HLA3400F 673B352G02 KD3400F 1–5, 8

LA3400S 1255C73G28 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KD3400 1–5, 8

LA3400WK 752B042G06 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA3400WSK 752B042G07 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA3500 376D551G11 O HLA3500 177C429G16 LD3500 1–3, 5, 8

LA3500S 376D551G23 O HLA3500 177C429G16 LD3500 1–5, 8

LA3600 376D551G12 O HLA3600 177C429G17 LD3600 1–3, 5, 8

LA3600F 375D400G02 O HLA3600F 375D400G10 LD3600F 1–3, 5, 8

LA3600FS 375D400G04 O HLA3600F 375D400G10 LD3600F 1–5, 8

LA3600S 376D551G24 O HLA3600 177C429G17 LD3600 1–5, 8

LA3600WK 752B043G06 O — — LD3600KW 1–3, 5, 8

LA3600WSK 752B043G07 O — — LD3600KW 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2125 372D300G05 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8

LAB21250MW 371D426G03 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB21250SMW 371D426G23 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–5, 8

LAB2125A 372D301G45 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2125S 372D300G37 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8

LAB2125SW 371D333G37 O — — KDB2125W 1–5, 8

LAB2125W 371D333G05 O — — KDB2125W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2150 372D300G06 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8

LAB21500MW 371D426G04 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB21500SMW 371D426G24 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–5, 8

LAB2150A 372D301G46 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2150S 372D300G38 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8

LAB2150SW 371D333G38 O — — KDB2150W 1–5, 8

LAB2150W 371D333G06 O — — KDB2150W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2175 372D300G07 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8

LAB21750MW 371D426G05 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB21750SMW 371D426G25 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–5, 8

LAB2175A 372D301G47 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2175S 372D300G39 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8

LAB2175SW 371D333G39 O — — KDB2175W 1–5, 8

LAB2175W 371D333G07 O — — KDB2175W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2200 372D300G08 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2200A 371D301G48 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2200S 372D300G40 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8

LAB2200SW 371D333G40 O — — KDB2200W 1–5, 8

LAB2200W 371D333G08 O — — KDB2200W 1–3, 5, 8

V12-T3-140 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LAB2225 372D300G09 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8

LAB22250MW 371D426G06 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB22250SMW 371D426G26 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–5, 8

LAB2225A 372D301G49 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2225S 372D300G41 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8

LAB2225SW 371D333G41 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8

LAB2225W 371D333G09 O — — KDB2225W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB22400A NO STYLE O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2250 372D300G10 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2250A 372D301G50 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2250S 372D300G42 O — — KDB2250 1–5, 8

LAB2250SW 371D333G42 O — — KDB2250W 1–5, 8

LAB2250W 371D333G10 O — — KDB2250W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2300 372D300G11 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8

LAB23000MW 371D426G07 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB23000SMW 371D426G27 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–5, 8

LAB2300A 372D301G51 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2300S 372D300G43 O — — KDB2300 1–5, 8

LAB2300SW 371D333G43 O — — KDB2300W 1–5, 8

LAB2300W 371D333G11 O — — KDB2300W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2350 372D300G12 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2350A 372D301G52 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2350S 372D300G44 O — — KDB2350 1–5, 8

LAB2350W 371D333G12 O — — KDB2350W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2400 372D300G13 O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8

LAB24000MW 371D426G08 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB24000SMW 371D426G28 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–5, 8

LAB2400S 372D300G45 O — — KDB2400 1–5, 8

LAB2400SW 371D333G45 O — — KDB2400W 1–5, 8

LAB2400W 371D333G13 O — — KDB2400W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2400WK 752B042G03 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2400WSK 752B042G04 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2700MW 371D426G02 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB2700SMW 371D426G22 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3125 372D300G20 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8

LAB31250MW 371D426G13 O HLA31250MW — HMCP400F5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB31250SMW 371D426G33 O HLA31250MW — HMCP400F5W 1–5, 8

LAB3125A 372D301G60 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3125S 372D300G52 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KDB3125 1–5, 8

LAB3125SW 371D333G52 O HLA3125W — KDB3125W 1–5, 8

LAB3125W 371D333G20 O HLA3125W — KDB3125W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3150 372D300G21 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8

LAB31500MW 371D426G14 O HLA31500MW — HMCP400G5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB31500SMW 371D426G34 O HLA31500MW — HMCP400G5W 1–5, 8

LAB3150A 372D301G61 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3150S 372D300G53 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KDB3150 1–5, 8

LAB3150SW 371D333G53 O HLA3150W — KDB3150W 1–5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-141

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LAB3150W 371D333G21 O HLA3150W — KDB3150W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3175 372D300G22 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8

LAB31750MW 371D426G15 O HLA31750MW — HMCP400J5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB31750SMW 371D426G35 O HLA31750MW — HMCP400J5W 1–5, 8

LAB3175A 372D301G62 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3175S 372D300G54 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KDB3175 1–5, 8

LAB3175SW 371D333G54 O HLA3175W — KDB3175W 1–5, 8

LAB3175W 371D333G22 O HLA3175W — KDB3175W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3200 372D300G23 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3200A 372D301G63 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3200S 372D300G55 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KDB3200 1–5, 8

LAB3200SW 371D333G55 O HLA3200W — KDB3200W 1–5, 8

LAB3200W 371D333G23 O HLA3200W — KDB3200W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3225 372D300G24 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KDB3225 1–3, 5, 8

LAB32250MW 371D426G16 O HLA32250MW — HMCP400L5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB32250SMW 371D426G36 O HLA32250MW — HMCP400L5W 1–5, 8

LAB3225A 372D301G64 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KDB3225 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3225S 372D300G56 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KDB3225 1–5, 8

LAB3225SW 371D333G56 O HLA3225W — KDB3225W 1–5, 8

LAB3225W 371D333G24 O HLA3225W — KDB3225W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3250 372D300G25 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3250A 372D301G65 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3250S 372D300G57 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KDB3250 1–5, 8

LAB3250SW 371D333G57 O HLA3250W — KDB3250W 1–5, 8

LAB3250W 371D333G25 O HLA3250W — KDB3250W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3300 372D300G26 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8

LAB33000MW 371D426G17 O HLA33000MW — HMCP400N5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB33000SMW 371D426G37 O HLA33000MW — HMCP400N5W 1–5, 8

LAB3300A 372D301G66 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3300S 372D300G58 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KDB3300 1–5, 8

LAB3300SW 371D333G58 O HLA3300W — KDB3300W 1–, 5, 8

LAB3300W 371D333G26 O HLA3300W — KDB3300W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3350A 372D301G67 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KDB3350 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3350S 372D300G59 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KDB3350 1–5, 8

LAB3350SW 371D333G59 O HLA3350W — KDB3350W 1–5, 8

LAB3400 372D300G28 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8

LAB34000MW 371D426G18 O HLA34000MW — HMCP400X5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB34000SMW 371D426G38 O HLA34000MW — HMCP400X5W 1–5, 8

LAB3400A 372D301G68 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3400S 372D300G60 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KDB3400 1–5, 8

LAB3400SW 371D333G60 O HLA3400W — KDB3400W 1–5, 8

LAB3400W 371D333G28 O HLA3400W — KDB3400W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3400WK 752B042G08 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3400WSK 752B042G09 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3700MW 371D426G12 O HLA3700MW — HMCP400D5W 1–3, 5, 8

LAB3700SMW 371D426G32 O HLA3700MW — HMCP400D5W 1–5, 8

LAY3250 NO STYLE O — — HKD3250 —

V12-T3-142 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LAY3300 NO STYLE O — — HLD3300 —

LAY3350 NO STYLE O — — HLD3350 —

LAY3400 NO STYLE O — — HLD3400 —

LAY3500 NO STYLE O — — HLD3500 —

LAY3600 NO STYLE O — — HLD3600 —

LAY3600F 1240C53G01 O — — HLD3600F —

LB2070 179C800G01 O — — KD2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2070S 179C803G01 O — — KD2070 1–5, 8, 9

LB2090 179C800G02 O — — KD2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2090S 179C803G02 O — — KD2090 1–5, 8, 9

LB2100 179C800G03 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2100S 179C803G03 O — — KD2100 1–5, 8, 9

LB2125 179C800G04 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2125S 179C803G04 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8, 9

LB2150 179C800G05 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2150S 179C803G05 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8, 9

LB2175 179C800G06 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2175S 179C803G06 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8, 9

LB2200 179C800G07 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2200S 179C803G07 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8, 9

LB2225 179C800G08 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2225S 179C803G08 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8, 9

LB2250 179C800G09 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2250S 179C803G09 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8, 9

LB2300 179C800G10 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2300S 179C803G10 O — — KD2300 1–5, 8, 9

LB2350 179C800G11 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400 179C800G12 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400F 5680D03G07 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400FS 5680D03G11 O — — KD2400F 1–5, 8, 9

LB2400S 179C803G12 O — — KD2400 1–5, 8, 9

LB2400WK 752B048G02 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400WSK 752B048G04 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3070 179C800G16 O — — KD3070 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3070S 179C803G16 O — — KD3070 1–5, 8, 9

LB3090 179C800G17 O — — KD3090 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3090S 179C803G17 O — — KD3090 1–5, 8, 9

LB3100 179C800G18 O — — KD3100 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3100S 179C803G18 O — — KD3100 1–5, 8, 9

LB3125 179C800G19 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3125S 179C803G19 O — — KD3125 1–5, 8, 9

LB3150 179C800G20 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3150S 179C803G20 O — — KD3150 1–5, 8, 9

LB3175 179C800G21 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3175S 179C803G21 O — — KD3175 1–5, 8, 9

LB3200 179C800G22 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3200S 179C803G22 O — — KD3200 1–5, 8, 9

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-143

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LB3225 179C800G23 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3225S 179C803G23 O — — KD3225 1–5, 8, 9

LB3250 179C800G24 O — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3250S 179C803G24 O — — KD3250 1–5, 8, 9

LB3300 179C800G25 O — — KD3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3300S 179C803G25 O — — KD3300 1–5, 8, 9

LB3350 179C800G26 O — — KD3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400 179C800G27 O — — KD3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400F 5680D03G08 O — — KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400FS 5680D03G12 O — — KD3400F 1–5, 8, 9

LB3400S 179C803G27 O — — KD3400 1–5, 8, 9

LB3400WK 752B048G07 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400WSK 752B048G09 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2125 179C806G04 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21250MW 179C811G02 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21250SMW 179C832G02 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–5, 8.9

LBB2125A 179C807G04 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2125S 179C827G04 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2125SA 179C828G04 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2125SW 179C830G04 O — — KDB2125W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2125W 179C809G04 O — — KDB2125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2150 179C806G05 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21500MW 179C811G03 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21500SMW 179C832G03 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150A 179C807G05 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2150S 179C827G05 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150SA 179C828G05 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150SW 179C830G05 O — — KDB2150W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150W 179C809G05 O — — KDB2150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2175 179C806G06 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21750MW 179C811G04 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21750SMW 179C832G04 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175A 179C807G06 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2175S 179C827G06 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175SA 179C828G06 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175SW 179C830G06 O — — KDB2175W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175W 179C809G06 O — — KDB2175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2200 179C806G07 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2200A 179C807G07 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2200S 179C827G07 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2200SA 179C828G07 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2200SW 179C830G07 O — — KDB2200W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2200W 179C809G07 O — — KDB2200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2225 179C806G08 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB22250MW 179C811G05 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB22250SMW 179C832G05 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225A 179C807G08 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

V12-T3-144 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LBB2225S 179C827G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SA 179C828G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SW 179C830G08 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225S 179C827G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SA 179C828G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SW 179C830G08 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225W 179C809G08 O — — KDB2225W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2250 179C806G09 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2250A 179C807G09 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2250S 179C827G09 O — — KDB2250 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2250SA 179C828G09 O — — KDB2250 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2250SW 179C830G09 O — — KDB2250W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2250W 179C809G09 O — — KDB2250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2300 179C806G10 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB23000MW 179C811G06 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB23000SMW 179C832G06 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2300A 179C807G10 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2300S 179C827G10 O — — KDB2300 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2300SA 179C828G10 O — — KDB2300 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2300SW 179C830G10 O — — KDB2300W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2300W 179C809G10 O — — KDB2300W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2350 179C806G11 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2350A 179C807G11 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2350SA 179C828G11 O — — KDB2350 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2350SW 179C830G11 O — — KDB2350W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2350W 179C809G11 O — — KDB2350W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400 179C806G12 O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB24000MW 179C811G07 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB24000SMW 179C832G07 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2400A 179C807G12 O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400S 179C827G12 O — — KDB2400 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2400SA 179C828G12 O — — KDB2400 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2400SW 179C830G12 O — — KDB2400W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB2400W 179C809G12 O — — KDB2400W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400WK 752B048G01 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400WSK 752B048G03 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2700MW 179C811G01 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 7–9

LBB2700SMW 179C832G01 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–5, 7–9

LBB3125 179C806G19 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31250MW 179C811G17 O — — HMCP400F5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31250SMW 179C832G17 O — — HMCP400F5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3125A 179C807G19 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3125S 179C827G19 O — — KDB3125 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3125SA 179C828G19 O — — KDB3125 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3125SW 179C830G19 O — — KDB3125W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3125W 179C809G19 O — — KDB3125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3150 179C806G20 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-145

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LBB31500MW 179C811G18 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31500SMW 179C832G18 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150A 179C807G20 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3150S 179C827G20 O — — KDB3150 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150SA 179C828G20 O — — KDB3150 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150SW 179C830G20 O — — KDB3150W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150W 179C809G20 O — — KDB3150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3175 179C806G21 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31750MW 179C811G19 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31750SMW 179C832G19 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175A 179C807G21 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3175S 179C827G21 O — — KDB3175 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175SA 179C828G21 O — — KDB3175 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175SW 179C830G21 O — — KDB3175W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175W 179C809G21 O — — KDB3175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3200 179C806G22 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3200A 179C807G22 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3200S 179C827G22 O — — KDB3200 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3200SA 179C828G22 O — — KDB3200 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3200SW 179C830G22 O — — KDB3200W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3200W 179C809G22 O — — KDB3200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3225 179C806G23 O — — KDB3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB32250MW 179C811G20 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB32250SMW 179C832G20 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225S 179C827G23 O — — KDB3225 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225SA 179C828G23 O — — KDB3225 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225SW 179C830G23 O — — KDB3225W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225W 179C809G23 O — — KDB3225W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3250 179C806G24 O — — KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3250A 179C807G24 O — — KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3250S 179C827G24 O — — KDB3250 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3250SA 179C828G24 O — — KDB3250 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3250SW 179C830G24 O — — KDB3250W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3250W 179C809G24 O — — KDB3250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3300 179C806G25 O — — KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB33000MW 179C811G21 O — — HMCP400N5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB33000SMW 179C832G21 O — — HMCP400N5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300A 179C807G25 O — — KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3300S 179C827G25 O — — KDB3300 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300SA 179C828G25 O — — KDB3300 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300SW 179C830G25 O — — KDB3300W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300W 179C809G25 O — — KDB3300W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3350 179C806G26 O — — KDB3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3350A 179C807G26 O — — KDB3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3350SA 179C828G26 O — — KDB3350 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3350W 179C809G26 O — — KDB3350W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400 179C806G27 O — — KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

V12-T3-146 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LBB34000MW 179C811G22 O — — HMCP400X5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB34000SMW 179C832G22 O — — HMCP400X5W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400A 179C807G27 O — — KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400S 179C827G27 O — — KDB3400 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400SA 179C828G27 O — — KDB3400 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400SW 179C830G27 O — — KDB3400W 1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400W 179C809G27 O — — KDB3400W 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400WK 752B048G06 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400WSK 752B048G08 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3700MW 179C811G16 O — — HMCP400D5W 1–3, 5, 7–9

LBB3700SMW 179C832G16 O — — HMCP400D5W 1–5, 7–9

LC2150F 1242C91G01 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2150FM 1242C91G03 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2300F 1242C91G05 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2300FM 1242C91G07 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2400F 1242C91G09 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2400FM 1242C91G11 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2600F 1242C91G13 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2600FM 1242C91G15 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC2600WK 752B043G03 O — — LD2600WK 1–3, 5, 8

LC3150F 1242C91G02 O HLC3150F 1284C66G02 KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3150FM 1242C91G04 O HLC3150F 1284C66G02 KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3300F 1242C91G06 O HLC3300F 2612D41G46 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3300FM 1242C91G08 O HLC3300F 2612D41G46 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3400F 1242C91G10 O HLC3400F 2613D44G08 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3400FM 1242C91G12 O HLC3400F 2613D44G08 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3600F 1242C91G14 O HLC3600F 2612D41G48 LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3600FM 1242C91G16 O HLC3600F 2612D41G48 LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

LC3600WK 752B043G08 O — — LD3600WK 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2150F 1242C91G23 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2150FM 1242C91G25 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2300F 1242C91G27 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2300FM 1242C91G29 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2400F 1242C91G31 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2400FM 1242C91G33 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2600F 1242C91G35 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA2600FM 1242C91G37 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3150F 1242C91G24 O HLCA3150F 1242C92G24 KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3150FM 1242C91G26 O HLCA3150F 1242C92G24 KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3300F 1242C91G28 O HLCA3300F 1242C92G28 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3300FM 1242C91G30 O HLCA3300F 1242C92G28 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3400F 1242C91G32 O HLCA3400F 1242C92G32 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3400FM 1242C91G34 O HLCA3400F 1242C92G34 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3600F 1242C91G36 O HLCA3600F 1284C66G36 LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCA3600FM 1242C91G38 O HLCA3600F 1284C66G36 LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCC2600WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

LCC3600F 6590C10G14 O HLCC3600F 6590C11G14 CLD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-147

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

LCC3600WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

LCCA3600F 6590C10G36 O HLCCA3600F 6590C11G36 CLD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCCG3600F 1242C93G04 O HLCCG3600F 1242C94G04 CLD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8

LCCGA3600F 1242C93G12 O HLCCGA3600F 1242C94G12 CLD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

LCG3150F 1242C88G01 O HLCG3150F 1242C89G01 KD3400F/KES3150LSG 1–3, 5, 8

LCG3300F 1242C88G02 O HLCG3300F 1242C89G02 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8

LCG3400F 1242C88G03 O HLCG3400F 1242C89G03 KD3400F/KES3400LSG 1–3, 5, 8

LCG3600F 1242C88G04 O HLCG3600F 1371D17G40 LD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3150F 1242C88G09 O HLCGA3150F 1242C89G09 KD3400F/KES3150LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3300F 1242C88G10 O HLCGA3300F 1242C89G10 KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3400F 1242C88G11 O HLCGA3400F 1242C89G11 KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3600F 1242C88G12 O HLCGA3600F 1270C61G12 LD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

LCY3600F 6590C12G04 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8

LCYA3600F 6590C12G08 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8

LCYG3600F 1242C95G04 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8

LCYGA3600F 1242C95G08 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

MA2125 1252C17G01 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8

MA2125S 1252C21G01 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8

MA2150 1252C17G02 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8

MA2150S 1252C21G02 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8

MA2175 1252C17G03 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8

MA2175S 1252C21G03 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8

MA2200 1252C17G04 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8

MA2200S 1252C21G04 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8

MA2225 1252C17G05 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8

MA2225S 1252C21G05 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8

MA2250 1252C17G06 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8

MA2250S 1252C21G06 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8

MA2300 1252C17G07 O — — MDL2300 1–3, 5, 8

MA2300S 1252C21G07 O — — MDL2300 1–5, 8

MA2350 1252C17G08 O — — MDL2350 1–3, 5, 8

MA2350S 1252C21G08 O — — MDL2350 1–5, 8

MA2400 1252C17G09 O — — MDL2400 1–3, 5, 8

MA2400S 1252C21G09 O — — MDL2400 1–5, 8

MA2500 1252C17G10 O — — MDL2500 1–3, 5, 8

MA2500S 1252C21G10 O — — MDL2500 1–5, 8

MA2600 1252C17G11 O — — MDL2600 1–3, 5, 8

MA2600S 1252C21G11 O — — MDL2600 1–5, 8

MA2700 1252C17G14 O — — MDL2700 1–3, 5, 8

MA2700S 1252C21G14 O — — MDL2700 1–5, 8

MA2800 1252C17G15 O — — MDL2800 1–3, 5, 8

MA2800F 2600D43G01 O — — MDL2800F 1–3, 5, 8

MA2800FS 2600D43G03 O — — MDL2800F 1–5, 8

MA2800S 1252C21G15 O — — MDL2800 1–5, 8

MA2800WK 752B071G01 O — — MDL2800WK 1–3, 5, 8

MA2800WSK 752B071G02 O — — MDL2800WK 1–3, 5, 8

MA3125 1252C17G16 O HMA3125 504C741G16 KD3125 1–3, 5, 8

V12-T3-148 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

MA3125S 1252C21G16 O HMA3125 504C741G16 KD3125 1–5, 8

MA3150 1252C17G17 O HMA3150 504C741G17 KD3150 1–3, 5, 8

MA3150S 1252C21G17 O HMA3150 504C741G17 KD3150 1–5, 8

MA3175 1252C17G18 O HMA3175 504C741G18 KD3175 1–3, 5, 8

MA3175S 1252C21G18 O HMA3175 504C741G18 KD3175 1–5, 8

MA3200 1252C17G19 O HMA3200 504C741G19 KD3200 1–3, 5, 8

MA3200S 1252C21G19 O HMA3200 504C741G19 KD3200 1–5, 8

MA3225 1252C17G20 O HMA3225 504C741G20 KD3225 1–3, 5, 8

MA3225S 1252C21G20 O HMA3225 504C741G20 KD3225 1–5, 8

MA3250 1252C17G21 O HMA3250 504C741G21 KD3250 1–3, 5, 8

MA3250S 1252C21G21 O HMA3250 504C741G21 KD3250 1–5, 8

MA3300 1252C17G22 O HMA3300 504C741G22 MDL3300 1–3, 5, 8

MA3300S 1252C21G22 O HMA3300 504C741G22 MDL3300 1–5, 8

MA3350 1252C17G23 O HMA3350 504C741G23 MDL3350 1–3, 5, 8

MA3350S 1252C21G23 O HMA3350 504C741G23 MDL3350 1–5, 8

MA3400 1252C17G24 O HMA3400 504C741G24 MDL3400 1–3, 5, 8

MA3400S 1252C21G24 O HMA3400 504C741G24 MDL3400 1–5, 8

MA3500 1252C17G25 O HMA3500 504C741G25 MDL3500 1–3, 5, 8

MA3500S 1252C21G25 O HMA3500 504C741G25 MDL3500 1–5, 8

MA3600 1252C17G26 O HMA3600 504C741G26 MDL3600 1–3, 5, 8

MA3600S 1252C21G26 O HMA3600 504C741G26 MDL3600 1–5, 8

MA3700 1252C17G27 O HMA3700 504C741G27 MDL3700 1–3, 5, 8

MA3700S 1252C21G27 O HMA3700 504C741G27 MDL3700 1–5, 8

MA3800 1252C17G28 O HMA3800 504C741G28 MDL3800 1–3, 5, 8

MA3800F 2600D43G02 O HMA3800F 373B237G04 MDL3800F —

MA3800FS 2600D43G04 O HMA3800F 373B237G04 MDL3800F 1–5, 8

MA3800S 1252C21G28 O HMA3800 504C741G28 MDL3800 1–5, 8

MA3800WK 752B071G06 O — — MDL3800WK 1–3, 5, 8

MA3800WSK 752B071G07 O — — MDL3800WK 1–3, 5, 8

MAY3600 NO STYLE O — — HMDL3600 —

MAY3700 NO STYLE O — — HMDL3700 —

MAY3800 NO STYLE O — — HMDL3800 —

MAY3800F 1240C54G01 O — — HMDL3800F —

MC2800F 6590C16G01 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8

MC2800FM 6590C16G03 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8

MC2800WK 752B071G03 O — — MDL2800WK 1–3, 5, 8

MC3800F 6590C16G02 O HMC3800F 6590C16G06 MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8

MC3800FM 6590C16G04 O HMC3800F 6590C16G06 MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8

MC3800WK 752B071G08 O — — MDL3800WK 1–3, 5, 8

MCA2800F 6590C16G13 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8

MCA3800F 6590C16G14 O HMCA3800F 6590C16G18 MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8

MCC2800WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

MCC3800F 6590C14G02 O HMCC3800F 6590C14G06 CMDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8

MCC3800WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

MCCA3800F 6590C14G14 O HMCCA3800F 6590C14G18 CMDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8

MCCG3800F 1242C62G01 O HMCCG3800F 1242C62G09 CMDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8

MCCGA3800F 1242C62G03 O HMCCGA3800F 1242C62G11 CMDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-149

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

MCG3800F 1242C60G01 O HMCG3800F 2612D86G08 MDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8

MCGA3800F 1270C62G03 O HMCGA3800F 1242C60G11 MDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8

MCP03150CR 2610D55G04 A — — HMCP015E0C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP03150R 2610D54G24 A — — HMCP015E0 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0322CR 2610D55G02 A — — HMCP003A0C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0322R 2610D54G22 A — — HMCP003A0 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0358CR 2610D55G03 A — — HMCP007C0C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0358R 2610D54G23 A — — HMCP007C0 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP13300CR 2610D55G05 A — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP13300R 2610D54G25 A — — HMCP030H1 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP23480CR 2610D55G06 A — — HMCP050K2C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP23480R 2610D54G26 A — — HMCP050K2 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP331000CR 2610D55G07 A — — HMCP100R3C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP331000R 2610D54G27 A — — HMCP100R3 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431550CR 2610D55G09 A — — HMCP150T4C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431550R 2610D54G28 A — — HMCP150T4 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431800CR 2610D55G08 A — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431800R 2610D54G30 A — — HMCP150U4 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP532500 752B418G21 O — — HMCP250W5 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP532500C 752B418G11 O — — HMCP250W5C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP534000 673B019G15 O HLB34000M 179C850G22 HMCP400X5 1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP534000C 673B019G21 O HLB34000M 179C850G22 HMCP400X5C 1–3, 5, 7, 8

NB21000 1234C24G15 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB21000S 1234C25G16 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–5, 8

NB21200 1234C24G17 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB21200F 2610D64G01 O — — ND212T33W —

NB21200FS 4997D20G03 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–5, 8

NB21200S 1234C25G18 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–5, 8

NB21200WK 752B682G01 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8

NB21200WSK 752B682G02 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8

NB2700 1234C24G12 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB2700S 1234C25G13 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–5, 8

NB2800 1234C24G13 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB2800S 1234C25G14 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–5, 8

NB2900 1234C25G14 O — — ND212T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB2900S 1234C25G15 O — — ND212T33W/12NES900T+ 1–5, 8

NB31000 1234C24G33 O HNB31000 177C099G33 ND312T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB31000S 1234C25G33 O HNB31000 177C099G33 ND312T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–5, 8

NB31200 1234C24G35 O HNB31200 177C099G35 ND312T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB31200F 2610D64G02 O HNB31200F 625B494G08 ND312T33W —

NB31200FS 2610D64G04 O HNB31200F 625B494G08 ND312T33W 1–5, 8

NB31200S 1234C25G35 O HNB31200 177C099G35 ND312T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–5, 8

NB31200WK 752B682G06 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8

NB31200WSK 752B682G07 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8

NB3700 1234C24G30 O HNB3700 177C099G30 ND3800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB3700S 1234C25G30 O HNB3700 177C099G30 ND3800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–5, 8

NB3800 1234C24G31 O HNB3800 177C099G31 ND3800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8

V12-T3-150 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

NB3800S 1234C25G31 O HNB3800 177C099G31 ND3800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–5, 8

NB3900 1234C24G32 O HNB3900 177C099G32 ND312T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8

NB3900S 1234C25G32 O HNB3900 177C099G32 ND312T33W/12NES900T+ 1–5, 8

NBY31000 NO STYLE O — — HND312T33W/12NES1000T+ —

NBY31200F 1240C62G01 O — — HND312T33W/12NES1200T+ —

NBY3700 NO STYLE O — — HND3800T33W/8NES700T+ —

NBY3800 NO STYLE O — — HND3800T33W/8NES800T+ —

NBY3900 NO STYLE O — — HND312T33W/12NES900T+ —

NC21200F 2613D29G10 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8

NC21200FM 2613D29G12 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8

NC21200WK 752B682G03 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8

NC31200F 2613D29G09 O HNC31200F 2613D29G05 ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8

NC31200FM 2613D29G11 O HNC31200F 2613D29G05 ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8

NC31200WK 752B682G08 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8

NCA21200F 2613D29G22 O OMIT OMIT ND312T32W 1–3, 5, 8

NCA31200F 2613D29G21 O HNCA31200F 2613D29G17 ND312T32W 1–3, 5, 8

NCG31200F 1242C72G18 O HNCG31200F 2612D87G07 ND312T35W 1–3, 5, 8

NCGA31200F 1242C72G11 O HNCGA31200F 1373D87G12 ND312T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PB21000 177C181G29 O — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB210000TM 373D488G04 O — — — 2, 8

PB21200 177C181G30 O — — RD316T33W/16RES12T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB212000TM 373D488G06 O — — — 2, 8

PB21400 177C181G31 O — — RD316T33W/16RES14T 1–3, 5, 8

PB21600 177C181G32 O — — RD316T33W/16RES16T 1–3, 5, 8

PB21800 177C181G33 O — — — —

PB22000 177C181G34 O — — RD320T33W/20RES20T 1–3, 5, 8

PB22000WK 752B076G01 O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PB22500F 654D456G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PB22500WK 752B076G02 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PB25000TM 373D487G02 O — — — 2, 8

PB2600 177C181G25 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8

PB26000TM 373D487G04 O — — — 2, 8

PB2700 177C181G26 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8

PB27000TM 373D487G06 O — — — 2, 8

PB2800 177C181G27 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8

PB28000TM 373D488G02 O — — — 2, 8

PB2900 177C181G28 O — — — —

PB31000 177C181G41 A — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB31200 177C181G42 A — — RD316T33W/16RES12T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB31400 177C181G43 A — — RD316T33W/16RES14T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB31600 177C181G44 A — — RD316T33W/16RES16T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB31800 177C181G45 A — — — —

PB32000 177C181G46 A — — RD320T33W/20RES20T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PB32000WK 752B076G12 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PB32500F 654D456G06 A — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PB32500WK 752B076G13 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PB3600 177C181G37 A — — — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-151

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

PB3700 177C181G38 A — — — —

PB3800 177C181G39 A — — RD316T33W+/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8

PB3900 177C181G40 A — — — —

PBF21000 177C771G05 O — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF210000TM 506C131G32 O — — — 2, 8

PBF21200 177C771G06 O — — RD316T33W/16RES12T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF212000TM 506C131G33 O — — — 2, 8

PBF21400 177C771G07 O — — RD316T33W/16RES14T 1–3, 5, 8

PBF21600 177C771G08 O — — RD316T33W/16RES16T 1–3, 5, 8

PBF21800 177C771G09 O — — — —

PBF22000 177C771G10 O — — RE320T33W/20RES20T 1–3, 5, 8

PBF22000F 5663D38G03 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PBF22000K PBF22000K O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PBF25000TM 506C131G28 O — — — 2, 8

PBF2600 177C771G01 O — — — —

PBF26000TM 506C131G29 O — — — 2, 8

PBF2700 177C771G02 O — — — —

PBF27000TM 506C131G30 O — — — 2, 8

PBF2800 177C771G03 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8

PBF28000TM 506C131G31 O — — — 2, 8

PBF2900 177C771G04 O — — — —

PBF31000 177C771G17 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF31200 177C771G18 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF31400 177C771G19 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF31600 177C771G20 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF31800 177C771G21 A — — — —

PBF32000 177C771G22 A — — RD320T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF32000F 5663D38G01 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PBF32000WK 752B076G13 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PBF3600 177C771G13 A — — RD316T33W/16RES08T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF3700 177C771G14 A — — RD316T33W/16RES08T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF3800 177C771G15 A — — RD316T33W/16RES08T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PBF3900 177C771G16 A — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8

PC22000F 6590C19G01 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC22000FM 6590C19G03 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC22000WK 753B081G04 O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PC22500F 6590C19G05 O — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC22500FM 6590C19G07 O — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC22500WK 752B076G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PC23000F 6590C19G09 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PC23000FM 6590C19G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PC23000K 753B081G06 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PC32000F 6590C19G02 A — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC32000FM 6590C19G04 O PC32000F 6590C19G02 RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC32000WK 753B081G15 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PC32500F 6590C19G06 A — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PC32500FM 6590C19G08 O PC32500F 6590C19G06 RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

V12-T3-152 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

PC32500WK 753B081G16 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PC33000F 6590C19G10 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PC33000FM 6590C19G12 O PC33000F 6590C19G10 — 1–3, 5, 8

PC33000K 753B081G17 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCA22000F 6590C19G17 O — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCA22500F 6590C19G21 O — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCA22500FM 6590C19G07 O — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCA23000F 6590C19G25 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCA32000F 6590C19G18 A — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCA32500F 6590C19G22 A — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCA33000F 6590C19G26 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC22000F 6590C20G01 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCC22000FM 6590C20G03 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCC22000WK 752B076G09 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC22500F 6590C20G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC22500FM 6590C20G07 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC22500WK 753B081G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC23000F 6590C20G09 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC23000FM 6590C20G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC23000K 753B081G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC32000F 6590C20G02 A — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCC32000FM 6590C20G04 O PCC32000F 6590C20G02 CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCC32000WK 753B081G20 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC32500F 6590C20G06 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC32500FM 6590C20G08 O PCC32500F 6590C20G06 — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC32500WK 753B081G21 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC33000F 6590C20G10 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC33000FM 6590C20G12 O PCC33000F 6590C20G10 — 1–3, 5, 8

PCC33000K 753B081G22 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCA22000F 6590C20G17 O — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCA22500F 6590C20G21 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCA23000F 6590C20G25 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCA32000F 6590C20G18 A — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCA32500F 6590C20G22 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCA33000F 6590C20G26 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22000F 6590C18G01 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22000FM 6590C18G03 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22500F 6590C18G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22500FM 6590C18G07 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32000F 6590C18G02 A — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32000FM 6590C18G04 O PCCF32000F 6590C18G02 CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32500F 6590C18G06 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32500FM 6590C18G08 O PCCF32500F 6590C18G06 — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFA22000F 1225C07G13 O — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFA22500F 6590C18G17 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFA32000F 6590C18G14 A — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFA32500F 6590C18G18 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-153

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

PCCFG32000F 1242C76G17 A — — CRD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFG32500F 1242C76G18 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFGA32000F 1242C78G21 A — — CRD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCFGA32500F 1242C78G22 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCG32000F 1242C75G25 A — — CRD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCG32500F 1242C75G26 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCG33000F 1242C75G27 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCGA32000F 1242C75G31 A — — CRD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PCCGA32500F 1242C75G32 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCCGA33000F 1242C75G33 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCF22000F 6590C17G01 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCF22000FM 6590C17G03 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCF22000K 753B081G08 O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PCF22500FM 6590C17G07 O — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCF32000F 6590C17G02 A — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCF32000FM 6590C17G04 O PCF32000F 6590C17G02 RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCF32000K 753B081G19 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8

PCF32500F 6590C17G06 A — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCF32500FM 6590C17G08 O PCF32500F 6590C17G06 RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFA22000F 6590C17G13 O — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFA22500F 6590C17G17 O — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFA32000F 6590C17G14 A — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFA32500F 6590C17G18 A — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFG32000F 1242C76G01 A — — RD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFG32500F 1242C76G02 A — — RD325T35W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFGA32000F 1242C76G05 A — — RD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PCFGA32500F 1242C76G06 A — — RD325T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PCG32000F 1242C75G01 A — — RD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8

PCG32500F 1242C75G02 A — — RD325T35W 1–3, 5, 8

PCG33000F 1242C75G03 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

PCGA32000F 1242C75G07 A — — RD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PCGA32500F 1242C75G08 A — — RD325T36W 1–3, 5, 8

PCGA33000F 1242C75G09 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8

RE1010 1375D81G01 O — — — 3, 10

RE1015 1375D81G02 O — — Reconditioned E1015 10

RE1020 1375D81G03 O — — Reconditioned E1020 10

RE1025 1375D81G04 O — — Reconditioned E1025 10

RE1030 1375D81G05 O — — Reconditioned E1030 10

RE1040 1375D81G07 O — — Reconditioned E1040 10

RE1050 1375D81G08 O — — Reconditioned E1050 10

RE1060 1375D81G09 O — — Reconditioned E1060 10

RE1070 1375D81G10 O — — Reconditioned E1070 10

RE1080 1375D81G11 O — — Reconditioned E1080 10

RE1090 1375D81G12 O — — Reconditioned E1090 10

RE1100 1375D81G13 O — — Reconditioned E1100 10

RE2015 1375D81G18 O — — Reconditioned E2015 10

RE2020 1375D81G19 O — — Reconditioned E2020 10

V12-T3-154 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RE2025 1375D81G20 O — — Reconditioned E2025 10

RE2030 1375D81G21 O — — Reconditioned E2030 10

RE2040 1375D81G23 O — — Reconditioned E2040 10

RE2050 1375D81G24 O — — Reconditioned E2050 10

RE2060 1375D81G25 O — — Reconditioned E2060 10

RE2070 1375D81G26 O — — Reconditioned E2070 10

RE2080 1375D81G27 O — — Reconditioned E2080 10

RE2090 1375D81G28 O — — Reconditioned E2090 10

RE2100 1375D81G29 O — — Reconditioned E2100 10

RE3015 1375D81G34 O — — Reconditioned E3015 10

RE3020 1375D81G35 O — — Reconditioned E3020 10

RE3025 1375D81G36 O — — Reconditioned E3025 10

RE3030 1375D81G37 O — — Reconditioned E3030 10

RE3040 1375D81G39 O — — Reconditioned E3040 10

RE3050 1375D81G40 O — — Reconditioned E3050 10

RE3060 1375D81G41 O — — Reconditioned E3060 10

RE3070 1375D81G42 O — — Reconditioned E3070 10

RE3080 1375D81G43 O — — Reconditioned E3080 10

RE3090 1375D81G44 O — — Reconditioned E3090 10

RE3100 1375D81G45 O — — Reconditioned E3100 10

REA1010 1375D82G01 O — — — —

REA1015 1375D82G02 O — — Reconditioned EA1015 10

REA1020 1375D82G03 O — — Reconditioned EA1020 10

REA1025 1375D82G04 O — — Reconditioned EA1025 10

REA1030 1375D82G05 O — — Reconditioned EA1030 10

REA1035 1375D82G06 O — — Reconditioned EA1035 10

REA1040 1375D82G07 O — — Reconditioned EA1040 10

REA1050 1375D82G08 O — — Reconditioned EA1050 10

REA1060 1375D82G09 O — — Reconditioned EA1060 10

REA1070 1375D82G10 O — — Reconditioned EA1070 10

REA1080 1375D82G11 O — — Reconditioned EA1080 10

REA1090 1375D82G12 O — — Reconditioned EA1090 10

REA1100 1375D82G13 O — — Reconditioned EA1100 10

REA2015 1375D82G18 O — — Reconditioned EA2015 10

REA2020 1375D82G19 O — — Reconditioned EA2020 10

REA2025 1375D82G20 O — — Reconditioned EA2025 10

REA2030 1375D82G21 O — — Reconditioned EA2030 10

REA2040 1375D82G23 O — — Reconditioned EA2040 10

REA2050 1375D82G24 O — — Reconditioned EA2050 10

REA2060 1375D82G25 O — — Reconditioned EA2060 10

REA2070 1375D82G26 O — — Reconditioned EA2070 10

REA2080 1375D82G27 O — — Reconditioned EA2080 10

REA2090 1375D82G28 O — — Reconditioned EA2090 10

REA2100 1375D82G29 O — — Reconditioned EA2100 10

REA3015 1375D82G34 O — — Use REH3015 10

REA3020 1375D82G35 O — — Use REH3020 10

REA3025 1375D82G36 O — — Use REH3025 10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-155

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

REA3030 1375D82G37 O — — Use REH3030 10

REA3040 1375D82G39 O — — Use REH3040 10

REA3050 1375D82G40 O — — Use REH3050 10

REA3060 1375D82G41 O — — Use REH3060 10

REA3070 1375D82G42 O — — Use REH3070 10

REA3080 1375D82G43 O — — Use REH3080 10

REA3090 1375D82G44 O — — Use REH3090 10

REA3100 1375D82G45 O — — Use REH3100 10

REH1010 1375D83G01 O — — — 3, 10

REH1015 1375D83G02 O — — Reconditioned EH1015 10

REH1020 1375D83G03 O — — Reconditioned EH1020 10

REH1025 1375D83G04 O — — Reconditioned EH1025 10

REH1030 1375D83G05 O — — Reconditioned EH1030 10

REH1040 1375D83G07 O — — Reconditioned EH1040 10

REH1050 1375D83G08 O — — Reconditioned EH1050 10

REH1060 1375D83G09 O — — Reconditioned EH1060 10

REH1070 1375D83G10 O — — Reconditioned EH1070 10

REH1080 1375D83G11 O — — Reconditioned EH1080 10

REH1090 1375D83G12 O — — Reconditioned EH1090 10

REH1100 1375D83G13 O — — Reconditioned EH1100 10

REH2015 1375D83G18 O — — Reconditioned EH2015 10

REH2020 1375D83G19 O — — Reconditioned EH2020 10

REH2025 1375D83G20 O — — Reconditioned EH2025 10

REH2030 1375D83G21 O — — Reconditioned EH2030 10

REH2040 1375D83G23 O — — Reconditioned EH2040 10

REH2050 1375D83G24 O — — Reconditioned EH2050 10

REH2060 1375D83G25 O — — Reconditioned EH2060 10

REH2070 1375D83G26 O — — Reconditioned EH2070 10

REH2080 1375D83G27 O — — Reconditioned EH2080 10

REH2090 1375D83G28 O — — Reconditioned EH2090 10

REH2100 1375D83G29 O — — Reconditioned EH2100 10

REH3015 1375D83G34 A — — — 3, 10

REH3020 1375D83G35 A — — — 3, 10

REH3025 1375D83G36 A — — — 3, 10

REH3030 1375D83G37 A — — — 3, 10

REH3040 1375D83G39 A — — — 3, 10

REH3050 1375D83G40 A — — — 3, 10

REH3060 1375D83G41 A — — — 3, 10

REH3070 1375D83G42 A — — — 3, 10

REH3080 1375D83G43 A — — — 3, 10

REH3090 1375D83G44 A — — — 3, 10

REH3100 1375D83G45 A — — — 3, 10

RF2015 1375D86G02 O — — Reconditioned F2015 3, 10

RF2020 1375D86G03 O — — Reconditioned F2020 3, 10

RF2025 NO STYLE O — — Reconditioned F2025 3, 10

RF2030 1375D86G05 O — — Reconditioned F2030 3, 10

RF2040 1375D86G07 O — — Reconditioned F2040 3, 10

V12-T3-156 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RF2050 1375D86G08 O — — Reconditioned F2050 3, 10

RF2060 1375D86G09 O — — Reconditioned F2060 3, 10

RF2070 1375D86G10 O — — Reconditioned F2070 3, 10

RF2080 1375D86G11 O — — Reconditioned F2080 3, 10

RF2090 1375D86G12 O — — Reconditioned F2090 3, 10

RF2100 1375D86G13 O — — Reconditioned F2100 3, 10

RF3015 1375D86G18 O RHF3015 1375D87G18 — 3, 10

RF3020 1375D86G19 O RHF3020 1375D87G19 — 3, 10

RF3025 1375D86G20 O RHF3025 1375D87G20 — 3, 10

RF3030 1375D86G21 O RHF3030 1375D87G21 — 3, 10

RF3040 1375D86G23 O RHF3040 1375D87G23 — 3, 10

RF3050 1375D86G24 O RHF3050 1375D87G24 — 3, 10

RF3060 1375D86G25 O RHF3060 1375D87G25 — 3, 10

RF3070 1375D86G26 O RHF3070 1375D87G26 — 3, 10

RF3080 1375D86G27 O RHF3080 1375D87G27 — 3, 10

RF3090 1375D86G28 O RHF3090 1375D87G28 — 3, 10

RF3100 1375D86G29 O RHF3100 1375D87G29 — 3, 10

RFA2010 1375D84G01 O — — — 3, 10

RFA2015 1375D84G02 O — — Reconditioned FA2015 3, 10

RFA2020 1375D84G03 O — — Reconditioned FA2020 3, 10

RFA2025 1375D84G04 O — — Reconditioned FA2025 3, 10

RFA2030 1375D84G05 O — — Reconditioned FA2030 3, 10

RFA2040 1375D84G07 O — — Reconditioned FA2040 3, 10

RFA2045 1375D84G16 O — — Reconditioned FA2045 3, 10

RFA2050 1375D84G08 O — — Reconditioned FA2050 3, 10

RFA2060 1375D84G09 O — — Reconditioned FA2060 3, 10

RFA2070 1375D84G10 O — — Reconditioned FA2070 3, 10

RFA2080 1375D84G11 O — — Reconditioned FA2080 3, 10

RFA2090 1375D84G12 O — — Reconditioned FA2090 3, 10

RFA2100 1375D84G13 O — — Reconditioned FA2100 3, 10

RFA2100K 1375D84G17 O — — — 3, 10

RFA3010 1375D84G21 O RHFA3010 1375D85G21 — —

RFA3015 1375D84G22 O RHFA3015 1375D85G22 — 3, 10

RFA3020 1375D84G23 O RHFA3020 1375D85G23 — 3, 10

RFA3025 1375D84G24 O RHFA3025 1375D85G24 — 3, 10

RFA3030 1375D84G25 O RHFA3030 1375D85G25 — 3, 10

RFA3040 1375D84G27 O RHFA3040 1375D85G27 — 3, 10

RFA3045 1375D84G36 O RHFA3045 1375D85G36 — 3, 10

RFA3050 1375D84G28 O RHFA3050 1375D85G28 — 3, 10

RFA3060 1375D84G29 O RHFA3060 1375D85G29 — 3, 10

RFA3070 1375D84G30 O RHFA3070 1375D85G30 — 3, 10

RFA3080 1375D84G31 O RHFA3080 1375D85G31 — 3, 10

RFA3090 1375D84G32 O RHFA3090 1375D85G32 — 3, 10

RFA3100 1375D84G33 O RHFA3100 1375D85G33 — 3, 10

RFA3100K 1375D84G37 O — — — —

RHF2015 1375D87G02 O — — Reconditioned HF2015 10

RHF2020 1375D87G03 O — — Reconditioned HF2020 10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-157

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RHF2030 1375D87G05 O — — Reconditioned HF2030 10

RHF2040 1375D87G07 O — — Reconditioned HF2040 10

RHF2050 1375D87G08 O — — Reconditioned HF2050 10

RHF2060 1375D87G09 O — — Reconditioned HF2060 10

RHF2070 1375D87G10 O — — Reconditioned HF2070 10

RHF2080 1375D87G11 O — — Reconditioned HF2080 10

RHF2090 1375D87G12 O — — Reconditioned HF2090 10

RHF2100 1375D87G13 O — — Reconditioned HF2100 10

RHF3015 1375D87G18 A — — — 10

RHF3020 1375D87G19 A — — — 10

RHF3025 1375D87G20 A — — — 10

RHF3030 1375D87G21 A — — — 10

RHF3040 1375D87G23 A — — — 10

RHF3050 1375D87G24 A — — — 10

RHF3060 1375D87G25 A — — — 10

RHF3070 1375D87G26 A — — — 10

RHF3080 1375D87G27 A — — — 10

RHF3090 1375D87G28 A — — — 10

RHF3100 1375D87G29 A — — — 10

RHFA2015 1375D85G02 O — — Reconditioned FA2015 10

RHFA2020 1375D85G03 O — — Reconditioned FA2020 10

RHFA2025 1375D85G04 O — — Reconditioned FA2025 10

RHFA2030 1375D85G05 O — — Reconditioned FA2030 10

RHFA2040 1375D85G07 O — — Reconditioned FA2040 10

RHFA2050 1375D85G08 O — — Reconditioned FA2050 10

RHFA2060 1375D85G09 O — — Reconditioned FA2060 10

RHFA2070 1375D85G10 O — — Reconditioned FA2070 10

RHFA2080 1375D85G11 O — — Reconditioned FA2080 10

RHFA2090 1375D85G12 O — — Reconditioned FA2090 10

RHFA2100 1375D85G13 O — — Reconditioned FA2100 10

RHFA2150 1375D85G15 O — — Reconditioned FA2150 10

RHFA3015 1375D85G22 A — — — 10

RHFA3020 1375D85G23 A — — — 10

RHFA3025 1375D85G24 A — — — 10

RHFA3030 1375D85G25 A — — — 10

RHFA3040 1375D85G27 A — — — 10

RHFA3050 1375D85G28 A — — — 10

RHFA3060 1375D85G29 A — — — 10

RHFA3070 1375D85G30 A — — — 10

RHFA3080 1375D85G31 A — — — 10

RHFA3090 1375D85G32 A — — — 10

RHFA3100 1375D85G33 A — — — 10

RHFA3150 1375D85G35 A — — — 10

RHK2070 1376D14G02 O — — Reconditioned HK2070 10

RHK2090 1376D14G03 O — — Reconditioned HK2090 10

RHK2100 1376D14G04 O — — Reconditioned HK2100 10

RHK2125 1376D14G05 O — — Reconditioned HK2125 10

V12-T3-158 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RHK2150 1376D14G06 O — — Reconditioned HK2150 10

RHK2175 1376D14G07 O — — Reconditioned HK2175 10

RHK2200 1376D14G08 O — — Reconditioned HK2200 10

RHK2225 1376D14G09 O — — Reconditioned HK2225 10

RHK2225K NO STYLE O — — — —

RHK3070 1376D14G22 A — — — 10

RHK3090 1376D14G23 A — — — 10

RHK3100 1376D14G24 A — — — 10

RHK3125 1376D14G25 A — — — 10

RHK3150 1376D14G26 A — — — 10

RHK3175 1376D14G27 A — — — 10

RHK3200 1376D14G28 A — — — 10

RHK3225 1376D14G29 A — — — 10

RHK3225K NO STYLE O — — — —

RHKL2125 1376D15G05 O — — Reconditioned KL2125 10

RHKL2150 1376D15G06 O — — Reconditioned KL2150 10

RHKL2175 1376D15G07 O — — Reconditioned KL2175 10

RHKL2200 1376D15G08 O — — Reconditioned KL2200 10

RHKL2225 1376D15G09 O — — Reconditioned KL2225 10

RHKL2250 1376D15G10 O — — Reconditioned KL2250 10

RHKL2300 1376D15G12 O — — Reconditioned KL2300 10

RHKL2350 1376D15G14 O — — Reconditioned KL2350 10

RHKL2400 1376D15G15 O — — Reconditioned KL2400 10

RHKL2400K NO STYLE O — — — —

RHKL3125 1376D15G25 A — — — 10

RHKL3150 1376D15G26 A — — — 10

RHKL3175 1376D15G27 A — — — 10

RHKL3200 1376D15G28 A — — — 10

RHKL3225 1376D15G29 A — — — 10

RHKL3250 1376D15G30 A — — — 10

RHKL3300 1376D15G32 A — — — 10

RHKL3350 1376D15G34 A — — — 10

RHKL3400 1376D15G35 A — — — 10

RHKL3400K NO STYLE A — — — 10

RHLM2125 1376D16G05 O — — Reconditioned LM2125 10

RHLM2150 1376D16G06 O — — Reconditioned LM2150 10

RHLM2175 1376D16G07 O — — Reconditioned LM2175 10

RHLM2200 1376D16G08 O — — Reconditioned LM2200 10

RHLM2225 1376D16G09 O — — Reconditioned LM2225 10

RHLM2250 1376D16G10 O — — Reconditioned LM2250 10

RHLM2275 1376D16G11 O — — Reconditioned LM2275 10

RHLM2300 1376D16G12 O — — Reconditioned LM2300 10

RHLM2350 1376D16G14 O — — Reconditioned LM2350 10

RHLM2400 1376D16G15 O — — Reconditioned LM2400 10

RHLM2450 1376D16G16 O — — Reconditioned LM2450 10

RHLM2500 1376D16G17 O — — Reconditioned LM2500 10

RHLM2550 1376D16G18 O — — Reconditioned LM2550 10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-159

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RHLM2600 1376D16G19 O — — Reconditioned LM2600 10

RHLM2600K 1376D16G20 O — — — —

RHLM2700 NO STYLE O — — Reconditioned LM2700 10

RHLM2800 1376D16G22 O — — Reconditioned LM2800 10

RHLM3125 1376D16G35 A — — — 10

RHLM3150 1376D16G36 A — — — 10

RHLM3175 1376D16G37 A — — — 10

RHLM3200 1376D16G38 A — — — 10

RHLM3225 1376D16G39 A — — — 10

RHLM3250 1376D16G40 A — — — 10

RHLM3275 1376D16G41 A — — — 10

RHLM3300 1376D16G42 A — — — 10

RHLM3325 1376D16G43 A — — — 10

RHLM3350 1376D16G44 A — — — 10

RHLM3400 1376D16G45 A — — — 10

RHLM3450 1376D16G46 A — — — 10

RHLM3500 1376D16G47 A — — — 10

RHLM3550 1376D16G48 A — — — 10

RHLM3600 1376D16G49 A — — — 10

RHLM3600K 1376D16G50 O — — — —

RHLM3700 1376D16G51 A — — — 10

RHLM3800 1376D16G52 A — — — 10

RJ2070 1376D10G02 O — — Reconditioned J2070 3, 10

RJ2090 1376D10G03 O — — Reconditioned J2090 3, 10

RJ2100 1376D10G04 O — — Reconditioned J2100 3, 10

RJ2125 1376D10G05 O — — Reconditioned J2125 3, 10

RJ2150 1376D10G06 O — — Reconditioned J2150 3, 10

RJ2175 1376D10G07 O — — Reconditioned J2175 3, 10

RJ2200 1376D10G08 O — — Reconditioned J2200 3, 10

RJ2225 1376D10G09 O — — Reconditioned J2225 3, 10

RJ2225K NO STYLE O — — — —

RJ3070 1376D10G22 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3090 1376D10G23 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3100 1376D10G24 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3125 1376D10G25 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3150 1376D10G26 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3175 1376D10G27 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3200 1376D10G28 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3225 1376D10G29 A — — — 3, 10

RJ3225K NO STYLE O — — — —

RK2070 1376D11G02 O — — Reconditioned K2070 3, 10

RK2090 1376D11G03 O — — Reconditioned K2090 3, 10

RK2100 1376D11G04 O — — Reconditioned K2100 3, 10

RK2125 1376D11G05 O — — Reconditioned K2125 3, 10

RK2150 1376D11G06 O — — Reconditioned K2150 3, 10

RK2175 1376D11G07 O — — Reconditioned K2175 3, 10

RK2200 1376D11G08 O — — Reconditioned K2200 3, 10

V12-T3-160 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RK2225 1376D11G09 O — — Reconditioned K2225 3, 10

RK2225K 1376D11G10 O — — — —

RK3070 1376D11G22 O RHK3070 1376D14G22 — 3, 10

RK3090 1376D11G23 O RHK3090 1376D14G23 — 3, 10

RK3100 1376D11G24 O RHK3100 1376D14G24 — 3, 10

RK3125 1376D11G25 O RHK3125 1376D14G25 — 3, 10

RK3150 1376D11G26 O RHK3150 1376D14G26 — 3, 10

RK3175 1376D11G27 O RHK3175 1376D14G27 — 3, 10

RK3200 1376D11G28 O RHK3200 1376D14G28 — 3, 10

RK3225 1376D11G29 O RHK3225 1376D14G29 — 3, 10

RK3225K 1376D11G30 O — — — —

RKL2125 1376D12G05 O — — Reconditioned L2125 3, 10

RKL2150 1376D12G06 O — — Reconditioned L2150 3, 10

RKL2175 1376D12G07 O — — Reconditioned L2175 3, 10

RKL2200 1376D12G08 O — — Reconditioned L2200 3, 10

RKL2225 1376D12G09 O — — Reconditioned L2225 3, 10

RKL2250 1376D12G10 O — — Reconditioned L2250 3, 10

RKL2275 NO STYLE O — — — 3, 10

RKL2300 1376D12G12 O — — Reconditioned L2300 3, 10

RKL2350 1376D12G14 O — — Reconditioned L2350 3, 10

RKL2400 1376D12G15 O — — Reconditioned L2400 3, 10

RKL2400K NO STYLE O — — — —

RKL3125 1376D12G25 O RHKL3125 1376D15G25 — 3, 10

RKL3150 1376D12G26 O RHKL3150 1376D15G26 — 3, 10

RKL3175 1376D12G27 O RHKL3175 1376D15G27 — 3, 10

RKL3200 1376D12G28 O RHKL3200 1376D15G28 — 3, 10

RKL3225 1376D12G29 O RHKL3225 1376D15G29 — 3, 10

RKL3250 1376D12G30 O RHKL3250 1376D15G30 — 3, 10

RKL3300 1376D12G32 O RHKL3300 1376D15G32 — 3, 10

RKL3350 1376D12G34 O RHKL3350 1376D15G34 — 3, 10

RKL3400 1376D12G35 O RHKL3400 1376D15G35 — 3, 10

RLM2125 1376D13G05 O — — Reconditioned LM2125 3, 10

RLM2150 1376D13G06 O — — Reconditioned LM2150 3, 10

RLM2175 1376D13G07 O — — Reconditioned LM2175 3, 10

RLM2200 1376D13G08 O — — Reconditioned LM2200 3, 10

RLM2225 1376D13G09 O — — Reconditioned LM2225 3, 10

RLM2250 1376D13G10 O — — Reconditioned LM2250 3, 10

RLM2275 1376D13G11 O — — Reconditioned LM2275 3, 10

RLM2300 1376D13G12 O — — Reconditioned LM2300 3, 10

RLM2350 1376D13G14 O — — Reconditioned LM2350 3, 10

RLM2400 1376D13G15 O — — Reconditioned LM2400 3, 10

RLM2500 1376D13G17 O — — Reconditioned LM2500 3, 10

RLM2600 1376D13G19 O — — Reconditioned LM2600 3, 10

RLM2600K 1376D13G20 O — — — —

RLM2700 1376D13G21 O — — Reconditioned LM2700 3, 10

RLM3150 1376D13G36 O RHLM3150 1376D16G36 — 3, 10

RLM3175 1376D13G37 O RHLM3175 1376D16G37 — 3, 10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-161

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)Catalog Number Style Number MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number

RLM3200 1376D13G38 O RHLM3200 1376D16G38 — 3, 10

RLM3225 1376D13G39 O RHLM3225 1376D16G39 — 3, 10

RLM3250 1376D13G40 O RHLM3250 1376D16G40 — 3, 10

RLM3275 1376D13G41 O RHLM3275 1376D16G41 — 3, 10

RLM3300 1376D13G42 O RHLM3300 1376D16G42 — 3, 10

RLM3350 1376D13G44 O RHLM3350 1376D16G44 — 3, 10

RLM3400 1376D13G45 O RHLM3400 1376D16G45 — 3, 10

RLM3500 1376D13G47 O RHLM3500 1376D16G47 — 3, 10

RLM3600 1376D13G49 O RHLM3600 1376D16G49 — 3, 10

RLM3600K 1376D13G50 O — — — —

RLM3700 1376D13G51 O RHLM3700 1376D16G51 — 3, 10

RLM3800 1376D13G52 O RHLM3800 1376D16G52 — 3, 10

V12-T3-162 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements

Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)

Mining and 1000V

Catalog Number Style Number

MARK 75

Catalog Number

Style Number

1227C36G09 1227C36G09 O 1227C36G11 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G10 1227C36G10 O 1227C36G12 E2N310W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G11 1227C36G11 A — E2NM312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G12 1227C36G12 A — E2NM310W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G13 1227C36G13 O — E2N310WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G14 1227C36G14 O — E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G19 1227C36G19 O — E2N312MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G15 1227C37G15 O — E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G16 1227C37G16 O — E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G17 1227C37G17 O 1227C36G12 E2N310W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G18 1227C37G18 O 1229C37G19 E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G19 1227C37G19 O — E2N310WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G21 1227C37G21 O — E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G22 1227C37G22 O 1227C36G12 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G23 1227C37G23 O 1229C37G20 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G27 1227C37G27 O — E2N312MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G28 1227C37G28 O 1229C37G18 E2N312MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G01 1228C81G01 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G02 1228C81G02 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G03 1228C81G03 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G04 1228C81G04 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G01 1228C82G01 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G02 1228C82G02 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G03 1228C82G03 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G04 1228C82G04 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G13 1229C37G13 O — E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G14 1229C37G14 O — E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G15 1229C37G15 O 1229C37G19 E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G16 1229C37G16 O — E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G17 1229C37G17 O 1227C37G28 E2N312MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G18 1229C37G18 A — E2NM312MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G19 1229C37G19 A — E2NM310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G20 1229C37G20 A — E2NM312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G12 1259C52G12 O — E2FM050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G13 1259C52G13 O — E2FM050KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G14 1259C52G14 O — E2FM100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G15 1259C52G15 O — E2FM150TM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G16 1259C52G16 O — E2FM050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G17 1259C52G17 O — E2FM100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G03 1278C71G03 O 5685D48G87 E2KE3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G04 1278C71G04 O 5685D48G86 E2KE3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G07 1278C71G07 O — E2KE3225WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G08 1278C71G08 O — E2KE3225WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G11 1278C71G11 O — E2KE3225MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G12 1278C71G12 O — E2KE3225MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C72G02 1278C72G02 O 5685D48G85 E2KE34002W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-163

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements

Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)

Mining and 1000V

Catalog Number Style Number

MARK 75

Catalog Number

Style Number

1278C72G04 1278C72G04 O — E2KE34002WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C72G06 1278C72G06 O — E2KE3400M2W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G01 1278C73G01 O — E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G02 1278C73G02 O — E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G03 1278C73G03 O 5685D48G84 E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G04 1278C73G04 O 2609D60G28 E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G05 1278C73G05 O — E2N3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G07 1278C73G07 O — E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G08 1278C73G08 O 5685D48G83 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G09 1278C73G09 O 2609D60G29 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G11 1278C73G11 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G12 1278C73G12 O 2609D60G57 E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G13 1278C73G13 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G14 1278C73G14 O 2609D60G58 E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G01 1284C67G01 O 1284C68G01 E2KE3150W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G02 1284C67G02 O 1284C68G02 E2KE3150WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G03 1284C67G03 O 1284C68G03 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G04 1284C67G04 O 1284C68G04 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G05 1284C67G05 O 1284C68G05 E2LE3300W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G06 1284C67G06 O 1284C68G06 E2LE3300WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G07 1284C67G07 O 1284C68G07 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G08 1284C67G08 O 1284C68G08 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G09 1284C67G09 O 1284C68G09 E2LE3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G10 1284C67G10 O 1284C68G10 E2LE3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G11 1284C67G11 O 1284C68G11 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G12 1284C67G12 O 1284C68G12 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G01 1284C68G01 A — E2KEM3150W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G02 1284C68G02 A — E2KEM3150WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G03 1284C68G03 A — E2KEM3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G04 1284C68G04 A — E2KEM3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G05 1284C68G05 A — E2KEM3400W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G06 1284C68G06 A — E2KEM3400WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G07 1284C68G07 A — E2KEM3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G08 1284C68G08 A — E2KEM3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G09 1284C68G09 A — E2LEM3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G10 1284C68G10 A — E2LEM3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G11 1284C68G11 A — E2LEM3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G12 1284C68G12 A — E2LEM3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G01 1284C80G01 O 1284C68G01 E2KE3150W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G02 1284C80G02 O 1284C68G02 E2KE3150WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G03 1284C80G03 O 1284C68G03 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G04 1284C80G04 O 1284C68G04 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G05 1284C80G05 O 1284C68G05 E2LE3300W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G06 1284C80G06 O 1284C68G06 E2LE3300WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G07 1284C80G07 O 1284C68G07 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G08 1284C80G08 O 1284C68G08 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

V12-T3-164 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements

Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)

Mining and 1000V

Catalog Number Style Number

MARK 75

Catalog Number

Style Number

1284C80G09 1284C80G09 O 1284C68G09 E2LE3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G10 1284C80G10 O 1284C68G10 E2LE3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G11 1284C80G11 O 1284C68G11 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G12 1284C80G12 O 1284C68G12 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C81G01 1284C81G01 O 1284C83G01 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C81G02 1284C81G02 O 1284C83G02 E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C81G03 1284C81G03 O 1284C83G03 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C81G04 1284C81G04 O 1284C83G04 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G01 1284C82G01 O 1284C83G01 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G02 1284C82G02 O 1284C83G02 E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G03 1284C82G03 O 1284C83G03 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G04 1284C82G04 O 1284C83G04 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G01 1284C83G01 A — E2NM3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G02 1284C83G02 A — E2NM3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G03 1284C83G03 A — E2NM3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G04 1284C83G04 A — E2NM3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G01 1291C26G01 O — E2K3225AWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G02 1291C26G02 O — E2K3225DWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G03 1291C26G03 O 1291C26G12 E2K3225AWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G04 1291C26G04 O 1291C26G13 E2K3225DWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G05 1291C26G05 O 1291C26G14 E2K3400MAWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G06 1291C26G06 O 1291C26G15 E2K3400MDWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G07 1291C26G07 O — E2K3400MAWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G08 1291C26G08 O 1291C26G16 E2K3400MAWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G12 1291C26G12 A — E2KEM3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G13 1291C26G13 A — E2KEM3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G14 1291C26G14 A — E2KEM3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G15 1291C26G15 A — E2KEM3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G16 1291C26G16 A — E2KEM3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G17 1291C26G17 O — E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G18 1291C26G18 O — E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G19 1291C26G19 O 1291C26G12 E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G20 1291C26G20 O 1291C26G13 E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G21 1291C26G21 O — E2KE3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G22 1291C26G22 O 1291C26G15 E2KE3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G01 1291C32G01 O — E2LE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G02 1291C32G02 O 1291C32G07 E2LE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G03 1291C32G03 O OMIT E2LE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G04 1291C32G04 O 1291C32G09 E2LE3400MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G05 1291C32G05 O — E2KE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G06 1291C32G06 O 1291C32G07 E2KE34002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G07 1291C32G07 A — E2KEM34002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G08 1291C32G08 O 1291C32G09 E2KE3400M2WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G09 1291C32G09 A — E2KEM3400M2WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G01 1366D21G01 O — E2F030EM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G02 1366D21G02 O — E2F050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-165

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements

Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)

Mining and 1000V

Catalog Number Style Number

MARK 75

Catalog Number

Style Number

1366D21G03 1366D21G03 O — E2F050YM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G04 1366D21G04 O — E2F100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G05 1366D21G05 O — E2F100KMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G06 1366D21G06 O — E2F050YM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G07 1366D21G07 O — E2F100KMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G08 1366D21G08 O — E2F030EM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G09 1366D21G09 O — E2F030EM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G10 1366D21G10 O — E2F030EMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G11 1366D21G11 O — E2F030EMS22+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G12 1366D21G12 O — E2F030EMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G13 1366D21G13 O — E2F030EM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G14 1366D21G14 O — E2F3030 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G15 1366D21G15 O — E2F3030U62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G16 1366D21G16 O — E2F3030S22 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G17 1366D21G17 O — E2F050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G18 1366D21G18 O — E2F100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G19 1366D21G19 O — E2F100KM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G20 1366D21G20 O — E2F100KMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G22 1366D21G22 O — E2F100KMS22+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G23 1366D21G23 A — E2F100KM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G24 1366D21G24 A — E2F100KMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G27 1366D21G27 O — E2F100KMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G28 1366D21G28 O — E2F3100 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G29 1366D21G29 O — E2F3100U62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G30 1366D21G30 A — E2F100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G31 1366D21G31 A — E2F100KMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G32 1366D21G32 A — E2F100KMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G33 1366D21G33 O — E2F3100S22 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G34 1366D21G34 O — E2F050YMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G35 1366D21G35 O — E2F050YM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G36 1366D21G36 O — E2F050YMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G37 1366D21G37 O — E2F050YMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G38 1366D21G38 A — E2F050YMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G39 1366D21G39 A — E2F050YM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

V12-T3-166 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements

Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)

Mining and 1000V

Catalog Number Style Number

MARK 75

Catalog Number

Style Number

1366D21G40 1366D21G40 A — E2F050YMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G41 1366D21G41 A — E2F050YMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G42 1366D21G42 A — E2F030EMU62+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G43 1366D21G43 O — E2F100KMS22+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G44 1366D21G44 A — E2F100KMS22+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G45 1366D21G45 O — E2F100RMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G46 1366D21G46 O — E2F3015U62 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G13 1373D88G13 O 1373D89G09 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G14 1373D88G14 O 1373D89G10 E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G15 1373D88G15 O 1373D89G11 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G16 1373D88G16 O 1373D89G12 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G17 1373D88G17 O 1373D89G09 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G18 1373D88G18 O 1373D89G10 E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G19 1373D88G19 O 1373D89G11 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G20 1373D88G20 O 1373D89G12 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D89G09 1373D89G09 A — E2NM312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D89G10 1373D89G10 A — E2NM312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D89G11 1373D89G11 A — E2NM312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D89G12 1373D89G12 A — E2NM312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2600D43G11 2600D43G11 O 1264C99G03 — —

2600D43G12 2600D43G12 O 1264C99G03 — —

2600D43G14 2600D43G14 O 1264C99G03 — —

2602D86G11 2602D86G11 O 1264C99G05 — —

2602D86G12 2602D86G12 O 1264C99G05 — —

2602D86G13 2602D86G13 O 1264C99G05 — —

2602D86G14 2602D86G14 O 1264C99G05 — —

2602D99G05 2602D99G05 O 1264C99G02 — —

2602D99G06 2602D99G06 O 1264C99G02 — —

2602D99G07 2602D99G07 O 1264C99G02 — —

2602D99G08 2602D99G08 O 1264C99G02 — —

2603D48G07 2603D48G07 O 2603D48G09 — —

2603D48G08 2603D48G08 O 2603D48G09 — —

2609D60G01 2609D60G01 O — E2K3225AWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G02 2609D60G02 O — E2K3225DWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G03 2609D60G03 O — E2LE3400WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G04 2609D60G04 O — E2N3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G05 2609D60G05 O — E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G08 2609D60G08 O — E2FM100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G09 2609D60G09 O — E2FM100KMU13 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G10 2609D60G10 O — E2FM050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G17 2609D60G17 O — E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G18 2609D60G18 O — E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G19 2609D60G19 O — E2N3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G20 2609D60G20 O 2609D60G29 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-167

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

Note

1O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Replacement Breaker

Status 1

Replacements

Notes

(See Page V12-T3-114)

Mining and 1000V

Catalog Number Style Number

MARK 75

Catalog Number

Style Number

2609D60G28 2609D60G28 A — E2LEM36002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G29 2609D60G29 A — E2NM3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G40 2609D60G40 O — E2K3400MAW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G41 2609D60G41 O — E2K3400MDW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G44 2609D60G44 O — E2LE3400MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G46 2609D60G46 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G47 2609D60G47 O — E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G48 2609D60G48 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G49 2609D60G49 O 2609D60G58 E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G57 2609D60G57 A — E2NM3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G58 2609D60G58 A — E2NM312MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G61 2609D60G61 O — E2LE3400MWS86 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G63 2609D60G63 O — E2LE34002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G64 2609D60G64 O — E2K3400MAW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G66 2609D60G66 O — E2K3400MAWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G67 2609D60G67 O 2609D60G70 E2K3400MAW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G69 2609D60G69 O — E2K3400MAWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G70 2609D60G70 A — E2KEM3225MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2610D64G07 2610D64G07 O 2610D64G13 — —

2610D64G08 2610D64G08 O 2610D64G13 — —

2610D64G09 2610D64G09 O 2610D64G13 — —

2610D64G10 2610D64G10 O 2610D64G13 — —

5685D48G45 5685D48G45 O — E2FM100KMU13+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G71 5685D48G71 O 5685D48G83 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G72 5685D48G72 O 5685D48G84 E2N3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G73 5685D48G73 O 5685D48G85 E2LE3400W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G74 5685D48G74 O 5685D48G86 E2K3225DW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G75 5685D48G75 O 1291C26G12 E2K3225AW 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G83 5685D48G83 A — E2NM3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G84 5685D48G84 A — E2LEM36002W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G85 5685D48G85 A — E2KEM34002W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G86 5685D48G86 A — E2KEM3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G87 5685D48G87 A — E2KEM3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G88 5685D48G88 O — E2FM100KM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G89 5685D48G89 O — E2FM050YM+

625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G90 5685D48G90 O — E2FM050YMU13 1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D99G06 2609D99G06 O — — —

5685D48G42 5685D48G42 O — — —

5685D48G36 5685D48G36 O — — —

5685D48G30 5685D48G30 O — — —

5685D48G24 5685D48G24 O — — —

5685D48G18 5685D48G18 O — — —

5685D48G12 5685D48G12 O — — —

5685D48G06 5685D48G06 O — — —

V12-T3-168 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE Discount Symbol RCB-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-1

Panelboards

Westinghouse PRL3

4 Panelboards

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-2

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-3

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-4

CDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-9

FDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-10

PB/PH/PH-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-11

MP40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-12

EE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-13

EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-14

PRL1 and PRL2 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-15

PRL1a and PRL2a Panelboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-15

PRL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-16

PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-17

PRL4B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-18

PRL4F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-19

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-20

Surge Protection Device—SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-20

Pow-R-Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-20

Panelboard Retrofits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-21

Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R Renovation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-21

Product Support Services—Satellite Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-22

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-22

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-22

V12-T4-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Product Description

Panelboards and switchboards

are enclosed assemblies for

lighting and distribution that

accept incoming power and

consist of a series of circuit

breakers and/or fusible

switches. These devices

protect each circuit by

providing overcurrent and

short-circuit protection.

Product History

In 1994, Eaton acquired

the Distribution and Control

Business Unit (DCBU) of

Westinghouse and integrated

it with their Cutler-Hammer®

business unit forming a

powerful new combination.

This product history tracks the

evolution of panelboard and

switchboard products for

both manufacturers.

In the 1920s, prior to the

development of circuit

breakers, Westinghouse

sold panelboards designed

for main and branch circuit

fuses. Circuit breakers were

first introduced in 1927 and

put Westinghouse in the

forefront of circuit breaker

technology. A few years later

the first Westinghouse

“NOFUSE” circuit

breakers

were introduced. “NOFUSE”

panelboards were initially

available in ratings up to 225A

at 250V. Panelboards were

designed at higher ratings as

circuit breakers’ ratings

became available. By 1958,

panelboards were available at

ratings up to 800A and 600V.

The most significant

panelboard types were the

CDP and FDP panels. For

more than 34 years, these

two types encompassed

most Westinghouse molded-

case circuit breakers and

fusible switches.

In 1962, Eaton’s electrical

business entered the

panelboard and switchboard

market with the purchase of

Mullenbach. Soon after the

Mullenbach acquisition,

Cutler-Hammer entered

into an agreement with

Westinghouse to supply

breakers and fusible

devices for panelboards

and switchboards, and Eaton

also began manufacturing

Westinghouse-type

panelboards under the

agreement. This relationship

made in the early 1960s

provided users of both trade

name products access to

aftermarket service for

add-on branch devices and

hardware. Classic Cutler-

Hammer panelboards and

switchboards were designed

and listed for use with

Westinghouse breakers.

In 1988, Westinghouse

redesigned the panelboard

and switchboard line

to incorporate the new

Series C® design breakers.

This new design became

a true family of products.

These new panelboards and

switchboards became today’s

Pow-R-Line® family, which

are manufactured in state-of-

the-art facilities strategically

located throughout the

United States.

Eaton’s unique Satellite

Plants support aftermarket

services for all current

Pow-R-Line panelboard

and switchboard products.

Aftermarket service for out-

of-production panelboards

and switchboards for both

the classic Westinghouse

and Cutler-Hammer

designs is supported

by the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC,

(see Page V12-T4-22), and

is staffed with experienced

and knowledgeable

representatives.

Cutler-Hammer NFB

Cutler-Hammer MP40

Cutler-Hammer CHB

Cutler-Hammer EE

Westinghouse FDP

Westinghouse Pow-R-Line 3

Westinghouse WEB

Westinghouse CDP

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-3

Panelboards

Product History Time Line

Westinghouse A2B

Westinghouse NM/NMM

Westinghouse NA1B

Westinghouse NLAB

Westinghouse NAB

Westinghouse ABH

Westinghouse NDP

Cutler-Hammer CDP

Westinghouse CDP/FDP

Westinghouse NQB/NQC/NQP

Westinghouse NEB/NHEB

Westinghouse WCA/WEB/WEHB/

WFB/WGB/WGHB

Cutler-Hammer CHP/CHB

Cutler-Hammer NFB

Cutler-Hammer MP40/MP100

Westinghouse B10B/Q10P

Cutler-Hammer PB

Cutler-Hammer PH

Cutler-Hammer EE

Westinghouse W10B/W10P

Cutler-Hammer EP

Westinghouse PRL3

Westinghouse PRL1, PRL2

Cutler-Hammer PRL1a, 2a

Cutler-Hammer PRL3a

Westinghouse PRL4B, F

Cutler-Hammer PRL5P

ProductPage 1935 1940 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

V12-T4-7

V12-T4-4

V12-T4-7

V12-T4-4

V12-T4-5

V12-T4-7

V12-T4-5

V12-T4-6

V12-T4-7

V12-T4-6

V12-T4-8

V12-T4-5

V12-T4-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement

Capabilities

How to Select

Replacement Breakers

A complete line of new,

UL® Listed products,

physically and electrically

interchangeable molded-

case circuit breakers is

offered by Eaton.

To properly select the

breaker for your existing

panelboard:

1. Identify the panel

type and the existing

branch breaker.

2. Select the appropriate

breaker from the direct

replacement solution

column. As shown, three

options are available.

Option 1: Series C

breakers are available as

direct replacement for

installation in Cutler-

Hammer panelboards.

They are available at

your local distributors

and are the most

economical solution.

Option 2: Original,

but still-in-production

breakers, (sometimes

referred to as replace-

ment breakers) are

available from Eaton

national warehouses.

These are identical

to the existing

branch breakers.

Option 3: Panelboard

replacement breakers,

available for out-of-

production molded-

case breakers, are

physically and electrically

interchangeable with

the existing breaker.

Available in three-pole

only. Refer to Pages

V12-T3-80 through

V12-T3-87 for further

information.

3. For additional information,

contact Avery Creek, NC,

Technical Resource

Center at 1-800-356-1243

or your local Eaton

Satellite plant.

Original Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart

Notes

1New breakers that are a direct physical and electrical replacement for out-of-production breakers. Available in three-pole only.

See Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87 for further information.

2Connectors not available.

3Not rated for 100% rated breakers.

Cutler-Hammer

Panelboard Type

Original Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New

Panelboard Type

New

Breaker

Panelboard

Replacement Breaker 1

CHP 2CH PRL1a CH —

CHB 2 CHB PRL1a CHB —

NPLAB 2PPRL1a— —

NLAB 2QL PRL1a — —

NA1B 2E PRL3a — REH

EA PRL3a — REH

NH1B 2EH PRL3a — REH

NDP 2 E PRL3a — REH

EA PRL3a — REH

HNDP 2EH PRL3a — REH

NFB EB PRL3a or PRL4B EHD —

EHB PRL3a or PRL4B EHD —

EHC PRL3a or PRL4B FD —

EC PRL3a or PRL4B EHD —

CA PRL3a or PRL4B CA —

CC PRL3a or PRL4B CC —

FB PRL3a or PRL4B FD —

HFB PRL3a or PRL4B FD —

FD PRL3a or PRL4B FD —

FC PRL3a or PRL4B FD —

FH PRL3a or PRL4B HFD —

FS PRL3a or PRL4B FD —

HFC PRL3a or PRL4B HFD —

CCH PRL3a or PRL4B — —

CHH PRL3a or PRL4B CHH —

CDP 3 E PRL4B — REH

EA PRL4B — REH

EH PRL4B — REH

EB PRL4B EHD —

EHB PRL4B EHD —

F PRL4B — RHF

FA PRL4B — RHFA

HF PRL4B — RHF

HFA PRL4B — RHFA

FB PRL4B FDB —

HFB PRL4B FD —

CA PRL4B CA —

DA PRL4B DK —

JA PRL4B KDB —

KA PRL4B KD —

HKA PRL4B HKD —

HK PRL4B — RHK

HKL PRL4B — RHKL

LA PRL4B LD —

HLA PRL4B LD —

LAB PRL4B LDB —

LM PRL4B — RHLM

HLM PRL4B — RHLM

MA PRL4B MDL —

HMA PRL4B MDL —

NB PRL4B ND —

HNB PRL4B ND —

CC PRL4B CC —

CCH PRL4B — —

CHH PRL4B CHH —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-5

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Original Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Breaker

Replacement Chart, continued

Notes

1See also Page V12-T4-12.

2See also Page V12-T4-11.

3Connectors not available.

Cutler-Hammer

Panelboard Type

Original Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New

Panelboard Type

New

Breaker

MP40 1 CC PRL4B ED

CCH PRL4B —

CHH PRL4B ED

EB PRL4B EHD

EHB PRL4B EHD

EC PRL4B EHD

EHC PRL4B FD

FB PRL4B FDB

HFB PRL4B FD

FC PRL4B FDB

HFC PRL4B HFD

FH PRL4B HFD

FS PRL4B FD

JA PRL4B KDB

JB PRL4B JB

JS PRL4B HJD

JH PRL4B HJD

JL PRL4B JDC

KA PRL4B KD

KB PRL4B JD

HKB PRL4B JD

KS-D PRL4B KD

KH-D PRL4B KD

DA PRL4B DK

LA PRL4B LD

HLA PRL4B LD

LAB PRL4B LDB

LB PRL4B KD

LBB PRL4B KDB

HLB PRL4B KD

Cutler-Hammer

Panelboard Type

Original Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New

Panelboard Type

New

Breaker

MP40 1 LC PRL4B LD

LS (A) PRL4B LD

LH (A) PRL4B HLD

MA PRL4B MDL

HMA PRL4B MDL

MC PRL4B MDL

HMC PRL4B MDL

MS PRL4B MDL

MH PRL4B MDL

NB PRL4B ND

HNB PRL4B ND

NC PRL4B ND

HNC PRL4B ND

NS PRL4B ND

NH PRL4B ND

MP100 M50

Fusible switch

PRL4F M50

Fusible switch

PH 2 CH PRL3a CH

CHB PRL3a CHB

CC PRL3a CC

CCH PRL3a CCH

CHH PRL3a CHH

EB PRL3a EHD

EHB PRL3a EHD

EC PRL3a EHD

EHD PRL3a EHD

FC PRL3a FD

FS PRL3a FD

FH PRL3a HFD

FD PRL3a FD

PB 23 CH PRL1a CH

CHB PRL1a CHB

V12-T4-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Plug-In Power Panelboards and Switchboards

Notes

1Not rated for 100% rated breakers.

2See also Page V12-T4-13.

3See also Page V12-T4-14.

Cutler-Hammer

Panelboard Type

Original Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New

Panelboard Type

New

Breaker

EE 12 FS PRL5P FD

FH PRL5P HFD

FL PRL5P HDC

JS PRL5P JD

JH PRL5P HJD

JL PRL5P JDC

KS PRL5P KD

KH PRL5P HKD

LS PRL5P LD

LS(A) PRL5P LD

LS(E) PRL5P LD

LH(B) PRL5P HLD

LH(A) PRL5P HLD

LL(E) PRL5P LDC

LS(B) PRL5P LD

LH(E) PRL5P HLD

MS PRL5P MDL

NS PRL5P ND

MH PRL5P —

CC PRL5P CC

CCH PRL5P —

CHH PRL5P CHH

Cutler-Hammer

Panelboard Type

Original Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New

Panelboard Type

New

Breaker

EP 13 FS PRL5P FD

FH PRL5P HFD

FL PRL5P FDC

JS PRL5P JD

JH PRL5P HJD

JL PRL5P JDC

KS PRL5P KD

KH PRL5P HKD

LS PRL5P LD

LS(A) PRL5P LD

LS(E) PRL5P LD

LH(B) PRL5P HLD

LH(A) PRL5P HLD

LL(E) PRL5P LDC

LS(B) PRL5P LD

LH(E) PRL5P HLD

MS PRL5P MDL

NS PRL5P ND

MH PRL5P —

NH PRL5P HND

CC PRL5P CC

CCH PRL5P —

CHH PRL5P CHH

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-7

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Original Westinghouse Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart

Notes

1Not rated for 100% rated breakers.

Available in three-pole only. See

Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87

for further information.

2Connectors not available.

3See also Page V12-T4-9.

4Only breakers of the same frame size

can be installed across from each other

(i.e., in the same horizontal plane).

For other configurations, contact the

Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

5Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

6KD breakers can be mounted across from

LB breakers if a TAD3 line side adapter

is used. All hardware works with

this configuration.

7See also Page V12-T4-10.

Westinghouse

Panelboard Type

Existing Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New Panelboard Type New Breaker Panelboard Replacement Breaker 1

Panelboards Manufactured Between 1937 and 1988

ABH 2 E PRL3a — REH

A2B 2 E PRL3a — REH

B10B 2 BA PRL1a BAB —

B10B-LX 2 BA PRL1aLX BAB —

B10B-LXX 2 BA PRL1aLX BAB —

B65B 2 HBA PRL1a — HBAW, HBAX

CDP/HCDP 23 E, EA, EH, F, FA PRL4B — REH, RHF, RHFA

CDP/HCDP 34 EB, EHB, EHD, FB, HFB, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC PRL4B EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 5

FB-P TRI-PAC PRL4B FB-P TRI-PAC 5

JB, KB, HKB, JDB, JD, HJD, JDC PRL4B JDB, JD, HJD, JDC 5

CA, CAH, HCA PRL4B ED, EDH, EDC 5

DA, LB, LBB, HLB 6PRL4B 65

JA, KA, HKA, DK, KD, HKD, KDC PRL4B DK, KD, HKD, KDC 5

LA, LAB, HLA (400A) PRL4B LD, HLD 5

LA-P TRI-PAC PRL4B LA-P TRI-PAC 5

LA, LC, HLA (600A) PRL4B LD, HLD, LDC 5

MA, HMA, MC, HMC PRL4B MDL 5

LCL PRL4B LCL 5

NB, HNB, NC, HNC PRL4B ND, HND 5

NB-P TRI-PAC®PRL4B NB-P TRI-PAC 5

FDP 7 Fusible switches PRL4F — Fusible switches

H10P 2 HQP PRL2a HQP —

H10B 2 BA PRL2a BAB —

NAB 2 E PRL3a — REH

NA1B 2 E PRL3a — REH

NDP 2 E, EA, EAH PRL3a — REH

NEB 2 EA PRL3a — REH

NHDP 2 EH PRL3a — REH

NHEB 2 EH, FA PRL3a — REH, RHFA

NH1B 2 E-277 PRL2a — REH

NLAB 2 QC PRL1a — —

NLAB-LX 2 QC PRL1aLX — —

NLAB-AB 2 QC PRL3a — —

NLAB-ABH 2 QC PRL3a — —

NPLAB 2 QP PRL1a HQP —

NPLAPQ 2 QP PRL1a HQP —

NQC 2 QC PRL1a — —

NQB 2 BA PRL1a BAB —

NQP 2 QP PRL1a HQP —

Q10P 2 QP PRL1a HQP —

Q22P 2 QPH PRL1a QPHW —

Q22B 2 QBH PRL1a QBHW —

Q65P 2 HP PRL2a QHPW —

W10B 2 BA PRL1a BAB —

W10P 2 HQP PRL1a HQP —

W22B 2 QBH PRL1a QBHW —

W22P 2 QPH PRL1a QPHW —

WCA CA PRL3a CA —

WEB EB PRL3a EB, EHD —

WEHB EHB PRL3a EHB, EHD —

WFB FB PRL3a FB, FDB —

WGB 2 GB PRL2a GB —

WGHB 2 GHB PRL2a GHB —

V12-T4-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Original Westinghouse Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart, continued

Notes

1See also Page V12-T4-15.

2See also Page V12-T4-16.

3See also Page V12-T4-17.

4See also Page V12-T4-18.

5See also Page V12-T4-19.

6400A, 600A, 800A, 1200A, FDP connectors are NOT compatible with FDPW switches.

Westinghouse

Panelboard Type

Original Branch

Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions

New Panelboard Type New Breaker Panelboard Replacement Breaker

Panelboards Manufactured After 1988

PRL1 1BAB, QBHW PRL1a 1BAB, QBHW —

HQP, QPHW PRL1a 1BAB, QBHW —

PRL2 1GB, GHB, GHBS PRL2a 1GB, GHB, GHBS-D —

PRL3 2BAB, QBH PRL3a 3BAB, QBHW —

GB, GHB, GHBS PRL3a 3GB, GHB, GHBS-D —

EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC PRL3a 3EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC —

ED, EDH, EDC PRL3a 3ED, EDH, EDC —

CA, HCA, CAH PRL3a 3ED —

PRL4B 4EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC PRL4B EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC —

ED, EDH, EDC PRL4B ED, EDH, EDC —

CA, CAH, HCA PRL4B CA, CAH, HCA —

FCL, FB-P, FDB/LFB PRL4B FCL, FB-P, FDB/LFB —

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC PRL4B JD, JDB, HJD, JDC —

DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC PRL4B DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC —

LCL PRL4B LCL —

LA-P TRI-PAC PRL4B LA-P TRI-PAC —

LC, HLC, LA, HLA PRL4B LC, HLC, LA, HLA —

LD, HLD, LDC, MD, MDS, ND, HND, NDC PRL4B LD, HLD, LDC, MDL, ND, HND, NDC —

MC, HMC, MA, HMA PRL4B MC, HMC, MA, HMA —

NC, HNC, NB, HNB PRL4B NC, HNC, NB, HNB —

NB-P TRI-PAC PRL4B NB-P TRI-PAC —

BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF, GB, GHB PRL4B BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF, GB, GHB —

PRL4F 5Fusible switches 6PRL4F — Fusible switches

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-9

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

CDP

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Westinghouse CDP

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers into your

existing CDP panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

circuit breakers.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

breaker needed for the

required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●1600A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400002E

for a

complete list of available

parts including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

CDP Panel Layout

Notes

1When only one EB, EHB or HFB single-pole breaker is required in conjunction with other

frame size breakers, the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X.

2Must use three-pole connector kit.

7-1/2"

Solid Neutral Bar

13X

225A

400A

600A

800A

1200, 1600A

Thru-Feed Lugs

225A

250–400A

600, 800A

10X

13X

17X

Total Number of Poles

13X

15X

17X

19X

21X

23X

30" Wide Box

5" 5"

9" 9"

8" 8"

11" 11"

12X

225A

250–400A

600A

800, 1200, 1600A

7-1/2"

Main Lug

Section

2- or 3-Pole

MC, HMC

LCL

NC, HNC

2- or 3-Pole

LC, HLC

2- or 3-Pole

LC, HLC

2- or 3-Pole

LBB, LB

HLB

2- or 3-Pole

LBB, LB

HLB

2- or 3-Pole

JB, KB, HKB

2- or 3-Pole

JB, KB, HKB

3-Pole

CA, CAH

3-Pole

CA, CAH

2-Pole

CA, CAH

2-Pole

CA, CAH

2- and 3-Pole

HFB

3-Pole EB

EHB, FB

3-Pole

EHB, FB

2-Pole EB

EHB, FB

2-Pole EB

EHB, FB

1-Pole EB

EHB, HFB

1-Pole EB

EHB, HFB

2- and 3-Pole

HFB

30" Wide Box

48" Wide Box

One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm).

Blank llers are required for unused X space.

V12-T4-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

FDP

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Westinghouse FDP

The panel layouts shown

on this and the following

pages will aid in determining

the space available for the

addition of fusible switches

into your existing FDP

panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

fusible switches.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

fusible switch needed for

the required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●1600A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Fusible Switches

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400002E

for a

complete list of available

parts including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

FDP Panel Layout

FDP and CDP Bus Dimensions

Top Gutter

13X

225A

400A

600A

800A

1200, 1600A

225A

250–400A

600A

800, 1200, 1600A

12X

7-1/2"

Solid

Neutral

Bar

30A

60A

100A

30A

60A

100A

2P, 3P

240 Vac

250 Vdc

Side Gutters Tables F and G

2P, 3P

240V or

600 Vac

250 Vdc

Main or Branch

200A

(Horizontal Mounted)

2P, 3P

600 Vac

30A

60A

30A

60A

100A 10 0A

2P, 3P

240 or

600 Vac

250 Vdc

Side Gutters Tables B and C

Main or Branch

400 or 600A

(Horizontal Mounted)

Main or Branch

800 or 1200A

(Horizontal Mounted)

Main or Branch

800 or 1200A

(Vertical Mounted)

11X

16X

21X

Main Lug

Section

Bottom Gutter

7-1/2"

One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm).

Blank llers are required for unused X space.

Vertical Busbar

1.38" TYP.

3.50"3.50"

Mounting Rails 19.50"

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-11

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

PB/PH/PH-L

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

15 or 21 Inches Wide

Cutler-Hammer PB

21 or 26 Inches Wide

Cutler-Hammer PH

21 Inches Wide

Cutler-Hammer PH-L

Ratings

●PB

400A maximum

●PH

800A main lug only or

600A main breaker

●PH-L

225A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400003E for a

complete list of available

parts including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

V12-T4-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

MP40

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

Cutler-Hammer MP40

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers into your

existing MP40 panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

circuit breakers.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

breakers needed for the

required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●1600A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts data

RP01400003E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

MP40 Panel Layout

Notes

1If the panelboard has a main breaker, no neutral, no split bus, or no sub-feed or feed-through

lugs, add 1X to provide space for a nameplate.

2Breakers of the same frame size, regardless of poles, may be mounted opposite of each other.

3Only Type NC and HNC breakers require a 11.38-inch (289.1 mm) deep box. Standard box

depth is 10.50 inches (266.7 mm).

4When 1600A lug mains are for (4)–600 kcmil maximum copper cables per phase, the X unit

space can be reduced to 4X.

Top Gutter

6.50" through 400A

12.0" 600–1600A

None

225–

1200A

1600A

Neutral

Nameplate

/

1P EB

EHB, HFB

1P EB

EHB, HFB

2P EC

EHC, FC

2P EC

EHC, FC

3P EC, EMC,

FC, 2P or

3P HFB

3P EC, EMC,

FC, 2P or

3P HFB

2P CC

CCH

5" Side Gutters

3P CC, CCH,

2P or 3P

JB, KB, HKB

2P or 3P

DA, LBB,

LB, HLB

2P or 3P

LA, HLA,

LC, HLC

This space is

not usable

when C.B. to

left is used

as a main

0

8-1/2" 8-1/2"

2P or 3P

MC, HMC

2P or 3P

NC, HNC

1

Main

Lugs

225,

600A

800,

1200A

1600A

2

Bottom Gutter

6.50" up through 400A

12.0" 600–1600A

26" Wide

38" Wide

30" Wide

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-13

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

Cutler-Hammer EE Panelboard

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers and fusible

switches into your existing

EE panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

replacement devices.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

replacement device

needed for the required

ampere rating and number

of poles

Ratings

●1200A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers and

Fusible Switches

Refer to renewal parts data

RP01400003E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

EE Panelboard Panel Layout

Notes

1Main device must be mounted at neutral end of double-bus panel.

2May be used in 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide single bus interiors.

Neutral—No X Space

(May Be At Bottom)

48"

42"

7" 7"

10" Gutter

10X 10X

20X

400–600A Main Switch



400–600A Branch Switch

10X 10X

7X 7X

10"10"

14X

1200A Lug Unit

/

200A Branch Switch

(600V With R Fusing)

20X

800A Main Switch

800A Branch Switch

8X 8X

6X 6X

600A



Branch

Lug Unit

600A



Branch

Lug Unit

12X

MS, MH Main Breaker

NS, NH Main Breaker

LS, LH

Breaker

LS, LH

0

Breaker

6X 6X

6X 5X

3X 3X

4X 4X

7X 8X

200A Branch

Switch

240V—R&T Fuse

600V—T-Fuse Only

400A



Branch

Lug Unit

100A

Branch

Switch

KS, KH

0

Breaker

KS, KH

Breaker

30A, 60A

Branch

Switch

CC, CCH, CHH

FS, FH, JS, JH, JL

CC, CCH, CHH

FS, FH, JS, JH, JL

12X

MS, MH

Main Breaker

10" Gutter

V12-T4-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

Cutler-Hammer EP Panelboard

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers into your

existing EP panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

circuit breakers.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

breaker needed for the

required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●1200A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts data

RP01400003E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

EP Panelboard Panel Layout

Notes

1Blank wireway fillers are required opposite any dual breaker unit or adapter.

2May be used in 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide single bus interiors.

3Main device must be mounted at neutral end of double-bus panel.

Neutral—No X Space

Top or Bottom

42"

10"

2X 2X

3X 3X

2-Pole FS, FH, FL,

CC, CCH, CHH

2-Pole FS, FH, FL,

CC, CCH, CHH

3-Pole FS, FH, FL,

CC, CCH, CHH

3-Pole FS, FH, FL,

CC, CCH, CHH

2P FS, FH,

CC, CCH 2P FS, FH,

CC, CCH

2P FS, FH,

CC, CCH 2P FS, FH,

CC, CCH

Blank Wireway /

2-Pole

CHH 2-Pole

CHH

3-Pole

CHH 3-Pole

CHH

3-Poles

FS, FH,

CC, CHH

2X 2X

3X 3X

3-Poles

FS, FH,

CC, CHH

3 Poles

JS, JH, JL 2-3 Pole

LSB, LHB, LLB, LC

6X6X 12X

800A MS, MH, MC

Main Breaker 1

Filler Plate

6X6X

12X

800A MS, MH, MC, HMC

Branch Breaker

6X6X 12X

1200A NS, NH, NC, HNC

Branch or Main Breaker 1

10" 10"

10"

48"

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-15

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

PRL1 and PRL2 Panelboards

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

PRL2 with Trim

Ratings

●600A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts data

RP01400002E

for a complete

list of available parts including

branch device bus connectors

mounting hardware. For

further information, contact

the Aftermarket Center

in Sumter, SC. Refer to

Page V12-T4-22.

PRL1a and PRL2a

Panelboards

Current Product

PRL1a

Ratings

●400A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400001E and

RP01414001E for a complete

list of available parts including

branch device bus connectors

and mounting hardware.

Renewal parts are available

from your Eaton Satellite plant.

Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

V12-T4-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

PRL3

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Westinghouse PRL3

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers into your

existing PRL3 panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

circuit breakers.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

breaker needed for the

required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●600A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts data

RP01400002E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Contact the Aftermarket

Center in Sumter, SC

(see Page V12-T4-22).

PRL3 Panel Layout

Notes

1If panel contains only BAB or QBH branch breakers, use a PRL1 panelboard.

2BAB and QBH breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e.; one-pole

is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size.

3GB and GHB breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB or QBH.

4If panel contains only GB or GHB branch breakers, use a PRL2 panelboard.

5Not recommended for motor loads. Use JD circuit breaker.

6Horizontally mounted 15–150A main breakers EHD, FDB, FD, HFD and FDC will

be furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch breakers one, two or three poles as

required, may be located opposite these main breakers.

7FBP and LAP top mounting only.

8100% rated breaker.

9LCL main breaker requires 6.50-inch (165.1 mm) deep box.

No Neutral

Neutral Section

Sub Chassis

400A Maximum

Bus Rating

2X 100–600A

2X 100, 225A

8X 400, 600A

Poles

10X-12

13X-18

15X-24

17X-30

19X-36

21X-42

BAB/0

QBH/

GB12

GHB12

(100A Max.)

1-Pole

2-Pole

3-Pole

2- and 3-Pole

Main Lug

Section

Horizontal

Mounting

Main

Breaker

Section

Vertically

Mounted

FDB

HFD

FDC

EHD (100A Max.)

3X CA, CAH, HCA 3

(225A Max.)

2X 100, 225A

7X 400, 600A

3X 2P EHD (100A Max.) 4

3X 2P FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 4

(150A Max.)

4X 3P EHD (100A Max.) 4

4X 3P FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

(150A Max.) 4

4X 2P and 3P CA, CAH, HCA 4

(225A Max.)

7X EHD (100A Max.)

7X FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

(150A Max.)

9X CA, CAH

(225A Max.)

9X FCL, FB-P 5

(100A Max.)

14X JD, JDB, HJD, JDC

(250A Max.)

14X DK, KD, KDB, HKD,

KDC (400A Max.)

19X LC, HLC, LA

(600A Max.)

22X LCL 6, LA-P 7

(400A Max.)

(150A Max.)

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-17

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

PRL3a

Current Product

PRL3a

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers into your

existing PRL3a panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

circuit breakers.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

breaker needed for the

required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●600A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400001E a

RP01414001E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Retrofit kits and renewal

parts are available from

your Eaton Satellite plant.

Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

PRL3a Panel Layout

Main Lugs

10.00" 3.92"

Neutral

10X

11X

3.92" 3.92"

(1)–1P

(2)–1P

(3)–1P

(1)–1P

(1)–2P

(1)–1P

(2)–1P

(3)–1P

(1)–3P

4.01" 4.01"

BAB–5.70" BAB–5.70"

GHB–5.68" GHB–5.68"

Split Bus

Meter Loop

ASCO

920

(Split Bus)

QUICKLAG

GHB

Twin

Subfeed

Breaker

Single Subfeed

Breaker

Through Feed

Lugs Size Per MLO Size Chart

Not Available With Subfeed Breaker

Size Per Main Breaker Layout

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC, 250A Max.

Same Cable Size as MLO

Bus Connected

6 Ckt.

12 Ckt.

18 Ckt.

24 Ckt.

BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF 100A Max.

GB, GHB 100A Max.

Note:

May Have Multiple Sections

Per Panel, Max. 24 Ckts. Per

Section.

225A Max.

100A Max.

ASCO 920 (30–225A)

For Lug Size See Main

Lug Size Chart

20X

10X

12X

19X

16X

EHD 100A Max.

FD, HFD, FDC, FDB 150A Max.

ED, EDH, EDC

Note:

225A Max.

Line Side May Be Either Left or

Right. Distance From Load Side of

Breaker To Box Will Always Be 3.92 inches

Same Cable Size as MLO

100A Std #14–1/0

250A Std #6–350 kcmil

400A Std (2) 4/0–500

600A Std (2) 4/0–500

100A Oversized #6–350 kcmil

250A Oversized 4/0–500 kcmil

400A Oversized (2) 3/0–750 kcmil

600A Oversized (2) 3/0–750 kcmil

100A Subfeed (2) #14–1/0

250A Subfeed (2) #6–350 kcmil

4.01" 4.01"

Cable Connected

(Wireout)

V12-T4-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

PRL4B

Current Product (Originally a

Westinghouse Product)

PRL4B

The panel layouts shown on

this and the following pages

will aid in determining the

space available for the

addition of molded-case

circuit breakers into your

existing PRL4B panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

circuit breakers.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

breaker needed for the

required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●1200A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Breakers

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400001E

and

RP01414001E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Retrofit kits and renewal

parts are available from

your Eaton Satellite plant.

Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

PRL4B Panel Layout

Notes

1Maximum amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 140A.

2GB and GHB breakers cannot be mixed on the same subchassis as BAB or QBHW.

3When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis, the single-pole breaker

space required changes from 1X to 2X.

Filler

Sub Panel/

400 A Maximum

Bus Rating

2 or 3P

Load

2 or 3P

2 or 3P 2 or 3P

44" Wide Box

36" Wide Box

24" Wide Box

11X

16X

20X

Poles

Breaker To Fusible

Transition, All Widths

BAB

QBGF

EHD 1 100 A Max.

FDB, FD1

HFD, FDC1

QBH

QBHGF

GB0

GHB0

100 A Max.

225 A Max.

CA, CAH, HCA 225 A Max.

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 250 A Max.

FCL, FB-P 100 A Max.

LC, LCC, HLC,

HLCC, LCY, LD,

LDB, HLD, LDC, LA

DK, KD, KDB

HKD, KDC 400 A Max.

600 A Max.

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 250 A Max.

LCL, LA-P, 400 A Max.

MC, MCC, HMC,

HMCC, MCY, MA 800 A Max.

NC, HNC,

NB, NCY 1200 A Max.

400 A Max.

NB-P 800 A Max.

DK, KD, KDB,

HKD, KDC

24" Wide Box

36" Wide Box

44" Wide Box

One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm).

Blank llers are required for unused X space.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-19

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

PRL4F

Current Product (Originally a

Westinghouse Product)

PRL4F

The panel layouts shown

on this and the following

pages will aid in determining

the space available for the

addition of fusible switches

into your existing PRL4F

panelboards.

●Determine the amount

of space available in the

panelboard for adding

fusible switches.

1.38 inches (35.1 mm)

of panel height =

one X space

●Determine the type of

fusible switch needed for

the required ampere rating

and number of poles

Ratings

●1200A maximum

Replacement Capabilities

Fusible Switches

Refer to renewal parts

data RP01400001E

and

RP01414001E for a complete

list of available parts

including branch device

retrofit kits, which include

the device, as well as, the

bus connectors and the

required mounting hardware.

Retrofit kits and renewal

parts are available from

your Eaton Satellite plant.

Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

PRL4F Panel Layout

36" Wide Box

44" Wide Box

Fusible To Breaker

Transition, All Widths

30A

60A

30A

60A

100A

250V Max.

100A

250V Max.

100A

36" Wide Box

200A

Main or Branch

Switch

11X

100A

600 Vac

100A

600 Vac

400 or 600A

Branch Switch

400 or 600A

Main or Branch Switch

44" Wide Box

800 or 1200A

Branch Switch 16X

V12-T4-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Technology Upgrades

Surge Protection Devices—

SPD Series

Eaton SPD Series—

Surge Protection Device

The Eaton SPD Series of

surge protection products

ensures that equipment is

protected with the safest,

most reliable and most

advanced UL 1449 3rd

Edition certified surge

protectors. The array of

features, options and

configurations ensures

that there is a unit for

all electrical applications,

including service entrances,

distribution switchboards,

panelboards and point-of-use

applications. Field installation

is required.

Benefits

●The SPD Series can be

externally mounted to

existing distribution

equipment

●Surge ratings: 50, 80, 100,

120, 160, 200, 250, 300

and 400 kA

●Standard NEMA 1

enclosure, optional

NEMA 4 and 4X

●Surface or flush mounting

●Full range of diagnostic

and monitoring options

●Remote mountable

display panel

●Available with optional

internal disconnect

For more information about

the SPD Series surge

protection, contact your local

Eaton Field Sales office.

Pow-R-Command™

Pow-R-Command Lighting Control

Eaton’s Pow-R-Command is

a family of microprocessor-

based lighting control systems

designed for today’s modern

facilities. They may be used as

a standalone, or networked for

the control of lighting and

other branch circuits.

Existing facilities can be

retrofitted to include various

Pow-R-Command scenarios

allowing customers varying

degrees of control. For more

information on upgrading

your building to include the

energy savings and control

of Pow-R-Command lighting

control systems, contact your

local Eaton Field Sales office.

System Features

●Day/Date/Time of Day

scheduling

●Holiday scheduling—

up to 30 days/year

●Astronomical time

scheduling

●Real-time clock

●Hardware diagnostics

●Off warning by

blinking lights

●Manual load override

control

●Brownout and power

failure recovery

●Telephone override

of schedules

●Switch override of

schedules

●Remote access to system

●Dimming systems for

fluorescent fixtures

●Priority load management

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-21

Panelboards

Replacement Capabilities

Panelboard Retrofits

Type PRL1a

Another Custom-Assembled

Panelboard Capability from

Your Local Eaton Satellite

Save time and money when

upgrading and expanding

existing electrical services

by using existing panelboard

enclosures and conduit runs.

Retrofitting existing

panelboards can be an

effective solution for:

●Providing additional circuits

for load growth

●Replacing obsolete

equipment

●Upgrading protective

device interrupting ratings

●Accommodating system

change and additions

●Adding ground fault circuit

interrupters

●Adding lighting controls

●Adding surge protection

devices

The unique capabilities of

the Eaton Satellite plants can

provide special configurations

to meet the special needs

encountered in retrofit

applications.

Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R

renovation panelboards,

or custom-built panelboard

interiors and trims can be

provided to retrofit most

any manufacturer’s existing

panelboard enclosure.

Armed with the necessary

information about the existing

installation and the needed

upgrade, the professional

staff at your local Satellite

plant can offer the assistance

and application support to

ensure an accurate quotation

and on-time delivery of a

quality retrofit product.

Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R

Renovation Panel

Product Description

●240 and 480 Vac

●Single-phase three-wire or

single-phase two-wire

●Three-phase three-wire or

three-phase four-wire

●225A maximum

●100A maximum

branch breakers

●Fits existing box depths

from 4.50 to 6.00 inches

(114.3 to 152.4 mm) deep

●Integrally mounted

neutral assembly

●Ground bar and bonding

conductor included

●Neutral and ground

convertible from left-right

●Bolt-on branch breakers

●Factory assembled—

custom and standard

trims available

Application Description

●Lighting and appliance

branch panelboards

●Fully rated or series rated

●Interrupting capacities to

100 kA symmetrical

●Suitable for use as service

entrance equipment where

specified on the order

Standards and Certifications

●UL 67

●Federal Specification

W-P-115c

●CSA® C22.2 No. 29

The Pow-R-Line 1R and

2R retrofit panelboard is

designed specifically for use

in the

renovation of existing

electrical systems.

This

innovative solution employs a

chassis design that enables

the use of the existing back

box, conduit and cables. An

exclusive depth-adjusting

mechanism and an integrated

trim assembly provides for

fast, trouble-free

mounting of

the new panelboard interior

into any existing enclosure.

The panelboard chassis is

designed for the use of main

lugs or a main breaker and

can accommodate 18, 30 or

42 branch circuits.

Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Chassis

Chassis Features

Designed to accommodate

minimal box widths at

14.00 inches (355.6 mm).

Innovative telescoping chassis

accommodates depths from

4.50 to 6.00 inches (114.3 to

152.4 mm) without the need

for box modifications.

Universal mounting locations

allow the neutral and grounds

to be relocated from top to

bottom or left to right side of

back plate.

High quality laser cut trim

with lock.

Trim and door mount directly

to the chassis assembly.

Concealed trim hardware is

not dependent on back box

for mounting.

Refer to publication

CA01417001E for

complete information.

V12-T4-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards

Satellite Locations

Product Support Services

Satellite Locations

Further Information Pricing Information

Price List for MP40 and MP-200—PL01400003E

Price List for PB, PH, PH-L, EP and EE—PL01400003E

Price List for CDP/HCDP, FDP, PRL1-LX, PRL1, PRL2 and

PRL3—PL01400002E

Price List for PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL4B, PRL4F and

PRL5P—PL01400001E

Discount Symbol CE9

Raleigh

9400 Globe Center Drive

Suite 121

Morrisville, NC 27560

(919) 544-7074

Fax (919) 572-9751

Atlanta

7000 Highlands Parkway SE

Suite 102

Smyrna, GA 30082

(678) 309-4260

Fax (770) 433-1863

Cleveland

12875 Corporate Drive

Parma, OH 44130

(216) 433-0 6 16

Fax (216) 433-0545

Dallas

631 Westport Parkway

Suite 100

Grapevine, TX 76051

(817) 251-6797

Fax (817) 251-6249

Denver

2450 Airport Boulevard

Unit C, Dock 8

Aurora, CO 80011

(303) 366-2080

Fax (303) 366-9993

Baltimore

7451 Coca Cola Drive

Suite C

Hanover, MD 21076

(410) 796-7777

Fax (410) 796-7755

Houston

10810 West Little York

Suite 100

Houston, TX 77041

(713) 939-9696

Fax (713) 939-0427

Los Angeles

11120 Philadelphia Street

Mira Loma, CA 91752

(951) 685-5788

Fax (951) 685-3775

Orlando

9436 South Ridge Park Court

Suite 100

Orlando, FL 32819

(407) 264-9306

Fax (407) 264-9310

San Francisco

20923 Cabot Boulevard

Hayward, CA 94545

(510) 784-8981

Fax (510) 784-8980

Seattle

1604 15th Street SW

Suite 114

Auburn, WA 98001

(253) 833-5021

Fax (253) 833-5058

St. Louis

56 Soccer Park Road

Fenton, MO 63026

(636) 717-3445

Fax (636) 717-3505

Hartford

40A International Drive

Windsor, CT 06095

(860) 298-1305

Fax (860) 298-1306

Phoenix

921 South Park Lane

Suite 1

Tempe, AZ 85281

(480) 449-4222

Fax (480) 449-4223

Sumter

(803) 481-6843

The Eaton satellite concept is unique to the industry and

remains the only manufacturer to provide this service. Eaton

manufactures and delivers standard and custom assembled

panelboards and switchboards within days. A phone call is all

that is necessary for immediate order entry.

Main manufacturing plant.

New Jersey

96 Stemmers Lane

Westampton, NJ 08060

(609) 835-4230

Fax (609) 835-4777

Chicago

220 Windy Point Drive

Glendale Heights, IL 60139

(630) 260-6303

Fax (630) 690-7453

Publication

Number Description

RP01400003E Renewal Parts Data for MP40 and MP-200

RP01400003E Renewal Parts Data for PB, PH, PH-L, EP and EE

RP01400002E Renewal Parts Data for CDP/HCDP, FDP, PRL1-LX, PRL1, PRL2 and PRL3

RP01400001E Renewal Parts Data for PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL4B, PRL4F and PRL5P

RP01414001E Panelboard Renewal Parts Supplement

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-1

Loadcenters

BR Renovation and CH Loadcenters

5Loadcenters

Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-2

Type CH Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-2

Type BR Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-2

Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-3

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-3

Type CH Replacement Parts and Mechanical Interlocks. . . . . . . . . V12-T5-4

Type CH Vintage Replacement Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-10

Type BR Replacement Parts and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-12

Classified Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-20

Type CL and CHQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-20

Type CHNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-20

Type CTL and CHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-20

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-21

Renovation Loadcenter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-21

Plug-On Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-22

Retrofit Interiors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-23

Surge Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-25

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-26

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-26

V12-T5-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Product Description

Loadcenters are enclosed

assemblies used for power

distribution and circuit

protection in residential,

commercial and light

industrial applications.

The assembly consists

of an enclosure, an interior

assembly and a cover. The

interior assembly consists

of a backpan where the bus

assembly is mounted.

Incoming power is

terminated at main lugs or a

main circuit breaker. Load

circuit protection is provided

by molded-case circuit

breakers that plug onto the

bus assembly. Loadcenters

are used on services

providing no more than

240 Vac, and are available

with bus rated from 40 to

600A. Loadcenter covers

are available as surface,

flush or combination.

Product History

Type CH Family

Eaton’s electrical business

began manufacturing the CH

series of loadcenters and

circuit breakers in 1962.

Changes have occurred over

the years due to code

changes, UL® listed

requirements

and product

enhancements. Three major

design changes occurred in

1969, 1982 and 1995. The

3/4-inch wide feeder circuit

breakers, silver flash plated

copper bus, sandalwood (tan)

painted box and industry-

leading warranties have

been the trademarks of this

premium product through

the years.

Type BR Family

With the acquisition of

Westinghouse’s Distribution

and Control Business Unit

(DCBU)

in 1994, Eaton

gained the circuit

breaker

and loadcenter manufacturing

and marketing operations of

Westinghouse. Prior to 1989,

these products were

manufactured by

Westinghouse’s Bryant

subsidiary in Bridgeport, CT.

The products from this facility

bore the Westinghouse and

Bryant nameplates. In 1988,

Westinghouse purchased

Challenger Electric,

redesigned the product, and

moved all production from

Bridgeport to Jackson, MS.

As Eaton integrated the

product lines in 1995, all

loadcenter production shifted

to the Lincoln, IL, facility.

Type CH Loadcenter

Extra 1.50-Inch (38.1 mm)

Knockout for Bundling

Provides for easier installation,

less installation time.

Top or Bottom Feed

■Straight-in wiring saves labor and material

■Only one panel for either application—

no modifications necessary

Commercial Grade Main Breaker

■35 kAIC series rated main breaker in

150 and 200A loadcenters

■42 and 100 kAIC series ratings available

Steel Backpan

■Provides positive, reliable breaker mounting

■One-piece designed for stability

One-Piece Silver Flash Plated Copper Bus

Provides superior conductivity throughout the

entire product line.

Drywall Marking on Enclosure

Indicates proper mounting depth for

flush applications.

Single Keyhole Mounting

Just one keyhole at top and bottom

for easier mounting and leveling.

Unique Sandalwood Finish

Immediately recognizable,

aesthetically appealing, scratch-

resistant powder coating.

Neutral Design

(for styles as indicated)

■Bonding strap is easily removable

for sub-panel applications

providing a ground and neutral

■Factory-bonded for service

entrance applications providing

a split neutral

■Ample additional 2/0 lugs

provided; no kits necessary

■200% size neutral

Separately Packaged Covers

■Full line of “true” surface and

combination covers

■Built-in flush leveling feature

■Choice of circuit identification by

breaker labels or circuit directory

Improved Endwall Knockouts

Larger KOs are balanced to enhance

installed appearance and to ease

use of existing wiring.

Convertible Styles Available

■Uses field-installable main breaker or main

lug kits

■Flexible inventory—same breaker is used in

loadcenter and circuit breaker enclosures

“Tangential” Center Knockout for

easier installation

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-3

Loadcenters

Product History Time Line

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product—3/4-Inch Non-Interchangeable Product Line

Originally a Westinghouse Product—1-Inch Interchangeable Product Line

Replacement Capabilities

Notes

1CH and BR are the current product designations. CH1, CH2, BR1, BR2 and BR3 are used only to identify previous generations of the product described in the replacement capabilities chart above.

These are not actual product designations.

2Catalog number of loadcenter required to obtain correct part.

Type Loadcenter Generations

Part 2CH CH1 CH2 BR BR1 BR2 BR3

Breakers ■■■■■■■

Surge arresters ■■■■■■■

Covers ■■ ■■

Deadfronts (NEMA® 3R) ■■ ■■

Door assemblies (NEMA 3R) ■■ ■■

MCB kits ■■ ■■

Neutral bars ■■■■■■■

Ground bars ■■■■■■■

Breaker accessories ■■■■■■■

Labels ■■■■■■■

Lugs ■■ ■■

Door locks ■■■■

Door latches ■■

Paint ■■■■■■■

Closure plates ■■■■■■■

Hubs ■■ ■■

Spare parts kit ■■

Whole house AC surge protection ■■■■■■■

Door latch is tan plastic, twin neutrals,

CH8_S or F. (Blank is 1 letter indicating

box size, i.e., B, C, E, J, K.)

Metal latch, single neutral, CH7_S

or F. (Blank is 2 letters indicating box

size, i.e., BB, CC, JJ, KK.)

Cover catalog numbers CH7_S or F.

(Blank is 1 letter indicating box size,

i.e., B, C, D, 3, G, J, K.)

V12-T5-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Type CH Replacement Parts

Mechanical Interlocks

Note

1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

Description Ordering Quantity 1Catalog Number

Subfeed lug blocks—two-pole, 125A, 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) spaces needed 1 CHSF2125

Subfeed lug blocks—three-pole, 125A, 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) spaces needed 1 CHSF3125

Neutral/ground lug—add-on neutral or ground lug 1 NL20

1NL30

1NL300

Filler plates—3/4-inch (19.1 mm) space circuit breaker space 25 CHFP

CSR main circuit breaker filler plate (with hardware) 1 CSRFP

Door lock—12–42 circuits, and 100–225A 1 TDL

Sandlewood spray paint 1 SPCSW

ANSI-61 light gray touchup paint for outdoor loadcenters 1 SPC61

Isolated neutral assembly (computer circuits) 1 BINA

Circuit directory—adhesive backed 10 TCD

Cover screws 25 LCCS

Cover replacement latch 14-5/16 inch (363.55 mm) wide loadcenters only 1 CHRLS

Circuit marking strip (next to breakers) 10 CHMS

Circuit identification label (preprinted breaker labels next to breakers) 25 CHBL

Series rated caution label 25 SRL

Branch circuit numbering strip 20 CHNS

Bonding strap with screw 1 BSSUSE

125A retainer bracket for sub-fed devices 1 CH125RB

Replacement lock 400A devices 1 52-2751

Replacement latch for NEMA 3R—four circuits and above 1 CH3RLATCH

Lock for vintage CH7 cover 1 CH9FL

Type

Fits Loadcenter

Catalog Numbers

Mechanical Interlock Panel Cover Catalog Number

Flush Surface

A CH12L125B, CH16L125B, CH12L3125B, CH14B100B CH8BFM CH8BSM

CH20L125C, CH24L125C, CH18L3125C, CH24L3125C, CH22B100C, CH22N100C CH8CFM CH8CSM

CH24L150D, CH32L150D, CH24L3225D, CH30L3150D CH8DFM CH8DSM

CH42L225G, CH42L3225G CH8GFM CH8GSM

Inner cover of Box B raintight —CH8BRM

Inner cover of Box C raintight — CH8CRM

B CH24B150E, CH24B200E CH8EFM CH8ESM

CH32B150J, CH32B200J, CH3242B200J, CH32N200J, CH32B225J CH8JFM CH8JSM

CH42B200K, CH42N200K, CH42B225K CH8KFM CH8KSM

CHPC32B150L, CHPC32B200L, CHPC32N200L CHPC8B32LFM —

CHPC42B150L, CHPC42B200L, CHPC42N200L CHPC8B42LFM —

CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF, CH8N200RF, CH24B150R, CH24B200R CH3RDF7M —

CH32B150R, CH32B200R, CH32N200R, CH32B225R CH3RDF9M —

CH42B200R, CH42N200R, CH42B225R CH3RDF10M —

CHSF2125

CHSF3125

CHFP

TDL

BINA

CHRLS

CH8BRM Type A

CH8EFM Type B

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-5

Loadcenters

Type CH

Replacement Rainproof Conduit Hubs

Replacement Ground Bar Kits

Ground Bar Legend

Replacement Grounded “B” Phase Adapters

Replacement Neutral Lugs for Vintage Loadcenters

Replacement Neutral Bar Accessories

Notes

1Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

2Distance between mounting holes is 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

3For single- and three-phase 400A loadcenters.

4Distance between mounting holes is 2-13/32 inches.

5Cannot be used in Safety Breaker Panels. Classic Plus Panels only.

Description

Conduit Size Ordering

Quantity 1

Catalog

NumberInches (mm)

Group 1—for use with 70, 100 and 125A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures,

and the following 150 and 200A panels: CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF

0.75 (19.1) 1 DS075H1

1.00 (25.4) 1 DS100H1

1.25 (31.8) 1 DS125H1

1.50 (38.1) 1 DS150H1

2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H1

Group 2—for use with 150, 200 and 225A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosure

except for the following 150 and 200A panels: CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF

2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H2

2.50 (63.5) 1 DS250H2

3.00 (76.2) 1 DS300H2

Adapter kit—allows Installing a Group 1 hub on devices arranged for Group 2 hubs — 1 DS900AP

Group 1—small blank hub closure plate — 1 DS900CP1

Group 2 —þlarge blank hub closure plate — 1 DS900CP2

Description (See Legend)

Length Ordering

Quantity 2

Catalog

NumberInches (mm)

dssssds

dssssdsj

dssssdssssss

dssssdssssssj

dssssdssssssssss

dssssdssssssssssj

dssssdsssssssssssssssss

dssssdsssssssssssssssssj

ssssssssdssssssdsssssss

2.54 (64.5) 1 GBK5 2

3.59 (91.2) 1 GBK520 2

4.29 (109.0) 1 GBK10 2

5.34 (135.6) 1 GBK1020 2

4.61 (117.1) 1 GBK13 2

5.69 (144.5) 1 GBK14 2

6.74 (171.2) 1 GBK1420 2

8.14 (206.8) 1 GBK21 2

9.19 (233.4) 1 GBK2120 2

7.94 (201.7) 1 CH9GP21 34

DS100H1

GBK14

= (3) #14–#10 Cu/Al or (1) #14–#4 Cu/Al

= (1) #6–2/0 Cu/Al

= (1) 1/0–14 or (3) #10–12 Cu/Al

= (1) #14–1/0 Cu/Al or (3) #14–#10 Cu/Al

= Mounting hole

f k

Maximum

Amperes

Three-Phase Loadcenter

Types of Panels

Kit Catalog

Number 5

125 12–32 circuit main lug CHGRD1

225 Main lug and CHH main breaker panels CHGRD2

CC main CB panels CHGRD3

Description

Catalog

Number

Vintage 1 (CH1) 125A CH9CM1

Vintage 1 (CH1) 225A CH9CM2

Vintage 2 (CH2) 125A CH9SU3

Vintage 2 (CH2) 225A CH9SU2

Description

Catalog

Number 5

Split neutral kit for 22 circuit 125A maximum CHSN125C

Split neutral kit for 32 circuit 200A maximum CHSN225J

Split neutral kit for 42 circuit 200A maximum CHSN225K

Replacement neutral for all C type boxes CHN125C

Replacement neutral for all D type boxes CHN125D

Replacement neutral for all L type boxes CHN225L

Isolated Neutral Assembly (computer circuits) BINA

V12-T5-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Breaker Replacement Accessories

Notes

1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

2 Handle ties: typically used to join two similar independent single-pole breakers to form a two-pole noncommon trip breaker.

3 Handle lockoffs: devices that use a padlock to lock the circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position.

4 Requires one additional pole space.

5 Escutcheon mounted: device mounted semipermanently to the face of the circuit breaker and secured by the loadcenter deadfront.

6 Screw mounted: device permanently mounted to the face of the circuit breaker by the use of a non-removable screw.

7 Handle lockdogs: devices that are used to secure a circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. Handle lockdogs are not padlockable devices.

8 Handle mounted: device mounted above or below handle using spring pressure.

9 Hold-down kits: devices used to secure the circuit breaker to the loadcenter for back-feed main application. See NEC Article 384.16(g).

Description

Ordering

Quantity 1

Catalog

Number

Handle Ties 2

Handle tie bar for physically joining the handles of two adjacent single-pole Type CH circuit breakers (molded plastic handle cover) 25 CHHT

Handle Lockoffs 34

Padlockable device for locking the handle of single-, two- or three-pole Type CH circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5 1 CHPL

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-, two- or three-pole Type CHGFI circuit breaker (escutcheon mounted) 51CHPLGF

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main circuit breaker Types CC and CCH into the ON or OFF position.(screw mounted) 61CCPL

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main breaker Types BW and CSR into the ON or OFF position (escutcheon mounted) 51MCBPL

Handle Lockdogs 47

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type CH circuit breakers (handle mounted) 810 CHLO

Hold-Down Kits 9

Hold-down retainer kit for single-, two-, three-pole Type CH circuit breakers. For 6–24 circuit 125A single- and three-phase,

12–42 circuit single-phase 225A and 24–42 circuit three-phase 225A MLO Type CH loadcenters

1CH125RB

Hold-down retainer kit for single-, two-, three-pole Type CH circuit breakers for 2–4 circuit MLO CH loadcenters. 1 CH125RB24

Mounting Bases

Mounting base for two-pole Type CH circuit breaker—70A maximum 1 CH9MB270

Main Breaker Lug Kits

Types CC and CCH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1 CCL300

Type CSR main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1MCBL300

Mechanical Interlock

Type CH for two-, three- and four-pole breakers 10 CHML

10 CHPLOFF

10 CHPLOFFA

10 CHL1P

10 CHL2P

CHHT

CHPL

CHPLGF

MCBPL

CHLO

CH125RB

CH9MB270

CHML

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-7

Loadcenters

Type CH

Renewal Parts List for Type CH Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts

Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

CH1420B100B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH30B125R — — CH3RDOOR10 CH3RDF6

CH1420B100R — — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH3242B200J CH8JF CH8JS — —

CH14B100B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH3242B200R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9

CH14B100R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH32B150J CH8JF CH8JS — —

CH1824B100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32B150R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9

CH1824B100R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH32B200J CH8JF CH8JS — —

CH18B100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32B200R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9

CH18B100R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH32B225J CH8JF CH8JS — —

CH20H100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32B225R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9

CH20H100R — — CH3RDOOR7 CH3RDF5 CH32H150L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH22B100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32H150R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF10

CH22B100R — — CH3RDOOR7 CH3RDF5 CH32H200L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH22B125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32H200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH22B125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH42B200K CH8KF CH8KS — —

CH24B150E CH8EF CH8ES — — CH42B200R — — CH3RDOOR13 CH3RDF10

CH24B150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7 CH42B225K CH8KF CH8KS — —

CH24B200E CH8EF CH8ES — — CH42B225R — — CH3RDOOR13 CH3RDF10

CH24B200R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7 CH42H200L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH28H100D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42H200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH28H100R — — CH3RDOOR9 CH3RDF6 CH42H225L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH28H125D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42H225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH28H125R — — CH3RDOOR9 CH3RDF6 CH42PM300 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — —

CH30B100D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42PM400 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — —

CH30B100R — — CH3RDOOR10 CH3RDF6 CH8B150RF — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7

CH30B125D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH8B200RF — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7

V12-T5-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Single-Phase with Main Lugs

Single-Phase Convertible

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

CH4L125RP — — CH3RDOOR2 CH3RDF2 CH2L125SP — CH82S — —

CH12L125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH2L40FP ————

CH12L125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH2L40RP — — BKRCVR —

CH12L200D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH2L40SP ————

CH12L200R — — CH3RDOOR9 CH4RDF6 CH2L70FP ————

CH1624L125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH2L70RP — — BKRCVR —

CH1624L125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH2L70SP ————

CH16L125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH3242L225D CH8DF CH8DS — —

CH16L125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH3242L225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6

CH16L200D CH8DF BH8DS — — CH32L150D CH8DF CH8DS — —

CH16L200R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH32L150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6

CH20L125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32L225D CH8DF CH8DS — —

CH20L125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH32L225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6

CH24L125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH42L225G CH8GF CH8GS — —

CH24L125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH42L225R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF8

CH24L150D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42PL400 CH7PF (flush) CH7PS — —

CH24L150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH4L125FP CH84F (flush) — — —

CH24L225D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH4L125SP — CH84S — —

CH24L225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH8L125FP CH88F (flush) — — —

CH2L125FP CH82F (FLUSH) — — — CH8L125RP — — CH3RDOOR4 CH3RDF3

CH2L125RE2P ————CH8L125SP — CH88S — —

CH2L125RP — — CH3RDOOR1 CH3RDF1

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

CH22N125C CH8CF CH8CS — —

CH22N125R ————

CH32N200J CH8JF CH8JS — —

CH32N200R — — CH3RD00R12 CH3RDF9

CH42N225K CH8KF CH8KS — —

CH42N225R ————

CH8N200RF — — — CH3RDF7

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-9

Loadcenters

Type CH

Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breakers Three-Phase with Main Lugs

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

CH30B3150L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH30B3150R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH30B3200L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH30B3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH30B3225L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH30B3225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH30H3200L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH30H3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH424PM300 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — —

CH424PM400 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — —

CH42B3200L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH42B3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH42B3225L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH42B3225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH42H3200L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH42H3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

CH42H3225L CH8LF CH8LS — —

CH42H3225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

CH12L3125B CH8BF CH8BS — —

CH12L3125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4

CH18L3125C CH8CF CH8CS — —

CH18L3125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5

CH24L3125C CH8CF CH8CS — —

CH24L3125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5

CH24L3225D CH8DF CH8DS — —

CH24L3225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6

CH30L3150D CH8DF CH8DS — —

CH30L3150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6

CH30L3225D CH8DF CH8DS — —

CH30L3225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6

CH424PL400 CH7PF (flush) CH7PS — —

CH42L3225R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF8

CH42L3225G CH8GF CH8GS — —

CH6L3125FP CH86F (flush) — — —

CH6L3125RP — — CH3RDOOR3 CH3RDF3

CH6L3125SP — CH86F — —

V12-T5-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Renewal Parts List for Vintage Type CH Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts

Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker Single-Phase with Main Lugs

Catalog

Number

Surface

Covers

Flush

Covers

Surface Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

Flush Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

CH22CCM100N CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM

CH30JJM150N CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH30JJM200N CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH40KKM200N CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH14BBM100 CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM

CH14BBM100R ————

CH18CCM100 CH7CCS CH7CCF — —

CH18CCM100R ————

CH22CCM125 CH7CCS CH7CCF — —

CH22CCM125R ————

CH20JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH20JJM150R ————

CH20JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH20JJM200R ————

CH24JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH24JJM150R ————

CH24JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH24JJM200R ————

CH30JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH30JJM150R ————

CH30JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH30JJM200R ————

CH30KKM225 CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH30KKM225R ————

CH40KKM200 CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH40KKM200R ————

CH42KKM225 CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH42KKM225R ————

CH42PM300 CH7PMS CH7PMF — —

CH42PM400 CH7PMS CH7PMF — —

CH20CCM100H2 CH7CCS CH7CCF — —

CH20CCM100H2R ————

CH26EEM125H2 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH26EEM125H2R ————

CH20CCM100H4 CH7CCS CH7CCF — —

CH20CCM100H4R ————

CH26EEM100H4 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH26EEM100H4R ————

CH26EEM125H4 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH26EEM125H4R ————

CH30JJM150H CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH30JJM150HR ————

CH30JJM200H CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH30JJM200HR ————

CH40KKM200H CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH40KKM200HR ————

CH42KKM225H CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH42KKM225HR ————

CH1420BBM100 CH7BBS CH7BBF — —

CH1420BBM100R ————

CH1824CCM100 CH7CCS CH7CCF — —

CH1824CCM100R ————

CH3040JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH3040JJM200 ————

Catalog

Number

Surface

Covers

Flush

Covers

Surface Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

Flush Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

CH2S ————

CH2F ————

CH2R ————

CH2AS ————

CH2AF ————

CH2AR ————

CH2BS ————

CH2BF ————

CH2BR ————

CH4S ————

CH4F ————

CH4R ————

CH8S ————

CH8F ————

CH8R ————

CH12BB CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM

CH12BBR ————

CH12EE200 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH12EE200R ————

CH16BB CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM

CH16BBR ————

CH16EE200 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH16EE200R ————

CH20CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM

CH20CCR ————

CH24CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM

CH24CCR ————

CH24EE150 CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM

CH24EE150R ————

CH24EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH24EE225R ————

CH30EE CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM

CH30EER ————

CH30EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH30EE225R ————

CH42GG CH7GGS CH7GGF CH7GGSM CH7GGFM

CH42GGR ————

CH42PL400 CH7PS CH7PF — —

CH48S ————

CH48F ————

CH48R ————

CH816S ————

CH816F ————

CH816R ————

CH1624BB CH7BBS CH7BBF — —

CH1624BBR ————

CH3042EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH3042EE225R ————

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-11

Loadcenters

Type CH

Three-Phase with Main Lugs Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Type CH Loadcenter Interior Assemblies

Catalog

Number

Surface

Covers

Flush

Covers

Surface Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

Flush Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

CH64S ————

CH64R ————

CH124BB CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM

CH124BBR ————

CH184CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM

CH184CCR ————

CH244CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM

CH244CCR ————

CH244EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM

CH244EE225R ————

CH304EE CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM

CH304EER ————

CH304EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — —

CH304EE225R ————

CH424GG225 CH7GGS CH7GGF CH7GGSM CH7GGFM

CH424GG225R ————

CH424PL400 CH7PS CH7PF — —

Catalog

Number

Surface

Covers

Flush

Covers

Surface Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

Flush Covers

w/ Mechanical

Interlock

CH304JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH304JJM150R ——— —

CH304JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH304JJM200R ——— —

CH304LLM225 CH7LLS CH7LLF — —

CH424KKM200 CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH424KKM200R ——— —

CH424LLM225 CH7LLS CH7LLF — —

CH424PM300 CH7PMS CH7PMF — —

CH424PM400 CH7PMS CH7PMF — —

CH304JJM200H CH7JJS CH7JJF — —

CH304JJM200HR ——— —

CH424KKM200H CH7KKS CH7KKF — —

CH424KKM200HR ——— —

CH424LLM225H CH7LLS CH7LLF — —

Catalog

Number

Ampere

Rating

Maximum Number 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm) UL File

Reference

Main Terminal Wire Size Range

(per phase) Cu/Al 60ºC or 75ºC

Standard

Package QuantitySpaces Single-Pole

Single-Phase, Single-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 120/24 Vac, Three-Wire

CH9MB270 70 2 2 E8741 (1) #8–#2 AWG Cu/Al 1

CH2L125INT 125 2 2 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20

Single-Phase, Double-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 120/240 Vac, Three-Wire

CH4L125INT 125 4 4 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20

CH8L125INT 125 8 8 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20

CH12L125INT 125 12 12 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20

CH16L125INT 125 16 16 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20

CH12L200INT 200 12 12 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 20

CH16L200INT 200 16 16 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH24L225INT 225 24 24 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH32L225INT 225 32 32 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH42L225INT 225 42 42 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

Three-Phase, Double-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta

CH12L3125INT 125 12 12 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH18L3125INT 125 18 18 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH24L3125INT 125 24 24 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH24L3225INT 225 24 24 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH30L3225INT 225 30 30 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

CH42L3225INT 225 42 42 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10

V12-T5-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type BR

Type BR Replacement Parts and Covers

Mechanical Interlock Cover

Covers mechanically interlock two breakers—Type BW

or BWH main breaker with a Type BR branch breaker.

Mechanical Interlock Covers

Notes

1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

2 #8–2/0 wire size range is 75°C rated only.

Number

of Poles

Ampere

Rating

Number of 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm)

Spaces Needed

Wire Size Range

Cu/Al 60°C or 75°C

Ordering

Quantity 2

Catalog

Number

Main and Subfeed Lug Blocks

2 125 2 #8–2/0 1 BRSF125

150 2 #8–2/0 1 BRSF150 2

225 4 #2–300 kcmil 1 BRS225

3 150 3 #8–2/0 1 3BRSF150 2

225 6 #2–300 kcmil 1 3BRS225

Main Lugs

Two-pole, 200A stud mounted (includes deadfront filler plate) #1–300 kcmil 1 BRL200

Neutral/ground lug

Add-on neutral or ground lug

#2/0 maximum 1 NL20

#3/0 maximum 1 NL30

300 kcmil maximum 1 NL300

Filler Plates

1.00-inch (25.4 mm) circuit breaker space 25 BRFP

BW main circuit breaker space (with hardware) 1 BWFP

Door lock —12–42 circuits, and 100–225A 1 TDL

Door lock—4–8 circuits, 125A 1CH9FL

ANSI-61 light gray touchup paint for current loadcenters 1 SPC61

Isolated neutral assembly (computer circuits) 1 BINA

Circuit directory—adhesive backed 10 TCD

Cover screws 25 LCCS

Cover replacement latch (gray) 14-5/16 (363.5 mm) wide loadcenters only 1 BRRL

Circuit marking strip (next to breaker) 10 BRMS

Circuit identification label (preprinted breaker labels) 25 CHBL

Series rated caution label 25 SRL

Bonding strip with screw 1BSSUSE

BRSF125

3BRS225

BRL200

TDL

Fits Loadcenter

Catalog Number

Mechanical Interlock Panel Cover

Catalog Number

BR816B200RF BR3RDF5M

BR2040B200R BR3RDF11M

BR3040B200R BR3RDF12M

BR4040B200R BR3RDF13M

BR2040B200 BRCOV20D1FM

BR3040B200 BRCOV30G1FM

BR4040B200 BRCOV40L1FM

BR4040B200

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-13

Loadcenters

Type BR

Replacement Rainproof Conduit Hubs

Replacement Ground Bar Kits

Ground Bar Legend

Notes

1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

2 Distance between mounting holes is 1.75 inches (44.5 mm).

3 For single- and three-phase 400 and 600A applications.

4 Distance between mounting holes is 2.34 inches (59.5 mm).

5 For non-metallic enclosures. Snaps into molded base.

Description

Conduit Size

Inches (mm)

Ordering

Quantity 1

Catalog

Number

Group 1—for use with 70, 100 and 125A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker

enclosures and the following 150 and 200A panels: BR48B200RF

0.75 (19.1) 1 DS075H1

1.00 (25.4) 1 DS100H1

1.25 (31.8) 1 DS125H1

1.50 (38.1) 1 DS150H1

2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H1

Group 2—for use with 150, 200 and 225A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures

except for the following 200A loadcenters: BR48B200RF. Also for use with 400 and 600A loadcenters

and New York City loadcenters manufactured after November 1, 2005

2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H2

2.50 (63.5) 1 DS250H2

3.00 (76.2) 1 DS300H2

Type H conduit hubs for loadcenters PL0724R and S3100RN 0.75 (19.1) 1 RH75P

1.00 (25.4) 1 RH100P

1.25 (31.8) 1 RH125P

1.50 (38.1) 1 RH150P

Adapter kit—Allows Installing a Group 1 hub on devices arranged for Group 2 hubs — 1 DS900AP

Group 1 small blank hub plate with bump — 1 DS900CP1

Group 2 Large blank hub plate with bump — 1 DS900CP2

Description

(See Legend)

Length

Inches (mm)

Ordering

Quantity 1

Catalog

Number

dssssds 2.54 (64.5) 1 GBK5 2

dssssdsj 3.59 (91.2) 1 GBK520 2

dssssdssssss 4.29 (109.0) 1 GBK10 2

dssssdssssssj 5.34 (135.6) 1 GBK1020 2

4.61 (117.1) 1 GBK13 2

dssssdssssssssss 5.69 (144.5) 1 GBK14 2

dssssdssssssssssj 6.74 (171.2) 1 GBK1420 2

dssssdsssssssssssssssss 8.14 (206.8) 1 GBK21 2

dssssdsssssssssssssssssj 9.19 (233.4) 1 GBK2120 2

5.78 (146.8) 1 BRGBK39512 34

sssss 1.84 (46.7) 1 GB4NM 5

(3) #14–10 Cu/Al or (1) #14–4 Cu/Al

(1) #6–2/0 Cu/Al

(1) #14–1/0 Cu/Al or (3) #14–10 Cu/Al

(1) #14–6 Cu/Al or (2) #14–12 Cu/Al

Mounting Hole

DS300H2

GBK14

BRGBK39512

V12-T5-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type BR

Replacement Breaker Accessories

Notes

1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

2 Handle ties: typically used to join two similar independent single-pole breakers to form a two-pole noncommon trip breaker.

3 Handle lockoffs: devices that use a padlock to lock the circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position.

4 Escutcheon mounted: device mounted semipermanently to the face of the circuit breaker and secured by the loadcenter deadfront.

5 Handle mounted: device mounted directly to the handle by the use of a set screw.

6 Screw mounted: device permanently mounted to the face of the circuit breaker by the use of a non-removable screw.

7 Handle lockdogs: devices that are used to secure a circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. Handle Lockdogs are not padlockable devices.

8 Hold-down kits: devices used to secure the circuit breaker to the loadcenter for back-feed main application. See NEC Article 384.16(g).

Description

Ordering

Quantity

Catalog

Number

Handle Ties 2

Handle tie bar for physically joining the handles of two adjacent single-pole Type BR circuit breakers (metal cylinder pin type)10BHT

Handle tie bar for joining two independent outside poles of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex and outside poles of two Type BD

duplex circuit breakers

10 THOW

Handle tie bar for joining two adjacent outside poles of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex and outside poles of two Type BD duplex circuit breakers 10 THS1

Handle Lockoffs 3

Padlockable device for locking the handle of single-, two- or three-pole Type BR Circuit Breakers and single-pole of a Type BD Duplex

or one independent outside pole of a Type BQ or BQC Quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5

10 BRLW

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-pole Type BR circuit breaker.(handle mounted) 510 BRLW1

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a two- and three-pole Type BR circuit breaker (handle mounted) 510 BRLW2

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-pole Type BD Duplex, BQ or BQC Quadplex breaker (handle mounted) 510 BRDL1

Padlockable device for locking the handle of the two center poles and the two outer poles of a two-pole Types BQ and BQC quadplex

circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 4

10 BRQLW

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main circuit breaker Types CC and CHH into the ON or OFF position (screw mounted) 6 1 CCPL

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main breaker Types BW and BWH into the ON or OFF position (escutcheon mounted) 41MCBPL

Handle Lockdog 7

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-, two- or three-pole Type BR circuit breakers and single-pole of Type BD

duplex and one independent outside pole of Type BQ or BQC Quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5

10 BHLW

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type BR circuit breakers (handle mounted) 510 BHLW1

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for two- and three-pole Type BR circuit breakers (handle mounted) 510 BHLW2

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type GFCB ground fault circuit breakers (handle mounted) 510 BHGW

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for one independent outside pole of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex or single-pole

Type BD duplex circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5

10 HLW1

Hold-Down Kits 8

Hold-down retainer kit for three-pole Type BR circuit breakers in S3100 and 3100R loadcenters only 1 BRHDB

Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Type BR circuit breakers in single-phase MLO loadcenters through 125A 1 BREQS125

Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Type BR circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 150–225A (single-phase only) 1 BRHDK125

Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Types BJ and BJH circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 125–225A 1 BJHDS

Hold-down screw kit for three-pole Types BJ and BJH circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 125–225A 1 BJHDS3P

Main Breaker Lug Kits

Types CC and CHH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1CCL300

Types BW/BWH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1MCBL300

Mechanical Interlock

Types BR for two-, three- and four-pole breakers 10 BRML

THS1

BHLW2

BRQLW

MCBPL (Installed)

BHLW

BRLW2

BREQS125

BRHDK125

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-15

Loadcenters

Type BR

Renewal Parts for Type BR Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts

Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breakers

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

B4242DFN 315-003-28 — — — BR2040B150R — — BR3RDOOR8 BR3RDF11

B4242DR1N — — Not available — BR2040B200 BRCOVC35 — — —

B4242DSN — 315-003-27 — — BR2040B200R — — BR3RDOOR9 BR3RDF11

B4242EFN 315-003-28 — — — BR2040H200 BRCOVC35 — — —

B4242ESN — 315-003-27 — — BR2430B150 BRCOVC40 — — —

BR1020B100RF — — BR3RDOOR2 BR3RDF1 BR2440B200 BRCOVC41 — — —

BR1212B100 BRCOVC12 — — — BR3030BC100 BRCOVC59

BR1220B100 BRCOVC12 — — — BR3030B150 BRCOVC40 — — —

BR1224B100R — BR3RDOOR2 BR3RDF1 BR3030B150R — — BR3RDOOR10 BR3RDF12

BR1224B100SFG 47-37466 47-37469 BR3030BC150 BRCOVC40 — — —

BR1616B100 BRCOVC16 — — — BR3040B150 BRCOVC40 — — —

BR1620B100 BRCOVC16 — — — BR3040B200 BRCOVC41 — — —

BR1624B100 BRCOVC16 — — — BR3040B200R — — BR3RDOOR11 BR3RDF12

BR1624B100R — — BR3RDOOR3 BR3RDF2 BR3040H200 BRCOVC41 — — —

BR1624B125 BRCOVC17 — — — BR304242F 315-003-28 — — —

BR1630B150 BRCOVC29 — — — BR304242S — 315-003-27 — —

BR1632B200 BRCOVC31 — — — BR4040B200 BRCOVC44 — — —

BR2020B100 BRCOVC22 — — — BR4040BC200 BRCOVC44 — — —

BR2024B100R — — BR3RDOOR4 BR3RDF4 BR4040B200R — — BR3RDOOR12 BR3RDF13

BR2024B125 BRCOVC23 — — — BR4040H200 BRCOVC44 — — —

BR2024B125R — — BR3RDOOR4 BR3RDF4 BR4242B225 BRCOVC53 (2) — — —

BR2024H100 BRCOVC22 — — — BR4242B225R — — BR3RDOOR13 BR3RDF15

BR2030B150 BRCOVC32 — — — BR48B200RF — — BR3RDOOR15 BR3RDF14

BR2030B150R — — BR3RDOOR8 BR3RDF11 BR816B100 BRCOVC10 — — —

BR2030H150 BRCOVC32 — — — BR816B150RF — — BR3RDOOR5 BR3RDF5

BR2040B150 BRCOVC40 — — — BR816B200RF — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF5

V12-T5-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type BR

Convertible

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

3BR1224N125 BRCOVC20 — — —

3BR1224N125R — — BR3RDOOR29 BR3RDF2

3BR1224N125S — BRCOVS20 — —

3BR3030N100 BRCOVC37 — — —

3BR3030N100R — — BR3RDOOR30 —

3BR3030N100S — BRCOVS37 — —

BR1224N125 BRCOVC13 — — —

BR1224N125R — — BR3RDOOR2 BR3RDF1

BR1224NC125R BR3RDOOR2

BR1224N200 BRCOVC30 — — —

BR1224N200R — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF5

BR1624N125 BRCOVC17 — — —

BR1624N125R — — BR3RDOOR3 BR3RDF2

BR1632N200 BRCOVC31 — — —

BR1632N200SFG 47-37460 47-37375

BR2024N125 BRCOVC23 — — —

BR2024N125R — — BR3RDOOR4 BR3RDF4

BR2040N200 BRCOVC35 — — —

BR2040N200R — — BR3RDOOR9 BR3RDF11

BR2440N200 BRCOVC41 — — —

BR3040N200 BRCOVC41 — — —

BR3040N200R — — BR3RDOOR11 BR3RDF12

BR4040N200 BRCOVC44 — — —

BR4040N200R — — BR3RDOOR12 BR3RDF13

BR816N200RF — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF5

BR4040NL200G BRCOVC44 + BWFP — — —

Manufactured Housing Loadcenters

Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Note

1These covers are painted white (standard color is gray).

Catalog

Number

Cover

Number

BR1020B100GK MBCOVC10

BR1020B100PK MBCOVC10

BR1220B100GK MBCOVC11

BR1220B100PK MBCOVC11

BR1224B100PK MBCOVC24

BR1224B100GK MBCOVC24

BR1224B100GK MBCOVC25 1

BR1224B150GK MBCOVC12

BR1224B150PK MBCOVC12

BR1630B150GK MBCOVC13

BR1630B150PK MBCOVC13

BR1224B200GK MBCOVC14

BR1224B200PK MBCOVC14

BR1632B200GK MBCOVC15

BR1632B200PK MBCOVC15

BR2040B200GK MBCOVC16

BR2040B200PK MBCOVC16

BR1020B100PKW MBCOVC17 1

BR1220B100PKW MBCOVC18 1

BR1224B100PKW MBCOVC25 1

BR1224B150PKW MBCOVC19 1

BR1630B150PKW MBCOVC20 1

BR1224B200PKW MBCOVC21 1

BR1632B200PKW MBCOVC22 1

BR2040B200PKW MBCOVC23 1

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-17

Loadcenters

Type BR

Single-Phase with Main Lugs

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

1224DRIN — — Not available — BR24L70RP — — Not available —

1224DSN — Not available — — BR24L70SGP — Not available — —

2442DSN — Not available — — BR24L70SP — Not available — —

2460FGNM — — — — BR1224L125RIS BRCOVC66

2460FNM — — — — BR1224L125RISBP BRCOVC66

2460RNM — — — — BR2024L125RIS BRCOVC66

2460SGNM — — — — BR3040L200 BRCOVC36 — — —

2460SNM — — — — BR3040L200G BRCOVC36 — — —

4242DFN 315-003-06 — — — BR3040L200R — — BR3RDOOR9 BR3RDF8

4242DRIN — Not available — — BR4040L200 BRCOVC42 — — —

4242DSN — 315-003-05 — — BR4040L200R — — BR3RDOOR11 BR3RDF9

4242ESN — 315-003-05 — — BR4242L225 BRCOVC45 — — —

BR1212L125 BRCOVC11 — — — BR4242L225R — — BR3RDOOR14 BR3RDF10

BR1224L125 BRCOVC11 — — — BR48L125FDP BRCOVC62 (flush) — — —

BR1224L125DG BRCOVC11 — — — BR48L125FGP BRCOVC63 (flush) — — —

BR1224L125G BRCOVC11 — — — BR48L125FP BRCOVC61 (flush) — — —

BR1224L125R — — BR3RDOOR1 BR3RDF3 BR48L125RP — — BR3RDOOR26 BR3RDF22

BR1224L200 BRCOVC15 — — — BR48L125SGP — BRCOVS60 — —

BR1224L200R — — BR3RDOOR7 BR3RDF6 BR48L125SP — BRCOVS59 — —

BR1616L125 BRCOVC14 — — — BR612L125FDGP BRCOVC08 — — —

BR1624L125 BRCOVC14 — — — BR612L125FDP BRCOVC08 — — —

BR1624L125G BRCOVC14 — — — BR612L125FGP BRCOVC63 — — —

BR1624L125R — — BR3RDOOR2 BR3RDF1 BR612L125FP BRCOVC08 — — —

BR1630L150 BRCOVC25 — — — BR612L125RP — — BR3RDOOR27 BR3RDF23

BR2020L125 BRCOVC18 — — — BR612L125SDGP — BRCOVS08 — —

BR2024L125 BRCOVC18 — — — BR612L125SDP — BRCOVS08 — —

BR2024L125G BRCOVC18 — — — BR612L125SGP — BRCOVS60 — —

BR2024L125R — — BR3RDOOR3 BR3RDF2 BR612L125SP — BRCOVS59 — —

BR2030L150 BRCOVC25 — — — BR816L125FDGP BRCOVC64 (flush) — — —

BR2040L200 BRCOVC25 — — — BR816L125FDP BRCOVC64 (flush) — — —

BR2040L200G BRCOVC25 — — — BR816L125FGP BRCOVC09 — — —

BR2040L200R — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF7 BR816L125FP BRCOVC09 — — —

BR2424L125 BRCOVC24 — — — BR816L125RP BR3RDOOR28 BR3RDF23

BR2424L125G BRCOVC24 — — — BR816L125SDGP BRCOVS61 — —

BR2440L200 BRCOVC33 — — — BR816L125SDP — BRCOVS61 — —

BR24L125FP BRCOVC60 (FLUSH) — — — BR816L125SGP BRCOVS09 — —

BR24L125RP — — BR3RDOOR25 BR3RDF21 BR816L125SP BRCOVS09 — —

BR24L125RSE2P — — — BR3RDF21 BR816L200RF — — BR3RDOOR7 BR3RDF6

BR24L125RSEP — — — BR3RDF21 BR816LC125FDP BRCOVC64 (flush) — — —

BR24L125SP — BRCOVS62 — — TT120FLGNM ————

BR24L70FGP Not available — — — TT120SLGNM ————

V12-T5-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type BR

Three-Phase with Main Lugs

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

31836DFN Not available — — —

31836DR1N — — Not available —

31836DSN — Not available — —

32442DSN — Not available — —

34242DFN 315-003-06 — — —

34242DR1N — — Not available —

34242DSN — 315-003-05 — —

34242EFN 315-003-06 — — —

34242ESN — 315-003-05 — —

3BR1224L125 BRCOVC21 — — —

3BR1224L125R — — BR3RDOOR29 BR3RDF2

3BR1224L125S — BRCOVS21 — —

3BR1224L200 BRCOVC34 — — —

3BR1224L200R — — BR3RDOOR16 BR3RDF7

3BR1224L200S — BRCOVS34 — —

3BR1836L150 BRCOVC27 — — —

3BR1836L150R — — BR3RDOOR17 BR3RDF7

3BR1836L150S — BRCOVS27 — —

3BR1836L200 BRCOVC34 — — —

3BR1836L200R — — BR3RDOOR16 BR3RDF7

3BR1836L200S — BRCOVS34 — —

3BR2442L150 BRCOVC39 — — —

3BR2442L150R — — BR3RDOO18 BR3RDF16

3BR2442L150S — BRCOVS39 — —

3BR2442L200 BRCOVC43 — — —

3BR2442L200S —- BRCOVS43 — —

3BR3042L200 BRCOVC43 — — —

3BR3042L200R — — BR3RDOO19 BR3RDF18

3BR3042L200S — BRCOVS43 — —

3BR4242L200 BRCOVC48 — — —

3BR4242L200R — — BR3RDOOR21 BR3RDF20

3BR4242L200S — BRCOVS48 — —

3BR4242L225 BRCOVC49 — — —

3BR4242L225R — — BR3RDOOR24 BR3RDF20

3BR4242L225S — BRCOVS49 — —

Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Catalog

Number

Combination

Covers

Surface

Covers

NEMA 3R

Covers

NEMA 3R

Deadfronts

3B4242DFN 315-003-28 — — —

3B4242DR1N — — Not available —

3B4242DSN — 315-003-27 — —

3B4242EFN 315-003-28 — — —

3B4242ESN — 315-003-27 — —

3BR1224B100 BRCOVC19 — — —

3BR1224B100R — — BR3RDOOR29 BR3RDF2

3BR1224B100S — BRCOVS19 — —

3BR1224H100 BRCOVC19 — — —

3BR1224H100S — BRCOVS19 — —

3BR3042B125 BRCOVC54 — — —

3BR3042B125S — BRCOVS54 — —

3BR3042B150 BRCOVC55 — — —

3BR3042B150R — — BR3RDOOR20 BR3RDF17

3BR3042B150S — BRCOVS55 — —

3BR3042B200 BRCOVC56 — — —

3BR3042B200R — — BR3RDOOR21 BR3RDF17

3BR3042B200S — BRCOVS56 — —

3BR3042H150 BRCOVC55 — — —

3BR3042H150S — BRCOVS55 — —

3BR3042H200 BRCOVC56 — — —

3BR3042H200S — BRCOVS56 — —

3BR4242B200 BRCOVC57 — — —

3BR4242B200R — — BR3RDOOR22 BR3RDF19

3BR4242B200S — BRCOVS57 — —

3BR4242B225 BRCOVC58 — — —

3BR4242B225R — — BR3RDOOR23 BR3RDF19

3BR4242B225S — BRCOVS58 — —

3BR4242H200 BRCOVC57 — — —

3BR4242H200S — BRCOVS57 — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-19

Loadcenters

Type BR

Replacement Interior Assembly

Type BR Loadcenter Interior Assemblies

Ampere

Rating

Maximum Number 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm) UL File

Reference

Main Terminal Size

(Per Phase)

Standard

Package Quantity

Catalog

NumberSpaces Single Poles

Single-Phase Single Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire

70 2 4 — (1) #8–#2 AWG Cu/Al 20 24INT70B

125 2 4 E8741 (1) 1/0–#14 AWG Cu

2/0–12 AWG All

20 24INT125B

125 6 12 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 612INT125SRB

Single-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire

125 4 8 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 48INT125B

125 6 12 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 612INT125B

125 8 16 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 816INT125B

125 12 12 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1212INT125B

125 12 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1224INT125B

125 16 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1624INT125B

125 20 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 10 2024INT125B

125 24 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 10 2424INT125B

200 8 16 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 20 816INT200B

200 12 24 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 20 1224INT200B

200 30 40 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 10 3040INT200B

200 42 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 10 4242INT225B

Single-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire

125 8 16 E5297 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 816INT125BC

125 12 12 E5297 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1212INT125BC

200 12 24 E5297 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 20 1224INT200BC

Three-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—

120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta

125 12 34 E52977 (1) 2/0–#8 AWG Cu/Al 10 1224INT3125B

150 18 36 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 1836INT3150B

150 24 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 2442INT3150B

200 30 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 3042INT3200B

225 42 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 4242INT3225B

Three-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus—208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—

120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta

125 12 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#8 AWG Cu/Al 10 1224INT3125BC

200 12 24 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 1224INT3200BC

BR Loadcenter

Interior Assembly

V12-T5-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Replacement Breakers

Product Description

Eaton UL classified

replacement circuit breakers

are available in both 3/4-inch

Type CHQ and 1.00-inch

Type CL, single- and two-pole

configurations. These

breakers are classified as

direct replacements by

Underwriters Laboratories.

In addition to a UL listing,

they also come with a

15-year warranty.

Specified vs. UL Classified

Specified breakers are listed

by the manufacturer of the

panelboard for use in a

particular panel. This doesn’t

mean that the panelboard

manufacturer produced the

specified breaker; it merely

means that the panelboard

manufacturer has tested the

breaker in the panel. In fact,

through the years, Eaton has

manufactured thousands of

breakers for other panelboard

manufacturers.

UL classified breakers

are produced by one

manufacturer for use in

place of the breakers

specified on the panelboard.

Like specified breakers, UL

classified breakers have been

tested in the panels for which

they are approved.

Testing

Classified breakers are tested

extensively in numerous

General Electric®, Siemens®,

Murray®, Thomas & Betts®,

Square D® and Crouse-

Hinds® panels. The tests

are conducted with

witnesses from Underwriters

Laboratories and involve

short circuit, temperature

and insertion/withdrawal

applications. This level of

testing ensures that the

breakers meet identified

standards and have been

found suitable by UL for

the specified

purpose.

Understanding Classified

Breaker Terminology

Definitions

Specified Circuit Breaker—

Each manufacturer lists the

brands of circuit breakers

that can be used in their

panelboards. Often,

manufacturers will not list

competitors as specified,

even though they are

suitable replacements.

Classified Circuit Breaker—

A breaker that is considered

suitable, by a qualified third-

party organization, for use

in another manufacturer’s

panelboard.

Listed Breaker—The listing

of a circuit breaker is by an

independent third party. Eaton

classified breakers are listed

by UL.

Labeled Breaker

—A breaker

with a label

affixed by an

independent third party.

Non-CTL Plug-On Replacement Circuit Breakers, Type CHNT 10 kAIC, 120/240 Vac

For use as replacement in loadcenters built prior to 1968 and within the current style

loadcenters as indicated in the loadcenter section.

3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) per Pole 120 Vac, Non-CTL 10 kAIC

CTL Plug-On Circuit Breakers, Type CHT Twin 10 kAIC, 120/240 Vac

All circuit breakers have rejection feature. Use only with loadcenters marked for use with CHT breakers.

Twin (CTL) 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) per Pole 120 Vac Class CTL 10 kAIC

Notes

1 Switching duty rated.

2 HACR rated.

Ampere

Rating

Wire Size Range

Cu/Al 60ºC or 75°C

Single-Pole Requires

One 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) Space

10 per Shelf Carton

Catalog Number

15–15 #14–8 CHNT1515 12

15–20 #14–8 CHNT1520 12

20–20 #14–8 CHNT2020 12

Ampere

Rating

Wire Size Range

Cu/Al 60ºC or 75°C

Single-Pole Requires

One 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) Space

10 per Shelf Carton

Catalog Number

15–15 #14–8 CHT1515 12

15–20 #14–8 CHT1520 12

20–20 #14–8 CHT2020 12

120/240 Vac

Type CH and CHT

Circuit Breakers

Mounted in Twin

Breaker Panel

120/240 Vac

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-21

Loadcenters

Type CH

Type CH Renovation

Loadcenter

Product Description

Eaton’s Renovation

Loadcenter is designed

for the service contractor.

With the addition of a five-

circuit terminal block factory

mounted in the top left

corner of the loadcenter, the

service contractor can

terminate short-circuit wires

instead of having to use

expensive wire nuts. Also,

the Renovation Loadcenter

incorporates a twin-stacked

neutral design that places the

neutral and ground

terminations higher in the

loadcenter. Both of these

features were added without

increasing any size from a

standard loadcenter. These

features will eliminate the

need for wire nuts and make

for a much neater installation.

There is a provision to field

mount a second five-circuit

terminal block (RN5TB) in

the top right corner of the

loadcenter. Choose amongst

Eaton’s Type CH breaker

family for use in the

Renovation Panel.

Product Selection

Single-Phase—Main Circuit Breaker Loadcenters 35 kAIC 1

Single-Phase, Three-Wire—120/240 Vac—Factory-Bonded Stacked

Split Neutral

Branch Circuit Breakers (CH)

See Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial, CA08100002E, Tab 1.

Renovation Loadcenter

Notes

1100A main breaker is rated 10 kAIC.

2Combination style covers may be used in surface or flush applications.

All main circuit breaker loadcenters are listed for use as service entrance equipment.

Loadcenters are factory-bonded for service entrance applications. Remove bonding strap

for separate neutral and ground bars for sub-feed applications.

Main

Breaker

Type

Main

Ampere

Rating

Max.

Number

3/4-Inch

(19.1 mm)

of Poles

Enclosure

Type

Box

Size

Wire Size

Range Cu/Al

60 or 70ºC for

Main Breakers

Loadcenter

Catalog

Number

Cover

Catalog Number 2

Combination Surface

CH 100 20 Indoor C #6–1/0 CH22B100CRN CH8CFF CH8CS

CSH 150 32 Indoor J #2–300 kcmil CH32B150JRN CH8JF CH8JS

CSH 200 32 Indoor J #2–300 kcmil CH32B200JRN CH8J CH8JS

CSH 200 42 Indoor K #2–300 kcmil CH42B200KRN CH8KF CH8KS

Description Catalog Number

Five-circuit terminal block kit

Ground bar kits (two maximum per panel)

RN5TB

(See Page V12-T5-5)

Renovation Panel

V12-T5-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Plug-On Neutral

Loadcenter

Product Description

Code changes and higher

safety standards are leading

to more arc fault and ground

fault circuit interrupter

installations. Eaton offers a

unique product solution that

enables a direct connection of

the breaker to the neutral bar,

eliminating the need for

wiring a pigtail.

Features and Benefits

●Time savings up to 25%

per AFCI/GFCI installation

●Eliminates nuisance

tripping due to loose pigtail

connections

●Clean gutter space

●Easier troubleshooting

due to less wiring

●Backed by a limited

lifetime warranty

Product Selection

Main Breaker Plug-On Neutral Loadcenters

Main Lug Only/Convertible Plug-On Neutral Loadcenters—With Factory Installed Main Lugs

Note

1 Requires the use of type CHNT breakers.

Main

Breaker

Type

Main

Ampere

Rating

Max.

Number

3/4-Inch

Circuits

Max.

Number

of Poles

Enclosure

Type

Box

Size

Wire Size

Range Cu/Al

Catalog

Number

Cover

Catalog Number

Combination Surface

CSH 35

kAIC

100 24 24 Indoor E #2–300 kcmil CH24BPN100E CH8EF CH8ES

200 32 32 Indoor J #2–300 kcmil CH32BPN200J CH8JF CH8JS

200 42 42 Indoor K #2–300 kcmil CH42BPN200K CH8KF CH8KS

200 60 120 1Indoor N #2–300 kcmil CH60BPN200N CH8NF —

Max.

Ampere

Rating

Max.

Number

3/4-Inch

Poles

Enclosure

Type

Box

Size

Catalog

Number

Wire Size

Range for

Main Lug

Main

Breaker

Kit

Wire Size

Range

For Main

Breaker

Cover

Catalog Number

Combination Surface

125 24 Indoor E CH24NLPN125E #6–300 kcmil CSH2100N #2–300 kcmil CH8NLEF CH8NLES

CSH2125N

225 32 Indoor J CH32NLPN225J #6–300 kcmil CSH2125N #2–300 kcmil CH8NLJF CH8NLJS

CSH2200N

CSH2100N

225 42 Indoor K CH42NLPN225K #6–300 kcmil CSH2125N #2–300 kcmil CH8NLKF CH8NLKS

CSH2150N

CSH2200N

Plug-On Neutral

Loadcenter

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-23

Loadcenters

Type CH

Type CH Retrofit

Interior Kits

Type CH Retrofit Adjustable Interior

Type CH Retrofit Interior Collar

and Assembly with Trim

Product Description

Replacing existing

loadcenters and panelboards

can be a time consuming

and expensive job. CH retrofit

kits can be the solution to

save time and money. The

kit consists of a standard trim

to fit the interior, a picture

frame trim to fit the existing

box, and a field-adjustable

interior assembly that

includes neutral and ground

bars. These are especially

applicable when the existing

box is flush mounted in

drywall, plaster or block

wall. The existing box, and

many times existing wiring,

can remain.

Features and Benefits

Upgrading Existing Electrical

Infrastructure is Simple

●Replaces vintage brands

that have hard to find,

expensive replacement

breakers

●Allows safety upgrade

to arc fault and ground

fault breakers

●Maximizes number of

circuits available with

compact design

●Meets 2008 NEC wire

bending requirements

●Eco-friendly in asbestos-

filled environments

●Exclusive design

Save Time and Money

Throughout the Installation

●Uses existing panel

box and wires

●Eliminates expensive

drywall/paint repair

●Saves 2–3 hours compared

to a complete panel

changeout—get off the

job faster

●Eliminates precise

measurements with

field-adjustable kit

Detailed Product Guide

All standard retrofit kits are

suitable for a range of

existing box sizes:

●Box width ranging from

14.50 to 22.00 inches

(368.3 to 558.8 mm)

●Box depth ranging from

4.25 inches (108.0 mm)

for CH to 6.00 inches

(152.4 mm)

●Box height ranging from

21.00 to 45.00 inches

(533.4 to 1143.0 mm)

For box dimensions outside

of these ranges, contact

the Lincoln Flex Center at

800-330-6479. Be sure to

provide the existing incoming

line wire size.

Standards and Certifications

Interiors are UL Recognized

under UL 67, Panelboard

standard.

Product Selection

To select the retrofit kit:

1. From the existing box

size determine which

retrofit groups are

suitable (may be more

than one).

2. Use type of interior,

number of phases, and

type of main to find the

selection chart.

3. Select part number from

chart (if main breaker,

replace XXX with specific

amp rating).

4. Note that the overlap

of the existing wall is

the retro cover size

minus the existing

box size. If specific

measurements are

needed, communicate

that you need a custom

trim size.

5. Contact the Lincoln Flex

Center at 800-330-6479

for pricing, lead-times

and order entry

instructions.

Retro Size Groups

V12-T5-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Retrofit Stocking Kits (BR and CH Kits Available) 12

Five recommended groups: existing box height determines retro group size.

Notes

1Other options are available.

2CH retrofit interiors and collar cartons are color coded to ensure accuracy of kit.

Description

Retrofit

Kit Interior

Catalog Number

Collar

Catalog

Number

Cover

Catalog

Number

Existing Enclosure Parameters—Inches (mm) Existing Box Height

Determines Retro

Size Group—Inches (mm)Height Width Depth

BR-Aluminum Bus/CH-Copper Bus

BR 125A MLO 12/24 circuit retro kit RAABR12L125 Included Included 14.00–18.00

(355.6–457.2)

10.50–12.50

(266.7–317.5)

3.50–5.25

(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size

14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

BR 100A MCB 10/20 circuit retro kit RAABR10B100 Included Included 14.00–18.00

(355.6–457.2)

10.50–12.50

(266.7–317.5)

3.50–5.25

(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size

14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

BR 125A MLO 12/24 circuit retro kit RAABR12L125A Included Included 14.00–21.00

(355.6–533.4)

10.50–15.50

(266.7–393.7)

3.50–5.25

(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size

14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

BR 100A MCB 10/20 circuit retro kit RAABR10B100A Included Included 14.00–21.00

(355.6–533.4)

10.50–15.50

(266.7–393.7)

3.50–5.25

(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size

14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

CH interior 125A MCB 22 circuits RACH22B125I RACHFRAME CH8CF 21.00–30.00

(533.4–762.0)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size A/size

21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0)

CH interior 125A MLO 24 circuits RACH24L125I RACHFRAME CH8CF 21.00–30.00

(533.4–762.0)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size A/size

21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0)

CH interior 150A MCB 24 circuits RBCH24B150I RACHFRAME CH8EF 29.00–36.00

(736.6–914.4)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size B/size

29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4)

CH interior 225A MLO 32 circuits RBCH32L225I RACHFRAME CH8DF 29.00–36.00

(736.6–914.4)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size B/size

29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4)

CH interior 200A MCB 32 circuits RCCH32B200I RCCHFRAME CH8JF 34.00–41.00

(863.3–1041.4)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size C/size

34.00– 41.00 (863.3–1041.4)

CH interior 225A MLO 42 circuits RCCH42L225I RCCHFRAME CH8GF 34.00–41.00

(863.3–1041.4)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size C/size

34.00– 41.00 (863.3–1041.4)

CH interior 200A MCB 42 circuits RDCH42B200I RDCHFRAME CH8KF 37.00–45.00

(939.8–1143.0)

13.00–22.00

(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size D/size

37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0)

CH interior 225A MLO 42 circuits RDCH42L225I RDCHFRAME CH8KF 37.00–45.00

(939.8–1143.0)

13.00–22.00

(330.0–558.8)

4.25–6.00

(108.0–152.4)

Retro size D/size

37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0)

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-25

Loadcenters

Type CH

Surge Panel

Product Description

Eaton’s Type CH Surge

Loadcenter includes a

factory-mounted and wired

surge suppressor device.

There is a knockout in the

cover that allows the user

to view the status indication

lights on the surge

suppressor. The CH Surge

Loadcenter reduces the

surge current, helping to

protect sensitive home

electronic equipment.

Save labor

by installing

a factory-

mounted surge

protective

device.

Factory-Installed

Surge Protection

●Includes a CHSPULTRA

and a two-pole 15A

circuit breaker

●Increases the

effectiveness of

surge protection due

to reduced lead length

●A modified deadfront

allows for easy viewing

of indicating lights

Surge Ready

●Provides a mounting

provision for CHSPULTRA

●A modified deadfront

allows for easy viewing

of indicating lights

Replacement Covers for Surge Panels

Catalog Number Cover Number Replacement Module

CHSUR22B100D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR24L125D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC22B100D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC24L125D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC12L125C CHPC8CF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC30B100J CHPC8JF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32L150J CHPC8JF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR32B150L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR32B200L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR32L225L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32B125L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32B150L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32B200L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32N200L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR42B200L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42B150L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42B200L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42N200L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR42L225L CHPC8L42LF CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42L225L CHPC8L42LF CHSPT2ULTRA

Surge Panel

V12-T5-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters

Type C H

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 22CD

Publication

Number Description

CA08100002E Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial Catalog, Tab 1

CA08100011E Volume 9—OEM Product Guide

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-1

Meter Centers

Group Metering Lineup

6 Meter Centers

Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-2

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-2

Meter Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-3

Main Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-4

Residential Meter Stacks—Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-7

Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-8

Commercial Meter Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-8

Miscellaneous Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-9

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-9

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-9

V12-T6-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Meter Centers

Product Description

WCG3 Meter Center

Cutler-Hammer® Meter

Centers from Eaton’s

electrical business are

designed for use where

an individually metered

distribution center is

required. Meter centers

house meter sockets that

measure power consumption

at service entrances.

Metering is designed for use

with multi-family dwelling

units, commercial units and

light industrial applications.

Product History

In the beginning, all multiple

metering applications were

assembled at the job site using

wire troughs, individual meter

sockets and enclosed circuit

breakers.

In the early 1960s, factory-

assembled meter packs

began to be made on a job-

by-job basis. Soon after,

modular metering was

introduced for single-phase

200A maximum ring-style

applications.

In 1981, a few utilities began

to require ringless meter

covers and, in 1983, the first

three-phase commercial meter

modules with lever type

bypass were introduced.

The Westinghouse Meter

Center designs,

Type WM

and/or WP, and facilities were

sold to Thomas & Betts in

1994. Today, wall-hung

multiple metering is used in

virtually all areas of the

country for both residential

and commercial applications.

Main ratings range from 250

to 2000A, and 125, 200 and

320A sockets are available in

both single-phase and three-

phase versions.

Product History Time Line

Replacement Capabilities

Westinghouse QS, QP

Cutler-Hammer CG2, 4

Cutler-Hammer CG3, 5, 7, 9, 11

Westinghouse WM, WP

Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse WCG3, 5, 7, 9, 11

Cutler-Hammer 1MM, 3MM, 35MM, 37MM, 35SS, 37SS

Product 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Type Accessories Covers Jaws

Bussed

End Caps

Tenant Breaker

Hinged Cover

Drip

Hoods

Socket

Replacement

CG3 ■■■■■ ■

CG5 ■■■ ■ ■

CG7 ■■ ■■ ■■

CG9 ■■ ■■ ■■

CG11 ■■ ■■ ■

WCG3 ■■■■■ ■■

WCG5 ■■■ ■ ■■

WCG7 ■■ ■■ ■■

WCG9 ■■ ■■ ■■

WCG11 ■■ ■■ ■

1MM ■■ ■■ ■■

3MM ■■ ■■ ■■

35MM ■■ ■■ ■■

37MM ■■ ■■ ■■

35SS ■■ ■■ ■■

37SS ■■ ■■ ■■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-3

Meter Centers

Meter Packs

Meter Pack

Meter Packs

Notes

1For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMCP1T.

2For center wireway cover, order MPCENCVR1.

3For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMCP1T.

4For center wireway cover, order MPCENCVR2.

5For catalog numbers with a “B” suffix (ringless with horn bypass), all replacement parts are the same with the exception of the meter socket assembly.

Refer to Footnote 6 for correct catalog number.

6For ringless style meter packs with horn bypass, order 1MMMSB.

7For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMRC200T.

Utility Pull Section Cover

Wireway Cover

Meter Socket Assembly

Ten a nt B r e a k e r C over

Endwall

Meter Cover

Catalog Number

Meter

Pack

Utility

Pull Section

Cover

Wireway

Cover

Meter

Socket

Assembly

Tenant

Breaker

Cover

Meter

Cover

Endwall

(with

Knockouts)

Endwall

(without

Knockouts)

Vertical

Busbars

1MP2122R MP2122UCVR MPCCVR01 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 1MP122NWLK MP122NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP3124R MP1234UCVR MPCCVR04 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP4124R MP1234UCVR MPCCVR05 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM1224VBUS

1MP5126R MP1256UCVR MPCCVR02 21MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 3MP1256NWLK MP1256NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP6126R MP1256UCVR MPCCVR03 21MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 3MP1256NWLK MP1256NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP2204R MP202UCVR MPCCVR06 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM202VBUS

1MP3206R MP2034UCVR MPCCVR09 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM2023VBUS

1MP4206R MP2034UCVR MPCCVR10 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM204VBUS

1MP5206R MP2056UCVR MPCCVR07 41MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS

1MP6206R MP2056UCVR MPCCVR08 41MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS

1MP2122RRL 5MP2122LUCVR MPCCVR01 1MMMS 61MMBC1 1MMRC125 7MP122NWLK MP122NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP3124RRL 5MP1234UCVR MPCCVR04 1MMMS 61MMBC1 1MMRC125 7MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP4124RRL 5MP1234UCVR MPCCVR05 1MMMS 61MMBC1 1MMRC125 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM124VBUS

1MP5126RRL 5MP1256UCVR MPCCVR02 1MMMS 61MMBC1 1MMRC125 7MP1256NWLK MP1256NWL MM1223VBUS

1MP6126RRL 5MP1256UCVR MPCCVR03 1MMMS 61MMBC1 1MMRC125 7MP1256NWLK MP1256NW MM1223VBUS

1MP2204RRL 5MP202UCVR MPCCVR06 1MMMS 61MMBC2 1MMRC200 7MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM202VBUS

1MP3206RRL 5MP2034UCVR MPCCVR09 1MMMS 61MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM2023VBUS

1MP4206RRL 5MP2034UCVR MPCCVR10 1MMMS 61MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM204VBUS

1MP5206RRL 5MP2056UCVR MPCCVR07 1MMMS 61MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS

1MP6206RRL 5MP2056UCVR MPCCVR08 1MMMS 61MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS

V12-T6-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Meter Centers

Main Devices

Meter Main Device

End Caps

Terminal Box

Description

Catalog

Number

Right side (bumped) 47-28172-2A

Left side (flat) 47-24139A

Catalog Number

Terminal

Box

Front

Cover

Drip

Hood

Endwall

(with Knockouts)

Endwall

(without Knockouts)

1MTB800R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

1MTB1200R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

3MTB400R MTBFCVR1 MMDH4 MTBEW1 MTBEWNK01

3MTB600R MTBFCVR1 MMDH4 MTBEW1 MTBEWNK01

3MTB800R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

3MBT1200R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

Front Cover

Drip Hood

End Caps

Endwall

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-5

Meter Centers

Main Circuit Breaker

Catalog Number

Circuit

Breaker

Front

Cover

Drip

Hood

Endwall

(with Knockouts)

Endwall

(without Knockouts)

Main

Breaker Cover

1MCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MHCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

1MCB1400RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060

1MCB1400RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060

1MCB1600RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060

1MCB1600RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060

1MCB2000RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060

1MCB2000RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060

3MCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MHCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060

3MCB1400RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 —

3MCB1400RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 —

3MCB1600RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 —

3MCB1600RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 —

3MCB2000RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 —

3MCB2000RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 —

V12-T6-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Meter Centers

Main Fusible Switch

Main Bolted Pressure Contact Switch

Main Fusible Switch with Pullbox

Pullbox

Catalog Number

Fusible

Switch

Front

Cover

Drip

Hood

Endwall

(with Knockouts)

Endwall

(without Knockouts)

1MFS400RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1

1MFS400RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1

1MFS600RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1

1MFS600RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1

1MFS800RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1

1MFS800RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1

1MFS1200RB MFSFCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMEWNKO2

3MFS400RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1

3MFS400RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1

3MFS600RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1

3MFS600RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1

3MFS800RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1

3MFS800RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1

3MFS1200RB MFSFCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMWENKO2

Catalog Number

Bolted Pressure

Contact Switch

Front

Cover

Drip

Hood

Endwall

(with Knockouts)

Endwall

(without Knockouts)

1BPS1200RB No replacement parts available at this time.

1BPS1200RT

3BPS1200RB

3BPS1200RT

3BPS1600RB No replacement parts available at this time.

3BPS1600RT

3BPS2000RB

3BPS2000RT

Catalog Number

Fusible Switch

with Pullbox

Front

Cover

Pullbox

Cover

Drip

Hood

Endwall

(with Knockouts)

Endwall

(without Knockouts)

1MFS400RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

1MFS600RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

1MFS800RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

1MFS1200RUG MFPFCVR2 MFPBCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMEWNK02

3MFS400RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01

3MFS600RUG MFPFCVR3 MFPBCVR3 MMDH5 MMEW4 MMEWNK04

3MFS800RUG MFPFCVR3 MFPBCVR3 MMDH5 MMEW4 MMEWNK04

3MFS1200RUG MFPFCVR2 MFPBCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMEWNK02

Catalog Number

Pullbox

Front Cover

Pullbox Cover

Drip

Hood

Endwall

(with Knockouts)

Endwall

(without Knockouts)

1UGPB400R PBFCVR1 PBDH1 PBEW1 PBEWNK01

1UGPB800R PBFCVR2 PBDH2 PBEW2 PBEWNK02

1UGPB1200R PBFCVR3 PBDH3 PBEW3 PBEWNK03

3UGPB400R PBFCVR1 PBDH1 PBEW1 PBEWNK01

3UGPB800R PBFCVR2 PBDH2 PBEW2 PBEWNK02

3UGPB1200R PBFCVR3 PBDH3 PBEW3 PBEWNK03

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-7

Meter Centers

Residential Meter Stacks—Ring

Ring Style Meter Stack

Residential Meter Stacks—Ring

Notes

1Type 1 meter stacks do not come with breaker covers.

2For top position, order meter cover 1MMCP1T.

3For top position, order meter cover 1MMCP2T.

Catalog Number

Meter

Stack

Wireway

Cover

Meter

Socket

Assembly

Tenant

Breaker

Cover

Meter

Cover

Endwall

(with

Knockouts)

Endwall

(without

Knockouts)

Drip

Hood

Vertical

Busbar

3MM212 MMCCVR2123 — 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

3MM212R MMCCVR2123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

1MM312 MMCCVR3121 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

1MM312R MMCCVR3121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

3MM312 MMCCVR3123 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

3MM312R MMCCVR3123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

1MM412 MMCCVR4121 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS

1MM412R MMCCVR4121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS

3MM412 MMCCVR4123 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS

3MM412R MMCCVR4123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS

1MM512 MMCCVR5121 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS

1MM512R MMCCVR5121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS

3MM512 MMCCVR5123 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS

3MM512R MMCCVR5123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS

1MM612 MMCCVR6121 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS

1MM612R MMCCVR6121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS

3MM612 MMCCVR6123 1MMMS 11MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS

3MM612R MMCCVR6123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS

3MM220 MMCCVR2203 1MMMS 11MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

3MM220R MMCCVR2203R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

1MM320 MMCCVR3201 1MMMS 11MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

1MM320R MMCCVR3201R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

3MM320 MMCCVR3203 1MMMS 11MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

3MM320R MMCCVR3203R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

1MM420 MMCCVR4201 1MMMS 11MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS

1MM420R MMCCVR4201R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS

3MM420 MMCCVR4203 1MMMS 11MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS

3MM420R MMCCVR4203R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS

Ten a n t B reaker Cov e r

Wireway Cover

Meter Socket Assembly

Drip Hood

Meter Cover

Endwall

V12-T6-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Meter Centers

Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless

Commercial Meter Stacks

Commercial Meter Stacks (Lever Bypass)

Commercial Meter Stack (Test Bypass)

Notes

1For catalog numbers with a “B” suffix (ringless with horn bypass), all replacement parts are the same with the exception of the meter socket assembly.

Refer to Footnote 2 for correct catalog number.

2For ringless style meter stacks with horn bypass, order 1MMMSB meter socket assembly.

3For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMRC125T.

4Used for product built October 2002 and prior.

5Used for product built after October 2002.

Catalog Number

Meter

Stack

Wireway

Cover

Meter

Socket

Assembly

Tenant

Breaker

Cover

Meter

Cover

Endwall

(with

Knockouts)

Endwall

(without

Knockouts)

Drip

Hood

Vertical

Busbar

3MM212RRL 1MMCCVR2123R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 3MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

1MM312RRL 1MMCCVR3121R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 3MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

3MM312RRL 1MMCCVR3123R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 3MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS

1MM412RRL 1MMCCVR3121R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM124VBUS

3MM412RRL 1MMCCVR4123R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM124VBUS

1MM512RRL 1MMCCVR5121R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM125VBUS

3MM512RRL 1MMCCVR5123R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM125VBUS

1MM612RRL 1MMCCVR6121R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM126VBUS

3MM612RRL 1MMCCVR6123R 1MMMS 21MMBC1 1MMRC125 MM12NWLK MM12NWL MMDH3 MM126VBUS

3MM220RRL 1MMCCVR2203R 1MMMS 21MMBC2 1MMRC200 MM20NWLK MM20NWL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

1MM320RRL 1MMCCVR3201R 1MMMS 21MMBC2 1MMRC200 MM20NWLK MM20NWL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

3MM320RRL 1MMCCVR3203R 1MMMS 21MMBC2 1MMRC200 MM20NWLK MM20NWL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS

1MM420RRL 1MMCCVR4201R 1MMMS 21MMBC2 1MMRC200 MM20NWLK MM20NWL MMDH4 MM204VBUS

3MM420RRL 1MMCCVR4203R 1MMMS 21MMBC2 1MMRC200 MM20NWLK MM20NWL MMDH4 MM204VBUS

Catalog Number

Meter

Stack

Wireway

Cover

Meter

Socket

Assembly

Tenant

Breaker

Cover

Meter

Cover

Endwall

(with

Knockouts)

Endwall

(without

Knockouts)

Drip

Hood

35MM120R12 MSLWCVR1 — MSLMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

35MM220R12 MSLWCVR2 — MSLMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

35MM320R12 MSLWCVR3 — MSLMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

35MM420R12 MSLWCVR4 4MSLWCVR13 5MSLMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW2 MSLDH2

37MM140R12 MSLWCVR9 4MSLWCVR14 5MSLMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

37MM120R12 MSLWCVR5 4MSLWCVR15 5MSLMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

37MM220R12 MSLWCVR6 4MSLWCVR16 5MSLMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

37MM320R12 MSLWCVR7 4MSLWCVR17 5MSLMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW1 MSLDH1

37MM420R12 MSLWCVR8 4MSLWCVR18 5MSLMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 437MMSK1 5— MSLEW2 MSLDH2

Catalog Number

Meter Stack

Wireway

Cover

Meter

Socket

Assembly

Tenant

Breaker

Cover

Meter

Cover

Endwall

(with

Knockouts)

Endwall

(without

Knockouts)

Drip

Hood

35SS120RAB MSTWCVR1 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW1 MSTEWNK01 MSTDH1

35SS120RAC MSTWCVR2 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW1 MSTEWNK01 MSTDH1

35SS120RBC MSTWCVR3 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW1 MSTEWNK01 MSTDH1

35SS220RAB MSTWCVR4 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

35SS220RAC MSTWCVR5 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

35SS220RBC MSTWCVR6 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

35SS320RAB MSTWCVR7 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

35SS320RAC MSTWCVR8 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

35SS320RBC MSTWCVR9 MSTMSA1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

37SS120R MSTWCVR10 MSTMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW1 MSTEWNK01 MSTDH1

37SS220R MSTWCVR11 MSTMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

37SS320R MSTWCVR12 MSTMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-9

Meter Centers

Miscellaneous Parts

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 22-CD

Description

Part

Number

Phase balancing kit, single-phase commercial metering 99-4177-3

A and C phase balancing kit (3MM) 99-4184

Breaker mounting kit, commercial metering (one three-pole breaker per kit) 99-4176-2

Breaker mounting kit, 1MM/1MP, 200A, (one two-pole breaker per kit) 99-4176

Mounting kit, meter center 99-4172

Mounting kit, meter pack 99-4173

Bonding strap kit, all meter packs (except CECHA three and four socket) 99-4174

Bonding strap kit, CHECA three and four socket meter packs 99-2379

Sealing screw kit, ringless devices (six screws) 99-4175

Sealing screw kit, three and four meter sockets, ringless devices (four screws) 99-2589

Padlock bracket 99-2512-5

Mounting bracket kit—all breaker and fusible mains 99-4183

Mounting bracket kit—400 and 600A 3MTB 99-4183-3

Exterior breaker cover 49-6070

Publication

Number Description

RP32A01BTE Renewal parts data for new 1MM, 3MM, 35MM, 37MM, 35SS and 37SS

RP00501001E Renewal parts data for multiple metering

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08105001E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T7-1

Safety Switches

Safety Switch Product Family

7 Safety Switches

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2

V12-T7-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08105001E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Safety Switches

Safety Switch Product Family

Product Description

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®

series of safety switches

have a number of applications

from service entrance to

branch circuit protection. They

are also horsepower rated for

use as motor circuit switches.

Non-fusible safety switches

provide a means to manually

connect or disconnect the

load from the source. Fusible

safety switches provide a

means to manually open and

close a circuit and overcurrent

protection by means of

installed fuses. Safety

switches offer a wide variety

of switching capabilities with

general-duty, heavy-duty and

double-throw switches.

Product History

Eaton began manufacturing

safety switches with the

4103 line in 1957. In 1977,

the new 4105 line was

moved from the New York

plant to the manufacturing

facility in Lincoln, IL. The last

design change came in 1983,

where the manufacture of

the new K-Series switch was

moved to Eaton’s Cleveland,

TN, facility. The K-Series

design represents our

current product offering and

is still manufactured at the

Cleveland plant.

The Westinghouse safety

switch design and facilities

were sold to Thomas & Betts

in 1994. Prior to this, there

were various design and code

changes that caused changes

in catalog numbering and

utilization of the switches. In

1984, an “N” was added to

the middle of the catalog

numbers to signify the

new National Electrical

Code® (NEC®) regulations.

During this time period,

Westinghouse’s safety

switches were manufactured

in Beaver, PA. In 1989, the

manufacture of the switches

was moved to Vidalia, GA.

There was then another

code change in 1992 that

necessitated another change

in catalog numbering. The

previous “N” in the middle

of the catalog number was

deleted for the 400 to

1200A units.

Product History Time Line

Replacement Capabilities

Note: Specific applicable renewal parts for safety switches are identified on the inside door label of the product.

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest

(PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount

Symbol SWD-1, SWD-2,

SWD-3 for Safety Switches

Type

Operating

Handle Ground Neutral

Fuse

Base

Fuse

Block

Line

Shield

Operating

Mechanism

Switching

Base

K-Series ■ ■■■■■■ ■

Publication Number Description

RP00801001E Safety Switch Renewal Parts

CA08100003E Commercial Distribution Catalog, Volume 2, Tab 1 (Switching Devices)

CA08104001E Consulting Application Guide

CA08100006E Motor Control & Protection Catalog, Volume 5, Tab 8 (Rotary Disconnects)

PG00802002E Rotary Disconnect Product Guide

Cutler-Hammer 4103

Cutler-Hammer 4105

Cutler-Hammer K-Series

Westinghouse HFN365N

(Bacalyte Base)

Westinghouse HFN365N

Westinghouse HF365N

(Red Base, 400–1200A)

Eaton R-Series

Rotary Disconnects

Cutler-Hammer C362/C363

Rotary Disconnects

Eaton’s Pringle® Bolted

Pressure Switches

Product 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 Present

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T8-1

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Family of Dry-Type

Distribution Transformers

8 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-2

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-2

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-3

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-4

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-4

V12-T8-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Dry-Type Distribution

Transformers

Family of Dry-Type

Distribution Transformers

Product Description

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®

series of dry-type distribution

transformers are electrical

devices that transfer energy

by magnetic induction from

one circuit to another. They

are typically used to change

the voltage in an electric

power system from its

distribution level to the

proper level for practical

and safe use.

Typical loads for dry-type

distribution transformers

include lighting, heating,

air conditioning, fans and

machine tools. Such loads

are found in commercial,

institutional, industrial and

residential structures.

Different types of dry-type

distribution transformers

are used for various

applications throughout

facilities. Therefore, dry-type

distribution transformers are

classified in distinct product

groups as follows: general

purpose—sand and resin

encapsulated (EP and EPT);

general purpose—ventilated

(DS-3, DT-3, CSL3-2007,

NEMA® Premium®); energy

efficient (NEMA TP-1);

shielded isolation; motor

drive isolation (MD);

nonlinear (KT); mini–power

center (MPC); hazardous

location, Buck-Boost and

industrial control (MTA

and MTC).

Product History

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

The first transformer

built in the United States

was manufactured by

Westinghouse Electric in

1892. It was a 2 kVA dry-

type transformer. For over

a century, Westinghouse

manufactured numerous

varieties of transformers

for countless applications

worldwide.

The Westinghouse design

transformer is now available

through Eaton. Dry-type

transformers, the workhorse

of modern industry, are the

foundation of modern AC

power distribution. It is a

transformer that solves the

problems of maintenance,

installation, safety and

efficiency by using air to cool

the coils instead of liquids.

Many older transformers,

which in some cases pre-date

the product families listed

above, can be updated to the

modern designs currently

manufactured by Eaton.

Product History Time Line

DS-3

DT-3

MTA

MTC

EPT

MPC

NEMA TP-1

HMT

CSL3

NEMA Premium

Type 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 Present

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T8-3

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Parts

Terminal Lug Kits for Type DT-3 Transformers 1

Rodent Screens Replacement Parts for Mini–Power Centers

Notes

1Lugs are rated Al/Cu and are suitable for use with either aluminum or copper conductors.

2Effective June 1, 2001, frame numbers have a prefix of FR, i.e., FR819. Dimensions, accessories,

etc. are still applicable as if the FR did not exist.

Typical Sizing

Terminal Lugs

Cable Range

Terminal Lugs

Quantity

Hardware

Bolt Size

Hardware

Quantity

Catalog

Number

15–37.5 kVA single-phase

15–45 kVA three-phase

#14–#2

#6–250 kcmil

1/4–20 x 3/4 8 LKS1

50–75 kVA single-phase

75–112.5 kVA three-phase

#6–250 kcmil 12 1/4–20 x 3/4

1/4–20 x 1-3/4

LKS2

100–167 kVA single-phase

150–300 kVA three-phase

#6–250 kcmil

#2–600 kcmil

1/4–20 x 3/4

3/8–16 x 2

LKS3

500 kVA three-phase #2–600 kcmil 29 3/8–16 x 2 18 LKS4

Description

Frame

Size(s) 2

Catalog

Number

Rodent screens are used to discourage

entry by birds or rodents.

908, 909 RS01

910A, 911, 912 RS02

913B, 914B, 915B RS03

916 RS04

917, 918, 918A RS05

919, 920 RS06

916A, 916B RS07

922 RS08

923 RS09

814, 821 RS11

815 RS12

816 RS13

817, 818 RS14

819, 820 RS15

912B RS16

914D, 915D RS17

924 RS18

928 RS19

929 RS20

Frame

Deadfront Cover

(Breaker Cover)

Part Number

Front Cover

Part Number

283 47-37503 7074C98H04

284 47-37503-2 7074C98H01

285 47-37503-3 7074C98H02

286 47-37503-4 7074C98H02

287 47-37503-5 7074C98H03

289 47-37459 7074C44H01

290 47-37459-2 7074C44H02

291 47-37459-3 7074C44H03

289A 47-42072-1 7074C44H01

290A 47-42072-2 7074C44H02

291A 47-42072-3 7074C44H03

V12-T8-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Parts

Case Parts for Ventilated Transformers

Further Information Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ (Discount Symbol DT-1)

Notes

1Effective June 1, 2001 frame numbers have a prefix of FR, i.e., FR819.

Dimensions, accessories, etc. are still applicable as if the FR did not exist.

Parts listed are for standard catalog listed transformers. Units with modifications may require

different parts. (Frame No. from transformer nameplate required.) Transformer nameplate and

UL® label are not field replaceable.

Frame(s) 1

Panels

Top Cover

Part Number

Front or Back

Part Number

Side (Two Required Per Transformer)

Part Number

Bottom

Part Number

Three-Phase, 600V Class

908, 909 7073C37P01 1714C44P03 7073C20P05 1714C45P01

910, 911, 912 1714C46P01 1714C44P01 7073C20P01 1714C45P01

913A, 914A, 915A 1714C47P03 1714C44P07 7073C20P02 1714C45P02

916 1714C60P01 1714C56P01 7073C20P03 1714C58P01

917, 918 1714C65P01 1714C64P01 7073C20P04 1714C67P01

918A 47-41801 47-41800 47-41799 47-41802

919, 920 2D46331P03 (upper panel)

2D46331P04 (lower panel)

2D46332P01

2D46331P01 (cutout cover plate)

—

2D46331P02

922 2D46391H03 (back upper panel)

2D46391H06 (front upper panel)

2D46391H08 (lower panel)

2D46392H01 —

—

2D46391H02

923 47-45927-1 47-45925-1 47-45759-1 47-45926-1

910A, 911A, 912A 47-40592 47-40591 47-40589 1714C45P01

913B, 914B, 915B 47-40580 47-40578

47-41789

47-41792 1714C45P02

916A 47-41790 47-41789 47-41788 47-41791

FR916B 47-47351-1 47-47350-1 47-47-347-1 47-41791

912B 47-49323-1 47-49321-1 47-51964-1 47-49322-1

914D, 915D 47-49317-1 47-49315-1 47-51965-1 47-49316-1

924 47-53089-2 (upper panel)

47-53089-1 (lower panel)

47-53088-1 47-53087-1 47-53089-1

928 47-53777-1 47-53779-1 47-53778-1 1714C67H15

929 47-53786-1 47-53788-1 47-53787-1 47-41802-3

Single-Phase, 600V Class

809 7073C16P03 7073C18P04 7073C14P03 7073C17P01

810, 811, 835 7073C16P01 7073C18P01 7073C14P01 7073C17P01

812, 813, 836, 837, 838 7073C16P02 7073C18P02 7073C14P02 7073C17P02

814 7073C54P01 7073C18P05 7073C14P04 7073C17P03

815 47-39433 47-39430 47-39429 47-39431

816 47-40452 47-40451 47-40449 47-40453

817, 818 47-40457 47-40456 47-40454 47-40458

819, 820 47-40574 47-40573 47-40459 47-40575

Publication

Number Description

B.36B.01.S.E K-Factor Dry-Type Distribution Transformer Brochure

CA08100003E Commercial Distribution Catalog, Volume 2, Tab 2

CA08104001E Consulting Application Guide

B1228A Industrial Control Transformer Binder

B.36F.01.S.E Mini–Power Center Brochure

B.36D.01.S.E Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Location Transformer Brochure

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-1

Busway (Low Voltage)

Circuit Breaker Enclosure

9 Busway (Low Voltage)

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-2

Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-3

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-4

Plug-In Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-4

Vintage Busway Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-4

100 Ampere Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-6

Standard Plug-In Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-7

Standard and Low Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-8

Quick-Assembled Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-10

CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-11

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-14

Clipper Power Systems, Busway TVSS Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-14

IQ Energy Sentinel for Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-15

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-15

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-15

V12-T9-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Standard Plug-In

Product Description

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®

low voltage busway consists

of aluminum or copper bars

inside a metal housing

used for power distribution.

Busway is available in

ampere ratings of 100–5000A.

Busway is available as feeder

(indoor or outdoor) and plug-in.

Feeder busway routes power

from point-to-point, whereas

plug-in busway allows for

power to be tapped off

along a run as needed.

Busway is typically used in

manufacturing buildings and

high-rise office buildings.

Product History

Westinghouse began

marketing low voltage

busway in 1938. The first

product offering was power

distribution busway, using a

multiple bolt joint that later

evolved into standard plug-in

busway. Victory bus duct was

developed during the Second

World War to comply with

federal limitations placed on

usage of materials such as

steel and copper, which were

critical to the war effort. In

1947, Westinghouse began

manufacturing busway at

the newly acquired facility in

Beaver, PA, with standard

plug-in and feeder bus in

ratings up to 1500A. All of

these early designs used

separated, uninsulated

busbars inside a totally

enclosed or perforated

steel housing.

In 1951, low impedance

feeder busway was

introduced as the first

design to use heat-shrinkable

tubing for insulation on the

busbars and a ventilated steel

housing. An internal ground

bus was not available with

this product line, but

provisions were made for

mounting an external ground

bus directly to the busway

housing. Low impedance

feeder and standard plug-in

busway accounted for the

majority of busway business

written by Westinghouse

through the 1950s and into

the 1960s. Low impedance

plug-in busway was

introduced in 1961. With

this design, the product

offering was expanded to

a maximum of 5000A for

feeder and 4000A for plug-in.

During the 1950s, various

other designs were introduced

to meet specific customer

needs. Westinghouse Lifeline

Unibus, rolled out in 1955,

provided low impedance

characteristics with plug-in

openings and incorporated

flexible armored cable

into the design for use as

elbows, offsets and flat to

edgewise adapters.

Westinghouse high frequency

busway was introduced in

1958 to address the inherent

problems of transmitting

power at frequencies from

180 to 20,000 Hz. Cutler-

Hammer high frequency BV

(balanced voltage) busway

was also marketed during

the late 1950s and early

1960s. Westinghouse high

frequency busway and

Cutler-Hammer BV busway

both found success in

aircraft manufacturing plants,

industrial induction heating

systems, military missiles

and radar bases.

Electric utility busway

was also introduced by

Westinghouse in 1958 and

was designed to conduct

direct current with low

voltage drop. By 1963,

electric utility busway had

been expanded to meet the

growing industrial market

for direct current power and

was marketed simply as DC

busway. This product line

was applied to feeding

plating processes, welding

installations, mill drives

and motors.

In 1958, Westinghouse sold

the rights to the Life Line

Unibus product line to EDP

of Allentown, PA, which

marketed EDP Unibus until

1962 when EDP became

a wholly owned subsidiary

of Eaton. Eaton successfully

marketed Unibus until

the product line was

discontinued in 1974.

In 1966, Westinghouse

introduced its first true

sandwich bus design with

H5000 feeder busway.

H5000 was also the first

single bolt joint design

offered by Westinghouse and

it initially used a PVC shrink

tubing and later a Mylar®

wrap for busbar insulation.

A combination of steel and

aluminum channels were

used to form a lightweight

non-magnetic housing. The

grounding method for H5000

was similar to low impedance

busway and an external

ground bus mounted onto

the housing was the only

offering. H5000 plug-in

busway rolled out in 1968

as a non-sandwich design

with separated and

uninsulated busbars.

In 1970, the Eaton’s Cutler-

Hammer Bethlehem, PA,

plant introduced CP2

SAFETYBUS that used an

innovative single bolt, bridge

joint design with a steel

housing for plug-in, and a

combination of steel and

aluminum channels for the

feeder housing. CP2 used

a Mylar wrap for busbar

insulation and an Alstan®

process for plating. The

feeder busway was a

sandwich design while the

plug-in design used separated

busbars that were braced and

supported by corrugations

formed in the housing sides.

Standard Plug-In

Low Impedance Feeder

H5000 Feeder

High Frequency

Electric Utility (DC)

H5000 Plug-In 225–1000A

Low Impedance Plug-In

Current Limiting

Typical Pow-R-Way Plug-In Straight Length Typical Pow-R-Way II Plug-In Straight Length

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-3

Busway (Low Voltage)

Westinghouse introduced

the Pow-R-Way product

line in 1971. Pow-R-Way

employed the sandwich

design in both feeder and

plug-in. At that time, Pow-R-

Way used a combination of

PVC, applied by the fluidized

bed process, and Mylar

sheeting for busbar insulation

that achieved a Class A,

105°C rating. Silver-plating of

all joint and contact surfaces

was applied by a Zincate

process. Pow-R-Way is a

bolt-end/slot-end design with

a single bolt connection at

the joint and is rated from

600 to 5000A. Pow-R-Way II

was rolled out in 1975 with

ratings of 225A and 400A in

feeder and plug-in. Pow-R-

Way II is a single, captive

bolt per bar design for indoor,

horizontal applications only.

During 1980, the Cutler-

Hammer busway design was

upgraded and they began

marketing CP3 SAFETYBUS.

CP3 featured an improved

bridge joint package and a

polyethylene terephthalate

wrap for busbar insulation.

CP3 maintained the CP2

housing design with busbar

separation in the plug-in

product configuration.

Cutler-Hammer CP4

SAFETYBUS was introduced

in 1985 and incorporated

the sandwich design into the

plug-in busway. CP4 featured

a UL® recognized case ground

path rating and 130°C Mylar

busbar insulation. CP4 used

the CP3 bridge joint package

and accepted CP2 and CP3

bus plugs. The CP4 product

line was successful in both

the commercial and industrial

markets until it was

discontinued in 1994.

In 1988, Westinghouse

moved the busway product

line to the Greenwood, SC,

manufacturing facility.

At that time, an improved

Alstan plating process was

implemented for silver-

plating the joint and contact

surfaces. In 1993, the

automated fluidized bed

process was changed to

Class B, 130°C, epoxy

insulation.

Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-

Way III® was introduced in

1997. As in the past, specific

customer needs have driven

the design of this product

line. High short-circuit ratings,

finger-safe protection at the

plug-in openings, integral

housing ground path, two-

piece extruded aluminum

housing and an optional

200% neutral are just some

of the features with this

product line.

Product History Time Line

Power distribution bus

Victory bus duct

Standard plug-in

Low impedance bus

Life line Unibus

High frequency bus

Cutler-Hammer BV bus

Current limiting bus

Electric utility bus

DC busway

100 ampere busway

Low impedance plug-in

Cutler-Hammer Unibus

H5000 feeder

H5000 plug-in

Cutler-Hammer CP2

Pow-R-Way

Pow-R-Way II

Cutler-Hammer CP3

Cutler-Hammer CP4

Pow-R-Way III

Product 1935 1940 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

V12-T9-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—Plug-In Units

Replacement Capabilities

Plug-In Units

Replacement Capabilities

Notes

1Busway adapter (transposition) available from old line to Pow-R-Way III only.

2Fusible units only. No breaker units available.

Busway Types Bus Adapter 1Plugs

Power distribution bus No No No

Victory bus duct No No No

Standard plug-in Yes No Yes

Low impedance bus No Yes —

Life line Unibus No No No

High frequency bus No No No

Cutler-Hammer BV bus No No No

Current limiting bus No Yes —

Electric utility bus No No No

DC busway No No No

100 ampere busway Yes No Yes

Low impedance plug-in No Yes Yes

Cutler-Hammer Unibus No No No

H5000 feeder No No —

H5000 plug-in No No Yes

Cutler-Hammer CP2 No Yes Yes 2

Pow-R-Way Yes No Yes

Pow-R-Way II Yes No Yes

Cutler-Hammer CP3 No Yes Yes 2

Cutler-Hammer CP4 No Yes Yes 2

Pow-R-Way III Yes — Yes

Vintage Busway Products

●Replacement pieces or

additions to

vintage Cutler-

Hammer bus (CP2, CP3,

CP4) are being handled

whenever possible by

making transition to

Eaton’s current design

Pow-R-Way III bus

●Obtain style number

and complete nameplate

information from existing

busway and contact your

local Eaton Field Sales

office for pricing and

availability

●Plugs for vintage

Cutler-Hammer bus,

Pow-R-Way bus, and

Pow-R-Way III bus are

not interchangeable

Pow-R-Way Plug-In Unit

Stab base assembly for

breaker and fusible types.

Top View

Bottom View

Vintage Busway Plug-In Unit

Stab base assembly for

breaker and fusible types.

Top View

Bottom View

Fuse Base Assembly

For all busway.

30A Maximum

200A Maximum

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-5

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—Plug-In Units

Originally a Westinghouse Product

Breaker Plug-In Units Fusible Plug-In Units

Notes

1Check Vista for pricing and minimum order quantities.

2Replacement stab base assembly and fuse base style numbers specified correspond to the

most recent design of the reference catalog number for the complete plug-in unit. For

verification that this style number is the correct replacement for your existing plug-in unit,

contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

Reference Catalog Number for

Existing Complete Plug-In Unit 1

Replacement Stab

Base Assembly

Pow-R-Way

IBPFB 2528D04G01

IBPFBP 2528D04G01

IBPFCL 2528D04G01

IBPFD 2528D04G01

IBPJD 2528D04G12

IBPKB 2528D04G07

IBPKD 2554D03G06

IBPLAP 2532D45G06

IBPLB 2554D03G05

IBPLCL 2554D03G03

IBPMC 2537D17G03

IBPNBP 2537D17G07

Standard Plug-In and Low Impedance Busway 2

BPFB 2528D03G01

BPFBP 2528D03G01

BPFCL 2528D03G01

BPFD 2528D03G01

BPJD 2528D03G10

BPKB 2528D03G07

BPKD 2537D20G06

BPLB 2537D20G05

BPLCL 2537D20G01

BPMC 374D017G03

Reference Catalog Number

for Existing Complete Plug-In Unit 1

Replacement Stab

Base Assembly

Replacement

Fuse Base

Pow-R-Way

ITAP321 2528D04G02 5009D52G01

ITAP361 2528D04G02 5009D52G13

ITAP322 2528D04G02 5009D52G03

ITAP362 2528D04G02 5009D52G04

ITAP323 2528D04G02 5009D52G05

ITAP363 2528D04G02 5009D52G05

ITAP324 767A373G02 2532D78G01

ITAP364 767A373G02 2532D78G01

ITAP325 2554D03G03 627B426G02

ITAP365 2554D03G03 627B426G02

ITAP326 2554D03G02 627B426G04

ITAP366 2554D03G02 627B426G04

ITAP367 2554D03G01 2553D93G02

ITAP361H 2528D04G02 2535D92G09

ITAP362H 2528D04G02 2535D92G10

ITAP363H 2528D04G02 2535D92G11

ITAP364H 2568D13G09 2532D78G02

ITAP365H 2554D03G03 1205C02G02

ITAP366H 2554D03G02 2599D97G02

Standard Plug-In and Low Impedance Busway 2

TAP321 2528D03G02 5009D52G01

TAP361 2528D03G02 5009D52G13

TAP322 2528D03G02 5009D52G03

TAP362 2528D03G02 5009D52G04

TAP323 2528D03G02 5009D52G05

TAP363 2528D03G02 5009D52G05

TAP324 767A373G01 2532D78G01

TAP364 767A373G01 2532D78G01

TAP325 2537D20G04 627B426G02

TAP365 2537D20G04 627B426G02

TAP326 2584D73G01 627B426G04

TAP366 2584D73G01 627B426G02

TAP361H 2528D03G02 2535D92G09

TAP362H 2528D03G02 2535D92G10

TAP363H 2528D03G02 2535D92G11

TAP364H 767A373G01 2532D78G02

TAP365H 2537D20G04 1448D09G05

TAP366H 374D017G03 373D043G06

V12-T9-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—100 Ampere Busway

100 Ampere Busway

Elbow, Busway and Cable Tap Box

100 Ampere Busway—Copper

(Includes 50% Internal Ground Bar)

Cable Tap Boxes

Description

Three-Phase,

Three-Wire

600V Maximum

Catalog Number

Three-Phase,

Four-Wire FN

277/480V

Catalog Number

Single-Phase,

Three-Wire

120/240V

Catalog Number

Straight Lengths

10 ft (3048 mm) CST13G CST14G CST13NG

5 ft (1524 mm) CST135G CST145G CST13N5G

3 ft (914.4 mm) CST133G CST143G CST13N3G

2 ft (609.6 mm) CST132G CST142G CST13N2G

1 ft (304.8 mm) CST131G CST141G CST13N1G

Elbows

Forward CFE13G CFE14G CFE13NG

Rearward CRE13G CRE14G CRE13NG

Upward CUE13G CUE14G CUE13NG

Downward CDE13G CDE14G CDE13NG

Tees

Forward CFT13G CFT14G CFT13NG

Rearward CRT13G CRT14G CRT13NG

Upward CUT13G CUT14G CUT13NG

Downward CDT13G CDT14G CDT13NG

Description

Three-Wire or Four-Wire

Catalog Number

Ground (If Required)

Catalog Number

Plug-in PIB14 PIGS100

End EB14 GL100

Center CBIB14G (Included)

Fusible Plug-In Units

Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

Accessories

End Closers—EC1 Replacement Outlet

Cover—OC1

Voltage

Rating

Ampere

Rating

Fusible Enclosure

Catalog Number

Ground (If Required)

Catalog Number

240 30 FAN321 PIGS100

240 60 FAN322 PIGS100

240 100 FAN323 PIGS100

600 30 FAN361 PIGS100

600 60 FAN362 PIGS100

600 100 FAN363 PIGS100

Voltage

Rating

Ampere

Rating

Circuit

Breaker

Enclosure

Catalog

Number

Receptacle

Enclosure

Catalog

Number

Ground

(If Required)

Catalog

Number

External Handle

(Required for

Hook-Stick

Operation)

Catalog

Number

QUICKLAG HQP 15–50 PINQP LCNQP PIGS100 HMQP

ED, EHD, FDB 15–100 PINFD LCNFD PIGS100 HMFD

Item Catalog Number

End closer EC1

Outlet cover OC1

Edgwise hanger EH1

“C” clamp hanger FH1

Slip-on wall flange WF1

LJoint

4.00

(101.6)

Outlet Cover

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-7

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—Standard Plug-In Busway

Standard Plug-In Busway

Originally a Westinghouse Product

Typical Standard Plug-In Straight Length

Catalog Numbers

Cantilever Hangers Miscellaneous Accessories

Notes

1When ordering from stock, all hangers must be shown as a separate item marked included

in price.

2Suitable for horizontal mounting only. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for pricing

and lead times.

3If UCTB is used on end of run, an end closer must also be used for that end.

4Normally available from stock.

Duct Only Includes One Hanger

per 10 Feet of Busway 1

Catalog Number

for 10-Feet Lengths 2

Fittings

(Price of Footage Through Each Fitting Must be Added)

Ampere

Rating

Aluminum

Catalog Number

Copper

Catalog Number

Universal Cable Tap

Box (Lugs Included) 3

Catalog Number

End Closer

Aluminum

Catalog Number

Copper

Catalog Number

Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 600V with 50% Ground Bus

225 AST302G ST302G UCTB302G UEC10 UEC10

400 AST304G ST304G UCTB304G UEC20 UEC15

600 AST306G ST306G UCTB306G UEC35 UEC20

800 AST308G ST308G UCTB308G UEC50 UEC30

1000 AST310G ST310G UCTB310G UEC60 UEC40

Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Full Neutral, 277/480V with 50% Ground Bus

225 AST502G ST502G UCTB402G UEC10 UEC10

400 AST504G ST504G UCTB404G UEC20 UEC15

600 AST506G ST506G UCTB406G UEC35 UEC20

800 AST508G ST508G UCTB408G UEC50 UEC30

1000 AST510G ST510G UCTB410G UEC60 UEC40

Ampere

Rating

Aluminum

Catalog Number

Copper

Catalog Number

Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 600V

225 CLH10 CLH10

400 CLH20 CLH15

600 CLH35 CLH20

800 CLH50 CLH30

1000 CLH60 CLH40

Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Full Neutral, 277/480V

225 CLH10 CLH10

400 CLH20 CLH15

600 CLH35 CLH20

800 CLH50 CLH30

1000 CLH60 CLH40

Description

Wall/floor flange

Extra cantilever hangers

Hookstick kit (8–14 feet) HS8-14 4

Renewal Parts

Joint hardware–EXWK10

Access covers (two)

Splice plates (two)

V12-T9-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—Standard and Low Impedance

Standard and Low Impedance

Originally a Westinghouse Product

Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit (Closed)

Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit (Open)

The enclosure, circuit

breaker, neutral and

ground are ordered and

shipped assembled.

Note: Breaker and fusible

plugs must be ordered as

assembled units. See V12-T9-10

for instructions on how to build

the assembled catalog numbers.

Note: For units mounting at the

joint and feeder type ducts, see

bolt-on units—standard plug-in,

low impedance and H5000.

Catalog Numbers

Breaker

Frame

Enclosure

Catalog

Number

Neutral (If Required) 1Ground

(If Required) 2

Catalog

Number

Standard Plug-In

Catalog Number

Low Impedance

Catalog Number

EHD, FDB,

FD, HFD, FDC

(15–150A)

BPFD 3N110 (15–110A) 3

N250KB (125–150A) 3

ZN110 (15–110A) 3

ZN250KB (125–150A)

GS104 3

JDB, JD, HJD,

JDC (70–250A)

BPJD 3N250KB (125–250A) 3ZN250KB (125–250A) 3GS104 3

KDB, KD,

HKD, KDC

(125–400A)

BPKD N400 (250–400A) 3ZN400 (250–400A) 3GS104 3

LDB, LD,

HLD, LDC

(300–600A)

BPLD 44 4

MC, HMC

(500–800A)

BPMD N/A 44

NC, HNC

(900–1200A)

BPND 44 4

FB (TRI-PAC®)

(15–100A)

BPFBP N110 (15–100A) 3ZN110 (15–100A) GS104 3

LA (TRI-PAC)

(125–400A)

BPLAP 5N400 (125–400A) 3ZN400 (125–400A) 3GS104 3

NB (TRI-PAC)

(500–800A)

BPNBP 44 GS104 3

Circuit Breaker Selection and Interrupting Ratings

Notes

1Full neutral. For half neutral, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

2Not available for low impedance bus duct.

3Normally available from stock.

4Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for delivery. Order by description on suffix BUS.

5Obsolete; no longer available.

Breaker

Frame

Ampere

Rating

Symmetrical Amperes

240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac

EHD 15–60 18,000 14,000 —

70–100 18,000 14,000 —

FDB 15–60 18,000 14,000 14,000

70–100 18,000 14,000 14,000

110–150 18,000 14,000 14,000

FD 15–60 65,000 25,000 18,000

70–100 65,000 25,000 18,000

110–150 65,000 25,000 18,000

HFD 15–60 100,000 65,000 25,000

70–100 100,000 65,000 25,000

110–150 100,000 65,000 25,000

FDC 15–60 200,000 100,000 50,000

70–100 200,000 100,000 50,000

110–150 200,000 100,000 50,000

JDB 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000

250 65,000 25,000 18,000

JD 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000

250 65,000 25,000 18,000

HJD 70–225 100,000 65,000 25,000

250 100,000 65,000 25,000

JDC 70–225 200,000 100,000 50,000

250 200,000 100,000 50,000

KDB 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000

KD 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000

HKD 250–400 100,000 65,000 35,000

KDC 250–400 200,000 100,000 50,000

LDB 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000

LD 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000

HLD 300–600 100,000 65,000 35,000

LDC 300–600 200,000 100,000 50,000

MDL 400–800 65,000 50,000 25,000

HMDL 400–800 100,000 65,000 35,000

NP 400–1200 65,000 50,000 25,000

HND 400–1200 100,000 65,000 35,000

FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100 200,000 200,000 200,000

LA (TRI-PAC) 70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000

70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000

NB (TRI-PAC) 600–800 200,000 200,000 200,000

600–800 200,000 150,000 200,000

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-9

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—Standard and Low Impedance

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Fusible Plug-In Units

●For standard plug-in and

low impedance plug-in

busway (not for use on

Pow-R-Way busway.

Not available for low

impedance bus duct)

●Fuses not included

●Mechanical lugs only

●Plug-in unit, neutral and

ground can be ordered

separately and shipped

unassembled

Fusible TAP

Special Industry Fusible

Plug-In Units

●Special industry plugs

are I2t rated

●Knockouts are not provided

●Grounding lug included

on 200A and above

●Lugs ordered and

shipped separately

●Fuses are not included

●If neutral or ground

assembly is required,

contact your local Eaton

Field Sales office

Fusible Switch Horsepower Ratings

Fusible Plug-In Units 1

Special Industry Fusible Plug-In Units

Three-Wire—Ground Detector and Neutralizer Plug

Notes

1Not available for low impedance bus duct.

2Normally available from stock.

3Only half neutral available. For full neutral, use a TAP366BO or TAP326BO unit.

4Must be factory assembled. Order by description on suffix BUS.

5Plug-in unit not available. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for bolt-on type.

6Must be factory assembled. Order by description.

Ampere

Rating

240V 480V 600V

NEC®

Standard

Time

Delay

NEC

Standard

Time

Delay

NEC

Standard

Time

Delay

3037-1/25157-1/220

60 7-1/2 15 15 30 15 50

100153025603075

20025605012560150

400 50 100 100 250 125 350

600 75 100 200 400 200 500

Ampere

Rating

600V

Catalog

Number

240V

Catalog

Number

Neutral (If Required) Ground

(If Required)

Catalog

Number

Class R Fuse Clips

(If Required)

Standard Plug-In

Catalog

Number

Low Impedance

Catalog

Number

600V

Catalog

Number

240V

Catalog

Number

30 TAP361 2TAP321 2N110 2ZN110 2GS104 12 RFK161 2RFK121 2

60 TAP362 2TAP322 2N110 2ZN110 2GS104 12 RFK262 2RFK222 2

100 TAP363 2TAP323 2N110 2ZN110 2GS104 12 RFK464 2RFK464 2

200 TAP364 2TAP324 2N250KB 2ZN250KB GS104

12 RFK464 2RFK464 2

400 TAP365 TAP325 N400 22 GS104 12 RFK666 2RFK666 2

600 TAP366 TAP326 N400 23 ZN400 24 RFK666 2RFK666 2

800 55—4———

Three-Wire, 600V

Plug-In Unit

If Required Terminal Kits for Industry Fusible Plug-In Units

Neutral

Catalog

Number

Ground

Catalog

Number

Mechanical Lugs 2Compression Lugs 2

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog

Number

Lugs Per

Phase

Wire

Size

Catalog

Number

Lugs Per

Phase

Wire

Size

30 TAP361H 66 MTK30SC 1 #14–#4 CTK30SC 1 #12–#10

60 TAP362H 66 MTK160SC 1 #14–1/0 CTK60SC 1#8

100 TAP363H 66MTK160SC 1 #14–1/0 CTK100SC 1#4

200 TAP364H 66MTK200SC 1 #6–350 kcmil CTK200BSC 12/0

400 TAP365H 66MTK400DPW 2 #2–4/0 CTK400SPW 1 750 kcmil

600 TAP366H 66MTK600DFW 2 500 kcmil CTK600DPM 2 500 kcmil

Maximum Volts Catalog Number

600 GND36

V12-T9-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—Quick-Assembled Plugs

Quick-Assembled Plugs

The Mod Center in

Spartanburg, SC, will perform

the assembly of the bus

plugs in 3 days or less for

most orders. Bid Manager™

enables you to “build” the

appropriate catalog number.

When the order is entered

in Bid Manager, it will

automatically transfer the

order to suffix “QAP.”

Please see the following

rules for building the

assembled catalog number.

Catalog Numbering Selection

Quick-Assembled Plugs—Breaker Unit 12

Quick-Assembled Plugs—Fusible Unit 234

Notes

1Do not leave space between characters. Example: P3BHFD3015GN.

2Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for help in assigning a catalog number for a specific application.

3Do not leave space between characters. Example: P3F264RGN.

4“H” clips are standard for Pow-R-Way and vintage busway products unless specified by adding “R” or “J” in the catalog number.

Example: P3F264RGN, ITAP361JGN.

Neutral Options

N= 100% neutral

N2 = 200% neutral

(PRW III only)

ZN =Low Z

(old line only)

Trip Rating

(Example 015,

060, 150, 400)

Breaker Frame

(Example FD,

JDC, KDB)

P3B HFD 3015 G N

Bus Style

P3B =PRWIII

IBP =PRW

BP = Old-line

Three-Pole

Only

Ground Option

G= 50% internal

I= Isolated ground

(PRWIII only)

Neutral Options

N= 100% neutral

N2 = 200% neutral

(PRW III only)

ZN =Low Z

(old line only)

Fuse Clips

R or J ≤ 600A

T or L for 800A

Ground Options

G= 50%

I= Isolated (PRW III only)

Ampere

1 = 30

2 = 60

3 = 100

4 = 200

5 = 400

6 = 600

7 = 800

Voltage

6 = 600V

2 = 240V

P3F 3 6 4 R G N

Bus Style

P3F =PRWIII

ITAP =PRW

TAP = Old-line

Three-Pole Only

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-11

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

Originally a Westinghouse Product

Bolt-On Units 1

Circuit Breaker Selection and Interrupting Ratings 6

Notes

1Factory assembled. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for delivery and order entry

information. When ordering, you must specify:

1. Load left or load right.

2. Front or rear mounting.

3. Type of busway to which unit is to be mounted.

2Full neutral. For half neutral, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

3Not available for low impedance bus duct.

4Order by description with bolt-on unit.

5These bolt-on units include an adapter for mounting at the joint. They do not require a power

take-off unit.

6Refer to the current Price and Availability Digest (PAD) for breaker list prices.

Breaker

Frame

Ampere

Rating

Enclosure

Catalog

Number

Neutral 2

(If Required)

Catalog

Number

Ground 3

(If Required)

Catalog

Number

Circuit Breaker Bolt-On Units (Breaker Not Included)

EHD, FDB, FD

HFD, FDC

15–150 BPFDBO 44

JDB, JD, HJD,

JDC

125–250 BPJDBO 44

KDB, KD, HKD,

KDC

250–400 BPKDBO 44

LDB, LD, HLD

LDC

300–600 BPLDBO 44

MDL, HMDL 400–800 BPMDBO 44

FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100 BPFBPBO 44

LA (TRI-PAC) 125–400 BPLAPBO 44

NB (TRI-PAC) 500–800 BPNBPBO 44

Fusible Bolt-On Units 5

240V 30 TAP321BO 44

60 TAP322BO 44

100 TAP323BO 44

200 TAP324BO 44

400 TAP325BO 44

600 TAP326BO 44

800 TAP327BO 44

600V 30 TAP361BO 44

60 TAP362BO 44

100 TAP363BO 44

200 TAP364BO 44

400 TAP365BO 44

600 TAP366BO 44

800 TAP367BO 44

Breaker

Frame

Ampere

Rating

Symmetrical Amperes

240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac

EHD 15–60 18,000 14,000 —

70–100 18,000 14,000 —

FDB 15–60 18,000 14,000 14,000

70–100 18,000 14,000 14,000

110–150 18,000 14,000 14,000

FD 15–60 65,000 25,000 18,000

70–100 65,000 25,000 18,000

110–150 65,000 25,000 18,000

HFD 15–60 100,000 65,000 25,000

70–100 100,000 65,000 25,000

110–150 100,000 65,000 25,000

FDC 15–60 200,000 100,000 50,000

70–100 200,000 100,000 50,000

110–150 200,000 100,000 50,000

JDB 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000

250 65,000 25,000 18,000

JD 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000

250 65,000 25,000 18,000

HJD 70–225 100,000 65,000 25,000

250 100,000 65,000 25,000

JDC 70–225 200,000 100,000 50,000

250 200,000 100,000 50,000

KDB 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000

KD 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000

HKD 250–400 100,000 65,000 35,000

KDC 250–400 200,000 100,000 50,000

LDB 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000

LD 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000

HLD 300–600 100,000 65,000 35,000

LDC 300–600 200,000 100,000 50,000

MDL 400–800 65,000 50,000 25,000

HMDL 400–800 100,000 65,000 35,000

NP 400–1200 65,000 50,000 25,000

HND 400–1200 100,000 65,000 35,000

FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100 200,000 200,000 200,000

LA (TRI-PAC) 70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000

70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000

NB (TRI-PAC) 600–800 200,000 200,000 200,000

600–800 200,000 150,000 200,000

V12-T9-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product

Fusible Switch Plug-In Units

Plug-In Cable Tap Boxes—Plug Into CP2, CP3 or CP4 Busway 5—600A and 800A Sizes Also Have Bolt-On Clips

Notes

1Maximum hp ratings apply when time delay fuses are used.

2120–208V hp ratings are based on 200V motor usage.

3All units ship as three-phase, four-wire plugs.

4Requires two adjacent plug-in outlets that do not span a busway joint.

5For ground stab to engage internal ground bus, add suffix “G” to catalog number.

6Also accepts (2) #1–300 kcmil Al/Cu.

Class R Fuse Clip Included

Ampere Rating Maximum hp Rating 1Catalog Number Maximum hp Rating 12 Catalog Number 3

240V, Three-Phase, Three-Wire 120–208V, Three-Phase, Four-Wire

30 7-1/2 CP4HD321 5CP4HD421

60 15 CP4HD322 10 CP4HD422

100 30 CP4HD323 25 CP4HD423

200 60 CP4HD324 60 CP4HD424

400 100 CP4HD325 250 CP4HD425

600 4100 CP4HD326 400 CP4HD426

600V, Three-Phase, Three-Wire 277–480V, Three-Phase, Four-Wire

30 20 CP4HD361 15 CP4HD461

60 50 CP4HD362 30 CP4HD462

100 75 CP4HD363 60 CP4HD463

200 100 CP4HD364 100 CP4HD464

400 350 CP4HD365 250 CP4HD465

600 4500 CP4HD366 400 CP4HD466

Volts

Ampere

Rating

Approximate Dimensions in Inches

Conduit

Sizes

Load Lugs

Each Phase

Catalog

NumberWide High Deep

Mounting Clearance

Top Front

Three-phase, three-wire

600V maximum

225 15.50 8.10 6.90 6.30 10.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #6–300 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB34

400 22.30 8.10 7.90 7.00 11.30 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 6CP2SB35

600 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (2) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB36 4

800 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (3) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB37 4

Three-phase, four-wire

120/208V or 277/480V

100% neutral

225 15.50 8.10 6.90 6.30 10.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #6–300 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB44

400 22.30 8.10 7.90 7.00 11.30 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 6CP2SB45

600 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (2) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB46 4

800 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (3) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB47 4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-13

Busway (Low Voltage)

Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product

Approximate Dimensions

Required Mounting Clearances Typical Side and Front

Plug-In Units—May be Used with Either CP2, CP3 or CP4 Plug-In Busway Sections—Fusible Switch Type

Notes

1Provided with busway bolt-on clip and straps for 0.50-inch hanger rods.

2Unit extends 10.50 inches below busway.

Frame

or Type

Maximum

Ampere

Rating

Dimensions in Inches

Conduit Sizes

Top, Bottom and Side

Wire Size Range

Al/CuABCDE F

CP4HD 30 19.30 11.50 8.80 5.20 7.00 9.00 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2 (1) #14–2

60 19.30 11.50 8.80 5.20 7.00 9.00 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2 (1) #14–2

100 19.30 11.50 8.80 5.20 7.00 9.00 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2 (1) #14–1/0

CP4HD 200 23.00 16.50 9.20 6.00 7.50 13.30 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #6–300 kcmil

400 12 45.60 24.30 15.80 13.10 14.00 20.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #1/0–300 kcmil or (1) 750 kcmil

600 12 45.60 24.30 15.80 13.10 14.00 20.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (2) #2–600 kcmil

OFF

.34

Edge of

Busway

44° Ref.

Plug-in

Busway

V12-T9-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Technology Upgrades—Clipper Power Systems (TVSS)

Technology Upgrades

Clipper Power Systems,

Busway TVSS Protection

The low voltage busway

aftermarket product offering

includes transient voltage

surge suppression (TVSS),

which is ideal for busway fed

distribution systems. Eaton

has developed the Clipper

Power System (CPS) family

of products to ensure that

the quality power required

to maximize productivity

in today’s competitive

environment is supplied

to commercial, industrial,

medical and institutional

facilities. Without power

protection devices,

microprocessors and

electronic-based loads are

not provided with the noise

and disturbance-free power

that they require. Because

microprocessor-based loads

are now common in every

facility, engineers must

ensure the AC power supply

is properly filtered. The CPS

busway family of products

consists of TVSS and filter

components (TVSS filter)

integrated into a bus plug

with a fusible disconnect.

TVSS bus plugs are available

for the following types of

plug-in busway:

●Westinghouse

standard plug-in

●Westinghouse low

impedance plug-in

●Westinghouse

H5000 plug-in

●Cutler-Hammer

CP2 plug-in

●Cutler-Hammer

CP3 plug-in

●Cutler-Hammer

CP4 plug-in

●Westinghouse

Pow-R-Way

●Westinghouse

Pow-R-Way II

●Cutler-Hammer

Pow-R-Way III

Significant performance

advantages are achieved

by integrating TVSS filters

into busway systems.

Because the TVSS unit is

directly connected to the

busway, the CPS minimizes

let-through voltage. This is a

significant performance

advantage compared to

cable-connected TVSS

solutions. Due to the

integrated design, the

CPS bus plug also saves

the user wall space and

greatly reduces the installed

project cost.

Catalog Numbering Selection

Visor Series Bus Plug

P3BCPS 250 480Y S A

Bus Style

P3BCPS = Pow-R-Way

TAPCPS = Std. plug-in

ZTAPCPS = Low impedance

HTAPCPS = H5000

CP4CPS = CP2/CP3/CP4

ITAPCPS = Pow-R-Way

Surge Rating

(kA/Phase)

100 = 100

120 = 120

160 = 160

200 = 200

250 = 250

300 = 300

400 = 400

500 = 500

Diagnostics Package

A =AdVisor complete with status indicator lights on each

phase. Form C. Audible Alarm—Enable/Disable

S =SuperVisor complete with status indicator lights

on each phase, 1-Form C. Audible Alarm—

Enable/Disable, Transient Counter, Push-to-Teat.

PQ Meter (no date stamp)

N =NetVisor complete with status indicator lights on

each phase. Form C. Audible Alarm—Enable/Disable,

Transient Counter, Push to Test, PQ Meter (no date

stamp). Modbus® and Ethernet Communications

Port, % Life Remaining, % Voltage THD

Voltage

Code

Voltage Requirements

120/208

240V

230/400

400V

277/480

480V

347/600

600V

Three-phase

wye (4W+G)

208Y 400Y 480Y 600Y

Three-phase

delta (4W+G)

240D —480D 600D

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-15

Busway (Low Voltage)

Technology Upgrades—Submetering—IQ Energy Sentinel

IQ Energy Sentinel

for Bus Plugs

Bus Plug with Energy Sentinel

Customer Required Information

If Originally a

Westinghouse Product

1. Style number or shop

order number from

existing busway

nameplate and complete

nameplate information.

2. Height and width

dimensions of housing

from existing busway.

3. Order by style number

on suffix Q77.

If Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

1. Check Vista for pricing.

2. Order by catalog number

on suffix Q73.

The Cutler-Hammer IQ Energy

Sentinel™ was designed

as part of the PowerNet™

system and is a highly

accurate, microprocessor-

based submeter that monitors

power and energy. It offers

a centralized alternative

to individually mounted

wattmeters, watthour meters

and watt demand meters.

Key advantages include

unmatched savings in space,

lower installation costs, and

the capability to communicate

data readings in a variety of

ways. IQ Energy Sentinels

with built-in current

transformers (CTs) and

communications have the

added benefit of overall

system accuracy. The IQ

Energy Sentinel mounts on

the load side of Cutler-

Hammer F, J and K breakers

within the bus-plug enclosure.

The IQ Energy Sentinel is

also available with a universal

mounting that uses external

CTs and is offered for fusible

bus plug applications.

Sub-metering application

examples for the IQ Energy

Sentinel include energy

monitoring and demand

management, energy cost

analysis/allocation, and

tenant or interdepartmental

billing. To accomplish the

communications system,

the customer must provide

a twisted pair communication

cable in 1/2-inch conduit

between the IQ Energy

Sentinel bus plug and a

Cutler-Hammer Central

Energy Display, or customer

computer to display the

information. IQ Energy

Sentinel bus plugs are

available for Pow-R-Way,

Pow-R-Way II and

Pow-R-Way III busway.

Further Information

Pricing Information

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbols CE3 and CE4

Note: Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

Note: Additional information may be required for manufacturing.

Publication

Number Description

AD 30-560 Application Data for Pow-R-Way

AD 30-560 Application Data for Pow-R-Way II

TD01701001E Technical Data for Pow-R-Way III

TD01701002E Technical Data for 100 Ampere Busway

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-1

IQ Products

Power Management Products

10 IQ Products

Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-3

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-3

General Information

Metering Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-4

Protective Relay Selection Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-12

Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-15

Power Xpert 2000 Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-17

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-18

IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-19

IQ 130/140/150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-20

IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-21

IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-22

Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-23

Current Products

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-24

IQ DP-4000/4100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-25

IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-26

IQ 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-27

MP-3000 Motor Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-28

FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-29

Digitrip 3000 (DT-3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-30

Accessories

IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-31

IQ 250-PMAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-31

IQ DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-31

IQ Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-31

IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-31

Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-32

Power Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-32

CTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-33

Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

IQ 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-36

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-36

RTD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-36

IQ 1000 and IQ 1000 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-37

IQ Data Plus and IQ Data Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-37

IQ Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-37

IQ Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-38

IQ 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-38

IQ 210/220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-39

IQ 110/115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-40

IQ Power Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-41

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-42

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-43

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-43

V12-T10-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Electronic Metering and Protection

Power Management Products

Product Description

Eaton’s electrical business IQ Metering and Protection group

of Cutler-Hammer® series products are multifunctional

communicating products based on microprocessor technology.

They are designed to replace existing electromechanical devices

and can be applied at low, medium and high voltage points in

the electrical distribution system. These devices offer

communications capabilities to link electrical distribution

equipment to Eaton’s PowerNet™ Power Management

Software.

These products generally surpass capabilities available with

older analog/electromechanical technologies. Depending on

the features available from each device, information from these

devices may be used to record and analyze power system and

power quality events or problems and may improve power

systems protection and coordination. With communications,

these devices may be used for energy monitoring and

management with trended data for use in future power

system planning.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-3

IQ Products

Product History

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

In the early 1980s, power

metering and protective

relaying functions were

performed by electro-

mechanical devices. Analog

meters and induction disk

protective relays were found

on virtually every switchgear

lineup manufactured up to

that time. With the maturing

of solid-state electronics,

microprocessor-based

replacements for the electro-

mechanical devices became

available. These new devices

provided increased

functionality and flexibility,

in a smaller space, for less

cost. Westinghouse led the

movement toward electronic

metering and protection

devices with the introduction

of the IQ 2000 motor

protection and control

relay. In 1987, the IQ 2000

functions were split and

two new products were

introduced—the IQ 1000

and the IQ Data Plus. The

IQ 1000 provided all current

monitoring and motor

protection functions and

was developed for use on

AMPGARD® medium voltage

starters and low voltage motor

control assemblies. The IQ

Data Plus provided complete

electrical metering and

system voltage protection,

and was developed for use

on low and medium voltage

switchgear, as well as

AMPGARD and low voltage

motor control assemblies.

The latest next generation

addition to metering is the

Power Xpert® Meter product

series. The Power Xpert

Meter power quality

instrument monitors critical

aspects of an electrical

distribution system. This

premier power quality

metering instrument uses the

latest in advanced technology

to make it simple to use,

powerful, scalable and highly

flexible. Power Xpert Meters

offer a new level of intuitive

user interface design,

presenting critical

electrical

distribution system information

in a simple-to-navigate

and easy-to-understand

information architecture.

The Power Xpert Meter’s

4000/6000/8000 graphic

display visualizes the

information from up to 16

Power Xpert PQ instruments.

The embedded Web server

displays complex power

quality data using standard

Internet browsers and allows

for device configuration from

the browser. Both the local

graphic display and the

embedded Web server

present real time, historical

and event information in a

browser-style graphical format

to help the user interpret key

circuit information such as

current loading, voltage and

power levels, power factor,

energy usage, I/O status and

power quality measurements,

as well as harmonic plots,

disturbance and transient

waveforms, and an ITIC

disturbance summary screen.

The Power Xpert 2000 Series

Meter offers the same level

of intuitive user interface

design as the Power Xpert

4000/6000/8000 Meter with

its embedded Web server

to provide data logging and

e-mail and the ability to

visualize steady-state harmonic

content as well as waveform

recording that is critical for

power quality analysis.

Since then, the IQ Metering

and Protection product

family has grown to include

additional products for both

metering and protective

functions.

The IQ 250 and IQ 260

meters provide revenue

grade accuracy with standard

Modbus® communications

and optional I/O capability.

The IQ 130/140/150 meters

provide basic monitoring and

energy metering for feeder

applications and optional

Modbus communications.

The IQ 35M provides energy

monitoring at the panelboard

level as well as retrofit

applications.

The IQ 150S/250S provides

wireless energy metering.

The enclosed metering

offering adds flexibility in

monitoring with Eaton’s

latest line of meters where

metering is needed.

The IQ DP-4000 and the IQ

AnaIyzer provide advanced

metering functions including

the ability to monitor power

quality parameters. IQ Energy

Sentinels provide a low cost

method to monitor energy

usage for individual feeders

or loads.

The Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter provides cost-effective

and space-saving energy

submetering for a wide

variety of applications.

The MP-3000 added

increased motor protection

capability. The FP-5000,

introduced in 2001, provides

overcurrent

protection for

distribution feeders.

Product History Time Line

V12-T10-36 IQ 2000 Model (A)

V12-T10-36 IQ 2000 Model (B)

V12-T10-37 IQ 1000

V12-T10-37 IQ 1000 II

V12-T10-28 MP-3000

V12-T10-37 IQ Data Plus

V12-T10-37 IQ Data Plus II

V12-T10-25 IQ DP-4000

AEM

AEM II

IQ 500

V12-T10-37 IQ Data

V12-T10-38 IQ Generator

AR (Addressable Relay)

V12-T10-32 ARII (Addressable Relay II)

V12-T10-26

IQ Energy Sentinel

(Breaker Mount)

V12-T10-26

IQ Energy Sentinel

(Universal Mount)

Digitrip MV

V12-T10-30 DT-3000

CED

CED II

V12-T10-24 IQ Analyzer

V12-T10-36 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

V12-T10-24 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

V12-T10-15 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000

V12-T10-17 Power Xpert 2000

V12-T10-29 FP-5000

V12-T10-19 IQ 250/260

V12-T10-27 IQ 230

V12-T10-38 IQ 300

IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter

V12-T10-42 IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter II

V12-T10-40 IQ 110/115

V12-T10-41 IQ Power Sentinel

V12-T10-39 IQ 210/220

V12-T10-20 IQ 130/140/150

V12-T10-21 IQ 150S/250S

V12-T10-22 IQ 35M

V12-T10-23 Enclosed Meters

Page Product 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 Present

V12-T10-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Notes

1Under typical operating conditions.

2PXM 2260 only.

3PXM 2270 only.

4PXM 2280 only.

5PXM 2290 only.

6IQ 260 only.

7Individual values reported to 85th

harmonic; anti-alias filtering prevents

higher frequencies from distorting

readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).

8PMX 6000 only.

9PXM 8000 only.

jOptional.

kAt computer only.

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert 2000 IQ 250/260 Series

Section Page Number V12-T10-15 V12-T10-17 V12-T10-19

Electrical Parameters

Volts 0.1% of RV + 0.02% FS 0.1% of RV 0.1% of RV

Amperes 0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS 0.1% of RV 0.1% of RV

Current range (% of nominal) 0.005–20A (400%) 0.1–200% 0.1–200%

Watts 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV

VARs 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV

VA 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV

PF-apparent 0.1% 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV

PF-displacement 0.1% — —

Frequency ±0.01 Hz ±0.03 Hz ±0.03 Hz

THD-voltage 127th 40th 2345 40th 6

THD-current 127th 40th 2345 40th 6

Watthours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

VAR-hours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

VA-hours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

Ampere-demand 0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

Watt-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

VAR-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

VA-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

Revenue accuracy ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)

Individual ampere harmonics 85th 740th 345 —

Individual voltage harmonics 85th 740th 345 —

Interharmonics Yes — —

Minimum and/or Maximum Values

Volts L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L L-L, L-N L-L, L-N

Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C, N A, B, C

Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA

Power Factor Apparent/displacement Apparent Apparent

Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz

THD Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L) Amperes/volts 2345 Amperes/volts 6

Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes

Trend analysis 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 256 / 512 2 / 768 345 MB 128 KB

Event logging 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 100,000 alarms/events with timestamp k

Disturbance recording 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB

60 cycles per event

768 MB 45

up to 64 cycles per event 45

—

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Auxiliary voltage

(optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the

meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.

Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-5

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued

Notes

1PXM 6000 only.

2PXM 8000 only.

3PXM 2260 only.

4PXM 2270 only.

5The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage

input channels to Power Xpert Meters.

6At computer only.

7PXM 2280 only.

8PXM 2290 only.

9Optional.

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Auxiliary voltage

(optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the

meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.

Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert 2000 IQ 250/260 Series

Section Page Number V12-T10-15 V12-T10-17 V12-T10-19

Other Features

Storage 2 / 4 1 / 8 2 GB 256 / 512 3 / 768 4 MB Standard 128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every 15

minutes for 30 days

PG output relays 5 maximum Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

PG analog outputs — Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA

Discrete contact inputs 8 Optional (2) or (4) Optional (2) or (4)

Analog inputs — — —

Synch-input kW utility Via status input Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs Via end of interval pulse with optional digital

inputs

Auxiliary voltage 5Yes — —

kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes Yes

Waveform display Local/computer 6—

Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 512 (4096 oversampling) Yes, up to 64 7, up to 512 8—

Frequency distribution display — — —

Display type LCD 9Red LED Red LED

Display lines/character Graphic (320 x 240 pixels) 3 lines, 4 characters 3 lines, 4 characters

Display character height 5.5 mm H x 4 mm W 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H

Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII

Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP,

HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP, DNP 3.0 9

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0

Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/IP,

HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0

Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway

Setup configuration Via Web browser/display Via Web browser/display Via configuration software/display

Dimensions Refer to TD02601007E Refer to TD02601017E Refer to TD02601016E

Operating temperature range –20° to 60°C display unit

–20° to 70°C meter base unit

–20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C

Reference literature TD02601007E TD02601017E TD02601016E

V12-T10-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart, continued

Notes

1IQ 140 and IQ 150.

2IQ 150 only.

3At computer only.

4Optional.

5IQ 250S only.

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 150S/250S Series IQ 35M Series

Section Page Number V12-T10-20 V12-T10-21 V12-T10-22

Electrical Parameters

Volts ±0.25% of RV 0.1% of RV 0.4% +0.015% per °C deviation from 25°C

Amperes ±0.25% of RV 0.1% of RV 0.4% (5–100%), 0.8% (1–5%) +0.015% per °C from 25°C

Current range (% of nominal) 0.1–200% 0.1–200% 1–120%

Watts 0.5% of RV 10.2% of RV 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

VARs 0.5% of RV 10.2% of RV 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

VA 0.5% of RV 10.2% of RV Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs

PF-apparent 0.5% of RV 10.2% of RV Calculated: Watts / VAs

PF-displacement — — —

Frequency ±0.03% Hz 1±0.03 Hz ±0.02 Hz

THD-voltage — — —

THD-current — — —

Watthours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

Varhours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ±2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

VA-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class —

Ampere-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class —

Watt-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22

Class 0.5S

VAR-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

VA-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs

Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

Individual ampere harmonics — — —

Individual voltage harmonics — — —

Interharmonics — — —

Minimum and/or Maximum Values

Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N —

Current A, B, C A, B, C —

Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA —

Power factor Apparent 1Apparent Apparent (low alert)

Frequency Hertz 1Hertz Hertz (out of range alert)

THD Ampere/Volts — —

Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 1kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA; Maximum kW, kVAR, kVA

Trend analysis 32 MB 5—

Event logging 32 MB 5Logging on demand interval or Modbus command 4

Disturbance recording — — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-7

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart, continued

Notes

1Optional.

2IQ 250S only.

3The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to

Power Xpert Meters.

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 150S/250S Series IQ 35M Series

Section Page Number V12-T10-20 V12-T10-21 V12-T10-22

Other Features

Storage — 2 MB 210 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each (115 KB) 1

PG output relays — — —

PG analog outputs — — —

Discrete contact inputs — — 2 pulse inputs with BACnet

Analog inputs — — —

Synch-input kW Utility — — Optional demand synchronization via Modbus

Auxiliary voltage 3—— —

kWh pulse initiator 1Yes Yes

Waveform display — — —

Waveform capture — — —

Frequency distribution display — — —

Display type Red LED Red LED Backlit LCD

Display lines/character 3 lines, 4 characters 3 lines, 4 characters 2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row)

Display character height 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H 7.5 mm

Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII 1

Network: Modbus TCP 1

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0

Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless

Serial: Modbus RTU 1, BACnet MS/TP 1

Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway

Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Via display/configuration software

Dimensions 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D 7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D 3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D

Operating temperature range –20 to 70°C –20 to 70°C –20 to 70°C

Reference literature TD02601015E TD02601019E TD02601015E

V12-T10-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued

Notes

1From 3–300% of FS.

2At unity power factory and 5–300% of FS.

3At a power factor <±0.5 and 5–300% of FS.

4At computer only.

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series

Section Page Number V12-T10-24 V12-T10-25 V12-T10-27

Electrical Parameters

Volts ±0.2% FS 1±0.3% FS ±0.5% FS

Amperes ±0.2% FS 1±0.3% FS ±0.5% FS

Current range (% of nominal) 3–800% 10–250% 1–200%

Watts 0.4% FS, 6 RV 2±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS

VARs 0.4% FS, 6 RV 3±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS

VA 0.4% FS, 6 RV 2±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS

PF-apparent 0.8% FS 1±1.0% FS ±2.0% FS

PF-displacement 0.8% FS 1±1.0% FS ±2.0% FS

Frequency 0.04% 1 or 0.01 Hz ±0.17% FS ±0.1% Hz

THD-voltage 50th 31st —

THD-current 50th 31st —

Watthours 0.5% RV 2±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12

Varhours 1% RV 3±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12

VA-hours 0.5% RV 2±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12

Ampere-demand ±0.2% FS 1±0.3% ±0.5% per ANSI C12

Watt-demand ±0.4% FS 1±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12

VAR-demand ±0.4% FS 1±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12

VA-demand ±0.4% FS 1±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12

Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) — ANSI C12.1 (1%)

Individual ampere harmonics 50th — —

Individual voltage harmonics 50th — —

Interharmonics — — —

Minimum and/or Maximum Values

Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N L-L, L-N

Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C A, B, C

Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA

Power factor Apparent/displacement Apparent/displacement Apparent/displacement

Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz

THD Amperes/volts Amperes/volts —

Demand values All All All

Trend analysis Time/date 2 alarms 4

Event logging 504 events w/timestamp 44

Disturbance recording 10 waveform events — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-9

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued

Notes

1Relays programmable to operate on any measured function.

2Optional.

3An IPONI is required.

4IQ 230M only.

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series

Section Page Number V12-T10-24 V12-T10-25 V12-T10-27

Other Features

Storage 90 KB 15 parameters —

PG output relays (4) 10A Form C 1(3) 10A Form C 2(2) 100 mA Form A

PG analog outputs (4) 0–10/4–20 mA — —

Discrete contact inputs (3) + 30 Vdc differential (1) kW Demand 2(2) +30 Vdc differential

Analog inputs (1) 0–20/4–20 mA — (1) 4–20 mA

Synch-input kW Utility At device or via communications At device or via communications 2Via communications only

Auxiliary voltage — — —

kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes 2Yes

Waveform display Local 2/computer — —

Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 128 — —

Frequency distribution display Local 2/computer — —

Display type Graphic LCD with LED backlight 7 Segment LED Backlit LCD

Display lines/character 7 lines, 147 characters 1 line, 7 characters 4 lines, 20 characters

Display character height Up to 7 lines 1 line 1.60 (40.6) H x.09 (2.3) W

Communications Serial: INCOM 3

Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3

Serial: INCOM 3

Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3

Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU 4

Network: via Power Xpert Gateway

Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display

Dimensions Refer to TD1702BTE Refer to TD1703ATE Refer to TD1706ATE

Operating temperature range –20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C 0° to 50°C

Reference literature TD1702BTE TD1703ATE TD1706ATE

V12-T10-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued

Note

1At computer only.

Legend: PG = Programmable

FS = Full scale

RV = Read value

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter IQ Energy Sentinel

Section Page Number V12-T10-18 V12-T10-26

Electrical Parameters

Volts ±0.2% RV —

Amperes ±0.2% RV —

Current range (% of nominal) — —

Watts ±0.5% RV ±1.0% FS

VARs ±0.5% RV —

VA ±0.5% RV —

PF-apparent ±0.5% RV —

PF-displacement — —

Frequency ±0.1 Hz —

THD-voltage — —

THD-current — —

Watthours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class ±1.0% FS

VAR-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class —

VA-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class —

Ampere-demand — —

Watt-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class ±1.0% FS

VAR-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class —

VA-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class —

Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) —

Individual ampere harmonics — —

Individual voltage harmonics — —

Interharmonics — —

Minimum and/or Maximum Values

Volts L-L, L-N —

Current A, B, C —

Power Watts, VAR, VA —

Power factor Apparent —

Frequency Hertz —

THD — —

Demand values Watts (Delivered & Received), Watts (Q1–Q4), VA

(Q1, Q4), VA (Q2, Q3)

—

Trend analysis Interval data 1

Event logging 20 latest events and historical 1

Disturbance recording — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-11

IQ Products

General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued

Note

1Optional.

Legend PG = Programmable

FS = Full Scale

RV = Read Value

Device Name

Accessories

See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter IQ Energy Sentinel

Section Page Number V12-T10-18 V12-T10-26

Other Features

Storage 256 MB standard, 2 GB optional —

PG output relays 1 standard, 8 each module 1—

Discrete contact inputs 3 standard, 8 each module 1—

Analog inputs — —

Synch-input kW utility Via communications and digital input Via communications only

Auxiliary voltage — —

kWh pulse initiator Aggregate or main-digital output, LED output on

meter modules (accuracy check)

—

Waveform display — —

Waveform capture — —

Frequency distribution display — —

Display type LCD color touchscreen —

Display lines/character 6-inch diagonal —

Display character height Graphics —

Communications Serial: Modbus RTU

1 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/

IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, SFTP

Serial: INCOM

Network: via Power Xpert Gateway

Setup configuration Via PXMP configuration software Via configuration software

Dimensions Refer to TD150006EN Refer to TD1707TE

Operating temperature range –20° to 70°C –25° to 70°C

Reference literature TD150006EN TD1707TE

V12-T10-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

General Information

Protective Relay Selection Chart

For Further Details and Information,

See TD02600001TE. Device Name

DT-3000 FP-5000 MP-3000

Technical Data Number IEEE Device Number TD.17.10.T.E TD02602003E TD.17.11.T.E

Protection Functions

Directional power 32 ■

Phase directional 67 ■

Ground directional 67N ■

Phase inst. OC 50 ■■■

Phase TOC 51 ■■■

Calc. residual ground IOC 50G ■

Calc. residual ground TOC 51G ■

Ground inst. OC (measured) 50G (N) ■■

Ground TOC (measured) 51G (N) ■■■

Phase voltage restrained OC 51VR ■

No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) 11 10 1

TOC time reset ■

Negative sequence OC (unbalance) 46 ■■

Negative sequence voltage 47 ■

Overvoltage 59 ■

Undervoltage 27 ■

Underfrequency 81U ■

Overfrequency 81O ■

Breaker failure 50BF ■

Zone interlocking ■■

Thermal overload 49 ■

Locked rotor 49S/51 ■

Jam/stall 51R ■

Cold load pickup ■

Loss of load ■

Power factor 55 ■

Control Functions

Synchronization check 25 ■

Remote open/close ■■Trip only

Programmable I/O ■■■

Programmable logic ■

Multiple setting groups ■

Number of starts limit ■

Starts per hour ■

Time between starts ■

Emergency restart ■

Reduced voltage starting ■

Trip lockout ■■■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-13

IQ Products

General Information

Protective Relay Selection Chart, continued

For Further Details and Information,

See TD02600001TE. Device Name

DT-3000 FP-5000 MP-3000

Technical Data Number IEEE Device Number TD.17.10.T.E TD02602003E TD.17.11.T.E

Metering Functions

Amperes ■■■

Ampere demand ■■

Volts ■

Phase angle current voltage ■

Positive, negative and zero sequence ■

Watts ■

Watt demand ■

Watthour ■

VARs ■

VAR-demand ■

VAR-hour ■

VA ■

VA-demand ■

VA-hour ■

Frequency ■

Trending (load profile) ■

Minimum/maximum recording ■

Monitoring Functions

Trip circuit monitor ■

Breaker wear ■

Failure to close ■

Oscillography ■

Sequence of events ■■

Trip target data ■■■

Clock ■■

Number of starts ■

Acceleration time ■

RTD temperature ■

Hottest RTD ■

Communications

Local HMI ■■■

Local communication port RS-232 ■

Local communication port RS-485 ■

Remote communication port ■■■

FSK ■■Optional

Addressable ■■■

Protocols

INCOM™ ■■■

Modbus ■

V12-T10-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

General Information

Protective Relay Selection Chart, continued)

For Further Details and Information,

See TD02600001TE. Device Name

DT-3000 FP-5000 MP-3000

Technical Data Number IEEE Device Number TD.17.10.T.E TD.17.30.T.E TD.17.11.T.E

Construction

Panel-mount case ■■■

Drawout Optional ■Optional

Operating temperature range –30°C to +55°C –40°C to +60°C –20°C to +60°C

Power supply options 120–240 Vac 48–125 Vac/Vdc 120–240 Vac

24–250 Vdc 100–240 Vac/Vdc

Dual source power supply Optional

AC current inputs ■■■

AC voltage inputs ■

Wye PTs ■

Delta/open delta PTs ■

Binary inputs 1 8 2

Alarm outputs 2 Form C 2 Form C 3

Trip outputs 2 5 1

Analog outputs Optional 1

Local display ■■■

LEDs (local targets) ■■■

Standards

ANSI ■■■

IEC ■■■

UL®■■■

CE DT-3030 only ■

CSA®■■■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-15

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert 4000/6000/

8000 Series Meters

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series

Display and Meter

General Description

The Power Xpert Meter

4000/6000/8000 Series

monitors the critical aspects

of an electrical distribution

system. This premier power

quality metering instrument

is simple to use, powerful,

scalable and highly flexible.

The Power Xpert Meter

4000/6000/8000 offers a new

level of intuitive user

interface design, presenting

critical electrical distribution

system information in

simple-to-navigate and easy-

to-understand information

architecture. The Power

Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000

graphic display visualizes

the information from up

to 16 meter modules. The

embedded Web server

displays complex power

quality data using standard

Internet browsers and allows

for device configuration from

the browser.

Both the local graphic display

and the embedded Web

server present real time,

historical and event

information in a browser-

style graphical format to help

the user interpret key circuit

information, such as:

●Current loading

●Voltage and power levels

●Power factor

●Energy usage

●I/O status

●Power quality

measurements

●Harmonic plots

●Disturbance and transient

waveforms

●ITIC disturbance summary

screen

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/

6000/8000 graphic display

uses a simple “twist and

click” navigation control dial

to easily navigate the menus

and drill down into increasing

levels of important detail.

A “back” key enhances the

browser-like navigation of the

graphic display.

The Web server provides the

energy and demand readings

required to help manage

the cost of energy. It also

provides critical information

regarding power quality,

such as harmonic distortion,

flicker, crest factor, K-factor

and more.

Note: Features and functionality

may vary depending on the meter

model and options being used.

Review the Features and Benefits

chart on Page V12-T10-16 for

details.

Catalog Number Selection

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter

Accessories

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000

Notes

1These items can be ordered separately or preinstalled in the meter by selecting option B in the model number.

Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for meter module connection.

Description

Catalog

Number

Graphic display module PXD-MMG

Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking: 100FX fiber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232 PXMCE-B 1

Digital I/O card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output PXMIO-B 1

Panel mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting PX-PMBA

Panel mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a graphic display to an IQ Analyzer cutout PX-PMBB

Panel mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance PX-PMBC

Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key PXM-4KUPG

Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp. and I/O cards)

Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp.card)

PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B

Model Series

4 = 4000 (Standard power quality, 2 GB)

6 = 6000 (Enhanced power quality, 4 GB)

8 = 8000 (Premium PQ with transient

capture, 8 GB)

Power Supply Configuration

1 = Standard 100–240 Vac or

110–250 Vdc power supply

4 = 24–48 Vdc option (future option)

Card Slot 1 Configuration

1 = Standard Communications Module with RS-485

Card Slot 2 Configuration

A = No card option

B = Communication expansion card for

LAN/WAN Ethernet networking with

10/100Base-T, 100F, RS-485, RS-232 ports

Card Slot 3 Configuration

A = No card option

B = I/O option card (8 digital inputs,

2 solid-state outputs, 3 relay outputs)

Voltage Input Configuration

0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4)

2 = Standard plus auxiliary (V6, V7, V8)

V12-T10-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

Features and Benefits

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meters

Notes

1Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.

These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality

may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specifications.

Feature

Power Xpert

Benefit4000 6000 8000

General

Embedded Web server ■■■Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network, Internet

TOU metering support ■■■Time of usage can be set up to support 4 different schedules

Firmware flash update support ■■■Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware updates

Self-learning capability (characterizes “normal” per circuit) ■■■The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm only when

“real” events occur

Power, Energy and Demand

Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph

analysis, export, print

■■■Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter or external

software

Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month, week-to-week ■ ■ ■ Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand comparison

Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency ■■■Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties

Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, tou, profile, previous month

comparison, graph analysis, export, print

■■■Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage and usage against previous month, identify

peaks to conserve energy usage

Power Quality Analysis

Statistical analysis (min., max., average) ■■■Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas

Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording ■■■Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms

Symmetrical Components: Zero, Negative, Positive ■■■Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems

Low frequency transient detection and capture ■■■Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective analysis or e-mailing

Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 4096 14096 1100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture impulsive transients

“Number of Nines” uptime data (e.g., 6 nines = 99.9999%) ■■■Review uptime availability per cent

K-factor ■ ■■Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving nonlinear and linear loads

Crest factor ■ ■■Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform

Security

Secure 5 level user access privileges ■■■Define appropriate security access level per user

Communications and I/O

Modbus TCP ■■■Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software

Modbus RTU ■■■Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (1–16) meters together

HTML ■■■Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser

SNMP (simple network management protocol) ■■■Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system

SMTP (simple mail transfer protocol) ■■■Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

FTP (file transfer protocol) ■■■Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture files on the meter with an FTP Client

NTP (network time protocol) ■■■Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up to the 1

millisecond resolution

COMTRADE, open IEEE Standard file format for

Waveform capture export

■■■Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COMTRADE file format to third-party

software

DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Network Protocol) ■■■Communicate with the meter via DNP 3.0 over Ethernet; hook to existing utility systems

Trend measurements CSV file export ■■■Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g., Microsoft Excel in standard

CSV file format

I/O (8 digital inputs, 3 relay outputs, 2 solid-state KYZ outputs) ■■■The Power Xpert I/O Card is extremely flexible and can be used in a large variety of different

applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various

conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as alarm, pulse meters, trip units,

sensors can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the

meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and trends

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-17

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert 2000 Series

Meters

Power Xpert 2000 Series

General Description

The Power Xpert Meter

2000 Series power quality

instrument monitors the

most critical aspects of an

electrical distribution system.

This premier power quality

metering instrument uses

the latest in advanced

technology to make it simple

to use, powerful, scalable

and highly flexible. The

Power Xpert Meter 2000

offers the same level of

intuitive user interface design

as the Power Xpert Meter

4000/6000/8000, presenting

critical electrical distribution

system information in a

simple to navigate and

easy-to-understand

information architecture.

The embedded Web server

displays comprehensive

power quality data using

standard Internet browsers

and allows for device

configuration from the

browser. The embedded

Web server presents real

time, historical and event

information in a browser-style

graphical format to help the

user interpret information

such as current loading,

voltage and power levels,

power factor, energy usage,

I/O status, power quality

measurements, as well as

harmonic plots. The embedded

Web server also allows for

waveform capture and for

visualizing steady-state

harmonic content that is critical

for power quality analysis.

The Web server provides the

energy and demand readings

required to help manage the

cost of energy.

Catalog Number Selection

Power Xpert 2000 Meter

Accessories

Power Xpert 2000 Meter

Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards

I/O Slot 2

5 = Gateway card

I/O Slot 1

0 = None

1 = 2 Relay outputs/2 status inputs

2 = 4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs

3 = 4 Analog outputs: 0–1 mA

4 = 4 Analog outputs: 4–20 mA

Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO)

Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc)

Power Supply

1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc

4 = 24–60 Vdc

Frequency

5 = 50 Hz system

6 = 60 Hz system

Model Series

2250 = Energy meter

2260 = Power quality meter

2270 = Power quality plus meter

2280 = Power quality plus with up to 64 samples/

cycle waveform recording meter

2290 = Power quality plus with up to 512 samples/

cycle recording meter

Current Input

1 = 1 Amp secondary

5 = 5 Amp secondary

Meter Type

M= Meter (with integral display)

T = Transducer only (no display)

PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5

Description

Catalog

Number

Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a PXM 2000 to an

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout

IQ250-PMAK

PXM 2000 Gateway Card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK

Description

Catalog

Number

PXM 2000 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 KYZ Pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA IQ250/260-IO3

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA IQ250/260-IO4

V12-T10-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert™

Multi-Point Meter

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

General Description

Eaton’s Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter is an ANSI C12.20

revenue class Web enabled

electronic submetering device

that can be mounted in

panelboards, switchboards or

enclosures. When mounted in

a panelboard or a switchboard,

the Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter provides customers

with an integrated power

distribution and energy

metering solution that saves

space, reduces installation

labor and lowers total cost.

The Eaton Power Xpert Multi-

Point Meter (PXMP Meter)

offers a highly modular

approach to high-density

metering applications in

electrical power distribution

systems. The PXMP Meter is

compatible with most three-

phase industrial, commercial

and single-phase residential

low voltage electrical power

systems. The PXMP is

equipped with two Modbus

RTU communication ports

for local display and remote

serial communications.

The PXMP also has optional

pulse input and digital output

modules along with one

standard digital output and

three digital inputs. The

PXMP Energy Portal Module

is Web enabled, making it

suitable for use with Ethernet

networks and modems.

The Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter can measure up to any

of the following number of

circuits:

●Sixty single-phase,

two-wire (single-pole)

●Thirty single-phase,

three-wire (two-pole)

●Twenty three-phase,

four-wire (three-pole)

The circuits listed above

can be mixed provided that

the total number of current

sensors does not exceed 60.

The Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter can be used with three

different ratings of current

sensors: 100 mA, 10 mA

or 333 mV. Switchboard/

panelboard applications

will use the 100 mA current

sensors, which are highly

accurate, self-protecting in

the event of an open circuit

condition under load and

are supplied with an integral

plug-in connector. The PXMP

automatically detects the rating

of the current sensor that is

connected. The PXMP can also

use 10 mA current sensors

that were previously installed

for IQMESII retrofit applications.

Additionally the PXMP can

use 333 mV split core current

sensors for retrofit applications

where metering has not

previously existed. The 10 mA

and 333 mV current sensors

are also self-protecting in

the event of an open circuit

condition under load.

Application Description

The Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter is ideally suited to

handle submetering in low

voltage power distribution

equipment applications with

the use of voltage and current

transformers.

The Power Xpert Multi-Point

Meter provides a cost-effective

solution for residential or

commercial metering

installations, including:

●High-rise buildings

●Government institutions

●K–12, universities and

campuses

●Office buildings

●Medical facilities

●Apartment and

condominium complexes

●Airports

●Shopping malls

●Industrial sites

●Mixed-use facilities

Product Selection

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Products

Note

Total sensor lead length must not exceed 28 ft (8.5m).

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Support Products

Description

Catalog

Number

Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABCN Voltage Inputs

PXMP meter base—three-phase with ABCN voltage inputs PXMP-MB

PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs for use with PXMP

current sensors

PXMP-MM100MA

PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII

current sensors

PXMP-MM10MA

PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with 333 mV

current sensors

PXMP-MM333MV

Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABN Voltage Inputs

PXMP meter base—single-phase, three-wire with ABN

voltage inputs

PXMP-MB-AB

PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs for use with PXMP

current sensors

PXMP-MM100MA-AB

PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII

current sensors

PXMP-MM10MA-AB

PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with 333 mV

current sensors

PXMP-MM333MV-AB

IO Modules

PXMP meter pulse input module with eight inputs PXMP-PIM

PXMP meter digital output module with eight outputs PXMP-DOM

Communication Module

PXMP meter energy portal module PXMP-EPM

Current Sensor Kits

KIT, PXMP CS125 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS125-3

KIT, PXMP CS250 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS250-3

KIT, PXMP CS400 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS400-3

Current Sensor Cable Kits

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 4 ft (1.2m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC4-3

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 6 ft (1.8m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC6-3

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC8-3

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 12 ft (3.7m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC12-3

Current Sensor Extension Cable Kits

KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SCE-8-3

KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 16 ft (4.9m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SCE-16-3

Interface Modules

PXMP current sensor interface module for 333 mV, kit X 3 PXMP-IM333MV-3

Description

Catalog

Number

Communication cable, 1000 ft (305m), 600V insulation IMPCABLE

PXMP meter display—6-inch color touchscreen (with cable) PXMP-DISP-6

Power supply—single-phase 90–264 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A PSG60E

Power supply—three-phase 360–575 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A PSG60F

Power supply—three-phase 600 Vac, 24 Vdc PSS55D

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-19

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

IQ 250/260 Electronic

Power Meters

IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter

General Description

The IQ 250 and IQ 260

Meters provide capabilities

you would not normally

expect in affordable, ultra-

compact meters, such as fast

sampling rate and accurate

metering for a full range of

power attributes. Providing

the first line of defense

against costly power

problems, Eaton’s IQ 250

and IQ 260 electronic power

meters can perform the work

of an entire wall of legacy

metering equipment using

today’s technology.

When space is at a premium,

yet you need ANSI C12.20

accuracy, the IQ 250/ 260

series fit the bill. These

meters are ideal for electrical

equipment assemblies,

machine control panels,

such as panelboard and

switchboard mains and

feeders, low voltage metal-

enclosed switchgear feeders

and motor control centers.

Requiring far less space than

other meters with similar

functionality, IQ 250/260

series fit into a standard

ANSI or IEC cutout on a

panelboard or other electrical

equipment, and therefore fit

easily into retrofit applications.

Catalog Number Selection

IQ 250/260 Meter

Accessories

IQ 250/260 Meter

IQ 250/260 Meter I/O Cards

Model Series

250 = Power

260 = Power quality Frequency

5 = 50 Hz system

6 = 60 Hz system

I/O Slot 2

0 = None

1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs

2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs

3 = Four analog outputs: 0–1 mA

4 = Four analog outputs: 4–20 mA

Power Supply

1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc

4 = 24–48 Vdc

Current Input

1 = 1A secondary

5 = 5A secondary

Meter Type

M = Meter (with integral display)

T= Transducer only (no display) I/O Slot 1

0 = None

1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs

2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs

3 = Four analog outputs: 0–1 mA

4 = Four analog outputs: 4–20 mA

Data Logging

A = None

L = Data logging

IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0

Description

Catalog

Number

Panel-mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 250/260 to an

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout

IQ250-PMAK

PXM 2000 Gateway Card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ 250/260 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1

IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2

IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA IQ250/260-IO3

IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA IQ250/260-IO4

V12-T10-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

IQ 130/140/150 Series

Electronic Power Meters

IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter

General Description

The IQ 100 Meter family

provides capabilities you

would not normally expect in

affordable, compact meters,

such as fast sampling rate

and accurate metering for a

full range of power attributes.

Providing the first line of

defense against costly power

problems, Eaton’s IQ 100

series electronic power

meters can perform the work

of an entire wall of legacy

metering equipment utilizing

today’s technology.

When space is at a premium,

yet you need ANSI C12.20

accuracy, the IQ 100 series

fit the bill. These meters are

ideal for electrical equipment

assemblies, machine control

panels, such as panelboard

and switchboard mains and

feeders, low voltage metal-

enclosed switchgear feeders

and motor control centers.

Requiring far less space than

other meters with similar

functionality, IQ 100 series fit

into a standard ANSI or IEC

cutout on a panelboard or

other electrical equipment,

and therefore fit easily into

retrofit applications.

Catalog Number Selection

IQ 130/140/150 Meters

Accessories

IQ 130/140/150 Meters

IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1

Model Series

130 = Volts/amps

140 = Power

150 = Energy

Frequency

5 = 50 Hz system

6 = 60 Hz system

Communications

0 = None

1 = Modbus RTU and KYZ pulse

2 = Modbus TCP and KYZ output (RJ45)

Power Supply

1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc

4 = 24–48 Vdc

Current Input

1 = 1A secondary

5 = 5A secondary

Meter Type

M = Meter (with integral display)

T = Transducer only (no display)

Description

Catalog

Number

Panel Mounting Adapter for retrofitting an IQ 100 to an

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data Cutout

IQ250-PMAK

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-21

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

IQ 150S/250S Self-

Enclosed Electronic

Meters

IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed

Electronic Meters

General Description

With energy costs

skyrocketing, you need the

ability to verify the accuracy

of utility billing and allocation

of energy costs among

business units, different

manufacturing areas or

facilities, and tenants.

Production equipment and

IT systems are vulnerable to

power anomalies; therefore,

you must ensure that power

is always up to specifications.

If your infrastructure is an

established facility, you may

not currently have metering

or may have addressed these

concerns by deploying a

variety of analog gauges

and meters—one for volts,

one for amperes and so on,

with separate meters for

each measurement.

If you’re planning an upgrade

or a new power infrastructure,

no doubt you would like

to capitalize on the latest

technology to improve upon

that cumbersome architecture

and its patchwork view.

Catalog Number Selection

IQ 150S/250S Meter

IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1

Model Series

150 = Energy

250 = Energy plus

Frequency

5 = 50 Hz system

6 = 60 Hz system

Communications

1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)

2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)

or TCP—(RJ45)

or 802.11b (Wi-Fi)

Power Supply

1 = 90–400 Vac/Vdc

Current Input

1 = 1A secondary

5 = 5A secondary

Meter Type

S = Self-enclosed meter

V12-T10-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

IQ 35M

General Description

The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a

DIN rail meter that combines

exceptional performance and

easy installation to deliver

a cost-effective solution for

energy and power monitoring

applications, as well as sub-

metering applications. Most

models include pulse output,

alarm contact and phase

alarms for true versatility.

The BACnet version offers

two digital inputs for

accumulating other meter

pulses in place of the digital

output and alarm contact.

The Modbus output options

offer added flexibility for

configuration and data analysis.

The IQ 35M allows you to:

●Verify energy bills

●Make informed load

shifting and shedding

decisions

●Fairly and accurately

allocate energy costs to

users

●Identify wasteful practices

●Decrease unnecessary

usage

●Produce an energy profile

●Secure the optimum utility

rate structure

Catalog Number Selection

IQ 35M Meter

Accessories

IQ 35M Accessories

IQ 35M Current Transformers

Model Series Output Option

1 = Pulse output only

2 = Pulse output + Modbus

3 = Pulse output + Modbus + data logging

5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet + data logging

Enclosure Type

1 = Standard energy

2 = Four quadrant energy

IQ35M A 1 1

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ35M enclosure, NEMA 4X IQ35M-ENC

IQ35M fuse pack, single, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP1

IQ35M fuse pack, double, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP2

IQ35M fuse pack, triple, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP3

IQ35M replacement mounting clips IQ35M-RMC

IQ35M DIN rail IQ35M-DR

IQ35M DIN rail stop clips (10 pack) IQ35M-DRSC

Description

Catalog

Number

Solid Core

IQ35M CT, solid core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ35M-SO-030-5

IQ35M CT, solid core, 20A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ35M-SO-030-20

IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.50 inch IQ35M-SO-050-50

IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SO-075-50

IQ35M CT, solid core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-100

IQ35M CT, solid core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-200

IQ35M CT, solid core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-250

IQ35M CT, solid core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-300

IQ35M CT, solid core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-400

Split Core

IQ35M CT, split core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-5

IQ35M CT, split core, 30A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-30

IQ35M CT, split core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-50

IQ35M CT, split core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-100

IQ35M CT, split core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-200

IQ35M CT, split core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-250

IQ35M CT, split core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-300

IQ35M CT, split core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-400

IQ35M CT, split core, 600A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-600

IQ35M CT, split core, 800A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-253-800

IQ35M CT, split core, 1000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1000

IQ35M CT, split core, 1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1200

IQ35M CT, split core, 1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1600

IQ35M CT, split core, 2000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-2000

IQ35M CT, split core, 2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-2400

Note: Specifications are subject

to change without notice and

represent the maximum

capabilities of the product with all

options installed. This is not a

complete feature list. Features

and functionality may vary

depending on selected options,

firmware version and product

model. Please refer to User

Manual for detailed

specifications.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-23

IQ Products

Technology Upgrades

Enclosed Meters

NEMA 12 Single- and Multi-Unit

Enclosed Meters

General Description

The Eaton enclosed meter

line provides a complete

energy metering and data

acquisition solution in a

single enclosure. Designed

for Eaton’s IQ 35M, IQ 150,

IQ 250/260, and Power Xpert®

2000/4000/6000/8000 and

Multi-Point Meters, Eaton’s

enclosed meter line offers

mounting and installation

flexibility, especially in retrofit

applications where no

metering compartment or

mounting space is available

in the existing electrical

distribution equipment or

where installation time is a

premium. Factory designed

and wired, Eaton’s enclosed

meter line offers savings in

labor and installation costs

because input current and

voltage wiring as well as I/O

wiring is prewired to terminal

blocks inside the enclosure.

The enclosed meter line has

two standard offerings:

single-, prewired unit

(specific IQ 150, IQ 250/260,

PXM 2000, PXM 4000/6000/

8000 or PXMP) and a multi-

unit (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/

260 or IQ 35M models).

Because the multi-unit

automatically includes Eaton’s

Power Xpert Gateway 200E,

it facilitates measurement

and verification of the energy

usage on processes and in

buildings. This provides a

convenient way to monitor

energy usage from multiple

points, collect and log specific

energy use parameters, and

display and generate logs

for historical energy usage

reports. Simply put, Eaton’s

multi-unit enclosed meter

solution helps meet any

measurement and verification

requirement to show energy

efficiency improvements and

results. In addition to the

standard offering, Eaton can

also provide an enclosed

metering solution tailored

around your project needs.

Catalog Number Selection

Single Unit Enclosed Meter

Enclosed PXMP Meter

Multi Unit Enclosed Meter

Accessories

Meter Subpanel Assembly

Notes

1Not available with IQ 35M.

Other meter models available upon request in single- and multi-unit enclosed versions.

Meter Type

PXM4051A1BA

PXM4051A1BB

PXM6051A1BA

PXM6051A1BB

PXM8051A1BA

PXM8051A1BB

PXM2250MA65105

PXM2250MA65115

PXM2250MA65145

PXM2260MA65105

PXM2260MA65115

PXM2260MA65145

PXM2270MA65105

PXM2270MA65115

PXM2270MA65145

IQ250MA65100

IQ250MA65110

IQ250MA65114

IQ260MA65100

IQ260MA65110

IQ260MA65114

IQ150MA6511

IQ150MA6512

NEMA Rating

2 = NEMA 12

3 = NEMA 3R

4 = NEMA 4X

CPT Option

A= 120/240 Vac (no CPT)

B= 480 Vac (CPT)

PXM2250MA65105 -2B

Meter Type

PXMP-MB

PXMP-MB-AB

NEMA Rating

2 = NEMA 12

3 = NEMA 3R

4 = NEMA 4X

Display

A = None

D = 6-inch color

touchscreen

CPT Option

A = None

B = 120/240 Vac

C = 480 Vac

D = 600 Vac

PXMP -2B D

IQ150MA6511 -2B 4 C

Meter Type

IQ35MA12

IQ150MA6511

IQ250MA65100

IQ260MA65100

NEMA Rating

2 = NEMA 12 1

3 = NEMA 3R

4 = NEMA 4X

Communications

C = Includes PXG-200E

CPT Option

A = 120/240 Vac No CPT

B = 480 Vac CPT 1

Number of Meters

4 = 4 meters

Description

Catalog

Number

Meter subpanel assembly for PXM 2000

and IQ 150/250/260 Meters

PXM2K-MSPA-A

Meter subpanel assembly with CPT for PXM 2000

and IQ 150/250/260 Meters

PXM2K-MSPA-B

V12-T10-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Current Products

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

General Description

Eaton’s IQ Analyzer 6400/

6600 is a complete solution

for users who want to

monitor all aspects of their

electrical distribution system.

It provides extensive

metering, power quality

analysis, remote input

monitoring, control relaying,

analog input/outputs and

communications capability.

All programming can be done

through the faceplate or

through the communications

option. Its online Help

pushbutton feature displays

information on device

operation, programming and

troubleshooting.

Features and Benefits

●All information is

accessible through the

communications port

●Quality true rms readings

through 50th harmonic

●Meets ANSI C12.16

Class 10 revenue metering

specifications

●Accurate readings for non-

sinusoidal waveforms with

up to 3.0 crest factor

●Screens display auto

ranging units, kilo units and

mega units as needed

●10-digit energy readings

●Displays multiple

parameters at the

same time

●Programmable custom

screens

The new IQ Analyzer Model

6600 with waveform display

at the device and sub-cycle

voltage disturbance capture

provides the capability to

monitor a wide range of

harmonic parameters. These

include harmonic voltage,

current magnitudes and

phase angles as well as

system disturbances such

as transient voltage

disturbances and

sub-cycle

voltage interruptions.

Product Selection

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Ordering Information

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ Analyzer, separate source power module IQA6410

IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module IQA6420

IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module IQA6430

IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture IQA6610

IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture IQA6620

IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture IQA6630

IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting IQFLANGE

45.00-inch (114.3 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module IQA45CABLE

24–48 Vdc separate source power module IQMDCPM

100–240 Vac and 100–250 Vdc separate source power module IQMSSPM

Three-phase, self-powered power module IQM3PPM

INCOM communication module IPONI

RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol MPONI

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-25

IQ Products

Current Products

IQ DP-4000/4100

General Description

Eaton’s IQ DP-4000 is a

microprocessor-based meter

providing complete electrical

metering and system voltage

protection. In one compact,

standard package the IQ

DP-4000 provides an

alternative to individually

mounted and wired

conventional meters and

switches. The IQ DP-4000

also monitors apparent power

(VA), reactive energy

(VAR-

hours), apparent energy (VA-

hours),

and % total harmonic

distortion (THD) to provide the

user with basic power quality

information. The IQ DP-4000

meets and surpasses

UL/CSA/CE standards.

Features and Benefits

●Space savings in

structure—replaces

conventional individual

metering devices

●Standardization of

design—one door-

mounted device

●Direct voltage input up

to 600V

●New DIP switch design

●Standardization of CT and

PT connections

●With additional PTs and set

points the device can be

used in HV setting

●Relaying included in I/O

module (Model 4100)

●Optional interface capability

to computer network for

data collection, storage and/

or printout via PowerNet—

Eaton leading power

distribution monitoring

network

●Retains present

parameters through power

failure with non-volatile

memory

Product Selection

IQ DP-4000/4100 Ordering Information

Description

Catalog

Number

Separate source without I/O capability

IQDP4010

Separate source control power without I/O, DC supply

IQDP4020

Three-phase without I/O capability

IQDP4030

Separate source with I/O capability

IQDP4110

Separate source control power with three Form C relay output contacts

and one sync pulse input, DC supply

IQDP4120

Three-phase with I/O capability

IQDP4130

V12-T10-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Current Products

IQ Energy Sentinels™

IQ Energy Sentinels

Eaton’s IQ Energy Sentinel

is a highly accurate,

microprocessor-based

submeter designed to monitor

power and energy readings.

It represents an alternative to

installing separate wattmeters,

watthour meters and watt-

demand meters.

Key advantages include

unmatched savings in

space, lower installation

costs, and the capability to

communicate data readings

in a variety of ways.

IQ Energy Sentinels

with built-in CTs and

communications have the

added benefit of greater

overall system accuracy.

Conventional metering often

is less accurate because

external CTs and separate

transducers may each have

inaccuracies of 1% or more.

The IQ Energy Sentinel

provides a unique and

cost-effective method to

implement energy

submetering at lower

levels in the distribution

system economically.

Submetering application

examples for the IQ Energy

Sentinel include energy

monitoring and demand

management, product cost

analysis, process/machine

tool efficiency and

productivity improvement.

Additional applications

include energy cost allocation

of tenant billing for

commercial, industrial,

recreational and residential

facilities.

Retrofitting

The space-saving design

characteristics of the breaker

mount IQ Energy Sentinels

allow them to be added to

existing Series C® circuit

breakers at any time—often

with no additional space or

modifications required. Or,

they may be installed when

upgrading to Series C from

older circuit breakers—often

with no additional space or

modifications required.

The Universal Mount IQ

Energy Sentinel with internal

CTs may be used wherever

breaker mounting is not

feasible or possible.

The Universal Mount

IQ Energy Sentinel for

external CTs may be used for

monitoring loads larger than

400A or for when the use of

existing CTs is desired.

Product Selection

IQ Energy Sentinels Ordering Information

Note

1Final three characters of catalog number are for voltage rating,i.e., 2 0 8 for 120/240, 240,

208Y/120 systems.

Description

Catalog

Number

For F-Frame breakers IQESF_ _ _ 1

For J-Frame breakers IQESJ_ _ _ 1

For K-Frame breakers IQESK_ _ _ 1

Universal with internal CTs IQESUI_ _ _ 1

Universal for external CTs IQESUE_ _ _ 1

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-27

IQ Products

Current Products

IQ 230

General Description

Eaton’s IQ 230 compact

size and flexible mounting

capabilities make it perfectly

suited for machine control

panels such as panelboard

and switchboard mains and

feeders, low voltage metal-

enclosed switchgear feeders,

motor control centers, and

especially for individual load

monitoring. The base module

can be display mounted, panel

mounted, DIN rail mounted or

side mounted. The display fits

into a standard 1/4 DIN cutout,

and for retrofit applications, a

100 mm ANSI collar is available.

One IQ 230 provides an

alternative to an assortment

of individually wired and

mounted ammeters,

voltmeters, ammeter and

voltmeter switches,

wattmeters, VAR-meters,

power factor meters,

frequency meters, watthour

and demand meters.

ANSI C12 Class 10 revenue

metering accuracy makes the

IQ 230 an ideal choice for

submetering and sub-

billing applications.

The IQ 230 can be easily

programmed and monitored

from the faceplate keypad

that features a 4 line x 20

character LED backlit LCD

display. Opting for the

compatible PowerNet system

allows the user to program and

monitor the meter remotely

from a PC.

Retrofit Opportunities

●Retrofit of existing electrical

distribution systems with

the IQ 230 for load and

energy monitoring

●Five mounting options

makes installation easier

Ratings

●Application to 200 kV,

no PTs to 600V

●CT ratios selectable 5 to

8000A

●Single-phase two- or

three-wire; three-phase

three- or four-wire

Product Selection

IQ 230 Ordering Information

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ 230 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications, pulse output,

two contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

IQ230

IQ 230M complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm) cable—with RS-485 Modbus communications, pulse output, two

contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

IQ230M

3 foot (0.9m) Category 5 cable

IQ23CABLE

6 foot (2.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ26CABLE

10 foot (3.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ210CABLE

V12-T10-28 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Current Products

MP-3000 Motor

Protection

MP-3000 Motor Protection

General Description

Eaton’s MP-3000 motor

protection relay is a

multi-functional

microprocessor-based

protective relay for the

protection of three-phase

AC motors. Though it may

be applied to any size motor

at any voltage level, it is most

commonly applied on medium

voltage or larger motors. The

MP-3000 relay is a current

only device that provides

complete and reliable motor

protection, monitoring and

starting control functions.

The MP-3000 motor

protection relay is available in

either a fixed mount, semi-

flush case or in a semi-flush

quick release drawout case.

Both housings

are compact

and fit a standard IQ cutout.

The optional quick release

drawout case features two-

stage contact disconnects

and self-shorting CT circuit

terminal blocks. A spare

self-shorting terminal pair

is available for use as relay

removal alarm or for continuous

motor operation (non-failsafe

mode) on relay removal.

The optional communication

module is externally mounted

on the fixed mount case and

internally mounted in the

drawout case.

The MP-3000 motor protection

relay has three phase and one

ground current inputs. Both a

5A and 1A version are available.

The ground protection and

metering functions can be used

with either a zero sequence

ground CT or from the residual

connection of the phase CTs.

The zero sequence ground CT

provides greater ground fault

sensitivity than the residual

connection. The unit is user-

programmable for 60 Hz or

50 Hz operation.

The MP-3000 motor protection

relay provides adaptive

overload trip characteristics

based on motor temperature

when motor RTDs are

connected through an optional

URTD module. Metering

of RTD inputs (individual

winding, motor bearing, load

and auxiliary temperatures)

is also provided.

The MP-3000 motor

protection relay has two

discrete inputs, four Form C

(1NO and 1NC) contacts and

one 4 to 20 mA analog

output. The relay provides

maximum user flexibility to

configure the I/O. All inputs

and outputs (except for the

trip output) are user-

programmable. In addition,

the relay has 10 LEDs for the

indication of protection on,

program mode, monitor

mode, view setting mode,

history mode, log mode, trip,

alarm, auxiliary 1 and auxiliary

2 operation. A test page in

the program mode provides

display indication of the

discrete input states and

testing of the output

relays, target LEDs and

analog circuit.

A user-friendly operator

interface and display provides

quick access to the settings,

monitored values, motor

history and operational logs.

Large LED alphanumeric

character display provides

easy viewing from any angle

in any light. Simple keypad

operation provides quick and

easy navigation through all

settings and stored data.

The program mode and

emergency override buttons

are access restricted via

sealing provisions and latched

cover. An integrated help

function provides an online

description display of

functions, abbreviations

and operations.

Optimum Motor Protection

The MP-3000 motor protection

relay has been designed for

maximum motor operation

and protection. It permits

running the motor as close

to its design limits while

protecting it against excessive

heating and damaging overload

conditions. The MP-3000

field-proven protection

algorithms were developed

based on motor designs

and operating parameters

for optimum operation and

protection while minimizing

nuisance tripping.

The MP-3000 motor protection

relay uses a protection

algorithm and measurement

technique based on proven

positive and negative

(unbalance) sequence

current sampling and true

rms calculations.

Product Selection

MP-3000 Motor Protection Ordering Information

Description

Catalog

Number

Motor protection in fixed case, 5A CT, communication capable with PONI MP-3000

Motor protection in drawout case, 5A CT, no communication MP-3001

Motor protection in drawout case, 5A CT, with INCOM PONI MP-3002

Motor protection in fixed case, 1A CT, communication capable with PONI MP-3100

Motor protection in drawout case, 1A CT, no communication MP-3101

Motor protection in drawout case, 1A CT, with INCOM PONI MP-3102

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 5A, CT, no communication MP3001-IC

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 5A, CT, with INCOM PONI MP3002-IC

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 1A, CT, no communication MP-3101-IC

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 1A, CT, with INCOM PONI MP3102-IC

Motor protection drawout case outer chassis MP3-OC

Motor protection, 5A, URTD, INCOM PONI, fiber optic link MP3000VPI

Motor protection, 1A, URTD, INCOM PONI, fiber optic link MP3100VPI

16-foot (5m) fiber optic cable for MP-3000/URTD communication MPFO-5

Universal RTD module URTP

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-29

IQ Products

Current Products

FP-5000 Feeder

Protection

Feeder Protection FP-5000

General Description

●Microprocessor-based

protection with monitoring

and control for medium

voltage main and feeder

applications

●Current, voltage,

frequency and power

protection for electric

power distribution

systems

●Complete metering of

voltage, currents, power,

energy, minimum/

maximum and demand

functions

●Programmable logic

control functions for main-

tie-main transfer schemes

●Trip logs, event logs and

waveform capture for

better fault analysis and

system restoration

●Data Logger to provide

energy usage profiles for

better planning, utilization

and energy usage

●Compact, drawout case

design

●Meets ANSI, UL and cUL®

standards

●Multiple setting groups

●ANSI, IEC and thermal

protection curves for

greater flexibility

Application Description

Eaton’s FP-5000 feeder

protection relay provides

complete three-phase and

ground overcurrent and

voltage protection plus

metering in a single, compact

drawout case. It may be used

as primary protection on

feeders, mains and tie circuit

breaker applications, and as

backup protection for

transformers, high voltage

lines and differential

protection. The relay is

most commonly used on

medium voltage switchgear

applications.

The FP-5000 takes full

advantage of its

microprocessor technology

providing the user new

freedoms and a wealth of data-

gathering features. The relay

performs self-checking of all

major hardware and firmware

protection elements to ensure

their operation in the event of a

system or component electrical

failure or fault. Protection

functions are well suited for

main and distribution feeder

circuit applications.

Programmable logic control

functions make the FP-5000

relay ideally suited for main-tie-

main and main 1/main 2

transfer schemes.

The multiple settings groups

can be used for arc flash

mitigation when an alternative

setting group, set to have

instantaneous elements only

is activated using a selector

switch and the programmable

I/O in the FP-5000.

Features and Benefits

The zone interlocking feature

can be used for bus

protection instead of an

expensive and complicated

bus differential (87B)

scheme. The FP-5000

works

directly with the Eaton

Digitrip

3000 and Digitrip MV relays.

Breaker failure logic provides

faster remote backup clearing

times for stuck breaker

operation.

The FP-5000 provides trip and

close circuit monitoring and

alarming features. It

continually monitors the

complete trip and close

circuits for continuity and

readiness to trip. Open and

close pushbuttons are

conveniently located on the

front of the relay for local

breaker operation.

Loss-of-vacuum monitoring is

activated when the breaker is

open. Residual current is

monitored and alarmed if

detected.

When an electrical fault

or disturbance occurs, the

FP-5000 begins to store the

following in non-volatile

memory:

●Voltage and current

sampled data

●Calculated values

●

Status of internal protection

functions,

logic, contact

inputs and outputs

Retrieval and viewing of the

data is easy, aiding in the quick

analysis and restoration of

your electric power system.

When the FP-5000 isn’t

responding to disturbances

in the power system, it’s

providing valuable metering

information at the relay and

remotely. It provides energy

usage and demand reading,

and can alarm when usage

reaches a set value. Power

factor measurements can

be used for capacitor bank

switching to control cover

demand. Inboard data

trending can provide load

profiles for up to 40 days.

Catalog Number Selection

FP-5000 Feeder Protection

Current Range

2 = 5 Amperes

3 = 1 Ampere

Control Voltage

0 = 48 – 125 Vac/Vdc

1 = 100 – 240 Vac/Vdc

Communications Protocol

0 = INCOM

1 = Modbus

FP5 2 00 - 0 1

V12-T10-30 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Accessories

Digitrip 3000 (DT-3000)

DT-3000

General Description

●Microprocessor-based,

three-phase and ground

overcurrent relay

●Independent phase and

ground measuring circuits

and operation

●ANSI, IEC and thermal

protection curves

●Fixed mount or

drawout design

●Dual-source power supply

option for AC control

power applications

Eaton’s Digitrip 3000 trip unit

(DT-3000) is a multifunction,

microprocessor-based

overcurrent trip unit designed

for both ANSI and IEC

applications. The DT-3000

design provides true rms

sensing design of each

phase and ground current.

It can be power from either

AC or DC control power. The

DT-3000 can be used for

any application where

instantaneous and/or time

overcurrent protection

is required.

The DT-3000 may be applied

as the transformer primary

protection or as backup to the

differential protection. The

DT-3000 also has zone

selective interlocking to

minimize equipment damage

resulting from a phase or

ground fault in an area where

long time and/or short time

delay is in use.

The integral Dual-Source

Power Supply allows

the DT-3000 to operate

solely from the main CTs

during a fault if the

normally connected

AC voltage is not available,

i.e., an electromechanical

or electronic “self

powered” relay.

Electrical Power System

Protection

The DT-3000 provides phase

and ground protection for

most types of medium

voltage electrical power

distribution systems.

Protection curves are similar

to those on low voltage

power circuit breaker trip

units, and provide close

coordination with

downstream devices, as well

as upstream fuse and/or

electromagnetic relays. Just

one DT-3000 replaces the

normal complement of three

or four conventional

electromagnetic overcurrent

relays, an ammeter, a

demand ammeter, an

ammeter switch and, in some

situations, a lockout relay

switch (device 86).

Product Selection

DT-3000 Ordering Information

Description

Catalog

Number

DT-3000 protective relay DT3000

DT-3000 protective relay Chicago version DT3100

DT-3030 protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version) DT3030

DT-3000 drawout case protective relay DT3001

DT-3000 Chicago version drawout case protective relay DT3101

DT-3030 drawout case protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version) DT3031

DT-3000 protective relay with 120 Vac dual-source power supply DT3010

DT-3000 protective relay with 240 Vac dual-source power supply DT3020

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-31

IQ Products

Accessories

IQ Flange

For applications where extra

door-mounting space is

required, a flange-mounting

unit is available. Eaton’s IQ

Flange provides an extra 2.50

inches (63.5 mm) of clearance

for the device.

Product Selection

IQ Flange

Panel Mounting Adapter

Kit for IQ 100/200 Series

and PXM 2000 Meters

Panel Mounting Adapter Kit

The flange adapter plate can

be installed as follows:

1. Remove the old meter

from the panel or door.

Many IQ metering

products use the typical

IQ drilling pattern shown

in for mounting.

2. Install the flange adapter

plate. Mount it from the

rear using the six screws

provided in the kit.

The flange adapter

plate screw hole pattern

should match the typical

IQ drilling pattern. If not,

perform the next step.

3. Drill six holes in the panel

or the door to mount

the flange adapter plate.

Follow the typical IQ

drilling pattern. You need

only the top, center and

bottom sets of holes.

4. Install the new IQ 100/

200 Series or PXM 2000

meter in the flange

adapter plate. Secure it

from behind with four flat

washers, lock washers

and nuts provided with

the meter.

Product Selection

Ordering Information

IQ DC Power Supply

The IQ DC Power Supply is a

DC to AC inverter module

intended for use where DC

power is available, but some

AC is required. The unit will

operate an MP-3000 or other

AC powered IQ devices

requiring no more than 75 VA

of power at any power factor.

Product Selection

IQ DC Power Supply

IQ Cable

For applications where

remote mounting of the

power supply is required, an

extension cable is available.

Two types of cable are

available. The first (catalog

number IQCABLE) is for the

obsolete IQ Data, Generator,

and Data Plus II. The

second (catalog number

IQA45CABLE) is for the

IQ Analyzer and IQ DP-4000.

Product Selection

IQ Cable

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ Flange option, to provide

extra clearance when mounting

IQFLANGE

Description

Catalog

Number

Panel mounting adapter kit

IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000

Series adapter kit to

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/

IQ Data

IQ250-PMAK

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ DC power supply IQDCPS

Description

Catalog

Number

36.00-inch (914.4 mm)

extension cable

IQ Data, Generator,

Data Plus II

IQCABLE

45.00-inch (1143.0 mm)

extension cable

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000

IQA45CABLE

V12-T10-32 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Accessories

IQ Floor-Mounted

Enclosure

Two 10-Inch Wide Enclosures (Shown

with Optional 10-Inch High Bus

Compartment)

Type 1

Standard AMPGARD

structure construction,

painted ASA-61. To be used

as a lineup extension for

mounting IQ products. Each

10.00-inch (254.0 mm) wide

section comes with (two)

doors with “works-in-a-

drawer” drawout panel. Each

door has three standard IQ

cutouts with device panels,

and can be supplied with or

without IQ devices.

Product Selection

IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure

Addressable Relay II

The Addressable Relay II has

two status inputs and a Form C

contact output.

●Input rating: 48–120 Vac,

48–125 Vdc

●Output contact rating: 10A

at 277 Vac, 10A at 30 Vdc

Features include a

communications watchdog

and relay pulse. Baud rate

is selectable.

Product Selection

Addressable Relay II

Description

Style

Number

10.00-inch W x 30.00-inch D

x 90.00-inch H

(254.0 mm W x 762.0 mm D

x 2286.0 mm H)

Bus compartment optional

2147A95G35

Description

Catalog

Number

Addressable Relay II ARII

Power Modules

Eaton and Westinghouse

have produced a number of

different meters dating back

to the 1980s. Many of these

meters used and continue to

use power modules to

provide voltage sensing

isolation and control power

to the meter.

Power modules are available

to power the meter directly

from the voltage source being

sensed or for separate control

power input. Renewal part

power modules are available

for the meters shown in the

table below.

Product Selection

Power Modules

Note

1The adjacent power modules will work with each basic meter style, regardless of the last

two digits of the meter style number.

Description

Used with Meter

Style Number

Power Module

Catalog Number

Old IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer self-powered

three-phase power module

2D82302GXX

4D13110GXX

IQA3PPM

Old IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer

separate source 110 to 240 Vac or 110 to 250 Vdc

power module

2D82302GXX

4D13110GXX

IQASSPM

New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer

self-powered three-phase

power module

66D2045GXX

66D2040GXX

IQM3PPM

New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer

24/48 Vdc power module

66D2045GXX

66D2040GXX

IQMDCPM

New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer

separate source 110 to 240 Vac or 110 to 250 Vdc

power module

66D2045GXX

66D2040GXX

IQMSSPM

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-33

IQ Products

Accessories

Current Transformers

(CTs)

Current Transformers (CTs)

General Description

Eaton’s low voltage current

transformers are available in

both solid core and split core

designs. Engineered for

electronic metering

applications, all solid core

designs and selected split

core designs offer ANSI

metering quality accuracy.

The solid core designs also

meet ANSI C57.13 relay

accuracy requirements

including over-ranging

capabilities. The current

transformer offering has a

5 ampere secondary at the

rated primary current.

Split core CTs are specifically

designed to be installed

around primary conductors

without disconnecting wires

or breaking the circuit to be

monitored. These current

transformers are perfect

solutions for energy

management applications

and are manufactured for

installation ease.

Product Selection

Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy

Note

1Contact Eaton for further information.

Primary

Current

Rating

ANSI B0.1

Metering Class at 60 Hz

(Accuracy in %)

Window Size

in Inches (mm)

Diameter

Catalog

Number

Mounting Bracket

Catalog

Number

1.25 (31.8) Window

50 1.2 1.25 (31.8) S060-500 1

100 0.6 1.25 (31.8) S060-101 1

150 0.3 1.25 (31.8) S060-151 1

200 0.3 1.25 (31.8) S060-201 1

1.56 (39.6) Window

300 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-301 S050BRAC

400 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-401 S050BRAC

500 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-501 S050BRAC

600 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-601 S050BRAC

750 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-751 S050BRAC

800 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-801 S050BRAC

1000 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-102 S050BRAC

1200 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-122 S050BRAC

3.25 (82.6) Window

400 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-401 S080BRAC

500 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-501 S080BRAC

600 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-601 S080BRAC

750 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-751 S080BRAC

800 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-801 S080BRAC

1000 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-102 S080BRAC

1200 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-122 S080BRAC

4.25 (108.0) Window

500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-501 S090BRAC

600 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-601 S090BRAC

750 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-751 S090BRAC

800 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-801 S090BRAC

1000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-102 S090BRAC

1200 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-122 S090BRAC

1500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-152 S090BRAC

1600 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-162 S090BRAC

2000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-202 S090BRAC

2500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-252 S090BRAC

3000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-302 S090BRAC

6.31 (160.3) Window

600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-601 S025BRAC

750 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-751 S025BRAC

800 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-801 S025BRAC

1000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-102 S025BRAC

1200 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-122 S025BRAC

1500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-152 S025BRAC

1600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-162 S025BRAC

2000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-202 S025BRAC

2500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-252 S025BRAC

3000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-302 S025BRAC

3500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-352 S025BRAC

4000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-402 S025BRAC

V12-T10-34 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Accessories

Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy Split Core Current Transformers

Primary

Current

Rating

ANSI B0.1

Metering Class at 60 Hz

(Accuracy in %)

Window Size

in Inches (mm)

Catalog

Number

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

400 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-401

500 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-501

600 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-601

800 1.2 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-801

1000 1.2 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-102

1200 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-122

1500 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-152

1600 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-162

2000 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-202

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

600 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-601

750 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-751

800 2.4 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-801

1000 2.4 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-102

1200 1.2 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-122

1500 1.2 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-152

2000 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-202

2500 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-252

3000 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-302

3500 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-352

4000 0.3 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-402

Primary

Current

Rating

Accuracy

at 60 Hz (in %)

Window Size

in Inches (mm)

Catalog

Number

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

100 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-101

150 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-151

200 4.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-201

300 2.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-301

400 2.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-401

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

100 5.0 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-101

150 4.0 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-151

200 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-201

300 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-301

400 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-401

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

200 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-201

300 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-301

400 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-401

500 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-501

600 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-601

750 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-751

800 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-801

1000 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-102

1200 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-122

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-501

600 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-601

800 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-801

1000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-102

1200 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-122

1500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-152

1600 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-162

2000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-202

2500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-252

3000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-302

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-35

IQ Products

Accessories

Clamp-On Current

Transformers

IQ Accessories—Clamp-On CTs

General Description

Eaton’s optional Clamp-on

Current Transformers (CTs)

are designed to be used in

cases where there are no

existing CTs or the existing

CTs cannot be accessed,

these clamp-on CTs can

be used.

These clamp-on CTs are

packaged individually. Most

applications will require at

least three clamp-on CTs,

one for each phase.

Product Selection

Ordering Information

Description

Catalog

Number

150–300–600A IQAPORT0600CT

500–1000–1500A IQAPORT1500CT

V12-T10-36 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ 2000

IQ 2000 Model A

IQ 2000 Model B

Recommended Replacement

Production of IQ 2000

devices has been

discontinued. The IQ 2000

can be replaced with the

MP-3000 electronic motor

protective relay and the

IQ DP-4000 electronic meter.

The MP-3000 provides motor

current protective relaying,

while the IQ DP-4000

provides complete electrical

metering and voltage

protective alarming

functions. For specific

application consideration,

contact your local Eaton

Field Sales office.

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 is a

complete solution for users

who want to monitor all

aspects of their electrical

distribution system.

It provides extensive

metering, power quality

analysis, remote input

monitoring, control relaying,

analog input/outputs and

communications capability.

All programming can be done

through the faceplate or

through the communications

option. Its online Help

Pushbutton feature displays

information on device

operation, programming

and troubleshooting.

Features and Benefits

●All information accessible

through communications

port

●Quality true rms readings

through 50th harmonic

●Meets ANSI C12.16 Class

10 revenue metering spec

●Accurate readings for non-

sinusoidal waveforms with

up to 3.0 crest factor

●Screens display auto

ranging units, kilo units,

mega units as needed

●10-digit energy readings

●Displays multiple

parameters at the

same time

●Programmable custom

screens.The IQ Analyzer

Model 6200 with waveform

display at the device

and sub-cycle voltage

disturbance capture

provides the capability to

monitor a wide range of

harmonic parameters.

These include harmonic

voltage, current magnitudes

and phase angles, as well

as system disturbances

such as transient voltage

disturbances and sub-cycle

voltage interruptions. This

unit is also available in a

portable version.

Recommended Replacement

Eaton’s IQ Analyzer 6400/

6600

RTD Modules

Universal RTD Module

Recommended Replacement

The RTD Modules for

the IQ 2000 have been

discontinued. Now available

is the new Universal RTD

Module that replaces all of

the RTD modules for the

Model A and B IQ 2000

units, as well as the IQ 1000,

IQ 1000 II and all current

IQ metering and protection

products.

Product Selection

Universal RTD

Description

Catalog

Number

Universal module URTD

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-37

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Data Plus and

IQ Data Plus II

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ

Data Plus was discontinued

in 1989 and was replaced by

the IQ Data Plus II. The

IQ Data Plus II was

discontinued in 1998.

Recommended Replacement

IQ DP-4000

IQ 1000 and IQ 1000 II

IQ 1000 II

Recommended Replacement

Both the IQ 1000 and the

IQ 1000 II have been discon-

tinued and replaced by

the MP-3000 for complete

motor protection. A detailed

application note

(MP3K01R4.PDF) describing

replacement of the IQ 1000 II

with an MP-3000 is available

at www.eaton.com.

IQ Data

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ

Data provides simultaneous

current and voltage metering.

In one compact, standard

package, this device provides

an alternative to individually

mounted and wired ammeters,

voltmeters, and ammeter

and voltmeter switches.

Features and Benefits

●Space savings in

structure—replaces

ammeter, voltmeter,

selector switches

and frequency meter

(IQ Generator)

●Standardization of

design—one door-

mounted device

●Direct voltage input up

to 600V—no additional

potential transformers

(PTs) required

●User-friendly—field-

settable DIP switches

●Standard model derives

power from separate

source 120/240 Vac supply

●Only two style numbers

●No need to stock multiple

units for different current

transformers (CT)

and PT ratios

●Interface capability to

computer network for data

collection, storage and/or

printout via IMPACC

●Membrane faceplate,

designed and tested

to perform in a harsh

industrial environment

(Type 3R, 12)

●Retains preset parameters

through

power failure with

use of field-settable

DIP

switches (no batteries)

Product Selection

IQ Data

Recommended Replacement

IQ DP-4000

Description

Catalog

Number

Basic metering IQDATA

Basic metering with

three-phase power module

IQDATAPM

V12-T10-38 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Generator

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

IQ Generator provides

simultaneous current and

voltage metering. In addition,

the IQ Generator monitors

frequency. This device

provides an alternative to

individually mounted and

wired ammeters, voltmeters,

ammeter and voltmeter

switches, and frequency

meters.

Features and Benefits

●Space savings in

structure—replaces

ammeter, voltmeter,

selector switches

and frequency meter

(IQ Generator)

●Standardization of

design—one door-

mounted device

●Direct voltage input up

to 600V—no additional

PTs required

●User-friendly—field-

settable DIP switches

●Standard model derives

power from separate

source 120/240 Vac supply

●Only two style numbers

●No need to stock multiple

units for different CT and

PT ratios

●Interface capability to

computer network for data

collection, storage and/or

printout via IMPACC

●Membrane faceplate,

designed and tested to

perform in harsh industrial

environment (Type 3R, 12)

●Retains preset parameters

through

power failure with

use of field-settable

DIP

switches (no batteries)

Product Selection

IQ Generator

Recommended Replacement

IQ DP-4000

Description

Catalog

Number

Basic metering IQGEN

Basic metering with

three-phase power module

IQGENPM

IQ 300

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ

300’s thin display and flexible

mounting capabilities make it

perfectly suited for any

application where an

accurate, multifunction meter

is desired, such as

panelboard and switchboard

mains and feeders, motor

control centers, and both low

voltage and high voltage

metal-enclosed switchgear.

Features and Benefits

●Bright display with eight

large numeric digits along

with a 10-character

description of the

measured value makes the

IQ 300 ideal for switchgear

mounting

●Base unit can be display

mounted for simple, one-

hole installation

●Base unit can be mounted

up to 10 feet (3m) away

from display and has three

mounting options

Product Selection

IQ 300

Recommended Replacement

IQ DP-4000/4100

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ 310 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm) cable—no communications, no pulse output

IQ310

IQ 320 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications and pulse output

IQ320

IQ 330 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications, pulse output, two contact

outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

IQ330

IQ 330M complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm) cable—with RS-485 Modbus communications, pulse output, two

contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

IQ330M

IQ 300D display module only IQ300D

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-39

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ 210/220

General Description

Eaton’s IQ 210/220 compact

size and flexible mounting

capabilities make it perfectly

suited for machine control

panels such as panelboard

and switchboard mains and

feeders, low voltage metal-

enclosed switchgear feeders,

motor control centers, and

especially for individual load

monitoring. The base module

can be display mounted,

panel mounted, DIN rail

mounted or side mounted.

The display fits into a

standard 1/4 DIN cutout,

and for retrofit applications,

a 100 mm ANSI collar

is available.

One IQ 210/220 provides an

alternative to an assortment of

individually wired and mounted

ammeters, voltmeters,

ammeter and voltmeter

switches, wattmeters,

VAR-meters, power factor

meters, frequency meters,

watthour and demand meters.

ANSI C12 Class 10 revenue

metering accuracy makes

the IQ 200 an ideal choice

for submetering and sub-

billing applications.

The IQ 200 can be easily

programmed and monitored

from the faceplate keypad

that features a 4 line x 20

character LED backlit LCD

display. Opting for the

compatible PowerNet

system allows the user to

program and monitor the

meter remotely from a PC.

Retrofit Opportunities

●Retrofit of existing

electrical distribution

systems with the IQ 210/

220 for load and energy

monitoring

●Five mounting options

makes installation easier

Ratings

●Application to 200 kV,

no PTs to 600V

●CT ratios selectable

5 to 8000A

●Single-phase two- or

three-wire; three-phase

three- or four-wire

Product Selection

IQ 210/220 Ordering Information

Recommended Replacement

IQ 230

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ 210 complete meter — includes base, display and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable

IQ210

IQ 220 complete meter — includes base display module and 14.00-inch

(355.6 mm)

cable

with INCOM

communications and KYZ output

IQ220

IQ 220 transducer base only with INCOM communications and KYZ output

IQ220TRAN

IQ 200D IQ 210/220 display module

IQ200D

3 foot (0.9m) Category 5 cable

IQ23CABLE

6 foot (2.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ26CABLE

10 foot (3.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ210CABLE

V12-T10-40 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ 110/115 Electronic

Power Meters

IQ 110 Electronic Power Meter

General Description

The IQ 100 Meter family

provides capabilities you

would not normally expect in

affordable, compact meters,

such as fast sampling rate

and accurate metering for a

full range of power

attributes. Providing the first

line of defense against costly

power problems, Eaton’s IQ

100 series electronic power

meters can perform the work

of an entire wall of legacy

metering equipment utilizing

today’s technology.

When space is at a premium,

yet you need ANSI C12.20

accuracy, the IQ 100 series

fit the bill. These meters are

ideal for electrical equipment

assemblies, machine control

panels, such as panelboard

and switchboard mains and

feeders, low voltage metal-

enclosed switchgear feeders

and motor control centers.

Requiring far less space than

other meters with similar

functionality, IQ 100 series fit

into a standard ANSI or IEC

cutout on a panelboard or

other electrical equipment,

and therefore fit easily into

retrofit applications.

Features and Benefits

●Measure and display real-

time information about

critical power parameters

with a sampling rate of

400 samples per cycle

●Monitor power utilization

and quality with ANSI

C12.20 accuracy (0.5%)

●Verify meter accuracy with

KYZ test pulse self-

certification capabilities

●Optional Modbus RTU

communications

●Available as transducer

only or with display

●Designed to

accommodate upgrades

●Integrate into Eaton’s

Power Xpert Architecture

for a holistic system-

level view

Product Selection

IQ 110/115 Ordering Information

Recommended Replacement

IQ 130/140

Description

Catalog

Number

Measures voltage and current

IQ 110

Measures voltage, current and frequency

IQ 115

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-41

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Power Sentinel

IQ Power Sentinal

General Description

Like the IQ Energy Sentinel,

the IQ Power Sentinel

is a highly accurate

microprocessor-based

submeter designed to monitor

power and energy. In addition

to watts, watthour and watt-

demand, the IQ power

sentinel monitors current,

voltage, reactive power

(VARs), apparent power (VA),

power factor and frequency.

The IQ Power Sentinel offers

an accurate and economic

alternative to separate

meters and transducers.

The IQ Power Sentinel is

only available in the universal

mount with internal CTs up to

400 amperes.

Features and Benefits

Features

●Monitors (accuracy stated

full scale)

●AC line current (each

phase) ±0.5%

●AC line-to-line voltage

±0.5%

●AC line-to-neutral

voltages ±0.5%

●Watts (each phase and

total) ±1.0%

●VARs (each phase and

total) ±1.0%

●VA (each phase and

total) ±1.0%

●Apparent Power Factor

(each phase and total)

±0.5%

●Displacement Power

Factor (each phase and

total) ±0.5%

●Demand (total watts)

±1.0%

●Frequency ±0.5%

●Watthours ±1.0%

●Built-in CTs version up to

400 amperes

●Panel or DIN rail mounted

●Powered directly off

the line

●Built-in communication

capability

●Address set by

DIP switches

●Communication at

9600 baud

●Noise immune

INCOM protocol

●Choice of operator

interfaces

●Subnetwork Master

Local Display

●Breaker Interface

Module

●Power Management

Energy Billing software

●Power Management

Software

●UL and CSA listed

●CE mark

Benefits

●One device replaces

multiple meters

and/or transducers

●Improved system accuracy

●Savings in product cost

●Savings in space

●Savings in installation cost

●No external power source

is needed

●Permits remote

monitoring and

interconnection with

programmable logic

controllers and building

management systems.

For further information

see section on Power

Management Software

Systems

●Designed to interface

directly with Power

Management Software

Energy Billing software

●Flexibility—displays what

is needed where it is

needed

●Power Management

Software

Product Selection

IQ Power Sentinal Ordering Information

Recommended Replacement

PM3

Description

Catalog

Number

Universal with internal CTs, 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 IQPSUI208

Universal with internal CTs, 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 IQPSUI400

Universal with internal CTs, 480, 480Y/277 IQPSUI480

Universal with internal CTs, 600, 600Y/347 IQPSUI600

V12-T10-42 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter II

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II

General Description

Eaton’s IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter II is a revenue

class electronic submetering

device that can be mounted in

panelboards or switchboards.

When mounted in a

panelboard or switchboard,

the IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter II provides

customers with an integrated

power distribution and energy

metering solution that saves

space, reduces installation

labor and lowers total cost.

Features and Benefits

The IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter II offers low-cost

metering of kW and kWh

for multiple tenants of

residential and commercial

office buildings for one- to

three-phase voltage loads

not exceeding 347/600 volts.

The IQ Multipoint Energy

Submeter II contains INCOM

networking to chain together

multiple meters in locations

throughout the facility. See

above for a typical apartment

building layout.

●Multipoint electrical

energy metering

●Built-in communication

interface

●Flexible metering

configuration

●Monitors single-phase and

three-phase loads from

120 Vac to 600 Vac in

three voltage ranges

●Monitors power in watts

and energy in watthours

for up to 16 Current

Sensors

●Very low profile design,

less than 1.50 inches

(38.1 mm) in height

●Energy values stored in

non-volatile memory

●Stores extensive energy

profile data for each

metering point. Can

be used to identify

coincidental peak

demand contribution

●Space-saving stacking

design allows two units

to be mounted together

●Supports Time-of-Use

energy monitoring

●Demand interval adjustable

from 5 to 60 minutes

●Measures bus voltage

●Front panel LEDs provide

status of unit and

communication activity

●Meets rigid ANSI C12.1

and IEC 61036 accuracy

specifications for revenue

meters

●Can be directly mounted in

a UL-approved panelboard

or switchboard

Product Selection

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Ordering Information

1CS005 is not discontinued and is still being used.

Recommended Replacement

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

Description

Catalog

Number

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 120V with INCOM IQMESIIN1

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 277V with INCOM IQMESIIN2

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 347V with INCOM IQMESIIN3

Current Sensors—5 amperes, Qty. 3 CS005 1

Current Sensors—50 amperes, Qty. 6 CS050

Current Sensors—70 amperes, Qty. 6 CS070

Current Sensors—125 amperes, Qty. 3 CS125

Current Sensors—200 amperes, Qty. 3 CS200

Current Sensors—400 amperes, Qty. 3 CS400

Current Sensor Extensions—4 feet (1.2m), Qty. 6 CSET04

Current Sensor Extensions—8 feet (2.4m), Qty. 3 CSET08

Current Sensor Extensions—16 feet (4.9m), Qty. 3 CSET16

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-43

IQ Products

Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

Further Information

Pricing Information

IQ/PXM Products

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount

Symbol C10-S24.

DT-3000

Vista/VISTALINE Discount

Symbol MV-3.

Publication Number Description

Metering Devices

TD02600001E

TD02601007E

TD02601017E

TD150006EN

TD02601016E

TD02601015E

TD02601019E

TD02601018E

TD.17.02B.T.E

TD.17.03A.T.E

Selection Chart

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000

Power Xpert 2000

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

IQ 250/260

IQ 130/140/150

IQ 150S/250S

IQ 35M

IQ Analyzer

IQ DP-4000

TD.17.31.T.E

TD.17.06A.T.E

TD02601003E

TD.17.07.T.E

IQ 300

IQ 200

IQ 110/115

IQ Sentinels

TD17C02TE

TD17C01TE

TD17C03TE

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II

Portable IQ Analyzer

Optional Clamp-on CTs

TD.17.08A.T.E

TD02601002E

IQ DP-4000 I/O Module

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000 Auxiliary Power Supply

Current Transformers

Protective Relays

TD02600001E

TD.17.10.T.E

TD.17.11.T.E

Selection Chart

Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay

MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay

TD.17.30.T.E

TD.17.12.T.E

TD.17.13.T.E

FP-5000 Feeder Relay

Dual-Source Power Supply

Digitrip 3000 Optional Drawout Case

TD.17.14.T.E

TD.17.08A.T.E

Universal RTD Module

IQ DC Power Supply

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-1

Communication Systems

Monitoring Software

and Communications

11 Communication Systems

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-2

PowerNet Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-2

Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-3

Power Xpert Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-4

Power Xpert Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-6

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-8

Communications Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-12

mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-12

Power Xpert Gateway 200E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-13

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-16

PONI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-25

IPONI/MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-25

MINT II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-25

Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-25

IMPCABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-26

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-26

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-26

V12-T11-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Product Description

PowerNet Software

Integrated PowerNet Support

PowerNet™ (available on the

Power Xpert® Software DVD).

Updates to the PowerNet

system are available;

however, the recommended

update path is to upgrade to

Power Xpert Software. See

Page V12-T11-4 for details

on Power Xpert Software.

General Description

The features of Eaton’s

PowerNet software suite

are available as a standard

part of Power Xpert Software.

PowerNet is a family of

software applications, client/

server configuration, that help

provide a window into an

electrical distribution system.

Existing PowerNet systems

can be easily integrated with

Power Xpert Software.

PowerNet Features

●Connectivity bundle

●Communication to 1000

INCOM™ devices

●Auto learn of all INCOM

connected devices for

maximum usability

●Security configuration

●Trending/logging

configurations

●Device set point editing/

printing/viewing

●MSDE/SQL data storage

●Dynamic Data Exchange

(DDE) server

●OLE for Process Control

(OPC) server

●Modbus RTU Gateway

to data from Eaton

INCOM communicating

devices

●Power quality bundle

●Viewing of captured

waveforms

●Up to eight cycles of

actual waveform

●Zoomed-in view of

high-speed waveform

samples

●Spectrum chart showing

frequency content and

magnitude (Fourier

analysis)

●CBEMA/ITIC

representation of events

●Top down access to

specific Waveform

events from event lists

and CBEMA/ITIC curves

●Trip curve display for

coordination and

selectivity needs

●Log-log coordination

curve plotted on-screen

for trip units and motor

protective relays with

the click of a button

●Online modification of

trip curve pickups and

time delays; instant

verification of

coordination with an

updated trip curve

●Automatic scale

adjustment based on

device pickup level

●Addition or removal of

trip curves directly from

the display screen

●Color-coded curves tied

to the device description

for added clarity

●Overlay multiple curves

●View motor start profiles

next to motor protection

relay trip curve

PowerNet Digitrip Screen Viewed

in Power Xpert Software

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-3

Communication Systems

Product Description

Eaton’s Electrical

Services & Systems

PowerNet Software

Supplementing the hardware

and software, Eaton’s

Electrical Services & Systems

can provide local startup

and integration services to

customize the PowerNet

system to your specific

business needs. Basic

field startup, integration of

PowerNet into other plant

systems, and remote

monitoring of the plant with

industry experts in energy and

power quality are all services

provided by our local field

representatives. These

services will ensure that you

get maximum return on all of

your system investments.

Note: PowerNet systems do

not consist of exclusively Cutler-

Hammer® (Eaton) products.

Hundreds of drivers exist to

communicate with many third-

party meters, protective relays

and PLCs.

Flexible Network

Architecture

A PowerNet network

can be built in a variety of

configurations. Systems can

be built using existing Ethernet

networks

as the backbone,

as well as on a dedicated

twisted shielded pair running

throughout a facility.

Telephone, radio and fiber

modems can be used to

create networks where it

is cost prohibitive to run

dedicated cables. The most

flexible, highest performance

network architecture includes

a dedicated twisted shielded

pair network within the

switchboard or equipment

room connecting into a high

speed Ethernet backbone.

For a layout of a typical facility

network, refer to the 15th

Edition of the Consulting

Application Guide.

Ethernet Backbone

TCP/IP Ethernet networks

have become the worldwide

standard for moving

information. Industry has

recognized Ethernet as a high

speed, flexible, low-cost

network that is not vendor

dependent. The PowerNet

network uses a standard

TCP/IP Ethernet as the high

speed backbone for carrying

information to clients across

the plant or across the world.

Dedicated Twisted

Shielded Pair

Customers who desire to run

a dedicated network for the

power monitoring network

have a choice between a

dedicated Ethernet network

or running a twisted shielded

pair. A network of 1000

devices running up to

10,000 feet can be

networked through one

twisted shielded pair of wire.

Eaton PowerNet System

Medium Voltage

Unit Substation

Load Interrupter

Switchgear

Transformer

Adjustable

Frequency

Control

Low Voltage

Secondary Unit

Substation

Load Interrupter

Switchgear

Motor

Control

Center

Medium Voltage

Starter

Transformer

Low Voltage

Switchboard

Lighting

Control

Panelboard

■ Power quality

■ Metering data

■ Energy information

■ Switch/breaker starter status/control

■ Time stamped events

■ Breaker operations

■ Motor runtime

■ Motor winding/bearing temperature

■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration

■ Transformer data

■ Power quality

■ Metering data

■ Energy information

■ Starter/breaker status/control

■ Time stamped events

■ Breaker operations

■ Motor operations runtime

■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration

■ Drive status

■ Drive metering data

■ Drive speed adjustment/control

■ Power quality

■ Metering data

■ Energy information

■ Starter/breaker status/control

■ Time stamped events

■ Breaker operations

■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration

Personal Computer

with Eaton

PowerNet Software

V12-T11-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Product Description

Power Xpert Software

General Description

Power Xpert Software

aggregates the information

arriving from different types

of device families via various

communication methods. Its

unique Web-based design,

alarm bubble-up and

advanced trend and

waveform analysis tools

help you to quickly turn

your attention to the most

important events and to

identify reliability issues

and cost-saving opportunities.

The standard custom

graphic package, the

Layout Manager, with an

icon library and standard

vertical templates, allows

you to import and mimic

your physical environment

and gauges. Open protocol

support makes Power Xpert

Software compatible with

most newer generation

third-party equipment. Older

legacy, proprietary protocols

are supported by Power

Xpert Gateways (see

Page V12-T11-13), and

custom software drop-in

drivers made available by

Eaton. Power Xpert Software

is the first power system

software of this caliber

to put all these powerful

features at your fingertips.

Product Selection Guide

Power Xpert Software

Professional Edition

●Geared toward end users,

with built-in support for

Eaton power distribution

products such as

switchgear, UPSs,

breakers, PDUs, RPPs,

meters, relays, VFDs and

MCCs, among others

●Eaton products connect

with the software directly

via an Ethernet connection,

while legacy devices use

a Power Xpert Gateway

to Web-enable their

communications

●A subset of third-party

meters and devices are

supported as standard via

the gateway connection

Power Xpert Software

Enterprise Edition

●Geared toward advanced

power users, system

integrators and enterprises

with heterogeneous

device spectrum and

system developers who

can take advantage of

the included SNMP and

Modbus integration

development utilities

●Extensive support for

third-party devices via

standard SNMP and

Modbus TCP protocols

●Large variety of ready

made, optional third-party

drop in drivers available

Key Features

●Connects to your existing

network

●Data trending and graphing

for detailed information

for troubleshooting,

problem prevention

and costs savings

●Web-based views that

allow access to critical

information from any

location via a Web browser

●A modular, scalable

architecture that allows the

addition of capabilities and

devices as the power

system expands

●Alarm conditions bubble

up through the system to

allow personnel to identify

which device is in alarm

and where it is located

●All the functionality of

Eaton’s PowerNet

software suite

●Connectivity to a wide

range of Eaton and third-

party devices. For a full

list of compatible devices,

refer to the hardware

compatibility list found

at www.eaton.com/pxs

Power Xpert Software Layout Manager

The Power Xpert Software

Layout Manager module

provides the user a library

of powerful design tools and

standard templates for the

creation of custom Human–

Machine Interface (HMI)

graphical layouts. Objects can

be easily animated, various

gauges can be selected,

and custom bitmaps can be

imported with little effort.

Power Xpert Software Edition Features

Note: For a full list of supported devices, see the Hardware Compatibility

List at www.eaton.com/pxs.

For detailed information regarding Power Xpert Software

modules, system requirements, supported devices and more,

please see www.eaton.com/pxs or the Consulting Application

Guide, CA08104001E, Tab 2.

Feature Sets

Power Xpert

Software

Professional

Edition

Power Xpert

Software

Enterprise

Edition

Server module ■■

Trend viewer module ■■

Layout manager module ■■

Quality manager module ■■

Eaton device support (switchgear, UPSs, breakers,

ePDUs, meters, relays, VDFs, MCCs, etc.)

■■

Power Xpert Gateway third-party device support ■■

SNMP connector ■

Modbus connector ■

Optional third-party driver support ■

Custom third-party device driver support ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-5

Communication Systems

Product Description

Power Xpert Software General Features

Features

General

Web browser user interface

Web-based monitoring capabilities

Downloadable software version updates

Event Notification

Event notification via e-mail notification

Event notification via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces

Alarm state management

Event indicator displayed without Web page active

Alarm/event searching and filtering

Waveform attached to applicable power event

Web browser based waveform viewing

Alarm capabilities based on device driven events

Analysis and Trending

Graphic trend viewer

Chart or data option selection

Multiple trends display

Multiple axis support

View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform

Standard COMTRADE file format support

Customizable trend viewer look and feel

Fixed or custom time frames

Trend analysis capabilities

Data export

Custom Graphics and Layouts

Custom graphics development via Web browser

Four user view example templates included as standard

iFrame capability

Browser portal widget support

Streaming media support

Graphic object library included as standard

ISO standard electrical picture objects available

Graphic files import capability

Graphic object animation capability

Gauge object library support

External Web Links support

Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers

Features

UPS Shutdown

File saving during shutdown

Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown

Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability

Security and Administration

Windows authentication security

Two tier secure system access support

SSL

Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS)

Trend object support

Time Synchronization

Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond time resolution

Export and Integration

Extended Excel® spreadsheet support

SQL database query support

Logs

System log

Error log

Service

Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE)

Turnkey startup service

System Backup

Power Xpert Software system backup

Documentation and Training Videos

System Administrator’s Guide

Power Xpert Software User’s Guide

Layout Manager Guide

Quick Start Guide

Power Xpert Software introduction and training video

Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video

V12-T11-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Product Description

Power Xpert Reporting

Architectural Overview

Power Xpert Reporting

brings the power system

information together to

compare and contrast.

Power Xpert Reporting

provides a standard set

of reports, including:

●Data Center Efficiency

Report: A summary of

data center infrastructure

efficiency and power usage

effectiveness, including

such information as

temperature and humidity,

and energy consumption

Data Center Efficiency Report

●Greenhouse Gas Report:

Captures the six offensive

greenhouse gasses:

carbon dioxide, sulfur

dioxide, nitrogen oxide,

mercury, methane and

nitrous oxide broken

down by selected locations

within a facility

Greenhouse Gas Report

●Utilities Report: Captures

consumption of water, air,

gas, electricity and steam

(WAGES)

Utilities Report

●Capacity Summary

Report: The summary of

top- and bottom-loaded

circuits, as well as loading

details for each circuit

according to user-defined

date/time range and facility

hierarchy location

Capacity Summary Report

●Branch Circuit Monitoring

Report: Determine branch

circuit loading levels at a

glance with color-coded

graphics indicating loading

status against capacity.

Redundant sources can be

reviewed, as well as single

source loads

Branch Circuit Monitoring Report

Foreseer

Software

(one or more

instances)

Power Xpert Reporting

Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices

Power Xpert

Software

(one or more

instances)

Device

Aggregators

(PowerNet,

Gateways)

Power Xpert

Devices

(Meters,

Gateways,

Other)

4CR Data

Acquisition

Engine

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-7

Communication Systems

Product Description

●Energy Summary

Report: The summary of

consumption (kWh) and

demand (kW) for a user-

defined date/time range and

facility hierarchy location

Energy Summary Report

●Energy Cost Allocation

Report: The total energy

bill dollar value or a cost

per kWh across a facility

hierarchy for a user-defined

date/time range

Energy Cost Allocation Report

●Power Quality Report:

The distribution and trend

for amps, volts and THD

according to user-defined

date/time ranges and

facility hierarchy location

Power Quality Report

●Event Summary Report:

Provides a Pareto chart of

events according to user-

defined date/time ranges

and facility hierarchy

location

Event Summary Report

●Joint Commission

Report: Standard Joint

Commission Compliant

Report supports hospital

power test requirements.

It checks events, key

metrics of generators and

automatic transfer switches

(ATS) during generator

testing at user-defined

date/time ranges and

facility hierarchy location

Joint Commission Report

Service Offerings

Available Power Xpert Startup

Service Packs

At Eaton, we want to make

it as easy and non-disruptive

as possible to implement

our Power Xpert products.

Eaton offers several startup

service packs from partial

help to full turnkey solution

implementation.

All services are performed

by authorized Eaton’s

Electrical Services &

Systems group personnel.

Startup Service Packs Include

the Following Services

●Startup Scope

Determination: Eaton

services will help you

to evaluate your service

needs and check that the

service pack you have

selected has appropriate

coverage for your

circumstances

●Pre-Installation Checkup:

Eaton services will contact

you to go through the pre-

installation checklist, which

ensures efficient, prime

quality installation and

configuration services

●Installation and

Configuration: Eaton

services will install Power

Xpert Software and

configure it for operation

with your equipment

according to startup

scope determination.

Configuration may also

include creating custom

graphic layouts if necessary

and if required

●System Test: Eaton

services will test the

Power Xpert Software

for operability and will

validate communications

with key components

●Optional Hands-On

Training: If required,

Eaton services can provide

hands-on training for Power

Xpert Software, using the

software on-site or using

simulated demo systems

Selecting the Appropriate Service Pack 1

Notes

1Available and valid in continental United States only.

2Typical number of Eaton devices that can be configured in the Power Xpert Software during

the course of the selected Startup Service Pack.

3We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs.

4Please call the Technical Resource Center for custom Startup Service at 800-809-2772,

option 4, 1, for a price quote.

The number of devices that can be configured during the course of a selected Start Pack can vary

depending on the devices’ installation readiness levels. Maximum numbers indicated require full

configuration readiness levels defined in the Power Xpert Startup Services Checklist document

in the service’s brochure at www.eaton.com/pxs.

Startup Service Product

Number of Eaton Devices to be Integrated

<15 215–30 231–75 2>75 2

Non-Eaton

Devices 3

Power Xpert 1 Day ■

Power Xpert 2 Day ■

Power Xpert 5 Day ■

Customer Fixed Price Quote 4■ ■

V12-T11-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Technology Upgrades

The INCOM network consists

of a twisted shielded pair

of conductors that interface

to one of the following

hardware devices:

●Master INCOM Network

Translator II (MINT II)

attached to the COM

port of computer

●Power Xpert Gateway

(PXG 200E, PXG 400E,

PXG 600E, PXG 800E)

When updating the software

at an existing installation,

careful consideration should

be administered and all new

PowerNet interface hardware

options considered when

constructing the update bill

of material.

In some instances, the

computer running the

Series III software is an

industrial computer that

has no monitor, keyboard

or mouse, and is installed

as a part of a larger system

solution. This device is

referred to as the Power

Xpert Gateway, catalog

numbers PXG 200E,

PXG 400E, PXG 600E

and PXG 800E. In these

situations, there is, typically,

a main system computer

that uses additional software

solutions to integrate the

system. The Power Xpert

Gateway is used as a way

of using the infrastructure of

the currently installed Local

Area Network (LAN) as a

means of collecting data

from remote substations.

This is not the only item that

will

require updating if existing

in the system.

Series III system solutions, in

some cases, incorporated a lot

of non-standard equipment

to meet various connectivity

needs. In some instances,

where multiple COM ports

are required, port splitters

were used to expand one

COM port into 8, or even

16, equivalent COM ports

for communications with

remote or local MINT II

devices (DIGIBOARD). These

various system configuration

requirements will have to be

ascertained and accounted

for before updating.

Update Path

Note: When updating the

computer for the new system

software, ISA slots may not be

available. In these instances,

PXG-E products are typically

employed.

●MINT II devices are

compatible with PowerNet

and will not require

updating

●NetLink products should

be replaced with PXG 600E

or PXG 800E hardware

●mMINT

For those unique applications

that may have Ethernet

and Modbus® on the same

gateway node. For Ethernet,

use the correct PXG-E model,

and for Modbus serial, use

the mMINT.

In all other instances where

custom third-party equipment

was used to achieve

connectivity solutions, third-

party vendors should be

consulted for appropriate

update paths and careful

consideration of compatibility

with the new PowerNet

software to ensure a smooth

update path.

Inventory Existing

Series III Software

Series III software consists

of the main Series III package

that includes the engine

communicating to the

devices through the MINT II

hardware. Series III came in

various packages supporting

20, 200 and/or 1000 devices.

The Series III software

included most functionality in

a single operator interface. It

included, but was not limited

to, the following features:

●Monitoring of all real-time

parameters from the

configured devices

●Access to change or to

view the set points of

those devices that

support this functionality

●Logging of selected

parameters to ASCII

Comma Separated Variable

(CSV) files

●Device Alarming

notification and

confirmation viewable

via user interface and

historically captured in

ASCII CSV files

●Built-in Dynamic Data

Exchange (DDE) server

capabilities

In addition to the basic

Series III software package,

add-on applications were

available that expanded

the basic functionality of

the monitoring software

including, but not limited

to, the following features:

●Energy billing and cost

allocation

●Waveform display

●Trip curve display

●Modbus Gateway

capabilities

Master PC Requirements

When planning to update

a Series III system,

replacement of the personal

computer will be required.

Due to the operating

system as well as memory

requirements, the Series III

computer will not meet

the requirements for a

PowerNet computer.

Update Path

The PC requirements may

change with later versions

of the PowerNet software

applications. Please refer

to the Eaton website for

updated information

on PC requirements:

www.eaton.com.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-9

Communication Systems

Technology Upgrades

Series III and Old NetPower Codes with PowerNet Product Codes

Identify Graphics

Interface Used

The IMPACC Series III

software was sold with an

option for an Enhanced

Graphics application, a

Wonderware InTouch

software HMI solution.

The screens were

typically

developed by

Eaton as a

turnkey solution, but this

software could be purchased

separately with development

performed by the customer,

or by independent local

integrators.

The graphics application

could be located on the

local Series III computer

or on remote networked

computers. It is important

to identify all computers in

the system that have the

Enhanced Graphics

application installed.

Update Path

PowerNet is compatible

with Wonderware InTouch

version 7.1 and above. All

HMI software locations will

require updating to the latest

version via the following

catalog numbers:

Note: When updating the

graphics application to interface

with the PowerNet DDE Server,

due to DDE Tag changes, a review

of the Tags displayed and used for

control will be required for proper

modification. Development time

must be allocated for this update.

For those computers

networked and running

Wonderware InTouch

runtime or view-only nodes,

PowerNet DDE can be

removed and local DDE

Server client applications

installed for more reliable

and quality local DDE

communications.

Identify Connectivity

Solutions Employed

Communication system

solutions will, in some cases,

implement software and/or

hardware equipment to share

the information gathered

from installed meters, relays

and I/O devices with other

software and/or systems

including Distributed Control

Systems (DCS), Building

Management Systems

(BMS) or Programmable

Logic Controllers (PLC).

Connectivity with the Series III

system solutions included the

following methods:

Dynamic Data

Exchange (DDE)

Used in conjunction with

Human Machine Interface

(HMI) software applications

such as Wonderware and

Intellusion. These applications

could also be installed on

remote computers when

PowerNet DDE is used

to share information over

a network.

When reviewing an

installation, this fact may

not be readily discernible

and some investigation may

be necessary.

Update Path

When updating the Series III

software in the section

above, DDE comes as a

part of the update path.

Note: For remote nodes running

Wonderware or any other

HMI software application, the

following catalog number can

be purchased and installed on

the remote PC, eliminating the

need for implementation of the

Microsoft® NETDDE solution.

NPDDE PowerNet DDE Server

client application software.

Locate this software on the same

computer as the HMI software.

Description

New PowerNet

v. 3.3x Product Codes

IMPACC Series III Product Codes PowerNet v.3.22 and Older Product Codes

Core Add-on Mods Energy Billing Core Add-on Mods Energy Billing

S3020

S30200

S31000

WDISP3

MODGATE3

TRIPDPS3

ELOG3

EBILL20

EBILL200

EBILLUL

ETREND

ETRACK

NPCORE2

NPCORE20

NPCORE100

NPCORE200

NPCORE1000

NPMONITOR

NPEVENT

NPWAVEFORM

NPSETPOINT

NPETREND

NPOPC

NPDDE

NPMODBUS

NPCOREMOD

NPBILL20

NPBILL200

NPBILL1000

NPBILLTRACK

NPBILLDDE

Connectivity Bundles Device Support

5-device PNCONNECT5 ■

10-device PNCONNECT10

32-device PNCONNECT34 ■ ■

100-device PNCONNECT100 ■

200-device PNCONNECT200 ■ ■

500-device PNCONNECT500

1000-device PNCONNECT1000 ■ ■

PowerNet Bundles

Standard client PNSTD ■ ■ ■ ■

Power quality PNPQ ■ ■ ■ ■

Integrator Package

Includes OPC,

DDE, and Modbus

Gateway

PNINTEGRATOR ■■■■■

V12-T11-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Technology Upgrades

Modbus (Series III Computer

as Modbus Gateway)

Used in conjunction with

Building Management

Systems, Distributed Control

Systems, or even PLCs

where the Modbus master

equipment is connected to

the communication serial port

of the Series III computer.

The Modbus add-on to

Series III enables the COM

port of the computer to be

configured as a Modbus

slave, providing the customer

the ability to configure input

and holding registers.

Update Path

NPMODBUS: Client

application that turns the

COM port of the computer

into a Modbus server

application. Client can be

located on any computer with

appropriate operating system

and on the same network as

the rest of the PowerNet

system software.

NPCOREMOD: Turns the

COM port of the computer

running the PowerNet

software core into a Modbus

server. This can only be

located where the Core

software application is located.

Modbus (Industrial PC

as Modbus Gateway)

Used in conjunction with

Building Management

Systems, Distributed Control

Systems or even PLCs where

the Modbus master

equipment is connected to

the communication serial port

of the Series III computer.

Available for sale was an

industrial computer (no

monitor, keyboard or mouse)

with a Modbus server

software application installed.

The functionality of the

software installed on the

industrial PC focuses

on Modbus register

configuration and availability.

Other monitor, DDE and

trending features common to

Series III are not available.

Update Path

Power Xpert Gateway

RS-232 (MINT II with Custom

Driver in Master System)

Used in conjunction with

Building Management

Systems, Distributed Control

Systems or even PLCs. In

this case, the customer has

written or contracted to have

written a custom driver that

communicates directly to the

installed INCOM devices via

the MINT II RS-232 interface.

Update Path

Series III software is not a

part of this configuration.

There is no update path;

the MINT II is still a viable

solution. For those

applications that connect

with the Johnson Controls®

Metasys® System via the

MINT II and Metasys

Integrator, the JMI should

be used.

RS-232 (Series III PC COM

Port Gateway, Custom Driver

in Master System)

Used in conjunction with

Building Management

Systems, Distributed Control

Systems or even PLCs. Most

common applications include

BMS software such as

Johnson Controls Metasys

System integration. Where

customers implemented this

solution, the need for the

functionality of the Series III

is apparent but the sharing

of data is required. When

updating to PowerNet,

customers must pay close

attention to this need.

Update Path

Series III had the ability to

configure the COM port of

the computer into a gateway,

which made the COM port

look like a MINT II to the

master communicating

software application. This

functionality is not included in

the PowerNet software suite

of applications. Connectivity is

left to DDE, OPC or Modbus

communications. Before

updating, the master software

suite vendor should be

consulted as to which of the

above protocols is supported

and the appropriate steps for

integration taken.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-11

Communication Systems

Technology Upgrades

PowerNet Device Selection Chart

Communicating Device

Function Selection Chart

Metering Devices LV Breaker Trip Units Protective Relays Miscellaneous Devices

IQ Analyzer

IQ DP-4000/

IQ DP-4100

IQ 200/IQ 300

Power Sentinel

Energy Sentinel

Digitrip 1150

Digitrip RMS 910

Digitrip RMS 810

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Digitrip OPTIM 750

Network Protector

Relays

FP-5000

Digitrip 3000

MP-3000

IQ 500

RTD Module

Advantage

IQ Transfer Switch

Addressable Relay II

Power Manager

Quad XYZ

Voltage (phase-phase) ■■■■ ■■■■■ ■

Voltage (phase-neutral) ■■■■ ■■■■■ ■

Current phases ■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■ ■

Current ground ■ ■ ■■■

Power

kW ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■

kWh ■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

kVA ■■■■ ■ ■

kVAh ■■■ ■ ■

VARs ■■■■ ■■■

VARh ■■■ ■ ■

PF ■■■■ ■■■■■

Demand

kW demand ■■■■■■■■■ ■

kVA demand ■■■■■■

Ampere demand ■■■■■■ ■ ■

kVAR demand ■■■■■■ ■

Power Quality

THD 50 31 31 31 ■

Current THD ■■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage THD ■■ ■ ■

CBEMA/crest factor ■

Frequency ■■■■ ■ ■

Current waveform ■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage waveform ■ ■

Other Features

Downloadable set points ■■■■■■ ■■ ■■■ ■ ■

Operations count ■■■■■ ■ ■

High load ■■■■■ ■■

Trip target data ■■■■■ ■■■■ ■

Remote open/close ■■■■■■■■■ ■■■

Start profile ■

Auxiliaries ■■

Input/Output

Digital input 31 12 2 4

Digital output 4(3) 3 854 1

Analog input 111

Analog output 4 1

Communication Modules

IPONI ≥1.06 ■ ■ ■

INCOM communications std. ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■

BIM ■■■■■■■

V12-T11-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Communications

Hardware

mMINT

mMINT Module

Product Description

The mMINT (Modbus Master

INCOM Network Translator)

Module is an Eaton accessory

product that will provide

communication between

a Modbus RTU network

and an INCOM (INdustrial

COMmunications) network

(see the mMINT in a

Communications Network

figure). This module is

transparent to the Modbus

network. It communicates

to a master on the Modbus

network using the Modbus

RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)

protocol. It communicates to

slave devices on the INCOM

network using the IMPACC

(Integrated Monitoring,

Protection, and Control

Communication) protocol.

The catalog number of this

product is mMINT.

Features

The mMINT module is a

slave device on the Modbus

network and as such requires

a master that will exchange

mMINT module.

●Handles generic pass-

through commands

(Modbus/INCOM/Modbus)

●Capable of passing

Modbus register objects

from Eaton’s existing

products

and newer PnP

(Plug-‘n-Play) products

to a

Modbus RTU master

●Data in IEEE® Floating

Point format and fixed

point

●Modbus RTU

communications data

transfer rates of 1200,

9600 or 19,200 baud with

one start bit, eight data

bits, no parity, and either

one or two stop bits

●Up to 32 products

connected to INCOM

network port (246 unique

addresses maximum)

●Flashing Status LED to

indicate an active module

●LED indicators for INCOM

transmit and receive

communications

exchanges

●LED indicators for Modbus

RS-485 transmit and

receive communications

exchanges

●Input power for the module

from either 120 Vac or

24–125 Vdc

●DIN rail mount package

●0° to 60°C ambient

operation

Module Mounting

When mounting the mMINT,

verify that an 11 mm H x 28 mm

W DIN rail is used and that it is

within an enclosed space.

Simplified Wiring Rules

INCOM Network

The following simplified

rules apply to a given system

consisting of a single daisy-

chained main cable link

between master and

slave devices (see figure

below). For more complex

considerations including

star configurations, please

refer to the IMPACC wiring

specification T.D. 17513.

mMINT in a

Communications Network

●Recommended INCOM

cable styles are Belden

9463 or C-H style

2A957805G01

●The maximum system

capacity is 10,000 feet of

communications cable and

32 slave devices on the

INCOM network under

the mMINT

●Non-terminated taps, up to

200 feet in length, off the

main link are permitted,

but add to the total cable

length

●Make sure that there

is twisted-pair wire that

is recommended for

IMPACC network use.

Use shielded twisted-pair

wire to connect each slave

to the INCOM network,

daisy-chain style. The

polarity of the twisted

pair is not important

Modbus RS-485 Network

The following simplified

rules apply to a given system

consisting of a cable link

between master and slave

devices (see figure below). For

more complex configurations,

please refer to standard

Modbus RTU wiring

specification rules for

the RS-485 network.

●The recommended

Modbus cable has twisted-

pair wires (24 AWG

stranded 7x32 conductors

with PVC insulation) having

an aluminum/mylar foil

shield with drain wire

●The maximum system

capacity is 4000 feet of

communications cable

and 247 devices on the

Modbus RTU network

●Make sure that there is

twisted-pair wire that is

recommended for Modbus

RTU network use. Use

shielded twisted-pair wire

to connect each slave to

the Modbus RTU network,

daisy-chain style. The

polarity of the twisted pair

is critically important

mMINT Module

Dimensions

Burden

●24 Vac/Vdc, 3 VA

Safety Standards

●UL®

●CSA®

●CE mark

Communications Speed

●INCOM: 1200, 9600 baud

●N2 bus: 9600 baud

Modbus RTU Serial Network

(Slave)

Modbus

mMINT

(Master)

Modbus

Master

INCOM Network

INCOM

Slaves

J1 J2

4.25

(108.0)

RS-485

Modbus

3.54

(89.9)

24–125 Vdc

120 Vac

Shield INCOM

A B COM SHD

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-13

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Power Xpert

Gateway 200E

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

Product Description

The Power Xpert Gateway

200E (PXG 200E) is designed

to provide a Web-enabled

gateway to serially

communicating energy

meters via a standard Web

browser. These can be new

or existing meters. The PXG

200E supports revenue grade

single and multipoint energy

meters via Modbus RTU and

INCOM. This product provides

a cost-effective, retrofit

hardware solution for better

energy management without

the need for software.

The PXG 200E allows you to:

●Monitor energy usage

patterns and reveal

opportunities for efficiency

improvements using

existing communicating

meters

●Remotely monitor real-time

conditions and profile

5-minute interval trend

logs, and export data in

csv, without a software

implementation

●Allocate energy costs to

departments or processes

●Reduce peak demand

surcharges

●Reduce power factor

penalties

●Identify billing

discrepancies

●Allows user to daisy-chain

multiple Ethernet

compatible downstream

devices via RJ-45 port

(for specifics, see

Page V12-T11-15, PXG-E

Daisy Chain Application)

●Connect to downstream

devices via a Web browser,

Modbus master or

SNMP client separately

or concurrently

Fixed list of supported

devices (no ability to add

new product support via

EDS upload); however,

new supported devices will

be added during firmware

updates.

●IQ 35M

●IQ Energy Sentinel

●IQ 130

●IQ 140

●IQ 150

●IQ 220/230

●IQ 220M/230M

●IQ 250

●IQ 260

●IQ MESII

●DIM KYZ (WAGES)

●EI NEXUS 1200 Series

●PM710

For detailed technical

specifications, please

reference the Technical

Data Sheet for this product

at www.eaton.com/pxg, then

the Power Xpert Gateway

200E link.

Power Xpert Gateway

Screenshots

Home Page

Bus Page

Device Page

Technical Data and Specifications

PXG 200E Part Numbers

Features

PXG 200E Features

Note

1Expected availability 2Q12.

Description

Style

Number

Catalog

Number

Power Xpert Gateway 200E 103008420-5591 PXG200E

Power supply—24 Vdc ELC-PS02 ELC-PS02

Mounting bracket kit 66B2146G01 PXGACC01

Features PXG 200E

Total number of supported devices 64

Maximum number of INCOM devices supported 64

Maximum number of Modbus devices supported 32

Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM and Modbus RTU) Yes

Number of downstream communication ports 2

Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously 2

USB port for configuration Yes

Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports—10/100Base-T Yes

Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported Yes

SNMP client access v.1 Yes

INCOM slave action commands supported Yes

INCOM date and time settings supported Yes

Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Yes

Device summary screens per main, bus and device Yes

Event notification via the Web interface Yes

Secure Ethernet communications—SSL encryption Yes

Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes

IPv4 support Yes

Save and restore configuration file Yes

Interval logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel Yes

Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files No

Device waveform access and storage—COMTRADE file format No

Set user-defined events No

Trend graph displayed Yes

Data logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No

Event logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No

E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms No

Custom summary Web page creation No

Ability to create custom events No

Supports SAM3Z energy meters No

BACnet/IP support 1Yes

V12-T11-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Supported Devices

The Eaton Power Xpert

Gateway 200E Includes:

●The Power Xpert

Gateway module

●Mounting provisions and

required hardware for panel

and DIN rail mounting

●CD-ROM: contains the

user manual, Modbus

and other associated files

Power Xpert Gateway

with DIN Rail Mounting

(Brackets Included)

Power Xpert Gateway—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

Supported Devices

HTTP

Web

Services MB TCP

INCOM

Pass-Thru SNMP

File

Export csv

Modbus

Pass-Thru BACnet/IPProtocol Device Type Device Name

INCOM I/O DIM KYZ (WAGES) ■■ ■■■■ ■

INCOM Meter IQ MESII ■■ ■■■■ ■

INCOM Meter IQ 220/230 ■■ ■■■■ ■

INCOM Meter IQ Energy Sentinel ■■ ■■■■ ■

Modbus Meter IQ 130 ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter IQ 140 ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter IQ 150 ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter IQ 220M/230M ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter IQ 250 ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter IQ 260 ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter EI NEXUS 1200 Series ■■ ■■■ ■■

Modbus Meter IQ 35M ■■ ■■■ ■■

24 Vdc

Input Power

COM 1 Port:

RS-485 Connection

for up to 32 Modbus

RTU Devices

INCOM Port:

RS-485 Connection

for up to 64 INCOM

Devices

RJ-45

Connection

to the LAN

USB Connection for

Local Configuration

Capability

Power and Traffic

Indicator Lights

RJ-45 Connection

to the Other

Ethernet Devices

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-15

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Power Xpert Gateway 200E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

The PXG-E allows for units to

be connected together

through two RJ-45 10/100

connectors on the front of

the PXG-E series of products.

This arrangement is a

pass-through of Ethernet

communications allowing

a single network drop to

connect up to five Ethernet

communicating devices. The

maximum length of a copper

cable run should not exceed

295 ft (90m) total.

Note: In this configuration, if any

of the PXG-E units go offline or

lose power, the communication to

the downstream Ethernet devices

will lose connection to the LAN.

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

0.56

(14.2)

1.12

(28.5)

2.00

(50.8)

Ø 0.19 (6)

(4.8)

0.56

(14.2) 1.60

(40.6)

0.25

(6.4)

0.24

(6.1)

Front

8.75

(222.3)

10.25

(260.4)

10.75

(273.1)

0.60

(15.2)

4.30

(109.2)

8.75

(222.3)

Ethernet LAN

LAN Connection

295 ft (90m)

Cat-5 Patch Cables

PXM2000

V12-T11-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Power Xpert Gateway

400E/600E/800E

Power Xpert Gateways 400E,

600E and 800E

Power Xpert Gateways 400E,

600E and 800E are typically

installed in an electrical

assembly—a motor control

center, low/medium voltage

switchgear or switchboard

to consolidate data available

from components such as

trip units, meters, motor

controllers and protective

relays. It can be installed

later to provide the same

valuable information.

Product Description

Power Xpert Gateways 400E,

600E and 800E (PXG 400E/

600E/800E) provide a cost-

effective method to easily

Web-enable Eaton and third-

party products.

The PXG 400E/600E/800E

series offers improved

performance over the

previously offered series,

including logging in the

PXG 600E/800E, daisy

chaining capabilities

(Page V12-T11-19,

Figure PXG-E Daisy Chain

Application) and design

enhancements including a

new processor and additional

RAM and Flash memory.

The gateway consists of an

embedded Web server that

allows the user to connect to

installed Eaton products such

as breakers, meters and relays

found in MCCs, LV and MV

switchgear and switchboards

—to name a few—that

communicate via Eaton

protocols INCOM and QCPort,

in addition to third-party

products that communicate

via Modbus RTU. The

Gateway provides the central

connection point for the

power metering/monitoring/

protective devices, allowing

their parameters to be

monitored via the Web.

The PXG 400E/600E/800E

provide data communications

to Eaton’s Power Xpert

Software and other third-

party systems to facilitate

centralizing and gathering

data for long-term data

archival, analysis and

trending features.

The PXG 400E/600E/800E

are compatible with and

facilitate integration with

many third-party building

and factory automation

systems via Modbus TCP

and Web services.

Note: Enclosed solution available.

Contact your Eaton sales office

for more details.

The PXG 600E/800E allow

you to enable pre-selected

parameters to be trended

for each supported device.

Selecting the trend symbol

will generate a real-time

graph for that parameter

and can be viewed for the

past 24 hours, seven days,

30 days or all past history.

The PXG 600E/800E

also offer direct e-mail

notifications to up to 10

users. Select from event

notifications, data logs,

interval log, event logs

and heartbeat e-mails.

The PXG 800E brings this

communication hardware-

only solution closer to those

requirements that have

previously only been met

by a software package. The

PXG 800E includes all the

functionality of the PXG 600E.

Additional features include:

●Creation of custom

summary Web pages

on the user interface

●Ability to create custom

events from existing

device parameters or

events

●Ability to communicate

wirelessly with the SAM3Z

submetering system

In the PXG 400E/600E/800E,

information is presented in

organized, user-friendly Web

pages and includes, but is not

limited to, the following:

●Device status

●Comm status

●Voltage

●Current

●Power

●Power factor

●Energy

●Power quality

●Temperature

●I/O states

Power Xpert Gateway

Screenshots

Downstream devices on the

Power Xpert Gateways often

report key operating status

information that warrants

immediate attention. The

PXG identifies a set of key

status values for each device

and generates “Events” in

response to changes in these

status values. An example of a

device event is an overcurrent

trip on a circuit breaker.

In addition to displaying

events on its home page,

the PXG reports events to

monitoring software such as

Power Xpert Software. These

events will then be integrated

with those from across the

power system, providing

unified enterprise level

event management.

Home Page

Bus Page

Device Page

Trending Page (PXG 600E/800E Only)

For detailed technical

specifications, please

reference the Technical Data

Sheet for this product series

at www.eaton.com/pxg, then

the Power Xpert Gateway

400E/600E/800E link.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-17

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Features of the PXG-E Product Offering

The Eaton Power Xpert

Gateway includes:

●The Power Xpert

Gateway module

●Mounting provisions

and required hardware

for panel and DIN rail

mounting

●CD-ROM: contains the

user manual, Modbus

and other associated files

Power Xpert Gateway

with DIN Rail Mounting

(Brackets Included)

Note

1Expected availability 2Q12.

Features PXG 400E PXG 600E PXG 800E

Total number of supported devices 64 96 96

Maximum number of INCOM devices supported 64 64 64

Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM, Modbus RTU and QCPort) Yes Yes Yes

Number of downstream communication ports 2 3 3

Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously 2 3 3

USB port for configuration Yes Yes Yes

Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports—10/100Base-T Yes Yes Yes

Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported Yes Yes Yes

SNMP client access v.1 Yes Yes Yes

INCOM slave action commands supported Yes Yes Yes

INCOM date and time settings supported Yes Yes Yes

Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Yes Yes Yes

Device summary screens per main, bus and device Yes Yes Yes

Event notification via the Web interface Yes Yes Yes

Secure Ethernet communications—SSL encryption Yes Yes Yes

Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes Yes Yes

IPv4 support Yes Yes Yes

Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files Yes Yes Yes

Save and restore configuration file Yes Yes Yes

Device waveform access and storage—COMTRADE file format No Yes Yes

Set user-defined events No Yes Yes

Trend graph displayed No Yes Yes

Data logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes

Interval logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes

Event logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes

E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms No Yes Yes

Custom summary Web page creation No No Yes

Ability to create custom events No No Yes

Supports SAM3Z energy meters No No Yes

BACnet/IP protocol supported 1———

V12-T11-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E

24 Vdc

Input Power

COM 1 Port:

RS-485 Connection for

up to Either (32) QCPort

or Modbus RTU Devices

INCOM Port:

RS-485 Connection

for up to 64 INCOM

Devices

RJ-45

Connection

to the LAN

USB Connection

for Local

Configuration

Capability

Power and Traffic

Indicator Lights

Wireless antenna available only with

800E for communication to SAM3Z device

RJ-45

Connection

to the Other

Ethernet Devices

PXG 600E or 800E

Data and Link

Indicator Lights:

Available Only

with 800E

COM 2 Port: Either

RS-485

or RS-232

Connection

for up to Eith er (32)

QCPort or Modbus

RTU Devices

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-19

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

The PXG-E allows for units

to be connected together

through two RJ-45 10/100

connectors on the front of the

PXG-E series of products. This

arrangement is a pass-through

of Ethernet communications

allowing a single network drop

to connect up to five Ethernet

communicating devices. The

maximum length of a copper

cable run should not exceed

295 ft (90m) total.

Note: In this configuration, if any

of the PXG-E units go offline or

lose power, the communication to

the downstream Ethernet devices

will lose connection to the LAN.

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

Technical Data and Specifications

PXG Part Numbers

Description

Style

Number

Catalog

Number

Power Xpert Gateway 400E 103008421-5591 PXG400E

Power Xpert Gateway 600E 103008422-5591 PXG600E

Power Xpert Gateway 800E 103008423-5591 PXG800E

Wireless energy meter for PXG 800E P-103000007-591 SAM3Z

Wireless repeater module for SAM3Z P-103000008-591 EZR

Power supply—24 Vdc ELC-PS02 ELC-PS02

Mounting bracket kit 66B2146G01 PXGACC01

Ethernet LAN

LAN Connection

295 ft (90m)

Cat-5 Patch Cables

PXM2000

V12-T11-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Data Acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices

Notes

1Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

2Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date

details on connectivity.

Supported Devices

Device Type Device Name

PXG 400E/600E/800E PXG 600E/800E Only

HTTP (Web

Browser)

Web Services

(Power Xpert

Software)

Modbus TCP

(BMS and

SCADA)

Pass-through

INCOM

(PowerNet)

Pass-through

QCPort

(CHStudio)

SNMP

(NMS)

BACnet/IP

SMTP

(E-mail

Client)

File Export

(Data File

Format)

File Export

(Waveform

File Export)

INCOM

Drive Accutrol 400 ■■■■ ■■■■

Drive AF97 ■■■■ ■■■■

I/O Universal RTD ■■■■ ■■■■

I/O DIM ■■■■ ■■■■

I/O DIM KYZ ■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ DP-4000 1■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ Energy Sentinel ■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ 220/IQ 320 ■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ 230/IQ 330 ■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ Analyzer (6000/6200) 1■■■■ ■■■■■

Meter IQ Analyzer (6400/6600) 1■■■■ ■■■■■

Meter IQ Data 1■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ Data Plus 1■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ Data Plus II 1■■■■ ■■■■

Meter Power Manager ■■■■ ■■■■

Meter IQ Power Sentinel ■■■■ ■■■■

Meter point IQ MES II ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip 3000 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip 3200 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective FP-6000 ■■■■ ■■■■■

Protective FP-5000 ■■■■ ■■■■■

Protective FP-4000 ■■■■ ■■■■■

Protective MP-3000 1■■■■ ■■■■

Protective MP-4000 1■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip 520MC ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective NRX520 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective IQ 500 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective MPCV Relay ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip 1150/DT1150V ■■■■ ■■■■■

Protective Digitrip 810 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip 910 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip MV ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip OPTIM 1050 ■■■■ ■■■■■

Protective Digitrip OPTIM 550 ■■■■ ■■■■

Protective Digitrip OPTIM 750 ■■■■ ■■■■

Starter Advantage 2■■■■ ■■■■

Starter Advantage ACM 2■■■■ ■■■■

Subnetwork master AEM II 1■■■■ ■ ■

Subnetwork master BIM II 1■■■■ ■ ■

Subnetwork master CMU 2■■■■ ■ ■

Subnetwork master IQ CED II 1■■■■ ■ ■

Subnetwork master IQ MES II ■■■■ ■■■■

Transfer switch ATC-400 1■■■■ ■■■■

Transfer switch ATC-600 1■■■■ ■■■■

Transfer Switch ATC-800 1■■■■ ■■■■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-21

Communication Systems

Technology Upgrades Communication Hardware

Data Acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices (continued)

Notes

1Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.

Additional supported devices will be available via firmware updates. Contact your local Eaton sales office for help with devices not currently listed in table above.

Supported Devices

Device Type Device Name

PXG 400E/600E/800E PXG 600E/800E Only

HTTP (Web

Browser)

Web Services

(Power Xpert

Software)

Modbus TCP

(BMS and

SCADA)

Pass-through

INCOM

(PowerNet)

Pass-through

QCPort

(CHStudio)

SNMP

(NMS)

BACnet/IP

SMTP

(E-mail

Client)

File Export

(Data File

Format)

File Export

(Waveform

File Export)

Modbus

Drive MVX9000 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Drive SVX9000 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Insulation monitor InsulGard ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 130 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 140 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 150 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 220M/230M ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 250 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 260 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter IQ 35M ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter Nexus 1262 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter SQD CM3000 Series ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter SQD CM4000 Series ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter SQD PM710 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter SQD PM850 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter PML 7350 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter PML 7550 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter PML 7650 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Meter PM3 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Protective GE 369 Motor Relay ■■■ ■ ■■■

Protective GE 469 Motor Relay ■■■ ■ ■■■

Protective FP-4000/FP-5000 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Protective FP-6000 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Overload relay C441 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Temp monitor Qualitrol 118 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Temp monitor TC-50 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Temp monitor TC-100 ■■■ ■ ■■■

Transformer differential relay ABB TPU 2000 ■■■ ■ ■■■

QCPort

I/O D77A-AI16 ■■■■■■■■

I/O D77A-AI8 ■■■■■■■■

I/O D77A-DI16 ■■■■■■■■

I/O D77A-DI8 ■■■■■■■■

Starter IT. S811 (MV811) ■■■■■■■■

Starter IT. Starter 1■■■■■■■■

Starter IT. Starter QSNAP 1■■■■■■■■

V12-T11-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Technology Upgrades Communication Hardware

The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive.

For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map file at http://www.eaton.com/pxg.

Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway

Units

IQ Meters Circuit Breaker Trip Units Protective Relays

IQ Data Plus II

IQ Data Plus

IQ Data

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

IQ DP-4000

IQ 220/320

IQ 230/330

IQ 230/330M

IQ 250

IQ 260

IQ Power Sentinel

IQ Energy Sentinel

IQ MESII

IQ 130

IQ 140

IQ 150

IQ 35M

Power Manager

Digitrip 1150

Digitrip 520MC

Digitrip RMS 910

Digitrip RMS 810

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 750

Digitrip MV

Digitrip 3000

Digitrip 3200

IQ 500

MPVCV Relay

FP-4000

FP-5000

MP-3000

MP-4000

FP-6000

EDR-3000

Volt age

Average V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage (line-line) V ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage (line-neutral) V ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■ ■

Current

Average A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■

Phase A ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■

Ground A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■

Neutral A ■■■■■■■■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■

Peak A ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■■■■■ ■ ■ ■

Demand A ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■ ■

Power

Apparent VA ■■■■■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Reactive VAR ■■ ■■■■■■■■■ ■■■ ■■■■ ■

Real W ■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■ ■■■ ■■■ ■

Power Factor

Apparent PF ■■ ■■■■■■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Displacement PF ■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Energy

Real Wh ■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■

Forward Wh ■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■

Reverse Wh ■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■

Apparent Vah ■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Reactive VARh ■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Leading VARh ■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Lagging VARh ■■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Power Quality

THD % ■■■ ■ ■ ■

Current THD % ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage THD % ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Frequency Hz ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■

Waveform capture N/A ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Temperature

Ambient C°

Auxiliary C° ■ ■

Load bearing C° ■ ■

Motor bearing C° ■ ■

Winding C° ■ ■

Phase (L, C, R) C°

Terminal block C°

Input Status

Number of inputs ■ ■ ■■■2 2 ■

Status/cause of trip ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■

Thermal memory

Pole temperature

Winding temp.

Fan status

Alarm/trip relay ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-23

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway (Continued)

Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com for latest information.

Units

Insulation

Monitor

Motor Starters

and VFDs

Transfer

Switches I/O Third-Party Devices

InsulGard

Accutrol 400

AF97

Advantage Starters

IT. S811

IT. Starters/QSNAP

C441 Overload Relay

SVX & MVX Drives

ATC-400

ACT-600

ACT-800

Digital Input Module

D77A-AI16

D77A-AI8

D77A-DI16

D77A-DI8

DIM KYZ

Universal RTD

SQD CM 3000 Series

SQD CM 4000 Series

SQD PM 710

SQD PM 850

PML 7350

PML 7550

PML 7650

GE 369 Motor Relay

GE 469 Motor Relay

ABB TPU 2000

Qualitrol 118

Nexus 1262/1272

PM3

TC-50

TC-100

Volta ge

Average V ■■■ ■■ ■■■■ ■ ■

Voltage (line-line) V ■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Voltage (line-neutral) V ■■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■

Current

Average A ■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Phase A ■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Ground A ■■■ ■ ■

Neutral A ■■■■■■ ■

Peak A ■■■■■■■ ■

Demand A ■■■■■■■ ■ ■◗

Power

Apparent VA ■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Reactive VAR ■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Real W ■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Power Factor

Apparent PF ■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Displacement PF ■■■

Energy

Real Wh ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■

Forward Wh ■■ ■■■■ ■ ■ ■

Reverse Wh ■■ ■■■■ ■ ■

Apparent Vah ■■■■■■■ ■

Reactive VARh ■■■■■ ■

Leading VARh ■■ ■■■■ ■ ■

Lagging VARh ■■ ■■■■ ■ ■

Power Quality

THD % ■

Current THD % ■

Voltage THD % ■ ■

Frequency Hz ■■ ■■■■■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■ ■

Waveform capture N/A

Temperature

Ambient C° ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Auxiliary C° ■

Load bearing C° ■ ■ ■

Motor bearing C° ■ ■ ■

Winding C° ■ ■ ■

Phase (L, C, R) C° ■ ■ ■

Terminal block C° ■

Input Status

Number of inputs ■■ ■816 8 16 8 4 8 2

Status/cause of trip ■■■■ ■ ■

Thermal memory ■■■■

Pole temperature ■■ ■

Winding temp. ■ ■ ■ ■

Fan status ■ ■ ■ ■

Alarm/trip relay ■ ■ ■ ■

Partial discharge intensity (PDI) ■

V12-T11-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Power Xpert Gateway—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E

0.56

(14.2)

1.12

(28.5)

2.00

(50.8)

Ø 0.19 (6)

(4.8)

0.56

(14.2) 1.60

(40.6)

0.25

(6.4)

0.24

(6.1)

Front

8.75

(222.3)

10.25

(260.4)

10.75

(273.1)

0.60

(15.2)

4.30

(109.2)

8.75

(222.3)

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-25

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

Product Operated

Network Interface

(PONI) Devices

PONI Family

The Product Operated

Network Interface (PONI)

cards attach to Cutler-

Hammer/Eaton devices to

enable communications.

These cards serve various

functions from Ethernet-type

applications, to non-Ethernet-

type applications, ultimately

playing a key role in facilitating

the access to information that

each of the Cutler-Hammer/

Eaton devices offer.

The IPONI enables

communications over a

twisted shielded pair INCOM

device network. Each PONI

attaches to its associated

product. The PONI modules

obtain power from the host

product. PONI modules can

be used as solutions for

various applications.

The non-Ethernet product

offerings include the IPONI

and the MPONI. These

devices are typically applied

where there are more than

one device connected in

a network of devices by

a dedicated twisted

shielded pair of conductors

(Ref. IMPCABLE).

The communications

medium is formatted to

enable clean noise-immune

communications even when

routed around areas of high

noise and typical electrical

communication disrupting

equipment. The IPONI and

MPONI daisy chain are in the

same format as that used

in devices that have built-in

communications such as the

Digitrip trip units and can be

used in series with these

communication network

wiring. To Ethernet enable

IPONI and MPONI products,

use the PXG-E series Power

Xpert Gateways.

The PXG-E with IPONI or

MPONI product offering puts

a Cutler-Hammer/Eaton

metering product on the Web.

No other software is required

when specifying a PXG-E. All

software needed to enable

any internet browser program

such as Microsoft Internet

Explorer or Mozilla Firefox is

packed into the PXG-E. The

data can then be viewed

directly in any Internet

Web browser window.

The WEBPONI provides live

updating data for the meter

being monitored, as well as

waveform display capabilities

and e-mail direct from the

device to defined key e-mail

addresses that need to know

when an event occurs.

IPONI/MPONI

With the addition of the

IPONI or the MPONI card,

a Cutler-Hammer/Eaton

device or series of devices

can communicate with the

PowerNet software via a

master unit such as a MINT II

and the PXG-E. The PONIs

can be easily mounted to

the appropriate Cutler-

Hammer/Eaton device

and daisy chain together to

form a robust deterministic

communication network

of devices in a system

solution. Systems employing

the IPONI/MPONI type

communications medium

provide deterministic

communication performance

relied on by those critical

solution applications,

where this is of the

utmost importance.

MINT II

Master INCOM Network Translator

(MINT) II

The MINT II interfaces the

IMPACC network to a master

control unit with an RS-232

port, such as a personal

computer serial port, a

programmable controller

RS-232 “smart card,”

building management system

interface card, etc. (Some

software will have to be

written in the master control

unit to request and receive

messages. The MINT II

protocol is 10-character,

ASCII coded hex.)

The MINT II can be used to

interface multiple IMPACC

devices to Broadband LANs,

telephone modem or short

haul modem. It can also be

used to allow additional

branches of the INCOM data

line (five additional branches

per MINT II). The MINT II

can be either table or panel

mounted and requires a

120 Vac, 60 Hz supply.

Selectable communication

rate of 1200 or 9600 baud is

available. The burden for the

MINT II is 7 VA.

Addressable Relay II (ARII)

Addressable Relay II

The Addressable Relay II

is designed for use where

information or control of

non-communicating devices

is required remotely. The

relays communicate on the

PowerNet system. Devices

are

assigned a three-digit

address to uniquely

identify

them on the daisy-chained

twisted shielded pair network.

The ARII has a Form C relay

on board with two status

indicating circuit inputs. The

output relay can be activated

and monitored remotely.

Input status 1 and 2 can

be monitored remotely.

V12-T11-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems

Communication Hardware

IMPCABLE

The IMPCABLE was

designed to be run in

switchgear where codes

require a 600V insulation

rating. Typical “blue hose”

cables are rated at 300V. The

IMPCABLE is an 18 AWG

cable with a 100 ohm

impedance at 100 kHz tuned

to work optimally with the

FSK signal from Cutler-

Hammer/Eaton devices.

The cable has been designed

with characteristics that

allow up to 1000 devices or

distances up to 10,000 feet

from the master.

IMPCABLE

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol C10-S25

Conductors

Tinned

Copper

Braid

PVC

Outer

Jacket

Polyethylene

Filler

Drain

Wire

Aluminum

Shield

Polyethylene

Insulator

Publication

Number Description

TD.17.15.T.E PowerNet

TD17B.01.T.E PowerPort

TD02603010E Power Xpert Gateway 200E

TB02603002E Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E

TB02603002E mMINT

TD.17.19.T.E MINT II RS-232 Converter

TD.17.20.T.E PONI Communication Modules

TB02603002E MPONI

TD.17.22.T.E Addressable Relay II

TD.17.24.T.E Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

TD.17.26.T.E Advantage Central Monitoring Unit (CMU)

TD.17.28.T.E IMPCABLE

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T12-1

Programmable Logic Controllers

12 Programmable Logic Controllers

Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-2

D32LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-2

D320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-2

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-3

Discontinued Products—Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-3

100/110 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-3

300 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-3

400 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

D120 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

MPC1 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

D500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

Product Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-4

V12-T12-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Programmable Logic Controllers

Programmable

Logic Controllers

Product Description

D32LT

Cutler-Hammer® D32LT from

Eaton’s electrical business

handles applications that are

too large for a D50 but don’t

quite need the power and

performance of the D320.

The D32LT is expandable up

to 256 I/O points, capable of

handling analog, digital, high

speed inputs and outputs

making the D32LT one of the

more versatile PLCs on the

market. With access to the

real-time clock, 8 PID loops

and two communication ports

allow you to interface with

multiple networks including

Modbus® RTU, ASCII, binary,

or interface to a RS-232 to

Ethernet adapter.

D320

The D320 PLC delivers

superior processing power,

modular flexibility, enhanced

scan speed, and advanced

functions and communications

capabilities with a combination

of 2K program memory, up to

2048 I/O expansion points,

real-time clock functionality

and PID loop control capability.

I/O modules cover all standard

control voltages and current

ranges for both digital and

analog signals. Special

function modules provide an

array of specific-purpose

solutions, such as networking

and remote I/O applications.

Product History

The company has offered

programmable controller

products since the

early 1970s.

These products have been

marketed under several trade

names such as Numa-Logic

and model names such

as D100.

Westinghouse entered the

solid-state logic and control

business with the Numa-

Logic 300 series products.

The 300 series was a set of

hardwired logic components

that could be custom wired

to perform the desired

logic functions.

Westinghouse NL-500

The Numa-Logic 500 was

a remote I/O system that

consisted of a “master”

chassis and a “slave” chassis

connected by a single twisted

pair cable. Signals entered

into one chassis would be

repeated over the twisted

pair and made available as a

signal at the opposite chassis.

Chronology

1975 through 1980 (largely

superseded by remote

I/O capabilities of PC700

and PC900).

Replacement

D320 Remote I/O PLC.

Note: NL-500 is different than

PC-500.

Westinghouse PC-700

The PC-700 was a

programmable controller

that supported up to 256

digital and 32 analog I/O,

either local or remote with

up 8K of memory.

Chronology

1980 through 1998.

Replacement

D32LT PLC.

Westinghouse PC-900

The PC-900 programmable

controller supported up to

128 digital and 16 analog I/O,

either local or remote with up

to 3.5K of memory.

Chronology

1981 through 1998.

Replacement

D32LT PLC.

Westinghouse PC-1100/1200/1250

This family of programmable

controllers featured built

in LAN, PID functions and

supported up to 16K memory.

Chronology

1982 through 1998.

Replacement

Direct replacement

unavailable, best replacement

D32LT or D320 PLC.

Westinghouse I/O Plus

Operator interface that was

originally manufactured by

Cincinnati Electrosystems

and brand-labeled with the

Westinghouse logo for

Westinghouse.

Chronology

1989 through 1992.

Replacement

No direct replacement

available, but the PanelMate

product family provides far

more functionality.

Westinghouse PC50/55

Programmable controller

manufactured by Siemens®

(S5-90, S5-95 for PC50 and

PC55, respectively) and

brand-labeled with

Westinghouse logo for

Westinghouse.

Chronology

1992 through 1994.

Replacement

Siemens still offers

replacement parts for

this system.

Westinghouse PC-500

Programmable controller

manufactured by Siemens

(S5-100U, S5-102U, S5-103

for PC500, PC502 and PC503

respectively) and brand-

labeled with Westinghouse

logo for Westinghouse.

Chronology

1988 through 1997.

Replacement

Siemens still offers

replacement parts for this

system.

Westinghouse PC-2000

Programmable controller

manufactured by Siemens

(S5-115U) and brand-labeled

with Westinghouse logo for

Westinghouse.

Chronology

1988 through 1997.

Replacement

Siemens still offers

replacement parts for

this system.

Eaton entered the market

with its first programmable

control in 1977. The unit was

called the D120 and was a

true programmable control

with no hardwiring required.

Many models have been

introduced since then.

Today, three PLC product

families are available: D50,

D32LT and D320. One

software package can

program each of these

platforms. Contact your

local Eaton salesperson or

distributor for more details.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T12-3

Programmable Logic Controllers

Product History Time Line

Replacement Capabilities

Discontinued Products

100/110 Series

The Numa-Logic 100/110

Series, known as “the Pico,”

consisted of the PC-100

and PC-110 models. Both

products were “brick” style

PLCs and provided a small

number of digital inputs and

outputs mounted in the same

enclosure as the processor.

Various styles offered the

ability to select the type and

amount of l/O required. I/O

expanders were available to

expand the l/O capacity.

Chronology

The 100/110 Series PLCs

were offered as current

product from 1981 until

1989. In 1989 the product

was discontinued.

Replacement

No direct replacement

available, contact a local

Eaton salesperson or

distributor about upgrading to

a D50, D32LT or D320 PLC.

300 Series

The Numa-Logic 300 Series

was Westinghouse’s original

solid-state controls offering.

The 300 Series consisted

of printed circuit boards

(modules) that performed

specific logic functions

(AND, OR, NOT, etc.).

These modules could then

be custom wired by the user

to perform the required

control functions.

All 300 Series components

can be identified by catalog

numbers of NL-3XX.

Chronology

The Numa-Logic 300 Series

products were manufactured

by Westinghouse beginning

in the early 1970s and

continuing until 1988.

Replacement products are

currently available from

Instrument Specialties, Inc.

Replacement

For replacement of the

300 Series, contact:

Instrument Specialties, Inc.

248-542-5640

Westinghouse PC50/55

Westinghouse NL100/110

Westinghouse NL300

Westinghouse PC400

Westinghouse NL500

Westinghouse PC700

Westinghouse PC900

Westinghouse PC1100

Westinghouse PC1200/1250

Westinghouse PC1500/1700

Westinghouse PC500

Westinghouse PC2000

Westinghouse I/O Plus

Cutler-Hammer D120

Cutler-Hammer MPC1

Cutler-Hammer D100

Cutler-Hammer D500

Cutler-Hammer D200

Cutler-Hammer D50

Cutler-Hammer D300

Cutler-Hammer D320

Cutler-Hammer D32LT

V12-T12-3

V12-T12-4

V12-T12-2

V12-T12-4

V12-T12-2

Product 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 PresentPage

V12-T12-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Programmable Logic Controllers

400 Series

The Numa-Logic 400 Series

was Westinghouse’s first

PLC offering. After being

manufactured for twoyears,

the 400 Series was replaced

by the 700 Series of

products. Few, if any,

400 Series systems remain

in service today.

Chronology

The 400 Series was

manufactured by

Westinghouse in Madison

Heights, Ml from 1975 until

1978. The product was

no longer manufactured

after 1979.

Replacement

No direct replacement

available, contact a local

Eaton salesperson or

distributor about upgrading to

a D50, D32LT or D320 PLC.

D120 Series

The D120 family of PLCs

consisted of several l/O

cards and the racks used

to mount them.

The self-contained

troubleshooting was identical

in concept to the buzzer and

jumpers common to relay

controls. The D120 requires

no new language. It utilizes

decimal numbering and

memory size is determined

simply by adding all elements

on the ladder diagram.

Chronology

The Cutler-Hammer D120

products were offered from

1976 through 1983.

Replacement

For replacements of the D120

products, contact:

ATS Inc.

Peoria, lL

1-800-328-7287

MPC1 Series

The MPC1 was a complete

PLC system for applications

up to 128 I/O. Programmed in

easily understood relay ladder

logic with digital and analog

capabilities. Analog processor

has the same functions as

the discrete version and

supports “intelligent” analog

input and output modules.

Chronology

The Cutler-Hammer MPC1

products were offered from

1983 through 1993.

Replacement

For replacements of the

MPC1 products, contact:

ICS Inc.

Decatur, lL

217-422-6700

D500 Series

The D500 family of PLCs

consisted of several l/O

cards and the racks used to

mount them. The D500 was

a full function programmable

logic controller offering all

of the capabilities of larger

frame PLCs in a compact,

economical, space-saving

design.

Chronology

The Cutler-Hammer D500

products were offered from

1985 through 1994.

Replacement or parts

are no longer available

for D500 products.

Product Support Services

Technical Application

Assistance

Eaton can provide technical

application assistance via the

Technical Resource Center.

Available by telephone, Eaton

personnel quickly respond to

customer needs, including

troubleshooting, analyzing

system operation, and

coordi

nating component repair

or replacement.

The Technical

Resource Center can be

reached at: 1-800-356-1243

Further Information

Pricing Information

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount

Symbol 2CD-3.

Publication

Number Description

CA08100011E Volume 9—OEM

Product Guide

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-1

Motor Control

13 Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-2

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-69

Synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-73

Starters (Medium Voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-84

V12-T13-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Contents

Description Page

Pre 3-Star

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-4

3-Star

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-5

Citation

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-6

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-7

Ty p e N

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-22

A200

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-23

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-26

A202

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-33

V201 and V200

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-36

Freedom

Product Description, Product History Time Line . . . V12-T13-37

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-38

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-46

IT. Electromechanical NEMA

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-47

IT. Electromechanical IEC

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-48

XT IEC Power Control

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-49

Advantage

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-51

Definite Purpose

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-52

JF Autostarter

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-53

ME and MD dc Contactors

Product Description, Product History,

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-54

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-57

C80 Mill Type dc Contactors

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-58

Description Page

511 AC and DC Brakes

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-61

DPM-Contactor

Product Description, Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-62

AVD-Co nta ctor

Product Description, Product History,

Product History Time Line,

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-63

D-Contactor

Product Description, Product History,

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-64

Reversing/Assignment Contactors

Product Description, Product History,

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-65

P- & S-Contactors

Product Description, Product History,

Product History Time Line, Replacement

Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-66

Overview

Type N Contactor Citation Starter

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer® Starters and Contactors from Eaton’s electrical

business were and are designed to control functions of a

connected motor by starting, stopping, reversing, regulating and

protecting. When functions do not include speed regulation, this

device is known as a starter rather than a controller.

Applications for starter functions are fans, pumps, constant

horsepower, constant or variable torque machine tools, constant

torque metalworking machinery, variable torque and horsepower

fans and blowers, constant power heating, lighting, pumps and

motors for all types of applications.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-3

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Product History

Freedom

The Cutler-Hammer line of

contactors and starters dates

back to the early 1920s in

Milwaukee, WI. Changes

in coil construction, making

the first moisture-proof

vacuum with impregnated

coils, were innovations

in this line of contactors and

starters manufactured before

the 3-Star line (now known as

the Pre 3-Star). Eutectic alloy

overloads were used later in

this design with the design

change to the 3-Star line. A

few of the new features of

the 3-Star line of contactors

and starters were the first

standard three-coil overload

relays, new molding

compounds, new metals

and cast resin coils.

IT.

The Type F magnetic

contactor is the first

magnetically controlled

contactor in our

Westinghouse® records.

It was open in design,

simple in construction and

was state-of-the-art due to

its magnetically controlled

armature. The Type F

contactor was replaced by

the DE-ION® contactor, which

featured the Westinghouse

trademark DE-ION arc

quenching. The DE-ION was

followed by the Type DN,

Type N and the Type A, today

known as the A200. The Type

B was developed in the late

1970s and was obsoleted

two or three years later. The

A200 open control is still a

current offering. Prior to

1985, some of the larger

sizes (5–9) were known as

GCA and GCD.

The Citation line of contactors

and starters was introduced

in 1968 with many new

features: the new CI non-

wearing totally enclosed

permanent air gap magnet

structure; dual wound

magnet coil with plug-in

feature; color coded, twin

break dust-safe contacts;

and straight-through wiring.

Although the Citation line

was obsoleted in 1997,

replacement contact kits,

magnet coils and heater coils

will continue to be available.

Today, the Freedom™

contactor, launched in 1986,

coexists with the solid-state

heaterless IT. contactor, a

microprocessor-controlled

magnetic contactor

introduced in 2002.

V12-T13-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Pre 3-Star

Originally a Cutler-Hammer

Product

Size 1 Contactor

Size 2 Contactor

Size 5 Contactor

Parts are no longer available

for Pre-3 Star.

Product History Time Line for Pre 3-Star, Bulletin 9586 1

Replacement Capabilities

There are no replacement

parts available. Replace with

new contactor or starter.

Technology Upgrades

Size 00–3—Freedom or IT.

Sizes 4–5—Freedom,

Vacuum or IT.

Note

1For all NEMA® rated starters, please

contact Standard Open Control

Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992.

Sizes 00 – 5

Size 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 Present

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-5

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

3-Star

Originally a Cutler-Hammer

Product

Typical Size 0—Starter

Typical Size 1—Contactor

Typical Size 5—Starter

Product History Time Line for 3-Star, Bulletin 9560, 9586, 9589, 9591, 9556, 9658,

9736 and 9739 1

Replacement Capabilities

There are no replacement

parts available. Replace with

new contactor or starter.

Technology Upgrades

Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.

Sizes 4–5—Freedom,

Vacuum or IT.

Note

1For all NEMA rated Bulletin 9586

starters, please contact Standard

Open Control Aftermarket

at 1-800-535-8992.

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

Size 5

Size 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1985 2000 Present

V12-T13-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Citation

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product

Citation Starter and Nameplate

Product History Time Line for Citation A10, A11, A13, A30, A31, A40, A41, A50, A51, A70, A71, A80, A81, B10, B11, B50, B51,

B52, C10, C30 and C50

Note

1Although the number “9” is not imprinted on the coil, it must be used when ordering. For example, the proper ordering number for a 120V, 60 Hz,

AC magnet coil would be 9-1887-1 (refer to the style numbers on Page V12-T13-7).

Catalog

Number

Parts

Publication

SeriesCoil 1

Contact

Kit

NEMA Size Series 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Size 00 A1

Size 0 A1

Size 1 A1

Size 2 A1

Size 3 A1

Size 4 A1

Size 5 A1

Size 6 A1

Size 7 A1

Size 8 A1

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-7

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Capabilities—Contacts and Coils

Replacement Capabilities—Contacts and Coils, continued

Notes

1Citation overload relays are no longer available. A Freedom overload may be an option. Contact Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992.

2Replace complete contactor.

3Non-encapsulated coil.

4For use in existing DC operated devices. Not for conversion of existing AC operated devices to DC.

Description

Coil

Suffix

Style and Part Numbers

Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 2 Size 3 Size 3

Series A1 1Series B1 Series C1 Series D1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Contact Kits

Part number on contactor or

starter nameplate

Two-pole without interlock — 6-21 222 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-34 6-25 6-35

Three-pole without interlock — 6-21-2 222 6-22-2 6-23-2 6-24-2 6-34-2 6-25-2 6-35-2

Three-pole with interlock — 6-21-3 22— ——————

Four-pole without interlock — — — — — 6-22-3 6-23-3 —6-34-3 ——

Five-pole without interlock — — — — — 6-22-4 6-23-4 —6-34-4 ——

Magnet Coils

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-1945-1 9-2183-1 9-2650-1 9-2823-1 9-1887-1 9-1887-1 9-1889-1 9-2526-1 9-1891-1 9-1889-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-1945-2 9-2183-2 9-2650-2 9-2823-2 9-1887-2 9-1887-2 9-1889-2 9-2526-2 9-1891-2 9-1889-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-1945-3 9-2183-5 9-2650-3 9-2823-3 9-1887-3 9-1887-3 9-1889-3 9-2526-3 9-1891-3 9-1889-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-1945-4 9-2183-19 9-2650-4 9-2823-4 9-1887-4 9-1887-4 9-1889-4 9-2526-4 9-1891-4 9-1889-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-1945-5 9-2183-17 9-2650-5 9-2823-5 9-1887-5 9-1887-5 9-1889-13 9-2526-5 9-1891-13 9-1889-13

24V, 60 Hz T 9-1945-8 9-2183-16 9-2650-7 9-2823-18 9-1887-7 9-1887-7 9-1889-20 9-2526-6 9-1891-15 9-1889-20

380V, 50 Hz L 9-1945-6 9-2183-3 9-2650-6 9-2421-18 39-1887-8 9-1887-8 9-1889-14 9-2526-7 9-1891-14 9-1889-14

277V, 60 Hz H 9-1945-16 9-2183-18 9-2650-13 9-2823-12 9-1887-16 9-1887-16 9-1889-31 9-2526-15 9-1891-26 9-1889-31

9-2823-17

120 Vdc 4A1 — — — — 9-2024-2 9-2024-2 9-2025-2 9-2626-2 9-2026-2 9-2025-2

240 Vdc 4B1 — — — — 9-2024-1 9-2024-1 9-2025-1 9-2626-1 9-2026-1 9-2025-1

24 Vdc 4T1 — — — — 9-2024-4 9-2024-4 9-2025-4 9-2626-4 9-2026-4 9-2025-4

48 Vdc 4W1 — — — — 9-2024-3 9-2024-3 9-2025-3 9-2626-3 9-2026-3 9-2025-3

Description

Coil

Suffix

Style and Part Numbers

Size 4Size 4Size 5Size 6Size 6Size 6Size 7Size 7Size 8 Size 8

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Contact Kits

Part number on contactor or

starter nameplate

Two-pole — 6-26 6-36-3 6-27 6-28 —6-601-2 6-28 —— —

Three-pole — 6-26-2 6-36-4 6-27-2 6-28-2 6-570 6-601 6-28-2 6-570 646C829G05 6-571

Magnet Coils

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1875-1 9-2651 9-2698 9-1875-1 9-2651 438C805G12 9-2654

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1875-2 9-2651-2 9-2698-2 9-1875-2 9-2651-2 438C805G11 9-2654-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1875-3 9-2651-3 9-2698-3 9-1875-3 9-2651-3 438C805G10 9-2654-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1875-4 9-2651-4 9-2698-4 9-1875-4 9-2651-4 —9-2654-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1875-14 9-2651-6 9-2698-5 9-1875-14 9-2651-6 438C805G11 9-2654-6

24V, 60 Hz T 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 —————— —

380V, 50 Hz L 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 —9-2651-5 9-2698-6 —9-2651-5 438C805G15 9-2654-5

277V, 60 Hz H 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 —————— —

120 Vdc 4A1 9-2026-2 9-2026-2 9-2026-2 —————— —

240 Vdc 4B1 9-2026-1 9-2026-1 9-2026-1 —————— —

24 Vdc 4T1 9-2026-4 9-2026-4 9-2026-4 —————— —

48 Vdc 4W1 9-2026-3 9-2026-3 9-2026-3 —————— —

V12-T13-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Three-Pole Contact Kit, Size 3, Series B1 Three-Pole Contact Kit, Size 5

Replacement Capabilities—Overload Relays

Replacement Capabilities—Overload Relays, continued

Technology Upgrades

Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.

Sizes 4–6—Freedom, Vacuum

or IT.

Sizes 7–8—Freedom

Adapter Plates

The adapter plates make it

possible to replace a Citation

starter

with a Freedom or

Advantage starter and

the

same mounting holes can

be used.

Notes

1Citation overload relays are no longer

available. Replace with up-to-date

starter, or contact Standard Open Control

Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992

to determine Freedom overload relay

compatibility.

2No longer available. Replace with up-to-

date overload relay or starter.

3Will no longer be available once stock

is depleted. If stock is out, replace with

up-to-date overload relay or starter.

4On Vista; no price.

Description

Style and Part Numbers

Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 2 Size 3 Size 3

Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series D1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Overload Relays

Without mounting plates—

for replacement on existing starters

Standard trip (Class 20)

Eutectic — 1 Element

3 Element

3 Element with

alarm circuit

11111 1 1111

Slow trip (Class 30)

Eutectic — 1 Element

3 Element

11111 1 1111

Replacement Thermal Elements

Standard trip eutectic

22222 2 2222

Slow trip eutectic

10-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 310-5018 3

Description

Style and Part Numbers

Size 4 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 6 Size 6 Size 7 Size 7 Size 8 Size 8

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Overload Relays

Without mounting plates—

for replacement on existing starters

Standard trip (Class 20)

Eutectic — 1 Element

3 Element

3 Element with

alarm circuit

11111 1 1111

Replacement Thermal Elements

Standard trip eutectic

22222 2 2222

Slow trip eutectic

10-5018 310-5018 310-5018 3—— — ————

Current transformer — — — — 42-3418-3 442-3418-3 4————

Magnet Coil, 120V/60 Hz for Size 3,

Series A1

Adapter Plates Ordering Information

NEMA

Size

Adapter Plate Catalog Number

Freedom Advantage

00, 0 C321CMP0 —

1C321CMP1 WBASE12

2C321CMP2 WBASE 12

3C321CMP3 WBASE 34

4C321CMP4 WBASE 34

5C321CMP5 —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-9

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heaters

Overload relays do not include

heaters. Please see table for

heater element index.

Heater Selection

For Replacement in Existing

Applications Only

Heaters are rated to protect

40°C rise of motors; and,

open and drip-proof motors

having a service factor of

1.15 where the motor and

the controller are at the same

ambient temperature.

For other conditions:

1. For 50°C, 55°C and 75°C

(122°F, 131°F and 167°F)

rise motors and

enclosed motors having

a service factor of 1.0,

select one size smaller.

2. Ambient temperature of

the starter lower than

the motor by 26°C

(79°F), use one size

smaller.

3. Ambient temperature of

the starter higher than

the motor by 26°C

(79°F), use one size

larger.

Ultimate tripping current of

heaters is approximately 1.25

times the minimum current

rating listed in the tables.

Heater Selection Index

Note: Use this index to cross-reference tables on Pages V12-T13-9 through V12-T13-21.

Index of Overload Relay Heater Selection Tables

Notes

1Select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.

2Select heaters for 68% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Starter

Type

Catalog

Prefix Type

Heater Selection Table Number

NEMA Size of Starter

00-0-1

(1-1/2)2345678

A10 Open ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

Enclosed ST-2 ST-4 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

A11 Open BNC-1 BNC-3 BNC-5 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — —

Enclosed BNC-2 BNC-4 BNC-6 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — —

A13 Open LT-2 LT-4 LT-6 LT-7 LT-8 — — —

Enclosed LT-1 LT-3 LT-5 LT-7 LT-8 — — —

A30 and A40 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

A31 and A41 Enclosed BNC-8 BNC-3 BNC-6 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — —

A50 Open ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

Enclosed ST-2 ST-4 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

A51 Open BNC-1 BNC-3 BNC-5 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — —

Enclosed BNC-2 BNC-4 BNC-6 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — —

A70 and A80 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

A71 and A81 Enclosed BNC-8 BNC-3 BNC-5 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — —

A400-A420 Enclosed — — ST-14 ST-15 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12

A460 1Enclosed ST-2 1ST-4 1ST-6 1ST-7 1ST-16 1ST-10 1ST-11 1ST-12 1

A490 2Enclosed ST-2 2ST-4 2ST-6 2ST-7 2ST-16 2ST-10 2ST-11 2ST-12 2

A700 Open ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 — — —

Enclosed ST-2 ST-4 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 — —

A800-A803 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 —

A804-A806 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-5 — — — — —

A808-A809 Enclosed — ST-13 ST-5 ST-5 — — — —

B10 and B50 Enclosed ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 — — — —

B11 and B51 Open BNC-1 — — — — — — —

Enclosed BNC-2 BNC-3 BNC-5 — — — — —

C300 Open and

enclosed

ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 — — — —

C301 Open and

enclosed

BNC-1 BNC-4 BNC-5 BNC-7 — — — —

C303 Open and

enclosed

LT-2 LT-4 LT-6 LT-7 — — — —

V12-T13-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Overload Relay Heater Selection Tables

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

1For A460 controllers, select heaters at 50% of rated full load current.

2For A490 controllers, select heaters at 58% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table ST-1 Table ST-2 Table ST-3 Table ST-4 Table ST-5

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700, B10, B50, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix B10,

B50, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700, B10, C300

For Enclosed Typ e

Catalog Prefix B10, C300, A30,

A40, A70, A80, A800-A803

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Typ e

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700, B10, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A70, A80,

A800-A803, A808-A809, B10

Heater Ampere Range

0.167–0.187 0.155–0.173 — — — H1101

0.188–0.210 0.174–0.195 — — — H1102

0.211–0.237 0.196–0.220 — — — H1103

0.238–0.266 0.221–0.247 — — — H1104

0.267–0.298 0.248–0.278 — — — H1105

0.299–0.334 0.279–0.310 — — — H1106

0.335–0.376 0.311–0.349 — — — H1107

0.377–0.422 0.350–0.391 — — — H1108

0.423–0.474 0.392–0.441 — — — H1109

0.475–0.532 0.442–0.495 — — — H1110

0.533–0.598 0.496–0.555 — — — H1111

0.599–0.672 0.556–0.624 — — — H1112

0.673–0.757 0.625–0.703 — — — H1113

0.758–0.855 0.704–0.795 — — — H1114

0.865–0.959 0.796–0.895 — — — H1115

0.960–1.07 0.896–0.999 — — — H1116

1.08–1.21 1.00–1.12 — — — H1117

1.22–1.35 1.13–1.25 — — — H1018

1.36–1.52 1.26–1.41 — — — H1019

1.53–1.70 1.42–1.58 — — — H1020

1.71–1.90 1.59–1.77 — — — H1021

1.91–2.10 1.78–1.96 — — — H1022

2.11–2.33 1.97–2.17 — — — H1023

2.34–2.62 2.18–2.44 — — — H1024

2.63–2.93 2.45–2.72 — — — H1025

2.94–3.27 2.73–3.04 — — — H1026

3.28–3.64 3.05–3.38 — — — H1066

3.65–4.06 3.39–3.73 3.72–4.10 — — H1027

4.07–4.55 3.74–4.18 4.11–4.59 3.86–4.31 — H1028

4.56–5.03 4.19–4.63 4.60–5.07 4.32–4.77 — H1029

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-11

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

1For A460 controllers, select heaters at 50% of rated full load current.

2For A490 controllers, select heaters at 58% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table ST-1 Table ST-2 Table ST-3 Table ST-4 Table ST-5

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700, B10, B50, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix B10,

B50, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700, B10, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix B10, C300, A30,

A40, A70, A80, A800-A803

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700, B10, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A70, A80,

A800-A803, A808-A809, B10

Heater Ampere Range

5.04–5.59 4.64–5.15 5.08–5.65 4.78–5.31 — H1030

5.60–6.25 5.16–5.68 5.66–6.29 5.32–5.90 — H1031

6.26–6.92 5.69–6.30 6.30–7.00 5.91–6.55 — H1032

6.93–7.75 6.31–7.05 7.01–7.82 6.56–7.33 — H1033

7.76–8.63 7.06–7.76 7.83–8.79 7.34–8.15 8.32–9.27 H1034

8.64–9.59 7.77–8.63 8.80–9.67 8.16–9.03 9.28–10.1 H1035

9.60–10.6 8.64–9.51 9.68–10.8 9.04–10.1 10.2–11.4 H1036

10.7–11.9 9.52–10.5 10.9–12.0 10.2–11.2 11.5–12.8 H1037

12.0–13.3 10.6–11.8 12.1–13.4 11.3–12.5 12.9–14.3 H1038

13.4–14.7 11.9–13.1 13.5–14.9 12.6–13.9 14.4–16.0 H1039

14.8–16.6 13.2–14.8 15.0–17.6 14.0–15.7 16.1–17.8 H1040

16.7–18.8 14.9–16.7 17.7–19.0 15.8–17.5 17.9–20.3 H1041

18.9–21.2 16.8–18.9 19.1–21.5 17.6–19.8 20.4–22.9 H1042

21.3–23.9 19.0–21.3 21.6–24.5 19.9–22.3 23.0–26.0 H1043

24.0–27.0 21.4–24.1 24.6–27.9 22.4–25.4 26.1–29.5 H1044

— 24.2–27.0 28.0–32.0 25.5–28.7 29.6–33.5 H1045

— — 32.1–36.6 28.8–32.5 33.6–37.8 H1046

— — 36.7–41.8 32.6–36.6 37.9–42.8 H1047

— — 41.9–45.0 36.7–41.0 42.9–48.5 H1048

— — — 41.1–45.0 48.6–55.1 H1049

— — — — 55.2–62.3 H1050

— — — — 62.4–69.5 H1051

— — — — 69.6–79.1 H1052

— — — — 79.2–90.0 H1054

——— —— H1055

——— —— H1056

——— —— H1057

——— —— H1058

V12-T13-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

1For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.

2For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table ST-6 Table ST-7 Table ST-8 Table ST-9 Table ST-10

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 0 and 1 NEMA Size 6

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A460 1, A490 2,

A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A460 1,

A490 2, A700, A800-A803

For Open and Enclosed

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A30-40, A70, A80, A400,

A410, A420, A460, A490,

A800-A801

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A30, A40,

A70, A80, A800-A803

For Open Typ e

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

Heater Ampere Range

— — — 0.164–0.183 — H1101

— — — 0.184–0.205 — H1102

— — — 0.206–0.232 — H1103

— — — 0.233–0.260 — H1104

— — — 0.261–0.293 — H1105

— — — 0.294–0.328 — H1106

— — — 0.329–0.369 — H1107

— — — 0.370–0.414 — H1108

— — — 0.415–0.465 — H1109

— — — 0.466–0.522 — H1110

— — — 0.523–0.586 — H1111

— — — 0.587–0.659 — H1112

— — — 0.660–0.743 — H1113

— — — 0.744–0.839 — H1114

— — — 0.840–0.943 — H1115

— — — 0.944–1.05 — H1116

— — — 1.06–1.17 — H1117

— — — 1.18–1.31 — H1018

— — — 1.32–1.47 154–171 H1019

— — 92–101 1.48–1.66 172–192 H1020

— — 102–113 1.67–1.85 193–215 H1021

— — 114–125 1.86–2.04 216–237 H1022

— — 126–139 2.05–2.26 238–263 H1023

— — 140–157 2.27–2.54 264–295 H1024

— — 158–175 2.55–2.85 296–330 H1025

— — 176–196 2.86–3.18 331–369 H1026

— — 197–218 3.19–3.53 370–410 H1066

— — 219–243 3.54–3.95 411–458 H1027

— — 244–270 3.96–4.41 459–512 H1028

— — — 4.42–4.88 513–574 H1029

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-13

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

1For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.

2For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table ST-6 Table ST-7 Table ST-8 Table ST-9 Table ST-10

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 0 and 1 NEMA Size 6

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A460 1, A490 2,

A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50, C300

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A460 1,

A490 2, A700, A800-A803

For Open and Enclosed

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A30-40, A70, A80, A400,

A410, A420, A460, A490,

A800-A801

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A30, A40,

A70, A80, A800-A803

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50,

A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

Heater Ampere Range

— — — 4.89–5.42 — H1030

— — — 4.89–5.42 — H1031

— — — 6.08–6.64 — H1032

— — — 6.65–7.43 — H1033

8.24–9.19 — — 7.44–8.23 — H1034

9.20–10.1 — — 8.24–9.19 — H1035

10.2–11.3 — — 9.20–10.1 — H1036

11.4–12.7 — — 10.2–11.3 — H1037

12.8–14.1 — — 11.4–12.6 — H1038

14.2–15.8 — — 12.7–14.0 — H1039

15.9–17.7 — — 14.1–15.7 — H1040

17.8–20.1 — — 15.8–17.7 — H1041

20.2–22.7 20.6–23.3 — 17.8–19.8 — H1042

22.8–25.5 23.4–26.3 — 19.9–22.0 — H1043

25.6–28.9 26.4–30.8 — 22.1–24.9 — H1044

29.0–32.5 30.9–34.0 — 25.0–27.0 — H1045

32.6–36.7 34.1–38.3 — — — H1046

36.8–41.0 38.4–43.4 — — — H1047

41.1–46.0 43.5–49.3 — — — H1048

46.1–51.8 49.4–55.8 — — — H1049

51.9–58.6 55.9–63.1 — — — H1050

58.7–64.6 63.2–70.4 — — — H1051

64.7–72.7 70.5–79.9 — — — H1052

72.8–83.1 80.0–92.7 — — — H1054

V12-T13-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

1For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.

2For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table ST-11 Table ST-12 Table ST-13 Table ST-14 Table ST-15

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 7 NEMA Size 8 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700

For Enclosed Typ e

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A808, A809

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A400

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A400

Heater Ampere Range

—————H1101

—————H1102

—————H1103

—————H1104

—————H1105

—————H1106

—————H1107

—————H1108

—————H1109

—————H1110

—————H1111

—————H1112

—————H1113

—————H1114

—————H1115

—————H1116

—————H1117

229–255 — ———H1018

256–287 384–429 ———H1019

288–321 430–482 ———H1020

322–359 483–538 ———H1021

360–397 539–595 ———H1022

398–439 596–657 ———H1023

440–492 658–741 ———H1024

493–551 742–827 ———H1025

552–615 828–924 ———H1026

616–685 925–1027 ———H1066

686–763 1028–1147 ———H1027

764–855 1148–1285 3.89–4.35 — — H1028

——4.36–4.81 — — H1029

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-15

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

1For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.

2For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table ST-11 Table ST-12 Table ST-13 Table ST-14 Table ST-15

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 7 NEMA Size 8 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A10, A30,

A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,

A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A808, A809

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A400

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A400

Heater Ampere Range

— — 4.82–5.35 — — H1030

— — 5.36–5.96 — — H1031

— — 5.97–6.63 — — H1032

— — 6.64–7.41 — — H1033

— — 7.42–8.23 7.84–8.71 — H1034

— — 8.24–9.19 8.72–9.67 — H1035

— — 9.20–10.2 9.68–10.8 — H1036

— — 10.3–11.4 10.9–12.0 — H1037

— — 11.5–12.8 12.1–13.5 — H1038

— — 12.9–14.1 13.6–15.0 — H1039

— — 14.2–15.9 15.1–16.8 — H1040

— — 16.0–18.1 16.9–19.1 — H1041

— — 18.2–20.4 19.2–21.6 19.5–21.9 H1042

— — 20.5–23.3 21.7–24.5 22.0–24.7 H1043

— — 23.4–26.5 24.6–27.8 24.8–29.0 H1044

— — 26.6–30.3 27.9–31.5 29.1–31.9 H1045

— — 30.4–34.7 31.6–35.5 32.0–36.1 H1046

— — 34.8–39.6 35.6–40.3 36.2–40.7 H1047

— — 39.7–45.0 40.4–45.6 40.8–46.2 H1048

— — — 45.7–51.8 46.3–52.4 H1049

— — — 51.9–58.6 52.5–59.2 H1050

— — — 58.7–65.2 59.3–66.3 H1051

— — — 65.3–74.3 66.4–75.1 H1052

— — — 74.4–86.3 75.2–87.1 H1054

V12-T13-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type BNC Bimetal

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Note

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table BNC-1 Table BNC-2 Table BNC-3 Table BNC-4

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51, C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, C301

For Enclosed Typ e

Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81, B11

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301

Heater Ampere Range

0.180–0.201 0.167–0.187 — — H1101

0.202–0.226 0.188–0.210 — — H1102

0.227–0.254 0.211–0.236 — — H1103

0.255–0.285 0.237–0.266 — — H1104

0.286–0.320 0.267–0.297 — — H1105

0.321–0.357 0.298–0.332 — — H1106

0.358–0.402 0.333–0.373 — — H1107

0.403–0.451 0.374–0.419 — — H1108

0.452–0.506 0.420–0.470 — — H1109

0.507–0.568 0.471–0.528 — — H1110

0.569–0.638 0.529–0.592 — — H1111

0.639–0.716 0.593–0.663 — — H1112

0.717–0.799 0.664–0.743 — — H1113

0.800–0.911 0.744–0.847 — — H1114

0.912–1.01 0.848–0.951 — — H1115

1.02–1.14 0.952–1.06 — — H1116

1.15–1.29 1.07–1.20 — — H1117

1.30–1.44 1.21–1.33 — — H1018

1.45–1.61 1.34–1.49 — — H1019

1.62–1.80 1.50–1.67 — — H1020

1.81–2.03 1.68–1.89 — — H1021

2.04–2.25 1.90–2.09 — — H1022

2.26–2.49 2.10–2.32 — — H1023

2.50–2.76 2.33–2.57 — — H1024

2.77–3.05 2.58–2.83 — — H1025

3.06–3.39 2.84–3.15 — — H1026

3.40–3.83 3.16–3.51 3.87–4.18 — H1066

3.84–4.22 3.52–3.87 4.19–4.60 3.94–4.33 H1027

4.23–4.63 3.88–4.25 4.61–5.10 4.34–4.78 H1028

4.64–5.19 4.26–4.76 5.11–5.60 4.79–5.27 H1029

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-17

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type BNC Bimetal

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Note

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table BNC-1 Table BNC-2 Table BNC-3 Table BNC-4

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51,

C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81,

B11

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301

Heater Ampere Range

5.20–5.73 4.77–5.27 5.61–6.20 5.28–5.83 H1030

5.74–6.49 5.28–5.90 6.21–6.92 5.84–6.51 H1031

6.50–7.32 5.91–6.63 6.93–7.76 6.52–7.29 H1032

7.33–8.07 6.64–7.35 7.77–8.63 7.30–8.07 H1033

8.08–9.03 7.36–8.15 8.64–9.67 8.08–9.03 H1034

9.04–9.99 8.16–8.87 9.68–10.5 9.04–9.99 H1035

10.0–11.1 8.88–9.99 10.6–11.8 10.0–11.1 H1036

11.2–12.5 10.0–11.1 11.9–13.2 11.2–12.3 H1037

12.6–14.1 11.2–12.5 13.3–15.0 12.4–14.1 H1038

14.2–15.9 12.6–14.1 15.1–17.2 14.2–16.1 H1039

16.0–18.0 14.2–16.1 17.3–19.1 16.2–17.8 H1040

18.1–19.8 16.2–17.7 19.2–21.5 17.9–19.9 H1041

19.9–22.2 17.8–19.8 21.6–23.6 20.0–21.9 H1042

22.3–25.0 19.9–22.2 23.7–27.0 22.0–24.7 H1043

25.1–27.0 22.3–25.0 27.1–30.6 24.8–27.9 H1044

— 25.1–27.0 30.7–35.1 28.0–31.6 H1045

— — 35.2–39.8 31.7–35.3 H1046

— — 39.9–45.0 35.4–39.4 H1047

— — — 39.5–44.4 H1048

— — — 44.5–45.0 H1049

——— —H1050

——— —H1051

——— —H1052

——— —H1054

——— —H1055

——— —H1056

——— —H1057

——— —H1058

V12-T13-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type BNC Bimetal, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Note

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table BNC-5 Table BNC-6 Table BNC-7 Table BNC-8 Table BNC-9

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Sizes 0 and 1 NEMA Size 5

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, B11, A51, C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix B11, A71, A81

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A31,

A41, A51

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A31, A41,

A51, A71, A81

For Enclosed Typ e

Catalog Prefix A31, A41,

A71, A81

For Open and

Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11,

A31-41, A51, A71, A81

Heater Ampere Range

— — — 0.176–0.198 — H1101

— — — 0.199–0.221 — H1102

— — — 0.222–0.249 — H1103

— — — 0.250–0.279 — H1104

— — — 0.280–0.313 — H1105

— — — 0.314–0.350 — H1106

— — — 0.351–0.395 — H1107

— — — 0.396–0.442 — H1108

— — — 0.443–0.497 — H1109

— — — 0.498–0.556 — H1110

— — — 0.557–0.626 — H1111

— — — 0.627–0.703 — H1112

— — — 0.704–0.783 — H1113

— — — 0.784–0.895 — H1114

— — — 0.896–0.999 — H1115

— — — 1.00–1.12 — H1116

— — — 1.13–1.25 — H1117

— — — 1.26–1.40 — H1018

— — — 1.41–1.56 — H1019

— — — 1.57–1.74 96.8–108 H1020

— — — 1.75–1.97 109–121 H1021

— — — 1.98–2.19 122–135 H1022

— — — 2.20–2.42 136–149 H1023

— — — 2.43–2.68 150–166 H1024

— — — 2.69–2.95 167–182 H1025

— — — 2.96–3.29 183–203 H1026

— — — 3.30–3.72 204–229 H1066

— — — 3.73–4.10 230–253 H1027

— — — 4.11–4.49 254–283 H1028

— — — 4.50–5.04 — H1029

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-19

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type BNC Bimetal, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Note

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Table BNC-5 Table BNC-6 Table BNC-7 Table BNC-8 Table BNC-9

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Sizes 0 and 1 NEMA Size 5

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, B11, A51, C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix B11, A71, A81

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A31,

A41, A51

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11, A31, A41,

A51, A71, A81

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A31, A41,

A71, A81

For Open and

Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A11,

A31-41, A51, A71, A81

Heater Ampere Range

— — — 5.05–5.56 — H1030

— — — 5.57–6.23 — H1031

— — — 6.24–7.03 — H1032

7.57–8.47 7.57–8.39 — 7.04–7.75 — H1033

8.48–9.35 8.40–9.27 — 7.76–8.71 — H1034

9.36–10.1 9.28–10.1 — 8.72–9.59 — H1035

10.2–11.2 10.2–11.1 — 9.60–10.5 — H1036

11.3–12.2 11.2–12.1 — 10.6–11.8 — H1037

12.3–13.7 12.2–13.6 — 11.9–13.3 — H1038

13.8–15.7 13.7–15.5 — 13.4–14.9 — H1039

15.8–17.3 15.6–17.2 — 15.0–16.9 — H1040

17.4–19.9 17.3–19.8 — 17.0–18.5 — H1041

20.0–22.9 19.9–22.7 20.0–22.9 18.6–20.7 — H1042

23.0–26.4 22.8–26.0 23.0–26.4 20.8–23.0 — H1043

26.5–30.6 26.1–30.0 26.5–30.6 23.1–25.7 — H1044

30.7–35.5 30.1–34.4 30.7–35.5 25.8–27.0 — H1045

35.6–41.2 34.5–39.5 35.6–41.2 — — H1046

41.3–46.5 39.6–44.3 41.3–46.5 — — H1047

46.6–52.4 44.4–49.9 46.6–52.4 — — H1048

52.5–57.8 50.0–54.3 52.5–57.8 — — H1049

57.9–63.6 54.4–59.8 57.9–63.6 — — H1050

63.7–69.9 59.9–65.1 63.7–69.9 — — H1051

70.0–79.5 65.2–73.1 70.0–79.5 — — H1052

79.6–90.0 73.2–83.9 79.6–92.0 — — H1054

V12-T13-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type 8LT Slow Trip Eutectic Alloy

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Individually boxed heater coils master packed 10 per carton.

Table LT-1 Table LT-2 Table LT-3 Table LT-4 Table LT-5 Table LT-6 Table LT-7 Table LT-8

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5

For Enclosed

Type

Catalog Prefix

A13

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A13,

C303

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix C303

For Enclosed

Type

Catalog Prefix

A13

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A13,

C303

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix C303

For Enclosed

Type

Catalog Prefix

A13

For Open Typ e

Catalog Prefix

A13, C303

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A13,

C303

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A13

For Open and

Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A13

Heater Ampere Range

0.167–0.186 0.167–0.186 — — — — — — H1001

0.187–0.209 0.187–0.209 — — — — — — H1002

0.210–0.233 0.210–0.233 — — — — — — H1003

0.234–0.260 0.234–0.260 — — — — — — H1004

0.261–0.293 0.261–0.293 — — — — — — H1005

0.294–0.329 0.294–0.329 — — — — — — H1006

0.330–0.373 0.330–0.373 — — — — — — H1007

0.374–0.417 0.374–0.417 — — — — — — H1008

0.418–0.471 0.418–0.471 — — — — — — H1009

0.472–0.531 0.472–0.531 — — — — — — H1010

0.532–0.591 0.532–0.591 — — — — — — H1011

0.592–0.660 0.592–0.660 — — — — — — H1012

0.661–0.739 0.661–0.739 — — — — — — H1013

0.740–0.823 0.740–0.823 — — — — — — H1014

0.824–0.919 0.824–0.919 — — — — — — H1015

0.920–1.01 0.920–1.01 — — — — — — H1016

1.02–1.14 1.02–1.14 — — — — — — H1017

1.15–1.27 1.15–1.27 — — — — — — H1018

1.28–1.41 1.28–1.41 — — — — — — H1019

1.42–1.61 1.42–1.61 — — — — — — H1020

1.62–1.86 1.62–1.86 — — — — — 96.8–111 H1021

1.87–2.01 1.87–2.01 — — — — — 112–120 H1022

2.02–2.27 2.02–2.27 — — — — — 121–136 H1023

2.28–2.51 2.28–2.51 — — — — — 137–150 H1024

2.52–2.80 2.52–2.80 — — — — — 151–168 H1025

2.81–3.21 2.81–3.21 — — — — — 169–192 H1026

3.22–3.51 3.22–3.51 — — — — — 193–210 H1066

3.52–3.86 3.52–3.86 3.67–3.99 3.67–3.99 — — — 211–231 H1027

3.87–4.36 3.87–4.36 4.00–4.51 4.00–4.51 — — — 232–261 H1028

4.37–4.78 4.37–4.83 4.52–5.03 4.52–5.03 — — — 262–293 H1029

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-21

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type LT Slow Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued

For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

Notes

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

Individually boxed heater coils master packed 10 per carton.

Table LT-1 Table LT-2 Table LT-3 Table LT-4 Table LT-5 Table LT-6 Table LT-7 Table LT-8

Heater

Catalog

Number

NEMA Size 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5

For Enclosed

Type

Catalog Prefix

A13

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A13,

C303

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix C303

For Enclosed

Type

Catalog Prefix

A13

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A13,

C303

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix C303

For Enclosed

Type

Catalog Prefix

A13

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix

A13, C303

For Open Type

Catalog Prefix A13,

C303

For Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A13

For Open and

Enclosed Type

Catalog Prefix A13

Heater Ampere Range

4.79–5.35 4.84–5.41 5.04–5.59 5.04–5.59 — — — — H1030

5.36–6.00 5.42–6.07 5.60–6.20 5.60–6.20 — — — — H1031

6.01–6.59 6.08–6.66 6.21–6.88 6.21–6.88 — — — — H1032

6.60–7.35 6.67–7.51 6.89–7.80 6.89–7.80 — — — — H1033

7.36–8.14 7.52–8.31 7.81–8.71 7.81–8.71 8.16–9.11 8.24–9.19 — — H1034

8.15–9.11 8.32–9.27 8.72–9.59 8.72–9.59 9.12–9.99 9.20–10.0 — — H1035

9.12–10.0 9.28–10.3 9.60–10.5 9.60–10.7 10.0–11.2 10.1–11.3 — — H1036

10.1–11.3 10.4–11.7 10.6–11.8 10.8–12.0 11.3–12.3 11.4–12.5 — — H1037

11.4–12.5 11.8–13.0 11.9–13.3 12.1–13.4 12.4–13.9 12.6–14.1 — — H1038

12.6–13.9 13.1–14.5 13.4–14.8 13.5–14.9 14.0–15.5 14.2–15.7 — — H1039

14.0–15.5 14.6–16.3 14.9–16.6 15.0–16.8 15.6–17.4 15.8–17.6 — — H1040

15.6–17.0 16.4–18.1 16.7–18.5 16.9–18.8 17.5–19.6 17.7–19.8 — — H1041

17.1–18.9 18.2–20.3 18.6–20.7 18.9–21.1 19.7–21.9 19.9–22.1 20.0–22.3 — H1042

19.0–21.2 20.4–23.0 20.8–23.3 21.2–24.1 22.0–24.7 22.2–25.2 22.4–25.5 — H1043

21.3–23.3 23.1–25.9 23.4–26.5 24.2–27.3 24.8–28.1 25.3–28.7 25.6–28.9 — H1044

23.4–26.1 26.0–27.0 26.6–30.0 27.4–31.3 28.2–31.8 28.8–32.7 29.0–33.7 — H1045

26.2–27.0 — 30.1–33.7 31.4–35.5 31.9–36.1 32.8–37.3 33.8–37.5 — H1046

— — 33.8–37.5 35.6–40.3 36.2–40.7 37.4–42.3 37.6–42.6 — H1047

— — 37.6–41.9 40.4–45.0 40.8–45.5 42.4–47.9 42.7–48.2 — H1048

— — 42.0–45.0 — 45.6–52.0 48.0–55.4 48.3–55.9 — H1049

—— — — 52.1–58.2 55.5–61.9 56.0–62.3 — H1050

— — — — 58.3–63.2 62.0–67.9 62.4–68.4 — H1051

— — — — 63.3–68.3 68.0–73.3 68.5–73.7 — H1052

— — — — 68.4–79.9 73.4–87.9 73.8–88.7 — H1054

V12-T13-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type N

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

Type N Contactor

Product History Time Line for Type N

Replacement Capabilities

Contact Kits

AC Coils

Technology Upgrades

Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.

Sizes 4–5—Freedom,

Vacuum or IT.

0–4

Size 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 Present

NEMA

Size Poles

Style

Number

031605226

131605212

231605202

331625563

431625564

Voltage Hz

Part Number

Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole

Original New Original New

Sizes 0, 1

220/380/440 25/50/60 1470243 9969D90G03 1470263 9969D90G18

550 60 1470244 9969D90G04 N/A N/A

120 60 1605268 9969D90G09 N/A N/A

115/208/230 60/60/60 1605513 9969D90G15 N/A N/A

600 60 1470245 9969D90G20 N/A N/A

Size 2

110/208/220 25/60/60 1470202 9969D92G02 1470222 9969D93G02

220/380/440/480 25/50/60/60 1470203 9969D92G03 N/A N/A

600 60 1470205 9969D92G08 1470225 9969D93G08

120/110 60/50 1605478 9969D92G10 N/A N/A

Size 3

110/208/220 25/60/60 1490646 9969D96G05 1490646 9969D96G05

220/380/400/440 25/50/50/60 1490647 9969D96G06 1490647 9969D96G06

120/110 60/50 1600770 9969D96G09 1600770 9969D96G09

600/500 60/50 1490649 9969D96G21 1490649 9969D96G21

Size 4

110/208/220 25/60/60 1490658 9969D96G11 1597724 9969D96G02

600/500 60/50 1596635 9969D96G16 1490649 9969D96G21

440 60 1490659 9969D96G12 N/A N/A

120/110 60/50 1600771 9969D96G20 N/A N/A

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-23

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

A200

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

A200 Size 1 Starter

Contact Kit for A200 Model J,

Size Two-, Three-Pole

A200 AC Coil, 120/110V, 60/50 Hz,

Two-, Three-, Four-Pole, Sizes 00, 0 and 1

Product History Time Line for A200, A201, A203, A204, A206, A210, A211, A213, A214, A216,

A220, A223, A224, A226, A250, A251, A600, A603, A604, A606, A700, A703, A704, A706, A800,

A804 and A806

Replacement Capabilities

Kits for Model J, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 1

AC Coils

Notes

1Model C contact kits and coils 00–4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J.

All other parts are unavailable.

2Use quantity two—373B331G11 (two-pole kit).

3Use one each of 373B331G11 (two-pole kit) and 373B331G12 (three-pole kit).

4Mounting hardware included.

5Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.

00–3 J

4 J

4 K

5–6 Electrically held

5–6 Mechanically held

7–8

Size Model 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Description Poles Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2

Contact kit 2 373B331G17 373B331G02 373B331G07 373B331G11

3373B331G18 373B331G04 373B331G09 373B331G12

4373B331G18 373B331G04 373B331G09 373B331G13 2

5373B331G19 373B331G05 373B331G10 373B331G14 3

Arc box 42–4 6714C74G01 6714C74G02 6714C74G03 6714C74G07 (two-, three-pole)

56714C74G04 6714C74G05 6714C74G06 6714C74G08 (four-, five-pole)

Cross bar 2–3 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G32

4–5 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G34

Upper base (for single rated coils only) 2–3 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G33

4–5 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G35

Lower base 2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1250C33G09

4–5 N/A N/A N/A 1250C33G05

KO spring (pk. of 10) All N/A N/A N/A 503C796G01

Terminal line/load (pk. of 3) All N/A N/A N/A 371B870G03

Voltage Hz

Sizes 00, 0 and 1 Size 2

Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole

120/110 60/50 505C806G01 505C808G01 505C806G01 505C818G01

208 60 505C806G02 505C808G02 505C806G02 505C818G02

600/550 60/50 505C806G05 505C808G05 505C806G05 505C818G05

380 50 505C806G07 505C808G07 505C806G07 505C818G07

240/220 60/50 505C806G12 505C808G12 505C806G12 505C818G12

480/440 60/50 505C806G13 505C808G13 505C806G13 505C818G13

24 60 505C806G16 N/A 505C806G16 505C818G15

277 60 505C806G18 505C808G16 505C806G18 505C818G16

240/480 560/60 505C806G03 505C808G03 505C806G03 505C818G03

120/240 560/60 505C806G10 505C808G10 505C806G10 505C818G10

V12-T13-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

A200 AC Coil, 110/120V, 60 Hz, Size 6

A200 AC Coil, 120/110V, 60/50 Hz,

Two-, Three-Pole, Sizes 3 and 4, Model J

DC Coils 1

Kits for Model J–K, Sizes 3 and 4 3

AC Coils

DC Coils k

Notes

1Use only on contactors originally supplied with a DC coil.

2Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.

3Model C contact kits and coils 00–4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J.

All other parts are unavailable.

4Model K replaces Model J.

5Use quantity two–626B187G12 (two-pole kits).

6Use one of each of 626B187G12 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G13 (three-pole kit).

7Use quantity two–626B187G16 (two-pole kit).

8Use one each of 626B187G16 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G17 (three-pole kit).

9Model K replaces Model J.

jDual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.

kUse only on units originally supplied with DC coil.

Voltage

Size 0Size 1Size 2

Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole

12 1268C86G07 1268C86G07 1268C86G07

24 1268C86G04 1268C86G04 1268C86G04

48 1268C86G05 1268C86G05 1268C86G05

125 1268C86G02 1268C86G02 1268C86G02

250 1268C86G01 1268C86G01 1268C86G01

125/250 21268C86G03 1268C86G03 1268C86G03

Description Poles Size 3—Model J Size 4—Model J Size 4—Model K 4

Contact kit 2 626B187G12 626B187G16 5250C81G16

3626B187G13 626B187G17 5250C81G17

4626B187G14 5626B187G18 75250C81G18

5626B187G15 6626B187G19 85250C81G19

Arc box 2–3 6714C74G09 6714C74G11 6714C74G11

4–5 6714C74G10 6714C74G12 6714C74G12

Cross bar 2–3 672B788G36 672B788G36 672B788G40

4–5 672B788G38 672B788G38 —

Upper base 2–3 672B788G37 672B788G37 672B788G52

4–5 672B788G39 672B788G39 —

Lower base 2–3 1250C33G03 1250C33G03 1250C33G10

4–5 1250C33G06 1250C33G06 —

KO spring (pk. of 10) All 503C796G02 503C796G02 672B788G50

Terminals line/load (pk. of 3) All 372B357G12 372B357G13 372B357G13

Voltage Hz

Model J, Sizes 3–4 Model K, Size 4 9

Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole

120/110 60/50 505C633G01 505C635G01 5250C79G01 5250C80G01

208 60 505C633G02 505C635G02 5250C79G02 5250C80G02

600/550 60/50 505C633G05 505C635G05 5250C79G05 5250C80G05

380 50 505C633G07 505C635G07 5250C79G07 5250C80G07

240/220 60/50 505C633G12 505C635G12 5250C79G12 5250C80G12

480/440 60/50 505C633G13 505C635G13 5250C79G13 5250C80G13

24 60 505C633G34 N/A 5250C79G34 N/A

277 60 505C633G14 N/A 5250C79G14 N/A

240/480 j60/60 505C633G03 505C635G03 5250C79G03 5250C80G03

120/240 j60/60 505C633G10 505C635G10 5250C79G10 5250C80G10

Voltage

Model J, Sizes 3–4

Two-, Three-Pole

24 1255C68G04

48 1255C68G05

125 1255C68G01

250 1255C68G02

125/250 1255C68G03

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-25

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Kits for GCA 530/630, Sizes 5–9—and GPD Sizes 7–9 1

Coils Coils

Notes

1Catalog No. A201/A200 Series replaces GCA/GPD Series. Renewal parts are the same.

2Use 477B477G06 for Silver Tungsten applications.

3CT Kit replaces the single molded one CT assembly used on the old Size 6 airbrake. The kit

includes a single molded three CT assembly, two busbars and hardware. This CT Kit also

replaces the single molded three CT assembly used on the present Size 6 airbrake and Size 6

vacuum contactor.

4Rectifier 125V 2018A40G01 (one required).

5Rectifier 250V 2018A40G02 (one required).

6Rectifier 600V 2018A40G03 (one required).

7These coils require an external rectifier. If the rectifier needs to be replaced, order by the

appropriate style number.

Kit Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9

Contact kit (one per pole) 477B477G05 22066A10G11 461A757G17 646C829G05 5264C42G01 (rear connected)

— — — — 5264C42G02 (front connected)

Arc box 2050A15G45 2066A10G45 831D580G01 831D580G01 9917D69G02

Magnet assembly 2050A15G46 2050A15G46 N/A N/A N/A

Magnet spacing kit 2050A15G47 2050A15G47 N/A N/A N/A

Arc cup kit 2050A15G48 N/A N/A N/A N/A

Load connection kit 2050A15G49 2066A10G49 N/A N/A N/A

Line connection kit 2050A15G50 2066A10G50 N/A N/A N/A

KO spring-6 2050A15G51 2066A10G46 N/A N/A N/A

CT 300/5 655C285H03 N/A N/A N/A N/A

CT 400/5 655C285H04 — — — —

CT 600/5 N/A 2066A10G18 3N/A N/A N/A

CT 800/5 N/A 2066A10G19 3N/A N/A N/A

Phase barrier N/A N/A 640C441G01 640C441G01 5264C35G03 (rear connected)

Cross bar 2050A15G12 2066A10G15 N/A N/A N/A

Shunt N/A 2066A10G48 650C129G01 646C831G02 (set of three) 5264C39G02 (set of four)

Voltage Hz Size 5 Size 6

110/120 60 2050A14G05 2050A12G05

110/120 50 2050A14G06 2050A12G06

200/208 50 2050A14G07 2050A12G07

220/240 50 2050A14G08 2050A12G08

200/208 60 2050A14G09 2050A12G09

220/240 60 2050A14G10 2050A12G10

277/303 60 2050A14G12 2050A12G12

380/415 50 2050A14G14 2050A12G14

440/480 60 2050A14G15 2050A12G15

440/480 50 2050A14G16 2050A12G16

550/600 60 2050A14G17 2050A12G17

550/600 50 2050A14G18 2050A12G18

380/415 60 2050A14G19 2050A12G19

120/240 60 2050A14G20 2050A12G20

24 DC — 2050A14G21 2050A12G21

48 DC — 2050A14G22 2050A12G22

125 DC — 2050A14G25 2050A12G25

250 DC — 2050A14G27 2050A12G27

Line Voltage Sizes 7–8 Required Size 9

115 Vdc 438C805G01 2 100 Vdc

5264C34G01

(contains coil

and resistor)

125 Vdc 438C805G04 2

230 Vdc 438C805G02 2

250 Vdc 438C805G03 2

110/120 Vac 47 438C805G12 2

220/240 Vac 57 438C805G11 2

380 Vac 67 438C805G15 2

440/480 Vac 67 438C805G10 2

550/575 Vac 67 438C805G13 2

V12-T13-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

DC Coil Conversion Kit—

Style Number 7864A29G01

A rectifier circuit converts the

AC supply to DC supply. This

conversion provides quiet

operation and improves

pickup and dropout

characteristics. All necessary

parts are included in the kit.

L63—Style Number 578D461G01

L64—Style Number 843D943G04

Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors—Coils

Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors—Auxiliary Electrical Interlock

Technology Upgrades

Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.

Sizes 4–6—Freedom, Vacuum or IT.

Sizes 7–8—Freedom

Size 9—No upgrade available

AC Contactors Voltage

AC/DC Coil

Conversion Kit

Replacement

Coil

Size 5 120 Vac 7864A28G01 7856A15G05

240 Vac 7864A28G02 7856A15G10

480 Vac 7864A28G03 7856A15G15

Size 6 120 Vac 7864A29G01 7856A16G05

240 Vac 7864A29G02 7856A16G10

480 Vac 7864A29G03 7856A16G15

Contactor Size

Catalog

Number

(Obsolete)

Style Number

(Obsolete) Circuits

Catalog

Number

(Current)

Style

Number

(Current)

00–6 (L-56) (2609D01G01) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01

(L-56D) (2609D01G02) 2NO J20 9084A17G02

(L-56E) (2609D01G03) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01

(L-56B) (2609D01G04) 2NO J20 9084A17G02

(L-56H) (2609D01G05) 2NO J20 9084A17G02

(L-56J) (2609D01G06) 1NO and 1NC DB J1C N/A

(T-56A) (2609D01G07) N/A N/A N/A

(T-56B) (2609D01G08) N/A N/A N/A

(L-56F) (2609D01G09) N/A N/A N/A

(L-56G) (2609D01G10) 1NO and 1NC DB J1C 9084A17G04

(L-56C) (2609D01G11) 2NC J02 9084A17G03

(L-56M) (2609D01G12) N/A N/A N/A

(L-56P) (2609D01G17) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01

(L-56R) (2609D01G18) 2NC J02 9084A17G03

(L-56S) (2609D01G19) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01

7–8 L63 — NO — 578D461G01

L63 — NC — 578D461G03

9L64—NO/NC—843D943G04

L64 — 2NO — 843D943G05

L64 — 2NC — 843D943G06

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-27

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Manual Reset, Class 20,

Thermal Type B Overload

Relay

Type B Overload Relay, Panel Mounted

Field-Mountable Alarm Contact

Note: Alarm contact available as

factory modification of field

mountable. For factory

modification, add suffix B.

Application Description

The Type B overload relay is

designed to protect industrial

motors against overload

conditions. Using modern

block-type, bimetallic design,

this relay will provide Class 20

operation in either single-

phase or three-phase

applications.

Features

●Ambient compensation

standard

●Alarm contact field

mountable

●Class 20—600V design

●Inverse time delay trip

●Test trip device for weld

check

●High visibility up-front trip

indication

●Trip-free reset mechanism

Operation

The Type B overload relay is a

bimetallic actuated device. The

bimetal elements are operated

by precisely calibrated heaters.

The heater elements connect

either directly in the circuit to

be measured, or through

current transformers on

applications NEMA Size 5

and larger.

As the bimetals are heated by

motor current flow, a

deflection force is produced.

Upon a sustained level of

abnormal current flow, the

deflection becomes great

enough to open the snap

action output contact.

Ambient Compensation

The Type B ambient

compensated design is

supplied as standard on all

A200 starters. This design

uses a second compensating

bimetal responsive to

ambient air temperature in

the surrounding enclosure.

This feature reduces

nuisance tripping in

applications using compact

control panels and motor

control centers where

internal temperature rise is

significant compared to

motor ambient temperature.

The compensating

characteristic is maintained in

ambient temperatures from

40°C to 77°C.

Design Standards

UL® 508, CSA®, ANSI/NEMA

ICS 2-222.

Overload Relay Selection Table

For replacement in existing applications only.

Alarm Contact Kit Selection Heaters

Price of overload relay does

not include heaters. Select

from the tables on Pages

V12-T13-30 to V12-T13-32.

Notes

1Includes contactor mounting bracket,

overload relay and connection straps

to contactor.

2For replacement on B200 sizes 00, 0

and 1, use BA23A instead of BA13A

and use BN23A instead of BN13A.

Motor Full

Load

Amperes

Panel Mounted

Catalog Number

Starter Mounted Catalog Number

Replacement for Type B

Overload Relays

Replacement for Type A Overload

Relays in Manual Reset Mode

(Three-Pole Only) 1

Ambient

Comp. Non-Comp.

Ambient

Comp. Non-Comp.

Ambient

Comp. Non-Comp.

Single-Pole (One NC Contact)

0.25–26.2 BA11JP BN11JP BA11A BN11A ——

26.3–45.0 BA21JP BN21JP BA21A BN21A ——

19.0–90.0 Use three-pole design, wire three-poles in series

19.0–135.0

Three-Pole (One NC Contact)

0.25–26.2 BA13JP BN13JP BA13A 2BN13A 2BA13J BN13J

26.3–45.0 BA23JP BN23JP BA23A BN23A BA23J BN23J

19.0–90.0 BA33P BN33P BA33A BN33A BA33A BN33A

19.0–135.0 BA43P BN43P BA43A BN43A BA43A BN43A

Type B Overload

Relay Size

Catalog

Number

1, 2

3, 4

B3NO-2

B3NO-4

V12-T13-28 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Auto/Manual Reset,

Class 20, Thermal Type A

Overload Relay

Three-Pole Panel Mounted

Single-Pole Panel Mounted

Application Description

The Type A overload relay is

designed to protect industrial

motors against overload

conditions. Using modern

block-type, bimetallic design,

this relay will provide Class 20

operation in either single-

phase or three-phase

applications.

Features

●Field selectable manual/

auto reset

●Alarm contact factory

available

●Class 20—600V design

●Inverse time delay trip

●Adjustable trip rating

±15%

●Color-coded reset rod:

Compensated (gray)

Non-compensated (red)

Operation

The Type A overload relay is a

bimetallic actuated device. The

bimetal elements are operated

by precisely calibrated heaters.

The heater elements

connected either directly in the

circuit to be measured, or

through current transformers

on applications NEMA Size 5

and larger.

As the bimetals are heated by

motor current flow, a

deflection force is produced.

Upon a sustained level of

abnormal current flow, the

deflection becomes great

enough to open the snap

action output contact.

Automatic Reset

The Type A overload relay can

be supplied as an option on all

A200 starters to provide

automatic reset operation.

The overload relay is always

shipped in the non-automatic

mode. To set up auto

operation, reposition the

reset rod by loosening and re-

tightening a hold-down clamp

at the base of overload relay.

Design Standards

UL 508, CSA, ANSI/NEMA

ICS 2-222.

Overload Relay Selection Table

For replacement in existing applications only.

Heaters

Price of overload relay does

not include heaters. Select

from the tables on Pages

V12-T13-30 to V12-T13-32.

Notes

1 Three-pole Type B Overload Relay is a

suitable alternative to a three-pole Type

A Overload Relay in Manual Reset Mode.

For example, use BA13JP for AA13P

and BN23J for AN23A, etc. (See

Page V12-T13-27.)

Alarm contact available only as factory

modification on Type A relay.

Motor Full

Load Amperes

Panel Mounted Catalog Number Starter Mounted Catalog Number

Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. Ambient Comp. Non-Comp.

Single-Pole (One NC Contact)

0.25–26.2 AA11P AN11P AA11A AN11A

26.3–45.0 AA21P AN21P AA21A AN21A

19.0–90.0 AA31P AN31P AA31A AN31A

19.0–135.0 AA41P AN41P AA41A AN41A

Three-Pole (One NC Contact) 1

0.25–26.2 AA13P AN13P AA13A AN13A

26.3–45.0 AA23P AN23P AA23A AN23A

19.0–90.0 AA33P AN33P AA33A AN33A

19.0–135.0 AA43P AN43P AA43A AN43A

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-29

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type FT Fast Trip,

Class 10

Overload Relay

Single-Pole Fast Trip, Panel Mounted

Three-Pole Fast Trip, Panel Mounted

Application Description

The Type FT overload relay is

designed to protect special

purpose motors having

restricted thermal and locked

rotor capabilities. Using

modern block-type, bimetallic

design, this relay will provide

Class 10 operation in single-

phase or three-phase

applications.

Features

●Class 10—600V design

●Inverse time delay trip

●Color-coded reset rod—

green

●Alarm contact factory

available

●Field selectable manual/

auto reset

●Adjustable trip rating

±20%

●Ambient compensation

included

Operation

The Type FT overload relay is

a bimetallic actuated device.

The bimetal elements are

operated directly from line

current, thus separate

calibrating heater elements

are not used. The overload

relay may be wired directly in

the motor circuit, or through

current transformers on

applications larger than 150A.

As the bimetals are heated

by motor current flow, a

deflection is produced. Upon

a sustained level of abnormal

current flow, the deflection

becomes great enough to

open the snap action output

contact.

Overload Relay Selection Table

For replacement in existing applications only.

Notes

1Single-pole (one NO–NC contact): Add suffix B.

2Three-pole (three NO–NC contacts): Add suffix B. Example: FT13PB-12.

Alarm contact available only as factory modification on FT relay.

Motor Full Load

Amperes

Panel Mounted Catalog Number Starter Mounted Catalog Number 1

Single-Pole 1Three-Pole 2NEMA Size Single-Pole

Single-Pole (One NC Contact); Three-Phase (Three NC Contacts in Series)

0.76–1.1 FT11P-1.1 FT13P-1.1 —FT11A-1.1

1.1–1.6 FT11P-1.6 FT13P-1.6 —FT11A-1.6

1.6–2.4 FT11P-2.4 FT13P-2.4 0, 1 FT11A-2.4

2.4–3.6 FT11P-3.6 FT13P-3.6 0, 1 FT11A-3.6

3.6–5.4 FT11P-5.4 FT13P-5.4 0, 1 FT11A-5.4

5.4–8.0 FT11P-8 FT13P-8 0, 1 FT11A-8

8.0–12 FT11P-12 FT13P-12 0, 1 FT11A-12

12–18 FT11P-18 FT13P-18 1FT11A-18

16–24 FT11P-24 FT13P-24 1FT11A-24

22–32 FT11P-32 FT13P-32 0, 1 FT11A-32

24–36 FT21P-36 FT23P-36 2FT21A-36

36–54 FT21P-54 FT23P-54 2FT21A-54

22–32 FT31P-32 FT33P-32 3FT31A-32

32–48 FT31P-48 FT33P-48 3FT31A-48

48–72 FT31P-72 FT33P-72 3FT31A-72

72–110 FT41P-110 FT43P-110 4FT41A-110

100–150 FT41P-150 FT43P-150 4FT41A-150

V12-T13-30 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heaters for Thermal

Types A and B Overload

Relays

Product Description

Each heater is identified by

a catalog number stamped

on one terminal. The heater

application table indicates

the range of full load motor

current to which a given

heater may be applied.

Heaters should be selected

on the basis of the actual

full load current and service

factor as shown on the

motor nameplate or in the

manufacturer’s published

literature.

When motor and overload

relay are in the same ambient

and the service factor of the

motor is 1.15 to 1.25, select

heaters from the heater

application table. If the service

factor of the motor is 1.0, or

there is no service factor

shown, or a maximum of

115% protection is desired,

select one size smaller

heater than indicated.

When motor and overload

relay are in different

ambients and when using

non-compensated overload

relays, select heaters from

the tables on Pages

V12-T13-30 through

V12-T13-32 using adjusted

motor currents as follows:

decrease rated motor current

1% for each °C motor

ambient exceeds controller

ambient. Increase rated

motor current 1% for each °C

controller ambient exceeds

motor ambient.

For temperature

compensated overload

relays, select heaters

according to the tables on

Pages V12-T13-30 through

V12-T13-32 and selection

information above regardless

of ambient.

Protect the starter against

short circuits by providing

branch circuit protection

per National Electrical

Code® (NEC®).

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 Starters

Notes

1Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less.

2Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A.

Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12.

Non-Compensated Open Starters and

Ambient Compensated Open and Enclosed Starters

Non-Compensated

Enclosed Starters

Heater

Catalog

Number

Block-Type Overload

Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole

Type Overload

Block-Type Overload

Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole

Type Overload

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) 12

For Sizes 0, 1 and 2 Starters

0.25–0.27 0.29–0.31 0.24–0.25 0.28–0.30 FH03

0.28–0.31 0.32–0.35 0.26–0.28 0.31–0.34 FH04

0.32–0.34 0.36–0.39 0.29–0.31 0.35–0.37 FH05

0.35–0.38 0.40–0.43 0.32–0.35 0.38–0.42 FH06

0.39–0.42 0.44–0.48 0.36–0.39 0.43–0.47 FH07

0.43–0.46 0.49–0.53 0.40–0.43 0.48–0.52 FH08

0.47–0.50 0.54–0.58 0.44–0.47 0.53–0.56 FH09

0.51–0.55 0.59–0.64 0.48–0.51 0.57–0.63 FH10

0.56–0.62 0.65–0.71 0.52–0.57 0.64–0.70 FH11

0.63–0.68 0.72–0.79 0.58–0.63 0.71–0.77 FH12

0.69–0.75 0.80–0.87 0.64–0.70 0.78–0.85 FH13

0.76–0.83 0.88–0.96 0.71–0.77 0.86–0.94 FH14

0.84–0.91 0.97–1.06 0.78–0.85 0.95–1.03 FH15

0.92–1.00 1.07–1.16 0.86–0.93 1.04–1.13 FH16

1.01–1.11 1.17–1.28 0.94–1.03 1.14–1.25 FH17

1.12–1.22 1.29–1.41 1.04–1.13 1.26–1.38 FH18

1.23–1.34 1.42–1.55 1.14–1.25 1.39–1.52 FH19

1.35–1.47 1.56–1.71 1.26–1.37 1.53–1.67 FH20

1.48–1.62 1.72–1.87 1.38–1.51 1.68–1.83 FH21

1.63–1.78 1.88–2.06 1.52–1.65 1.84–2.01 FH22

1.79–1.95 2.07–2.26 1.66–1.81 2.02–2.21 FH23

1.96–2.15 2.27–2.48 1.82–1.99 2.22–2.43 FH24

2.16–2.35 2.49–2.72 2.00–2.19 2.44–2.66 FH25

2.36–2.58 2.73–2.99 2.20–2.39 2.67–2.92 FH26

2.59–2.83 3.00–3.28 2.40–2.63 2.93–3.21 FH27

2.84–3.11 3.29–3.60 2.64–2.89 3.22–3.53 FH28

3.12–3.42 3.61–3.95 2.90–3.17 3.54–3.87 FH29

3.43–3.73 3.96–4.31 3.18–3.47 3.88–4.22 FH30

3.74–4.07 4.32–4.71 3.48–3.79 4.23–4.61 FH31

4.08–4.39 4.72–5.14 3.80–4.11 4.62–4.9 FH32

4.40–4.87 5.15–5.6 4.12–4.55 5.0–5.5 FH33

4.88–5.3 5.7–6.2 4.56–5.0 5.6–6.0 FH34

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-31

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 Starters, continued

Notes

1Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less.

2Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A.

Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12.

Non-Compensated Open Starters and

Ambient Compensated Open and Enclosed Starters

Non-Compensated

Enclosed Starters

Heater

Catalog

Number

Block-Type Overload

Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole

Type Overload

Block-Type Overload

Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole

Type Overload

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) 12

For Sizes 0, 1 and 2 Starters

5.4–5.9 6.3–6.8 5.1–5.5 6.1–6.6 FH35

6.0–6.4 6.9–7.5 5.6–5.9 6.7–7.3 FH36

6.5–7.1 7.6–8.2 6.0–6.6 7.4–8.0 FH37

7.2–7.8 8.3–9.0 6.7–7.2 8.1–8.7 FH38

7.9–8.5 9.1–9.9 7.3–7.9 8.8–9.7 FH39

8.6–9.4 10.0–10.8 8.0–8.7 9.8–10.5 FH40

9.5–10.3 10.9–11.9 8.8–9.5 10.6–11.7 FH41

10.4–11.3 12.0–13.1 9.6–10.5 11.8–12.7 FH42

11.4–12.4 13.2–14.3 10.6–11.5 12.8–14.0 FH43

12.5–13.5 14.4–15.7 11.6–12.6 14.1–15.3 FH44

13.6–14.9 15.8–17.2 12.7–13.8 15.4–16.6 FH45

15.0–16.3 — 13.9–15.1 — FH46

16.4–18.0 — 15.2–16.7 — FH47

For Sizes 1 and 2 Starters

—17.3–18.9 — 16.7–18.3 FH46

—19.0–20.8 — 18.4–20.0 FH47

18.1–19.8 20.9–22.9 16.8–18.3 20.1–21.9 FH48

19.9–21.7 23.0–25.2 18.4–20.2 22.0–23.9 FH49

21.8–23.9 25.3–27.6 20.3–22.2 24.0–26.2 FH50

24.0–26.2 — 22.3–24.3 — FH51

— — 24.4–26.6 — FH52

For Size 2 Starters

—27.7–30.3 — 26.3–28.8 FH51

26.3–28.7 30.4–33.3 — 28.9–31.4 FH52

28.8–31.4 33.4–36.4 26.7–29.1 31.5–34.5 FH53

31.5–34.0 36.5–39.9 29.2–32.0 34.6–37.9 FH54

34.6–37.9 42.0–43.9 32.1–35.2 38.0–41.9 FH55

38.0–41.5 — 35.3–38.5 42.0–45.0 FH56

41.6–45.0 — 38.6–42.3 — FH57

V12-T13-32 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays,

Sizes 3 and 4 Starters 123

Ambient

Compensated

Enclosed Starters

Non-Compensated

Enclosed Starters Heater

Catalog

Number

All Applications

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) 1

For Sizes 3 and 4 Starters

12.8–14.1 11.9–13.0 FH68

14.2–15.5 13.1–14.3 FH69

15.6–17.1 14.4–15.9 FH70

17.2–18.9 16.0–17.4 FH71

19.0–20.8 17.5–19.1 FH72

20.9–22.9 19.2–21.1 FH73

23.0–25.2 21.2–23.2 FH74

25.3–27.8 23.3–25.6 FH75

27.9–30.6 25.7–28.1 FH76

30.7–33.5 28.2–30.8 FH77

33.6–37.5 30.9–34.5 FH78

37.6–41.5 34.6–38.2 FH79

41.6–46.3 38.3–42.6 FH80

46.4–50 42.7–46 FH81

51–55 47–51 FH82

56–61 52–56 FH83

62–66 57–61 FH84

67–73 62–67 FH85

74–78 68–72 FH86

79–84 73–77 FH87

85–92 78–84 FH88

— 85–91 FH89

For Size 4 Starters

93–101 — FH89

102–110 92–99 FH90

111–122 100–110 FH91

123–129 111–122 FH92

130–133 123–128 FH93

—129

–133 FH94

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays,

Sizes 5 and 6 Starters 4

Notes

1Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less.

2Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A.

3Based on 75°C wire for greater than 95A.

4Based on 75°C wire.

Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12.

Compensated Overload Relay Heater

Catalog

Number

Open Starter Enclosed Starter

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes)

Size 5 (With 300/5 Current Transformers)

——FH23

118–129 118–129 FH24

130–141 130–141 FH25

142–155 142–155 FH26

156–170 156–170 FH27

171–187 171–187 FH28

188–205 188–205 FH29

206–224 206–224 FH30

225–244 225–244 FH31

245–263 245–263 FH32

264–292 264–292 FH33

293–300 — FH34

Size 6 (With 600/5 Current Transformers)

——FH23

236–259 236–259 FH24

260–283 260–283 FH25

284–310 284–310 FH26

311–340 311–340 FH27

341–374 341–374 FH28

375–411 375–411 FH29

412–448 412–448 FH30

449–489 449–489 FH31

490–527 490–527 FH32

528–585 528–540 FH33

586–600 — FH34

Size 7 and Larger

Advise full load current

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-33

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

A202 Lighting Contactor

(Electrically Held/

Magnetically Latched)

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

30A, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched

Product History Time Line for A202 Lighting Contactor

(Electrically Held/Magnetically Latched)

Replacement Capabilities

A202 Kits for 30 to 200A

Notes

1For 200A A202 Magnetically Latched Lighting Contactors, order three-pole contact kit style 672B788G07.

2Model K replaces Model J, offering superior design and life characteristics. Renewal parts are different.

Use parts for proper model only.

3Use quantity two–373B331G11 (two-pole kit).

4Use one each of 373B331G11 (two-pole kit) and 373B331G12 (three-pole kit).

5Use quantity two–626B187G12 (two-pole kit).

6Use one each of 626B187G12 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G13 (three-pole kit).

7Use quantity two–626B187G16 (two-pole kit).

8Use one each of 626B187G16 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G17 (three-pole kit).

Size Amperes Model 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Size 1 30

Size 2 60

Size 3 100

Size 4 200 J

Size 4 200 K

Description Poles 30A 60A 100A

200A—

Model J 1

200A—

Model K 2

Contact kit 2 373B331G07 373B331G11 626B187G12 626B187G16 5250C81G16

3373B331G09 373B331G12 626B187G13 626B187G17 5250C81G17

4373B331G09 3575250C81G18

5373B331G10 4685250C81G19

Arc box 2, 3, 4 6714C74G03 6714C74G07 6714C74G09 6714C74G11 6714C74G11

56714C74G06 6714C74G08 6714C74G10 6714C74G12 6714C74G12

Cross bar 2–3 — 672B788G32 672B788G36 672B788G36 672B788G40

4–5 — 672B788G34 672B788G38 672B788G38 —

Upper base

(for single rated

coils only)

2–3 — 672B788G33 672B788G37 672B788G37 672B788G52

4–5 — 672B788G35 672B788G39 672B788G39 —

Lower base 2–3 — 1250C33G09 1250C33G03 1250C33G03 1250C33G10

4–5 — 1250C33G05 1250C33G06 1250C33G06 —

Electrically Held Only

KO spring

(pack of 10)

All — 503C796G01 503C796G02 503C796G02 672B788G50

Terminal line/load

(pack of 3)

All — 371B870G03 372B357G12 372B357G13 372B357G13

V12-T13-34 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

AC Coils Electrically Held

AC Coils Electrically Held, continued

Notes

1 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.

2 Model K replaces Model J. Renewal parts are different. Use parts for proper model only.

Voltage Hz

30A 60A

Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole

120/110 60/50 505C806G01 505C808G01 505C806G01 505C818G01

208 60 505C806G02 505C808G02 505C806G02 505C818G02

600/550 60/50 505C806G05 505C808G05 505C806G05 505C818G05

380 50 505C806G07 505C808G07 505C806G07 505C818G07

240/220 60/50 505C806G12 505C808G12 505C806G12 505C818G12

480/440 60/50 505C806G13 505C808G13 505C806G13 505C818G13

24 60 505C806G16 N/A 505C806G16 505C818G15

227 60 505C806G18 505C808G16 505C806G18 505C818G16

240/480 160/60 505C806G03 505C808G03 505C806G03 505C818G03

120/240 160/60 505C806G10 505C808G10 505C806G10 505C818G10

Voltage Hz

100 and 200A—Model J 200A—Model K 2

Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole

120/110 60/50 505C633G01 505C635G01 52050C79G01 5250C80G01

208 60 505C633G02 505C635G02 52050C79G02 5250C80G02

600/550 60/50 505C633G05 505C635G05 52050C79G05 5250C80G05

380 50 505C633G07 505C635G07 52050C79G07 5250C80G07

240/220 60/50 505C633G12 505C635G12 52050C79G12 5250C80G12

480/440 60/50 505C633G13 505C635G13 52050C79G13 5250C80G13

24 60 505C633G34 N/A 52050C79G34 N/A

227 60 505C633G14 N/A 52050C79G14 N/A

240/480 160/60 505C633G03 505C635G03 52050C79G03 5250C80G03

120/244 160/60 505C633G10 505C635G10 52050C79G10 5250C80G10

120V Coil for

Electrically Held

Lighting Contactor—

Style Number

505C633G01

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-35

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

AC Coils Magnetically Latched

Terminals (Line and Load)

Other Accessories

Notes

1Order quantity of two for four-pole design.

2Group numbers for the five-pole terminals represent the combination of the two-pole and

three-pole number.

Voltage Hz Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Five-Pole

30A

110/120 50/60 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A89G01

208/240 50/60 7874A93G02 7874A93G02 7874A93G02 7874A89G02

277 50/60 7874A93G03 7874A93G03 7874A93G03 7874A89G03

440/480 50/60 7874A93G04 7874A93G04 7874A93G04 7874A89G04

575 50/60 7874A93G05 7874A93G05 7874A93G05 7874A89G05

60A

110/120 50/60 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A87G01 7874A87G01

208/240 50/60 7874A93G02 7874A93G02 7874A87G02 7874A87G02

277 50/60 7874A93G03 7874A93G03 7874A87G03 7874A87G03

440/480 50/60 7874A93G04 7874A93G04 7874A87G04 7874A87G04

110/120 50/60 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A87G01 7874A87G05

100 and 200A

110/120 50/60 7874A85G01 7874A85G01 7874A83G01 7874A83G01

208/240 50/60 7874A85G02 7874A85G02 7874A83G02 7874A83G02

277 50/60 7874A85G03 7874A85G03 7874A83G03 7874A83G03

440/480 50/60 7874A85G04 7874A85G04 7874A83G04 7874A83G04

550/575 50/60 7874A85G05 7874A85G05 7874A83G05 7874A83G05

Size Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Five-Pole

30A N/A N/A N/A N/A

60A 179C755G17 179C755G16 179C755G17 1179C755G16 + G17 2

100A 179C755G19 179C755G18 179C755G19 1179C755G18 + G19 2

200A Model K Model J Model K Model J Model K Model J Model K Model J

179C755G28 179C755G31 179C755G27 179C755G30 179C755G28 1179C755G3 1179C755G27 + G28 2179C755G30 + G3 2

Size Control Module (Rectifier)

30 to 200A 3915B98G01

V12-T13-36 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

V201 and V200 Vacuum

Contactors and Starters

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

Size 4 Vacuum Contactors

Heater Coils

Heater Coil Selection for

Type B Overload Relay

Motor Full Load Current in Amperes for

Use with Three Heaters Only

Open Starter Heater

Catalog

Number 1

Ambient Compensated

Overload Relay

Size 4 and 160A

12.8–14.1

14.2–15.5

15.6–17.1

17.2–18.9

19.0–20.8

FH68

FH69

FH70

FH71

FH72

20.9–22.9

23.0–25.2

25.3–27.8

27.9–30.6

30.7–33.5

FH73

FH74

FH75

FH76

FH77

33.6–37.5

37.6–41.5

41.6–46.3

46.4–50

51–55

FH78

FH79

FH80

FH81

FH82

56–61

62–66

67–73

74–78

79–84

FH83

FH84

FH85

FH86

FH87

85–92

93–101

102–110

111–122

123–129

130–133

—

FH88

FH89

FH90

FH91

FH92

FH93

FH94

Size 5 and 320A with 300/5

Current Transformers

107–117

118–129

130–141

142–155

156–170

FH23

FH24

FH25

FH26

FH27

171–187

188–205

206–224

225–244

245–263

FH28

FH29

FH30

FH31

FH32

264–292

293–318

319–350

FH33

FH34

FH35

Size 6 and 540A with 600/5

Current Transformers

236–259

260–283

284–310

311–340

341–374

FH24

FH25

FH26

FH27

FH28

375–411

412–448

449–489

490–527

528–585

586–600

FH29

FH30

FH31

FH32

FH33

FH34

Replacement Coils

Vacuum Contactor—Replacement Coils

Notes

1Three are required per overload relay.

2125 Vdc can be directly applied to the Size 5 and 6 coil rated for 120V/60 Hz AC

(cannot be applied to Size 4).

3250 Vdc can be directly applied to the Size 5 and 6 coil rated for 240V/60 Hz AC

(cannot be applied to Size 4).

Description Suffix

Part

Number

Size 4

110/120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

380/415 Vac, 50/60 Hz

440/480 Vac, 50/60 Hz

9085A57G01

9085A57G02

ID89221G07

9085A57G03

Size 5

24 Vdc

48 Vdc

110/120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

380/415 Vac, 50/60 Hz

440/480 Vac, 50/60 Hz

—

7874A09G07

7874A09G08

7874A09G01 2

7874A09G04 3

7874A09G10

7874A09G05

Size 6

110/120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

380/415 Vac, 50/60 Hz

440/480 Vac, 50/60 Hz

7874A24G01 2

7874A24G02 3

7874A24G07

7874A24G03

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-37

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Freedom Series—

NEMA and IEC

Originally a Cutler-Hammer

Product

Freedom

Product Description

The Cutler-Hammer Freedom

Series starters and

contactors feature a compact

space-saving design using

state-of-the-art technology

and the latest in high

strength, impact and

temperature-resistant

insulating materials. Starters

and contactors are available

in two rating/configuration

styles—NEMA (National

Electrical Manufacturers

Association) and IEC

(International

Electrotechnical

Commission). The NEMA

devices are sized based

on traditional NEMA

classifications and the IEC

devices on international

ratings. Internationally rated

starters and contactors, as

compared to NEMA devices,

generally are physically down-

sized to provide higher

ratings in a smaller package.

Product History Time Line for Freedom CN15 and AN15

Note: See contactor/starter nameplate to determine Series A1, B1 or C1.

Size 00 A1

Size 0 A1

Size 1 A1

Size 2 A1

Size 3 A1

Size 4 A1

Size 5 A1

Size 6 A1

Size 7 A1

Size 8 A1

NEMA Size Series 1986 1988 1990 1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 Present

V12-T13-38 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Capabilities

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 2 and 3

NEMA Sizes 00 and 0—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1, B1 or C1

Note

1Replace with complete contactor.

Description

NEMA Size 00–0 NEMA Size 00 NEMA Size 00 NEMA Size 0 NEMA Size 0

Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series B1 Series C1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number None None None None None

Contact Kits

Two-pole 11111

Three-pole 11111

Four-pole 11111

Five-pole 11111

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2650-1 9-2875-1 9-2875-1 9-2876-1 9-2876-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2650-2 9-2875-2 9-2875-2 9-2876-2 9-2876-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2650-3 9-2875-3 9-2875-3 9-2876-3 9-2876-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2650-4 9-2875-4 9-2875-4 9-2876-4 9-2876-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2650-5 9-2875-5 9-2875-5 9-2876-5 9-2876-5

277V, 60 Hz H 9-2650-13 9-2875-12 9-2875-12 9-2876-12 9-2876-12

208/240V, 60 Hz J — 9-2875-37 9-2875-37 9-2876-17 9-2876-17

240V, 50 Hz K 9-2650-12 9-2875-11 9-2875-11 9-2876-11 9-2876-11

380–415V, 50 Hz L 9-2650-6 9-2875-6 9-2875-6 9-2876-6 9-2876-6

380V, 50 Hz L — — — — —

415V, 50 Hz M — — — — —

550V, 50 Hz N — — — — —

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T —9-2875-36 9-2875-36 9-2876-36 9-2876-36

24V, 60 Hz T 9-2650-7 ————

24V, 50 Hz U 9-2650-14 9-2875-36 9-2875-36 9-2876-36 9-2876-36

32V, 50 Hz V 9-2650-9 9-2875-16 9-2875-16 9-2876-16 9-2876-16

48V, 60 Hz W 9-2650-8 9-2875-8 9-2875-8 9-2876-8 9-2876-8

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-2650-10 9-2875-9 9-2875-9 9-2876-9 9-2876-9

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 11111

Upper magnet frame 11111

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-39

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

NEMA Sizes 1, 2 and 3—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1 or B1

Description

NEMA Size 1 NEMA Size 1 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20861 22177 20861 22177 20426

Contact Kits

Two-pole 6-65 6-65 6-65-7 6-65-7 6-43-5

Three-pole 6-65-2 6-65-2 6-65-8 6-65-8 6-43-6

Four-pole 6-65-9 6-65-9 6-65-15 6-65-15 —

Five-pole 6-65-10 6-65-10 6-65-16 6-65-16 —

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2756-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2756-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2756-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2756-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2756-5

277V, 60 Hz H 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2756-9

208/240V, 60 Hz J — — — — —

240V, 50 Hz K 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2756-13

380–415V, 50 Hz L 99-2703-8 9-2703-8 9-2703-8 9-2703-8 —

380V, 50 Hz L — — — — 9-2756-12

415V, 50 Hz M — — — — 9-2756-8

550V, 50 Hz N — — — — 9-2756-14

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T —————

24V, 60 Hz T 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2756-6

24V, 50 Hz U 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2756-11

32V, 50 Hz V 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2756-10

48V, 60 Hz W 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2756-15

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2756-7

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 17-18200 17-18200 17-18200 17-18200 17-8955-2

Upper magnet frame 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936 48-1902

V12-T13-40 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

NEMA Sizes 4, 5 and 6—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1 or B1

Description

NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 6 NEMA Size 6

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20428 20428 20429 20429 20146 20146

Contact Kits

Two-pole 6-44 6-26 6-45 6-45 6-601-2 6-648

Three-pole 6-44-2 6-26-2 6-45-2 6-45-2 6-601 —

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-2698 9-2698

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-2698-2 9-2698-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-2698-3 9-2698-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-2698-4 9-2698-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-2698-5 9-2698-5

277V, 60 Hz H 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 — —

208/240V, 60 Hz J ——————

240V, 50 Hz K 9-1891-20 9-1891-20 9-1891-20 9-1891-20 — —

380–415V, 50 Hz L ————9-2698-69-2698-6

380V, 50 Hz L 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 — —

415V, 50 Hz M 9-1891-21 9-1891-21 9-1891-21 9-1891-21 — —

550V, 50 Hz N 9-1891-8 9-1891-8 9-1891-8 9-1891-8 — —

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T ——————

24V, 60 Hz T 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 — —

24V, 50 Hz U 9-1891-16 9-1891-16 9-1891-16 9-1891-16 — —

32V, 50 Hz V 9-1891-27 9-1891-27 9-1891-27 9-1891-27 — —

48V, 60 Hz W ————9-2698-89-2698-8

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-1891-18 9-1891-18 9-1891-18 9-1891-18 — —

Overload Relays

For replacement on existing starters

three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic 10-6530-4 10-6530-4 C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B

Current Transformer

For replacement on existing starters only ——42-3564 42-3564 42-3598 42-3598

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 ——

Upper magnet frame 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 ——

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-41

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

NEMA Sizes 7 and 8—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1 or B1

Note

1Contact Standard Open Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992 for assistance.

Description

NEMA Size 7 NEMA Size 7 NEMA Size 8 NEMA Size 8

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20848 20848 20849 20849

Contact Kits

Two-pole ————

Three-pole 6-613 6-613 6-571 6-571

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2698 9-2698 9-2654 9-2654

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2698-2 9-2698-2 9-2654-2 9-2654-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2698-3 9-2698-3 9-2654-3 9-2654-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2698-4 9-2698-4 9-2654-4 9-2654-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2698-5 9-2698-5 9-2654-6 9-2654-6

277V, 60 Hz H ————

208/240V, 60 Hz J ————

240V, 50 Hz K ————

380–415V, 50 Hz L ————

380V, 50 Hz L 9-2698-6 9-2698-6 9-2654-5 9-2654-5

415V, 50 Hz M ————

550V, 50 Hz N ————

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T — — — —

24V, 60 Hz T — — — —

24V, 50 Hz U — — — —

32V, 50 Hz V — — — —

48V, 60 Hz W — — — —

48V, 50 Hz Y — — — —

Overload Relays

For replacement on existing starters

three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B

Magnet Frame Armature 1

Lower magnet frame — — — —

Upper magnet frame ————

V12-T13-42 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IEC Sizes A–F—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1, B1 or C1

Notes

1Non-encapsulated coils.

2Replace with complete contactor.

Description

IEC Sizes A–F IEC Sizes A–C 1IEC Sizes A–C 1IEC Sizes D–F 1IEC Sizes D–F 1

Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series B1 Series C1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number None None None None None

Contact Kits

Two-pole 22222

Three-pole 22222

Four-pole 22222

Five-pole 22222

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2650-1 9-2875-1 9-2875-1 9-2876-1 9-2876-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2650-2 9-2875-2 9-2875-2 9-2876-2 9-2876-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2650-3 9-2875-3 9-2875-3 9-2876-3 9-2876-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2650-4 9-2875-4 9-2875-4 9-2876-4 9-2876-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2650-5 9-2875-5 9-2875-5 9-2876-5 9-2876-5

277V, 60 Hz H 9-2650-13 9-2875-12 9-2875-12 9-2876-12 9-2876-12

208/240V, 60 Hz J — 9-2875-37 9-2875-37 9-2876-37 9-2876-37

240V, 50 Hz K 9-2650-12 9-2875-11 9-2875-11 9-2876-11 9-2876-11

380–415V, 50 Hz L 9-2650-6 9-2875-6 9-2875-6 9-2876-6 9-2876-6

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T —9-2875-36 9-2875-36 9-2876-36 9-2876-36

24V, 60 Hz T 9-2650-7 ————

24V, 50 Hz U 9-2650-14 9-2875-13 9-2875-13 9-2876-13 9-2876-13

32V, 50 Hz V 9-2650-9 9-2875-16 9-2875-16 9-2876-16 9-2876-16

48V, 60 Hz W 9-2650-8 9-2875-8 9-2875-8 9-2876-8 9-2876-8

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-2650-10 9-2875-9 9-2875-9 9-2876-9 9-2876-9

Overload Relays

For replacement on existing starters:

three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B

Current Transformer

Transformer — — — — —

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 22222

Upper magnet frame 22222

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-43

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IEC Sizes G and H—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1 and B1

Description

NEMA Size G NEMA Size G NEMA Size H NEMA Size H

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20862 22178 20862 22178

Contact Kits

Two-pole 6-65-3 6-65-3 6-65-5 6-65-5

Three-pole 6-65-4 6-65-4 6-65-6 6-65-6

Four-pole 6-65-11 6-65-11 6-65-13 6-65-13

Five-pole 6-65-12 6-65-12 6-65-14 6-65-14

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2703-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2703-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2703-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2703-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2703-9

277V, 60 Hz H 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2703-7

240V, 50 Hz K 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2703-14

380–415V, 50 Hz L 9-2703-8 9-2703-8 9-2703-8 9-2703-8

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T ————

24V, 60 Hz T 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2703-6

24V, 50 Hz U 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2703-12

32V, 50 Hz V 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2703-10

48V, 60 Hz W 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2703-11

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2703-13

Overload Relays

For replacement on existing starters:

three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B

Current Transformer

Transformer — — — —

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 17-18200 17-1820 17-18200 17-18200

Upper magnet frame 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936

V12-T13-44 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IEC Sizes J and K—See Contactor/Starter Nameplate to Determine Series A1 and B1

Description

NEMA Size J NEMA Size J NEMA Size K NEMA Size K

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1

Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20862 22178 20862 22178

Contact Kits

Two-pole 6-65-7 6-65-7 6-65-18 6-65-20

Three-pole 6-65-8 6-65-8 6-65-17 6-65-19

Four-pole 6-65-15 6-65-15 ——

Five-pole 6-65-16 6-65-16 ——

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2703-1 9-2703-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2703-2 9-2703-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2703-3 9-2703-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2703-4 9-2703-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2703-9 9-2703-9

277V, 60 Hz H 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2703-7 9-2703-7

240V, 50 Hz K 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2703-14 9-2703-14

380–415V, 50 Hz L 9-2703-8 9-2703-8 9-2703-8 9-2703-8

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T ————

24V, 60 Hz T 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2703-6 9-2703-6

24V, 50 Hz U 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2703-12 9-2703-12

32V, 50 Hz V 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2703-10 9-2703-10

48V, 60 Hz W 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2703-11 9-2703-11

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2703-13 9-2703-13

Overload Relays

For replacement on existing starters:

three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic C306GN3B C306GN3B C306GN3B C306GN3B

Current Transformer

Transformer — — — —

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 17-18200 17-18200 17-18200 17-18200

Upper magnet frame 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-45

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IEC Sizes L, M and N

Description

IEC Size L IEC Size M IEC Size N

Part Number Part Number Part Number

Contact Kits

Two-pole 6-43-3 6-43 6-43-5

Three-pole 6-43-4 6-43-2 6-43-6

Four-pole — — —

Five-pole — — —

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-2756-1 9-2756-1 9-2756-1

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-2756-2 9-2756-2 9-2756-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-2756-3 9-2756-3 9-2756-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-2756-4 9-2756-4 9-2756-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-2756-5 9-2756-5 9-2756-5

277V, 60 Hz H 9-2756-9 9-2756-9 9-2756-9

240V, 50 Hz K 9-2756-13 9-2756-13 9-2756-13

380–415V, 50 Hz L — — —

380V, 50 Hz L 9-2756-12 9-2756-12 9-2756-12

415V, 50 Hz M 9-2756-8 9-2756-8 9-2756-8

550V, 50 Hz N 9-2756-14 9-2756-14 9-2756-14

24V, 60 Hz–24V, 50 Hz T ———

24V, 60 Hz T 9-2756-6 9-2756-6 9-2756-6

24V, 50 Hz U 9-2756-11 9-2756-11 9-2756-11

32V, 50 Hz V 9-2756-10 9-2756-10 9-2756-10

48V, 60 Hz W 9-2756-15 9-2756-15 9-2756-15

48V, 50 Hz Y 9-2756-7 9-2756-7 9-2756-7

Overload Relays

For replacement on existing starters

three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic 10-6530 10-6530-2 10-6530-3

Current Transformer

Transformer — — —

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 17-8955-2 17-8955-2 17-8955-2

Upper magnet frame 48-1902 48-1902 48-1902

V12-T13-46 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IEC Sizes P, R and S

IEC Size T, U and V

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 1.

Description

IEC Size P IEC Size R IEC Size S

Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 22278 22278 22278

Contact Kits Size 6-294 6-288 6-286

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1891-1

200V, 50 Hz or 118V, 60 Hz E — ——

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1891-2

254V, 50 Hz or 277V, 60 Hz H ———

380V, 50 Hz or 415V, 60 Hz L ———

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1891-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1891-4

208V, 60 Hz E 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1891-13

277V, 60 Hz H 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 9-1891-26

240V, 50 Hz K 9-1891-20 9-1891-20 9-1891-20

380V, 50 Hz L 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 9-1891-14

415V, 50 Hz M 9-1891-21 9-1891-21 9-1891-21

24V, 60 Hz T 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 9-1891-15

Overload Relays

Reference C316 overload relays

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 48-1030-2

Upper magnet frame 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 48-1029-4

Description

IEC Size T IEC Size U IEC Size V

Part Number Part Number Part Number

Renewal Parts Publication Number 22275 22276 22586

Contact Kits Size 6-621 6-622 6-601

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-3006 9-3006 9-2698

200V, 50 Hz or 118V, 60 Hz E 9-3006-5 9-3006-5 —

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-3006-2 9-3006-2 9-2698-2

254V, 50 Hz or 277V, 60 Hz H 9-3006-6 9-3006-6 9-2698-2

380V, 50 Hz or 415V, 60 Hz L 9-3006-7 9-3006-7 9-2698-6

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-3006-3 9-3006-3 9-2698-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-3006-4 9-3006-4 9-2698-4

208V, 60 Hz E — — 9-2698-5

277V, 60 Hz H — — —

240V, 50 Hz K — — —

380V, 50 Hz L — — —

415V, 50 Hz M — — —

24V, 60 Hz T — — —

Overload Relays

Reference C316 overload relays

Magnet Frame Armature

Lower magnet frame ———

Upper magnet frame ———

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-47

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IT. Electromechanical

NEMA

NEMA Full Voltage Non-reversing

Starter, Size 0

Product Description

The Cutler-Hammer

Intelligent Technologies® (IT.)

electromechanical starter

from Eaton’s electrical

business consists of an IT.

electromechanical contact

block or contactor and an IT.

electromechanical solid-state

overload relay as a full voltage

non-reversing (FVNR) or a full

voltage reversing (FVR)

device. Size 00 to Size 5

Starters are factory or field

assembled.

Product History Time Line for IT. Electromechanical NEMA

Replacement Capabilities

Replacements for NEMA Contacts and Starters

Notes

1 H = Hold-Open.

2 For reversing contactors and starters, order two.

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection,

CA08100006E, Tab 2.

IT. Electromechanical NEMA

Product 2000 2005 Present

NEMA

Size Description

Catalog

Number

140A EMHCKT40 1

150A EMHCKT50 1

265A EMHCKT65 1

285A EMHCKT85 1

2100A EMHCKT100 1

3, 4 125A EMCKT125

3, 4 160A EMCKT160

3, 4 200A EMCKT200

5250A EMCKT250

5315A EMCKT315

5400A EMCKT400

1Coil EMCC

2Coil EMCD

3, 4 Coil EMCE

5Coil EMCF

00, 0, 1 Catch with leaf spring and pad EMDRCB

2 Catch with leaf spring and pad EMDRCD

1Lug EMLUGKTC

2Lug EMLUGKTD

3, 4 Lug EMLUGKTE

5 Horizontal box lug kit EMLUGKTFA

5 Vertical box lug kit EMLUGKTFB

5 Dual lug kit EMLUGKTFC

00, 0 For contactors and starters EMBBB

1 For starters EMBBC

1 For reversing contactors and reversing starters EMBBRC

2 For starters EMBBD

2 For reversing contactors and reversing starters EMBBRD

3, 4 For starters EMBBE

3, 4 For reversing contactors and reversing starters EMBBRE

5 Overload relay EMBBOF

Contact Kits

Coils 2

DIN Rail Catch

Lug Kits

Overload Busbars

V12-T13-48 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

IT. Electromechanical IEC

IEC FVNR Starter, C-Frame

Product Description

The Cutler-Hammer

Intelligent Technologies (IT.)

electromechanical starter

from Eaton’s electrical

business consists of an IT.

electromechanical contact

block or contactor and IT.

electromechanical solid-state

overload relay as a full voltage

non-reversing (FVNR) or full

voltage reversing (FVR)

device. A-Frame (27 mm) to

F-Frame (140 mm) Starters

are factory or field

assembled.

Product History Time Line for IT. Electromechanical IEC

Replacement Capabilities

Replacements for IEC Contacts and Starters

Note

1 For reversing contactors and starters, order two.

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 2.

IT. Electromechanical IEC

Product 2000 2005 Present

Frame

Size Description

Catalog

Number

C40A EMCKT40

C50A EMCKT50

D65A EMCKT65

D85A EMCKT85

D 100A EMCKT100

E 125A EMCKT125

E 160A EMCKT160

E 200A EMCKT200

F 250A EMCKT250

F 315A EMCKT315

F 400A EMCKT400

CCoil EMCC

DCoil EMCD

ECoil EMCE

FCoil EMCF

B, C Catch with leaf spring and pad EMDRCB

D Catch with leaf spring and pad EMDRCD

CLug EMLUGKTC

DLug EMLUGKTD

ELug EMLUGKTE

F Horizontal box lug kit EMLUGKTFA

F Vertical box lug kit EMLUGKTFB

F Dual lug kit EMLUGKTFC

B For contactors and starters EMBBB

C For starters EMBBC

C For reversing contactors and reversing starters EMBBRC

D For starters EMBBD

D For reversing contactors and reversing starters EMBBRD

E For starters EMBBE

E For reversing contactors and reversing starters EMBBRE

F Overload relay EMBBOF

Contact Kits

Coils 2

DIN Rail Catch

Lug Kits

Overload Busbars

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-49

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

XT IEC Power Control

XT Family of Contactors

Product Description

Eaton’s line of XT Contactors

and Starters includes non-

reversing and reversing

contactors, overload relay

and a variety of related

accessories. Because XT

meets IEC, UL, CSA, CCC

and CE standards, it is the

perfect product solution for

IEC applications all over the

world. The compact, space

saving and easy to install XT

line of IEC contactors and

starters is the efficient and

effective solution for

customer applications from

7A to 2000A.

Product History Time Line

for XT IEC Power Control

XT IEC

Power

Control

Product 2005 Present

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Coils

Voltage

Coil

Suffix

Catalog

Number

Frame C

110/50 120/60 A XTCERENCOILCA

110–130 Vdc AD XTCERENCOILCAD

220/50 240/80 B XTCERENCOILCB

200–240 Vdc BD XTCERENCOILCBD

415/50 460/60 C XTCERENCOILCC

550/50 600/60 D XTCERENCOILCD

208/60 E XTCERENCOILCE

230/50 F XTCERENCOILCF

190/50 220/60 G XTCERENCOILCG

240/50 277/60 H XTCERENCOILCH

380/50 440/60 L XTCERENCOILCL

400/50 N XTCERENCOILCN

380/60 P XTCERENCOILCP

12/50 12/60 R XTCERENCOILCR

12–14 Vdc RD XTCERENCOILCRD

24/5024/60 T XTCERENCOILCT

24–27 Vdc TD XTCERENCOILCTD

24/50 42/50 U XTCERENCOILCU

48/60 W XTCERENCOILCW

48–60 Vdc WD XTCERENCOILCWD

48/50 Y XTCEBENCOILCY

Frame D

110/50 120/60 A XTCERENCOILDA

110–130 Vdc AD XTCERENCOILDAD

220/50 240/80 B XTCERENCOILDB

200–240 Vdc BD XTCERENCOILDBD

415/50 480/60 C XTCERENCOILDC

550/50 600/60 D XTCERENCOILDD

208/60 E XTCERENCOILDE

230/50 F XTCERENCOILDF

190/50 220/60 G XTCERENCOILDG

240/50 277/60 H XTCERENCOILDH

380/50 440/60 L XTCERENCOILDL

400/50 N XTCERENCOILDN

380/60 P XTCERENCOILDP

12/50 12/60 R XTCERENCOILOR

12–14 Vdc RD XTCERENCOILDRD

24/50 24/60 T XTCERENCOILDT

24–27 Vdc TD XTCERENCOILDTD

24/50 42/50 U XTCERENCOILDU

48/60 W XTCERENCOILDW

48–60 Vdc WD XTCERENCOILDWD

48/50 Y XTCERENCOILDY

V12-T13-50 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Coils, continued

Voltage

Coil

Suffix

Catalog

Number

Frame F

110/50 120/60 A

XTCERENCOILFA

110–130 Vdc AD

XTCERENCOILFAD

220/50 240/60 B

XTCERENCOILFB

200–240 Vdc BD

XTCERENCOILFBD

415/50 480/60 C

XTCERENCOILFC

550/50 600/60 D

XTCEREN

COIL

208/60 E

XTCERENCOILFE

230/50 F

XTCEREN

COIL

190/50 220/60 G

XTCERENCOILFG

240/50 277/60 H

XTCERENCOILFH

380/50 440/60 L

XTCEREN

COIL

400/50 N

XTCERENCOILFN

380/60 P

XTCERENCOILFP

12/50 12/60 R

XTCERENCOILFR

24/50 24/60 T

XTCERENCOILFT

24–27 Vdc TD

XTCERENCOILFTD

24/50 U

XTCERENCOILFU

42/50 48/60 W

XTCERENCOILFW

48–60 Vdc WD

XTCERENCOILFWD

48/50 Y

XTCERENCOILFY

Frame G

100–120V 50/60 A

XTCERENCOILGA

110–130 Vdc AD

XTCERENCOILGAD

190–240V 50/60 B

XTCERENCOILGB

200–240 Vdc BD

XTCEREN

COIL

GBD

480–500V 50/60 C

XTCEREN

COIL

380–440V 50/60 L

XTCEREN

COIL

24/50 24/60 T

XTCERENCOILGT

24–27 Vdc TD

XTCERENCOILGTD

42–48V 50/60 W

XTCERENCOILGW

48–60 Vdc WD

XTCERENCOILGWD

Frame L 1

110–250 Vac/Vdc

XTCERENCOILLA

250–500V 40–60

XTCERENCOILLC

24–48 Vdc

XTCERENCOILLTD

48–110 Vac/Vdc

XTCERENCOILLY

Frame M 1

110–250 Vac/Vdc

XTCERENCOILMA

250–500V 40–60

XTCERENCOILMC

24–48 Vdc

XTCEREN

COIL

MTD

48–110 Vac/Vdc

XTCEREN

COIL

Frame N 1

110–250 Vac/Vdc

XTCERENCOILNA

250–500V 40–60

XTCERENCOILNC

48–110 Vac/Vdc

XTCERENCOILNY

Replacement Contact Kits

Replacement Vacuum Tube Assembly

Replacement Arc Chambers

Note

1Electronic modules including coils.

For use with…

Catalog

Number

XTAE040D–XTAE065D

XTCERENCONTACTD

XTCE185L–XTCE250L

XTCERENCONTACTL

XTCE300M–XTCE500M

XTCERENCONTACTM

For use with…

Catalog

Number

XTCE580N XTCERENVACT580

XTCE650N XTCERENVACTBB0

XTCE750N XTCERENVACT750

XTCE820N XTCERENVACT820

For use with…

Catalog

Number

XTCE185L XTCERENARC185

XTCE225L XTCERENARC225

XTCE250L XTCERENARC250

XTCE300M XTCERENARC300

XTCE400M XTCERENARC400

XTCE500M XTCERENARC500

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-51

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Advantage™

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

Advantage Starter

Product Description

Setting a new standard in

motor control, revolutionary

in design, Advantage motor

starters employ state-of-the-

art technology in solving

motor control application

problems that have existed

for ages. Customer focus

group input and 66,000

man-hours of engineering

ingenuity have been

combined to create a motor

starter that dramatically

extends operating life in a

physical space requirement

one half the size of

conventional motor starters.

Product History Time Line for Advantage Contactors and Starters

Replacement Capabilities

Replacements for Contact Kits and Coils

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 2.

Sizes 1–6

Size 1991 1995 2000 Present

Description

Catalog

Number

Replacement contact kit, size single, three-pole WCK13

Replacement contact kit, size two, three-pole WCK23

Replacement contact kit, size three, three-pole WCK33

Replacement contact kit, size four, three-pole WCK43

Replacement contact kit, size five, three-pole WCK53

Replacement contact kit, size six, three-pole WCK63

Size one and two, 110/120V, 60 Hz WCOIL12F

Size three and four, 110/120V, 60 Hz WCOIL34F

Size five and six, 110/120V, 60 Hz WCOIL56F

Contact Kits

Coils

V12-T13-52 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Definite Purpose

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product

Product History Time Line for Definite Purpose, Bulletin 9560, 9584 and 9586

Replacement Capabilities

Contact Kits for Types 9560, 9584, 9586

Magnetic Coils for Types 9560, 9584 and 9586

Technology Upgrades

Definite Purpose Technology Upgrades

Note

1Replace with new Definite Purpose contactor or starter.

Pole Amperes 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

9560 Contactors

2P, 3P, 4P 25, 30, 40

2P, 3P 50, 60

2P, 3P 75, 90

9584 Starters

1P 30

9586 Starters

1P 30

Description

Contact Kit Part Number

Contactor or Starter Size, Ampere Rating

12A Inductive

15A Resistive

25, 30A Inductive

30, 40A Resistive

40A Inductive

50A Resistive

50, 60A Inductive

60, 75A Resistive

75A Inductive

90A Resistive

90A Inductive

120A Resistive

Single-pole kit 16-331-3 6-331-4 —6-331-8 6-331-8

Three-pole kit 1——6-331-39 ——

Coil

Suffix

Coil Voltage

Coil Part Number

Ampere Rating

60 Hz 50 Hz

12, 25 and 30A Inductive

15, 30 and 40A Resistive

40A Inductive

50A Resistive

50, 60, 75 and 90A Inductive

60, 75, 90 and 120A Resistive

-7 — 380 111

-47 277 — 111

-49 104–120 104–120 111

-50 208–240 208–240 111

-69 24 24 111

-72 480 480 111

-74 600 600 111

Type A25 C25 C32 B25

9560 Contactors — 15–90A 120–350A —

9584 Starters — — — 25–40A

9586 Starters 25–60A — — —

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-53

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

JF Autostarter

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

Start Kit—Style Number 550D409G18

Run Kit—Style Number 550D409G19

Grid Kit—Style Number 3354D90G10

Product Description

Kits contain a complete

set of moving contacts,

stationary contacts

and springs.

Product History Time Line for JF Autostarter

Replacement Capabilities

Manual Autostarter Kits

Solenoid Assembly with Coil (All Sizes)

Technology Upgrades

ECN42–ECN44 reduced voltage auto-transformer starter or IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter.

Notes

1When replacing solenoid assembly series 416C160, use adapter plate style 9917D02H01—quantity one required.

2These styles replace coil style 296B892G_ _. When ordering new style as replacement, customer must order adapter plate 9917D02H01—

quantity one required.

Type 1930 1935 1940 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1975 1985 1995 2000 Present

Frame

Size Required

Start

Contacts Required

Run

Contacts Required

Grid

Stack Kit

2–3 1 38A7018G12 138A7018G13 13354D90G10

4–5, 5L 1 550D409G18 1550D409G19 13354D90G10

5M–5MM 1 3354D90G08 13354D90G09 23354D90G10

Volt Hz Style 2

115 60 5264C05H01

230 60 5264C05H02

460 60 5264C05H03

575 60 5264C05H04

V12-T13-54 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

ME and MD

DC Contactors

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

Single-Pole, Cat. No. MD510 with

L-64 Auxiliary Contact

Product Description

The Cutler-Hammer ME and

MD line of DC contactors

were and are designed to

control functions of a

connected motor by starting,

stopping, reversing and

regulating. Motor protection

is provided when the

contactors are combined with

an appropriate protective

device such as an

overcurrent relay.

Application Description

Typical applications for the

contactor functions are as

variable voltage controller

disconnects, fans, pumps,

conveyors, rolling mills,

cranes, or anywhere a DC

motor is used.

Product History

The Cutler-Hammer ME and

MD line of DC contactors

dates back to the early 1940s

in East Pittsburgh, PA, where

the development of the M

contactors was begun by the

Westinghouse Electric

Corporation to be used in

steel rolling mills and

nicknamed “mill duty”

devices. Added frame sizes

were developed to complete

the line in Buffalo in the late

1940s. These devices were

primarily mounted on

insulating plates and were

rear connected for ease of

wiring the motor current

conductors. In the 1960s,

front-mounted MD versions

of the devices were

developed to mount devices

on steel panels because the

insulating panels were

expensive and difficult

to manufacture.

In the late 1970s, rear-

connected devices were rare

and the ME contactor line

was created for front

connection, with a rear

connection kit available and

the M rear connected version

discontinued. The MR

normally closed line was

also introduced as a standard

at that time.

Product History Time Line for M Series DC Contactors

NEMA Size 1941 1945 1948 1952 1958 1964 1977 1978 1993 2000 Present

Sizes 0–1 small frame

Type M

Type MD

Type ME

Large frame

Type M

Size 2 large frame

Type M

Type ME

Sizes 3–4

Type MME

Type ME

Sizes 3–4

Type M

Type MD

Size 5

front connected

Type M

Type MD

Rear connected

Type MR

Sizes 6–9

front connected

Type M

Type MD

Rear connected

Type MR

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-55

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Capabilities

ME Series Renewal Parts—Kits

ME Series Renewal Parts—Coils

Note

1If lower coils are required, order separately.

Description

1NO Pole 2NO Poles 1NC Pole 1NO/NC Pole

Qty.

Part

Number Qty.

Part

Number Qty.

Part

Number Qty.

Part

Number

Contact kit 1 2184A10G14 22184A10G14 12184A10G14 22184A10G14

Arc box 10/25/50A 1 2184A10G09 22184A10G09 12184A10G09 22184A10G09

Arc box 100/150A 1 2184A10G10 22184A10G10 12184A10G10 22184A10G10

Shunt kit 1 2184A10G21 12184A20G16 12084A01G07 12184A11G07

Armature kit 1 2184A10G19 12184A20G15 12084A01G06 12184A11G06

Blowout assembly

10A 1 2184A10G15 12184A20G11 12184A10G15 22184A10G15

25A 1 2184A10G16 12184A20G12 12184A10G16 22184A10G16

50A 1 2184A10G17 12184A20G13 12184A10G17 22184A10G17

110/150A 1 2184A10G18 12184A20G14 12184A10G18 22184A10G18

Rear connection kit 1 2184A10G08 12184A10G08 12184A10G08 12184A10G08

Voltage

Part Number

Operating Coils Holding Coils (Lower) 1 — 1NO/1NC Contactors Only

10/25/50/100/150

Ampere Sizes

10/25/50

Ampere Sizes

100/150

Ampere Sizes

65 30B4376G06 44A6366G10 30B4376G27

90/92 30B4376G25 44A6366G12 427C048G16

115 30B4376G07 44A6366G13 30B4376G01

125 30B4376G08 44A6366G19 30B4376G26

230/240 30B4376G09 44A6366G15 30B4376G02

250 30B4376G10 44A6366G23 30B4376G17

500 30B4376G14 N/A N/A

550 30B4376G11 44A6366G18 30B4376G03

V12-T13-56 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

MR and MD Series 1 Sizes 5–9 Renewal Parts—Kits

Notes

1MR = rear connected; MD = front connected.

2Type MR only.

3Type MD only.

Type MR

and MD

Part Number

Current

Contact Kit

501/501R 26D2610G22

510 26D2610G15

601/701 26D2610G24

610/710 26D2610G16

810 26D2610G18

810R 26D2610G19

910 26D2610G20

Shunt

501/501R 25A1650G02

510 25A1641G02

601 25A1666G03

610 25A1654G03

701 25A1666G04

710 25A1654G04

810/810R 25A1693G02

910 45A1425G02

Arc Box

501/510 25A1646G01

601/610, 701/710 25A1662G01

810/910 25A1677G05

Armature Kit

501/501R 25A1649G05

510 25A1640G05

601/701 25A1667G03

610/710 25A1655G04

810/810R 25A1694G05

910 38A2269G02

Blowout Coil Assembly Kit 2

M501/510 25A1644G05

M601/610 25A1659G05

M701/710 25A1660G03

M810/810R 25A1698G03

M910 238A2273G02

Blowout Coil Assembly Kit 3

M501/510 857D505G05

M601/610 857D506G08

M701/710 857D516G05

M810 857D508G07

M910 857D509G04

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-57

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

M and MD Series Sizes 5–9—Coils

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 4.

Notes

1Two coils connected in series.

2Two coils connected in parallel.

3Two resistors connected in parallel.

4Resistors connected in series.

Voltage

M and MD 501 M and MD 510 M and MD 610/710

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

65 N/A — 45A5515G11 ———

90/92 N/A — 45A5515G23 —30B4377G17 —

115 30B4375G04 —45A5515G01 —30B4377G04 —

125 30B4375G24 —45A5515G07 —30B4377G10 —

230 30B4375G05 —45A5515G04 —30B4377G05 —

250 30B4375G12 —45A5515G12 —30B4377G07 —

550 30B4375G06 —45A5515G05 —30B4377G08 —

Voltage

M and MD 601/701 M and MD 810 M and MD 910

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

92 — — 435A928G01 1435A930G01 1

115 30B4377G23 1435A929G01 1L483507G01 1

115 30B4377G01 2L482211G01 2L483507G01 2

125 30B4377G24 1435A966G01 1435A967G01 1

125 30B4377G13 2—— — —

230 30B4377G01 1L482211G01 1L483507G01 1

230 30B4377G02 2—— — —

250 30B4377G13 1334P064G01 1LR549720G01 2

250 30B4377G08 2—— — —

550 30B4377G25 1L482213G01 2L483508G01 2

550 30B4377G03 2—— — —

600 — — N/A — L548879G01 1

Voltage

M and MD 810R

Coil Resistor Resistor Mounting

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

Part

Number

Symmetrical

Wiring

115 N/A — N/A — N/A —

230 L482211G0 157D1336G10 357D1340G02 —

550 N/A 157D1336G12 457D1340G02 —

V12-T13-58 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

C80 Mill Type DC

Contactors

Originally a Cutler-Hammer

Product

Size 2—Two-Pole Contactor

NO Contactor

Product Description

These DC mill type

contactors are designed for

heavy industry service and

are suitable for use on

moving machinery. The

contactors listed in this

section are for surface

mounting on steel panels and

front-of-panel wiring. The

power stud assembly is

mounted on the side of the

contactor, rather than as part

of a separate mounting kit.

The contactors feature forged

steel armature levers and

magnet frames for superior

physical strength. Self-

lubricating bearings eliminate

the need for lubricating the

contactor.

New hot-molded arc chute

assemblies contain no

asbestos and have better arc

extinction characteristics for

longer contact life. The short

stroke armature results in a

mechanical life of more than

20 million operations.

Product History Time Line for C80 Mill Type DC Contactors

Note: The C80 contactors were renumbered in 1984 from the old 6002 Series, which date back to 1919.

Consult factory for old 6002 Series replacements and parts.

Sizes 2 – 8

Size 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-59

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Capabilities for C80 Mill Type DC Contactors

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 4.

Notes

1Series resistor used with coil for voltage shown.

2Magnet closing coil only. If holdout coil is required, give number stamped on coil or advise

Bulletin or Serial Number of controller.

Description

Part Numbers

Size 2

Single-Pole,

Two-Pole,

Three-Pole and

Ltl® 25 and 50A

Size 3

Single-Pole

NO, NC

and Ltl 100A

Size 4

Single-Pole

NO, NC

and Ltl 150A

Size 5

Single-Pole

NO, NC

and Ltl 300A

Size 6

Single-Pole

NO, NC

and Ltl 600A

Size 6A

Single-Pole

NO, NC

and Ltl 810A

Size 8

Single-Pole

NO 1350A

Set of Contacts

Single-pole copper 6-599 6-189 6-189 6-189-3 6-189-4 6-189-4 6-215

Single-pole silver — 6-189-5 6-189-6 6-189-7 6-189-8 6-189-8 6-215-2

Two-pole copper 6-169-4 ——————

Three-pole copper 6-169-5 ——————

Arc Shield

Right hand 73-2676-2 62-791 62-791 62-793 62-840 62-840 62-804

Left hand 73-2676 62-791-2 62-791-2 62-793-2 62-840-2 62-840-2 62-804

Coils

Single-pole NO 100V 9-1549-18 9-1583-15 9-1583-15 9-1589-10 9-1688-8 9-1688-8 9-547-7 1

115V 9-1549-2 9-1583-2 9-1583-2 9-1589-2 9-1688-2 9-1688-2 9-547-7 1

550V 9-1549-3 9-1583-3 9-1583-3 9-1589-3 9-1688-3 9-1688-3 9-547-28 1

Single-pole NC 100V — 9-1585-18 9-1585-18 9-967-13 9-1717-4 ——

115V — 9-1585-2 9-1585-2 9-967-8 9-1717-1 ——

230V — 9-1585-1 9-1585-1 9-967-7 9-1717-2 ——

550V — 9-1585-3 9-1585-3 9-967-12 9-1717-3 ——

Single-pole Ltl 2 100V 9-1549-18 9-1583-15 9-1583-15 9-1589-10 9-1688-8 ——

115V 9-1549-2 9-1583-2 9-1583-2 9-1589-2 9-1688-2 ——

230V 9-1549-1 9-1583-1 9-1583-1 9-1589-1 9-1688-1 ——

550V 9-1549-3 9-1583-3 9-1583-3 9-1589-3 9-1688-3 ——

Two-pole 100V 9-1585-18 ——————

115V 9-1585-2 ——————

230V 9-1585-1 ——————

550V 9-1585-3 ——————

Three-pole 100V 9-1585-18 ——————

115V 9-1585-2 ——————

230V 9-1585-1 ——————

550V 9-1585-3 ——————

Set of Contact

Arc Shield

Coils

V12-T13-60 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

511 AC and DC Brakes

Originally a Cutler-Hammer

Product

Size 4-Inch Brake and Wheel

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer Type S

brakes are field-proven AC/

DC brakes. For applications

up to 1800 rpm/50 hp.

Precision holding and

stopping in 4, 5.5, 7 and

10-inch wheel sizes. With 15

standard bore sizes—straight

or tapered, non-asbestos

linings and off-the-shelf

availability, electrically

released and spring applied,

providing “fail-safe”

operation.

The retarding torque developed

is directly

proportional to the

spring pressure.

Typical applications include

conveyors, machine tools,

printing presses, small

cranes, overhead doors,

dumb waiters, vacuum

molding machines and

carnival rides.

Product History Time Line for 511 AC and DC Brakes

Types 1934 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 Present

4-inch Small Solenoid

4-inch Large Solenoid

5-1/2-inch Old Style

5-1/2-inch Updated

7-inch

7-inch High Torque

8-1/2-inch

10-inch

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-61

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Capabilities

Renewal Parts for Cat. No. 511 Shoe Brakes 1

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 2.

1Parts listed are for current line of 511 brakes.

2Kit contains two linings and rivets for one brake.

3Part number covers one shoe only.

Description

Part Numbers

4-Inch Brake 5-1/2-Inch Brake 7-Inch Brake 10-Inch Brake

3, 10 and 15 Lb

Torque

25 and 35 Lb

Torque

50 and 75 Lb

Torque

85 and 110 Lb

Torque

125 Lb

Torque

160 Lb

Torque

Magnet Coils Coil Suffix

120V, 60 Hz -39 9-591-9 9-585-9 9-941-20 9-941-8 9-758-36 9-758-37

110V, 50 Hz -5 9-591-9 9-585-9 9-585-9 9-941-39 9-758-26 9-758-10

120/110V, 50/60 Hz -66 9-591-9 9-585-9 ——— —

208V, 60 Hz -45 9-591-16 9-585-33 9-941-35 9-941-45 9-758-30 9-758-31

208/240V, 50/60 Hz -50 9-591-3 ———— —

240V, 60 Hz -40 9-591-10 9-585-10 9-941-15 9-941-4 9-758-2 9-758-30

220/240V, 50/60 Hz -67 9-591-10 9-585-10 ——— —

480V, 60 Hz -41 9-591-11 9-585-16 9-941-12 9-941-6 9-758-4 9-758-20

440/480V, 50/60 Hz -70 9-591-11 —————

600V, 60 Hz -58 9-591-12 9-585-26 9-941-32 9-941-25 9-758-13 9-758-5

550/600V, 50/60 Hz -71 9-591-12 —————

220V, 50 Hz -6 9-591-10 9-585-10 9-585-10 9-941-29 9-758-6 9-758-2

380V, 50 Hz -7 9-591-13 9-585-5 9-585-5 9-941-30 9-758-4 9-758-28

440V, 50 Hz -8 9-591-11 9-585-11 9-585-11 9-941-3 9-758-7 9-758-4

550V, 50 Hz -9 9-591-12 9-585-12 9-585-12 9-941-41 9-758-27 9-758-13

120 Vdc -97 9-1346-3 9-1347-10 9-1347-10 9-1347-12 ——

240 Vdc -98 9-1346-4 9-1347-11 9-1347-11 9-1347-13 ——

Lining kit with rivets 26-166 6-166-2 6-166-5 6-166-5 6-166-4

Shoe with lining 48-306 348-1787 348-1200-3 348-1200-3 324-2146-3 Inner 3

24-2146-4 Outer 3

Solenoid without coil AC 88-1553-8 88-2930-4 88-1342-11 88-1342-11 17-17199

DC 88-521-6 88-521-5 88-521-5 88-521-5 —

RP publication number 19320 AC 17377 AC 15475 AC 15475 AC 17379

13864 DC 17378 DC 15477 DC 15477 DC —

V12-T13-62 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

DPM-Contactor

DPM 1000 Vdc Contactor

Product Description

The Cutler-Hammer DPM

1000 Vdc Definite Purpose

Contactor has been designed

to meet severe environmental

and vibration conditions

found in your worst

applications. The contactor

is of unit construction,

assembled on a molded

insulated base, providing

maximum performance in

minimum space.

Product History Time Line for DPM-Contactor

Replacement Capabilities

DPM-Contactor Renewal Parts

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and

Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 4.

DPM-Contactor

Device 1970 1980 1990 2000 Present

Description

Catalog

Number

Contact kit 2131A94G10

Arc box 2131A94G03

Shunt 3534C86G01

Coils

28 Vdc 2114A92G04

36 Vdc 2114A92G05

55 Vdc 2114A92G06

74 Vdc 2114A92G09

110/115 Vdc 2114A92G14

125 Vdc 2114A92G15

275 Vdc 2114A92G16

600 Vdc 2114A92G20

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-63

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

AVD-Contactor

2000 Vdc Contactor

Product Description

The AVD-Contactor is a

single-pole normally open,

load break, bi-directional

definite purpose DC

contactor. The device is rated

at 1400A continuous and is

capable of switching up to

2000 Vdc loads.

Operating Coil

Characteristics

Coil

Voltage

Current Draw at

Nominal Voltage

(± 5% at 20°C)

Catalog

Number

28 1.87 9-3004-2

37 1.58 9-3004-3

74 0.79 9-3004-1

100 0.62 9-3004-5

230 0.25 9-3004-4

Product History

The Cutler-Hammer AVD (Advanced DC Contactor) was released for sale in 1995. The device has

not gone through any significant redesigns since its introduction.

Product History Time Line for AVD-Contactor

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Coils

Auxiliary Contacts

Replacement Contacts and Arc Chute

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and

Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 4.

AVD-Contactor

Device 1993 1995 2000 Present

Coil Voltage (Vdc)

Catalog

Number

28 9-3004-2

37 9-3004-3

74 9-3004-1

100 9-3004-5

230 9-3004-4

Contact

Configuration

Terminal

Configuration

Catalog

Number

1NO/1NC Fast-on 10-3519-5

2NO Fast-on 10-3519-6

2NC Fast-on 10-3519-7

1NO/1NC Screw type 10-6817

2NO Screw type 10-6817-2

2NC Screw type 10-6817-3

Description

Quantity

Required per

Contactor

Catalog

Number

Stationary contact 1 23-7253

Movable contact 2 23-7255

Arc chute 1 62-1038

V12-T13-64 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

D-Contactor

750 Vdc Contactor

Product Description

The D-Contactor is a single-

pole normally open, load

break, bi-directional definite

purpose DC contactor. Two

devices are available rated at

1800 and 3000A at 750 Vdc.

Operating Coil

Characteristics

Coil

Voltage

Current Draw at

Nominal Voltage

(± 7.5% at 20°C)

Catalog

Number

12 3.96 9-1688-15

24 2.00 9-1688-7

32 1.44 9-1688-9

48 1.00 9-1688-12

74 .97 9-2064-3

100 .45 9-1688-8

115 .37 9-1688-2

230 .20 9-1688-1

Product History

The Cutler-Hammer

D-Contactor was released for

sale in early 1970s. The

original device included a

permanent magnet blowout

coil and square main

contacts. The permanent

magnet blowout coil device

was uni-directional or the

current could only flow

through the device in one

direction. As such, it

was

essential that the polarity as

marked

on the power

terminals be maintained. The

permanent magnet blowout

device is no longer offered.

The device was redesigned in

the early 1980s to include

round main contacts and an

intermittent duty blowout

coil in lieu of the permanent

magnet blowout. The

blowout coil device is

bi-directional or current can

flow through the device in

either direction. Although

contact life is maximized if

the +terminal is at the top of

the device, it is not essential

that polarity be maintained.

The present blowout coil

device is a form, fit, function

replacement for the original

permanent magnet blowout

device. In addition, the

present contact kits with the

round contacts can be used

on the original devices that

employed the square main

contacts. Subsequent minor

product enhancements

have been made with the

new parts being a direct

replacement for the parts

that they replaced.

Product History Time Line for D-Contactor

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Coils Auxiliary Contacts

Replacement Contacts, Blowout Coil and Arc Chute

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and

Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 4.

Permanant Magnet Blowout Device

Blowout Coil Device

Device 1970 1980 1990 2000 Present

Coil Voltage

(Vdc)

Catalog

Number

12 9-1688-15

24 9-1688-7

32 9-1688-9

48 9-1688-12

74 9-2064-3

100 9-1688-8

115 9-1688-2

230 9-1688-1

Contact

Configuration

Terminal

Configuration

Catalog

Number

1NO/1NC Fast-on 10-3519-5

2NO Fast-on 10-3519-6

2NC Fast-on 10-3519-7

1NO/1NC Screw type 10-6817

2NO Screw type 10-6817-2

2NC Screw type 10-6817-3

Device Rating

Amperes

Main Contact

Configuration Contacts

Catalog

Number

1800 Two-main Main contacts 6-497

1800 Two-main Arcing contacts 23-5449

3000 Four-main Main contacts 6-496

3000 Four-main Arcing contacts 23-5448

1800 and 3000 Two- and four-main Blowout coil 9-2592

1800 and 3000 Two- and four-main Arc chute 62-822

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-65

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Reversing/Assignment

Contactors

1000 Vdc Contactor

Product Description

The Reversing/Assignment

Contactor is a double-pole,

double-throw, non-load break

definite purpose DC

contactor. A three-position

center-off and a two-position

magnetically-latched

configuration is available.

The device is rated for

1100A, 1000 Vdc. The

Reversing Contactor includes

cross-over busbars for DC

motor reversing applications;

the Assignment Contactor

omits the cross-over busbars

for motor assignment

applications.

Operating Coil

Characteristics

Coil

Voltage

Current Draw at

Nominal Voltage

(± 7.5% at 20°C)

Catalog

Number

24 1.60 9-1903-9

28 1.30 9-1903-1

36 1.06 9-1903-3

74 0.49 9-1903-7

110 0.33 9-1903-6

125 0.33 9-1903-4

250 0.17 9-1903-8

Product History

The Cutler-Hammer

Reversing/Assignment

Contactor was released for

sale in the early 1970s. The

original device incorporated a

leaf spring contact assembly

and square contacts. The

device was redesigned in the

early 1980s to incorporate a

coil spring contact assembly

with round contacts. The

present device is a form, fit,

function replacement for the

original device. In addition,

the original leaf spring contact

assembly devices can be

upgraded to the new coil

spring contact assembly with

the one-time purchase of a

contact upgrade kit. The

standard contact kit can then

be used for subsequent

contact replacements.

Product History Time Line for Reversing/Assignment Contactors

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Coils Auxiliary Contacts

Replacement Contacts

Technology Upgrades

This product currently listed in Volume 5—Motor Control and

Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 4.

Note

1The 6-602-3 contact kit will upgrade the three-position, reversing/assignment device from the

original design that incorporated a leaf spring contact structure to the present design that

incorporates a coil spring contact structure. The 6-602 contact kit can then be used after the

device has been upgraded for the subsequent contact replacement.

Leaf Spring Contact Assembly Device

Coil Spring Contact Assembly Device

Device 1970 1980 1990 2000 Present

Coil Voltage

(Vdc)

Catalog

Number

24 9-1903-9

28 9-1903-1

36 9-1903-3

74 9-1903-7

110 9-1903-6

125 9-1903-4

250 9-1903-8

Contact

Configuration

Terminal

Configuration

Catalog

Number

1NO/1NC Fast-on 10-3519-5

2NO Fast-on 10-3519-6

2NC Fast-on 10-3519-7

1NO/1NC Screw type 10-6817

2NO Screw type 10-6817-2

2NC Screw type 10-6817-3

Device Configuration

Catalog

Number

Reversing/assignment Three-position 6-602

Reversing/assignment upgrade kit 1Three-position 6-602-3

Magnetic latched reversing/assignment Two-position 6-602-5

V12-T13-66 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Contactors, Starters and Brakes

P- and S-Contactors

Power Contactor

Product Description

The P- and S-Contactors are

single-pole normally open,

load break DC contactors.

Although the devices have

two arc shields, they are

functionally single-pole

devices. The contactors

typically carried a 1000 Vdc,

1000A rating and were

applied in locomotive, rapid

transit and high horsepower

DC drive applications.

Product History

The Cutler-Hammer

P-Contactor and S-Contactor

were released for sale in the

1960s. These were single-

pole DC contactors that used

two arc chutes.

They typically carried a

1000 Vdc, 1200A rating and

were discontinued in the mid

1980s. A few renewal parts

are still available.

Product History Time Line for P- and S-Contactors

Replacement Capabilities

A few renewal parts are still available.

Auxiliary Contacts

Replacement Contacts, Blowout Coil and Arc Chute

Technology Upgrades

This product can potentially be replaced with the DPM-Contactor

or D-Contactor depending on the application. Please contact our

Technical Resource Center for replacement device selection.

Further Information

For further replacement parts information, contact Standard

Open Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992.

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE Discount Symbols 1CD-5C, 1CD-1C, 15CD3

and 1CD-1

Contact

Configuration

Terminal

Configuration

Catalog

Number

1NO/1NC Fast-on 10-3519-5

2NO Fast-on 10-3519-6

2NC Fast-on 10-3519-7

1NO/1NC Screw type 10-6817

2NO Screw type 10-6817-2

2NC Screw type 10-6817-3

Description

Quantity

Required per

Contactor

Catalog

Number

Contact kit 1 6-332

Arc chute 2 62-469

Blowout coil 2 62-532

P- & S-Contactors

Device 1960 1970 1980 2000 Present

Publication

Number Description

PT03304001E Genuine Cutler-Hammer Replacement Contact Kits and Coils Wall Chart

B8F01SE Vacuum Starters and Contactors

CA08100006E Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-67

Motor Control

Solid-State Low Voltage Reduced Voltage Motor Starters

Contents

Description Page

Low Voltage Reduced

Voltage Motor Starters

Product Description,

Product History,

Product History

Time Line . . . . .

V12-T13-67

Replacement

Capabilities,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-68

Low Voltage Adjustable

Frequency AC Drives

Product Description,

Product History

Time Line . . . . .

V12-T13-69

Replacement

Capabilities,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-71

Reduced Voltage Motor

Starters

IT. Reduced Voltage

Solid-State Motor Starter

Product Description

Reduced voltage solid-state

motor starters serve to

provide reduced voltage

starting, protection and

control for standard three-

phase induction motors.

They are commonly found in

applications like conveyors,

compressors, extruders,

pumps and blowers, etc.

Reduced voltage starting is

beneficial because current

and torque are reduced

during the motor starting

process. This reduces the

electrical and mechanical

shock experienced during

motor starting, prolonging

motor and equipment life.

Reduced voltage starters

also provide for maximum

efficiency of the motor duty

cycle by electronically

sensing the motor load and

reducing the voltage applied

to the motor when it is

running at less than full

load torque.

Solid-state motor starters

also provide short circuit and

various types of electronic

protective functions.

Common features include

phase loss, undervoltage,

current balance, phase

rotation, current limit,

overtemperature, etc.

Reduced voltage solid-state

controllers are similar to

reduced voltage motor

starters, except they include

no overload or short-circuit

protection. Motor controllers

are applied in series with

conventional electromechanical

starters to provide the

benefits of reduced voltage

starting at lower cost.

Electromechanical starter

contact life is also improved

by the reduced voltage motor

controller.

Product History

Eaton’s present line of Cutler-

Hammer reduced voltage

starters is the culmination of

38 years of product

development. In 1958,

Vectrol Engineering began

manufacturing SCR Gate

Driver circuitry and

progressed into their own

soft starter product line,

known as the Vectrol Motor

Starter (VMS). In 1980,

Vectrol was purchased by

Westinghouse. The VMS

was quickly phased out of

production and the Vectrol

ES (Energy Saver) solid-state

reduced voltage starter

was introduced. The Vectrol

ES combined features of

automatic power factor

adjustment and reduced

voltage, maximizing the

efficiency of the motor duty

cycle. The Vectrol ES starter

was actively manufactured

until 1988 when the Easy-

Start Motor Starter was

introduced.

Eaton entered the market in

1975 with the A415, A445

and A485 product lines. By

1983, Eaton had released the

A515/A545 Model A solid-

state reduced voltage starter

and followed up in late 1984

with the improved Model B

A515. This starter used a

solid-state controller, an

overload relay and a six SCR

full-wave power section. In

1988, Westinghouse

introduced its Easy-Start and

Easy-Start Jr. product lines

that also used a solid-state

control circuit and a six SCR

full-wave

power section. In

1995, the newly formed

Solid-

State Motor Control Division

(SSMC) of the new Eaton

released the Easy-Start EA

Reduced Voltage Starter,

combining the voltage control

of SCRs with the durability of

the Advantage motor starter

into a uniquely small package.

The EA, EJ and the ES

product lines have been

replaced by the IT. line of

solid-state reduced voltage

starters. Introduced in

October of 1999, the IT.

Starter is compact, easy to

install, easy to program and is

the most advanced solid-

state reduced voltage starter

available anywhere.

Product History Time Line

Cutler-Hammer A415/A445/A485

Westinghouse Vectrol VMS

Westinghouse Vectrol Energy Saver

Westinghouse Vectrol Startrol

Westinghouse Vectrol Startrol Power Miser

Cutler-Hammer A515/A545 Model A

Westinghouse Power Miser 2

Cutler-Hammer A515/A545 Model B

Westinghouse Easy-Start

Westinghouse Easy-Start 120

Cutler-Hammer Easy-Start ES

Westinghouse Power Miser 2, Model 3

Cutler-Hammer C514

Cutler-Hammer Easy-Start EC

Westinghouse Easy-Start Jr.

Westinghouse Easy-Start 100

Cutler-Hammer Easy-Start EJ

Cutler-Hammer Easy-Start EA

Cutler-Hammer IT. Starter

Product 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

V12-T13-68 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Solid-State Low Voltage Reduced Voltage Motor Starters

Replacement Capabilities

In most cases, recommended

replacement product is the

Cutler-Hammer IT. Soft Start

Starter. Eaton’s Electrical

Services & Systems (EESS)

has trained technicians

nation

wide. See

Ta b 2 2

in this

catalog for further

information

about EESS capabilities.

Technology Upgrades

The

IT.

line provides an easy-to-

program,

easy-to-install line of

reduced voltage Soft Starters

that is the most advanced

available anywhere in the

world. With a

range of 12–

850A and 13 models

in four

frame sizes, the IT. Soft

Starter provides advanced

functionality with

unsurpassed configuration

flexibility for open, enclosed

or motor control center

applications.

Support Chart for Non-Current Vintage Products

Advanced Technology Services, 8200 N. University, Peoria, IL 61615, now provides support for these products.

Their toll-free number is 1-877-645-3606.

Definitions

PCB Repair

Printed circuit boards may be

returned to Advanced

Technology Services for

repair. All PCBs are upgraded

to the most

current revision at

the time of the repair.

Upgrade Kits

Kits are available to upgrade

the basic

performance of

certain vintage products.

Contact Advanced

Technology Services for

more information.

Service Depot Repairs

Entire assemblies may be

returned to

Advanced

Technology Services

for

repair, upgrade or

refurbishment.

Field Service

Eaton’s Electrical Services &

Systems (EESS) has trained

technicians nation

wide. See

Ta b 2 2

in this catalog for further

information about EESS

capabilities.

Technical Support

The trained technicians at

Advanced Technology

Services are available to

provide assistance over

the telephone.

Spare Parts

Advanced Technology

Services main

tains a complete

inventory of spare parts.

Note

1Original printed circuit boards (PCBs) are

not available as spares. Please select the

appropriate upgrade board for

replacement.

Model

(See below for topic definitions)

PCB Repair Upgrade Kits Factory Repair Field Service Technical Support Spare Parts

Cutler-Hammer Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters

A415/A445/A485 ■ ■■■ ■

A515/A545 Model A ■ ■■■ ■

A515/A545 Model B ■ ■■■ ■

C514 ■ ■■■ ■

Westinghouse Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters

Vectrol VMS ■■

Vectrol Energy Saver ■■■ ■ 1

Easy-Start/Easy-Start 120 ■ ■■■ ■

Easy-Start Jr./Easy-Start 100 ■ ■■■ ■

Startrol

Startrol Power Miser

Power Miser 2 ■ ■■■ ■

Power Miser 2, Model 3 ■ ■■■ ■

Easy-Start Advantage ■■■■■ ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-69

Motor Control

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives—Solid-State Low Voltage

Adjustable Frequency

AC Drives

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer Adjustable

Frequency Controllers (AFCs)

serve to provide adjustable

speed and control for

standard AC induction

motors. AFCs rectify the

incoming AC line voltage to

supply a fixed potential DC

bus. An inverter section is

employed to invert the DC

bus voltage to an adjustable

frequency output voltage.

The solid-state logic section

controls the inverter and

ultimately the magnitude and

frequency of the output

voltage to the motor. Input to

the solid-state logic can be

manual (from an operator

type keypad) or automatic

(from design features

programmed into the

drive logic).

The advent of

microprocessor-

based logic and the

advancements of solid-state

power technology have

dramatically reduced the

costs of AFCs and enhanced

their product features. This

has permitted a more

economical solution for

adjustable speed motor

applications because AFCs

permit the use of standard

squirrel cage induction

motors instead of DC motors,

which are more expensive

and harder to maintain. AFCs

are ideal for variable torque

applications like centrifugal

pumps and fans, and

constant torque applications

like conveyers and extruders.

Typical Adjustable

Frequency Controller

Block Diagram

Product History Time Line

To Motor

Pole A Pole B Pole C

AB C

Gate Driver

Converter

Microprocessor Logic

460 Volt, 60 Hertz

Operator Panel Status and Fault Indication Panel

Dynamatic AF-3000

Dynamatic VLT-5

Dynamatic AF-2000

Dynamatic AF-300 (Responder)

Dynamatic AF-6000

Westinghouse Accutrol 100

Dynamatic AF-7000

Dynamatic IS-7000

Dynamatic AF-8000

Westinghouse Accutrol 300

Westinghouse Accutrol 150

Westinghouse Accutrol 200

Westinghouse Accuow

Dynamatic AF-1000

Dynamatic AF-5000

Westinghouse Accutrol 110

Westinghouse Accuow Jr.

Dynamatic AF-1500

Westinghouse Accuow 110

Dynamatic AF-1600

Westinghouse Accutrol 400

Westinghouse Accutrol 700

Cutler-Hammer AF97

Dynamatic AF-5000+

Dynamatic IS-5000+

Cutler-Hammer AF93

Cutler-Hammer AF95

Cutler-Hammer AF91

Cutler-Hammer SV9000

Cutler-Hammer HV9000

Cutler-Hammer CP9000

Cutler-Hammer BP9000

Eaton CH MVX 9000

Eaton CH SVX 9000

Eaton CH HVX 9000

Product 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 Present

V12-T13-70 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives—Solid-State Low Voltage

General Information

Notes

1Also available with a single-phase output.

2Standard 220V output only.

3Analog controls on pre-1988 models.

4Gate Turn-off Thyristor (GTO) output devices on pre-1986 models. Transistor versions have a T as the third character in the style number.

Model hp Range Input Voltage Output Devices Output Algorithm Control Type

VLT-5 1–5 240, 415 SCR VVI Analog

AF-1000 1–5 1230, 480 Transistors PWM Analog

AF-1500 1–30 240, 480 Transistors PWM Digital

AF-1600 1–20 240, 480 IGBT Vector PWM Digital

AF-2000 5–10 230 SCR VVI Analog

AF-300 N/A N/A SCR CSI Analog

AF-3000 230–250 230, (460 opt) SCR PWM Analog

AF-5000 5 –100 380–480 Transistor PWM Analog

AF-5000+ 5–600 380–480 Transistor PWM Digital

AF-6000 15–300 480 SCR VVI Analog

AF-7000 20–600 480, 575 Transistor VVI Analog

AF-8000 3 and 5 480 SCR PWM Analog

Accutrol 100 1–5 230 Transistor PWM Analog

Accutrol 110 1–75 230, 460 Transistor PWM Digital 3

Accutrol 150 3–50 460 Transistor 4PWM Analog

Accutrol 200 3–250 460 Transistor 4PWM Analog

Accutrol 300 15–600 460, 575 Gate turn-off thyristor VVI Analog

Accutrol 400 3–150 460 Transistor PWM Digital

Accutrol 700 100–600 480 IGBT Vector PWM Digital

AF93 2–20 240, 480 Insulated gate bipolar transistor Vector PWM Digital

AF95 15–200 480 Insulated gate bipolar transistor PWM Digital

AF97 100–600 480 Insulated gate bipolar transistor Vector PWM Digital

AF91 Fractional to 10 240, 460 Insulated gate bipolar transistor PWM Digital

MVX9000 Fractional to 10 120, 240, 480 Insulated gate bipolar transistor PWM Digital

9000 Series Fractional to 1100 208–575 Insulated gate bipolar transistor PWM Digital

SVX9000 Fractional to 2000 208–575 Insulated gate bipolar transistor PWM Digital

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-71

Motor Control

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives—Solid-State Low Voltage

Replacement Capabilities

Model

Recommended

Replacement

Dynamatic Adjustable Frequency Drives

VLT-5 MVX9000

AF-1000 MVX9000

AF-1500

MVX9000

AF-1600 MVX9000

AF-2000 MVX9000

AF-300 (Responder) SV/HV/CP9000

AF-3000 SV/HV/CP9000

AF-5000 SV/HV/CP9000

AF-5000+ / IS-5000+ SV/HV/CP9000

AF-6000 SV/HV/CP9000

AF-7000 / IS-7000 SV/HV/CP9000

AF-8000 AF91SV

Westinghouse Adjustable Frequency Drives

Accutrol 100 MVX9000

Accutrol 110/Accuflow Jr.

MVX9000

Accutrol 150 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

Accutrol 200/Accuflow SVX/HVX/CPX9000

Accutrol 300 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

Accutrol 400 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

Accutrol 700 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

Cutler-Hammer Drives

AF91 MVX9000

AV91 MVX9000

AF93 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

AF95 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

AF97 SVX/HVX/CPX9000

SV9000 SVX9000

HV9000 HVX9000

CP9000 CPX9000

Eaton’s Electrical Services &

Systems (EESS) has trained

technicians nationwide. See

Tab 22 in this catalog for

further information about

EESS capabilities.

Technology Upgrades

The SVX9000 improves upon

the SV9000 with modular

construction and greater

program capability. Clean

power, 18-pulse

configurations are available to

meet IEEE-519 requirements

for electro-magnetic

compliance. The HVX9000

provides a simpler parameter

set geared toward the HVAC

industry, and the HVX

Intellipass provides automatic

bypass with 24 Vdc control.

Additionally, the MVX9000

gives customers a compact,

low-cost alternative to the

full-featured drives of 10 hp

or less. The same general

controls are available, with the

exception of closed-loop

(encoder) control. The

MVX9000 boasts a PLC-like

control in the form of a step

sequence program for

repeated process

applications.

These units combine digital

microprocessor control, a

user-friendly keypad, IGBT

technology, and a Windows®-

based programmer to provide

an adjustable frequency drive

that can be customized to

almost any application.

Note

1The AF-1500, Accutrol 110 and Accuflow

Jr. are identical units.

V12-T13-72 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives—Solid-State Low Voltage

Support Chart for Non-Current Vintage Products

Advanced Technology Services, 8200 N. University, Peoria, IL 61615, now provides support for these products.

Their toll-free number is 1-877-645-3606.

Definitions

PCB Repair

Printed circuit boards may be

returned to Advanced

Technology Services for

repair. All PCBs are upgraded

to the most

current revision at

the time of the repair.

Upgrade Kits

Kits are available to upgrade

the basic

performance of

certain vintage products.

Contact Advanced Technology

Services for more

information.

Service Depot Repairs

Entire assemblies may be

returned to

Advanced

Technology Services

for

repair, upgrade or

refurbishment.

Field Service

Eaton’s Electrical Services &

Systems (EESS) has trained

technicians nationwide. See

Ta b 2 2 in this catalog for

further information about

EESS capabilities.

Technical Support

The trained technicians at

Advanced Technology

Services are available to

provide assistance over

the telephone.

Spare Parts

Advanced Technology

Services main

tains a complete

inventory of spare parts.

Product Support Services

For all Product Support

Services for these “legacy”

products, contact Advanced

Technology Services at

1-877-645-3606. For technical

support with Eaton’s current

line of variable frequency

drives, contact the

Drives Technical Resource

Center at 1-800-322-4986.

Notes

1The AF-1500, Accutrol 110 and Accuflow

Jr. are identical units.

2No upgrades are available for Gate Turn-

off Thyristor (GTO) versions. Transistor

versions are identified by a leading “A1T”

or “A2T” in the model number.

3GTOs are not available as spare parts

for models below 100 hp.

Model

(See below for topic definitions)

PCB Repair Upgrade Kits Factory Repair Field Service Technical Support Spare Parts

Dynamatic Adjustable Frequency Drives

VLT-5

AF-1000

AF-1500 1■■■■■

AF-1600 ■■■■■

AF-2000

AF-300 (Responder)

AF-3000

AF-5000 ■■■■■

AF-5000+ / IS-5000+ ■■■■■

AF-6000

AF-7000 / IS-7000 ■■■■■

AF-8000

Westinghouse Adjustable Frequency Drives

Accutrol 100

Accutrol 110/Accuflow Jr. 1■■■■■

Accutrol 150 ■■ 2■■■ ■

Accutrol 200/Accuflow ■■ 2■■■ ■

Accutrol 300 ■■■■

■ 3

Accutrol 400 ■■■■■

Accutrol 700 ■■■■■ ■

Cutler-Hammer Drives

AF93

AF95 ■■■■■ ■

AF97 ■■■■■ ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-73

Motor Control

Synchronous—Relay or Solid-State Mark V Slipsyn for Brush and Brushless Motors

Contents

Description Page

Brush Type Relay Slipsyn Class

14-100 Field Application Panel

Product

Description,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-75

Brush Type Mark

Solid-State

Slipsyn Class 14-100 Field

Application Panel

Product

Description . . . .

V12-T13-77

Replacement

Capabilities,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-78

Brush Type Mark

Solid-State

Slipsyn Class 14-100 Low

Voltage Motor Starters

Product

Description,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-79

Brushless Type Relay Slipsyn

Class 14-100 Field Application

Panel

Product

Description . . . .

V12-T13-80

Replacement

Capabilities,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-81

Brushless Type Mark

Solid-

State Slipsyn Class 14-100 Field

Application Panel

Product

Description,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-82

Relay and Solid-State Slipsyn

Control

Further

Information,

Pricing

Information . . . .

V12-T13-83

Synchronous—Relay or

Solid-State Mark V

Slipsyn for Brush and

Brushless Motors

Product Description

Synchronous Motors

Polyphase synchronous

motors are used primarily to

obtain high pullout torques,

constant operating speed, or

generation of leading reactive

kVA for power factor (PF)

correction. To bring a motor

to a constant speed, DC

power is applied to a special

winding in a synchronous

motor. This winding is called

a field coil winding and is

controlled by “field control.”

Power (DC) for a brush type

motor is usually supplied with

the starter and entails using

an exciter. Power (DC) for a

brushless type motor is

supplied by an exciter

mounted on the motor.

Synchronous Motor Control

Synchronous motor “field

application control” generally

includes a synchronous

device to apply DC power to

the motor field circuit at the

optimum speed. It may also

include protective features

such as locked rotor

protection, failure to

synchronize, incomplete

sequence, field failure,

pullout protection, etc.

depending on the type of field

application control selected.

Relay Type vs. Solid-State

Type—Mark V

Relay Type

The relay type used the ASR

synchronizing relay. Inherent

in using the relay type are the

problems that are associated

with using contacts or

mechanical closing devices

such as arcing, spring and

bearing deterioration and

wear, dirty atmospheres, etc.

Solid-State—Mark V

The Mark V is 100% solid-

state and features a “soft-

turn-on” circuit that applies

DC field voltage to the motor

field. It enables all required

functions for correct

synchronization to be

accomplished without the

use of moving contacts or

mechanical closing devices.

With the Mark V, the static

exciter power supply is

always supplied and is part of

the “system.”

Also available as a modification

with the Mark V is a VAR or

power factor, DC field current

regulator. The regulator

consists of a printed circuit

board, auxiliary devices

and potentiometers for

adjustment.

Product History

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

Synchronous Motor Control

Brush type synchronous field

control was originally

available in the 1940s. Motor

starters for brushless

synchronous motors have

been offered since the late

1960s. Synchronous motors

can be medium voltage

(2300–7200V) or low voltage

(600V and below). A

synchronous motor starter

includes the basic motor

control PLUS the

synchronous control and

protection functions.

Typically, the basic motor

control and the field

application control are

mounted in separate

compartments within

the starter. Ratings of

synchronous control are in

terms of the maximum DC

field amperes required by the

motor. Current ratings are 45,

90, 135, 160, 200 or 270A

DC, through 6000 hp at 5 kV.

Relay and Solid-State Type

Control

Relay type Slipsyn was

introduced in 1947 and uses

the ASR synchronizing relay.

Forms of solid-state type

Slipsyn were introduced in

the late 1950s and early

1960s, but were not

completely solid-state and

had some of the operation

problems that the relay type

control encountered. These

were called Mark I and Mark

II Static Slipsyn. In 1989, the

Mark V Solid-State Slipsyn

field control was introduced.

Medium Voltage (AMPGARD®

)

Starters

The AMI AMPGARD

synchronous starter (1957–

1970) used a 60-inch deep

enclosure with the

synchronous control in the

low voltage section in the

front bottom two thirds of the

starter enclosure. The basic

motor control was located in

the rear bottom two thirds of

the enclosure, barriered off

from the low voltage section.

The AMI AMPGARD for

synchronous motors used the

ASR relay type control.

The LF AMPGARD (1962–

1988) primarily used the ASR

field application relay control.

Mark I and Mark II Static

Slipsyn were also used during

their availability periods. The

LF AMPGARD for synchronous

motors included the basic

induction motor control (ISO®

switch, contactor and starter

control) in the bottom half of

the structure.

V12-T13-74 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Synchronous—Relay or Solid-State Mark V Slipsyn for Brush and Brushless Motors

The upper half contained the

step-down

static excitation

transformer with current

limiting fuses, the Silicon

Controlled Rectifier (SCR)

type static exciter and the

synchronizing control and

motor field protection panel.

The SJ AMPGARD (1982–

2000) family of synchronous

control is very similar

to the

LF AMPGARD. Until the

availability

of the Mark V solid-

state synchronous control,

the SJ used the ASR relay

type field control. With the

advent of the

Mark

, most of

the synchronous starters

are

supplied with this type of

control. In both ASR and

Mark V control schemes,

the

synchronous gear is usually

mounted

in the top half of

the starter.

The SL AMPGARD (2000–

present) is similar to the SJ

AMPGARD but uses the

Mark V solid-state

synchronous controller,

exclusively.

Low Voltage Synchronous

Starters

Low voltage synchronous

starters are similar in nature

to high voltage synchronous

starters except in two

regards. High voltage

starters, unlike low voltage

starters, must isolate the low

voltage from the high voltage.

The components for the field

control are the same.

The second difference lies in

the primary disconnect used

in the starters. Low voltage

starters can be supplied with

no short-circuit protection,

with a non-fusible disconnect,

a fusible disconnect switch or

with a molded-case circuit

breaker. Low voltage

synchronous starters were

manufactured in the late

1940s with the introduction

of the ASR relay, until

September of 1989. In 1991,

the product was reintroduced

using the Mark V solid-state

field control.

Product History Time Line

V12-T13-73 ASR Relay Slipsyn (Brush Type)

Mark I Static Slipsyn (Brush Type)

Mark II Static Slipsyn (Brush Type)

V12-T13-78 Mark V Slipsyn

V12-T13-80 Brushless Motor Control

Page Product 1945 1955 1965 1975 1985 1995 2000 Present

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-75

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brush Type Relay Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

Relay Slipsyn Automatic

Field Application Panel

Product Description

Relay Field Panel

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Automatic Field Application

Control

The field application panel

provides Slipsyn automatic

field application identical

to that in complete

synchronous motor

starters. It is designed for

use in conjunction with a

primary line closing device

such as a circuit breaker or

a linestarter. One interlock

on the primary device is

used to actuate the field

application control. When

the motor accelerates to

proper speed for pull-in, the

field is automatically applied.

The controller is available

for floor mounting. Floor-

mounted cabinets are

NEMA 1 with hinged front

door and removable

rear plates.

Ty p i c a l S ch e m a t i c

Note

1Not supplied with 14-100 panel or static exciter.

Typical 14-100 Panel with Constant Static Exciter

(Optional) for use with Primary Motor Starter

V12-T13-76 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brush Type Relay Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

■

Shaded area denotes

obsolete or discontinued

products and services.

Information Required from

Customer for Upgrade

Evaluation

1. Original assembly

nameplate data including

general order “GO”

number as well as any

drawing numbers.

2. Complete motor data

including horsepower,

phase, voltage/Hz, RPM,

FLA, LRA, full-load DC

amperes, power factor,

excitation voltage,

induced field amperes

at 95% speed and at 0%

speed, recommended

discharge resistor ohms

and maximum time at

zero speed (locked rotor).

3. Excitation control detail

such as

“constant-

potential” or “adjustable-

potential.” Adjustable-

potential usually requires

a field rheostat (motor

field-resistor).

4. Detail on the motor’s

function such as the

application data and

other service conditions

such as duty-cycle, etc.

The cabinets contain the

following equipment:

1– Polarized slip frequency

field application relay

type ASR (FR) with half-

wave rectifier (REC).

1– Time relay with contacts

available for unloader

circuit (2TR).

1– Pullout relay and

transformer (PO).

1– Field contactor, two-pole

(FC).

1–

Damper winding

protective relay (SC).

1– Starting and field

discharge resistor

when size permits;

otherwise, provided for

separate mounting)

(1RES).

1– DC field ammeter, panel

type, semi-flush

mounted (DC AMM).

1– DC field ammeter shunt

(SH).

1– DC field failure

protection (FLA).

2– Auxiliary relays (2TRX),

(2MX).

1– Incomplete sequence

relay (IS).

Static Excitation Power

Supply Panel

Constant Potential Type

Power conversion AC to DC

units are designed for

individual synchronous

motor field excitation.

These units are convection

cooled, solid-state and are

completely assembled and

wired as a self-contained

package with a relay Slipsyn

automatic field application

control. The connections

necessary to the external

circuits are line leads, motor

leads, field connections and

control interconnection.

The static system consists

of a convection-cooled

silicon rectifier three-phase

full-wave bridge assembly,

a set of current limiting

fuses in the secondary side

of the transformer and a set

of surge protecting devices.

The transformer has

secondary taps that are

adjustable with four course

taps that provide

approximately 12%

adjustment per tap, and

three fine taps that

provide 4% adjustment

per tap.

Adjustable Potential Type

An adjustable potential

exciter is similar to the

constant potential exciter

except that it uses SCRs

and the voltage adjustment

is made with a potentiometer

mounted on the door.

Technology Upgrades

For Brush-Type, Relay-Panel

Slipsyn (Class 14-100)

Upgrades

New synchronous field

controllers using the latest

solid-state technology are

usually available. Upgrades

for primary starter and

contactor components may

also be available.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-77

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brush Type Mark V Solid-State Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

Slipsyn Automatic Field

Application Panel with

Static Exciter

Product Description

Mark V Field Controller

Automatic Field Application

Control

The Slipsyn panel provides

automatic field application

identical to that in complete

synchronous motor starters.

It is designed for use in

conjunction with a primary line

closing device, such as a

circuit breaker or a linestarter.

When the motor accelerates

to proper speed for pull-in, the

field is automatically applied.

The solid-state Mark V

Slipsyn controller will provide

the following protective

functions:

A. Locked rotor protection.

B. Incomplete sequence.

C. Failure to synchronize.

D. Fuse failure (Mark V).

E. Pullout protection.

F. DC current failure

protection.

Also the application of the DC

power to the motor field

windings is accomplished

without mechanically moving

parts, and the device features

a “soft-turn-on” circuit when

applying DC voltage to the

motor field.

Depending on the size of the

solid-state application panel,

the controller is available in

a NEMA 1 floor-mounted

enclosure or an AMPGARD

type cell construction.

In both designs, a hinged

front door with externally

ventilated heat sinks will

be provided.

The cabinets will contain

the following equipment:

1 – Step-down exciter

transformer—

three-phase (TX).

3 – Primary fuses (3 PRI).

3 – Secondary fuses (3 SEC).

1 – “SCR” power supply

panel.

1 – Synchronous control

board (CB).

1 – DC

ammeter—panel type

(DC AMM).

3 – “MOV” for surge

protection (MOV).

1 – Starting and field

discharge resistor (when

size permits; otherwise

provided for separate

mounting).

1 – Field failure relay (FLA).

1 – Incomplete SEQ Timer

(FLT).

1 – Start timer (SYTR).

1 – Potentiometer (P2).

Ty p i c a l S ch e m a t i c

Note

1Not supplied with Mark V.

PSC

1L21 1L22 1L23

_ _ AMPS

1x1

1x3

1x2

1x4

2x1

2x3

2x2

2x4

3x1

3x3

3x2

3x4

IH1 IH2 2HI 2H2 3H1 3H2

1L11 1L12 1L13

1L1 1L2 1L3

_ _ AMPS

3 PRI

FUSE

3 SEC

FUSE

MOV

1L31 1L32 1L33

QA2

CA2

KA2

CB2

KB2

CC2

KC2

CA1

KA1

CB1

KB1

QA1

QB2QB1

QC2QC1

CC1

KC1

TO CB

TO CB TO CB

TO CB

FLA

AMM

(–)

(+)

KQ4

CQ4

FIELD

MOTOR

R1 Q4

STARTING/DISCHARGE

RESISTOR

1RES

RES

+RECT

–

FLA

11A

START

STOP 233

3MX

M2 M3

FLA

11 14

FLT

TDO

KK1

ST1 ST2 SQ1 SQ1

RLY1 RLY3

SYTR

TDO

115

TO PRIMARY CONTROL CIRCUIT – 120 Vac

ON DELAY

.1 - 30 SEC

FLT

(SET 2 SEC LONGER THAN

ACCELERATION TIME)

SET @ .5 SEC

QA2

QB2

QC2

QA1

QB1

QC1

KA2

CA2

KB2

CB2

KC2

CC2

KA1

CA1

KB1

CB1

KC1

CC1

CQ4

KQ4

(WB)

AV2

AV1

VPF

115

IN–

IN+

ST1

RLY 1 RLY 3

ST2

SO1

SO2

TO 120 V CONTROL CIRCUIT

ON DELAY

.1 - 30 SEC

= REMOTE DEVICE

= TERM. BLOCK(S)

= CUST. TERM. BLK.

TO ac SUPPL Y

햲

V12-T13-78 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brush Type Mark V Solid-State Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

Replacement Capabilities—

Typical Solid-State

Components

Power Module, 200A, Three Required

Heat Sink

MOV

Snubber for Thyristor Stack

Main Synchronizing Control/

Protection Board

Note: Typical solid-state

components used in Mark V

Slipsyn—Refer to RPD 8855S for

renewal parts for synchronous

control.

Field Panel with Static Exciter

20 kW Maximum—Approximate Dimensions in Inches

Technology Upgrades

For Brush Type Mark V Solid-

State Slipsyn (Class 14-100)

Upgrades

New synchronous field

controllers using the latest

solid-state technology are

available. Replacements and

upgrades for primary starter

and contactor components

are also available.

Information Required from

Customer for Upgrade

Evaluation

1. Original assembly

nameplate data including

general order “GO”

number as well as any

drawing numbers.

2. Complete motor data

including horsepower,

phase, voltage/Hz, RPM,

FLA, LRA, full-load DC

amperes, power factor,

excitation voltage,

induced field amperes

at 95% speed and at 0%

speed, recommended

discharge resistor ohms

and maximum time at

zero speed (locked rotor).

3. Excitation control detail

such as

“constant-

potential” or “adjustable-

potential.” Adjustable-

potential usually requires

a field rheostat (motor

field-resistor).

4. Detail on the motor’s

function such as the

application data and

other service conditions

such as duty-cycle, etc.

Open Cell Floor Mounted — NEMA 1

Height Width Depth Height Width Depth

45 36 30 90 36 30

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-79

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brush Type Mark V Solid-State Slipsyn Class 14-200 LV Motor Starters

Synchronous—Brush

Type Mark V Solid-State

Slipsyn Class 14-200 LV

Motor Starter

600V, NEMA Size 8,

Synchronous Starter

Product Description

Slipsyn magnetic starters

provide reliable, automatic

starting of synchronous

motors. Automatic

synchronization is provided by

the Mark V Solid-State Field

Panel, which ensures

application of the field at

proper motor speed, and at a

favorable angular position of

stator and rotor poles. As a

result, line disturbance

resulting from synchronization

is reduced and effective motor

pull-in torque is increased.

Application of DC power to

motor field windings is

accomplished without

mechanically moving parts,

and the device features a

“soft-turn on” circuit when

applying DC voltage to the

motor field.

The solid-state Mark V Slipsyn

controller will provide the

following protective

functions:

A. Locked rotor protection.

B. Incomplete sequence.

C. Failure to synchronize.

D. Fuse failure (Mark V).

E. Pullout protection.

F. DC current failure

protection.

The cabinet will contain the

following:

1 – Primary starter full voltage

or reduced voltage.

1 – Ammeter shunt (when

required).

1 – Auxiliary relay for main

line contactor (when

required) (MX).

1 – Starting and field

discharge resistor (IRES).

1 – Current transformer for

AC ammeter through

NEMA Size 4; Sizes 5 and

larger use three current

transformers for overload

relays and AC ammeter.

1 – Set control circuit terminal

blocks.

3 – Type AN manual reset

thermal overload relay and

three heater elements

(OL).

1 – Step-down exciter

transformer—three-phase

(TX).

3 – Primary fuses (3 PRI).

3 – Secondary fuses (3 SEC).

1 – SCR power supply panel.

1 – Synchronous control

board (CB).

3 – MOV for surge protection

(MOV).

1 – Starting and field

discharge resistor (when

size permits; otherwise

provided for separate

mounting).

1 – AC ammeter, panel type

(AM).

1 – DC ammeter, panel type

(DC AMM).

1 – Exciter field

potentiometer (P2).

1 – Field failure relay (FLA).

1 – Incomplete SEQ Timer

(FLT).

1 – Start timer (SYTR).

Typical Schematic Full Voltage Starter, Class 14-200,

Non-Combination Type

Technology Upgrades

For Brush-Type Mark V Solid-

State Slipsyn (Class 14-200) Low

Voltage Motor Starter Upgrades

New synchronous field

controllers using the latest

solid-state technology are

usually available.

Replacements and upgrades

for primary starter and

contactor components are

also usually available.

Information Required from

Customer for Upgrade

Evaluation

1. Original assembly

nameplate data including

General Order “GO”

number as well as any

drawing numbers.

2. Complete motor data

including horsepower,

phase, voltage/Hz, RPM,

FLA, LRA, full-load DC

amperes, power factor,

excitation voltage,

induced field amperes

at 95% speed and at 0%

speed, recommended

discharge resistor ohms

and maximum time at

zero speed (locked rotor).

3. Excitation control detail

such as

“constant-

potential” or “adjustable-

potential.” Adjustable-

potential usually requires

a field rheostat (motor

field-resistor).

4. Detail on the motor’s

function such as the

application data and

other service conditions

such as duty-cycle, etc.

Note

1Remote device.

QA2

QB2

QC2

QA1

QB1

QC1

KA2

CA2

KB2

CB2

KC2

CC2

KA1

CA1

KB1

CB1

KC1

CC1

CQ4

KQ4

(WB)

VPF

AV1

AV2

PSC

SYNCHRONIZING AND CONTROL CIRCUIT

115

IN-

IN+

ST1

ST2

SQ1

SQ2

D1 TO 120V CONTROL CIRCUIT

RLY 1 RLY 3

11A

햲

STOP 2START

MX F

M2 M3

FLA

11 14

FLT

TDO

WX K

ST1

RLY1K1

ST2

SQ1

RLY3

SQ2

SYTR

TDO

115

ON DELAY

.1-30 SEC

(SET 2 SEC LONGER THAN

ACCELERATION TIME)

ON DELAY

.1-30 SEC SET @ .5 SEC

3SEC

FUSE

1L21 1L22 1L23

AMPS

1X1 1X3 1X21X4 2X12X3 2X2 2X4 3X1 3X3 3X2 3X4

3PRI

FUSE

1L1 1L2 1L3

1L11 1L12 1L13

AMPS

TO AC SUPPLY

1H1 1H2 2H1 2H2 3H1 3H2

1L31

TO CB

1L32 1L33

QA1

KA1

CA1

TO CB

QA2

KA2

CA2

TO CB

QB1

KB1

CB1

TO CB

QB1

KB2

CB2

TO CB

QC1

KC1

CC1

TO CB

QC1

KC2

CC2

FLA

AMM

(-)

(+)

RES

1RES

TO CB

R1 R3

STARTING/DISCHARGE

RESISTOR

F1 F2

MOTOR

FIELD

1L1

1L2

1L3

3 PRI

FUSE

SUPPLY

PRI FUSE

3 AMP

CPT

X1 X2

H1 H2

FLA

FLT

햲

V12-T13-80 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Synchronous — Brushless Type Relay Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

Relay Slipsyn Automatic

Field Application Panel

Brushless Field Panel

Product Description

This field application panel

provides DC power to the

exciter field and is designed

for use in conjunction with

a primary line closing device

such as a contactor motor

starter or a circuit breaker

motor starter. A normally

open electrical interlock on

the primary device is used to

actuate the field application

control. This panel utilizes

electromechanical devices to

apply DC power to the motor

exciter field circuit.

Note: The power rectifiers for the

motor field circuit and automatic

synchronizer are mounted on the

synchronous motor rotor.

Brushless Synchronous Control

The controller can be

supplied with or without

enclosure. Panel mounted

or open cell are suitable for

mounting within other

larger enclosures.

The cabinet or open panel

or open cell contains the

following equipment:

1 – Solar transformer (1 CPT).

1 – Power factor relay (PO).

1 – Auto-transformer (AT)

Powerstat.

1 – Damper winding

protection relay (DP).

1 – Field contactor (FC).

1 – Volt trap (VT).

1 – Rectifier (REC).

1 – Sequence relay (TR).

1 – Damper winding

protection hold-in relay

(DPX)—if required.

2 – Fuses (SEC FU),

(2 SEC FU).

1 – DC ammeter—panel type

(DC AMM).

Typical Starter Schematic

Notes

1Starter devices not supplied with field panel.

Devices shown without a a constitute 14-100 panel.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-81

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brushless Type Relay Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

Replacement Capabilities—Typical Components

Rectifier

Damper Winding Protection Relay

Volt Trap

Pullout/Power Factor Relay

Powerstat

Note: Typical components used in

Relay Slipsyn Brushless Control—

Refer to RPD 8855S for renewal

parts for synchronous control.

Technology Upgrades

For Brushless-Type Relay-Panel

Slipsyn (Class 14-100) Upgrades

New synchronous field

controllers using the latest

solid-state technology are

available. Replacements and

upgrades for primary starter

and contactor components

are also available.

Information Required from

Customer for Upgrade

Evaluation

1. Original assembly

nameplate data including

general order “GO”

number as well as any

drawing numbers.

2. Complete motor data

including horsepower,

phase, voltage/Hz, RPM,

FLA, LRA, full-load DC

amperes, power factor,

excitation voltage,

induced field amperes

at 95% speed and at 0%

speed, and maximum

time at zero speed

(locked rotor).

3. Excitation control detail

such as

“constant-

potential” or “adjustable-

potential.” Adjustable-

potential usually requires

a field rheostat (motor

field-resistor).

4. Detail on the motor’s

function such as the

application data and

other service conditions

such as duty-cycle, etc.

V12-T13-82 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Synchronous—Brushless Type Mark V Solid-State Slipsyn Class 14-100 Panel

Slipsyn Automatic Field

Application Panel with

Static Exciter

Product Description

Automatic Field

Application Control

The field application panel

provides Slipsyn automatic

field application identical

to that in complete

synchronous motor starters.

It is designed for use in

conjunction with a primary

line closing device such as

a circuit breaker or a

linestarter. Automatic

synchronization is provided

by the Mark V solid-state

field panel, which ensures

application of the field at

proper motor speed and

at a favorable angular

position of stator and rotor

poles. As a result, line

disturbance resulting from

synchronization is reduced

and effective motor pull-in

torque is increased.

Application of DC power

to motor field windings is

accomplished without

mechanically moving parts,

and the device features a

“soft-turn-on” circuit when

applying DC field voltage to

the motor field.

This unit also comes

standard with a VAR or

power factor, DC field

current regulator. The VAR

regulator controls the AC

reactive current flow out of

the motor during varying load

conditions by varying the

motor field excitation. The PF

regulator controls the motor

power factor under varying

load conditions by varying the

motor field excitation. The

DC field current regulator

compensates for the motor

field resistance as the motor

field heats up by increasing

the motor field voltage.

Note: Power factor regulation—

cannot provide regulation below

50% of rated voltage and/or 25%

of rated current. Regulation

cannot be accomplished on light

loads, i.e., less than 20% load.

Mark V Brushless Field Controller

The solid-state Mark V Slipsyn

controller will provide the

following protective

functions:

A. Locked rotor protection.

B. Incomplete sequence.

C. Failure to synchronize.

D. Fuse failure (Mark V).

E. Pullout protection.

F. DC current failure

protection.

This control is available in a

NEMA 1 floor-mounted

enclosure or an AMPGARD

type cell construction. In both

designs, a hinged front door

with externally ventilated heat

sinks will be provided.

The cabinets will contain the

following equipment:

1 – Step-down exciter

transformer—three-phase

(TX).

3 – Primary fuses (3 PRI).

3 – Secondary fuses (3 SEC).

1 – SCR power supply panel.

1 – Synchronous control

board (CB).

3 – MOV for surge protection

(MOV).

1 – AC ammeter, panel type

(AM).

1 – DC ammeter, panel type

(DC AMM).

4 – Potentiometer (P2, P3,

P4, P5).

1 – Field failure relay (FLA).

1 – Incomplete SEQ Timer

(FLT).

1 – Start timer (SYTR).

1 – MP-3000 without RTD

module.

1 – DP-4000.

1 – VAR/PF/DC field current

board (CB1).

1 – Auto/manual selector

switch (SSI).

1 – Timer (AUTO).

1 – Pullout relay (PO).

Approximate Dimensions in Inches

Technology Upgrades

For Brushless-Type Mark V

Solid-State Slipsyn

(Class 14-100) Upgrades

New synchronous field

controllers using the latest

solid-state technology are

available. Replacements and

upgrades for primary starter

and contactor components

are also available.

Information Required from

Customer for Upgrade

Evaluation

1. Original assembly

nameplate data including

general order “GO”

number as well as any

drawing numbers.

2. Complete motor data

including horsepower,

phase, voltage/Hz, RPM,

FLA, LRA, full-load DC

amperes, power factor,

excitation voltage,

induced field amperes

at 95% speed and at 0%

speed, and maximum

time at zero speed

(locked rotor).

3. Excitation control detail

such as

“constant-

potential” or “adjustable-

potential.” Adjustable-

potential usually requires

a field rheostat (motor

field-resistor).

4. Detail on the motor’s

function such as the

application data and

other service conditions

such as duty-cycle, etc.

Open Cell Floor Mounted—NEMA 1

Height Width Depth Height Width Depth

45 36 30 90 36 30

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-83

Motor Control

Synchronous—Relay or Solid-State Mark V Slipsyn for Brush and Brushless Motors

Identifying Renewal Parts

Renewal parts data for the

entire history of synchronous

control is contained in RPD

8855S, which provides the

proper identification of

standard parts that may be

required under normal

operation:

1. Identify the design of

synchronous control

(Relay, Mark I, Mark II

or Mark V Slipsyn) from

the synchronous panel

nameplate.

2. Now that you have

identified the type of the

synchronous control,

determine from the

photographs in RPD

8855S which parts are

required and identify

them by style number.

3. Because many starters

are supplied to meet

specific customer

requirements, other

parts not shown in

RPD 8855S might

occasionally be needed.

Price and availability of

parts not listed may be

obtained by providing a

complete description of

the part, along with the

complete data on the

starter nameplate, which

is found in the low

voltage area. Be sure to

include the following:

ratings, shop order and

diagram reference.

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Publication

Number Description

RP04304009E Common Replacement Parts for Mark V Synchronous Field Controller

RPD 8855S Renewal Parts Data for Synchronous Control

TD.48A.01.T.E Descriptive Bulletin for AMPGARD Starters

IL 17097 Instruction Leaflet for Relay Slipsyn

IB 48008 Instruction Leaflet for Solid-State Slipsyn

IB 48009 Instruction Leaflet for Mark V VAR/PF/DC Field Current Regulator

V12-T13-84 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Medium Voltage Starters

Contents

Description Page

AMI AMPGARD

Product Description,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-88

LF Air AMPGARD

Product Description,

Replacement Capabilities,

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-89

SL and SJ Vacuum

AMPGARD

Product Description,

Replacement

Capabilities. . . .

V12-T13-91

Technology

Upgrades . . . . .

V12-T13-92

Further Information,

Pricing

Information. . . .

V12-T13-96

AMPGARD

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly

(AMI Vintage), 5000V 200A, 2500V 200A,

2500/5000V 400A (LF-Air Vintage)

Product Description

A medium voltage starter is an

assembly

used to control and

protect an alternating current

(AC) electric motor rated at

2300, 4160 or 7200V. The

controlling function is provided

by a magnetically held

contactor. The overload

protection is provided by an

overload relay of some type,

and the short-circuit protection

is provided by a non-load break

fused disconnect switch. 400A

starters are typically mounted

two-high in a 90-inch high

enclosure. 800A starters are

mounted one-high.

Product History

The AMPGARD starter line

originated in the early 1940s

and has undergone two major

design changes and one

major evolution.

Prior to the introduction of

the AMI, the AMPGARD was

simply a fused motor starter

in a cabinet with no

disconnect switch. It was

built in the early 1940s

through the 1950s. There

was no standard design.

The AMI AMPGARD (1950s

through 1960s) was a

standardized design. The AMI

was one starter per structure

designed to cover all ratings

and incor

porated a disconnect

switch (ISO-Switch)

in the

upper compartment and

either an air or oil contactor in

the bottom compartment.

In the mid 1960s, a full line of

starters was introduced,

tailored to the horsepower

requirement of the motor and

using the LF air contactor.

The starter incorporated the

ISO-Switch and power fuses

into the same cell as the air

contactor. Starters were one-,

two- or three-high per

structure, depending on the

rating required. The ratings of

the LF AMPGARD were 200,

400 and 700A.

Cutler-Hammer manufactured

MV motor

control from 1966–

1976. It was Bulletin 9950

Series, stacked two-high,

with no

specific trade name

(such as AMPGARD).

The manufacturing facility

moved from Buffalo, NY, to

Asheville, NC, in 1978.

In the 1980s with the advent

of vacuum technology, the LF

air contactor design

was

discontinued. The SJ vacuum

contactor

was matched with a

fused isolation switch. Now

two current ratings are

offered — 400 amperes, one-

or two- high, and 800

amperes, one-high. Starters

are sized per the motor

horsepower and full load

amperes.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-85

Motor Control

Medium Voltage Starters

Product History Time Line

Catalog Number Selection

Old Catalog Numbering System—Contactors Only

Old Catalog Numbering System—Starters (with Isolating Switch, Power Fuses, Contactor, etc.)

Page Product 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 Present

AMPGARD OIL

AMPGARD AH

V12-T13-88 AMI AMPGARD

V12-T13-89, LF Air

V12-T13-90 – 25L2 200A

– 50L2 200A

– 25/50L4 400A

– 25/50L7 700A

V12-T13-91 SJ Vacuum

– SJA 400A (roll-out)

– SJA 800A (roll-out)

– SJS 400A (slide-out)

V12-T13-91 SL Vacuum

– SLW 400A (roll-out)

– SLF 400A (slide-out)

V12-T13-93 SLB (bolted)

SLS (stab)

Classic

AMPGARD

Generation

AMPGARD

LF 25 H 4 3 0

Normally closed polesNormally open poles2 = 200A

4 = 400A

7 = 700A

8 = 800A

H = Air break

V = Vacuum

J = Vacuum

LF = Air break

SJ = Vacuum

25 = 2500V

33 = 3300V

50 = 5000V

72 = 7200V

Normally closed poles

W = Bottle

M = Metric bottle

(obsolete)

SJ A 5 0 V W 4 3 0

Normally opened poles

4 = 400A

8 = 800A

V = Vacuum break

25 = 2500V

33 = 3300V

50 = 5000V

72 = 7200V

SJ = Vacuum A = Roll-out

O = OEM design

S = Slide-out

2 = Non-load break,

fused switch

1 = Non-load break,

non-fused switch

L = Air break

V = Vacuum

J = Vacuum

2 = 200A

4 = 400A

7 = 700A

11 – 2 0 2 – 25 L 2

25 = 2500V

33 = 3300V

50 = 5000V

72 = 7200V

0 = Non-reversing

1 = Reversing

10 = Manual

11 = Magnetic

13 = Wound rotor

14 = Synchronous

17 = Air conditioning

2 = Full voltage

3 = Solid-state

4 = Resistor

5 = Reactor

6 = RV autotransformer

7 = RV part winding

8 = RV wye-delta

9 = FV multispeed

V12-T13-86 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Medium Voltage Starters

Old Catalog Numbering System—Starters (with Isolating Switch, Power Fuses, Contactors, etc.)

Old Catalog Numbering System—Contactors Only

Voltage Class

E= 2400V, 60 Hz

G= 4160V, 60 Hz

K= 6900V, 60 Hz

L= 3300V, 60 Hz

Contactor

Ampere Rating

2 = 200A

4 = 400A

7 = 700A

8 = 800A

H = Air break (obsolete)

V = Vacuum break roll-out

S = Vacuum break

slide-out

S 202 S 4 G

Type of Starter

202 = FV non-reversing

212 = FV reversing

502 = Reactor

602 = Autotransformer

702 = Part winding

802 = Wye-delta

902 = Multispeed

Enclosure

S= NEMA 1

A= NEMA 1A

J= NEMA 12

R= NEMA 3

H= Air break

S= Vacuum, slide-out (standard)

V= Vacuum, roll-out (standard)

E= Vacuum, slide-out (OEM)

D= Vacuum, slide-out (with fingers)

T= Vacuum, slide-out (with long harness)

R= 50L2 vacuum retrofit

1 = 120V coil, 50/60 Hz

2 = 240V coil, 50/60 Hz

T1 = CPT, standard VA

T2 = CPT, 2 kVA

2 = 200A, air-break or 50L2 retrofit

4 = 400A, air-break

4 = 400A, Vacuum

7 = 700A, Air-break

8 = 800A, Vacuum

L= With line-fingers

or terminals

N= Without line-fingers

or terminals

F= With main fuse

provisions

N= Without main fuse

provisions

3 = Three-pole

2 = Two-pole

Models “A” & “B” Model “C”

E= 2300/2400 Vac 60 Hz A= 2400 Vac 60 Hz

Y= 3000 Vac 60 Hz B= 3000 Vac 60 Hz

F= 3300/3600 Vac 60 Hz C= 3300 Vac 60 Hz

G= 4000/4160 Vac 60Hz D= 3600 Vac 60 Hz

H= 4600/4800 Vac 60 Hz E= 4160 Vac 60 Hz

6000/63000 Vac

60 Hz F= 4800 Vac 60 Hz

K= 6600/6900 Vac 60 Hz G= 5500 Vac 60 Hz

T= 2000 Vac 50 Hz H= 6000 Vac 60 Hz

J= 2300 Vac 50 Hz J= 6300 Vac 60 Hz

L= 3300 Vac 50 Hz K= 6600 Vac 60 Hz

V= 3600 Vac 50 Hz L=

6900/7200 Vac

60 Hz

N= 4000 Vac 50 Hz M= 2400 Vac 50 Hz

P= 4600 Vac 50 Hz N= 3000 Vac 50 Hz

S= 6000 Vac 50 Hz P= 3300 Vac 50 Hz

M= 6600 Vac 50 Hz Q= 3600 Vac 50 Hz

X= Unknown voltage R= 4160 Vac 50 Hz

S= 4800 Vac 50 Hz

T= 5500 Vac 50 Hz

U= 6000 Vac 50 Hz

V= 6300 Vac 50 Hz

W= 6600 Vac 50 Hz

6900/7200 Vac

50 Hz

Z= Unknown voltage

MAN = Main

FWD = Forward

RVS = Reverse

RNR = Reactor

RNA = Autotransformer

BAR = Shorting contactor

SLW = Slow two-winding motor

FST = Fast two-winding motor

SLS = Slow single-winding motor

FAS = Fast single-winding motor

PWA = Part-winding motor, 1st contactor

PWB = Part-winding motor, 2nd contactor

PFC = Power factor capacitor contactor

XXX = Undefined application

V MAN 3 F L 4 A 1 – T1

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-87

Motor Control

Medium Voltage Starters

New Catalog Numbering System—SL Contactors Only

New Catalog Numbering System—SL Starters Only

0 = None NC poles2 = 2NO poles

3 = 3NO poles

SL = SL contactor Volts

50 = 5000

72 = 7200

NEMA Size

2 = 200A

4 = 400A

Contactor Type/Rating

G= 200A, roll-out

W= 400A, roll-out

K= 200A, slide-out

F= 400A, slide-out

L= 200A, narrow-design with fingers

N= 400A, narrow-design with fingers

P= 200A, narrow-design without fingers

X= 400A, narrow-design without fingers

B= 200A, open/standalone

C= 400A, open/standalone

SL 50 W 4 3 0

Enclosure Type

A= No enclosure (NEMA 1 doors)

B= Type 1 general purpose

C= Type 1 with gasketed doors

D= Type 2 drip shield

E= Type 12 dust-tight

F= Type 3R outdoor non-walk-in

G= Type 3R outdoor non-walk-in, 72-inch high

H= Type 3R outdoor walk-in

J= Type 1 half-high (NEMA 1 only)

K= Type 1 half-high with gasketed door

L= No enclosure (NEMA 3/12 doors)

Disconnect Switch

S= Isolation switch

A= Mechanical future with cover plate

F= Electrical future with cover plate

G= Electrical future with isolation plate

P= No isolation switch, cover plate only

Synchronous Type

0 = Non-synchronous

1 = Brush-type solid-state panel (Mark V)

3 = Brush-type relay panel (no longer available)

4 = Brushless-type relay panel

5 = Brushless-type solid-state

Motor Type

1 = Induction, single-speed

2 = Induction, two-speed, two-winding

3 = Induction, two-speed, single-winding

4 = Synchronous

6 = Wound rotor

7 = Non-motor feeder (transformer, caps, etc.)

Starter Type

2 = FVNR

3 = FVR

4 = RVSS

5 = RV reactor-type

6 = RVAT

7 = RV reversing, reactor-type

8 = RVAT reversing

9 = RVSS reversing

X = FV with auxiliary special use three-pole contactor

(without mechanical interlock, with load panel)

Contactor Type/Rating

F= 400A vacuum, slide-out

W= Vacuum, roll-out

N= 400A vacuum, narrow-design with stabs

X= 400A vacuum, narrow-design without stabs

K= 200A vacuum, slide-out

G= 200A vacuum, roll-out

L= 200A vacuum, narrow-design with stabs

P= 200A vacuum, narrow-design without stabs

Voltage

A= 2400 Vac 60 Hz

B= 3000 Vac 60 Hz

C= 3300 Vac 60 Hz

D= 3600 Vac 60 Hz

E= 4160 Vac 60 Hz

F= 4800 Vac 60 Hz

G= 5500 Vac 60 Hz

H= 6000 Vac 60 Hz

J= 6300 Vac 60 Hz

K= 6600 Vac 60 Hz

L= 6900/7200 Vac 60 Hz

M= 2400 Vac 50 Hz

N= 3000 Vac 50 Hz

P= 3300 Vac 50 Hz

Q= 3600 Vac 50 Hz

R= 4160 Vac 50 Hz

S= 4800 Vac 50 Hz

T= 5500 Vac 50 Hz

U= 6000 Vac 50 Hz

V= 6300 Vac 50 Hz

W= 6600 Vac 50 Hz

X= 6900/7200 Vac 50 Hz

Z= Unknown voltage

W 2 1 0 S B A

V12-T13-88 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

AMI AMPGARD Starters (Medium Voltage)

AMI AMPGARD

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

AMI AMPGARD Starter

Product Description

The AMI design AMPGARD

starter introduced in 1957 was

a complete line of starters for

magnetic control of squirrel

cage, wound rotor and

synchronous motors. The AMI

was the first front-accessible

starter and was available with

air break (Type H) or oil

immersed (Type K) contactors.

The standard AMI for full

voltage starting was 30 inches

deep, 38 inches wide and 90

inches high. All components

were accessible from the front

through three doors that

opened into separate

compartments. The top

compartment enclosed the

isolating switch and current

limiting power fuses. The

middle compartment enclosed

the AC low voltage control

panel and behind it the CTs.

The bottom compartment

housed the contactor.

Note: The pre-AMI design was a

rear-access assembly with two

compartments—current limiting

fuses on the top and the

contactor below.

Ratings (Maximum)

400A 1500 hp at 2500V;

2500 hp at 5000V.

Chronology

The AMI design AMPGARD

was manufactured from 1957

until 1970 at the General

Control Division in Buffalo, NY,

and Westinghouse

Manufacturing and Repair

(M&R) facilities around the

country. The air contactor was

available through 1966. The oil

contactor was available

through 1970.

Replacement Capabilities

The AMI vintage is obsolete

but upgrading to the latest

vacuum technology with a

cell-retrofill solution is

available. See Technology

Upgrades for further

information.

Add-On Structure

New add-on vacuum

structures as an extension to

the AMI type structure may

be connected directly to the

main bus without a transition

section using special bus

links. Contact your local Eaton

Field Sales office.

Technology Upgrades

Standard AMI 36-Inch Wide

Vacuum Starter Cell-Retrofill

This kit includes a standard

full-voltage non-reversing

vacuum starter in a welded

cell assembly with horizontal

top barriers and deep flanged

doors. Optional components

include a new electronic

motor protection relay

MP-3000 and electronic

meter DP-4000. It will retrofit

the AMI designs that are

at least 36 inches wide and

30 inches deep. The cell is

45 inches high.

Standard AMI 36-Inch Wide

Vacuum Starter Cell-

Retrofill Style Number

Narrow AMI 30-Inch Wide

Vacuum Starter Cell-Retrofill

This kit includes a standard full-

voltage non-reversing vacuum

starter in a welded cell

assembly with horizontal top

barriers and deep flanged

doors. Optional components

include a new electronic

motor protection relay

MP-3000 and electronic

meter DP-4000. It will retrofit

the AMI designs that are at

least 30 inches wide and

30 inches deep. The cell is

58 inches high.

Narrow AMI 30-Inch Wide

Vacuum Starter Cell-

Retrofill Style Number

AMI Starter Cell-Retrofill

Note

1Upper filler cover may require field modification.

Description

Style

Number

SJ Contactor 2147A95G41

SL Contactor 2147A95G61

Description

Style

Number

SJ Contactor 2147A95G42

SL Contactor 2147A95G62

Standard

Narrow

G42

G62

G41

G61

Replacement Vacuum Starter Cell with all

New Controls

New Filter

Strips 1

Existing Starter Structure

to be Stripped before Cell Retrofit

Westinghouse Type “H,” “AH”

or other Structure

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-89

Motor Control

LF Air AMPGARD Starters (Medium Voltage)

LF Air AMPGARD

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

The LF Air-Break Design

AMPGARD Starter

Product Description

The LF air-break design

AMPGARD starter was

introduced in 1962. The

LF design introduced the

component-to-component

circuitry concept. This design

greatly reduced the current-

carrying connections and

allowed for significant space

savings.

The 25L2 and 50L2 floor-

mounted NEMA 1 structures

were 26 inches wide x 30

inches deep x 90 inches high.

The 25L2 came in 1, 2 or 3

starters per structure. The

50L2 came in 1 or 2 starters

per structure.

The 25L4 and 50L4 floor-

mounted NEMA 1 starters

were 36 inches wide x 30

inches deep x 90 inches high.

These 400A starters could

have been mounted two-high

per structure.

The 25L7 and 50L7 floor-

mounted NEMA 1 starters

were 40 inches wide x 30

inches deep x 90 inches high.

These 700A starters were

mounted one per vertical

structure.

Ratings (Maximum)

200, 400 and 700A 2500 hp at

2500V; 4500 hp at 5000V.

Chronology

The LF air-break design

starter was introduced in

1962, first with the 2500V,

200A starter, then with the

5000V design and the 400

and 700A ratings. The

starters were built in Buffalo,

NY, until the operation was

transferred to Asheville, NC,

in 1978, where it was

discontinued in the late 1980s.

Replacement Capabilities

Renewal and Replacement Parts

for LF Design Starters

Refer to RPD 8855A for

identifying the parts needed.

Among the parts available

are:

●Current and potential

transformers

●Control transformers

●Fuses

●O/L relays and heaters

●Isolation switches

●Some air-break

contactor parts

Technology Upgrades

Add-On Vacuum Starter

Structures

New add-on vacuum

structures as an extension to

the LF type starter assembly

may be connected directly to

the main bus without a

transition section.

50L4 (400A) Vacuum

Replacement Contactor

For replacing an existing

400A LF air contactor with

the directly interchangeable

400A vacuum contactor.

50L4 Vacuum Replacement (Front)

50L4 Vacuum Replacement (Rear)

400A Air-to-Vacuum

Contactor Replacement

Note: Style numbers listed above

identify a basic contactor that

might not include other available

accessories that were specified

on a customer order. Contact

factory with original general order

number starter drawing number

and date of manufacture for

assistance.

400A Air-to-Vacuum Starter

Cell Kit

Complete full-voltage, non-

reversing, induction, vacuum

AMPGARD motor starter,

400A, 7200V maximum, for

mounting in existing 36-inch

wide enclosure. Includes

main contactor, isolation

switch, three power fuses,

MP-3000 motor protection

without RTD module, three-

phase current transformer,

vertical bus, high and low

voltage doors, and welded

cell assembly for mounting

in existing 36-inch wide

enclosure.

400A Air-to-Vacuum Starter

Cell Kit

Completely New Starter Cell

Description

Style

Number

Basic contactor 2300/120V,

750 VA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G01

SL contactor 2147A50G01

Basic contactor 2300/120V,

2 kVA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G02

SL contactor 2147A50G02

Basic contactor 4160/120V,

600 VA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G03

SL contactor 2147A50G03

Basic contactor 4160/120V,

2 kVA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G04

SL contactor 2147A50G04

Description

Style

Number

Slide-out with SJ 2147A95G01

Roll-out with SJ 2147A95G02

Slide-out with SL 2147A95G03

Roll-out with SL 2147A95G04

V12-T13-90 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

LF Air AMPGARD Starters (Medium Voltage)

50L7 Vacuum Retrofit

700A Air-to-Vacuum

Conversion Kits

These kits will convert an

existing full-voltage non-

reversing 700A air break

starter to vacuum.

700A Air-to-Vacuum

Conversion Kit

25L2 Vacuum Replacement

Contactor

25L2 Vacuum Replacement—

Front View

25L2 Vacuum Replacement—

Rear View

This solution uses the latest

technology “SL” contactor

and is designed to replace

vintage 25L2, 2500V, 200A,

1962 air-break contactors.

Description

Style

Number

450–630A maximum 2147A95G31

720A maximum 2147A95G32

50L2 Air-to-Vacuum Retrofit Kit

This kit replaces the out-of-

production 5000V, 200A

air-break contactor with an

SJ vacuum contactor, for

starters built after 1974

with ISO-Switch shutter

mechanism mounted

in the cell. The customer

keeps the existing starter

cell and isolation switch and

modifies the cell to accept

the SJ contactor that is

mechanically interlocked

with the isolation switch.

The rating remains 200A.

50L2 Air-to-Vacuum

Retrofit Kit

Ampacity upgrade to 320A

design for pre-1974 50L2

retrofit kits available.

Metering and Protective

Relay Upgrades

IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure

This kit is for mounting IQ

family products. Includes

standard AMPGARD structure

construction to be used as a

lineup extension. Each 90-

inch high x 30-inch deep

section comes with two

doors, each with a works-in-a-

drawer drawout panel. Each

door has a maximum of three

standard IQ cutouts with

device panels. Supplied with

or without IQ and PB devices.

(Photo left shows two

auxiliary sections with

optional bus enclosure,

IQ and PB devices.)

IQ Floor-Mounted Upgrade

MP-3000 and DP-4000

upgrades used for upgrading

overload-relay technology from

“Type-A,” IQ 2000A, IQ

2000B or IQ 1000II to the

latest technology. Also

upgrades with a new,

slideout, LV control panel.

The kit includes:

●Typical starter schematic

●0.50-inch deep, flange LV

door with three cut-outs for

new devices

●Works-in-a-drawer slide-out

panel for LV control devices

Metering and Protective

Relay Upgrades

Works-in-a-Drawer Metering and Protective Relay LV Device Panel

Description

Style

Number

200A maximum 2147A95G30

Description

Style

Number

Auxiliary section with

cutouts only. 10-inch

wide x 30-inch deep x

90-inch high (does not

include bus enclosure,

IQ or PB devices)

2147A95G35

Description

Style

Number

DP-4000 and MP-3000

(without RTD)

2147A95G37

MP-3000

(without RTD) only

2147A95G39

DP-4000 only 2147A95G48

IQ 300 only 2147A95G49

Current Transformer Shorting

Terminal Blocks (when specified)

Routing of

Control

Wire in

Wire Channel

Interposing

Control Relay

DIN Rail Mounted

Wiring is Protected

Between Low Voltage

Panel and Hinged Low

Voltage Door

Blank Device Panel

Indicating Lights and

Pushbuttons Rear View

MP-3000 Rear View

Predrilled Holes for

Additional Control Devices

Rear of 1/4 Turn Fastener

Note: Low voltage door is

hinged to slide-out control

panel.

Low Voltage Panel Completely Extended

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-91

Motor Control

SL and SJ Vacuum AMPGARD Starters (Medium Voltage)

Classic AMPGARD

SL and SJ Vacuum

AMPGARD

Originally a Westinghouse

Product

SJ Vacuum AMPGARD Assembly

Product Description

The SJ vacuum contactor was

designed and engineered

specifically for use in

AMPGARD starters. The

contactor is a low-chop design

that permits application

matching of the starter to the

motor for 2200–7200V and

ratings of 400 and 800A. The

400A contactor is available in

both slide-out and roll-out

configurations. The 800A

contactor is available in the

roll-out design only. The SJ

AMPGARD is a horsepower

specific starter design that

uses the component-to-

component circuitry concept.

The full-voltage 400A rating in a

NEMA 1 enclosure is 36 inches

wide x 30 inches deep x

90 inches high. These 400A

starters are mounted one- or

two-high per structure. The

800A rating in an enclosure is

40 inches wide x 30 inches

deep x 90 inches high in a

one-high construction for a

full-voltage starter.

Ratings (Maximum)

400 and 800A, 3000 hp at

2500V; 5500 hp at 5000V;

8000 hp at 7200V.

Chronology

The SJ vacuum design

AMPGARD starter

was

introduced in 1982 with the

400A rating. The 800A rating

followed in 1987. With the

introduction of the vacuum

contactor, the air-break starter

has been gradually phased out

and is rarely specified in an

assembly. The starters are built

in Asheville, NC.

AMPGARD assemblies were

made available with the new

SL Contactor in late 1999.

Except for the 400A

frame contactor, SJ and SL

AMPGARD assemblies are

virtually identical.

Replacement Capabilities

Renewal and Replacement Parts

for SJ Design Starters

Refer to RP.48J.01.T.E for

identifying the parts needed.

Common Replacement Parts for

SL Design Starters

Refer to RP02003002E

for identifying the parts

needed.

Add-On Vacuum Starter

Structures

New add-on vacuum

structures as an extension to

the SJ type structure may be

connected directly to the

main bus without a transition

section. Contact your local

Eaton Field Sales office.

Replacement Vacuum

Contactors

New replacement vacuum

break contactors are available

for all SJ model ratings.

400A SL Roll-Out Replacement (Front)

400A SL Roll-Out Replacement (Rear)

400A Vacuum Roll-out

Replacement Contactor

Note: Style numbers listed above

identify a basic contactor that

might not include other available

accessories that were specified

on a customer order. Contact

factory with original general order

number, starter drawing number,

and date of manufacture for

assistance.

400A SL Slide-Out Replacement (Front)

400A SL Slide-Out Replacement (Rear)

Description

Style

Number

Basic contactor 2300/120V,

750 VA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G01

SL contactor 2147A50G01

Basic contactor 2300/120V,

2 kVA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G02

SL contactor 2147A50G02

Basic contactor 4160/120V,

750 VA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G03

SL contactor 2147A50G03

Basic contactor 4160/120V,

2 kVA transformer:

SJ contactor 2147A45G04

SL contactor 2147A50G04

V12-T13-92 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

SL and SJ Vacuum AMPGARD Starters (Medium Voltage)

Completely New Starter Cell

400A Vacuum Starter Cell Kit

The 400A vacuum starter cell

kit is used to fill a blank cell in

an SL or SJ AMPGARD

assembly or to completely

replace an existing 400A SL or

SJ starter.

It is a complete full-voltage,

non-

reversing, induction,

vacuum AMPGARD

motor

starter, 400A, 7200V

maximum, for mounting in

existing 36-inch wide

enclosure. It includes main

contactor, isolation switch

three power fuses, MP-3000

motor protection without

RTD module, three-phase

current transformer, vertical

bus, high and low

voltage

doors, and welded cell

assembly

for mounting in

existing 36-inch

wide customer enclosure.

400A Vacuum Starter

Retrofit Kit Technology Upgrades

MP-3000 and DP-4000

upgrades used for

upgrading

overload-relay technology

from “Type-A,” IQ 2000A,

IQ 2000B or IQ 1000II to

the latest technology. Also

upgrades with a new,

slideout, LV control panel.

The kit includes:

●Typical starter schematic

●0.50-inch deep, flange LV

door with three cut-outs for

new devices

●Works-in-a-drawer slide-out

panel for LV control devices

Metering and Protective

Relay Upgrades

Works-in-a-Drawer Metering and Protective Relay LV Device Panel

Description

Style

Number

Slide-out with SJ 2147A95G01

Roll-out with SJ 2147A95G02

Slide-out with SL 2147A95G03

Roll-out with SL 2147A95G04

Description

Style

Number

DP-4000 and MP-3000

(without RTD)

2147A95G37

MP-3000 (without RTD) only 2147A95G39

DP-4000 only 2147A95G48

IQ Data only 2147A95G49

Current Transformer Shorting

Terminal Blocks (when

specified)

Routing of Control

Wire in Wire Channel

Interposing Control Relay

DIN Rail Mounted

Wiring is Protected

Between Low Voltage

Panel and Hinged Low

Voltage Door

Blank Device Panel

Indicating Lights and

Pushbuttons Rear View

(when specified)

MP-3000 Rear View

(when specified)

Predrilled Holes for

Additional Control Devices

Rear of 1/4 Turn Fastener

Note: Low voltage door is

hinged to slide-out

control panel.

Low Voltage Panel

Completely Extended

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-93

Motor Control

SLB and SLS Contactors AMPGARD (Medium Voltage)

Next Generation

AMPGARD

SLB and SLS Contactors

AMPGARD

Next Generation AMPGARD Lineup—

Front View

Product Description

Medium voltage control

reaches a higher level of

design with the next

generation of Cutler-Hammer

AMPGARD

starters from

Eaton. This product

incorporates 60 years of

experience with over 75,000

units installed worldwide. The

SLB and SLS contactor is

a low-chop design that

controls 200–8000 hp motors

with ratings of 400 and 800A

vacuum contactors. The

contactor is available in a stab

(SLS) or bolted (SLB) design

within the starter cell. The

two-high structure design can

accommodate two 400A or

one 800A contactor/starter

designs. The two-high

structure is 36 W x 92 H x 30

D inches (914.4 x 2336.8 x

762.0 mm), which includes a

12-inch high top-mounted

main bus compartment.

Ratings (Maximum)

400 and 800A 3000 hp at

2500V; 5500 hp at 5000V;

8000 hp at 7200V.

Chronology

The SLB and SLS vacuum

design AMPGARD starter

was introduced in 2005 with

both 400 and 800A ratings to

be incorporated into the next

generation of AMPGARD

assembly. The starters are

built in Asheville, NC. The

new SLS and SLB contactors

will not be interchangeable

with the existing SJ or SL

contactors.

Replacement Capabilities

For further information,

contact the Asheville plant

at 1-800-523-3775.

Stab-In AMPGARD 400A

Contactor—Rear View

Stab-In AMPGARD 800A

Contactor—Rear View

V12-T13-94 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

SL and SJ Vacuum AMPGARD Starters (Medium Voltage)

AMPGARD IT. Soft Start

Components

The Cutler-Hammer

AMPGARD IT. Soft Start

components are now

available for upgrading

existing full-voltage and

reduced-voltage starters. The

requirements to convert

starters into AMPGARD IT.

Soft Start will depend on

specific configurations of the

existing starter. Space will be

required for two 36-inch

wide, 45-inch high cells that

are ideally mounted in the

same vertical structure. The

upper compartment contains

the ‘M’ Contactor Cell and

the lower compartment

contains the SCR Truck Cell.

The new door provided with

the SCR Truck Cell includes

the MV801 control module

and is made to interlock with

the door on the upper

compartment.

If the targeted upgrade is for

a FVNR AMPGARD starter

presently located in the upper

compartment, then the

conversion is simplified by

using the existing FVNR

starter as the ‘M’ contactor

cell and converting the

bottom compartment into the

SCR truck cell. The ‘M’

contactor load terminals are

connected to the SCR truck

cell terminals using three

copper bus connectors.

Available SCR truck ratings

include 200A and 400A.

See Page V12-T13-95 for a

description of other existing

starter configurations. The

advanced diagnostics

included in the MV801

control module include:

●Phase loss

●Phase imbalance

●Jam

●Stall

●Over/undervoltage

●Motor overload

MV801 Control Module

AMPGARD IT. Soft Start

SCR Truck Cell

AMPGARD IT. Soft Start (Doors Open)

SCR Truck (Rear)

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-95

Motor Control

Synchronous

Typical AMPGARD Starter Configurations

Example 1

(Before Retrofit)

Note: Example 1—Upper

Compartment must be converted

to ‘M’ contactor cell. Lower

compartment must be converted

into SCR truck cell.

Example 2

(Before Retrofit)

Note: Example 2—Upper

compartment FVNR can be used

as the ‘M’ contactor cell. Lower

compartment must be converted

to SCR truck cell.

Example 1 and 2

(After Retrofit)

Example 3 (Before Retrofit) Example 3 (After Retrofit)

Note: Example 3—‘M’

contactor cell can be relocated to

upper compartment. Lower

compartment must be converted

into SCR truck cell.

Upper

Compartment

Lower

Compartment

New

SCR

Truck Cell

‘M’

Contactor

‘M’

Contactor

‘R’ Contactor

(RVAT) Upper

Compartment

‘S’ (RVAT)

‘R’ (RVPR)

Autotransformer

Reactor

New

SCR

Truck Cell

‘M’

Contactor

Available for

Other Use

V12-T13-96 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control

Synchronous

AMPGARD Solutions Overview

AMPGARD Selection Table

Notes

1Add-on structures contain vacuum starters only.

2Complete cell including frame, ISO-switch, vacuum or air contactor, and all components to complete a starter.

3Isolation switch only (LFR replaced LFM after 1974).

4Complete contactor, available in SJ or SL.

5New, genuine parts per original specs.

Vacuum replacements— OIL, AH, AMI (one-high starters) Complete Cell Retrofill

25L2 Vacuum Replacement Contactor

50L2 Vacuum Retrofit Kit

50V4 Vacuum Replacement Contactor

25/50L4 Vacuum Replacement Contactor

Synchronous Mark V Solid-State Control Retrofit

25/50L7 Vacuum Replacement Contactor and Some Cell Modification

6Check with factory.

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Installed

Equipment Vintage

AMPGARD Aftermarket Products Available

Reference

Material

Add-on

Structure 1Cell 2

Isolation

Switch 3Contactor 4Parts 5

Vacuum

Replace-

ments

Class 1

Recondi-

tioning

AMPGARD OIL 1945–1957 ■—

AMPGARD AH 1948–1957 ■—

AMPGARD AMI 1948–1957 ■—

AMPGARD 25L2 1962–1990 ■■ 6■■RPD8855A

AMPGARD 50L2 1963–1981 ■■ 6■■RPD8855A

AMPGARD 50V4 1972–1979 ■■■ ■■RP48J01TE

AMPGARD 25/50L4 1966–1989 ■■■ ■ 6■■RPD8855A

AMPGARD 25/50L7 1969–1989 ■■■ 6■■RPD8855A

AMPGARD V202 (SJ) 400A 1982–2000 ■ ■■■ ■■■RP48J01TE

AMPGARD S202 (SJ) 400A 1987–2000 ■ ■■■ ■■■RP48J01TE

AMPGARD W210 (SL) 400A 2000– ■ ■■■ ■■■RP02003002E

AMPGARD F210 (SL) 400A 2000– ■ ■■■ ■■■RP02003002E

AMPGARD V202 (SJ) 800A 1985– ■ ■■ ■■■RP48J01TE

Synchronous Control 1950– ■■ ■ RP04304009E

Publication

Number Description

RPD8855A Renewal Parts Data for AMPGARD LF Air-Break Vintage 200–700A

RPD8855S Renewal Parts Data for AMPGARD Slipsyn Synchronous Control

RP48J01TE Renewal Parts for AMPGARD SJ Vacuum-Break Vintage 400–800A

RP02003002E Common Renewal Parts for AMPGARD SL 400A Vacuum Contactors

TD48A01ATE Technical Data for AMPGARD MV Starters

PG48C01TE Product Guide “SL” Medium Voltage Vacuum Contactors

IB48008 Instructions for AMPGARD Mark V Solid-State, Brush-Type, Synchronous Motor Controllers

IB48009 Instructions for AMPGARD Synchronous Motor Field Regulator with VAR and PF Control

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-1

Motor Control Centers

DeviceNet I/O Starter Unit Upgrade

14 Motor Control Centers

Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-2

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-2

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-3

Low Voltage MCCs

11-300—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-5

9800—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-6

Type W—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-7

F10—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-8

Freedom Unitrol—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . V12-T14-9

5 Star/Series 2100—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities V12-T14-10

Advantage™—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . V12-T14-11

F2100—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-12

Replacement Capabilities (Structure/Bus/Unit Parts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-13

Technology Upgrades

IT. Soft Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-14

IQ Retrofit Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-14

DeviceNet Interface Module Upgrade (DN65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-14

SPD Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-15

SV9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-15

Advantage Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-15

Series C® Retrofit Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-15

How to Order, Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-17

Competitive Retrofit Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-18

Customer Required Information, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-18

Product Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-19

Further Information and Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T14-19

V12-T14-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

Low Voltage MCCs

F2100

Product Description

Nearly 50 years ago, Eaton’s

electrical business and

Westinghouse® introduced

the low voltage motor control

center (MCC) assembly,

enabling the group mounting

of low voltage (600V class)

electrical controls. This

allowed for supervision and

safe operation of motor starter

units, feeder tap units and

auxiliary equipment in a

flexible structure arrangement

at a centralized location.

The foundation for today’s

MCCs is a modular plug-in

combination motor controller

assembly with components

of proven electrical and

mechanical integrity. These

assemblies are enclosed in

metal structures that prevent

accidental contact with live

electrical parts.

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® MCC

structure consists of structural

steel, horizontal and vertical

wireways for conduit and load

cable entry and exit, and

vertical and horizontal bus

systems for distributing power

throughout the MCC. The

starter unit consists of a

rugged steel shell (wrapper)

for mounting the unit

components, a combination

motor starter with factory

wired control, a handle

mechanism for ON/OFF

operation and a rigid unit door.

Product History

Group-mounted motor control

was originally developed by

Westinghouse in 1935. What

came to be known as motor

control centers were built in

14 manufacturing and repair

shops around the country,

including a plant in Chicago,

IL, that opened in 1941. In

1963, Chicago became the

primary MCC manufacturing

plant. The Fayetteville, NC,

operation was opened in

1980 to relieve some of

Chicago’s volume. The

Fayetteville plant was

expanded in 1984 and the

Chicago operation was

closed. Motor control centers

are currently manufactured

in Fayetteville and in eight

service centers around

the country.

The Westinghouse plug-in

starter design for group-

mounted control (called

motor control centers) was

first introduced in 1935,

and in 1950 became known

as the Type 11-300 motor

control center and used the

11-200 motor starter. The

Type W MCC replaced the

11-300 in 1965, first using

the 11-200 starter and then

moving to the A200 starter.

The 5 Star was introduced in

1975 to replace the Type W.

It, too, used the A200 motor

starter. The Series 2100

updated the 5 Star design

in 1987, but is mechanically

compatible with the 5 Star.

The Advantage MCC was

introduced as a sister product

to the Series 2100 in 1992

with the introduction of the

Advantage starter. It was also

mechanically compatible with

the 5 Star. With the merger

of Eaton’s electrical Cutler-

Hammer business unit and

Westinghouse’s Distribution

and Control Business Unit

(DCBU) in 1994, a new hybrid

motor control center line was

introduced. It was called the

F2100 MCC and featured the

Freedom™ starter.

The Cutler-Hammer plug-in

starter design motor control

center was introduced in the

late 1950s as the 9800 Series

Unitrol. These motor control

centers used the 3-Star type

motor starter. In 1968, the

Citation line of starters

replaced the 3-Star type in

the 9800 MCC. The motor

control center was totally

redesigned around the

Citation starter in 1972 and

was called the F10 Unitrol.

The next generation of MCC

was introduced in 1988, using

the Freedom line of starters

called the Freedom Unitrol.

Freedom Unitrol was

discontinued in 1994 and

replaced with the Cutler-

Hammer F2100 motor

control center.

Cutler-Hammer motor control

centers were originally built in

Milwaukee, WI. In 1962,

manufacturing moved out of

Milwaukee to plants in

Atlanta, GA;

Bethlehem, PA;

Chicago, IL; Los Angeles,

CA;

Dallas, TX; San Francisco, CA;

and Cleveland, TN. In 1972,

these plants consolidated to

Atlanta, Bethlehem, Chicago,

Dallas and Los Angeles. In

1984, another consolidation

left manu

facturing in only

Atlanta and Los Angeles.

With the introduction of the

Freedom starter in 1989, all

manufacturing was moved

to Atlanta. After the merger,

all motor control center

manufacturing moved to the

Fayetteville, NC, location.

Product History Time Line

Note

1No additional information at this time.

Product 1935 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Page

Westinghouse 11-300

Cutler-Hammer 9800

Westinghouse Type W

Cutler-Hammer F10

Westinghouse 5 Star

Cutler-Hammer Freedom Unitrol

Westinghouse Series 2100

Westinghouse Advanage™

Cutler-Hammer F2100

Cutler-Hammer IT. MCC

햲

V12-T14-5

V12-T14-6

V12-T14-7

V12-T14-8

V12-T14-10

V12-T14-9

V12-T14-10

V12-T14-11

V12-T14-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-3

Motor Control Centers

Identifying Types of Low Voltage MCCs

General Information

Procedure for Identifying Motor Control Center Types 1

Notes

1 In the event that the nameplate is missing, it is possible to identify the MCC design by the type of handle mechanism, starter type, bucket width and door width.

2 Contact 1-800-OLD-UNIT.

MCC

Type

Type of Handle

Mechanism

Starter

Type

Bucket

Width (Inches)

Door

Width (Inches)

Page

Number

11-300 Rotary 11-200 Life Line Type N 15-3/4 20 V12-T14-5

9800 Rotary and lever 3 Star 16-1/8 19-3/8 V12-T14-6

Type W Slider A200 or 11-200 11-3/4 13-3/8 V12-T14-7

F10 Slider and lever Citation 14 14-3/4 with wireway V12-T14-8

19-1/2 without wireway

Freedom Unitrol Slider Freedom Series 13-7/8 15-1/2 V12-T14-9

5 Star/Series 2100 Lever A200 13-3/4 15-5/8 V12-T14-10

Advantage Lever Advantage 13-3/4 15-5/8 V12-T14-11

F2100 Lever Freedom Series 13-3/4 15-5/8 V12-T14-12

IT. MCC Rotary IT-EM 13-3/4 15-5/8 2

11-300

9800

Type W

F10

Freedom Unitrol

5 Star/Series 2100

Advantage

F2100

V12-T14-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

Identifying Types of Low Voltage MCCs

Identification by Original Handle Mechanism

Freedom 2100, Advantage,

Series 2100, 5 Star

Freedom Unitrol

Type W

F10 Unitrol Lever (Obsolete)

F10 Unitrol Slider

IT-EM Handles

9800 Unitrol (Obsolete) 11-300

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-5

Motor Control Centers

11-300

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Unit with A200 Starter

Product Description

Introduced in 1937,

Westinghouse manufactured

the 11-300 MCC through

1965 and it was available as

match and lineup until 1974.

It used standard structures

each 20.00 inches wide,

90.38 inches high, and either

20.25 inches or 12.00 inches

deep for front mounted and

20.25 inches for back-to-back

mounting. Vertical sections

could be bolted together

to form a single lineup with

continuous horizontal bus and

open horizontal wireways.

Unit height was measured in

either 9.33-inch or 14.00-inch

increments up to a maximum

of 70.00 inches of usable

vertical space. ANSI 61 light

gray enamel

was used on

all structural parts. The unit

door hinged on the right and

covered the entire width

of the structure.

The 11-300 starter unit was

most easily recognized by

the rotary type of handle

mechanism. Bus and support

systems were typically

braced to withstand fault

currents of 25,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 600 hp,

2500A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide/Single 11-300

MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL® labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●

A200 standard—

IT.

Freedom or Advantage

starter optional

●New tin-plated copper stab

assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with IT-EM Starter

Add-on MCCs

New IT., F2100 or Advantage

can be added to an existing

lineup. Cable connected only.

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches through

400A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

11-300 Dual Feeder

V12-T14-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

9800

Originally a Cutler-Hammer

Product

Unit with Citation Starter

Product Description

Introduced in 1956, the Cutler-

Hammer 9800 was the initial

offering in the motor control

center product grouping. The

door of the unit measured

19.38 inches wide and the

bucket width measured

16.13 inches. Unit height was

measured in 9.33-inch and

14.00-inch increments. The

MCC did not use a wireway.

ANSI 49 was applied to the

units, structural framework,

roof, side sheets and all

exterior doors.

9800 starter units were

originally supplied with a 3-Star

starter and a rotary handle

mechanism. Replacements

today use the newer Freedom

starter, and a slider handle

mechanism and a new door.

The rotary handle mechanism

is no longer available. Bus and

bus systems were typically

braced to withstand fault

currents of 25,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 100 hp,

2500A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide/Single 9800

MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Sizes 1–4 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●Freedom standard—IT.,

A200 or Advantage starter

optional

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with IT-EM Starter

Note: Replacement 9800 units

will be supplied with slider handle

mechanism as shown.

Add-on MCCs

New

IT.

, F2100 or Advantage

can be added to an existing

lineup.

Cable connected only.

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches

through 400A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

9800 Feeder Unit

Note: Handle mechanism

pictured above is also used

with F10 Unitrol units.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-7

Motor Control Centers

Type W

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Unit with A200 Starter

Product Description

Manufactured from 1965 to

1975, this Westinghouse

MCC used standard

structures each 19.00 inches

wide, 90.00 inches high,

and either 15.00 inches or

20.00 inches deep for front

mounted or 20.00 inches deep

for back-to-back mounting.

Vertical sections were bolted

together forming a single

lineup with continuous

horizontal bus. Unit height

is measured in 6.00-inch

increments up to a maximum

of 72.00 inches of usable

vertical space. Starter units

are 13.50 inches wide.

A two-tone light/dark enamel

paint system was used with

an ANSI 70 off-white applied

to the structural framework

and cover plates. A dark gray

was used for unit and

wireway doors.

The Type W starter units are

easily recognized by their

sliding handle mechanism,

the MC motor control type.

Bus and bus support systems

were typically braced to

withstand fault currents of

22,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 400 hp,

2500A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide Type W MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●A200 standard—IT.,

Freedom or Advantage

starter optional

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with IT-EM Starter

Add-on MCCs

New IT., F2100 or Advantage

MCCs can be added to an

existing lineup through a

10.00-inch bus transition

section.

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches through

400A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper stab

assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Type W Dual Feeder

V12-T14-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

F10

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

Unit with Citation Starter

Product Description

Introduced in 1972, this

Cutler-Hammer MCC was

available in both 16.00 inches

wide (with wireway) and

20.00 inches wide (without

wireway). Bucket width

is 14.00 inches and

replacement units are

available with both designs.

Unit height is measured in

6.00-inch increments.

ANSI 40 was applied to the

units, structural framework,

roof, side sheets and all

exterior doors.

The F10 MCC used the

Citation starter and was

identified by the slider type

handle mechanism. Bus and

bus support systems were

typically braced to withstand

fault currents of 42,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 150 hp,

2000A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide F10 MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●

Freedom standard—

IT.

A200 or Advantage

starter optional

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with Advantage Starter

Add-on MCCs

New IT., F2100 or Advantage

MCCs can be added to an

existing lineup through a bus

splice kit and channel sills.

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Feeder breakers 600A and

fusible switches 400A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper stab

assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

F10 Feeder Unit

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-9

Motor Control Centers

Freedom Unitrol

Originally a

Cutler-Hammer Product

Unit with Freedom Starter

Product Description

Introduced in 1989, this

Cutler-Hammer MCC had

vertical structures that

measured 20.00 inches wide,

91.50 inches high, and either

15.00 inches or 20.00 inches

deep. It allowed a 6.00-inch

Size 1 unit design.

ANSI 49 was applied to the

units, structural framework,

roof, side sheets and all

exterior doors.

The Freedom Unitrol used

the Freedom starter and was

identified by the slider type

handle mechanism. Bus and

bus support systems were

typically braced to withstand

fault currents of 42,000A

with the option to increase

to 65,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 400 hp,

2500A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide Freedom

Unitrol MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●

Freedom standard—

IT.

A200 or Advantage

starter

optional

●New tin-plated copper stab

assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with Advantage Starter

Add-on MCCs

New IT., F2100 or Advantage

MCCs can be added to an

existing lineup through

a bus splice kit.

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches

through 600A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Freedom Unitrol Feeder Unit

V12-T14-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

5 Star/Series 2100

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Unit with A200 Starter

Product Description

The 5 Star MCC was

introduced by Westinghouse

in 1975. The structure design

was the basis for the Series

2100, Advantage and F2100

products later. The Series

2100 updated the 5 Star

design in 1987 with higher

ratings and newer

components.

The vertical structures are

normally 20.00 inches wide,

90.00 inches high, and

16.00 inches or 21.00 inches

deep. Vertical sections may

be bolted together forming a

single lineup with continuous

horizontal bus and open

horizontal wireways. Unit

height is measured in

6.00-inch increments up to

a maximum of 72.00 inches

of usable vertical space.

A two-tone light/dark enamel

paint system is used for

this design. ANSI 61 gray

is applied to the roof and

side sheets and all exterior

doors. Starter units are

13.75 inches wide.

The 5 Star/Series 2100 starter

unit’s handle mechanism is a

gray toggle type handle with

a black exterior mounting

panel and is used on the

Advantage and F2100

designs. Bus and bus support

systems are typically braced

to withstand fault currents of

42,000A on the 5 Star and

65,000A on the Series 2100.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 600 hp,

2500A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide 5-Star MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting hardware.

Features of the replacement

unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●A200 starter standard—IT.

starter optional

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with A200 Starter

Add-on MCCs

New IT., F2100 or Advantage

MCCs can be added to an

existing lineup through a bus

splice kit.

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches

through 600A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

5 Star/Series 2100 Feeder Unit

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-11

Motor Control Centers

Advantage

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Unit with Advantage Starter

Product Description

Introduced in 1991 as a sister

to the Westinghouse Series

2100 MCC, the Advantage

starter design revolutionized

the industry. It uses state-of-

the-art technology to solve

motor control application

problems, such as coil

burnout and contact

chatter/welding.

The vertical structures are

normally 20.00 inches wide,

90.00 inches high, and

16.00 inches or 21.00 inches

deep. Vertical sections may

be bolted together forming a

single lineup with continuous

horizontal bus and open

horizontal wireways. Unit

height is measured in

6.00-inch increments up to

a maximum of 72.00 inches

of usable vertical space.

A two-tone light/dark enamel

paint system is used for this

design. ANSI 61 gray is

applied to all exterior back

sheets, side

sheets and doors.

Starter units are 13.75

inches

wide and are interchangeable

with the 5 Star and Series

2100 design.

The Advantage starter unit’s

handle mechanism is a gray

toggle type handle with a

black exterior mounting panel

and is used on the 5 Star/

Series 2100 and Freedom

2100 designs. Bus and bus

support systems were

typically braced to withstand

fault currents of 65,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 1100 hp,

3200A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide Advantage MCC

Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●Advantage starter

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with Advantage Starter

Device Panel Upgrade

While incorporating

Advantage starters, increase

the information shown on the

unit device panel with one or

two of the Advantage control

modules (ACMs) available.

These units fit into the

standard device panel cutout

and provide pushbutton, pilot

light and metering functions

with reduced wiring costs.

The device panel is hinged on

a horizontal rod extending

across the front of the unit.

With the unit door open,

loosening two captive

retaining screws at the top

of the panel and sliding it a

0.50-inch left permits it to

swing down. This provides

ready access to the rear of

the panel and increased

accessibility to the unit

interior.

Advantage Device Panel with ACM

and Metering Module

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches

through 600A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Advantage Feeder Unit

V12-T14-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

F2100

The Cutler-Hammer F2100

was Introduced in 1995

Unit with Freedom Starter

Product Description

The structure is based on

the 5 Star, Series 2100 and

Advantage MCC design.

Vertical structures are

normally 20.00 inches wide,

90.00 inches high, and

16.00 inches or 21.00 inches

deep. Vertical sections may

be bolted together forming a

single lineup with continuous

horizontal bus and open

horizontal wireways. Unit

height is measured in

6.00-inch increments up to

a maximum of 72.00 inches

of usable vertical space.

A two-tone paint system is

used for this design. ANSI 61

gray is applied to the exterior

and doors. Starter units are

13.75 inches

wide with

4.63-inch wireways.

The Freedom starter is

used in this design along

with the HMCP motor

circuit protector.

The F2100 starter unit’s

handle mechanism is a gray

toggle type handle with a

black exterior mounting panel

and is used on the Advantage

and 5 Star/Series 2100

designs. Bus and bus support

systems are typically braced

to withstand fault currents of

65,000A.

Maximum Ratings

Three-phase, 600V, 1100 hp,

3200A bus.

20.00-Inch Wide F2100 MCC Structure

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Starter Units

Replacement starter cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Size 1–5 starter units

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●Freedom starter

standard—IT. starter

optional

●New tin-plated copper stab

assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

Unit with Freedom Starter

Replacement Feeder Units

Replacement feeder cell units

are available for all plug-in

MCC designs. A complete

unit for adding to an existing

MCC includes a unit door,

a divider pan and all the

necessary mounting

hardware. Features of the

replacement unit include:

●Feeder breakers and

fusible switches through

600A

●UL labeled

●Series C disconnect device

●New tin-plated copper

stab assembly

●New door, handle

mechanism and hardware

F2100 Feeder Unit

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-13

Motor Control Centers

Replacement Parts

Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Parts

In addition to replacement

units, a large number of

replacement parts are

available for each vintage.

Note: For information on these

and additional parts, refer to

RPD listed on Page V12-T14-19

of this catalog. For parts not listed

or shown in the RPD, contact

your local Eaton Field Sales

office or Service Center. See

Page V12-T14-19 of this catalog.

Examples

F2100 Horizontal Wireway Door

9800 Unit Mounting Hardware Kit

Freedom Unitrol Terminal Block Mounting Kit

F10 Handle Mechanism Series 2100 Bus Splice Kit

Type W Horizontal Busbar

V12-T14-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

Upgrades

Technology Upgrades

IT. Soft Start

Intelligent Technologies (IT.)

Soft Starters

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

Intelligent Technologies (IT.)

solid-state starters provide

high-performance motor

control in the most compact

packages in the industry.

The IT. Series of solid-state

starters are available in

retrofit units through 200 hp

in all Cutler-Hammer and

Westinghouse MCC vintages.

Each IT. solid-state starter

unit includes a disconnect,

starter, a DC power supply,

a 120 Vac interposing relay,

and a 100 VA CPT. The IT.

solid-state starter design

incorporates an integral,

parallel run contact that

engages once the starter

reaches full speed. Available

soft starter options include:

pump control software, line/

load MOV protection and

motor isolation contactor.

IQ Retrofit Kits

IQ Analyzer (The Ultimate

in Monitoring)

IQ Analyzer

The Cutler-Hammer IQ

Analyzer displays the most

comprehensive list of

metered parameters in its

class. The dot-matrix, gas

plasma display provides the

flexibility of exhibiting large

characters with high visibility

and small characters for

detailed descriptions. Multiple

parameters (e.g., currents

of phases A, B and C) are

displayed simultaneously

for more thorough real-time

monitoring. Custom screens

can also be configured.

Available information

includes current, voltage,

power, energy, demand

and an extensive array of

harmonic data.

IQ 320

The Cutler-Hammer IQ 320

is the most cost-effective

metering solution for

monitoring main incoming

line electrical values. Through

the bright two-line LCD

display, the IQ 320 provides

accurate readings for voltage,

amperes, watts, hertz, power

factor and VA. Key features

of the IQ 320 include ANSI

C312.16 revenue class

metering accuracy,

PowerNet™ capable

communications port and

user intuitive four-button

front panel interface.

DeviceNet Interface

Module Upgrade (DN65)

DeviceNet I/O Starter Unit Upgrade

Using the DN65 Discrete

DeviceNet™ I/O module,

all Cutler-Hammer and

Westinghouse vintage MCCs

may be upgraded with the

latest Freedom motor starters

to provide wire savings and

communications capability.

The DN65 DeviceNet I/O

Module adds increased

functionality and intelligence

in a small footprint.

Standard MCC starter units

accommodate the DN65

DeviceNet module and

provide the ability to perform

START/STOP control over an

open network. Additionally,

contactor, overload and

breaker status may be

communicated through

the DN65 upstream to a

host PC, PLC or DCS system.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-15

Motor Control Centers

Upgrades

Technology Upgrades

SPD Upgrade

F2100 SPD Unit

Surge Protective

Device—MCC

The Eaton SPD Series surge

protective device is a hybrid

MOV filter-based suppression

system that protects sensitive

electronic equipment from

damaging transients, lightning

surges and electrical line

noise. The SPD is installed in

parallel to the electrical circuits

in a motor control center and

provides clean power to the

motor starting circuits. The

SPD only reacts and keeps

damaging surge current and

high frequency noise away

from motor starting circuits

when the system’s nominal

operating voltage is exceeded.

The latest Eaton SPD Series

protective devices are

substantially smaller, safer

and more compact than

their predecessors, providing

better performance and

easier installation.

The new Eaton SPD Series

are available in size ranges

from 50 to 400 kA and can

be retrofitted to all Cutler-

Hammer and Westinghouse

vintage MCCs. Consult the

factory for further information.

SV9000 Drives

SV9000 AC Drive

Cutler-Hammer SV9000

adjustable frequency drives

are available for retrofit units

in a number of MCC vintages.

For current vintage Freedom

and Advantage MCCs,

SV9000 drives are available

through 1100 hp at 480V.

Type W, F10, Freedom

Unitrol motor control center

vintage units are available

with SV9000 drive in plug-in

configurations through 30 hp

at 480V. Each retrofit unit

includes an SV9000 drive

(variable or constant torque)

disconnect, a CPT and a 3%

input and output line reactor.

SV9000 drives provide the

highest performance and

reliability available for flexible

and smooth motor control.

IT-EM Technology

In addition to standard retrofit

capabilities, every vintage

of MCC can be upgraded

with IT-EM motor starters.

Consult factory for other

manufacturer’s motor

control centers.

5 Star/Series 2100

Type W

F10

Series C Retrofit Kits

Series C retrofit kits are to

be used to upgrade existing

Type W, 5 Star and F10 motor

control center buckets by

changing out the old breakers

with the Series C. These kits

can be applied to both starter

and feeder units.

The old breakers that these

kits will upgrade include, but

are not limited to, the MCP,

F, FA, FB, HFB, K, KA, KB,

HKB, L, LA, LB and HLB

breakers.

5 Star Series C Retrofit Kit

The 5 Star Series C retrofit

kit includes:

●Series C device, 65 kA

(either HMCP or thermal-

magnetic breaker)

●Operating handle

mechanism, including

tripped indication and

push-to-trip

●Label stating that the MCC

unit has been retrofitted

with Series C device

suitable for 65 kA (similar

to UL quality label)

●Templates for desired

frame size

●Assembly instructions

Note: The upgrade interrupting

rating of the breaker does not

upgrade the withstand rating of

the existing bus.

V12-T14-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

Upgrades

Type W Series C Retrofit Kit

The Type W Series C retrofit

kit includes:

●Series C device, 65 kA

(either HMCP or thermal-

magnetic breaker)

●Operating handle

mechanism, including

tripped indication and

push-to-trip

●Label stating that the MCC

unit has been retrofitted

with Series C device

suitable for 65 kA (similar

to UL quality label)

●Templates for proper hole

placement for desired

frame size

●Series C breaker mounting

hardware

●New door and hardware

●New stab assembly

●Assembly instructions

Note: The upgrade interrupting

rating of the breaker does not

upgrade the withstand rating of

the existing bus.

F10 Series C Retrofit Kit

The F10 Series C retrofit

kit includes:

●Series C device, 65 kA

(either HMCP or thermal-

magnetic breaker)

●Operating handle

mechanism, including

tripped indication

push-to-trip

●Label stating that the MCC

unit has been retrofitted

with Series C device

suitable for 65 kA (similar

to UL quality label)

●Templates for desired

frame size

●Assembly instructions

Note: The upgrade interrupting

rating of the breaker does not

upgrade the withstand rating of

the existing bus.

Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Frame

Type

Interrupting Rating (kAIC) Trip Rating

Amperes

Catalog

Number240V 480V 600V

HFD 100 65 25 15 HFD3015

HFD 100 65 25 20 HFD3020

HFD 100 65 25 25 HFD3025

HFD 100 65 25 30 HFD3030

HFD 100 65 25 40 HFD3040

HFD 100 65 25 50 HFD3050

HFD 100 65 25 60 HFD3060

HFD 100 65 25 70 HFD3070

HFD 100 65 25 80 HFD3080

HFD 100 65 25 90 HFD3090

HFD 100 65 25 100 HFD3100

HFD 100 65 25 125 HFD3125

HFD 100 65 25 150 HFD3150

FDC 200 100 35 15 FDC3015

FDC 200 100 35 20 FDC3020

FDC 200 100 35 25 FDC3025

FDC 200 100 35 30 FDC3030

FDC 200 100 35 40 FDC3040

FDC 200 100 35 50 FDC3050

FDC 200 100 35 60 FDC3060

FDC 200 100 35 70 FDC3070

FDC 200 100 35 80 FDC3080

FDC 200 100 35 90 FDC3090

FDC 200 100 35 100 FDC3100

FDC 200 100 35 125 FDC3125

FDC 200 100 35 150 FDC3150

HJD 100 65 25 175 HJD3175

HJD 100 65 25 200 HJD3200

HJD 100 65 25 225 HJD3225

HJD 100 65 25 250 HJD3250

JDC 200 100 35 175 JDC3175

JDC 200 100 35 200 JDC3200

JDC 200 100 35 225 JDC3225

JDC 200 100 35 250 JDC3250

HKD 100 65 35 300 HKD3300

HKD 100 65 35 350 HKD3350

HKD 100 65 35 400 HKD3400

KDC 200 100 50 300 KDC3300

KDC 200 100 50 350 KDC3350

KDC 200 100 50 400 KDC3400

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-17

Motor Control Centers

Upgrades

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors Catalog Numbering System

Series C Retrofits

How to Order

Step 1:

Select the correct Series C device

from the table in the

applicable RPD

5 Star—RP04304003E

Type W—RP04304006E

F10—RP04304005E

Step 2: Create a catalog number based on the MCC type,

device selected, modification, door size and device panel.

Step 3: Select price from PL04304002E.

Starter

Size

Magnetic Trip

Range Amperes

Continuous

Rating Amperes

Catalog

Number

09–30 3 HMCP003A0

0 21–70 7 HMCP007C0

0 45–150 15 HMCP015E0

0 40–60 25 HMCP025D0

1 90–300 30 HMCP030H1

2 80–120 50 HMCP050G2

2 150–500 50 HMCP050K2

2 115–170 70 HMCP070J2

2 210–700 70 HMCP070M2

3 160–240 100 HMCP100L3

3 300–1000 100 HMCP100R3

4 450–1500 150 HMCP150T4

4 750–2500 150 HMCP150U4

4, 5 350–700 250 HMCP250A5

5 450–900 250 HMCP250C5

5 500–1000 250 HMCP250D5

5 625–1250 250 HMCP250F5

5 750–1500 250 HMCP250G5

5 875–1750 250 HMCP250J5

5 1000–2000 250 HMCP250K5

5 1125–2250 250 HMCP250L5

5 1250–2500 250 HMCP250W5

5 500–1000 400 HMCP400D5

5 625–1250 400 HMCP400F5

5 750–1500 400 HMCP400G5

5 875–1750 400 HMCP400J5

5 1000–2000 400 HMCP400K5

5 1125–2250 400 HMCP400L5

5 1250–2500 400 HMCP400M5

5 1500–3000 400 HMCP400N5

5 1750–3500 400 HMCP400R5

5, 6 2000–4000 400 HMCP400X5

FT HMCP030H1 C 12 N

Modifications

C= Copper lugs for HMCP

L= Lugs for molded-case breaker

Door Size

Height of door in

inches, 6.00-inch

increments

Device Panel

D= With device

panel

N= No device

panel

MCC Type

FT = Type W

FS = 5 Star

FR = F10

Device Catalog

Number

Use tables

V12-T14-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control Centers

Upgrades

Competitive Retrofit

Upgrades

GE7770 Unit Retrofitted with

Advantage and HMCP

The following competitive

retrofit units can be obtained

from the Fayetteville

manufacturing plant.

●Allis-Chalmers

●Allen-Bradley®

●Arrow Hart®

●General Electric®

●Klockner-Moeller®

●Siemens®

●Other

Factory Retrofit

We replace the starter,

the breaker and the handle

mechanism. A new door

is provided for most

competitor’s units. The

original unit, the pan and

the stabs are refurbished.

Panel Retrofit

New components are

mounted on a “panel” that

is easily installed into the

competitor’s unit. Included

are a new pan, a starter, a

breaker, a handle mechanism

and a door if available.

Requires field installation

by Eaton’s Electrical

Services & Systems (EESS)

or a qualified contractor.

Note: See Page V12-T14-19 for

most competitor retrofit units.

Note: Please consult factory for

additional retrofit opportunities.

New Units

Brand new ITET 5600, GE

7700/8000 and Allen-Bradley

Centerline™ replacement

units include:

●New bucket

●New stabs

●All new Cutler-Hammer

components

●Complete with

manufacturer UL label

Note: For additional information

and designs for other motor

control centers, call the

Aftermarket Products Center

in Fayetteville, NC.

Customer Required

Information

Procedure for identifying

renewal parts:

Renewal parts listed in

PL04304002E

below

identify those

replacement parts

that are most frequently

ordered and that are

readily available from

manufacturing stock.

2. For parts not shown in

Aftermarket, Renewal

Parts and Life Extension

Solutions or listed in

Further Information

on Page V12-T14-19,

contact your local Eaton

Field Sales office or call

1-800-OLD-UNIT.

PL04304002E

Poster PST03A0ITE

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T14-19

Motor Control Centers

Support Services

Product Support

Services

The following replacement

units can be obtained from the

Fayetteville manufacturing

plant and the service centers.

●F2100

●Advantage

●5 Star/Series 2100

●Freedom Unitrol

●F10

●Type W

●9800

●11- 3 0 0

●Technology Upgrade Kits

●Allen-Bradley Centerline

●Federal Pacific Electric®

(FPE)

●Sylvania® Clark (no UL)

●Square D® Model 3 (no UL)

●Telemecanique®

●Gould®

●ITE

●GE 7700/8000

Brand new ITE 5600, GE

7700/8000 and Allen-Bradley

Centerline replacement

units include:

●New bucket

●New stabs

●All new Cutler-Hammer

components

●Complete with

manufacturer UL label

Note: For additional information

and designs for other motor

control centers, call the

Aftermarket Products

Center in Fayetteville, NC,

1-800-OLD-UNIT. If you are in

Canada, call 1-855-656-2882.

New Units

Seven Customer Manufacturing Solution Centers

Atlanta

(678) 309-4270

Chicago

(847) 299-1911

Denver

(303) 366-9949

Hartford

(860) 683-4221

Houston

(713) 939-9696

Los Angeles

(562) 944-6413

Portland

(503) 636-8333

Support of Installed Equipment

Fayetteville

1-800-OLD-UNIT

Airdrie, Canada

1-855-656-2882

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price List–All MCC Vintages—PL04304002E

Price List–Freedom 2100—PL03A01EPE

Price List–Advantage MCC—PL04301001E

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 1CD-2C

Publication Number Description

RP04304001E F2100—1995–Present

RP04304002E Advantage—1992–Present

RP04304003E Series 2100—1987–1995

RP04304003E 5 Star—1975–1987

RP04304004E Freedom Unitrol—1988–1994

RP04304005E F10 Unitrol—1972–1989

RP04304006E Type W—1965–1975

RP04304007E 9800 Unitrol—1956–74

RP04304008E 11-300—1935–1965

RP04304010E 5600—2003–Present

SA-11848 Sales Aid—Advantage MCC

SA-162 Sales Aid—F2100

SA.8K.02.S.E Sales Aid—QDS II sAftermarket Tri-fold

PST.03A.01.T.E Sales Aid—MCC Wall Poster

LEM002A Tri-fold Mailer “We Have The Solutions”

LEM005 Tri-fold Mailer “MCC Units with TVSS”

LEM006 Tri-fold Mailer “Technology Upgrades”

PA.8K.01.S.E MCC Competitive Retrofit Units

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T15-1

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

Pow-R-M-S/F Switchboard

with Fixed SPB Breakers

15 Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-2

Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-2

Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-2

WRI, Pow-R-I, Pow-R-M-S/F, Pow-R-Line i

Assemblies Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-3

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-3

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-3

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-3

Pow-R-Gear, Pow-R-M-S Assemblies, SPB Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . V12-T15-4

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-4

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-4

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-4

WF/WRP, ES, Pow-R-Line C® Assemblies, Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . V12-T15-5

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-5

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-5

Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-6

Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T15-6

V12-T15-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

Assemblies and Circuit Breakers

Assemblies and

Circuit Breakers

WRI Switchboard, St. Louis Vintage

with Fixed Molded-Case Breakers

Pow-R-I is of similar look)

Pow-R-M-S/F Switchboard with

Fixed SPB Breakers

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer low voltage

distribution switchboards from

Eaton’s electrical business

serve to switch power and

to protect circuits in industrial

and commercial distribution

systems. Distribution switch-

boards can be classified into

two categories—power

distribution and service

distribution. The power

distribution switchboards

typically use insulated-case

SPB or air DS power circuit

breakers as mains and

individually compartment-

alized feeders. The service

distribution switchboards use

insulated-case SPB, air DS,

molded-case (all types), and

fusible switches as mains and

molded-case circuit breakers

as feeders.

Distribution switchboards

can be a free-standing

structure(s) or close coupled

as the secondary section

of a power center or

substation. Power distribution

switchboards primarily use

individually mounted, fixed

or drawout devices. Service

distribution switchboards

primarily use main devices

as individually mounted,

fixed or drawout with group-

mounted molded-case

circuit breakers. Numerous

combinations of devices

can be used depending on

the specification. Class III

(power distribution) and

Class II (service distribution)

switchboards are commonly

used descriptions for

the class of distribution

switchboards. Distribution

switchboards are built in

accordance with all applicable

provisions of UL® 891 and

NEMA® PB-2.

Product History

Distribution switchboards

have been around since the

1950s. Most of the original

switchboards were custom

assembled with very little

standardization of design.

From the mid-1970s through

the 1980s, distribution boards

became somewhat more

standardized and were

manufactured in St. Louis,

MO. These vintages included:

●WRI

●WF/WRP

●Pow-R-Gear

“WRI” used individually

mounted, molded-case

circuit breakers for both

mains and feeders.

“WF/WRP” used group-

mounted, molded-case circuit

breakers or FDP fusible

switches for the feeders.

For the mains, this design

used either DS, SPB, bolted-

pressure switch (CBC-type),

or MCCBs.

“Pow-R-Gear” used SPB

drawout, insulated-case

power circuit breakers for

both mains and feeders.

Some specialty switchboards,

including generator-control,

were manufactured in

Cincinnati, OH, until the

plant was closed in 1985.

During the mid-1980s,

some of the switchboard

manufacturing was moved

to a plant in Visalia, CA, and

another plant in Sumter, SC.

Those designs included

WF/WRP and WRI.

During the late 1980s and

early 1990s the switchboard

products were relocated to

two different locations:

●Asheville, NC

●Sumter, SC

The products that moved to

Asheville included the “Pow-

R-Gear,” which later evolved

into the “Pow-R-M-S” design

(the “Pow-R-M-S/F is the

fixed-mounted version).

Also included in the move

to Asheville was the “WRI”

product, which later evolved

into the “Pow-R-I” design.

The “Pow-R-I” design was

short-lived and in 1991 it

evolved into two different

products—the “Pow-R-M-S/F

mentioned

above and the

“Pow-R-Line

” mentioned

the next paragraph.

The first product that moved

to Sumter, SC, was the

“WF/WRP,” which evolved

into the “Pow-R-Line C”

design—it uses

Series C®

MCCBs. The second product

evolved from Asheville’s

“Pow-R-I” and is called

the “Pow-R-Line i” design.

Product History Time Line

WF/WRP Switchboard

WRI Switchboard

Pow-R-Gear Switchboard

Pow-R-line C Switchboard

Pow-R-M-S Switchboard

Pow-R-I Switchboard

ES Switchboard

Pow-R-M-S/F Switchboard

Pow-R-Line i Switchboard

Product 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 PresentPage

V12-T15-5

V12-T15-3

V12-T15-4

V12-T15-5

V12-T15-4

V12-T15-3

V12-T15-5

V12-T15-3

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T15-3

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

WRI, Pow-R-I, Pow-R-M-S/F and Pow-R-Line

WRI, Pow-R-I, Pow-R-M-

S/F and Pow-R-Line i

WRI Switchboard with Individually

Mounted Molded-Case Breakers

Pow-R-Line i Switchboard

with Individually Mounted

Molded-Case Breakers

Product Description

This class of switchboard is

commonly called a Class III

switchboard. Generally

speaking, this means

individually mounted main

and feeder devices.

The WRI switchboard that

was built by

W,estinghouse

in St. Louis, MO consisted

rear- and front-accessible

enclosures with all sections

flush front to rear. The

WRI board was designed

for mounting away from

the wall.

Main devices could be DS,

SPB, SCB-II or molded-case

circuit breakers and (CBC)

bolted pressure or FDP

fusible switches. Individually

mounted feeders could be

either FDP fusible switches

or molded-case circuit

breakers. The WRI design

moved to Asheville, NC, as

the Pow-R-I design with little

change, except fusible was

not offered with Pow-R-I.

Some

different structural and

bussing methods

were used

on the Pow-R-I also.

The Pow-R-I product was

split in 1991. Switchboards

requiring main and individually

mounted feeders using SPB

breakers and the RD Series C

breaker were incorporated

in the Pow-R-M-S/F design

using the same design as

the drawout Pow-R-M-S

switchboard except fixed

devices. The smaller current

individually mounted devices

were incorporated into

the Pow-R-Line i design

introduced in 1991 at

Sumter, SC.

Ratings

Replacement Capabilities

Parts for WRI Switchboard

New Circuit Breakers

New SPB, DS and RD

molded-case circuit breakers

are available for replacement

provisions or to fill existing

cells. All breakers are newly

manufactured.

Circuit Breaker Cell Provisions

These are used to convert

blank cell compartments into

breaker cell compartments.

Provisions are no longer

available for WRI dated

1967 or earlier but might be

available for newer versions.

Cell provisions are no longer

available for Pow-R-I and

Pow-R-M-S/F (fix-mounted).

Provisions are sometimes

available for the Pow-R-Line i

design. In all cases, care

must be taken to properly

identify the original shop

order before proceeding or

making final determination.

Repair Service for SPB Breakers

Factory authorized non-

warranty repair for all SPB

breaker frames.

Class 1 Reconditioning for

DS Breakers

Repairs are available for

DS circuit breakers. This

service includes trip unit

replacements.

Circuit Breaker Parts

An extensive inventory of

newly manufactured breaker

renewal parts are available for

SPB, DS and RD molded-case

circuit breakers.

Technology Upgrades

IQ and PowerNet™

Communications Retrofits

Cutler-Hammer IQ products

replace existing analog

meters, instruments and

protective relays with

microprocessor-based

solid-state true rms sensing

devices. IQ products can

be furnished as components

for field installation on the

switchgear. The IQ products

include the IQ Analyzer, IQ

DP-4000, IQ 200 and IQ 300.

Communications can then be

tied to the Cutler-Hammer

PowerNet system.

Digitrip™ Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Trip unit retrofit kits are

available for all SPB and DS

breaker frames. Refer to

Ta b 17 , Pages V12-T17-33

to V12-T17-36.

SPD Series Surge

Protective Devices

Refer to Page V12-T15-6 of

this publication.

Device Rating

WRI/Pow-R-I

Switchboard bus 800–4000A

Protective devices 400–4000A

Voltage 120–600V

Interrupting capacity 30–200 kA

Pow-R-M-S/F

Switchboard bus 800–5000A

SPB/RD breaker 400–5000A

Voltage 240–600V

Interrupting capacity 42–100 kA

Pow-R-Line i

Switchboard bus 800–4000A

Protective devices 70–4000A

Voltage 240–600V

Interrupting capacity 30–200 kA

V12-T15-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

Pow-R-Gear, Pow-R-M-S and SPB

Pow-R-Gear, Pow-R-M-S

and SPB

Pow-R-Gear Switchboard, St. Louis

Vintage with Drawout SPB Breakers

Pow-R-M-S Switchboard,

Current Asheville Design with

Drawout SPB Breakers

Product Description

Pow-R-Gear, and now

Pow-R-M-S, switchboards

were/are designed exclusively

for the systems Pow-R

breaker line of encased

power circuit breakers.

These switchboards were/

are designed for high current

applications and include the

following features: drawout

breaker elements, individual

breaker compartmentalization,

in-gear breaker contact

inspection and minimum floor

space design. Both versions

were/are manufactured in

accordance with all applicable

provisions of UL 891 and

NEMA PB-2 covering low

voltage distribution

switchboards.

The primary differences

between the original

Pow-R-Gear and its

successor Pow-R-M-S are:

structural (frame design), trip

units (Pow-R-Gear used the

Pow-R-Trip 7; Pow-R-M-S

uses the Digitrip RMS

sensing trip family), bus

design (Pow-R-Gear used

aluminum of varying heights;

Pow-R-M-S uses bolted

copper of full height) and

vertical spacing (Pow-R-Gear

accommodated six-high 800A

breakers, Pow-R-M-S

accommodates four-high

800A breakers).

Ratings

Chronology

Pow-R-Gear was built

by Westinghouse in

St. Louis, MO, from 1977 to

1990. Pow-R-M-S was built

by Westinghouse, and later

Cutler-Hammer in Asheville,

NC, from 1990 to 2003.

Replacement Capabilities

Systems Pow-R Breaker Type SPB-65

with Pow-R-Trip 7 Trip Unit

Factory Repair Service for

SPB Breakers

These repair services apply to

breakers that have exceeded

the original factory warranty

and are now referred to as

non-warranty repairs. The

Systems Pow-R Breaker

family consists of fixed

breakers, either front

connected or rear connected,

and drawout breakers,

either behind-the-door or

through-the-door design.

Four-pole breakers are only

available in the fixed design

front or rear connected.

The Cutler-Hammer SPB

factory authorized non-

warranty repair service

features:

●Quality SPB repair specified

and audited by factory

engineers according to

procedures

●Only genuine new Cutler-

Hammer replacement

parts are used

●Original factory

specifications and design

drawings are used by

factory trained technicians

New SPB Circuit Breakers

New SPB breakers are

available for replacement

or to fill existing vacant

cells. All breakers are newly

manufactured and are

mechanically and electrically

the same as the breakers

originally specified and

supplied.

SPB Breaker Cell Provisions

These are used to convert

blank cell compartments into

breaker cell compartments.

Provisions are usually

available for Pow-R-M-S

drawout designs. However,

provisions are not available

for Pow-R-M-S/F fixed

designs or for the Pow-R-

Gear design. In all cases, care

must be taken to properly

identify the original shop

order before proceeding or

making final determination.

SPB Circuit Breaker Parts

An extensive inventory of

newly manufactured breaker

renewal parts is available for

SPB circuit breakers.

Technology Upgrades

Pow-R-Trip 7 Trip Unit Upgrades

Pow-R-Trip 7 was the

solid-state trip unit used on

Pow-R-Gear switchboards. An

upgrade from the Pow-R-Trip

7 trip unit is also available.

Modification to the breaker

and existing switchboard is

required. Refer to Ta b 17 ,

Pages V12-T17-35

to V12-T17-36.

Digitrip Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Trip unit retrofit kits are

available for all SPB breaker

frames. Refer to Ta b 1 7 ,

Pages V12-T17-35

to V12-T17-36.

IQ and PowerNet

Communications Retrofits

Cutler-Hammer IQ products

replace existing analog

meters, instruments, and

protective relays with

microprocessor-based

solid-state true rms sensing

devices. IQ products can be

furnished as components for

field installation on the

switchgear. The IQ products

include the IQ Analyzer, IQ

DP-4000, IQ 200 and IQ 300.

Communications can then be

tied to the Cutler-Hammer

PowerNet system.

SPD Series Surge

Protective Devices

Refer to Page V12-T15-6 of

this publication.

Device Rating

Pow-R-Gear

Switchboard bus 800–4000A

Protective devices 100–5000A

Voltage 120–600V

Interrupting capacity 100 kA

Pow-R-M-S

Switchboard bus 800–5000A

SPB breaker 400–5000A

Voltage 240–600V

Interrupting capacity 42–100 kA

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T15-5

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

WF/WRP, ES and Pow-R-Line C

WF/WRP, ES and

Pow-R-Line C

WRP Switchboard, Rear Access with

Panel-Mounted Molded-Case Breakers

Pow-R-Line C Switchboard,

Front Access with Panel-Mounted

Molded-Case Breakers

Product Description

This class of switchboard is

commonly called a Class II

switchboard. Generally

speaking, this means

individually or panel-mounted

main and panel-mounted

feeder devices.

The WF/WRP switchboard that

was built by Westinghouse in

St. Louis, MO, consisted of

front- or rear-accessible

enclosures with various depths

depending on the devices

within the structure. In the

front access design, Type WF,

the rear of the switchboard

was flush for all structures; the

rear access design, Type WRP,

was flush in the front and rear.

The WF/WRP switchboard

design accommodated the

use of DS, SPB, bolted

pressure switch (CBC),

molded-case circuit breaker

or FDP fusible switches as

main devices. Panel-mounted

feeder devices could be

either molded-case circuit

breakers or FDP fusible

switches. The WF/WRP

design was moved to

Sumter, SC, and Visalia, CA,

and consequently enhanced

with the introduction of

the Series C breaker

and some structural and

busing changes.

In 1962, Eaton entered the

switchboard

market with the

purchase of Mullenbach.

Soon after the Mullenbach

acquisition, Eaton entered

into an agreement with

Westinghouse to supply

breakers and fusible devices

for panelboards and

switchboards. This led to

the introduction of the ES

switchboard using exclusively

Westinghouse molded-case

circuit breakers.

In the late 1980s,

Westinghouse introduced

a new and improved version

of the WF/WRP switchboard

using the Series C breaker.

This new switchboard line,

Pow-R-Line C, designates a

family of service distribution

switchboards incorporating

new design concepts that

fit the ever increasing need

for applications on high

short-circuit systems,

while retaining maximum

standardization, safety and

convenience throughout

the line.

Ratings

Chronology

WF/WRP was introduced by

Westinghouse in St. Louis,

MO, in 1955. In 1988, the

design was transferred

to Sumter, SC, and

Visalia, CA, as Pow-R-Line C

switchboards. Consequently,

the Cutler-Hammer Type ES

switchboard version was

later introduced in 1991 as a

replacement for their version

of the WF/WRP switchboard.

Replacement Capabilities

Eaton offers an extensive

amount of products to

support WF/WRP, ES and

Pow-R-Line C switchboards.

Pow-R-Line C Match and

Lineup Cubicles

Newly manufactured

Pow-R-Line C switchboard

structures to match and

line up to existing WF/WRP

switchboards.

New Pow-R-

Line C structures can also

connect to existing

switchboards (Type ES)

with a transition section.

New Circuit Breakers

New SPB, DS and RD

molded-case circuit breakers

are available for replacement

or to fill existing vacant

cells. All breakers are

newly manufactured

and are mechanically and

electrically the same as

the breakers originally

specified and supplied.

Circuit Breaker

Provisions/Connector

Breaker provisions are

required in switchboards

when there is an existing

space in a structure that is

to be filled with a breaker.

Provisions/connectors are

available for most ratings

of the WF/WRP design.

Provisions are available for all

ratings of the Pow-R-Line C

designs including all parts

required to complete the

cell in accordance with the

switchboard as originally

supplied.

Factory Repair Service for

SPB Breakers

Factory authorized non-

warranty repair for all SPB

breaker frames. Refer to

Page V12-T15-4 of this

publication.

Circuit Breaker Parts

An extensive inventory of

newly manufactured breaker

renewal parts are available for

SPB, DS and RD molded-case

circuit breakers.

Switchboard Structure Parts

Switchboard parts are

available for most designs.

Newly manufactured

replacement parts (such as

doors, breaker provisions,

lift trucks, metering, etc.)

are available.

Device Rating

WF/WRP

Switchboard bus 600–4000A

Protective devices 15–4000A

Voltage 120–600V

Interrupting capacity 10–200 kA

ES switchboard bus 600–4000A

Protective devices 15–4000A

Voltage 120–600V

Interrupting capacity 10–200 kA

Pow-R-Line C

Switchboard bus 600–6000A

Protective devices 15–6000A

Voltage 208–600V

Interrupting capacity 10–200 kA

V12-T15-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage)

Clipper Power System—Visor Series, IQ and PowerNet Retrofits

Technology Upgrades

Digitrip Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Trip unit retrofit kits are

available for all SPB and

DS breaker frames. Refer to

Ta b 17 , Pages V12-T17-33

to V12-T17-36.

SPD Series Surge

Protective Devices

Surge Protective Device

Product Description

Eaton SPD series of surge

protective devices ensures

that equipment is protected

with the safest, most reliable

and most advanced UL 1449

3rd Edition certified protectors.

The array of features, options

and configurations ensures

that there is a unit for all

electrical applications.

The SPD family protects

equipment from the

damaging effects of surges

and electrical line noise. Field

installation is required.

Benefits

●SPD Series can be

externally mounted to

existing distribution

equipment

●Surge ratings: 50, 80, 100,

120, 160, 200, 250, 300

and 400 kA

●Standard NEMA 1

enclosure, optional

NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X

enclosures.

●Surface or flush mounting

●Full range of diagnostic and

monitoring options

●Remote mountable

display panel

For more information about

the Eaton family of surge

products, contact your local

Eaton Field Sales office.

IQ and PowerNet

Communications Retrofits

Cutler-Hammer IQ products

replace existing analog

meters, instruments and

protective relays with

micropro

cessor-based

solid-state true rms sensing

devices. IQ products can

be furnished as components

for field installation on the

switchboard or can be

provided as new replacement

front panels. The new

replacement front panels

available for switchboard

assemblies include the IQ

devices mounted and wired.

The IQ products can be

matched in numerous

combinations to include the IQ

Analyzer, IQ DP-4000, IQ 200

and IQ 300. Communications

can then be tied to the Cutler-

Hammer PowerNet System.

Further Information

Pricing Information

Price List for Pow-R-M-S switchboard—PL 32-624A

Price List for SPB breakers—PL.22A.01.P.E

Publication

Number Description

CA08100003E Volume 2—Commercial Distribution, Switchboards, Tab 4

RP01301013E Systems Pow-R Breakers Renewal Parts and Accessories

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T16-1

High Resistance Grounding System

Type C-HRG Products

16 High Resistance Grounding System

Type C-HRG (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-2

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-2

Product History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-2

Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-2

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-2

Sequence of Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-3

Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-4

Further Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-4

Type C-HRG (Medium Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-5

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-5

Product History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-5

Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-5

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-5

Sequence of Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-6

Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T16-7

V12-T16-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

High Resistance Grounding System

Type C-HRG

(Low Voltage)

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

Wall-Mounted C-HRG

(resistors not shown)

Free-Standing C-HRG

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer® Type C-HRG

from Eaton’s electrical

business is designed to

improve the continuity of

electrical service to critical

processes. Systems designers

sometimes use ungrounded

distribution systems to avoid

interrupting service during

a ground fault. However,

ungrounded systems have

a significant disadvantage—

the distribution system is

subject to the harmful

effects of ground faults, like

high transient overvoltages.

The Type C-HRG helps

customers add the benefits

of a grounded system to their

ungrounded system.

Product History

High resistance grounding

technology has been offered

as an integral system within

Eaton low voltage switchgear

and switchboard products

since the early 1970s. In 1994,

Eaton adopted the technology

into the C-HRG, which is a

standalone or wall-mounted

product ideal for adapting to

the existing electrical system.

Product History Time Line

C-HRG

Low Voltage

Product 1994 2000 Present

General Information

Overview

Where continuity of service is

a high priority, high resistance

grounding can add the safety

of a grounded system while

minimizing the risk of service

interruptions due to grounds.

The concept is a simple one:

provide a path for ground

current via a resistance that

limits the current magnitude,

and monitor

to determine

when an abnormal

condition exists.

The ground current path is

provided at the point where

the service begins by placing

resistance in the connection

from system neutral-to-

ground. Control equipment

continuously measures

ground current; a relay

detects when the current

exceeds a predetermined

level. An alarm alerts building

personnel that a ground

exists. The system has

built-in fault tracing means

to assist in finding the

source of the ground. An

integral transformer provides

control power from the

primary source.

Minimum Criteria for Use

High resistance grounding

systems can be applied

to either grounded or

ungrounded three-wire

distribution systems.

Per NEC® 1996, 250.5(b)

exception No. 5, the following

criteria must be met before

using the C-HRG:

●The conditions of

maintenance and

supervision ensure that

only qualified persons will

service the installation

●Continuity of power

is required

●Ground detectors are

installed on the system

●Line-to-neutral loads are

not served

Wye or Delta System

Adding the Type C-HRG

to a wye connected system

requires only that the resistors

supplied be connected in

series with the neutral-to-

ground connection of the

power source. Adding

the Type C-HRG to an

ungrounded delta system

requires the creation of a

neutral point. Transformers

are supplied for that purpose

in the enclosure. The resistors

supplied are then connected

at that point. In both cases,

the components supplied are

chosen to limit the ground

current to a maximum value

of 5A.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T16-3

High Resistance Grounding System

Typical C-HRG Application

Ground Fault Detection

When one phase of a system

becomes grounded, additional

current will flow. As all ground

current must flow through the

grounding resistor assembly,

a current sensing relay is

placed in this circuit, allowing

detection when a ground

fault occurs.If chosen, a

voltage-sensing relay can

be provided to accomplish

the same function.

Pulser Circuit

The pulser circuit offers a

convenient means to locate

the faulted feeder and to trace

the fault to its origin. The

pulser is available any time a

fault has been detected. The

“pulse” light flashes on and

off, corresponding to the

ON-OFF cycles of the

pulsing contactor. The pulser

contactor switches a bank of

resistors on and off, allowing

a momentary increase in the

ground current.

Ground Fault Location

The current pulses can

be noted with a clamp-on

ammeter when the ammeter

is placed around the cables or

the conduit feeding the fault.

The operation tests each

conduit or set of cables until

the pulsing current is noted.

By moving the ammeter

along the conduit, the fault

can be traced to its origin.

The fault may be located at

the point where the pulsing

current drops off or stops.

If little or no change in the

pulsing current is noted along

the entire length of a conduit,

then the fault may be in the

connected load.

DS-VSR

Motor

Starter

200 hp

Motor Loads

MMM

MCC

Bus Duct

Feeder

Breaker

Feeder

Breaker

Feeder

Breaker

ConduitConduit Cable Tray

Distribution

Switchboard Transformer

Panel-

board

Misc. 3W

Loads

Main Breaker

600V (Max.)

C-HRG—

High Resistance

Grounding

System

Source

System

Transformer

Sequence of Operations

Normal

●Green “normal” light on

●Red “ground fault” light off

●White “pulse” light off

●System control switch in

“normal” position

●Reset control switch in

either “auto” or “manual”

Test

●Turn and hold the system

control switch in the

“test” position. Phase B

will be grounded via the

test resistor

●The ground current will

activate the sensing

circuit, causing the green

“normal” light to turn off

and the red “ground fault”

light to turn on. The pulser

will be activated as well

●The white “pulse” light

will turn on and off as the

pulser contactor closes

and opens

●The ground current

ammeter will display

the total ground current,

including the incremental

pulse current

●When ready, return the

system control switch to

“normal.” The pulser will

stop. If the reset control is

in the “manual” position,

turn it to “reset” to reset

the fault sensing circuit

●The red “ground fault”

light will turn off, and the

green “normal” light will

turn on

●

Test mode is not available if

the system

is detecting a

ground. The sensing circuit

will disable the test circuit.

Ground Fault

●When the sensing circuit

detects a fault, the green

“normal” light will turn off

and the red “ground fault”

light will turn on

●The ground current

ammeter will indicate the

total ground current

●To use the pulser, turn the

system control switch to

“pulse.” The pulser

contactor will cycle on and

off as controlled by the

recycle timer relay

●Use the clamp-on ammeter

to locate the faulted feeder.

Open the feeder and clear

the fault

●If the reset control switch

is in the “manual” position,

turn it to “reset” to reset

the sensing circuit

Note: If reset control is in “auto,”

it will reset itself.

●When ready to restore

service to the load, close

the feeder

●

Return the system control

to “normal”

Note

1Phase-to-neutral loads cannot be fed

from the same system transformer to

which the C-HRG is connected. These

loads must be fed from a downstream,

delta-wye transformer with a solidly

grounded neutral on the secondary.

V12-T16-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

High Resistance Grounding System

Catalog Numbering System

Decoding the Catalog Numbering System

Further Information

Enclosure Type

F= Free-standing, Type 1

S= Free-standing, Type 1 with screened vents

R= Free-standing, Type 3R

W= Wall-mounted, Type 1

N= No enclosure (panel-mounted)

V= Wall-mounted, Type 1 with 3R resistor enclosure

F 4 W N C R N S F 4 6

System Neutral Point

W= Wye (and accessible at system)

Z= Delta (zig-zag grounding transformers)

D= Delta (wye-broken delta grounding transformers)

Distribution System Voltage

6 = 600V

4 = 480V

3 = 380V

2 = 208–240V

Distribution System Fault Current

6= 25 kA at 600V, 65 kA at 480 and 380V, 100 kA at 240V

1= 150 kA at 480 and 380V, 200 kA at 240V

2= 200 kA at 600V, 480V or 380/280V

N= Not applicable (when using “W” above)

Ground Fault Sensing

C= Current-sensing relay, with noise filter

D= Voltage sensing relay, double set point

System Frequency

5 = 50 Hz

6 = 60 Hz

Wire Harness Length for “N”

(No Enclosure)

4 = 4-foot harness

6 = 6-foot harness

8 = 8-foot harness

0 = 10-foot harness

2 = 12-foot harness

Wire Marker

M = Machine printed

F = Sleeve type

H = Heat shrink, sleeve type

Indicating Lights

S= Standard incandescent

L= Standard LED

P= Push-to-test incandescent

D= Push-to-test LED

T= Transformer-type incandescent

X= Push-to-test transformer-type

Loss of Control Power Relay (Alarm)

N= No relay

L= Alarm relay with 1NO/1NC contact

Audible Alarm

N= No audible alarm

R= Alarm horn with re-alarm timer

Publication

Number Description

SN.44C.01.S.E Sales Notes for C-HRG

— Bidman pricing

TD.44C.01.T.E Technical Data for C-HRG

SA-32-602B Sales Aid for high resistance grounding systems

IB 32-698C Instruction Booklet for high resistance grounding system

CA08104001E Eaton’s Consulting Application Guide

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T16-5

High Resistance Grounding System

Type C-HRG

(Medium Voltage)

Free-Standing C-HRG

Product Description

The Type C-HRG is designed

to improve the continuity

of electrical service to

critical processes. Systems

designers sometimes use

ungrounded distribution

systems to avoid interrupting

service during a ground

fault. However, ungrounded

systems have a significant

disadvantage—the

distribution system is subject

to the harmful effects of

ground faults, like high

transient overvoltages.

The Type C-HRG helps

customers add the benefits

of a grounded system to their

ungrounded system.

Product History

High resistance grounding

technology has been offered

as an integral system within

medium voltage switchgear

for many years. In 1996, Eaton

adopted the technology into

the C-HRG, which is a stand-

alone product

ideal for

adapting to the existing

electrical system.

Product History Time Line

C-HRG

Low Voltage

Product 1995 2000 Present

General Information

High Resistance Grounding System

Overview

Where continuity of service

is a high priority, high

resistance grounding can

add the safety of a grounded

system while minimizing the

risk of service interruptions

due to grounds. The concept

is a simple one: provide a

path for ground current via a

grounding transformer (with

adjustable resistance across

its secondary) that limits the

current magnitude and a

monitor to determine when

an abnormal condition exists.

The ground current path is

provided at the point where

the service begins, by placing

a predominantly resistive

impedance in the connection

from system neutral to

ground. Control equipment

continuously measures

ground current; a relay

detects when the current

exceeds a predetermined

level. An alarm alerts building

personnel that a ground

exists. The system has built-

in fault tracing means to

assist in finding the source of

the ground. A 120 Vac supply

(remote) is required for

control power for the system.

Minimum Criteria for Use

The C-HRG MV is offered

at the 5 kV class rating. It

can be applied to delta or

wye ungrounded three-wire

distribution systems.

Standard dimensions are

36.00 W x 40.00 D x

92.00 H inches (914.4 W x

1016.0 D x 2336.8 H mm).

Wye HRG

51N

Delta HRG

GEN

Bus

Duct

Bus

Duct

To Power

Circuit

Conduit

5 kV Switchgear

To MCC

Cable

Bus

Duct

Wye HRG

51N

Utility

C-HRG—High Resistance

Grounding System

V12-T16-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

High Resistance Grounding System

Wye or Delta System

To add high resistance

grounding to a wye-connected

system, resistors are placed

across the secondary of a

grounding transformer whose

primary is placed in series

with the neutral-to-ground

connection of the power

source. To add high resistance

grounding to an ungrounded

delta-connected system,

a neutral point must be

created. Three single-

phase transformers can be

interconnected in a wye-

broken delta configuration to

provide such a neutral point.

Ground Fault Detection

When one phase becomes

grounded, additional current

above the charging level will

flow. As all ground current

must flow through the

grounding resistor/grounding

transformer assembly, an

ammeter in this circuit will

read the total amount of

ground current. By placing

a current-sensing relay in

series with the ammeter, the

current relay can be adjusted

to pick up at a level in excess

of the capacitive charging

current, thus indicating the

abnormal condition.

Alternatively, an optional

voltmeter relay can be

connected across the

grounding resistors, to

accomplish the same

function.

Pulser Circuit

The pulser circuit offers a

convenient means to locate

the faulted feeder and to trace

the fault to its origin. The

pulser is available any time a

fault has been detected. The

pulse intervals are controlled

by an adjustable recycle timer.

The “pulse” light flashes on

and off, corresponding to

the ON-OFF cycles of the

pulser contactor. The pulser

contactor switches a bank

of resistors on and off,

thus allowing a momentary

increase in the ground current.

Ground Fault Location

The current pulses can

be noted with a clamp-on

ammeter when the ammeter

is placed around the cables or

the conduit feeding the fault.

The operator tests each

conduit or set of cables until

the pulsing current is noted.

By moving the ammeter

along the conduit, or checking

the conduit periodically along

its length, the fault can be

traced to its origin. The fault

may be located at the point

where the pulsing current

drops off or stops. If little or

no change in the pulsing

current is noted along the

entire length of a conduit,

then the fault may be in the

connected load.

Standard Features

●Current sensing

ground fault detection

(2–10A pickup/0.5–20

second delay)

●Ground current

transformer

(10/10 ratio)

●Control circuit pull

fuseblock

●Ground current ammeter

(0–10A, 1% accuracy)

●Indicating lights Red

(ground fault), Green

(normal), White (pulse)

●Adjustable pulsing timer

(0–10 seconds)

●Tapped resistors (limits

primary current to 3–6A)

●Three-position selector

switch (normal, pulse, test)

●Control switch for manual

or automatic reset

●Ground fault contacts

(1NO/1NC)

●Shorting terminal block for

ground current CT

●UL® label

●Wiremarkers

Sequence of Operations

Normal

●Green “normal” light on

●Red “ground fault” light off

●White “pulse” light off

●System control switch in

“normal” position

●Reset control switch in

either “auto” or “manual”

Test

●Turn and hold the system

control switch in the “test”

position

●This mode will test the

control circuitry only. It will

bypass the sensing circuit

and cause the green

“normal” light to turn off

and the red “ground fault”

light to turn on. The pulser

will be activated as well

●The white “pulse” light will

turn on and off as the pulser

contactor closes and

opens. However, the

ground current ammeter

will not display the total

ground current, including

the incremental pulse

current

●When ready, return the

system control switch to

“normal.” The pulser will

stop. If the reset control is

in the “manual” position,

turn it to “reset” to reset

the fault sensing circuit

●The red “ground fault”

light will turn off, and the

green “normal” light will

turn on

●Test mode is not available if

the system is detecting a

ground. The sensing circuit

will disable the test circuit

Ground Fault

●When the sensing circuit

detects a fault, the green

“normal” light will turn off

and the red “ground fault”

light will turn on

●The ground current

ammeter will indicate the

total ground current

●To use the pulser, turn the

system control switch to

“pulse.” The pulser

contactor will cycle on and

off as controlled by the

recycle timer relay

●Use the clamp-on ammeter

to locate the faulted feeder.

Open the feeder and clear

the fault

●If the reset control switch

is in the “manual” position,

turn it to “reset” to reset

the sensing circuit

Note: If reset control is in “auto,”

it will reset itself.

●When ready to restore

service to the load, close

the feeder

●

Return the system control

to “normal”

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T16-7

High Resistance Grounding System

Catalog Numbering System

Customer Required Information

A C-HRG High Resistance Grounding Assembly can be completely described by an 8-digit

catalog number: MVRG-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Example: MVRG-FWWCLLTS defines a free-standing Type 1 enclosure, 4200 V/60 Hz, Wye-connected system, current-

sensing control scheme, alarm horn with re-alarm timer, alarm relay with 1NO and 1NC, transformer type incandescent lights,

wrap-on wiremarkers.

Enclosure Type

F = Free-standing NEMA® 1

R = Free-standing NEMA 3R non-walk in outdoor

Free-standing enclosure for mounting ground transformers

and resistors internally

System Neutral Point

W= Wye

D= D (Wye broken delta grounding transformers)

Choose wye when the neutral point of the power source is

accessible for direct connection to grounding transformer. Choose

Delta when there is no neutral or when neutral is not accessible.

Distribution System Voltage

W= 4200V 60 Hz

X= 2400V 60 Hz

Y= 3300V 60 Hz

Voltage of distribution system

Fault Sensing

C = Overcurrent relay (current sensing)

V = Single set point voltmeter relay (voltage sensing)

D = Indicating voltmeter only (voltage sensing)

Wire Markers

S= Standard wrap-on

T= Tube/heat shrink type

Marks all internal wiring for ease of

maintenance.

Indicating Lamps

L= LED lamps

T= Transformer-type incandescent lamps

X= Push-to-test transformer-type

Standard lights are industrial, oil-tight,

transformer type. Optional are the same type lights except

with a push-to-test feature.

Loss of Control Power Alarm

N= No relay

L= Alarm relay with 1NO/1NC

A relay is connected across the

customer’s 120 Vac supply.

Audible Alarm

N= No audible alarm

L= Alarm horn with re-alarm timer

Alarm contacts are standard on all assemblies.

F W W C L L T S

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-1

Switchgear

DS Low Voltage Switchgear

DHP Medium Voltage Switchgear

17 Switchgear

Low Voltage Switchgear

Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line . V12-T17-2

DB Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-3

DS Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-5

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-5

DSII Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-6

Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-7

Magnum DS Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-8

Systems Pow-R Breaker (SPB)

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-14

Product History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-14

Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-15

Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-15

Product Support Services—Breaker Service Center . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-16

Further Information, Pricing Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-16

Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Product Description, Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-17

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Product Description, Product History,

Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-53

DH—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-55

DHP—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-56

VCP—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-57

VCP-W—Product Description, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . V12-T17-58

Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-59

Competitive Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-60

SURE CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-62

Further Information, Pricing Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-64

Medium Voltage Load Interrupter

Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line . V12-T17-65

LBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-66

Replacement Capabilities—WLI/MVS/MVS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-67

Further Information, Pricing Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T17-70

V12-T17-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Low Voltage—Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Assemblies and

Power Circuit Breakers

DS Switchgear

DSII Switchgear Assembly

Magnum DS Switchgear

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer® low voltage

switchgear assemblies from

Eaton’s electrical business are

metal enclosures that typically

contain power circuit breakers,

control/measuring devices

such as relays and meters,

and

the power bus work. The

rated maximum

voltage is

600V, for AC power systems.

Low voltage switchgear is

used to protect,

control and

monitor the electrical power

system. Present design low

voltage switchgear conforms

to the following standards:

ANSI C37.20.1, C37.51, UL®

1558, NEMA® SG3, NEMA

SG5 and CSA®.

Perhaps the most unique

benefit of switchgear is the

power circuit breakers within

—they have a “withstand

rating” and more flexible trip

units, all which provide better

coordination of downstream

circuit breakers. It is

also common to find

this switchgear coupled

to a power distribution

transformer, making the

entire assembly called a

secondary unit substation.

Product History

It is very uncommon to find

any more installed-base of

the Westinghouse® DA or

DK vintage switchgear—

both vintages preceded the

Westinghouse DB switchgear

design dated 1950.

It is very common to find

DB switchgear with hundreds

of thousands of DB circuit

breakers still in operation.

In 1967, Westinghouse

introduced DS switchgear

along with the DS and

DSL circuit breakers. The

first DS breakers used the

original solid-state trip unit

called the Amptector

. The

Amptector was

later replaced

by the microprocessor-based,

true rms sensing, Digitrip™

trip unit models 500, 600,

700 and 800.

In 1994, the DS breaker

became available

in the new

DSII switchgear assembly.

DSII switchgear is designed

to be much easier to install

and to maintain. It also uses

new “U” shape vertical bus

design. Perhaps the most

noticeable external difference

is the removable control

circuit terminal block tray,

which is charcoal-gray and

located above each breaker

door. Upon its arrival in 1996,

the DSII breaker became the

standard offering in DSII

switchgear assemblies. The

DSII breaker was the first

breaker to use the newer

family of Digitrip trip unit

models 510, 610, 810, 910,

OPTIM™

750 and 1050. DS

breakers also provide

genuine

standardization of breaker

wiring, particularly the

secondary contact points

without reducing features

and options.

In 1998, the Magnum™ DS

switchgear along with the

new Magnum DS breaker

was introduced. One major

advantage of the Magnum

DS design is higher ratings

in less space. Perhaps the

most visible difference with

Magnum is the “through-the-

door” design, permitting

visibility of the breaker’s

trip unit without opening the

door. Another new feature

of the Magnum design is

the secondary contact block

location at the top-front of

each cell, rather than in the

rear as with previous designs.

Magnum DS switchgear

assemblies also have an

isolated secondary control

wireway, uniquely located

at the side of each structure.

Product History Time Line

Page Product 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

DB Switchgear—East Pittsburgh

DS Switchgear—East Pittsburgh (Vintage 1)

DS Switchgear—East Pittsburgh (Vintage 2)

WPA Switchgear—St. Louis

DS Switchgear—St. Louis (Vintage 3)

DS Switchgear—St. Louis (Vintage 4)

DS Switchgear—Asheville (Vintage 5)

DSII Switchgear with DS Breaker—Asheville

DSII Switchgear with DSII Breaker—Asheville

Magnum DS Switchgear

V12-T17-3

V12-T17-4

V12-T17-6

V12-T17-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-3

Switchgear

DB Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

DB Assemblies and

Power Circuit Breakers

DB Switchgear with DB Air

Circuit Breakers

Product Description

DB switchgear should be

found only with the

Westinghouse logo and

nameplates. The last

assembly shipped about

15 years before the

acquisition by Eaton.

Many breakers were

originally shipped with

electromechanical trip

units, but it is common to

find many of them retrofitted

with Amptector or Digitrip

trip units.

One characteristic of this

switchgear is the viewable,

through-the-door breaker

handle, which could be

operated without opening

the door.

DB assemblies were offered

with either “Fixed-Mounted”

breakers or “Drawout

(three-position) type.

Fixed breakers have no

test position.

The breakers in this

switchgear design include:

●DB15, DB25, DB50, DB75,

DB100 (standard)

●DBL15, DBL25, DBL50

(current limiting)

Special application breakers

include:

●DBF6, DBF16, DBF40

(DC field discharge)

●DBW15, DBW25, DBW50

(resistance welding)

The DB switchgear

structures were

approximately 90 3/8-inch

high construction with a

universal frame that

accommodated breaker

compartment widths of

18.00, 26.00, 30.00 and

36.00 inches. All main bus

joints and tap connections

are silver plated and tightly

clamped with through-

bolts to ensure maximum

conductivity. The outdoor

switchgear was a walk-in

type with rear hinged

doors for easy access

to connections.

Ratings

●DB switchgear bus

800–4000A

●DB breaker 15–4000A

●Voltage 208–600V

●Interrupting capacity

15–150 kA

Chronology

This switchgear was

manufactured in East

Pittsburgh, PA, from

1950 to 1980.

Replacement Capabilities

DB-AR Replacement Breakers

DB25-AR600NM—Front View

DB25-AR600NM—Rear View

The DB-AR breakers are

brand new air replacements

(AR-Series) designed to

replace the original DB

breaker. This solution is

available for most three-

position drawout DB breakers

within original Westinghouse

switchgear. The new

AR-Series breaker permits

DB switchgear modernization

by using state-of-the-art

Eaton Magnum breaker

technology. The DB-AR is

designed, manufactured

and tested to applicable

IEEE/ANSI standards.

Class 1 Reconditioning

Reconditioning Service is

available for most frame sizes

of the DB breaker. Class 1

Reconditioning is Eaton’s

process of maintaining low

voltage power breakers to

their fullest capability. We

disassemble each breaker,

clean and test each part

using

component-specific methods,

then

reassemble and perform

final testing to ensure that

each breaker is restored to

operating condition—all using

the original manufacturer’s

instructions and parts. New trip

units can also be retrofitted

during this process.

DB Breaker Parts

DB breaker replacement parts

are available built from the

original drawings and design

specifications. Among the

items stocked are asbestos-

free arc chutes, complete

pole units, contacts, primary

disconnects and coils.

DB Air Circuit Breakers

New factory manufactured

breakers are available

in three-position drawout

configurations only for the

DB15, DBF6 and DBF16. Fix-

mounted and single-position

configuration breakers are

available for the DB15, DB25,

DBL25, DB50 or DBL50.

Technology Upgrades

Digitrip Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Available for all DB breaker

frame sizes. Please see the

switchgear trip unit retrofit

kits on V12-T17-17 through

V12-T17-51 for more detail.

DB-VSR (Vacuum

Starter Retrofits)

For FVNR, motor-starting

applications ONLY—this

solution significantly lengthens

the life-span of the “motor

starter” and provides better

motor overload protection. The

DB25-LV-VSR contains the

V201 vacuum contactor and

the C440 motor overload relay.

DB25-LV-VSR

V12-T17-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

DS Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers—Vintage

DS Switchgear Assemblies General Information

Description Ratings Chronology

DS Switchgear Vintage I and II, 1969–1984 at East Pittsburgh, PA

The first vintage of DS switchgear was the first switchgear that incorporated the DS breaker with a solid-state trip

unit (Amptector). During this time, the DS532 breaker was used. The DS532 breaker was a 3000A frame breaker with

an interrupting rating of 50,000 symmetrical amperes. The structures themselves were of a stepped roof design that

incorporated a standard bolted copper or flash welded aluminum bus design. Other characteristics of this switchgear

include the following: rear frame height was 87.50 inches, flat roof sheets, ventilated front doors, wire ducts,

removable instrument modules and a welded frame design. The breaker compartments were also different with fuse

trucks stacked above the mains, the DS840, DS532 and the newly developed DS632. The outdoor design

incorporated the use of a walk-in type side door entry.

The second vintage of switchgear was a new design that incorporated the use of both bolted copper and welded

extruded aluminum rise bus. It is basically the same as the first vintage but with a revised bus design.

800–4000A

208/600V

The first vintage was built from September of 1969 to

approximately September of 1973 in East Pittsburgh, PA,

using the shop order numbers with a prefix of 24Y. The

second DS vintage was also built in East Pittsburgh,

which used the 27Y prefix on shop orders. This vintage

was built the same time as the WPA design in St. Louis,

MO. The switchgear in East Pittsburgh was designed to

be used for industrial applications, whereas the St. Louis

design was built for commercial applications.

WPA Switchgear, 1973–1984 at St. Louis, MO

The WPA switchgear was designed for commercial applications that also used DS breakers. which was similar

to the East Pittsburgh design for industrial applications. The two designs differed structurally but used the same

breakers. Some characteristics of the WPA design are as follows: riser bus was tapered design, frames were bolted

and not welded, height of 9.00 inches, neutral bus mounted on rear frame, did not use removable instrument

compartments and outdoor design had front and rear doors. In all, the WPA design differed extensively compared

to the East Pittsburgh design.

800–4000A

208/600V

This vintage was built from February of 1973 to

approximately October of 1984 in St. Louis. Usually the

switchgear is identified by General Order and Item

numbers. Shop order numbers were not used.

DS Switchgear Vintage III, 1984 at St. Louis, MO

The third generation of DS switchgear was introduced due to the change of plant locations. It is classified as a

vintage because it was the beginning of the merge between two plants (St. Louis and East Pittsburgh). The

engineering was completed in East Pittsburgh and the assembly was built in St. Louis, along with the Cincinnati, OH,

plant to help pick up the slack until full production in St. Louis. This vintage was similar to the previous 27Y style with a

few modifications. It was the first time that both DS and DSL were used in switchgear by the use of a conjunction box.

The physical appearance also changed by increasing the height to 92.00 inches and adding top hat vents that protruded

4.00 inches above the switchgear. Internally the neutral bus was located in the bus compartment along with unified

breaker compartments for the variety of breakers.

800–4000A

208/600V

This vintage lasted from May of 1984 to approximately

October of 1984 in East Pittsburgh. Usually the switchgear

shop order number is defined by a prefix of 28Y.

DS Switchgear Vintage IV, 1984–1990 at St. Louis, MO

This vintage of switchgear was a combination of the St. Louis WPA and East Pittsburgh design. The design was

classified as a hybrid between the two that consisted of the East Pittsburgh design in the front compartments that

held the DS breaker, and the St. Louis design in the rear compartment that housed the bus. The rear compartment

still used the tapered riser bus (a characteristic of the St. Louis design), which was used right up until the DS

switchgear moved to Asheville, NC. The design was very similar to the design today except for the different riser

bus along with the height being 92.00 inches.

800–4000A

208/600V

This vintage was built from October of 1984 to

approximately May of 1990 in St. Louis. Usually the

switchgear is identified by general order and item

numbers. 28Y shop order numbers started in 1987 and

continued into the Asheville design.

DS Switchgear Vintage V, 1990–1996 at Asheville, NC

The vintage was built from May of 1990 to the end of 1996 in Asheville. The switchgear is identified by shop order

number 28Y. The switchgear incorporates both designs with the option for the variety of IQ products. The riser bus

went back to a full rated type that is bolted copper only. Aluminum bus work was initially done only on special orders

at customer request. The switchgear also has many improvements such as the design of an instrument panel door

that was able to accommodate three device panels across DS632 in the C and D compartments and a variety of

communication capabilities with IMPACC. The outdoor design changed with the concept of a side walk-in enclosure.

800–4000A

208/600V

This vintage was built from May of 1990 to the end of

1996 in Asheville. The switchgear is identified by shop

order number 28Y.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-5

Switchgear

DS Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

DS Assemblies and

Power Circuit Breakers

DS Switchgear Assembly

Typical Design, 1991

Product Description

DS switchgear was

introduced in 1969 and would

be found mostly with the

Westinghouse logo and

nameplates. However, some

assemblies shipped after the

1994 acquisition by Eaton

could likely have product labels

with both Westinghouse and

Cutler-Hammer product names.

DS switchgear uses the

drawout version

of the DS

and DSL low voltage power

breakers. Each breaker is

located within an individual

compartment. Each

compartment has extension

rails for supporting the

breaker while removing it

from the compartment. The

breaker can be in either of

the following positions with

the door closed:

●Connect

●Te s t

●Disconnect

●Remove

The original DS breaker

contained the original solid-

state trip unit—Amptector.

The Amptector was later

replaced by the original family

of microprocessor-based,

true rms sensing, Digitrip trip

unit models 500, 600, 700

and 800. In the late 1990s,

DS breakers started shipping

with Digitrip models 510,

610, 810 or 910.

The breakers in this design

included:

●DS206, 206H, 206E, 416,

416H, 416C, 420, 532, 632

or 840

●DSL206, 416, 420, 632

or 840

DS metal-enclosed

switchgear was designed to

meet the following standards:

●ANSI C37.20.1

●UL 1558

●NEMA SG5

DS low voltage power air

circuit breakers (LVPACB)

were designed to meet the

following standards:

●ANSI C37.13, C37.16,

C37.50 and C37.51

●UL 1066

●NEMA SG3

Chronology

There are five vintages of

DS switchgear. Please

see General Information

on Page V12-T17-4 for

more detail.

Replacement Capabilities

DS206H—Front

DS206H—Rear

DS Cell Provisions

New DS Air Circuit Breakers

New DS circuit breakers are

available for replacement or

to fill existing vacant cells.

All breakers are newly

manufactured and are

mechanically and electrically

the same as the breakers

as originally specified

and supplied.

DS Circuit Breaker Cell

Provisions

Breaker provisions are

required in switchgear

when there is an existing

space in a structure that is

to be filled with a breaker.

Provisions are available for

all ratings and include all

parts required to complete

the cell in accordance with

the switchgear as originally

supplied in vintages IV and

V only.

DS Breaker Parts

An extensive inventory of

newly manufactured renewal

parts for DS and DSL power

circuit breakers are available.

DS Switchgear Structure Parts

DS switchgear parts are

available for most DS

designs. Newly manufactured

replacement parts (such as

doors, breaker provisions,

lift trucks, metering, etc.)

are available.

Class 1 Reconditioning

Reconditioning Service is

available for the entire family

of DS breakers. Class 1

Reconditioning is Eaton’s

process of maintaining low

voltage power breakers to

their fullest capability. We

disassemble each breaker,

clean and test each part using

component-specific methods,

then reassemble and perform

final testing to ensure that

each breaker is restored to

operating condition—all using

the original manufacturer’s

instructions and parts.

New trip units can also be

retrofitted during this process.

Technology Upgrades

IQ and PowerNet™

Communications

Digital IQ-type products can

be used to upgrade existing

analog devices such as

meters. The new IQ-type

products can be furnished as

loose, individual components

for field retrofitting or can be

furnished on new replacement

doors, such as in the photo to

the left. The new instrument

compartment door will fit all

vintages of DS assemblies

from 1968 to the present.

Please see IQ products

Ta b 10 for further details

on the latest offerings.

Digitrip Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Retrofit kits are available for

all DS breaker frame sizes.

Please see the switchgear

trip unit retrofit kits on

Pages V12-T17-17–

V12-T17-51 for more detail.

V12-T17-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

DS Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

DSII Assemblies and

Power Circuit Breakers

DSII Switchgear Assembly

Product Description

The DSII low voltage

switchgear design was first

introduced in 1994 but was

originally available with only

the DS or DSL breakers.

Upon its arrival in 1996, the

DSII breaker became the

standard offering in DSII

switchgear assemblies.

The DSII switchgear design

uses only the drawout version

of the power breakers. Each

breaker is located within an

individual compartment. Each

compartment has extension

rails for supporting the

breaker while removing it

from the compartment. The

breaker can be in either of

the following positions with

the door closed:

●Connect

●Te s t

●Disconnect

●Remove

The DSII switchgear is

basically designed for easier

installation and maintenance.

Control circuit terminal blocks

are mounted in a completely

removable tray located at the

front of the assembly above

each circuit breaker—helping

customers perform routine

inspection of control wires.

This tray is charcoal-gray

and is perhaps the most

noticeable external difference

between the DSII and the

DS designs.

The DSII breaker is very

similar to the DS. In fact,

the DSII breaker uses

most of the same internal

components—renewal parts

can often be shared. The

DSII breaker was the first to

include the newer family of

Digitrip RMS trip units: model

510, 610, 810, 910, and

OPTIM 750 or 1050. Unlike

the DS breaker, however,

the DSII breaker provides

genuine standardization of

breaker wiring, including

secondary contact points—

without reducing features

and options. This is achieved

with a larger secondary

contact block. The DSII

breaker has up to four

12-point, white secondary

contact blocks whereas the

DS breaker, has up to four

8-point, black secondary

contact blocks. DSII breakers

therefore cannot be installed

into a DS breaker cell.

DSII metal-enclosed

switchgear was designed to

meet the following standards:

●ANSI C37.20.1

●UL 1558

●NEMA SG5

DSII low voltage power air

circuit breakers (LVPACB)

were designed to meet the

following standards:

●ANSI C37.13, C37.16,

C37.50 and C37.51

●UL 1066

●NEMA SG3

●CSA

Ratings of DSII Switchgear

●2000–5000A vertical

and cross bus

●6000A cross bus option

●600V maximum

●100,000A bus bracing

standard

●200,000A bus bracing

optional

DSII Switchgear Assemblies

Dated 1994–Present with Shop

Order Numbers Ranging from

82Y1000 to 82Y3000

●Built from April of 1994 to

the present, these

assemblies contain the

following DS breakers:

●DS-206, DS-206H,

DS-206E, DS-416,

DS-416H, DS-420,

DS-632 or DS-840

●DSL-206, DSL-416,

DSL-420, DSL-632 (with

fuse truck) or DSL-840

(with fuse truck)

●DSII switchgear

assemblies dated

1996–present with

shop order numbers

82Y3001 and larger

DSII Switchgear Assemblies

Dated 1994–Present with

Shop Order Numbers 82Y3001

and Larger

●Built from April of 1996

to the present, these

assemblies contain the

following DSII breakers:

●DSII-308, DSII-508,

DSII-608, DSII-516,

DSII-616, DSII-620,

DSII-632, DSII-840

or DSII-850

●DSLII-308, DSLII-516,

DSLII-620, DSLII-632

(with fuse truck) or

DSLII-840 (with

fuse truck)

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-7

Switchgear

DSII Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

DSII308—Front

DSII308—Rear

DSII Cell Provisions

New DSII Air Circuit Breakers

New DSII circuit breakers

are available for replacement

or to fill existing vacant

cells. All breakers are newly

manufactured and are

mechanically and electrically

the same as the breakers

originally specified and

supplied.

DSII Circuit Breaker Provisions

Breaker provisions are

required in switchgear

when there is an existing

space in a structure that is

to be filled with a breaker.

Provisions are available for

all ratings and include all

parts required to complete

the cell in accordance with

the switchgear as originally

supplied.

Class 1 Reconditioning

Reconditioning service is

available for the entire family

of DSII breakers. Class 1

Reconditioning is Eaton’s

process of maintaining low

voltage power breakers to

their fullest capability. We

disassemble each breaker,

clean and test each part using

component-specific methods,

then reassemble and perform

final testing to ensure that

each breaker is restored to

operating condition—all using

the original manufacturer’s

instructions and parts.

New trip units can also be

retrofitted during this process.

Please see Page V12-T17-9

for breaker accessories.

DSII Breaker Parts

An extensive inventory of

newly manufactured renewal

parts for DSII and DSLII

circuit breakers are available.

DSII Switchgear Structure Parts

DSII switchgear parts are

available for most DS

designs. Newly manufactured

replacement parts (such

as doors, breaker provisions,

lift trucks, metering, etc.)

are available.

Technology Upgrades

DSII-VSR—Front

DSII-VSR (Vacuum Starter

Replacement)

For FVNR, motor-starting

applications ONLY—this

solution might be available to

significantly lengthen the life-

span of the “motor starter”

as well as to provide better

motor overload protection.

The DSII-VSR is manufactured

as a new assembly and is

designed to rack into the

same switchgear cells that a

DSII breaker is removed from.

It will physically fit into any

of the “quarter-high” cells

ranging from the DSII-308

to the DSII-620. However,

the maximum FLA rating is

currently 425A. The current

design DS-VSR contains

the V201 vacuum contactor

and appropriate overload

protection.

Digitrip Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Retrofit kits are available for

all DSII breaker frame sizes.

Please see the switchgear

trip unit retrofit kits on

Pages V12-T17-17–

V12-T17-51 for more detail.

V12-T17-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

DSII Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Magnum DS Assemblies

and Power Circuit

Breakers

Magnum DS Switchgear

Product Description

Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

switchgear started shipping

in 1998. Perhaps the most

distinctive feature when

compared to the original DS

vintage is the “through-the-

door” design.

The following functions

may be performed without

opening the circuit breaker

door: levering the breaker

between positions; operating

manual charging system,

including viewing of the

spring charge status flag;

closing and opening the

breaker; viewing/adjusting

the trip unit and reading the

breaker rating nameplate.

The breakers are four-position

drawout design—connected,

test, disconnected or

removed.

The breakers can also

be equipped with ARMs

technologies, which will

reduce arc flash energy

available at downstream

devices during maintenance

periods.

A unique vertical and cross

bus configuration provides

an optional industry-leading

short-circuit withstand rating

of 200,000A without the

need for upstream current-

limiting fuses.

Vertical and cross bus ratings

are based on a UL and ANSI

standard temperature rise

of 65ºC above a maximum

ambient air temperature

of 40ºC.

Magnum DS switchgear

and breakers conform to

the following standards:

●ANSI C37.20.1, C37.51

●UL 1558, UL 1066

●NEMA SG5, SG3

●CSA

The assemblies have

undergone an extensive

seismic qualification program.

The test program used ANSI

standard C37.81, the Uniform

Building Code (UBC®) and

the California Building Code

(CBC) as a basis for the test

program. The assemblies have

been tested and qualified to

exceed these requirements.

Magnum DS Switchgear Ratings

●Cross bus ampacity

●2000, 3200, 4000,

5000, 6000

●Vertical bus ampacity

●2000, 3200, 4000, 5000

●Bus bracing

●100, 150 or 200 kA

Magnum DS Without Current Limiters

Replacement Capabilities

800–3200A Drawout Breaker

New Magnum DS Breakers

New breakers are readily

available for all frame sizes

and interruption ratings.

Renewal Parts and Accessories

New breaker parts and

accessories are readily

available for all frame sizes

and interrupting ratings.

Breaker Cell

Cell Provisions and Upgrades

Switchgear cell provisions are

required when an existing

structure blank space needs

to be filled with a new

Magnum DS circuit breaker.

Cell upgrades are required

when the provision already

exists, but the need to

upgrade ampacity and/or

interrupting rating is

necessary. Sometimes,

new riser bus must also be

installed with this offering.

Class 1 Reconditioning

Reconditioning service is

available for the entire family

of Magnum DS breakers.

Class 1 reconditioning is

Eaton’s process of

maintaining low voltage

power breakers to their

fullest capability. We

disassemble each breaker,

clean and test each part using

component-specific methods,

then reassemble and perform

final testing to ensure that

each breaker is restored to

operating condition—all using

the original manufacturer’s

instructions and parts.

Note

1Interrupting rating is 130 kA at 240V.

Maximum

Amperes

Breaker

Designation

Interrupting

Rating (kA)

Short-Time

Rating (kA)

800 MDS-408 42 42

800 MDS-608 65 65

800 MDS-808 85 85

800 MDS-C08 100 85

1600 MDS-616 65 65

1600 MDS-816 85 85

1600 MDS-C16 100 85

2000 MDS-620 65 65

2000 MDS-820 85 85

2000 MDS-C20 100 85

3200 MDS-632 65 65

3200 MDS-832 85 85

3200 MDS-C32 100 85

4000 MDS-840 85 185

4000 MDS-C40 100 1100

5000 MDS-850 85 185

5000 MDS-C50 100 1100

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-9

Switchgear

Magnum DS Low Voltage Assemblies and Power Circuit Breakers

Breaker Accessories

Breaker Test Kits

Test Kit Unit

Test Kit

This test kit can be used

for testing DS, DSII and

Magnum breakers that are

equipped with either

Amptector or Digitrip RMS

trip units. Test kit2 includes

test unit and adapter.

Note: Each kit contains the

140D481G03 basic tester

(Amptector-Ready) and the

adapter for the selected breaker

Digitrip style.

Te s t K i t

Adapters

Adapter

In May of 1993, the test

port changed on DS circuit

breakers that have Digitrip

RMS trip units. The test port

was moved from the front

cover to the left-hand side,

as you face the front of the

breaker. The port was also

changed from an 11-pin

banana plug to a 9-pin plug.

The adapter is for using a

140D481(G02R), (G02RR)

or (G03) tester to test DS

breakers with Digitrip that

have the side-mounted, 9-pin

plug. The adapter converts

the banana plugs on the

tester to a 9-pin plug. DO

NOT use the adapter with

the old 140D481G01 or

140D481G02 tester.

On Magnum breakers, the

test port is located on the

front cover of the trip unit.

The port is a 14-pin plug;

the adapter converts the

banana plugs on the tester

to a 14-pin plug.

Adapters

Description

Catalog

Number

DS/DSII Digitrip test kit 8779CO2G02

Magnum Digitrip test kit 8779CO2G05

Description

Catalog

Number

DS/DSII 8779C02G03

Magnum 8779C02G05

Breaker Test Cabinet

Test cabinet for electrically

operated breakers, with

pushbuttons, control

cable and receptacle, for

separate mounting.

Breaker Test Cabinet

Background Information on Trip Unit Test Kits

Note

1These parts are used with any breaker that was upgraded with “Digitrip Retrofit Kits.”

Description

Catalog

Number

120 Vac/125 Vdc 6500C57G01

240 Vac/125 Vdc 6500C57G02

DSII

120 Vac/125 Vdc 6500C57G03

240 Vac/125 Vdc 6500C57G04

Magnum

120 Vac/125 Vdc 9253C25G01

240 Vac/125 Vdc 9253C25G02

120 Vac capacitor trip 9253C25G03

Test breaker plug 9253C25G04

Description

Catalog

Number

Obsolete test unit, only for use with Amptector 140D481G01

Obsolete test unit, only for use with Amptector 140D481G02

Same as 140D481G02, except retrofitted to test both Amptector and Digitrip 140D481G02R

Same as 140D481G02, except retrofitted to test both Amptector and Digitrip 140D481G02RR

Obsolete Test Kit Adapter, superseded by 8779C02G03 8779C02G01

Wire harness with female banana plugs for temporary connection

direct from tester to the auxiliary CT module on the retrofitted breaker 1

6503C53G01

Adapter harness for converting banana from the tester to a 12-pin plug

for retrofitted breakers equipped with a 6503C55G01 1

6503C54G01

New adapter for converting 12-pin plug on 6503C55G01 into 9-pin plug

for connecting to the test unit adapter style # 8779C02G03 1

6503C54G02

Wire harness with 12-pin plug for permanent connection to auxiliary

CT module on the retrofitted breaker; plug connects to 6503C54G01

or 6503C54G02 1

6503C55G01

Current auxiliary power module for supplying power to Digitrip trip unit

during test procedures; also identical to catalog number PRTAAPM 1

1267C16G01

V12-T17-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Procedure for Identifying Low Voltage Renewal Parts

Procedure for Identifying

Renewal Parts

For all switchgear requests,

include information from

the list below to ensure that

parts and breakers supplied

will consist of correct options

and settings. With the variety

of switchgear vintages, the

information is needed to

supply the correct parts.

There might be modifications

needed to the breaker

cell or to the bus work to

accommodate the breaker

that will only be recognized

by the drawings.

For all requests include

the following:

●Shop order number

●Front view drawing

number

●General order number

(G0#)

●Manufacturing date

●Item number

●Metering required

●Optional relays

●CTs

●What changes have been

made since equipment

was originally installed in

the field?

Requests requiring additional

or replacement breakers

also require the following

information:

●Breaker type

●Trip rating

●MO or EO

●Trip unit

●Three-wire or four-wire

●Trip settings (LSIG)

●Fixed or drawout

●Which compartment

●Any new options

Further Information

Publication

Number Description

DB Breakers

RPD 32-254 Renewal Parts Data for DB, DBL, DBF breakers

SA-11745 Sales Aid for custom fluidized switchgear bus

DS Breakers

RP.22B.01.T.E Renewal Parts Data for DS breakers

PL.22G.01.P.E Price List for DS breakers and accessories, discount symbol DS-1

DSII Breakers

RP.22B.02.T.E Renewal Parts Data for DSII breakers

IB 694C694-02 Instruction, operation and maintenance for DSII/DSLII breakers

IL 32-691C Instructions for DS-DSII (trip units 500-910) tester

PL.22B.01.P.E Price List for DSII breakers and accessories

DS/DSII Switchgear Assemblies

RP.44B.01.T.E Renewal Parts Data for DS/DSII switchgear accessories

DSII Switchgear and Breaker

SA-32-610A Sales Aid for DSII low voltage switchgear

AD 32-650A Application Data for DSII switchgear

DS Switchgear

IB 32-690F Instructions for DS metal-enclosed LV switchgear

DS and DSL Breakers

IB 33-790-1I Instruction, operation and maintenance for DS/DSL breakers

DSII Switchgear

TD.44B.01A.T.E Technical Data for DSII metal-enclosed LV switchgear

DSII Switchgear with DS Breakers

IB 32-695C Instructions for DSII switchgear containing DS breakers

DSII Switchgear with DSII Breakers

IB 32-694B Instructions for DSII switchgear containing DSII breakers

Magnum DS Switchgear

PA.44A.01.S.E Product Aid (1pg.) for Magnum DS switchgear

TD.44A.01B.T.E Technical Data for Magnum DS metal-enclosed LV switchgear

IB 32-697A Instructions for Magnum DS metal-enclosed LV switchgear

RP01901001E Magnum DS switchgear common replacement parts and accessories

Magnum DS Switchgear and Breakers

B.44A.01.S.E Brochure (20 pg.) for Magnum DS switchgear and breakers

Magnum DS Breakers

RP.22F.02.T.E Renewal parts and accessories catalog for Magnum DS breakers

IB 2C12060H03 Instructions, operation and maintenance for Magnum DS breakers

B.22F.01.S.U Brochure (16 pg.) for Magnum DS breakers

PL.22F.01A.P.E Price List for Magnum DS breakers

IB.44A.05.T.E Instructions for Magnum DS (trip units 520-1150) tester

IL 32-696A Instructions for Magnum DS breaker test cabinet

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-11

Switchgear

Low Voltage Competitive Upgrades—AR-Series Replacement Breakers

Competitive Upgrades—

Low Voltage Power

Air Breakers

AR-Series

Replacement Breakers

The AR-Series (air-

replacement) breakers

are not retrofits. They are

100% new breakers used

to completely replace the

original drawout type power

air circuit breaker. This

solution uses state-of-the-art

Cutler-Hammer Magnum

breaker technology that

provides maximum life-

extension and switchgear

modernization. The offering

includes a new breaker, a

cassette with extension

rails and a standard door.

No modifications are required

to the original line/load

power stabs or the secondary

disconnect contacts.

This solution can eliminate

safety problems caused by

defective racking and/or

operator mechanisms.

Additional safety against

arc flash incidents can be

obtained by equipping

the breaker with ARMs

Technologies, thereby

reducing the arc flash energy

available at downstream

devices during maintenance

periods. Additional switchgear

maintenance problems

such as parts unavailability

and lengthy maintenance

procedures can be eliminated.

This solution often provides

a substantial total installed

cost savings when compared

to completely replacing the

switchgear assembly.

In many instances, the

AR-Series replacement

breaker can be combined

with engineering services

to provide continuous

current and/or interruption

rating upgrades.

The AR-Series breakers are

designed, manufactured

and tested to modern

IEEE/ANSI standards.

Designs are available for

a wide variety of drawout

type low voltage power air

circuit breakers (LVPACB)

originally manufactured by

Westinghouse, Federal Pacific

Electric, Allis-Chalmers, ITE

and General Electric.

Pictured on this page are

several examples of available

designs. Contact your local

Eaton sales representative

for information on other

breaker types.

Westinghouse

Original DB-25 DB25-AR600NM

Original DB-50 DB50-AR1600M

Original DB-75 DB75-AR3000M

Allis-Chalmers

Original LA-600 LA600-AR600NM

ITE

Original K-600 K-600-AR600NM

Federal Pacific Electric

Original FP-25 FP25-AR600NM

Original FP-50 FP50-AR1600M

Original FP-75 FP75-AR3000B

General Electric

Original AK-2A-50 AK2A50-AR1600M

Original AKR-4A-30 AKR4A30-AR800NM

V12-T17-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter Replacement

Low Voltage Breaker

Drawout Vacuum

Starter Replacement

DB-25-LV-VSR Shown

Product Description

Eaton’s low voltage VSR

is a self-contained vacuum

starter replacement for a low

voltage drawout air circuit

breaker used for motor

starting applications.

In some cases, low voltage

air circuit breakers are

used for motor starting

applications. Air circuit

breakers are not designed

to withstand the frequent

switching service and

the mechanical stresses

associated with repetitive

motor starting duty. This

is due to the breaker

mechanism that must be

designed to close and latch

against a fault. In order to

meet these requirements,

the mechanism must close

at high speeds with a great

deal of force. Frequent

closing operations stress

and deteriorate the

breaker mechanisms.

Eaton’s LV-VSR is a self-

contained replacement

vacuum starter for a low

voltage drawout air circuit

breaker. The LV-VSR is

interchangeable with the

drawout breaker element and

requires no cell modifications.

Features

Advantages

The use of an LV-VSR

vacuum starter can prolong

device life and significantly

reduce maintenance repair

and downtime.

A low voltage air circuit

breaker has an effective life

of 4000 operations while an

LV-VSR vacuum starter has

an effective life of 1,000,000

operations. For example, a

motor starting application that

required two starts per hour

on continuous duty would

require a major rebuild of

the low voltage breaker

within three months. The

expected life of an LV-VSR

vacuum starter would be

over 50 years.

The LV-VSR vacuum starter

uses state-of-the-art Eaton

vacuum interrupters. The

interrupters employ the

latest vacuum technology

with long life, resistance to

environmental contaminants

and positive contact wear

indicators.

The integral, solid-state,

trip units used on the air

circuit breakers are designed

primarily for cable and

transformer protection.

Motors require more

precisely set overcurrent

devices that prevent motor

damage as well as avoiding

nuisance tripping. A solid-

state relay, Eaton Type C440,

provides overload protection

and phase unbalance

protection. This relay was

exclusively designed for

motor protection.

Motor Starter

The LV-VSR consists

of an Eaton V201 vacuum

contactor, Class J current

limiting fuses, multi-function

motor protective relay, three

current transformers and an

integral control power

transformer.

Vacuum Contactor

Eaton’s V201 vacuum

contactor is designed for

starting and controlling

three-phase, 50/60 Hz AC

motors. Current interruption

is contained within the

vacuum bottles and no

arc byproducts are vented

to the outside environment.

Contact condition is given

by wear indicators.

Series Current Limiting Fuses

Class J current limiting

fuses provide short-circuit

protection and allow a

combination rating of

100 kA at 480 or 600V.

C440 Electronic Overload Relay

Eaton’s C440 multi-function

electronic, motor protection

relay provides the following

features:

●Overload protection,

Class 10A, 10, 20 or 30

●Phase unbalance

protection, selectable

(ON/OFF)

●Ground fault selectable

(ON/OFF)

●Remote reset

●Alarm relay output contact

●LED status indication

●Communication

modules available

VSR Designs

●Westinghouse DB and DS

●GE

●ITE

●and others

Contact EESS at 877-276-9379

for more details.

Life

Exceptional electrical and

mechanical life is offered

by the V201 contactor—

up to 1,000,000 electrical

operations and 2,500,000

mechanical operations, even

under harsh conditions.

Drawout Capability

The LV-VSR is mounted on a

drawout frame and maintains

the safety interlocking system

of the low voltage switchgear.

Ease of Installation

The LV-VSR may be inserted

into a standard breaker

compartment without

modification to the

compartment. The primary

and secondary contact

structures and drawout

mechanism are identical.

The LV-VSR control scheme

will interface with standard

switchgear wiring with no cell

modifications and remote

control schemes, if existing,

are maintained.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-13

Switchgear

Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter Replacement

Safety Features

The LV-VSR vacuum starter

retains all the safety features

of the low voltage switchgear

including:

●Racking the LV-VSR

vacuum starter is

prevented while the

contactor is in the closed

position. Closing the

LV-VSR vacuum starter is

prevented while racking

●Breaker position indication

is provided (connected,

test, disconnect, remove)

●The LV-VSR vacuum starter

is padlockable (optional) in

either the connect, test or

disconnect positions

●Positive ground connection

is maintained

●Closed door tripping

●Closed-door control, if

existing, can be maintained

LV-VSR Control Features

LV-VSR vacuum starter offers

the following standard control

features. Other devices can

be supplied on request.

●Start–stop pushbuttons

●Eaton C440 electronic

overload relay

●Provision for remote

control operation

●Custom-designed

wiring schemes

Ease of Maintenance

The LV-VSR control

components are front-

mounted for easy access.

The LV-VSR uses the

same line and load finger

clusters, secondary contact

assemblies and drawout

mechanism as the original

circuit breaker. Renewal

parts are readily available.

Technical Data

and Specifications

Ratings

The LV-VSR vacuum starter is

rated as follows:

●Maximum continuous

current—425A

●Maximum voltage

rating—600V

●Short-circuit rating at

240–600V, 200 kA

●Maximum motor hp at

550/575V, 400 hp

●Maximum motor hp at

440/460V, 300 hp

●Maximum motor hp at

220/230V, 150 hp

V12-T17-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Systems Pow-R Breaker (SPB)

Systems Pow-R

Breaker (SPB)

SPB-100 Series—3000A

SPB-65 Series—1600A

SPB-50 Series—800A

Product Description

The Cutler-Hammer Systems

Pow-R Breaker is an encased

power breaker designed to

provide benefits of special

interest to distribution

systems designers.

Systems Pow-R Breakers

can be applied as individual

breakers in separate

enclosures or in switchboards

as mains, ties or feeder

breakers. They can be applied

in low voltage distribution

systems through 600 Vac,

50 or 60 Hz. Because they

combine high interrupting

capacity with short-time delay

tripping, Systems Pow-R

Breakers can be applied in

fully rated, selective systems

while providing full selectivity

through the applied breaker’s

short-time rating.

Both mechanical and

electrically operated versions

of the breaker feature a

true two-step stored energy

mechanism

with no change in

dimensions. This mechanism

allows maximum five-cycle

closing usually required for

generator paralleling.

An interrupting capacity of

150,000A at 480V without

fuses and short-time

capabilities of up to 85,000A

are available. Systems Pow-R

Breakers are UL Listed for

100% application.

Systems Pow-R Breakers

must be applied within

their published ratings in

accordance with UL and

NEMA Standards defined as

“Usual Service Conditions.”

Four basic frame sizes (400/

800/1200A, 1600/2000A,

2500/3000A and 4000/5000A)

cover the continuous ampere

range of 100 to 5000A.

The Systems Pow-R

Breakers use the proven

microprocessor-based

trip unit technology that

was pioneered by Eaton.

Developments in

microprocessor technology

have given us the new family

of Digitrip RMS electronic

trip units and the even

newer OPTIM programmable

trip unit.

All breakers come standard

with the Digitrip RMS 510 trip

units that have long time and

instantaneous (LI) tripping

functions. Short-time delay

and three- or four-wire ground

fault protec

tion can be

supplied as optional tripping

characteristics, thereby

providing for up to nine phase

and ground current settings.

This provides maximum

flexibility in trip curve shaping

and system coordination.

Any combination of these trip

functions (LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG or LSIG) can be provided

within the Digitrip family of

trip units.

Optional trip units such as the

Digitrip RMS 610 that has a

large four-digit alphanumeric

display of load currents, cause

of trip and self diagnostics can

also be specified. The RMS

810, which in addition to the

610 features, displays

and

transmits via the IMPACC/

PowerNet

communications

network power and energy

values, may also be provided.

The RMS 910 also displays

power quality data, power

factor and phase-to-phase

voltages, and transmits

waveform capture

information.

The most technologically

advanced trip unit in the

Digitrip family is the Digitrip

OPTIM. The OPTIM 750

has features similar to the

Digitrip 610 and the OPTIM

1050 has features similar to

the Digitrip 910. Both have

the additional feature of being

programmable, rather than

having to be set by

discrete switches. This

programmability allows for

an almost infinite number

of trip settings, which in turn

provides for even closer

system coordination.

All trip units use completely

interchangeable rating plugs.

These plugs, when applied

with the appropriate sensors,

give the breakers a tripping

range of 100 to 5000A.

The Systems Pow-R Breaker

can be supplied in either

fixed or drawout mounting

configurations. The drawout

assembly consists of a

stationary frame and a moving

carriage with four positions:

connected, test, disconnected

and fully withdrawn. The

fixed configuration can be

supplied as either front or

rear connected.

The Systems Pow-R Breaker

has available a complete

family of integrally mounted

accessories. Shunt trip, spring

release solenoid, undervoltage

release, auxiliary switches,

key interlocks, mechanical

interlocks and covers

for the close and/or open

pushbuttons are just an

example of the accessories

that can be mounted on

the breaker.

Product History

Since its introduction to

the market in 1976, the

SPB has provided long and

reliable service. Tens of

thousands of SPBs have been

manufactured and placed into

service throughout the world

in switchboards, automatic

transfer switches and other

specialty OEM manufactured

power distribution products.

Systems Pow-R Breakers

can be identified using two

unique numbers. One is the

S.O. (shop order number).

The shop order number

is located either on the

breaker’s nameplate or on

the left side of the breaker.

An example of this number

is S.O. 74E2792.01.

The second number is a

30-digit feature and option

number. The first 10

characters of the feature

and option number are

considered to be the feature

or style number, the next 20

characters are the option or

edge number. This number is

also located on the breaker’s

nameplate or on the left side

of the breaker.

An example of this number is:

Feature and option

8702C35G012297240000000

1000144

Feature/style 8702C35G01

Option/edge

22972400000001000144

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-15

Switchgear

Systems Pow-R Breaker (SPB)

Product History Time Line

Replacement Capabilities

Genuine new SPB

replacement parts and

accessories, including those

listed

in SPB Renewal Parts

Data RP01301013E,

dated

February 2006, are available.

Contact 1-800-222-9773

for price and availability, or

check Vista.

The following parts and

accessories are available:

Mechanism and Related Parts

●Charging handle

●Cover assembly

●Mechanism assembly

●Trip unit cover plate

assembly

Electrical Attachments

●Shunt trip assembly

●CT ground fault

●Undervoltage release

●Remote time delay

●Auxiliary switch

●Capacitor trip device

●Secondary connectors

●Plate assembly

●T-connectors

●Pressure terminals

Spring Release Solenoid

Electrical Operator

Breaker Accessories

●Key interlock

●Cover accessories

●Deadfront shield

●Door escutcheon

●Fixed-mounted breakers

●Behind-the-door and

through-the-door

drawout breakers

Trip Units

●Digitrip 500, 600, 700, 800

●Digitrip 510

●Digitrip 610

●Digitrip 810

●Digitrip 910

●OPTIM 750

●OPTIM 1050

●Pow-R-Trip 7 rating plugs

●Digitrip rating plugs for

500, 600, 700, 800

Technology Upgrades

Upgrade solutions for SPB

breakers include trip unit

upgrades. These solutions

focus on replacing the older

technology tripping systems

with the latest technology

offerings. The latest

technology permits

significant

improvements

to be realized in improved

coordination and protection,

remote metering and

monitoring, network

communications and energy

management information.

Is the old technology

breaker still good enough?

That depends on the answers

to the following questions.

Can the problem be solved

with renewal parts?

Some problems can be

solved quickly and simply

with the installation of

replacement parts and

accessories. Eaton continues

to manufacture new genuine

replacement parts and

accessories for SPBs.

Does the breaker reliably

perform as expected?

If the breaker does not

perform reliably even when

properly maintained or

serviced, the mechanism or

the entire breaker should be

considered for replacement.

Does the breaker trip

system perform reliably?

Older SPB breakers used trip

systems that are no longer

being supported by Eaton.

Due to changes in the typical

distribution system and the

addition of numerous

harmonic generating

loads, some early vintage

electronic trip systems could

experience unreliable or

inaccurate trip behavior.

If this is the case, the trip

system should be replaced.

Is there a need for energy

management?

Breakers with older

technology trip systems

could not support the

demands of energy

management. Modern trip

systems provide not only

improved protection, but

energy monitoring, power

quality measurement and

communications. If any of

these are desired, the trip

system should be replaced.

Are the recommended

maintenance intervals

being followed?

There is a tendency to stretch

the maintenance interval well

beyond the manufacturer’s

recommendations. This is

dangerous. Some studies

have shown that if a circuit

breaker is left closed for

a period of five to seven

years, it may not operate

as expected when needed

to do so.

If the answers to the above

questions all indicate that the

existing trip system or the

circuit breaker does not

need to be replaced, then

the old technology breaker

is still good enough, and

maintenance solutions

are recommended:

1. Maintain the breaker at

one- to two-year intervals

using original OEM parts.

2. Use factory authorized

service for more

extensive repair

needs and mechanism

replacement.

Eaton can provide loaner

breakers to maintain

system uptime while the

maintenance or factory

authorized service is being

performed. If any answer to

the above questions indicate

that the trip system or the

circuit breaker should be

replaced, then the old

technology breaker is no

longer good enough, and

Upgrade Solutions are

recommended.

Eaton offers a choice of two

upgrade solutions:

1. Trip system retrofit.

2. New SPB breaker.

Westinghouse SPB

Cutler-Hammer SPB

Product 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

V12-T17-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Systems Pow-R Breaker (SPB)

In summary, how do we choose

the right upgrade solution?

Does the breaker perform

reliably except for the trip

system?

If “Yes,” then a Trip System

Retrofit is the preferred

solution.

Does the breaker perform

reliably but energy

management, power

quality measurement

or communications

are desired?

If “Yes,” then a Trip System

Retrofit is still the preferred

solution.

Is breaker reliability an

issue and will it require

extensive service or

repairs?

If “Yes,” then a new SPB

breaker is the appropriate

solution.

See Pages V12-T17-35 and

V12-T17-36 for information

on Digitrip retrofits.

Product Support Services

Factory authorized non-

warranty service is available

from the Breaker Service

Center in Skelton, WV.

The Breaker Service Center

can perform:

●All service and testing

needs

●Repairs to cracked and

broken cases and frames

●Repairs to damaged

contact assemblies

●Mechanism replacements

●Trip unit upgrades

The Breaker Service Center

also stocks a variety of loaner

SPB breakers to keep your

customer up and running

while their breaker is being

serviced.

If you have an opportunity

or need further information,

call Eaton’s Breaker Service

Center at 1-877-275-7782.

Field Service and Testing

(Performed at Customer

site): Provided by Eaton’s

Electrical Services & Systems

(EESS), Field Service and

Testing includes initial

inspection, secondary injection

testing, service to electrical

operators, handles and hub

assemblies, installation of

most renewal parts, and trip

unit upgrades to the Digitrip

510. Contact your local EESS

office for more information.

Service and Testing

(Performed at local EESS

facility): EESS has a variety

of service options for SPB

breakers including primary

injection testing, mechanism

replacement, replacement

of key interlocks and ground

fault CT, service to finger

clusters and stationary

contacts, and trip unit

upgrades to Digitrip 610/810/

910. Contact your local EESS

office for more information.

Further Information

Pricing Information

Newly manufactured

replacement SPB breakers

and cassettes for existing

switchgear manufactured in

Asheville, NC; St. Louis, MO;

or East Pittsburgh, PA, are

available through the

Aftermarket Product

Center in Asheville, NC.

Call 1-800-257-3278 for

price and availability.

New, genuine SPB

replacement parts and

accessories can be identified

in publication RP01301013E.

Call 1-800-222-9773 for price

and availability or check Vista.

Price and Availability

Digest (PAD)

Vista/VISTALINE™ (Discount

Symbol LVPCB)

Publication

Number Description

IL 15156B Removal and replacement of moving and stationary conductors and

operating mechanism in a Systems Pow-R breaker.

IL 6647C21H03 Key interlock installation instructions for through-the-door drawout

Systems Pow-R breakers.

LEM010 Problems with SPB breakers/we have the solutions tri-fold.

RP01301013E Systems Pow-R breakers renewal parts and accessories.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-17

Switchgear

Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Application Description

Digitrip RMS trip unit retrofit

kits are fully engineered, field-

installable retrofit kits that

enable the user to completely

replace an existing tripping

system. They are applicable

to (600 Vac) low voltage

power breakers and are

designed for application on

various manufacturers’

power breakers.

Digitrip RMS trip unit retrofit

kits provide true rms sensing,

the most accurate and current

state-of-the-art technology for

measuring amperage loads.

True rms sensing removes the

possibility of false tripping due

to harmonic distortion of the

power waveform and enables

greater accuracy in selective

coordination of the power

distribution system. The

microprocessor-based

Digitrip trip unit also allows

communications for remote

monitoring to a host

computer or local Assemblies

Electronic Monitor (AEM) via

the Integrated Monitoring

Protection and Control

Communications (PowerNet)

communication system.

Ratings

Digitrip RMS trip unit

retrofit kits are available

for a wide variety of various

manufacturers’ low voltage

power breaker frames.

Ratings range from 100 to

4000A. Multi-tapped CTs,

interchangeable rating plugs,

programmable pickup and

time delay settings provide

the user with flexibility.

Product History

Originally a

Westinghouse Product

In the past, there have been

three types of automatic

control for low voltage power

breakers: electromechanical

trip units, solid-state peak

sensing trip units and state-

of-the-art true rms sensing

trip units.

Electromechanical Trip Units

Electromechanical trip units

were initially used in the early

1940s and phased out by

all manufacturers in the

mid-1970s.

Westinghouse used these trip

devices on types DA and DK

power circuit breakers. They

were also used initially on the

DB power circuit breaker.

The electromechanical trip

units were the conventional

form of protection on all

manufacturers’ breakers,

up until the 1970s.

Electromechanical trip units

were composed of a solenoid,

springs, a diaphragm, seals

and air venting apertures.

Three trip units were required

per breaker. Due to age or

harsh environments these

devices would fail or lose

calibration. They required a

great deal of preventative

maintenance.

Solid-State Peak Sensing

Trip Units

In 1970, the Amptector Trip

Unit was introduced as the

standard trip unit on the

Westinghouse type DS

power circuit breaker. The

Amptector solid-state trip

system provided much

greater accuracy and

reliability, and included new

features like ground fault (G)

protection, mode of trip

indication and the ability

to perform secondary

injection testing.

Electromechanical trip

devices immediately became

obsolete, creating a retrofit

market. Amptector retrofit kits

were introduced to convert

the type DB breakers that had

been factory equipped with

the electromechanical type

trip units.

In 1976, the POW-R-Trip 7 trip

unit was introduced on the

Westinghouse SPB insulated-

case power circuit breaker. A

more simplified version with

only two trip functions, known

as the POW-R-Trip, became

available in 1978. Then in

1982, the POW-R Digitrip trip

unit became available and was

offered on the SPB breakers.

In 1985, RK trip units and

retrofit kits were introduced

to provide a solid-state trip

unit small enough to retrofit

General Electric breakers as

well as the Westinghouse

type DB breakers.

Peak sensing trip units were

an improvement and provided

improved reliability and

accuracy. Only one trip unit

was required per breaker;

however, peak sensing trip

units were not able to handle

harmonic conditions. They

caused nuisance tripping and

unnecessary downtime.

True rms Sensing Trip Units

In 1987, Westinghouse

introduced the Digitrip II RMS

trip unit (standard version)

for use on type DS and

SPB power circuit breakers.

Digitrip II RMS was the first

microprocessor-based true

rms sensing trip unit.

True rms trip units enabled

the measuring of current

rather than the sensing

of current.

Because they are

microprocessor-based

digital devices, they are

capable of taking discrete

samples of the current

waveform in each phase.

By applying a mathematical

algorithm, the current is

accurately mapped out and

measured. This method of

measurement provides the

ability to adapt to a changing

harmonic content while

providing repeatable and

reliable protection.

V12-T17-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Product History Time Line

General Information

State-of-the-Art Features

Digitrip RMS trip unit retrofit

kits come in several different

model types. Among these

types, they provide a variety of

accommodating features (see

table on Page V12-T17-20).

True rms measurement

and protection. Extremely

accurate and able to

compensate for harmonic

content and disturbances.

Ground fault may be added

to an existing power breaker.

Ground fault is offered in a

three-wire and a four-wire

version.

Zone interlocking is

available on the short time

and ground fault modes of

protection. This enables

enhanced selectivity for

high fault and ground fault

coordination between the

main and the feeder breakers.

Local monitoring

via a display.

A red light emitting diode (LED)

display enables the user to step

through and read currents and

energy readings for each phase

and ground.

Communications via the

PowerNet system allows

all pertinent information,

regarding static and dynamic

operation of the breaker, to

be remotely monitored either

by a host computer or an IQ

AEM. This facilitates energy

management and power

management. Remember,

“If you can’t measure it, you

can’t manage it.”

The Packaged Kit

Each Digitrip RMS trip unit

retrofit kit includes a Digitrip

trip unit, an auxiliary CT

module, a direct trip actuator

(DTA), quantity (three) current

sensors, a rating plug,

interconnecting wiring

harnesses, mounting

brackets, copper connectors

(when required), hardware,

and installation instructions.

Digitrip RMS retrofit kits are

complete tripping systems

engineered specifically for

each breaker type and frame

rating. All kits are designed

for field installation.

Application and

Service Condition

In order to ensure that Digitrip

RMS trip unit retrofit kits

are successfully applied,

installation must only be done

by a qualified individual.

Appropriate testing must

be performed to qualify the

retrofitted breaker prior to

placing the breaker in service.

Digitrip RMS trip unit retrofit

kits will provide protection

based on their published

time-current curves when

the breaker is properly

maintained and operated in

accordance with the original

manufacturer’s specification

and instructions.

Service Life

The physical structure, the

bus assemblies and control

wiring of switchgear are

normally in good condition.

The replacement of the trip

system coupled along with

either refurbishment or

reconditioning of the breaker

will prolong

the life of the

switchgear and provide

modern state-of-the-art

protection.

Availability

Digitrip RMS trip unit retrofit

kits are currently available for

select breaker frames from

the following manufacturers:

●Westinghouse

●General Electric

●ITE

●Allis-Chalmers

●Siemens-Allis

●Federal Pacific

●Roller-Smith

●Other manufacturers

Order Information

In order to obtain the proper

kit, the

following information

should be provided

to your

authorized Eaton distributor:

●Breaker manufacturer

●Breaker frame designation

●Breaker frame rating

●Breaker continuous

current rating

●Kit type (see table on

Page V12-T17-20)

(i.e., RMS 510...RMS 810)

●Modes of protection

●Sensor rating

●Rating plug rating

Product 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 PresentPage

Electromechanical Trip Devices (B Breakers)

Amptector Trip Units and Accessories (DS Breakers)

Amptector Retrofit Kits, Trip Units, and Accessories (DB Breakers)

POW-R-Trip 7 Trip Units (SPB Breakers)

POW-R-Trip Trip Units (SPB Breakers)

POW-R-Digitrip I Trip Units (SPB Breakers)

Rating Plugs

RK Retrofit Kits, Trip Units and Accessories (DB Breakers)

RK Retrofit Kits, Trip Units and Accessories (GE AK-2A Breakers)

Digitrip II RMS Trip Units (RMS500, RMS600, RMS700, RMS800)

Digitrip III RMS Trip Units (RMS510, RMS610, RMS710, RMS810)

Digitrip III RMS Retrofit Kits for:

• Westinghouse DA and DK Breakers

• Westinghouse DB Breakers

• Westinghouse DS Breakers

• Westinghouse SPB Breakers

• GE姞 AK-1, AK-2/2A, AK-3/3A, AKR-50. AL-2EO, AL-2-50 Breakers

• Allis-Chalmers LA Series Breakers

• ITE姞 K-Line Breakers

• Siemens姞 – Allis Breakers

• Federal Pacific姞 Breakers

• Other Breakers

V12-T17-24

V12-T17-21

V12-T17-29

V12-T17-31

V12-T17-33

V12-T17-35

V12-T17-33

V12-T17-41

V12-T17-43

V12-T17-47

V12-T17-49

V12-T17-51

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-19

Switchgear

Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Definitions of Replacement

and Upgrade Capabilities

Replacement Digitrip Trip Units

and Rating Plugs

Replacement trip units and

rating plugs are available and

are used when replacing

components with similar

functionality and protective

features. A complete listing

of replacement trip units

and rating plugs is found

on Pages V12-T17-21–

V12-T17-27.

Digitrip Trip Unit Upgrades

Trip unit upgrades can be

used when upgrading the trip

system only requires a change

in trip unit with no additional

hardware. This option is used

to replace an obsolete Digitrip

500/600/700/800 or as

outlined in the table below.

Use the replacement trip

unit and rating plug tables

on Pages V12-T17-21–

V12-T17-27.

Digitrip Trip Unit Upgrades

For advanced upgrades

requiring more than just a trip

unit replacement, a trip unit

retrofit kit or upgrade retrofit

kit is the correct solution.

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

Retrofit Kits

Digitrip RMS trip unit retrofit

kits are fully engineered, field-

installable retrofit kits that

enable the user to completely

retrofit an existing trip system

on low

voltage power breakers.

They are applied

on breakers

that do not have existing

Digitrip trip systems installed.

Reference Pages V12-T17-28

–V12-T17-51 for information

on retrofit kits.

For breakers previously

retrofitted or shipped from

the factory with a Digitrip trip

system, refer to trip unit and

rating plug replacement,

Digitrip trip unit upgrades

or upgrade retrofit kits.

Upgrade Retrofit Kits

An upgrade retrofit kit is used

when upgrading a breaker

(previously retrofitted or

supplied from the factory

with a Digitrip 500/510) to an

advanced Digitrip 610/810/

910. These are complete

kits minus the components

common with a basic Digitrip

500/510 retrofit kit. A “U” in

the last position of the catalog

number denotes an upgrade

retrofit kit. Reference Pages

V12-T17-28–V12-T17-51

for information on upgrade

retrofit kits.

Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System™

NFPA® 70E-2004 defines

flash hazard as: “A dangerous

condition associated with

the release of energy caused

by an electric arc.” This is

primarily heat energy and

may result in serious or life

threatening burns.

When properly applied to a

power breaker, the Arcflash

Reduction Maintenance

System reduces fault-clearing

time and lowers the available

arc flash energy at the

connected downstream

devices. The result is a

reduction of the hazard

risk category, allowing for

improved personnel safety

while eliminating the need

for higher levels of costly

personal protective

equipment (PPE).

The Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System is

controlled by a lockable switch

that can easily activate a faster

tripping time at the work

location and be incorporated

into a lock-out tag-out (LOTO)

procedure. This switch can be

applied to any low voltage

power breaker by modifying

the existing Digitrip trip

system, or retrofitting a

breaker with a Digitrip retrofit

kit (see Accessories table

on Page V12-T17-28).

For further information,

contact your local Eaton’s

Electrical Services & Systems

office (see Ta b 2 4 ), or the

Digitrip Retrofit Kit Service

Center at 1-800-937-5487.

Modified Digitrip Trip System

with Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System

Digitrip Retrofit with Arcflash

Reduction Maintenance System

Digitrip Trip Unit

Existing Upgrade

500 510

600 610

700 810/910

800 810/910

810 910

V12-T17-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Trip Unit Retrofit Kits

Functional Comparison of Trip Units

Past Technology

Features

Present Technology

RMS

500

RMS

500

Zone

RMS

600

RMS

700

RMS

800

RMS

510

RMS

510

Zone

RMS

610

RMS

810

RMS

910

Trip Unit Features

■■ ■■ Cause-of-trip LED indicators ■■ ■■■

■■ ■■■Integral self test ■■ ■■■

■■ ■■■Trip reset button ■■ ■■■

■■ ■■■Hardware driven thermal memory

Software driven thermal memory (sel. O/O) ■■ ■■■

■■ ■■■Discriminator circuit on LS and LSG protection modes

Discriminator circuit on LS and LSG protection modes selectable (on/off) ■■ ■■■

■ ■■■Zone protective interlocking for short time and ground fault modes of protection ■■■■

■ ■■■Auxiliary contact for long time, short circuit and ground fault functions ■■■

■■

Local display of phase currents ■■■

■■

Local display of ground currents ■■■

■■

Local display of cause of trip ■■■

■Local display of energy (MWh) ■■

■Local display of peak demand (MW) ■■

■Local display of present demand (MW) ■■

PowerNet Communication Features

■■Data communicated with PowerNet includes: all display values, trip unit status, high

load alarm, cause of trip, rating plug status, breaker status, reason for breaker status

■■

Trip settings ■■

Power factor ■■

■■Control via the PowerNet system (open/close) ■■

Voltage phase-to-phase, displayed on trip unit and communicated via

PowerNet communications

■

Total harmonic distortion (THD); phase A, B, C. Displayed on trip unit and

communicated via PowerNet communications

■

Total harmonic distortion per harmonic from the 2nd through the 27th harmonic

displayed on trip unit and communicated via PowerNet communications

■

System power factor. Displayed on trip unit and communicated via PowerNet communications ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-21

Switchgear

Replacement Digitrip RMS Trip Units for Power Circuit Breakers

Replacement

Capabilities

Digitrip RMS Trip Units for

Power Circuit Breakers

Digitrip RMS Trip

Unit Replacement

When a Digitrip RMS trip unit

requires replacement, it can

be replaced directly using the

enclosed charts. Observe the

following restrictions:

The group function (G)

cannot be added in the field

just by changing the trip unit.

Trip Functions

All Digitrip RMS retrofit kit

types are available with the

necessary combinations of

long, short, instantaneous

and ground fault (LSIG)

modes of protection as

depicted and deemed

necessary by industry

standards.

The combinations of modes

of protection are:

●Ll

●LSI

●LS

●LIG

●LSG

●LSIG

Rating Plug Replacement

When changing or replacing

rating plugs, use the

charts provided on Pages

V12-T17-25–V12-T17-27

for DS, SPB and all other

retrofitted breakers.

Digitrip Units—Standard, Horizontal and Vertical Configurations

Standard Retrofit RMS Replacement Trip Units for DS and SPB Breakers

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 12

Notes

1At the time of this publication, the standard trip units for low voltage Digitrip retrofit kits are the RMS 510/610/810/910. From 1989 to 1996, the

standard trip units were the RMS 500/600/700/800. These trip units are no longer in production. Replacement orders for the 500/600/700/

800 trip units will be filled by the equivalent 510/610/810/910 trip units. Remember, when replacing a 500/600/700/800 unit with a 510/610/

810/910, the rating plug must also be replaced.

2Rating plugs for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will still be available. These rating plugs are not interchangeable with the 510/610/810/

910 trip units. Likewise, rating plugs for the 510/610/810/910 are not interchangeable with the 500/600/700/800 trip units.

3There is no direct replacement for Digitrip RMS 700. Use Digitrip RMS 810 or 910.

Digitrip

Model

Protective

Functions

Catalog

Number

Style

Number

Digitrip

Model

Protective

Functions

Catalog

Number

Style

Number

Past Technology Present Technology

RMS 500 Ll T51BLI 1230C97G01 RMS 510 Ll S51LI 7829C05G01

RMS 500 LSI T52BLSI 1230C97G02 RMS 510 LSI S52LSI 7829C05G02

RMS 500 LS T53BLS 1230C97G03 RMS 510 LS S53LS 7829C05G03

RMS 500 LIG T54BLIG 1230C97G04 RMS 510 LIG S54LIG 7829C05G04

RMS 500 LSG T55BLSG 1230C97G05 RMS 510 LSG S55LSG 7829C05G05

RMS 500 LSIG T56BLSIG 1230C97G06 RMS 510 LSIG S56LSIG 7829C05G06

RMS 600 Ll T61BLI 1230C97G07 RMS 610 Ll S61LI 7829C10G01

RMS 600 LSI T62BLSI 1230C97G08 RMS 610 LSI S62LSI 7829C10G02

RMS 600 LS T63BLS 1230C97G09 RMS 610 LS S63LS 7829C10G03

RMS 600 LIG T64BLIG 1230C97G10 RMS 610 LIG S64LIG 7829C10G04

RMS 600 LSG T65BLSG 1230C97G11 RMS 610 LSG S65LSG 7829C10G05

RMS 600 LSIG T66BLSIG 1230C97G12 RMS 610 LSIG S66LSIG 7829C10G06

RMS 700 3Ll T71BLI 1230C97G19 RMS 810 Ll S81LI 7829C08G01

RMS 700 3LSI T72BLSI 1230C97G20 RMS 810 LSI S82LSI 7829C08G02

RMS 700 3LS T73BLS 1230C97G21 RMS 810 LS S83LS 7829C08G03

RMS 700 3LIG T74BLIG 1230C97G22 RMS 810 LIG S84LIG 7829C08G04

RMS 700 3LSG T75BLSG 1230C97G23 RMS 810 LSG S85LSG 7829C08G05

RMS 700 3LSIG T76BLSIG 1230C97G24 RMS 810 LSIG S86LSIG 7829C08G06

RMS 800 Ll T81BLI 1230C97G13 RMS 910 Ll S91LI 7829C09G01

RMS 800 LSI T82BLSI 1230C97G14 RMS 910 LSI S92LSI 7829C09G02

RMS 800 LS T83BLS 1230C97G15 RMS 910 LS S93LS 7829C09G03

RMS 800 LIG T84BLIG 1230C97G16 RMS 910 LIG S94LIG 7829C09G0

RMS 800 LSG T85BLSG 1230C97G17 RMS 910 LSG S95LSG 7829C09G05

RMS 800 LSIG T86BLSIG 1230C97G18 RMS 910 LSIG S96LSIG 7829C09G06

V12-T17-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Replacement Digitrip RMS Trip Units for Power Circuit Breakers

Horizontal Retrofit RMS/R Replacement Trip Units for all Other Breakers

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 12

Notes

1At the time of this publication, the standard trip units for low voltage Digitrip retrofit kits are the RMS 510/610/810/910. From 1989 to 1996, the standard trip units were the RMS 500/600/700/800.

These trip units are no longer in production. Replacement orders for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will be filled by the equivalent 510/610/810/910 trip units. Remember, when replacing a

500/600/700/800 unit with a 510/610/810/910, the rating plug must also be replaced.

2Rating plugs for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will still be available. These rating plugs are not interchangeable with the 510/610/810/910 trip units. Likewise, rating plugs for the

510/610/810/910 are not interchangeable with the 500/600/700/800 trip units.

3There is no direct replacement for Digitrip RMS 700. Use Digitrip RMS 810 or 910.

Digitrip

Model

Protective

Functions

Catalog

Number

Style

Number

Digitrip

Model

Protective

Functions

Catalog

Number

Style

Number

Past Technology Present Technology

RMS/R 500 Horizontal Ll RH51BLI 1232C84G01 RMS 510 Ll SRH51LI 7801C36G01

RMS/R 500 Horizontal LSI RH52BLSI 1232C84G02 RMS 510 LSI SRH52LSI 7801C36G02

RMS/R 500 Horizontal LS RH53BLS 1232C84G03 RMS 510 LS SRH53LS 7801C36G03

RMS/R 500 Horizontal LIG RH54BLIG 1232C84G04 RMS 510 LIG SRH54LIG 7801C36G04

RMS/R 500 Horizontal LSG RH55BLSG 1232C84G05 RMS 510 LSG SRH55LSG 7801C36G05

RMS/R 500 Horizontal LSIG RH56BLSIG 1232C84G06 RMS 510 LSIG SRH56LSIG 7801C36G06

RMS/R 600 Horizontal Ll RH61BLI 1232C84G07 RMS 610 Ll SRH61LI 7801C46G01

RMS/R 600 Horizontal LSI RH62BLSI 1232C84G08 RMS 610 LSI SRH62LSI 7801C46G02

RMS/R 600 Horizontal LS RH63BLS 1232C84G09 RMS 610 LS SRH63LS 7801C46G03

RMS/R 600 Horizontal LIG RH64BLIG 1232C84G10 RMS 610 LIG SRH64LIG 7801C46G04

RMS/R 600 Horizontal LSG RH65BLSG 1232C84G11 RMS 610 LSG SRH65LSG 7801C46G05

RMS/R 600 Horizontal LSIG RH66BLSIG 1232C84G12 RMS 610 LSIG SRH66LSIG 7801C46G06

RMS/R 700 Horizontal 3Ll RH71BLI 1232C84G19 RMS 810 Ll SRH81LI 7801C48G01

RMS/R 700 Horizontal 3LSI RH72BLSI 1232C84G20 RMS 810 LSI SRH82LSI 7801C48G02

RMS/R 700 Horizontal 3LS RH73BLS 1232C84G21 RMS 810 LS SRH83LS 7801C48G03

RMS/R 700 Horizontal 3LIG RH74BLIG 1232C84G22 RMS 810 LIG SRH84LIG 7801C48G04

RMS/R 700 Horizontal 3LSG RH75BLSG 1232C84G23 RMS 810 LSG SRH85LSG 7801C48G05

RMS/R 700 Horizontal 3LSIG RH76BLSIG 1232C84G24 RMS 810 LSIG SRH86LSIG 7801C48G06

RMS/R 800 Horizontal LI RH81BLI 1232C84G13 RMS 910 Ll SRH91LI 7801C49G01

RMS/R 800 Horizontal LSI RH82BLSI 1232C84G14 RMS 910 LSI SRH92LSI 7801C49G02

RMS/R 800 Horizontal LS RH83BLS 1232C84G15 RMS 910 LS SRH93LS 7801C49G03

RMS/R 800 Horizontal LIG RH84BLIG 1232C84G16 RMS 910 LIG SRH94LIG 7801C49G04

RMS/R 800 Horizontal LSG RH85BLSG 1232C84G17 RMS 910 LSG SRH95LSG 7801C49G05

RMS/R 800 Horizontal LSIG RH86BLSIG 1232C84G18 RMS 910 LSIG SRH96LSIG 7801C49G06

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-23

Switchgear

Replacement Digitrip RMS Trip Units for Power Circuit Breakers

Vertical Retrofit RMS/R Replacement Trip Units for all Other Breakers

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 12

Notes

1At the time of this publication, the standard trip units for low voltage Digitrip retrofit kits are the RMS 510/610/810/910. From 1989 to 1996, the standard trip units were the RMS 500/600/700/800.

These trip units are no longer in production. Replacement orders for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will be filled by the equivalent 510/610/810/910 trip units. Remember, when replacing a

500/600/700/800 unit with a 510/610/810/910, the rating plug must also be replaced.

2Rating plugs for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will still be available. These rating plugs are not interchangeable with the 510/610/810/910 trip units. Likewise, rating plugs for the

510/610/810/910 are not interchangeable with the 500/600/700/800 trip units.

3There is no direct replacement for Digitrip RMS 700. Use Digitrip RMS 810 or 910.

Digitrip

Model

Protective

Functions

Catalog

Number

Style

Number

Digitrip

Model

Protective

Functions

Catalog

Number

Style

Number

Past Technology Present Technology

RMS/R 500 Vertical Ll RV51BLI 1232C97G01 RMS 510 Ll SRV51Ll 7801C37G01

RMS/R 500 Vertical LSI RV52BLSI 1232C97G02 RMS 510 LSI SRV52LSI 7801C37G02

RMS/R 500 Vertical LS RV53BLS 1232C97G03 RMS 510 LS SRV53LS 7801C37G03

RMS/R 500 Vertical LIG RV54BLIG 1232C97G04 RMS 510 LIG SRV54LIG 7801C37G04

RMS/R 500 Vertical LSG RV55BLSG 1232C97G05 RMS 510 LSG SRV55LSG 7801C37G05

RMS/R 500 Vertical LSIG RV56BLSIG 1232C97G06 RMS 510 LSIG SRV56LSIG 7801C37G06

RMS/R 600 Vertical Ll RV61BLI 1232C97G07 RMS 610 Ll SRV61Ll 7801C41G01

RMS/R 600 Vertical LSI RV62BLSI 1232C97G08 RMS 610 LSI SRV62LSI 7801C41G02

RMS/R 600 Vertical LS RV63BLS 1232C97G09 RMS 610 LS SRV63LS 7801C41G03

RMS/R 600 Vertical LIG RV64BLIG 1232C97G10 RMS 610 LIG SRV64LIG 7801C41G04

RMS/R 600 Vertical LSG RV65BLSG 1232C97G11 RMS 610 LSG SRV65LSG 7801C41G05

RMS/R 600 Vertical LSIG RV66BLSIG 1232C97G12 RMS 610 LSIG SRV66LSIG 7801C41G06

RMS/R 700 Vertical 3Ll RV71BLI 1232C97G19 RMS 810 Ll SRV81Ll 7801C42G01

RMS/R 700 Vertical 3LSI RV72BLSI 1232C97G20 RMS 810 LSI SRV82LSI 7801C42G02

RMS/R 700 Vertical 3LS RV73BLS 1232C97G21 RMS 810 LS SRV83LS 7801C42G03

RMS/R 700 Vertical 3LIG RV74BLIG 1232C97G22 RMS 810 LIG SRV84LIG 7801C42G04

RMS/R 700 Vertical 3LSG RV75BLSG 1232C97G23 RMS 810 LSG SRV85LSG 7801C42G05

RMS/R 700 Vertical 3LSIG RV76BLSIG 1232C97G24 RMS 810 LSIG SRV86LSIG 7801C42G06

RMS/R 800 Vertical Ll RV81BLI 1232C97G13 RMS 910 Ll SRV91Ll 7801C43G01

RMS/R 800 Vertical LSI RV82BLSI 1232C97G14 RMS 910 LSI SRV92LSI 7801C43G02

RMS/R 800 Vertical LS RV83BLS 1232C97G15 RMS 910 LS SRV93LS 7801C43G03

RMS/R 800 Vertical LIG RV84BLIG 1232C97G16 RMS 910 LIG SRV94LIG 7801C43G04

RMS/R 800 Vertical LSG RV85BLSG 1232C97G17 RMS 910 LSG SRV95LSG 7801C43G05

RMS/R 800 Vertical LSIG RV86BLSIG 1232C97G18 RMS 910 LSIG SRV96LSIG 7801C43G06

V12-T17-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Replacement Digitrip RMS Rating Plugs

Digitrip RMS

Rating Plugs

Product Description

SPB Rating Plug and Details

Rating plugs for Digitrip RMS

trip units determine the

continuous current rating

of the circuit breaker. All

protection function settings

on the face of the trip unit

are expressed in per unit

multiples of the rating plug

ampere rating (In).

The rating plug is interlocked

with the tripping mechanism

to automatically “open” the

breaker when the plug is

removed. The breaker will

remain “trip free” with the

plug removed.

SPB rating plugs must be

selected to match the desired

continuous current rating of

the breaker, as well as the

frame rating and the system

frequency, i.e., 50 or 60 Hz.

DS and retrofit rating plugs

must be selected to match

the desired continuous

current rating of the breaker,

the sensor tap setting and

the system frequency, i.e.,

50 or 60 Hz.

Rating plugs are equipped

with a backup battery to

maintain the mode of trip

operation following a circuit

breaker tripping when

external power is not

available. The battery is

a long-life lithium type,

which is accessible from the

front of the trip unit, without

removing the rating plug.

Replacement types and

instructions are provided in

Application Data 33-855.

Rating Plug for All Other

Retrofitted Breakers

DS Rating Plug

Following a trip operation

and with no supplementary

control power available,

the battery will maintain

the mode of trip LED for

approximately 60 hours.

Note: At the time of this

publication, the standard trip units

for low voltage Digitrip retrofit kits

are the RMS 510/610/810/910.

From 1989 to 1996, the standard

trip units were the RMS 500/

600/700/800. These trip units

are no longer in production.

Replacement orders for the

500/600/700/800 trip units will be

filled by the equivalent 510/610/

810/910 trip units. Remember,

when replacing a 500/600/700/

800 unit with a 510/610/810/910,

the rating plug must also

be replaced.

Note: Rating plugs for the 500/

600/700/800 trip units will still

be available.These rating plugs

are not interchangeable with

the 510/610/810/910 trip units.

Likewise, rating plugs for

the 510/610/810/910 are not

interchangeable with the

500/600/700/800 trip units.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T17-25

Switchgear

Replacement Digitrip RMS Rating Plugs for DS Breakers

Replacement Capabilities

Rating Plugs for DS Breakers 1234

Notes

1Choose the rating plug to match the sensor tap selected and the continuous current rating.

2When ordering as part of a retrofit kit, refer to Pages V12-T17-28 through V12-T17-51.

3At the time of this publication, the standard trip units for low voltage Digitrip retrofit kits are the RMS 510/610/810/910. From 1989 to 1996, the standard trip units were the RMS 500/600/700/800.

These trip units are no longer in production. Replacement orders for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will be filled by the equivalent 510/610/810/910 trip units. Remember, when replacing a

500/600/700/800 unit with a 510/610/810/910, the rating plug must also be replaced.

4Rating plugs for the 500/600/700/800 trip units will still be available. These rating plugs are not interchangeable with the 510/610/810/910 trip units. Likewise, rating plugs for the

510/610/810/910 are not interchangeable with the 500/600/700/800 trip units.

550 Hz rating plugs are available. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for details.

6Rating plugs may be ordered separately by above style number or as part of a complete retrofit kit.

Past Technology (500/600/700/800) Present Technology (510/610/810/910)

Sensor

Tap Connection

Rating

Plug Rating

60 Hz

Catalog Number 5

60 Hz

Style Number 5

Sensor

Tap Connection

Rating

Plug Rating

50/60 Hz

Catalog Number 6

50/60 Hz

Style Number 6

200 100 PD6D02A010 2613D10G01 200 100 RP6D02A010 3D86734G01

200 200 PD6D02A020 2613D10G02 200 200 RP6D02A020 3D86734G02

300 200 PD6D03A020 2613D10G03 300 200 RP6D03A020 3D86734G03

300 250 PD6D03A025 2613D10G04 300 250 RP6D03A025 3D86734G04

300 300 PD6D03A030 2613D10G05 300 300 RP6D03A030 3D86734G05

400 200 PD6D04A020 2613D10G06 400 200 RP6D04A020 3D86734G06

400 250 PD6D04A025 2613D10G07 400 250 RP6D04A025 3D86734G07

400 300 PD6D04A030 2613D10G08 400 300 RP6D04A030 3D86734G08

400 400 PD6D04A040 2613D10G09 400 400 RP6D04A040 3D86734G09

600 300 PD6D06A030 2613D10G10 600 400 RP6D06A030 3D86734G10

600 400 PD6D06A040 2613D10G11 600 400 RP6D06A040 3D86734G11

600 600 PD6D06A060 2613D10G12 600 600 RP6D06A060 3D86734G12

800 400 PD6D08A040 2613D10G13 800 400 RP6D08A040 3D86734G13

800 600 PD6D08A060 2613D10G14 800 600 RP6D08A060 3D86734G14

800 800 PD6D08A080 2613D10G15 800 800 RP6D08A080 3D86734G15

1200 600 PD6D12A060 2613D10G16 1200 600 RP6D12A060 3D86734G16

1200 800 PD6D12A080 2613D10G17 1200 800 RP6D12A080 3D86734G17

1200 1000 PD6D12A100 2613D10G18 1200 1000 RP6D12A100 3D86734G18

1200 1200 PD6D12A120 2613D10G19 1200 1200 RP6D12A120 3D86734G19

1600 800 PD6D16A080 2613D10G20 1600 800 RP6D16A080 3D86734G20

1600 1000 PD6D16A100 2613D10G21 1600 1000 RP6D16A100 3D86734G21

1600 1200 PD6D16A120 2613D10G22 1600 1200 RP6D16A120 3D86734G22

1600 1600 PD6D16A160 2613D10G23 1600 1600 RP6D16A160 3D86734G23

2000 1000 PD6D20A100 2613D10G24 2000 1000 RP6D20A100 3D86734G24

2000 1200 PD6D20A120 2613D10G25 2000 1200 RP6D20A120 3D86734G25

2000 1600 PD6D20A160 2613D10G26 2000 1600 RP6D20A160 3D86734G26

2000 2000 PD6D20A200 2613D10G27 2000 2000 RP6D20A200 3D86734G27

2400 1600 PD6D24A160 2613D10G28 2400 1600 RP6D24A160 3D86734G28

2400 2000 PD6D24A200 2613D10G29 2400 2000 RP6D24A200 3D86734G29

2400 2400 PD6D24A240 2613D10G30 2400 2400 RP6D24A240 3D86734G30

3200 1600 PD6D32A160 2613D10G31 3200 1600 RP6D32A160 3D86734G31

3200 2000 PD6D32A200 2613D10G32 3200 2000 RP6D32A200 3D86734G32

3200 2400 PD6D32A240 2613D10G33 3200 2400 RP6D32A240 3D86734G33

3200 3200 PD6D32A320 2613D10G34 3200 3200 RP6D32A320 3D86734G34

4000 2000 PD6D40A200 2613D10G35 4000 2000 RP6D40A200 3D86734G35

4000 2400 PD6D40A240 2613D10G36 4000 2400 RP6D40A240 3D86734G36

4000 3200 PD6D40A320 2613D10G37 4000 3200 RP6D40A320 3D86734G37

4000 4000 PD6D40A400 2613D10G38 4000 4000 RP6D40A400 3D86734G38

V12-T17-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Switchgear

Replacement Digitrip RMS Rating Plugs for DS Breakers

Rating Plugs for SPB Breakers 1234